S.S Standard Technical Specification PDF

STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2006
PREFACE, FOREWORD
&
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
2006
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2006
Series 1000 GENERAL

2006
Series 2000 SITE CLEARANCE

2006
Series 3000 DRAINAGE

2006
Series 4000 EARTHWORKS

2006
Series 5000
SUBBASE, ROAD BASE AND GRAVEL WEARING

COURSE
2006
Series 6000
BITUMINOUS SURFACINGS AND ROAD BASES

2006
Series 7000 RIGID PAVEMENTS

2006
Series 8000 STRUCTURES

2006
Series 9000 ANCILLARY WORKS

2006
Series 10000
TESTING MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

Specification for Highway Works- 2006 Introduction
FOREWORD
This is an interim version of the Standard Technical Specifications for Road and
Bridgeworks prepared for the use and technical guidance of design personnel of the
Government of Southern Sudan, Ministry of Transport and Roads, State and County
Ministries and consultants. It should be used as a guide by all agencies undertaking
relevant works in the road sector.
The Ministry of Roads and Transport has adopted this Manual as an interim guide until the
Government of Southern Sudan develops its own specifications.
The road network in Southern Sudan will become a significant national asset that requires
adherence to appropriate standards for design, construction and maintenance immediately
in order to allow its development in a consistent manner.
This Specification has particular reference to the prevailing conditions in the region and
reflects experience gained through activities within the road sector during the last 50
years.
The specification set out in this Document shall be adhered to unless otherwise directed by
the Ministry of Roads and Transport. Nevertheless sound engineering practice shall be
observed in the use of the specification, and under no circumstances shall the Specification
waive professional judgment in applied engineering. For simplification in reference this
Manual may be cited as “MRT Standard Specification for Highway Works- 2006.”
It is intended that this Specification will provide all users with both a standard reference
and a ready source of good practice for the construction of roads, and will assist in a cost
effective operation, and environmentally sustainable development of the road network.
The practices contained in the Specification should be quickly adopted into engineering
operations, thereby making a sustainable contribution to the improved infrastructure of our
country.
It is understood that this Specification require periodic updating, correction and change.
Any comments and suggestions on aspects of the specifications or individual feedback and
comment on its use during implementation will be welcomed.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This Standard Technical Specification (2006) for Roads and Bridge Works for Ministry of
Roads and Transport, Government of Southern Sudan (GOSS) is based on the standard
technical specification of the Ethiopian Road Authority (ERA) developed in 2002 under a
credit financing of the International Development Agency (IDA).
Ministry of Roads and Transport

Government of Southern Sudan Page i
Introduction Specification for Highway Works - 2006
PREFACE
This specification was developed based on a review of the design standards of several
countries, among which are AASHTO, ITE, FHA and TRB (USA), TRRL (UK), EBCS
(Ethiopia), Swedish standards, Australian Standards and EUROCODE 1,2,3 (Europe).
In the selection of the appropriate Standard Technical Specification for Southern Sudan,
material from these and other sources have been gleaned and evaluated to determine the
set of standards most appropriate for Southern Sudan and the prevailing conditions.
This specification reflects current international practice appropriately modified to take

account of local experience and conditions.
In addition to the Standard Technical Specification several other manuals have been
adopted. These are the following:
1. Geometric Design Manual

2. Site Investigation Manual
3. Pavement Design Manual Volume I- (Flexible & Gravel)
4. Pavement Design Manual Volume II- (Rigid Pavements)
5. Overlay/Rehabilitation Manual
6. Drainage Design Manual
7. Bridge Design Manual
8. Standard Environmental Procedures Manual
9. Standard Detail Drawings
The layout of this Specification has been arranged with the following hierarchy:
• Series (Example : 1000)
• Division (Example : 1200)
• Clause (Example : 1204)
• Sub-Clause (Example 1204(a))
All tables are described by number beginning with one (1) at the first of each division.
Figures are described in a similar manner.
Page ii Ministry of Roads and Transport

Government of Southern Sudan
Specification for Highway Works- 2006 Introduction
Revisions and corrections
This Specification will be updated and revised from time to time, as deemed appropriate.
Significant changes to criteria, procedures or any other relevant issues related to new
policies or revised laws or stipulations by the relevant Government Ministry or Agency,
should be amended and incorporated into the specification as soon as possible after their
date of effectiveness.
Other minor changes, not affecting the whole nature of this specification, may be
accumulated and made periodically. When a change is approved, new page(s) instituting
the revisions, together with the revision date, will be issued for insertion in to the relevant
divisions.
All revisions to the Standard Technical Specification will be made strictly in accordance
with the following procedures:
Any proposed change will be submitted by or through the Director of Roads and Bridges,
Ministry of Roads and Transport.
The Directorate of Roads and Bridges will re-issue all effected pages of the manual.
Ministry of Roads and Transport

Government of Southern Sudan Page iii
Introduction Specification for Highway Works - 2006
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Foreword ....................................................................................................................................i
Acknowledgements ... ...............................................................................................................ii
Preface... ...................................................................................................................................iii
Revisions, omissions and corrections.......................................................................................iv
Detailed tables of content and a list of tables and figures are given at the beginning of each
of the following series:
Series 1000 GENERAL

Series 2000 SITE CLEARANCE
Series 3000 DRAINAGE
Series 4000 EARTHWORKS
Series 5000 SUBBASE, ROAD BASE AND GRAVEL WEARING
COURSE
Series 6000 BITUMINOUS SURFACINGS AND ROAD BASES
Series 7000 RIGID PAVEMENTS
Series 8000 STRUCTURES
Series 9000 ANCILLARY WORKS
Series 10000 TESTING MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
Page iv Ministry of Roads and Transport

Government of Southern Sudan
Specification for Highway Works - 2006
SERIES 1000: GENERAL
TABLE OF CONTENT
LIST OF TABLES AND FIGURES ..................................................................................................5
DIVISION 1100 : TERMS AND DEFINITIONS ..............................................................................6

1101 Description .......................................................................................................................6
1102 Terms And Definitions .....................................................................................................6
DIVISION 1200: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROVISIONS ...............................................20

1201 Scope ..............................................................................................................................20
1202 Workmanship And Quality Control ...............................................................................20
1203 Approval of Completed Works ......................................................................................20
1204 Setting Out of Work and Protection of Survey Monuments ..........................................20
1205 Standards ........................................................................................................................21
1206 Protection of The Works and Requirements to Be Met Before Construction of New
Work on Top of Completed Work is Commenced.........................................................22
1207 Existing Public Utilities..................................................................................................23
1208 Remedial Work...............................................................................................................24
(a) Earthworks.............................................................................................................24
(b) Stabilizing..............................................................................................................24
(c) Local defects in pavement layers...........................................................................24
1209 Water ..............................................................................................................................25
1210 Use of Explosives and Demolition .................................................................................25
1211 Photographic Records.....................................................................................................25
1212 Measurement: General....................................................................................................26
(a) Units of measurements ..........................................................................................26
(b) Bill of Quantities ...................................................................................................26
(c) Measurement of completed work ..........................................................................26
1213 Payment ..........................................................................................................................27
(a) Contract Rates .......................................................................................................27
(b) Rates to be inclusive ..............................................................................................27
(c) Meanings of certain phrases in payment clauses...................................................27
(d) Pay items ...............................................................................................................28
(e) Provisional Sums and Prime Cost Items ...............................................................28
1214 Variation from Specified Nominal Rates of Application or Nominal Mix Proportions 29
1215 Payments and Tolerances ...............................................................................................29
DIVISION 1300: CONTRACTOR'S ESTABLISHMENT ON SITE .................................................31

1301 Scope ..............................................................................................................................31
1302 General Requirements ....................................................................................................31
(a) Camps, equipment and testing facilities................................................................31
(b) Legal relations and responsibility to the public.....................................................31
Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS) Page 1000-1

Specification for Highway Works -2006
(c) Electricity Supply.................................................................................................. 31

(d) Handing over of the Site ....................................................................................... 31
1303 Measurement And Payment ........................................................................................... 32
Item 13.01 The contractor's general obligations: .......................................................... 32
DIVISION 1400: ACCOMMODATION, SERVICES, AND ATTENDANCE FOR THE ENGINEER'S

STAFF 35
1401 Scope.............................................................................................................................. 35
1402 General ........................................................................................................................... 35
1403 Office and Laboratory Accommodation ........................................................................ 36
(a) General .................................................................................................................. 36
(b) Air Conditioning Units and Heaters ..................................................................... 37
(c) Offices................................................................................................................... 37
(d) Areas around Offices ............................................................................................ 37
(e) Radio Communication System for the Engineer .................................................. 38
(f) Laboratories .......................................................................................................... 38
1404 Housing Accommodation For The Engineer ................................................................. 38
(a) General .................................................................................................................. 38
(b) Description ............................................................................................................ 39
(c) Maintenance .......................................................................................................... 40
1405 Services .......................................................................................................................... 40
(a) Sanitary arrangements........................................................................................... 40
(b) Water, electricity and gas...................................................................................... 40
1406 Vehicles.......................................................................................................................... 41
1407 Attendance ..................................................................................................................... 41
1408 Temporary Facilities Of The Engineer .......................................................................... 42
1409 Tables ............................................................................................................................. 43
14010 Measurement And Payment .................................................................................... 59
Item 14.01 Office Building ........................................................................................... 59
Item 14.02 Laboratory Building.................................................................................... 59
Item 14.03 Items measured and paid for by the lump sum ........................................... 59
Item 14.04 Services ....................................................................................................... 60
Item 14.05 Vehicles for Engineer and his staff ............................................................. 60
Item 14.06 Servicing, maintenance, and repair of vehicles for the Engineer................ 60
Item 14.07 Attendance upon the Engineer and his staff................................................ 60
Item 14.08 Additional office and laboratory equipment ordered by the Engineer........ 60
Item 14.09 Building, House Type, Complete, as specified, including fixtures............. 61
Item 14.10 Building, Apartment Type .......................................................................... 61
Item 14.11 Motel style accommodation ........................................................................ 61
Item 14.12 Items measured by number ......................................................................... 61
Item 14.13 Services for residential accommodation(s) ................................................. 61
Item 14.14 Temporary facilities of the Engineer .......................................................... 62
DIVISION 1500: TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT .............................................................................. 63

1501 Scope.............................................................................................................................. 63
1502 General Requirements.................................................................................................... 63
(a) General .................................................................................................................. 63
(b) Minimum vertical clearance.................................................................................. 63
(c) Property and survey monuments........................................................................... 63
(d) Access to properties .............................................................................................. 63
Page1000-2 Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS)

(e) Public services .......................................................................................................64

(f) Temporary works...................................................................................................64
1503 Traffic Barriers, Signing And Lighting ..........................................................................64
(a) Traffic Barriers: .....................................................................................................64
(b) Traffic Signing: .....................................................................................................64
(c) Traffic Lights:........................................................................................................64
1504 Construction Of Temporary Traffic Diversions .............................................................64
(a) General ..................................................................................................................64
(b) Maximum Length ..................................................................................................64
(c) Minimum Width ....................................................................................................64
1505 Accommodation of Traffic where the Road is Constructed in Half Widths ..................65
1506 Temporary Drainage Works ...........................................................................................65
1507 Earthworks For Traffic Diversions.................................................................................65
1508 Gravelling of Traffic Diversions or of Existing Roads Used as Traffic Diversions ......66
1509 Bitumen-Surfaced Temporary Diversions......................................................................66
1510 Existing Roads Used as Temporary Diversions .............................................................66
1511 Bitumen Surfaced Temporary Diversions ......................................................................66
1512 Maintenance of Gravel Traffic Diversions.....................................................................66
1513 Maintenance of Existing Roads......................................................................................66
1514 The Contractor's Use of Traffic Diversions....................................................................67
1515 Removal of Traffic Diversions.......................................................................................67
1516 Measurement And Payment ...........................................................................................67
Item 15.01 Accommodating traffic and maintaining temporary diversions ..................67
Item 15.02 Earthworks for temporary deviations ..........................................................68
Item 15.03 Temporary traffic - control facilities ...........................................................68
Item 15.04 Relocation of traffic-control facilities .........................................................70
Item 15.05 Gravelling and repair of temporary diversions............................................70
Item 15.06 Watering of temporary diversions ...............................................................70
Item 15.07 Blading by road grader ................................................................................71
Item 15.08 Repairs, alterations and/or additions to existing roads used as temporary
diversions provisional sum ....................................................................................71
Item 15.09 Accommodation of traffic where the road is constructed in half-widths ....71
Item 15.10 Traffic signals ..............................................................................................71
Item 15.11 Temporary culverts......................................................................................71
Item 15.12 In - situ preparation and compaction of existing gravel shoulders..............72
DIVISION 1600: ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND MITIGATION MEASURES ..................74

1601 Scope ..............................................................................................................................74
1602 Landscape Preservation ..................................................................................................74
(a) General ..................................................................................................................74
(b) Temporary Traffic Diversions and Haul Roads ....................................................74
(c) Contractor’s Facilities ...........................................................................................74
(d) Blasting Precautions ..............................................................................................75
(e) Quarries, Borrow Pits, Plant and Storage Areas etc. .............................................75
1603 Temporary Soil Erosion Control ....................................................................................75
(a) General ..................................................................................................................75
(b) Construction ..........................................................................................................75
1604 Preservation of Trees and Shrubbery..............................................................................76
(a) Preservation ...........................................................................................................76
(b) Repair or Treatment of Damage ............................................................................76
(c) Replacement ..........................................................................................................76
1605 Prevention of Water Pollution........................................................................................ 77

(a) General .................................................................................................................. 77
(b) Compliance with Laws and Regulations............................................................... 77
1606 Abatement of Air, Dust, Noise and Light Pollution ...................................................... 78
(a) Abatement of Air Pollution................................................................................... 78
(b) Dust Abatement..................................................................................................... 78
(c) Noise Abatement................................................................................................... 78
(d) Light Abatement ................................................................................................... 79
1607 Preservation of Historical, Archaeological and Cultural Remains ................................ 79
1608 Pesticides........................................................................................................................ 79
1609 Cleanup And Disposal Of Waste Materials ................................................................... 79
(a) Cleanup ................................................................................................................. 79
(b) Disposal of Waste Material................................................................................... 80
(c) Disposal of Material by Burying........................................................................... 80
(d) Disposal of Material by Burning........................................................................... 80
(e) Disposal of Material by Removal ......................................................................... 81
DIVISION 1700: OVERHAUL ................................................................................................... 82

1701 Scope.............................................................................................................................. 82
1702 Definitions...................................................................................................................... 82
Item 17.01 Overhaul on material hauled in excess of a free - haul distance of 0.5 km 83
Item 17.02 Overhaul on material hauled in excess of 1.0 km....................................... 83
1704 Notes .............................................................................................................................. 83

LIST OF TABLES AND FIGURES
Figure 1 Terms and Definitions for Road Cross Section Elements.........................................18

Figure 2 Terms and Definitions for Flexible Pavement Structure..........................................18
Figure 3 Terms and Definitions for Rigid Pavement Structure..............................................19
Table 1200-1 Standard Sieve Sizes .........................................................................................22
Table 1403/1 Office Furniture.................................................................................................43
Table 1403/2 Office Supplies and equipment .........................................................................44
Table 1403/3 Laboratory Equipment.......................................................................................46
Table 1403/3 (a) List of Laboratory Equipment for Asphalt Concrete roads .........................46
Table 1403/3 (b) List of Laboratory Equipment for Asphalt surfaced roads ..........................50
Table 1403/3 (c) List of laboratory equipment for gravel surfaced roads...............................52
Table 1403/3 (d) List of Laboratory Equipment for bridge structures ....................................55
Table 1403/4 Laboratory Fittings and Furniture .....................................................................57
Table 1403/5 Floor area for Engineer’s Office ......................................................................58
Table 1403/6 Floor area for Laboratory ..................................................................................58
Table 1404/1 Floor area for Housing Accommodation to the Engineer/Supervisor...............58
Table 1404/2 Equipment for the Engineer’s housing..............................................................59

DIVISION 1100: TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
1101 DESCRIPTION
In this Specifications the following terms, words or expressions shall have the meanings
hereby assigned to them. For clarify and ease of understanding, certain cross-sectional and
pavement structure elements are illustrated in figures 1, 2 and 3.
1102 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

Aggregate
Hard mineral elements of construction material mixtures, for example: sand, gravel (crushed
or uncrushed) or crushed rock.
Anchorage
Anchorage is the device comprising all the components and materials required for retaining
the force in a tensioned tendon and to transmit this force to the concrete of the structure.
Anchorage reinforcement
Anchorage reinforcement is the spiral and other reinforcement which forms part of the
anchorage and is required for strengthening the anchorage and/or assisting in transmitting
the tendon force to the concrete.
Angle of Slope
Unless otherwise stated, is given in terms of the ratio of the vertical difference in elevation
between any two points and the horizontal distance between them.
This ratio may also be expressed as a percentage.
Arising Tool
A tool used to round off the edge of a concrete slab.
Asphalt
A mixture to predetermined proportions of aggregate, filler and bituminous binder material
prepared off the road and usually placed by means of a paving machine.
Asphalt Concrete
A mixture to predetermined proportions of aggregate, filler and bituminous binder material
plant mix and usually placed by means of a paving machine.
Asphalt Surfacing
The layer or layers of asphalt concrete constructed on top of the road base.
Back Fill
Excavated material, which is placed and compacted in trenches and around foundations.
Base
A layer of material constructed on top of the sub base, or in the absence thereof, the selected
layer. A base may extend to outside the travelled way.

Batter Board
A board of wood fixed to posts at the top of cuttings or the bottom of embankments which
indicates the slope at which the cutting or embankment is to be constructed.
Binder
A material such as bitumen, cement or lime, which is added to and mixed into aggregate,
granular materials or soils to bind the mixture together.
Bitumen
A class of black or dark-coloured (solid, semisolid, or viscous) cementitious substances,
natural or manufactured, composed principally of high molecular weight hydrocarbons, of
which asphalts, tars, pitches, and asphaltites are typical.
Bond breaker
Bond breaker is the coating or sheath placed on a tendon to prevent it from bonding to the
surrounding concrete.
Bond Stone
A bond stone is an elongated prismoidal stone incorporated with the longest dimension at
right angles to the face of a masonry structure to provide structural integrity.
Borrow Area/Borrow Pit
An area, within designated boundaries, outside the Permanent Works, approved for the
purpose of obtaining fill or pavement materials. A borrow pit is the excavated pit in a borrow
area.
Borrow Material
Borrow material is a general term used to describe material obtained from a borrow pit.
Boulder
A fragment of rock, usually rounded by weathering or abrasion, with a minimum dimension
of 200mm or more.
Bridge
A structure erected over a depression, river, watercourse, railway line, road or other obstacle
for carrying motor, railway, pedestrian or other traffic or services and having a length,
measured between abutment faces along the centreline of the superstructure, of 6 metre or
more.
Bursting reinforcement
Bursting reinforcement is the reinforcing steel required in and adjacent to the anchorage
zones to resist the tensile stresses induced in the concrete by the anchorage(s).
Cable
Cable is the tendon. together with the anchorage, sheathing and all fittings.
California Bearing Ratio (CBR)
The California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of an untreated soil or gravel as determined by means
of Method A8 of TMH1 is the load in Newtons, expressed as a percentage of California
standard values, required to allow a circular piston of 1,935 mm2 to penetrate the surface of a
compacted material at a rate of 1.27 mm per minute to depths of 2.54 , 5.08 and 7.62 mm.

The California standard values for these depths are 13.344, 20.016 and 25.354 kN
respectively.
Capping Layer
A layer of selected fill material placed on the top of the topmost embankment layer or the
bottom of excavation.
Carriageway
That portion of the roadway including the various traffic lanes and auxiliary lanes but
excluding shoulders.
Catchwater Drain or Bank
A longitudinal drain or bank outside the road prism for diverting water that would otherwise
flow into the road prism.
Cemented Material
Material in an existing pavement which cannot be broken up with the tines of a type 1400
caterpillar or similar road grader.
Cemented crushed stone is cemented material constructed with crushed stone.
An existing stabilized pavement layer will not necessarily be classified as cemented
material.
Channel
A natural or artificial water course.
Characteristic strength
Characteristic strength of prestressing steel is the manufacturer's guaranteed tensile strength
below which no more than 5 per cent of the test results in a statistical population shall fall.
Characteristic Strength of Concrete
The characteristic strength of concrete is that strength below which only a pre-selected
proportion of test results (i.e 1%, 2% or 5%) are expected to fall.
Chippings
Chippings are single sized particles of crushed rock, crushed boulders, crushed cobbles or
crushed gravel used for surface dressing.
Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate is material retained on the 4.75mm sieve.
Cobble
A fragment of rock, usually rounded by weathering or abrasion, with a minimum dimension
of 60mm and a maximum dimension of 200mm.
Coefficient of Uniformity
The coefficient of uniformity is the ratio of the sieve size through which 60% by mass of the
material passes to the sieve size through which 10% by mass passes.
Compliance Testing
Testing of the completed works to ascertain compliance of the requirements of the
Specification.

Coupler
Coupler is the device comprising all components required to join up two tendons.
Crushed Particle
A crushed particle is a particle of coarse aggregate, which has at least three fractured faces
when obtained by crushing rock and boulders, and at least two fractured faces when obtained
by crushing gravel.
Crushed Ratio
The crushed ratio is the percentage of crushed particles of coarse aggregate in the total
number of particles of coarse aggregate.
Culvert
A drainage structure which provides an opening under the carriageway or median for the
passage of water.
Curing Compound
A liquid which is applied as a surface coating to (newly placed) concrete and hardens to
form a membrane that inhibits the evaporation of moisture from the concrete.
Cut
Cut shall mean all excavated material from the road prism including side drains.
Cutting
That portion of the road prism from where material is excavated to sub-grade or road bed
level.
Deflector
Deflector is the device used to deflect a tendon alignment within a structural element.
Duct
Duct is the void formed to house the tendon (s) and may be formed by coring, or by using
sheaths or by way of extractable cores.
Earthworks
The excavation of material from cuttings and/or the construction of embankments.
Embankment
That portion of the road prism composed of approved fill material, which lies above the
original ground and is bounded by the side slopes, described in the Contract, extending
downwards and outwards from the outer shoulder breakpoints and on which the pavement is
constructed.
Equipment
All machinery, together with the necessary supplies for upkeep and maintenance, and also all
tools and apparatus necessary for the proper construction and acceptable completion of the
work.
Excess Overburden
Overburden within a borrow area which is not required or is unsuitable for use in
construction.

False work
Support for concrete formwork.
Fill
Material which is used for the construction of embankments.
Filler
Processed or naturally occurring material passing the 75 micron sieve which is principally
used to improve the combined aggregate grading and thus reduce the air voids content of
bituminous mixtures.
Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate is crushed or naturally occurring material passing the 4.75mm sieve.
Footway
An area normally adjacent to the carriageway provided for the use by pedestrians.
Formwork
Temporary boarding or sheeting erected to contain concrete during placing, compacting and
initial hardening.
Furrow Ditch
A longitudinal drain or bank outside the road prism for diverting water that would otherwise
flow onto the road prism.
Gabions
Gabions consist of woven steel mesh boxes or mattresses filled with stone.
Grade line
The grade line is a reference line in the drawings of the longitudinal sections of the road
indicating at regular intervals the elevations according to which the road is to be constructed.
The grade line may refer to the level of the completed road, base or any other layer and may
indicate the elevations either along the carriageway center line or along any designated
position on the road cross-section.
Grading Modulus(GM)
The cumulative percentages by mass of material in a representative sample of aggregate,
gravel or soil retained on the 2.00mm, 0.425mm and 0.075mm sieves, divided by 100.
Gravel
Gravel is naturally occurring, rounded, granular material with a particle size of from 2mm to
60mm. (It does not apply to Gravel Wearing Courses).
Grout Check
A recess formed at concrete construction joints, which may be filled with grout; to mask, and
ensure a straight line to, the joint.
Highway
A general term denoting a public way for purposes of vehicular travel, including the entire
area within the right -of - way.
Inlet and Outlet Drainage Channels
Channels leading into or discharging from culverts, storm-water drains and minor bridges.
Inspector
The authorized representative of the Engineer assigned to make detailed inspections of
materials or contract performance.
Kicker
A concrete plinth at least 70mm high above the concrete floor, forming the start of a concrete
wall or column.
Lane
Part of a travelled way intended for a single stream of traffic in one direction, which has
normally been demarcated as such by road markings.
Leveling Course(s)
One or more layers of asphalt or granular material, of varying thickness, which are applied
to improve the regularity of an existing road surface.
Lot
A sizable portion of work or quantity of material which is assessed as a unit for the purpose
of quality control and selected to represent material or work produced by essentially the
same process and materials.
Masonry
Stonework constructed with interlocking stones more than one stone thick.
Median
The area between the two carriageways of a dual carriageway road.
Median Drain
A longitudinal drain situated in the median of a dual carriageway road.
Milling
Excavating and removing a layer of material exceeding 10 mm in thickness from an existing
pavement by means of an approved milling machine. Milling is normally used only in
asphalt and cemented layers.
Mitre Drain/Mitre Bank
A Mitre Drain is a drain constructed at an angle to the centreline of the road to divert water
from the side drains. Mitre drains will include mitre banks placed across side drains.
Mortar
A mixture of fine aggregate, cement and/or hydrated lime usually in predetermined
proportions, with water, to create a fine grained cementious material suitable for the bedding
of bricks and masonry etc.
Optimum Moisture Content for Compaction
The moisture content of a soil calculated on the basis of dry weight of soil at which the soil
can be compacted to the approximate maximum density under a specified standard method
of compaction.
Overburden
Overburden is unsuitable material which overlies suitable material within a borrow pit or
quarry.

Overlay
An additional pavement layer applied on top of an existing road for strengthening the
pavement and/or for improving the riding quality.
Parking Lane
An auxiliary lane adjoining the travelled way for the purpose of vehicular parking.
Pavement
A multi-layered horizontal structure which is constructed for the purpose of carrying traffic.
Pavement Layers
The layers of different materials, which comprise the pavement structure.
Pavement Planning
Planning of an existing road surface by the removal of a layer of material by means of a
milling machine or other equipment.
Pioneer Layer
An initial layer constructed over a weak roadbed where selected material is used to provide a
stable platform for the construction of subsequent layers.
Prestress
Prestress is the stress induced in concrete by tensioned tendons.
Prestressed concrete
Prestressed concrete is structural concrete in which effective internal stresses are induced by
means of tensioned tendons.
Pre-stressing
Pre-stressing is the inducement of compressive stress into a structural concrete element
either by pre-tensioning or post-tensioning tendons comprising of cables, wires or bars
incorporated into the element.
Pre-tensioned concrete
Pre-tensioned concrete is prestressed concrete where the tendon is tensioned before the
concrete has been cast.
Post-tensioned concrete
Post-tensioned concrete is prestressed concrete where the tendon is tensioned after the
concrete has hardened.
Prime Coat
A bituminous treatment applied to the surface of a newly constructed unbound road base
prior to the construction of a bituminous layer or surface treatment.
Project Specifications
The specifications relating to a specific project, which form part of the contract documents
for such project, and which contain supplementary and/or amending specifications to the
standard specifications.

Pull-in
Pull-in is the elastic shortening of the tendon caused by relative movement between the
anchorage or coupler components on account of seating and gripping action during or
immediately after transfer.
Quality Control
Procedures, and/or testing, carried out prior to, or during, the construction of the Works for
the purpose of ensuring compliance with the requirements of the Specification.
Quarry
An area within designated boundaries, approved for the purpose of obtaining rock.
Recycling
The processing of salvaged material in a plant for re-use.
Rehabilitation
Work undertaken to significantly extend service life and improve the condition or riding
comfort of an existing road.
Reinforcement for Asphalt
A cloth or grid of synthetic material placed underneath or between asphalt layers for
strengthening the asphalt.
Release
Release is the specified elastic shortening of the tendon at the anchorage achieved before or
during transfer.
Retexturing
Treatment of an existing road surface to restore the texture to a specified depth of texture or
skid resistance.
Right-of - Way
The land secured and reserved by the Department for the construction and maintenance of
highway.
Rip-rap
Unbonded stone provided to protect the surfaces of slopes and the beds of watercourses from
erosion and scour.
Road Base
A layer of material of defined thickness and width constructed on top of the sub-base, or in
the absence thereof, the sub-grade. A road base may extend beyond the carriageway.
Road Bed
The natural in-situ material on which the embankment or capping layers are to be
constructed.
Road Bed Material
The material below the road bed extending to such depth as affects the support of the
embankment structure or capping layer.

Road Prism
The cross sectional area bounded by the original ground level and the sides of slopes in
cuttings and embankments excluding the pavement.
Roadside
The portion of the highway outside the roadway.
Road Reserve
The entire area (Carriageways, median, side drains and catch water drains) included by the
boundaries of a road as proclaimed.
Roadway
The roadway comprises the carriageway, shoulders and median.
Rock
A mass of hard mineral material which, when excavated, requires the use of explosives,
sawing or splitting by mechanical means.
Roller Passes
Unless otherwise specified in the specifications or the project specifications, an area will be
taken to have received one roller pass when a roller has passed over such area once.
Additional passes made only as a result of nominal overlapping so as to ensure full coverage
shall not be taken into account.
Scabbing
The use of a hand-held or self supporting percussion machine to remove the surface of
hardened concrete without damaging the structure.
Scarify
Loosen and break-up soil or existing pavement layers by means of a machine fitted with
tines.
Screed
A layer of fine-graded asphalt or slurry placed to fill in slacks in existing seals and to
improve the riding quality of the road.
Seal
The application of one or more layers of bituminous binder with or without layers of crushed
stone, sand or slurry in successive layers on the carriageway, shoulders or on any other
compacted layer on which movement of traffic takes place.
Selected Layer
The lower layer or layers of the pavement, which is constructed, direct onto the fill, or in
some cases the roadbed. It may include roadbed material compacted in- situ.
Services
Cables, pipes or other structures to provide, inter alia, conduits for electricity, telephone and
telegraph connections, water, sewage, etc.
Sheath
Sheath is the tube or casing enclosing the tendon and which temporarily or permanently
allows a relative movement between the tendon and the surrounding concrete

Shoulder
(a) When referring to this as a surface: The area between the outside edge of the travelled
way and the shoulder breakpoint.
(b) When referring to this as a pavement layer: The upper pavement layer lying between the
outside edge of the base and the shoulder breakpoint.
Shoulder Breakpoint
The point on a cross section at which the extended flat planes of the surface of the shoulder
and the outside slope of the fill and pavement intersect.
Side Drain
A longitudinal drain offset from, and parallel to, the carriageway.
Side Fill
Side fill is either surplus or additional fill which is used to extend and flatten the slope of an
embankment and which is often compacted to a lower standard than the former.
Sidewalk
The portion of the roadway primarily constructed for the use of pedestrians.
Skew or Skew Angle
The acute angle formed by the intersection of a line normal to the centerline of the roadway
with a line parallel to the centerline of bents, piers or abutments of a bridge, or in the case of
a culvert, with the centerline of the culvert barrels.
Slope
Unless otherwise stated, slope is given in terms of the ratio of the vertical difference in
elevation between any two points and the horizontal distance between them. The ratio may
also be expressed as a percentage.
Spalls
Chipped or splintered fragments of stone.
Specifications
The general term comprising all the direction, provisions and requirements contained herein,
entitled "ERA Standard Technical Specification for Road Works -2001", together with such
as may be added or adopted as supplemental specifications or as special provisions, and all
documents of any description, including notes on plans, pertaining to the method and
manner of performing the work or to the quantities and qualities of materials to be furnished
under the contract.
Spoil ( Material)
Surplus material originating from construction operations.
Stabilization
The treatment of pavement materials by the addition of lime or Portland cement.
Stone Pitching
A single course of stones placed on edge with spalls rammed into the spaces between the
stones.

Structures
Bridges, culverts, catch basins, drop inlets, manholes, retaining walls, cribbing, end walls,
buildings, sewers, service pipes, underdrains, foundation drains, and other miscellaneous
items, which may be encountered in the work, and which are not classified herein.
Sub-base
The pavement layer of material of specified dimensions on top of the sub-grade and below
the road base.
Subcontractor
Any individual, firm or corporation to whom the Contractor sublets any part of the contract.
Sub-grade
The surface upon which the pavement structure and shoulders are constructed.
Substructure
All of that part of the structure below the bridge seats or bellow the spring lines of concrete
arches. Back walls and wing walls of abutments shall be considered as parts of the
substructure.
Sub-surface Drain (Sub-soil Drains)
A covered drain constructed to intercept and remove sub-soil water. It includes all pipes and
filter material in the drain.
Surface Dressing
The sealing or resealing of the surface of the carriageway or shoulders by means of one or
more successive applications of bituminous binder and chippings.
Tack Coat
A bituminous treatment applied to the surface of an existing bituminous layer prior to the
construction of a new bituminous layer.
Tendon
Tendon is the prestressing steel consisting of the bar, wire or strand individually placed, or of
bars, wires or strands placed in a duct, all of which are tensioned to impart prestress to a
concrete member.
Tensioning
Tensioning is the action of inducing and regulating the force in a tendon by means of
tensioning and measuring equipment.
Texture Treatment
Treatment of an existing road surface to obtain a uniform texture.
Topsoil
A surface layer of soil, which contains organic matter and is capable of supporting the
growth of vegetation.
Traffic
Vehicles, pedestrians and animals travelling along a route.

Traffic Lane
Part of a carriageway intended for a single stream of traffic in one direction, which has
normally been demarcated as such by road markings.
Transfer
Transfer in the case of post-tensioned concrete is the action of transferring the tensioning
force from the tensioning equipment (jack) to the anchorage.
Transfer in the case of pre-tensioned concrete is the action of transferring the force in the
tensioned tendon(s) to the concrete.
Transmission length
Transmission length is the tendon length required to transmit via bond stresses the full force
in the tendon to the concrete.
Travelled Way
That portion of the carriageway, which includes the various, traffic lanes and auxiliary lanes
but exclude the shoulders.
Unbound Material
Naturally occurring or processed material, which is not bound together by the addition of a
binder such as cement, lime or bitumen.
Verge
The area between the outer edge of the road prism and the boundary of the road reserve.
Wheel Track
The path followed by the wheel of a vehicle during normal riding movements. The wheel
tracks cover approximately the outer meter width on both sides of a traffic lane.
Working Drawings
Stress sheets, shop drawings, erection plans, false work plans, cofferdam plans, bending
diagrams for reinforcing steel, or any other supplementary plans or similar data which the
contractor is required to submit to the Engineer for approval.
Work in restricted areas
No additional or extra over payment will be made for work in restricted areas, unless the
items of work to which it will apply and the pay items under which payment will be effected,
are explicitly specified in these standard specifications or in the project specifications and
listed in the schedule of quantities.

Figure 1 Terms and Definitions for Road Cross Section Elements
Right of Way
Limit of Roadbed
Roadway
Carriageway
Shoulder
Traffic Lane Traffic Lane
Shoulder
Shoulder Break
Point
Embankment
Fill
Pavement Layers
Side Drain
Sub-grade (Top of Capping Layer
Fill Material) (if Required)
Roadbed (Existing Sub-grade (Bottom

Ground under of Excavation)
Embankment)
Figure 2 Terms and Definitions for Flexible Pavement Structure
Wearing Course
Surfacing Layers
Base Course
Road Pavement Layers
Road Base
Sub-base
Sub-grade
Capping Layer
(if required)

Figure 3 Terms and Definitions for Rigid Pavement Structure
Pavement Layers
Concrete slab
Sub-base
Sub-grade Separation layer
Capping Layer
(if required)

DIVISION 1200: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROVISIONS
1201 SCOPE
This Division covers matters, which relate to the construction work as a whole. Definitions,
phrases or wording, which would otherwise require repetition in other Divisions of the
Specifications, are also covered by clauses in this Division.
1202 WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY CONTROL

It is the Contractor's responsibility to produce work, which conforms in quality and accuracy
of dimensions to the requirements of the Specification and Drawings. The Contractor must
implement his own quality control system with experienced staff, together with all necessary
facilities, to ensure adequate supervision and positive control of the Works at all times.
If the Engineer has any doubt concerning the quality of any material to be used in the Works,
he shall instruct the Contractor to carry out tests to prove the quality of material before it is
used in the Works. The results of tests, which are carried out by the Contractor, shall be
submitted to the Engineer on request.
1203 APPROVAL OF COMPLETED WORKS

Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit a request and obtain
approval for each completed element of the Works and shall not proceed with subsequent
elements until approval is granted. The Contractor shall give a minimum of 24 hours notice
in writing to the Engineer to allow any inspection and testing to be carried out. Any approval
given by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the
Contract.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the results of all relevant tests, measurements,
and levels indicating compliance with the Specification on completion of every part of the
work.
1204 SETTING OUT OF WORK AND PROTECTION OF SURVEY MONUMENTS

The Contractor's attention is drawn to the requirements of Clause 17, Parts I and II of the
Conditions of Contract regarding setting out of the Works.
The Contractor shall check the condition of all reference and level survey monuments and
satisfy himself that they have not been disturbed and are true in regard to position and level.
If survey monuments have been destroyed, disturbed or damaged before the Site is handed
over to the Contractor, the Engineer will arrange to have new survey monuments installed. A
survey monument, which has been disturbed, shall not be used unless its true position and
level has been re-established and the new values have been verified by the Engineer.
Where a survey monument is likely to be disturbed during construction operations, the
Contractor shall establish suitable reference survey monuments at locations where they will
not be disturbed during construction. Survey monuments shall be established on steel pin set
in concrete or another less permanent manner approved by the Engineer. No survey
monument shall be covered over, disturbed or destroyed before accurate reference survey
monuments have been established and details of the position and levels of such survey
monuments have been submitted to the Engineer and approved by him. The Contractor's

reference survey monuments shall be of at least the same quality and durability as the
existing survey monuments.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the method of setting out he proposes to employ.
The Engineer may at any time request the contractor to submit proof that his setting out has
been satisfactorily checked.
If any trigonometry survey monuments, benchmarks or other land survey marks are
disturbed or destroyed during construction they shall be replaced by the Contractor so as not
to disrupt the Contractor’s Programme.
Accurate control of line and level shall be provided by the Contractor at all stages of
construction. In respect of the road itself control shall be at 20 m intervals, or such closer
intervals as may be directed on horizontal and vertical curves. Wherever necessary, but
particularly on completion of the subgrade and the base, the Contractor shall reestablish
stake line pegs at sufficiently close intervals to determine accurately the edges of the base,
surfacing and other road elements permanently exposed to the eye.
Setting out will not be measured and paid for directly and compensation for the work
involved in setting out will be deemed to be covered by the prices tendered and paid for the
various items of work included under this Contract.
1205 STANDARDS
American, British and Ethiopian standards are used in this Specification. In case of
differences in requirements or applicability, American standards (AASHTO, ASTM etc.)
shall take precedence with the exception of sieve sizes.
ISO sieves shall be used for all tests. In various standard test procedures quoted in this
Specification, American or British sieves shall be replaced by the nearest ISO sieves. The
standard sieve series, based on ISO 565, shall be as shown in Table 1200.

Table 1200-1 Standard Sieve Sizes
Aperture size Superceded Aperture size Superceded Designation

Designation
125 mm 5 in 2.80 mm No.7
106 mm 4.24 in 2.36 mm No.8
100 mm 4 in 2.00 mm No.10
90.0 mm 3 1/2 in 1.70 mm No.12
75.0 mm 3 in 1.40 mm No.14
63.0 mm 2 in 1.18 mm No.16
53.0 mm 2.12 in 1.00 mm No.18
50.0 mm 2 in 850 μ m No.20
45.0 mm 1 3/4 in 710 μ m No.25
37.5 mm 1 1/2 in 600 μ m No.30
31.5 mm 1 1/4 in 500 μ m No.35
26.5 mm 1.06 in 425 μ m No.40
25.0 mm 1 in 355 μ m No.45
22.4 mm 7/8 in 300 μ m No.50
19.0 mm 3/4 in 250 μ m No.60
16.0 mm 5/8 in 212 μ m No.70
13.2 mm 0.530 in 180 μ m No.80
12.5 mm 1/2 in 150 μ m No.100
11.2 mm 7/16 in 125 μ m No.120
9.50 mm 3/8 in 106 μ m No.140
8.00 mm 5/16 in 90 μ m No.170
6.70 mm 0.265 in 75 μ m No.200
6.30 mm 1/4 in 63 μ m No.230
5.60 mm No.3 1/2 53 μ m No.270
4.75 mm No.4 45 μ m No.325
4.00 mm No.5 38 μ m No.400
3.35 mm No.6
1206 PROTECTION OF THE WORKS AND REQUIREMENTS TO BE MET BEFORE

CONSTRUCTION OF NEW WORK ON TOP OF COMPLETED WORK IS COMMENCED
The General Obligation of the Contractor in terms of the General Conditions of the Contract
shall inter alia include the following:
(a) The provision of temporary drainage works such as drains, open channels, banks,
etc. and the furnishing and operating of temporary pumps and such other equipment as may
be necessary to adequately protect, drain and dewater the works and temporary works. This
will be in addition to any permanent drainage works specifically paid for separately.
(b) Care shall be exercised not to allow material in borrow pits to become excessively
wet, to keep all completed layers properly drained, not to cause dumps of material on
completed layer work to inhibit surface drainage or to form wet spots under and around
dumps, and to protect all parts of the work against erosion by floods and rain.

Material shall not be spread on a layer that is so wet as to result in the danger of damage
being caused to the layer during compaction of a subsequent layer or when opened to traffic.
When material is spread out on the road, it shall, during wet periods, be given a good
cross-fall, and a light compaction on the surface with a steel tired roller, in order to facilitate
run- off during rainy weather.
(c) Fill and cut slopes shall be promptly repaired whenever damaged by surface water.
Where erosion occurs on high fill, the slopes shall be repaired by cutting back to form
benches and compacting the back fill mechanically to the specified controlled densities,
using suitable small equipment.
(d) Excavations for pipe drains, culverts, sewer drains, water mains, manholes, service
ducts, and similar structures shall be adequately protected against the possible ingress of
water during rainstorms.
(e) All completed layer work shall be protected and maintained until the following
layer is applied. Maintenance shall include immediate repairs to any damage or defects,
which may occur and shall be repeated as often as is necessary to keep the layer
continuously intact and in a good condition.
(f) Before any completed layer is primed or a succeeding layer constructed thereon,
any damage to the existing layer shall be repaired so that after repair or reconstruction if
necessary, it will conform in all respects to the requirements specified for that layer. All
repair work other than minor surface damage repairs shall be submitted to the Engineer for
inspection before covering up.
The previously constructed layer shall also be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material
before construction of a succeeding layer or application of a prime coat, surfacing or surface
treatment. In the case of all bituminous work in particular, the existing layer shall be
thoroughly broomed and all dung, clay, mud, and other deleterious material completely
removed. Where necessary, the surface shall be sprayed with water before, during, and after
brooming to remove all foreign material.
Work performed as part of the above obligations shall not be measured and paid for
separately and the cost thereof is to be included in the prices tendered for the various items
of work requiring protection and for the Contractor's establishment on Site as specified in
Division 1300.
1207 EXISTING PUBLIC UTILITIES

The Contractor shall carry out the necessary investigations to identify the location of all
existing public utilities within the right-of-way and provide accurate records of such to the
Engineer prior to commencement of the Works.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer, and provide accurate records, of any public utilities
encountered during the execution of the Works. He shall take all necessary steps to prevent
damage to and safeguard any such services.
The Contractor shall co-operate with the public utility authorities in the removal and
relocation of any underground or overhead services or facilities so as to safeguard and
minimize disruption to the services. In the event of a utility service being interrupted as a
result of damage caused by the Contractor, the Contractor shall promptly notify the authority
concerned and be responsible for the cost of any repairs that are required to restore the
services.

1208 REMEDIAL WORK

Remedial measures shall ensure full compliance with specifications of the final product,
shall not endanger or damage any other part of the Works and shall be carefully controlled.
For the guidance of the Contractor an indication is given below of what would normally be
required in the more common cases of defects or damage, but the Engineer will in no way be
bound to approve of or adhere to the measures given below as the actual remedial measures
will be dictated by the circumstances of each particular case.
(a) Earthworks
Where a cut slope has been over-excavated or undercut, backfilling will not normally be
allowed and the entire slope may have to be retrimmed to obtain a uniform slope.
Where the floor of a cut has been taken too deep, it will normally require backfilling and
recompaction with selected gravel in the case of soil or gravel excavation and with crushed
stone material or suitably sized rock in the case of hard excavations. All necessary measures
shall be taken to drain away ground water that may accumulate in backfilled sections.
Excess width of fills will have to be trimmed down.
Where erosion has damaged the surface of cuts or fills the damage shall be made good by
backfilling with suitable material and retrimming. In more serious cases the slopes may have
to be cut back and backfilled by benching and compaction to the required standard of
compaction with suitable small equipment and then retrimmed.
Where excavated material has been allowed to spill over the edge of existing slopes, this
surplus material shall be removed and the vegetation of the slope reinstated.
(b) Stabilizing
Any sections failing to meet the requirements specified or damaged to the extent that they
require breaking up and recompaction will have to be restabilized with the type and quantity
of stabilizing agent ordered by the Engineer. The Engineer may also order that the layer be
removed entirely and replaced with fresh material to be stabilized.
(c) Local defects in pavement layers

Where remedial measures are taken to make good local defects, the length and width of the
area to be repaired by machines shall be such as will be necessary to accommodate the full
width of the machines used and a reasonable length to ensure effective operation.
The depth to which material will have to be removed will depend on the type of material.
Gravel will require breaking up to a depth of at least twice the maximum particle size and
crushed stone will usually require breaking up over its full depth. Asphalt material will
normally require removal for its full depth.
(d) Concrete
Concrete work will normally require the cutting back and complete removal of any weak or
honeycombed sections and making good using special epoxy adhesives to bind fresh
concrete to old concrete. Cracks, when permitted to remain shall be injected suitable epoxy
compounds and test cores drilled to test the efficiency of the injection process.

1209 WATER
The Contractor himself shall make arrangements for procuring, transporting, storing,
distributing and applying the water needed for construction and other purposes, except
where otherwise specified. No direct payment will be made for providing water, the cost of
which shall be included in the rates tendered for the various items of work for which water is
needed. Only clean water, free from undesirable concentrations of deleterious salts and other
materials shall be used in the construction of the works. The Engineer must approve all
sources of water used.
1210 USE OF EXPLOSIVES AND DEMOLITION

Generally the Contractor will be permitted to use explosives for breaking up rock and hard
material during excavations, for demolishing existing structures and for such other purposes
where it may normally be required, subject to the following conditions:
The Engineer shall have the power to prohibit the use of explosives in cases where, in his
opinion, the risk of injury or damage to persons, property or adjoining structures is too high.
Such action by the Engineer shall not entitle the Contractor to any additional payment for
having to resort to other less economical methods of construction unless otherwise provided
for in the Bill of Quantities.
The provisions of Division 1600 must be complied with.
Before any blasting is undertaken the Contractor, together with the Engineer, shall examine
and measure up any buildings, houses or structures in the vicinity of the proposed blasting
and establish and record together with the owner thereof the extent of any cracking or
damage that may exist before commencement of blasting operations. It shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to make good at his own expense further damage to such
houses, buildings or structures which is a result of the blasting.
Where there is reasonable danger of damage to power and telephone lines or any other
property the Contractor shall suitably adapt his method of blasting, the size of charges and
use adequate protective measures such as cover blasting in order to limit the risk of damage
as far as possible.
Authorized personnel will carry out all charging and detonation of explosives.
The Engineer shall be advised, in writing, twenty four hours before each blasting operation
is carried out, unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
The Contractor shall make arrangements at his own cost for the supply, transport, storage
and use of explosives.
Legal provisions in regard to the storage, transportation and use of explosives and the
requirements of the relevant authorities shall be strictly complied with.
1211 PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDS

The Contractor shall make photographs and other records to be agreed by the Engineer of
the condition of the surfaces of the Site immediately before entering upon them for the
purpose of constructing the Works. He shall provide the Engineer with 3 prints each of any
36 photographs each month. No separate payment will be made for photographs and the cost
shall be deemed to be included in other unit rates.
Each photograph provided shall comply with the following requirements:
(i) Prints shall be 125 mm x 100 mm.

(ii) The date of exposure shall be incorporated on the negative using a data-back
system.
(iii) The back of each print shall be marked with an identification reference number, and
the job title.
(iv) A list of titles indicating reference number, brief description, chainage, and
direction of view shall be provided with each set of prints.
(v) Albums, approved by the Engineer, shall be provided for 2 sets of prints every
month.
The Employer shall hold the copyright of all photographs and the negatives and prints shall
be delivered to the Engineer within 28 days of exposure. The photographs will not be used
for any other purpose whatsoever without the Engineer's approval.
1212 MEASUREMENT: GENERAL

The cost of all supervision and process control, including testing so carried out by the
Contractor, shall be deemed to be included in the rates rendered for the related items of work
except that the cost of certain tests and the provision of certain items of testing and sampling
equipment will be paid for separately as provided for in those Divisions of the Technical
Specifications where this applies.
(a) Units of measurements

All work shall be measured in accordance with the S.I. System of metric units.
(b) Bill of Quantities

The quantities set out in the Bill of Quantities are estimated quantities and are used for the
comparison of Tenders and awarding the Contract. It must be clearly understood that only
the actual quantities of work done or materials supplied will be measured for payment, and
that the quantities may be increased or decreased as provided in the General Conditions of
Contract.
(c) Measurement of completed work

(i) All distances along the center line of the roads as shown on the Drawings are
horizontal distances which will be used in calculating the quantities of earthworks, pavement
layers and surfacing and paving for payment purposes. All cross sections shall be taken in a
vertical plane.
(ii) All materials, which are specified to be measured in the vehicle, shall be hauled in
vehicles of such type and size that the actual contents may be readily and accurately
determined. Unless all vehicles are of uniform capacity, each vehicle shall bear a plainly
legible identification mark indicating its specific approved capacity.
(iii) Where the quantity of bituminous and similar materials is to be paid by volume, it
shall be measured at the specified temperature.
(iv) Structures shall be measured to the neat lines shown on the drawings including any
changes ordered in writing by the Engineer and shall include any reinforcing steel and minor
ducts up to 150 mm in diameter.

1213 PAYMENT
(a) Contract Rates

In computing the final contract amount, payments shall be based on actual quantities only of
authorized work done in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. The tendered
rates shall apply, subject to the provisions of the General Conditions of Contract, irrespective
of whether the actual quantities are more or less than the billed quantities.
Where no rate or price has been entered against a pay item in the bill of quantities by a
tenderer, it shall be understood that he does not require any compensation for such work.
(b) Rates to be inclusive

The Contractor shall accept the payment provided in the Contract and represented by the
prices tendered by him in the Bill of Quantities, as payment in full for executing and
completing the work as specified, for procuring and furnishing all materials, labour,
supervision, plant, tools and equipment, for wastage, transport, loading and offloading,
handling, maintenance, temporary work, testing, quality control including process control,
overheads, profit, risk and other obligations and for all other incidentals necessary for the
completion of the work and maintenance during the Period of Maintenance.
This Clause shall be applicable in full to all pay items except as these requirements may be
specifically amended in each case.
(c) Meanings of certain phrases in payment clauses

“Procuring and furnishing.(pay item mentioned) material”
Where any of the words "supply", "procure" or "furnish (pay item mentioned) material” are
used in the description of a pay item it shall mean the supply and delivery to the point of use
of all materials of any kind required for the work covered by the particular pay items,
including all tax, purchase costs, claims, damages, royalties and transport costs involved. In
the case of borrow materials, stone and sand, it shall also include all negotiations with
owners concerned, royalties, excavating, producing, preparing, processing, testing, hauling
and delivering the material to the point of use; the construction, repair, maintenance and
making good after completion of all access roads, and all work required in opening, using
and finishing off borrow pits which is not covered by other pay items in the Bill of
Quantities.
"Placing material"
The phrase "placing material" shall mean the offloading, spreading, blending, processing,
watering, mixing, shaping and compacting (where specified) the material in the road prism,
subbase, base, shoulders, banks and bypasses as well as procuring, furnishing, applying and
admixing of water; breaking down oversize material, removing oversize material which
cannot be broken down, correcting irregular or uneven surfaces or deficient thickness,
finishing off to within the specified tolerances, refilling test holes and maintaining the
completed work. In the case of asphalt courses and bituminous treatments it shall also mean
the heating and spraying of binder, spreading of aggregate or asphalt mixtures, rolling,
compacting, finishing off to within the specified tolerances and maintaining the completed
work.
The phrase "procuring, furnishing and placing" shall mean "procuring and furnishing" in
addition to "placing" all as defined hereinbefore.

(d) Pay items

The descriptions under the pay items in the various Divisions of the Specifications,
indicating the work to be allowed for in the tendered prices for such pay items, are for the
guidance of the Contractor and do not necessarily repeat all the details of work and materials
required by and described in the Specifications.
These descriptions shall be read in conjunction with the relevant Specifications and
Drawings and the Contractor shall, when tendering, allow for his prices to be inclusive as
specified in Sub-clause (b) above.
(e) Provisional Sums and Prime Cost Items
(i) Provisional Sums

The Bill of Quantities may contain certain Provisional Sums so designated and entered as a
preliminary allowance to cover the cost of work, materials, goods or services to be provided
by the Contractor and which have not been fully specified or measured or to cover the cost
of unforeseen items of work or contingent expenditure for which no rates are applicable but
for which the Contractor is to be paid according to the applicable provisions of the Contract.
(ii) Provisional Items

Work done under a Provisional Item shall only be executed upon a written order by the
Engineer which order shall also specify the method of payment. The expenditure in respect
of a Provisional Item for work ordered by the Engineer shall be entirely at his discretion and
any final expenditure in respect of a Provisional Item may be more, less or equal to the
amount provided in the Bill of Quantities. Such an item may be an alternative to another
item of similar or greater quantity.
Payment as specified in the order given by the Engineer shall be either at contract rates,
where such are applicable, or where none are applicable, payment shall be in accordance
with the provisions of Clause 52 "Extra Work" of the General Conditions of Contract. Where
the method of payment is not according to any rates but contingent upon the provisions of
the Contract, it shall be determined as specified and will not require an order in writing from
the Engineer.
(iii) Prime Cost (P.C.) Items

The Bill of Quantities may contain Prime Cost (P.C.) Items, so designated, which are entered
as a preliminary allowance to cover the cost of work, materials, goods and services to be
provided by a nominated subcontractor or of articles or goods to be purchased by the
Contractor in execution of a written order by the Engineer who may designate a particular
source of supply or brand of article.
No expenditure or appointment of a subcontractor in respect of a P.C. Item will be
authorized unless upon the written instructions of the Engineer. The amount authorized by
the Engineer shall be entirely at his discretion and may be more, equal to or less than the
amount entered in the Bill of Quantities.
Payment for a Prime Cost Item shall be as follows:
(i) the amount actually paid by the Contractor to the subcontractor or supplier, as the
case may be, in execution of the Engineer's written order, plus
(ii) a percentage as tendered by the Contractor on the amount in (i) above to cover all
his charges and profits.

The Contractor shall not be entitled to any further payments or to a fee, commission, rebate,
discount or similar payment or consideration from the supplier or subcontractor and shall
disclose and subtract such amounts from the amount claimed under (i) above.
(iv) Rate only items

Opposite to an item in the Bill of Quantities where no quantity is given but a "rate only" is
required, the Contractor shall fill in a rate or price which will constitute payment for any
work which may be done under this item. Such a "rate only" item is used where it is
estimated that little or no work will be required under the item, or where the item is to be
considered as an alternative for another item where a quantity is given, or for variations in
rates of application or mix proportions in terms of Clause 1212 of this Division
1214 VARIATION FROM SPECIFIED NOMINAL RATES OF APPLICATION OR NOMINAL

MIX PROPORTIONS
The various Divisions of the Technical Specifications prescribe nominal rates of application
or nominal mix proportions for materials such as bituminous materials, aggregates, mineral
fillers, stabilizing agents, paints and the like. Tenderers shall base their Tenders on these
nominal rates of application and mix proportions.
Allowance is made in the various Divisions of the Technical Specifications where such rates
of application and mix proportions are given, for variations arising out of different rates of
application or mix proportions ordered by the Engineer to suit the materials and conditions
on site in every particular case.
Where the actual rates of application or mix proportions, used in the Works, vary from the
nominal specified rates or proportions, adjustment of compensation will be made:
(a) as a payment to the Contractor in respect of any authorized increase in quantities
from those specified which has been ordered in writing by the Engineer;
OR
(b) as a refund to the Employer in respect of the decrease in quantities from those
specified whether such decrease results from an authorized decrease in the rates of
application or mix proportions, or whether it results from unauthorized reductions on the part
of the Contractor.
Payment for a varied rate shall be based on the actual rate of application used, provided that
this does not exceed the rate of application ordered by the Engineer plus any tolerance in the
rate of application allowed. If the actual rate of application exceeds the above, payment shall
be based on the rate of application ordered plus any tolerance allowed.
If the actual rate of application is below the rate of application ordered, payment shall be
based on the actual rate of application regardless of any tolerance allowed. Notwithstanding
the above the Engineer shall have the full authority to condemn work which has been
constructed at variance with the Specifications or the rates of application ordered by him.
The Employer shall be refunded for any decrease in the specified rates of application or mix
proportions at the same price per unit of measurement as that tendered by the Contractor for
additional materials required by an increase in the rates of application of mix proportions.
1215 PAYMENTS AND TOLERANCES

The work specified in the various Divisions of the Specifications shall comply with the
various dimensional and other tolerances specified in each case. Where no tolerances are

specified, the standard of workmanship shall be in accordance with normal good practice.
No representation is made that the full specified tolerances will be available independently
of each other and the Contractor is cautioned that the liberal or full use of any one or more
tolerances may deprive him of the full or any use of tolerances relating to other aspects of
the work. The latter would apply particularly in respect of level tolerances on layer work and
the related requirements regarding layer thickness.
In the description of certain pay items, where it is stated that quantities will be determined
from the "authorized" dimensions, this shall be taken to mean the dimensions as specified or
shown on the Drawings or, if changed, as finally instructed by the Engineer, without any
allowance for tolerances specified. If the work is therefore constructed in compliance with
the "authorized" dimensions plus or minus any tolerances allowed, quantities will be based
on the "authorized" dimensions regardless of the actual dimensions to which the work is
constructed.
Where the work is not constructed in accordance with the "authorized" dimensions, plus or
minus any tolerances allowed, the Engineer may nevertheless in his sole discretion accept
the work for payment. In such cases no payment will be made in respect of quantities of
work or material in excess of those calculated from the "authorized" dimensions and where
the actual dimensions are less than the "authorized" dimensions, minus any tolerance
allowed, quantities for payment shall be based on the actual dimensions as constructed.

DIVISION 1300: CONTRACTOR'S ESTABLISHMENT ON SITE
1301 SCOPE
This Division covers all work involved in the establishment of the Contractor's organisation,
camp(s) and plant and equipment on or adjacent to the Site, and the removal thereof after
completion.
1302 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(a) Camps, equipment and testing facilities

The Contractor shall establish his construction camp on or adjacent to the Site. This will
include all accommodation, sanitary conveniences, maintenance and testing facilities
necessary for his personnel, plant, equipment, stores, process control, etc.
He shall bring all necessary plant, equipment and personnel to the Site prior to the
Commencement of the Works, and remove the same from the Site after completion of the
work leaving all areas that have been occupied by him in a clean and tidy condition to the
satisfaction of the Engineer/Supervisor.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to identify a suitable site, and the Employer to provide for
the Engineer's office, laboratory accommodation and working areas, and camp sites for
himself, his senior staff and his junior staff, houses, offices, labourers' accommodation, etc.
The choice of all sites for the establishment of camps shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
(b) Legal relations and responsibility to the public

The Contractor shall take steps necessary to comply with the terms of the General
Conditions of Contract, particularly in respect of the insurances and indemnities required,
and he shall comply with all regulations of Statutory Authorities.
(c) Electricity Supply

The Contractor shall provide and maintain at his own expense his own electrical supply.
This supply must be adequate to supply the areas set aside for the housing of his staff and for
his own and the Engineer’s Office, and for any housing of the Engineer’s staff.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary temporary power and lighting and
all associated apparatus for the duration of the Contract at his own expense. He must make
allowance for the use of the said supplies and equipment by all subcontractors free of charge.
Once equipment becomes redundant and having received the approval from the Engineer the
Contractor shall disconnect and remove said equipment and make good any works disturbed
at his own expense.
(d) Handing over of the Site

The site will be handed over to the Contractor in a single length unless otherwise specified
by the Engineer.

1303 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Item 13.01 The contractor's general obligations:

(a) Fixed obligations........................................................................................... lump sum
(b) Value-related obligations ...............................................................................lump sum
(c) Time-related obligations ..................................................................................... month
Payment of the lump sums tendered under sub items (a) and (b), and the rate per month for
sub item (c) shall, for the three sub items together, include full compensation for all the
contractor's charges in respect of the following items, collectively termed the "contractor's
general obligations".
(i) Setting up and maintaining his organization, personnel, camps, accommodation,
ablution and other facilities, offices, stores, workshops, other temporary structures, fencing,
testing facilities and constructional plant on the site and their removal on completion of the
contract.
(ii) Complying with the requirements of the general conditions of contract and section
1200 of the specifications, including the effecting of insurances and providing the sureties
required.
(iii) All general site and office overheads, profit, financing costs, risks, legal and
contractual responsibilities and other costs and obligations of a preliminary or general nature
which are not specifically measured for payment under any other items of payment.
The lump sum tendered under subitem 13.01(a) above shall represent full compensation for
the fixed part of the contractor's general obligations, i.e. that part which is substantially fixed
and is not a function of the time required for the completion of the contract or of the value of
the work.
Should the final value of the work (excluding any payments in terms of clause 49 of the
general conditions of contract) increase or decrease by twenty (20) per cent or less in
relation to the tendered amount (less any allowances, if any, in the tender for price
adjustments in terms of clause 49 of the general conditions of contract), the lump sum
tendered for subitem 13.01 (a) shall not be subject to any variation whatsoever. However,
should the said increase or decrease of the final value of the work exceed twenty (20) per
cent of the tendered amount, the provisions of clause 53 of the general conditions of contract
shall apply to that portion of the said increase or decrease which is in excess of twenty (20)
per cent of the tendered amount.
Payment of the lump sum tendered under subitem 13.01 (a) will be made in three
installments, as follows:
(1) The first installment, 50% of the lump sum, will be paid in the first payment
certificate after the contractor has met all his obligations under this section and has made a
substantial start with construction in accordance with the approved programme.
(2) The second installment, 35% of the lump sum, will be paid when the value of the
work done reaches one half of the tendered amount, excluding contingencies and price
adjustments in terms of clause 49 of the general conditions of contract.
(3) The third and final installment, 15% of the lump sum, will be paid when the works
have been completed and the contractor has fulfilled all the requirements of this section.

Before any payment is made under this subitem, the contractor shall satisfy the engineer that
he has provided camps and construction plant of good quality on the site, the value of which
exceeds that of the first installment.
The contractor may also be required to furnish documentary proof that he owns the camps
and construction plant on the site, the value of which shall exceed that of the first
installment.
In the event of the contractor not being able to satisfy the Engineer as to the ownership of the
camps and construction plant, the Engineer shall have the right to withhold parts of any
payments to be made under this subitem, until the works have been completed.
The lump sum tendered under subitem 13.01(b) shall represent full compensation for that
part of the contractor's general obligations, which is a function of only the value of the work,
but not of the period of completion. Should the final value of the work (excluding any
payments in terms of clause 49 of the general conditions of contract) increase or decrease by
twenty (20) per cent or less in relation to the tendered amount (less any allowances, if any, in
the tender for price adjustments in terms of clause 49 of the general conditions of contract),
the lump sum tendered for subitem 13.01(b) will be increased or decreased pro rata in full
settlement of any difference in value-related general obligations resulting from an increased
or decreased value of the work.
However, should the said increase or decrease in the final value of the work exceed twenty
(20) per cent of the tendered amount, the above-mentioned pro rata increase or decrease in
the lump sum tendered under subitem 13.01(b) shall apply up to the limit of twenty (20) per
cent, and the provisions of clause 53 of the general conditions of contract shall apply to that
portion of the said increase or decrease which is in excess of the said limit of twenty (20) per
cent of the tendered amount.
The lump sum tendered in subitem 13.01(b) will be payable monthly in installments in
relation to the value of work done (excluding the value of any price adjustments in terms of
clause 49 of the general conditions of contract).
The tendered rate per month for subitem 13.01(c) represents full compensation for that part
of the contractor's general obligations, which are mainly a function of construction time. The
tendered rate will be paid monthly, pro rata for parts of a month, from the date on which the
contractor has received the letter of acceptance in terms of clause 12 of the general
conditions of contract, until the end of the period for completion of the works, plus any
extension thereof as provided in clause 45 of the general conditions of contract, provided
that :
(a) should the works be certified as having been completed before the contractual date
for completion of the works, the contractor will then be entitled to payments in regard to the
unexpired period for completion:
(b) should the progress of the contractor in terms of the value of work done be in arrear
in regard to his approved original programme, payments in respect of this item may be
limited to payments for this period, which, in his original programme (after suitable
adjustments in respect of the extension of time granted) agree with the actual value of work
done.
Any payment made under item 13.01 will not be taken into account when determining
whether the value of a certificate complies with the 'minimum amount of interim certificate",
as laid down in the appendix to tender. The adjustments specified in subitems (a), (b) and (c)
will be made only if the value of the work or the period for completion were to change and it

is agreed that such adjustments will be in full settlement of the changed compensation for
amended general obligations.

DIVISION 1400: ACCOMMODATION, SERVICES, AND ATTENDANCE

FOR THE ENGINEER'S STAFF
1401 SCOPE
This Division covers the provision of accommodation, vehicles and attendance for the
Engineer's supervisory staff. The accommodation shall include the necessary office building,
laboratory, houses for the supervisory staffs, furniture, equipment, as well as the provision of
all services required
Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provision, the main camp of the contractor as well
as the location of the Engineer's office, laboratories and housing accommodation has to be at
or near the mid-length of the project.
Camp sites shall be located in an area so as to minimize disruption to local population, faune
and flora and water courses; adequate drainage facilities and treatment of sewerage and
waste disposals will be provided camp construction will be dismantled and rehabilitated
once construction is completed.
1402 GENERAL
The offices and laboratory will be erected by the Contractor on the Site or on land which has
been provided by the Employer adjacent to the Site for this purpose and are in close
proximity to the Contractor's offices and laboratories. If the Contractor should decide to
move his own offices and/or laboratories to a new site, the offices, laboratory and other
buildings erected for the use of the Engineer shall be rebuilt by the Contractor at the new site
if required, at no additional charge.
The Contractor may not proceed with the permanent works before the required equipment
has been provided by him. If the offices for the Engineer and his staff are not ready for
occupation when the permanent works is commenced, the Contractor shall be paid under
Clause 51 of the Conditions of Contract to provide suitable temporary offices acceptable to
the Engineer. (See 1408 below)
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent unauthorised entry to the
offices and laboratories and ensure the general security of the offices and laboratories. A
security fence shall be erected by the Contractor around the offices and laboratory for the
Engineer.
The layout, sitting and orientation of the offices and laboratory or other accommodation
shall be to the Engineer's approval and shall be decided upon in consultation with him.
Offices, laboratories and residential accommodation, complete with their contents, access
roads and hard standings shall be ready for occupation and the use of the Engineer within
120 days of the date for commencement of the Works unless otherwise described in the
Contract. If the contractor fails to provide the offices and laboratories with in the time frame
stated herein above he shall continue to provide the temporary offices and laboratories at his
own cost. This is without prejudicing the Engineer’s right to take other contractual measures.
All offices, testing laboratories and residential accommodation shall be regularly cleaned for
so long as they are in use and suitable arrangements shall be made for the disposal of waste
arising from the offices, testing laboratories and residential accommodation.
All offices, testing laboratories and residential accommodation equipment shall be of a
quality and precision appropriate to its use and shall be delivered new to the Engineer. The

Contractor shall keep all equipment in good condition and shall repair or replace, as
instructed by the Engineer, any equipment that becomes defective or unserviceable. All the
equipment shall first be calibrated by a competent Authority of the country. Furthermore,
The Contractor shall ensure that any equipment needing periodic calibration shall be
calibrate on delivery, annually and at other times as and when required by the Engineer.
When major components of the Works are manufactured off the Site, the Contractor shall
arrange to make available adequate and secure accommodation at or adjacent to the place of,
and during the period of, manufacture and testing.
All the Engineer’s site facilities shall be located as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor
together with his bid shall submit a proposed plan regarding the Engineer’s site facilities
Water and electric supply shall be provided on 24-hour basis and the Contractor shall pay for
any statutory charges associated there with. Pure drinking water shall be supplied or made
available for all the facilities.
The Contractor shall start work on the Engineer’s site facilities as soon as practicable from
the date of commencement of the works within one hundred twenty (120) days of the date of
commencement of the works. In case such facilities are not ready for occupation the time
frame stated herein above, the Contractor shall continue to provide to the
Engineer/Employer’s Representative personnel the temporary site facilities at his own cost.
This is without prejudicing the Engineer’s right to take other contractual actions.
Detailed specifications and plans regarding the site facilities, including, but not limited to,
their services, equipment, furnishing and vehicles shall be supplied by the Contractor to the
Engineer as soon as practicable from the date of commencement of the works.
Ownership of the Engineer’s offices, laboratory building, housing including, sanitary
facilities, installations, fittings, connections etc. becomes the property of the Employer on
completion of the project. Also, the ownership of the Engineer’s office furniture and
equipment becomes the property of the Employer on completion of the project. The
ownership of the mobile radios and laboratory equipment remains to be for the contractor.
1403 OFFICE AND LABORATORY ACCOMMODATION
(a) General
Buildings for offices and laboratories shall be constructed with Hollow Blocks or bricks or
of an approved equivalent material. The construction material to be used shall be strong,
durable and of an acceptable quality. The office building shall have concrete floors with
vinyl floor tiles and the laboratory buildings shall have a concrete floor. Alternatively, offices
can be of prefabricated or portable type. The clear height of all offices between floor and
ceiling shall be 3.0 m minimum. All windows shall be of the type that can open over the full
window area. The ceilings of the buildings shall be of chip wood or any other quality
approved by the Engineer.
The area for the Engineer's office and laboratory shall be secured with a 1.8 m high chain
link or barbed wire security fence.
Office and laboratory buildings shall be painted with an approved paint after erection.
Each door shall be provided with a lock and two keys.
The various units of accommodation and the fittings shall be constructed in accordance with
details approved by the Engineer.
Each hand wash basin shall be fitted with taps and a drain.

Lights shall be of the fluorescent type either double 40-watt, single 80-watt or of the
incandescent type according to what is required and approved by the Engineer.
Electric power plug points shall be provided. Each office shall have at least two 15 ampere
plug points.
The Engineer shall be provided with an independent telephone line exchange with
extensions in number as may be specified in the special provisions and rates shall include the
cost of all calls and rental charges.
Blinds shall be provided for each window. They shall be one of two types: Venetian blinds
adjustable so as to permit light to enter to room but excluding direct light; Or Opaque roller
blinds.
Where described in the Contract telephones shall have a separate connection direct to a
telephone exchange for the exclusive use of the Engineer.
All office and laboratory equipment shall be provided in a clean condition to the Engineer’s
approval and shall be a new one.
Project sign boards shall be erected at locations approved by the Engineer
Carports shall be provided which are constructed so as to protect vehicles parked in them at
all times against the direct rays of the sun. The carports shall be at least of 20m2 in area and
the floors shall consist of a layer of broken stone to alleviate dusty and muddy conditions.
Each carport shall be at least 3m wide and shall have a headroom of at least 2m. The roots of
all carports shall be waterproof.
(b) Air Conditioning Units and Heaters

The Contractor shall provide and install, unless specified otherwise, air-conditioning units
and heaters to offices and laboratories as per details which may be specified tine special
provisions.
The air-conditioning units shall be of the electrically operated compressor type with closed
circuit and not of the evaporation type. The capacity of the air-conditioning units shall be at
least 2.2 kW each.
Heaters shall preferably be of a space-heating type without exposed elements and shall have
a capacity of not less than 1.5 kW each.
(c) Offices
The Engineer’s Offices shall be contained in a single building unit and shall consist of
separate accommodation within the building.
The furniture to be provided shall conform to the requirements listed in Table 1403/1, (See
point 1408) and shall be approved by the Engineer.
The various sizes of offices required, unless otherwise specified, shall be as shown in Table
1403/5, and schedules of supplies and equipment to be provided as listed in Table 1403 /2
(See point 1408)
(d) Areas around Offices

The access and other roads around the offices shall be provided by the Contractor. He shall
keep them free of mud and dust either by using crushed stone, suitable dust laying oils,
bituminous surfacing or other approved means. They shall be well-drained and kept

trafficable at all times. Footpaths shall be similarly treated to provide convenient access to
all buildings, between the car park, offices, and laboratory for the Engineer.
(e) Radio Communication System for the Engineer

The radio system shall be entirely separate from any provision for radio communication
made by the Contractor for his own use except that the aerial installation may be shared.
The system shall have an operating range, which ensures reception at all parts of the Site and
with Addis Ababa.
The Contractor shall maintain the system, dismantling and removing it on the completion of
the Contract. An equivalent replacement shall be provided if the system is out of service for
more than 24 hours.
(f) Laboratories
The laboratory shall consist of a single building adjacent to the Engineer's Offices, and shall
consist of separate accommodation within the building (minimum internal area indicated
sq.m.) as indicated in Table 1403/6 unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
The various sizes of the laboratories required, unless otherwise specified, shall be as shown
in Table 1403/6 and schedules of equipment to be provided as listed in Table 1403/3.
The laboratories, fittings, furniture shall conform to the Table 1403/4.
1404 HOUSING ACCOMMODATION FOR THE ENGINEER
(a) General
The Contractor shall provide, erect, furnish, equip and maintain for the duration of the
Contract period, any or all of the following housing accommodation. The type of facility and
the numbers required are shown in the Bill of Quantities.
(i) Houses – for the engineers shall be
(a) Type A houses - 3 bedrooms, lounge, dining area, a kitchen and toilet room
(having a toilet bowel, a wash basin, bath or shower and a mirror). The built up area
shall satisfy the minimum floor area indicated in Table 1404/1.
(b) Type B houses - 3 bedrooms, lounge, a kitchen and toilet room (having a
toilet bowel, a wash basin, bath or shower and a mirror). The built up area shall
satisfy the minimum floor area indicated in Table 1404/1.
(c) Type C houses - 2 bedrooms and a common toilet room (having a toilet
bowel, a wash basin, bath or shower and a mirror). The built up area shall satisfy
the required floor area indicated in Table 1404/1, unless otherwise specified.
(ii) Apartments - 1,2 or 3 bedrooms in walled garden with garages and staff quarters.
The built up area for one bedroom apartment shall not be less than 40-sq. m. and multiples
thereof.
(iii) Motel style accommodation-Bedroom, lounge/study and bathroom, self-contained
units in terraced arrangement attached to a common kitchen, dining and recreation room
area. The built up are shall not be less than 125-sq. m.

(b) Description
The buildings shall be constructed with Hollow Blocks or bricks or prefabricated units or of
an approved equivalent material. The construction material to be used shall be strong,
durable and of an acceptable quality.
The accommodation to be provided under this section shall be provided at a location to be
approved by the Engineer. The buildings shall be according to the standard, specified for the
Engineer's offices and conforming to current building and architectural practice in Sudan for
good quality buildings, and as approved by the Engineer.
(i) Furnishings and equipment shall be as approved by the Engineer.
(ii) The buildings shall be fully air-conditioned and heaters shall be provided wherever
required, unless specified otherwise. All areas except kitchen and bathrooms shall have
ceiling fans.
(iii) The equipment for the Engineer’s houses shall also include, but not limited to the
ones indicated in Table 1404/2, which shall be provided to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(iv) The facilities shall be fully wired and connected to a 220/250-volt AC power
source, with at least two power points in each room and five points in the kitchen.
(v) The living/dining room shall have air conditioning/ heating unit of at least 1.2 kW
(vi) The furniture and equipment for the facilities are to be supplied new and after the
completion of the contract all items shall become the property of the Employer.
(vii) There shall be a waterproof protection below concrete floors and waterproof layer
at the same level within the brick walls. The quality and thickness of the waterproofing
material to be used shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
(viii) All buildings/ facilities shall have hot and cold running water and servant’s room.
ix) Where the water supply is not connected to the water main, an external elevated
cold water storage tank with a capacity of 5000 litres shall be provided in order to obtain a
minimum head of 3 m. of water at the taps, together with the pipes leading to the supply
tank.
(x) The living quarters, at the contractor’s option if are designed in order to be moved
and re-erected on another site on completion of Works, shall be made of timber, fibre cement
or other approved material and shall have double walls fitted with insulating material. They
shall be lined on the inside with timber or other approved material including ceilings.
(xi) Floors shall be of timber or alternatively of concrete covered with suitable carpeting
or vinyl tiles.
(xii) The living quarters shall have a clear height from floor to ceiling of 3.0 m as a
minimum.
(xiii) The total area of windows shall be at least 20% of the exterior wall area and all
windows shall be of an approved type that open and close readily. All exterior doors and
windows shall be provided with insect screens and the windows and doors shall be provided
with suitable curtains.
(xiv) Each facility after erection/construction shall be properly painted inside and outside
with an approved paint and the paintwork shall be maintained during the Contract period.
(xv) All facilities shall be provided with adequate carports.

(xvi) All the living areas shall be surrounded with their own compound wall or 2.5 m.
high chain link security fence with a cranked top with three strands of barbed wire. The
fence shall be provided with one gate to each facility.
(xvii) Suitable gravel roads with a minimum width of 3.5 m shall be provided to connect
all the facilities. Roads shall have adequate illumination with overhead lights.
(xviii) The Contractor shall provide a day watchman/gardener and night watchman for
each facility.
(xix) Except where provided otherwise, the land and accommodation shall be available
for the exclusive use of the Employer/ Engineer personnel for the period of the Contract to
the end of the maintenance period.
(c) Maintenance
(i) The Contractor shall arrange to maintain the residential accommodation until the
issue of the Defects liability Certificate for the complete Works.
(ii) Maintenance includes attending to repairs to various parts of the building, fittings
etc. and the connecting services as and when necessary, including the annual interior and
exterior paint work and periodic painting of wood and steel work; replacing the broken
window/door, maintenance of internal roads and other repairs as directed by the Engineer.
(iii) The Contractor shall arrange to provide uninterrupted supply of electricity and
water for the facilities. In case of failure of main water or power supply, suitable
arrangements shall be made for providing uninterrupted supply.
1405 SERVICES
(a) Sanitary arrangements

The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of all sanitary services necessary to
keep latrines in a clean, neat and hygienic condition.
The Contractor shall also provide for the removal of all rubbish.
(b) Water, electricity and gas

(i) The Contractor shall provide a supply of fresh clean potable water at a constant
head of not less than 3 m at the taps. Storage capacity in respect of the laboratory water
supply shall not be less than 700 litres.
(ii) The Contractor shall provide the necessary electric power supply at 220/250 volts to
the Engineer's offices and laboratory. The power available shall not be less than 10 kVA for
the office and 10 kVA for each 40 sq.m. of laboratory space. If 380 volt 3-phase electricity is
required for the laboratories, the power available shall not be less than 12 kVA per 50 sq.m.
of laboratory space with a minimum of 12 kVA.
(iii) Electrical power and Water shall be supplied to the offices and laboratory 24 hours
per day.
(iv) The Contractor shall where required also supply liquid petroleum gas, for any
burners used in the laboratory and for any other gas equipment supplied to the Engineer
including all other chemicals.

(v) The Contractor shall provide and maintain at his own expense his own electrical
supply. This supply must be adequate to supply the areas set aside for the housing of his
staff and for his own and the Engineer’s Office, and for any housing of the Engineer’s staff.
(vi) Once equipment becomes redundant and having received the approval from the
Engineer the Contractor shall disconnect and remove said equipment and make good any
works disturbed at his own expense.
(vii) The Contractor shall maintain all equipment provided by him and shall always keep
them in a serviceable condition and shall replace any item, which becomes unserviceable
defective or is lost.
1406 VEHICLES
(a) The Contractor shall provide vehicles for the sole use of the Engineer and his staff.
The vehicles shall be new. The vehicles must be comprehensively insured to cover any
driver Passengers. The vehicles shall be replaced after 150,000 kms. Ownership of vehicles
reverts to the Employer at the end of the Contract.
A description and the type of vehicles is given in Sub clause 1406(b). The Contractor shall
provide where directed by the Engineer, experienced drivers, who shall be available to the
Engineer at all times. The vehicles shall be provided with fuel and lubricants as required and
shall be serviced, maintained and repaired so as to be in a reliable and roadworthy condition
at all times.
(b) The following types of vehicles shall be supplied for the sole use of the Engineer.
Vehicle Type A
Passenger Station Wagon, four wheel drive, 8 seater (minimum), with 4.5 litre (minimum)
petrol or 4.2 litre diesel engine.
Vehicle Type B
Pick-Up vehicle, four wheel drive, double cab (4 seater) and canopy with 3.0 litre
(minimum) petrol or 2.8 litre diesel engine.
Vehicle Type C
Short Wheel Base vehicle, four wheel drive, hardtop, with 3.0 litre (minimum) petrol or 2.8
litre diesel engine.
All vehicles shall be available to the Engineer within 120 days of the date of
commencement of the works, or, in default, the Contractor continues to provide temporary
vehicles at his own cost. This is without prejudicing the Engineer’s right to take other
contractual actions. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacement whether temporary
or permanent of any vehicle through repair or accident where such vehicle is unavailable to
the Engineer for a period of more than 24 hours.
1407 ATTENDANCE
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with, and maintain continuity of operatives equal
to the tasks and capable of performing the functions described in the Contract. Survey
operatives shall be capable of assisting Surveyors in manual tasks. Laboratory assistants
shall be capable of assisting the Engineer’s laboratory staff in manual tasks. Drivers
provided for the Engineer’s site vehicles shall have a valid driving license and driving

experience suitable for the vehicles supplied. Cleaning staff shall be capable of carrying out
duties to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(i) The Contractor shall provide soap and towels in the offices and laboratories of the
Engineer, the services of cleaners and sanitary staff, together with cleaning equipment, and
day and night watchmen.
(ii) The Contractor shall provide all assistance such as labourers, all tools and
protective clothing, wooden pegs, iron picks and pickets, water, cement and aggregate for
concreting, transport for labourers and materials, as may be required by the Engineer and his
staff for checking, setting out, surveying, measuring or testing the work.
(iii) The Contractor shall include in his rates in the Bill of Quantities, the cost of all
attendance upon the Engineer and his staff. No other payment shall be made in respect of
attendance, except items covered by Item 14.08 in the Bill of Quantities.
1408 TEMPORARY FACILITIES OF THE ENGINEER

The contractor shall, between the date of commencement of the works and the handing over
of all the site facilities to the Engineer, i.e., for 120 days, provide to the Engineer Temporary
site offices, laboratory, housing fully fitted, furnished and equipped to the approval of the
Engineer and vehicles including all operating costs.

1409 TABLES
Table 1403/1 Office Furniture
Item Description Quantity
1 Desks shall have six drawers and shall have a surface area of at 2
least 1.5 sq. m. and shall be provided with 2 lockable drawers,
with 2 keys per lock. This item includes executive chairs (one
each).
2 Desks shall have three drawers and shall have a surface area of 6
at least 1.2 sq. m. and shall be provided with at least 1 lockable
drawer, with 2 keys. This item includes executive chairs (one
each).
3 Steel general purpose cabinets shall have at least 1.5 sq.m. shelf 2
area and a volume of 0.70 cu.m. Each cabinet shall have a lock
with two keys.
4 Steel filing cabinets shall each be fitted with four drawers on 3

runners. Each cabinet shall be fitted with a lock and two keys
and shall be 1300 mm high, 460 mm wide and 600 mm from
front to back.
5 Plan chests suitable for storing all the contract drawings. 1
6 Drafting Table with draftsman's stool, the stool shall be fitted 1

with a padded seat and shall be of adjustable type
Conference room shall have furniture as:
7 Conference table (1.5 m x 0.9 m). Each table shall be square 10

edged so that adjoining tables can form a conference table.
9 Chairs shall be sturdy and comfortable 10
10 Black Board 1
11 Side cabinet with glass door 1
12 Table for computer and printer 1

Table 1403/2 Office Supplies and equipment
Item Description No
1 Typewriter, 45 cm carridge, electronic daisy wheel with 1
2 interface to computer 5
3 Electronic calculator (as specified) 10
4 Waste paper basket 15
5 Tee square (AO) 2
6 Protractor (200mm) 2
7 Set square (45 degree, 300mm) 2
8 Set square (30/60 degree, 300mm) 1
9 Planimeter 4
10 Triangular scales 5
11 Stapler 15
12 Paper punch 7
13 Heavy duty paper punch 1
14 Heavy duty stapler 1
15 Steel straight edge 1m. 10
16 Filing tray (set of 3) 4
17 Reading lamp 1
18 Camera 35mm autofocus, 35-70mm lens 8
19 Clipboard 2
20 Electric water heater 1
21 Electric refrigerator, 300 litre capacity 2
22 Electric kettle 12
23 Tea cups, teaspoons, knives, forks, plates 2 sets
24 Milk jug, sugar bowls, tea-pot 20
25 Level book 10
26 Field book 1
27 Level (automatic) 2
28 Levelling staff (5m) 20
29 Ranging rod (2m) 1
30 Optical square 2
31 Steel tape 100m. 4
32 Linen tape 30m. 6
33 Steel pocket tape 5
34 Tape repair kit 2
35 Cane knives 2
36 Hammer (5kg) 2
37 Survey umbrella 2
38 Rain gauge 2
39 Thermometer (max/min) 2
40 First Aid kit 1
41 Set of ASTM Standards or equivalent mentioned in the Complete

Specification
42 Adequate supplies of all other office stationary 1

Cutlery and crockery (tea set etc.) as directed by Engineer for
the staff

Item Description No
43 In addition to those items described above the following

scheduled items are to provided:
Total Station surveying instrument including 2 single prism 1

targets and tripods.
Desktop microcomputer compatible with IBM PC, having 1

the maximum capacity available in the market six months
before bid submission, and with a CD Rom, 3.5 inch floppy
disc drives, hard disc drive, color monitor, operating on latest
soft wares available in the market six months before bid
submission, together with the following software:
Word processing
Spread sheets
AutoCAD
Other specified soft ware in the special provisions
44 Laser printer with carriage for up to A3 paper, plus stationary 1

for the duration of the Contract.
45 Photocopier with copy size up to A3, capable of reducing or 5

enlarging between A3 and A4, plus paper and other supplies
for the duration of the Contract.
All the Equipment including the Total Station surveying instrument including targets and
tripods, the computer, all software, the printer and the photocopier shall become the property
of the Employer on completion of the Works.

Table 1403/3 Laboratory Equipment
The Contractor shall provide for the site laboratory included in the Contract and for the
exclusive use of the supervision team, equipment at least equal to the following list.
Substitution of type may be made only upon approval of the Engineer.
Table 1403/3 (a) List of Laboratory Equipment for Asphalt Concrete roads
Description Quantity
General
Sieves diam. 300 mm ASTM - 3 “downwards to 3/8” 2 no each
Sieves diam. 200 mm ASTM - 1 “downwards to no. 200” 2 no. each
200 mm Sieves No. 200 4 no.
Sieve shaker for 200 and 300 mm dia. sieves 1 no.
Sieve fond diameter 200 and 300 mm 3 no. each
Weighing scale elec. 3.5 kg capacity, 0.1 gram
accuracy with under water weighing device 2 no.
Weighing scale 25 kg capacity, 1 gram accuracy 1 no.
Weighing scale 0.25 kg capacity, 0.01 gram accuracy 1 no.
Glass plates 0.5 x 0.5 x 0.05 m 2 no.
Spatulas different shapes and sizes 10 no.
Moisture content tins 100 no.
Heating oven with air circulation 50 litres 1 °C accurate 2 no.
Heating plates 220 V 4 no.
Pans (different sizes) 6 no.
Min/max. thermometer 1 no.
Laboratory Thermometer 2 no.
Bi-metal Thermometer 6 no.
Elec. thermometer 2 no.
Sample splitter 3/4” 1 no.
Sample splitter 2” 1 no.
Timing Device 2 no.
Pair-Asbestos Gloves as required.
Pair-Rubber Gloves as required.
Deep Cement Pans, 450 x 450 x 75 mm 2 no.
Chloride, Alkalinity and Water Hardness 1 set
Pocket Calculator, Scientific 4 no.
Type 30’ and 45’ - 300 mm Triangle 2 no.
Type 30’ and 45’ - 150 mm Triangle 2 no.
Metric Ruler 2 no.
Large Log Book 2 no.
Pencil Sharpener 2 no.
150 mm Protractor 2 no.
Assorted French Curve Set 1 no.
Claw hammer 2 no.
Hammer 1 kg 2 no.
Hammer 2.5 kg 2 no.
Assorted Screwdrivers (Set) 2 no.

A4 Clip Board 6 no.

Cross Section paper (Graphiquest Canson) - Pad as required.
Table Brush 3 no.
Vacuum Pump 1 no.
Vacuum Pycno-meters, volume 1 lt. 12 no.
Plastic Tubing Vacuum Line, 15 m 1 no.
Slide calipers 1 no.
Micro meter (mm reading) 1 no.
Riffle box slot 40 mm 2
Flakiness Gauge 1
Large oven 225 L 2
Sand Pouring Cylinder 200 mm dia. 2
Sand Pouring Cylinder 150 mm dia. 2
Calibration Container 200 mm dia. 1
Tray 150 mm hole and 200 mm dia. 1
Calibration Container 150 mm dia. 1
4.5 kg rammer 2
Sample Extruder 2
Sieve Brushes 12
Wash Bottles 12
Maximum/minimum thermometer 2
75 Micron, 450 dia. 300 deep sieves 2
10 mm approx. 300 mm dia. sieves 2
Swell tripod for CBR mould 4
Pycnometers for S.G. 10
Constant temperature bath 23-56 C 1
1p 38c thermometer 230-270C 1
Pycnometer 1000 ml 1
4.75 mm approx. 300 mm dia 2
Spacer disk 50 mm thick 24
Field scale 2.6 kg 3
Field scale 20 kg 3
Filter paper (CBR) 10 packs of
100
Soil Investigations
Lightweight Penetrometer (Künzelstab) 2 no.
250 x 250 mm Ground Plate Glass 2 no.
Liquid limit device (Casagrande) 2 no.
Modified Proctor hammer 4.5 kg 2 no.
CBR Laboratory testing machine, hydraulic 1 no.
Trimming Knife, 6” Blade 4 no.
Plastic Graduated Cylinder, 1000 ml. 4 no.

Plastic Graduated Cylinder, 100 ml. 4 no.

Dynamic Cone Penetrometer, complete with 5 No. spare cones 1 set
and carrying case
Light Weight Dynamic Penetrometer, hand-operated, i.e. 1 set
complete set with lifting device, 10 extension rods with threaded
nipples and carrying case with 5 No. spare cones
Cictran DCP 3.0 software package for Dynamic Cone 1 no.
Penetrometer
Wash Bottle 2 no.
Small Sand Scoop 2 no.
Flexible Spatula 6” , Blade 1” wide 5 no.
Moulds for above 24 no.
Bottom plates for moulds 12 no.
Perforated bottom plates 12 no.
Collars for moulds 24 no.
Surcharge weights 6 sets
Micrometers with plates and stands for swell 6 sets
Polyethylene bags 40 lt. As required
Rubber mallet 2 no.
Galvanised tray 0.75 x 0.75 m x 0.05 m 5 no.
Galvanised tray 0.25 x 0.25 x 0.03 m 5 no.
Trowel 5 no.
Spoon 5 no.
Soil Mortar 1 no.
Soil Pestle 1 no.
Aggregate Testing
Aggregate Impact Value Device (complete) 1 no.
Aggregate Crushing Value 1 set
Aluminium trays (0.45 x 0.2 x 0.03 m) 10 no.
Flakiness sieves 1 set
Concrete Testing
Concrete test cube moulds 150mm x 150mm x 150mm 24 no.
Concrete cubes testing equipment (hydraulic press 2000 kn.) 1 no.
Slump test device 2 sets.
Trowel 2 no.
Concrete Test Hammer (Schmidt Hammer or similar) 1 no.
Slump Cone 3 no.
Tamping Rod 3 no.
Straight edge 3 no.
Steel ruler 3 no.
Field Density Test
1” Steel Chisel 4 no.
Large Sand Scoop 4 no.
Density Bottle 4 no.
Mixing Trowel 4 no.
Rubber Mallet 4 no.

Field Density Plate 4 no.

Sampling Spoon 4 no.
Sand replacement density app., complete with plastic jugs 4 no.
Plastic Jug 4 no.
One Gallon Field Can 4 no.
Nuclear density meter 1 no.
Sand Equivalent Test
Sand Equivalent Test Set 1 no.
Sand Equivalent Stock Solution (1 kg) 10 no.
Mechanical Analysis of Soils
Hydrometer 1 no.
Stopwatch 30 min, 1/5 sec. 1 no.
Beaker Glass, 250 ml. 1 no.
Asphalt Concrete Testing
Bitumen extraction machine (SMM type) 1 no.
Beakers for above 6 no.
Solvent as required
Extractors 3 no.
Cartridges for extractors 100 no.
BI-metal thermometer (0 - 300 °C) 100 and 300 mm 6 no.
Electrical thermometer (0 -300 °C) 2 no.
0.10 m core drilling machine with 12 core drills 1 no.
Sampling and Testing Bituminous Materials
0.5 lt. Sample Can 24 no.
0.5 lt. Small Mouth Can 24 no.
Penetro-meter with 5 needles 1 no.
Softening point devices including heating 1 no.
Marshall Test
Bench Mixer, 15 lt. capacity 1 no.
Stirring Rod 2 no.
Automatic Marshall compaction machine with hammer and 1 no.
pedestal
Marshall compaction moulds complete 12 no.
Filter paper for moulds As required
Automatic Compression Machine with flow and stability gauges 1 no.
Sample ejecting device 1 no.
Stability Mould 1 no.
Thermostatically controlled Standard Water Bath to 60 °C 1 no.

Table 1403/3 (b) List of Laboratory Equipment for Asphalt surfaced roads (Double
Bituminous Surface Treatment)
Item no Description Quantity
1 Set of soil sieves: 3", 2½", 2", 1¾", 1½", 1", ¾", ½", 3/8”, ¼, 1
No. 4, 8, 10, 16, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100, and 200 with lid
and bottom pan (8 inch in diameter brass)
2 Sample splitter max. 1" 1
3 Sample splitter max. 2½" 1
4 Mixing tray (610 X 610 X 63 mm) 2
5 Tray for drying soil 10 X 14 X 2 inch aluminium baking tray 6
6 Heavy duty solution balance 20 Kg capacity X 1 g sensitivity 1
7 Digital analytical balance 330 g capacity X 0.001 g sensitivity 1
8 Bench balance 16 Kg capacity X 5 g sensitivity 1
9 Plate form scale 100 kg capacity 50 g sensitivity 1
10 Standard proctor mould 1
11 Standard compaction rammer 1
12 6 inch sand density cone apparatus 1
13 Universal extruder 1
14 Liquid limit device with counter including grooving tool 1
15 Plastic limit set 1
16 Constant temperature water bath 1
17 Hydrometer jar 1000ml with rubber bung 6
18 Soil hydrometer 152 H 1
19 Sodium hexametaphosphate 1000g 1
20 High speed stirrer 1
21 Oven 20 lit Capacity 1
22 CBR mechanical loading press motor operated 1
23 CBR mould with solid CBR base 4
24 Filter screen 8
25 Spacer disc 1
26 Annular surcharge 8
27 Slotted surcharge 8
28 Dial gauge tripod 1
29 Dial gauge 10 mm X 0.01 mm 1
30 Swell plate 4
31 Straight edge 1
32 Concrete compression tester 1
33 150 mm single cube mould 12
34 Steel slump cone test set 2
35 Sand absorption cone and tamper 1
36 Unit weight measure 3 lit. capacity 1
37 Unit weight measure 14 lit capacity 1
38 Density basket 1
39 Reference colours glass 1
40 Graduated impurities test bottle 500 ml 1
41 Spatula 1
42 Evaporating dish 2

Item no Description Quantity
43 Washing sieve No 200 (stainless 8 in) 2

44 Sieve No 4 and 3/4" (stainless 450 mm) 1
45 Sieve brushes (course and fine) 1
46 Plastic beakers 400 ml 2
47 Graduated cylinder 250 ml 2
48 Graduated cylinder 25 ml 6
49 Plastic wash bottle 2
50 Soil scoop (Aluminium) 1
51 Sampling spoon 1
52 Rubber Mallet 1
53 Thermometer 2
54 Tong 1
55 Equipment for penetration of bituminous materials 1 set
56 Equipment for kinematic and absolute viscosity 1 set
57 Saybolt Furol viscometer 1 set
58 Specific gravity test equipment for bituminous materials 1 set

Table 1403/3 (c) List of laboratory equipment for gravel surfaced roads
Soil test Quantity

Equipment description Model Required
No. Unit Nr.
A. Equipment
Laboratory Oven, Capacity 240 Lit. L-158 Each 1
Laboratory Oven Capacity 50 Lit. L-6 Each 1
Hot Plate (max tmp. 3500C) L-236 Each 1
Burner (Gas) Two Flames - 2
Bunsen Burner with Tripod - 1
Heavy Duty Balance (20 kg) L-500 Each 1
Triple Beam Balance (2610 gr.) L-410 Each 3
Triple Beam Balance (311 gr.) L-817 Each 3
Platform Balance (115 kg.) L-855M Each 1
Wall Clock - Each 1
Stop Watch Lt-475 Each 1
Vernier Caliper - Each 1
Thermometer General 0-2000C - Each 2
Max. & Min. Thermometer - Each 1
Sapling Tools Complete - Each 1
Togs G -120 Each 2
Dissector G - 61 Each 1
Breaker (Pyrex) 250 ml G-5 Each 3
Breaker (Pyrex) 500 ml G-8 Each 4
Breaker (Pyrex) 1000 Ml. G–9 Each 6
Funnel 250 ml - Each 2
Funnel 500 ml - Each 2
Volumetric Flask Stoppered 100 ml G – 40 Each 4
Volumetric Flask Stoppered 250 ml G – 26 Each 4
Volumetric Flask Stoppered 500 ml. G – 27 Each 4
Volumetric Bottle Flask 250 ml. G – 41 Each 4
Volumetric Bottle Flask 500 ml. G – 42 Each 4
Wash Bottle 100 ml G - 10 Each 2
Wash Bottle 250 ml. G - 10 Each 2
Wash Bottle 500 ml. G – 10 Each 2
Graduate Cylinder 100 ml G – 18 Each 3
Graduate Cylinder 250 ml. G – 19 Each 2
Graduate Cylinder 1000 ml G – 21 Each 8
Reagent Bottle Stoppered 2 lit - Each 2
Aluminum Cans with cover 2” dia. LT – 30 Each As Req.
Aluminum Cans with cover 4” dia. LT – 30 Each As Req.
Scoop CN – 502 Each 2
Brush (Fine) - Each 3
Wire Brush Coarse CL-375 Each 3
Wire Brush Fine CL-316 Each 3
Bucket 12 lit. - Each 3
Trolley - Each 1
Shovel (Large) DR – 26 Each 1
Pickaxe - Each 4

Soil test Quantity

No. Unit Nr.
Sample splitter (Coarse) CL – 287 Each 1
Sample Splitter (Fine) CL - 280 Each 1
Sieve Shaker for 8” Dia. Each
Sieve (Motorized) DL – 300A Each 1
Seive Shaker for 8” Dia Each
Seive (motorized) CL – 343 Each 1
Tin Pan/Tray 12” x 12” x 2” Local Each 18
Made
Tin Pan/Tray 16” x 12’ x 3” Local Each 16
Made
Tin Pan/Tray 24” x 16” x 3” Local Each 12
Made
Tin Pan/Tray 20” x 16” x 4”: Local Each 10
Made
Mortar Porcelain 200 mm with CL – 281
Rubber covered pestle CL – 282 Each 1
B. Sieve Analysis For Coarse & Fine Aggregates
Sieves set diam. 8’’ mm 3’’ downwards to no. ASTM-1 each 2
200”
Wt Washing No. 200 CL 385 Each 3
Pan CB-8500 Each 3
Cover CB-8506 Each 3
C. Attergerg Limits
Liquid Limit Test Set (with all accessories) CL – 209 Each 2
Plastic Limit Test Set (with all accessories CL – 257 Each 2
Shrinkage Limit Set (with all accessories) CL – 256 Each 1
D.Unit Weight & Specific Gravity Test For Coarse And Fine Aggregate
Density Basket (Brass G-340 Each 1
Sand Absorption Cone & Tamper G-325 Each 1
Pyconometer 25 ml. G-341 Each 1
Pycnometer 50 ml G-342 Each 1
Pycnometer 100ml G-343 Each 1
E. Soundness Test For Coarse & Fine Aggregate
Distilled Water - 1 As rqd.
Sodium Sulfate Solution - kg As rqd.
F. Modigied Compaciton Test
Straight edge CN-838 Each 2
Scoop CN-505 Each 2
Scoop CN-502A Each 2
Mixing Spoons CN – 995 Each 2
Sample Ejector P – 103 Each 1
Modified Compaction Hammers 10 lb. CN – 416 Each 4
Modified Compaction Model 6” Dia CN – 403 Each 4
Preparation Knife CN – 89 Each 1
Wooden Hammer - Each 2
Mixing Tray 24” x 24” x3” - Each As rqd.
G. Cbr Laboratory Test

Soil test Quantity

No. Unit Nr.
Soaking Tank 60” x 120” x 24” - Each 1
Addition CBR Model 6” Dia. With collars CN – 450 Each 15
plate, screws
Filter Screens CN – 556 Packet As rqd.
Swell Plates CN – 400 Each 15
Surcharge Weight CN – 557 Each 30
Surcharge Weight (Slotted) CN – 558 Each 2
Tripod attachment CN – 401 Each 15
Dail Indicator LC – 8 Each 15
Spacer Disc CN – 393 Each 2
CBR Loading Press (hydraulic) CN – 472 Each 1
Providing Ring 2000 lb. Pr – 60 Each 1
Providing Ring 6000 lb. - Each 1
Providing Ring 10000 lb. - Each 1
H. Field Density Test
Sand Cone Bottle CN – 992 Each 5
Density Plate CN- 994 Each 5
Plastic Jug for Sand - Each 5
Replacement Jug CN – 993 Each 5
Spoon CN-995 Each 5
Plastic Bags - Each As rqd.
Chisel 12” CN-998 Each 5
Hammer 2.5 lb. - Each 5
Field Balance L-770B Each 5
Speedy Moisture Tester MG-320 Each 5
Sieve No. 30 (0.60 mm) CB-830 Each 5
Density Sand Bag - Bags As rqd.
Nuclear Density Gauge - Set 2
I. Concrete & Cement Test
Compressive Strength Machine with Each 1
possibility of Tensile Strength
Heavy duty (250,000 lb.) CT – 755 Each 1
Vibrator CT – 106 Each 1
Concrete Tray CT-58 Each As rqd.
Cylinder Mold Heavy Duty 6” dia. CT-35 Each 4
Cylinder Capping Apparatus CT-56-4 Each 24
Concrete Capping Compound CT-55 Each 6
Slump Test CT-69 Each 1
Cube Molds 6” x 6” x 6” CT-60 Each 1
Tamper G-325 Each 3
Schmidt Concrete Test Hammer CT-320 Each 4
Steel Straight Edge - Each 1
Steel Scale - Each 1
Curing Tank with temperature control - Each As rqd.
Hand Gloves (Rubber) - Each 1
Trowel Triangular Blade CT-67 Each 2
Cement Mold Brush CT-68B Each 4

Soil test Quantity

No. Unit Nr.
J.SOIL INVESTIGTION AND SAMPLING
Post-hole Auger 4 in DR – 34 Each 1
Helical Auger 2 in A– 4 Each 1
Table 1403/3 (d) List of Laboratory Equipment for bridge structures
Item Item And Description Quantity Catalogue No.

No Or Mon. No.
1 Concrete Compression Tester 250,000
lb. capacity motorized (220 V 60 Hz.) 1 CT-755
2 Safety Guard 1 CT-717
3 Splitting Tensile Bearing Bar 1 CT-113
4 Cylinder Molds-reusable plastic
6” x 12” long (prefer seamless molds) 12 CT-153
5 Cylinder Caper (6”) 1 CT-53
6 Warming Pot 220 V with Capping 1 L-116-4
ladle
7 Cyclap capping compound 50 lb. 4 CT-59B
8 Cylinder curing tank 2 ft wide x 2 ft
deep x 6 ft long with rounded ends 1
9 Concrete Test Hammer 1 CT-320AM
10 Slump Cone Mold 1 CT-69
Slump Cone Base and Tamping Rod 1 Set CT-88 and CT-22
11 Air Entertainment Meter 1 CT-129
12 Organic Impurities Test Set 1 CT-95
13 Platform Beam Scale for
Site measurement of bulk Density 1 L-860
14 Forced Draft Oven 1,600 W 220 V
AC(same as for soil lab) 1 L-24
19” x 15” x 18”
15 Electronic Balance -27 kg. cap.
(same as for soil lab) 1 L-620A
16 Electronic Balance 220 V
(same as for soil lab) 1 L-1115
17 Aggregate Shaker 220 V
(same as for soil lab) 1 CL-325H-8
18 Set of Sieves includes 3/4, 3/8 in Nos.
4,8,16,30,50,100 lid and bottom pan (8 1 CBC Model
in brass)
19 Motorized Sieve Shaker
(same as for soil) 1 CL-500-2
20 Galvanized Mixing/drying Tray
(24 x 24 x 3”) 2 CT-58
21 Mixing/drying Pans Stainless
(16 x 11 x 2½”) 6 LT-610
22 Drying Pans Aluminum 9 x 13 x 2 10 LT-608

Item Item And Description Quantity Catalogue No.

No Or Mon. No.
23 Drying Pans 7 in stainless 10 LT-602
24 Aggregate Scoop Pan 2 CL-292
25 Scoop Stainless Steel
5 ½ x 11½ “ 1
26 Scoop 31/4 x 5” Aluminum 2 CN-502
27 Tongs 1 G-120
28 Plastic Wash Bottles
(same as for soil lab) 6 G-97
29 Aluminum Moisture Tins 2 x 7/8”
high (same as for soil lab) 24 LT-16
31/2 x 2 in. high 24 LT-19
30 Galvanized Pails 3½ gal. 2 LT-146
31 Specific Gravity Set 1 CT-92
32 Sodium Hydroxide Solution(pints) 6 CT-98
Colour Chart 1 CT-97
33 Metal Dust Pan and Brush 1
34 General Tool Kit 1
35 ASTM Standards for Concrete & 1 LT-750
Mineral Aggregates (04-02)
36 Portable Fume Hood 1
37 Vent Ducting - Flexible 1
38 Vent outlet 1

Table 1403/4 Laboratory Fittings and Furniture
Item Description Quantity

Ordinary chairs, 15 ampere 220 volt electricity plug points, and
lights shall be as specified for offices.
1 Metal table 3
2 Metal chairs 12
3 Shelf space provided against walls shall be of heavy

construction and shelving shall be in a suitable timber or steel
material as required. Shelving below work tables shall be 390
mm above floor level. Shelving above working areas shall be 1
980 mm above floor level.
4 Work bench areas shall be of two types as may be required:
(1) Wooden construction. The tops shall be hard and smooth,

free from warping or other defects.
(2) Concrete tops. The tops shall be at least 75 mm thick

concrete slabs with a smooth hard steel trowelled finish.
All work benches shall be sturdy and the upper surface

shall be 920 mm above floor level
5 Concrete working floors shall be at least 125 mm thick and

provided with a hard smooth finish. The working floors shall be
either entirely open or under a lean -to roof required.
6 Wash basins shall be as ordered either in stainless steel or

precast concrete with an area of at least 0.3 sq.m. and minimum
depth 0.3 m. They shall be provided with swan neck type
laboratory taps and drain pipe.
2
7 Fire extinguishers shall be of the BCF
(Bromochlorodifluoromethane) type manufactured to BS 1721
and suitable for Types A, B, C and E fires. The extinguishers
shall contain no less than 2.5 kg of extinguishers fluid and shall
be fitted to the wall at a suitable position by means of quick
release brackets. They shall be freshly charged and the seals
shall be unbroken.
8 Extractor fans shall be mounted where required in such a

manner that they will operate silently. They shall have a
capacity of at least 0.15 kW each.

Table 1403/5 Floor area for Engineer’s Office
Item Description Area (m2)
1 Resident Engineer's Office 12

2 Assistant Resident Engineer's Office 10
3 General Office (partitioned as required) 60
4 Secretary's Office 8
5 Conference Room 15
6 Computer Room 8
7 Kitchen Unit 6
8 Ablution Unit 2
9 toilets + 1 wash basin 6
10 Other Miscellaneous rooms as may be ordered by the 53
Engineer
Total Floor Area shall be 200 m2, unless otherwise

specified.
Table 1403/6 Floor area for Laboratory
Item Description Area (m2)

1 Soils Laboratory 40
2 Oven and soaking room 20
3 Sample storage 15
4 Office 10
5 Store 15
Total area shall be 100 m2, unless otherwise
specified
Table 1404/1 –Floor area for Housing Accommodation to the Engineer/Supervisor
Room Type Minimum Floor Area (m2)
Lounge 20
Dining Area 12
Kitchen 8
Bedroom 15
Toilet room 9
The total floor area for type a and type b houses shall not be less than 120 m 2 and 85 m2,
unless otherwise specified.

Table 1404/2 Equipment for the Engineer’s housing
Item Description No.

1 Refrigerator-freezer combination, 1.0 cu. m. 1
minimum;
2 Four plate stoves complete with grill, oven and 1

splash plate;
3 Electric water heater(s) with a total capacity of 200 1

litres;
4 Built in wardrobes (app. Size 1980 mm x 915 mm x

485 mm) in the bedroom or metal wardrobes in the
bedrooms;
5 Beds including mattresses and box springs, adequate

for 4 adults in each house/ apartment.
6 The motel type housing (dormitory) shall have one

queen size bed with mattresses and box springs, one
table with chair, 165 litre refrigerator, air
conditioning/ heating unit of at least 1.2 kW and one
wardrobe/ cupboard.

Any thing specified for the Engineer’s facilities shall be deemed to be covered by the
relevant items, unless otherwise, a separate pay item is established for it.
Item 14.01 Office Building Complete as specified including furniture (Table 1403/1 &
Table 1403/5) ...............................................................................................sq. m
Item 14.02 Laboratory Building Complete as specified including furniture

(Table1403/6) ...............................................................................................sq. m
The measurement of construction of the office and laboratory buildings shall be on square
meters of plinth area (including corridor and veranda) of the accommodation. Except for
items detailed elsewhere in the contract, the payment includes that of providing the
necessary fittings, installations in accordance with the details given in contract and the
furniture, equipment and supplies.
Item 14.03 Items measured and paid for by the lump sum
(i) Office Equipment as per Table 1403/2 .......................................................... lump sum
(ii) Laboratory Equipment as per Table 1403/3 ................................................. lump sum
Payment at the lump sum tendered shall be in full compensation for providing the complete
service or installation and the use thereof including any fixed and usage charges payable to
local or other authorities.

Item 14.04 Services

Provision of water, electricity, L.P gas, tanks, sewage and rubbish removal, cleaning
services, all as specified in Sub-Clause 1405 and including the construction and maintenance
of the access roads, footpaths, fencing, car parks etc:
a) Fixed Costs………………………………………………………… ......…Lump Sum
b) Maintenance and Services for offices and laboratories.......... ......................... ...month
Payment of the lump sum tendered shall be in full compensation for providing the services
specified.
Item 14.05 Vehicles for Engineer and his staff

Vehicle type A.........................................................................................number (no.)
Vehicle type B........................................................................................number (no.)
Vehicle type C........................................................................................number (no.)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of vehicles as specified in Clause 1406, which
are provided on the Engineer's instructions.
Item 14.06 Provision of fuel and lubricants and the servicing, maintenance, and repair
of vehicles for the Engineer and his staff
(a) Fuel, service and maintain vehicle, vehicle Type A .. ................................. (veh.-mth)
(b) Fuel, service and maintain vehicle, vehicle Type B ................................... (veh.-mth)
(c) Fuel, service and maintain vehicle, vehicle Type C ................................... (veh.-mth)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of vehicles multiplied by the calendar month.
(d) Fuel, service and maintain vehicle in excess of 3000 km for any vehicle in any one
calendar month, vehicle Type A ....... ................................................................. .kilometer (km)
(e) Fuel, service and maintain vehicle in excess of 3000 km for any vehicle in any one
calendar month, vehicle Type B ......................................................................... kilometer (km)
(f) Fuel, service and maintain vehicle in excess of 3000 km for any vehicle in any one
calendar month, vehicle Type C ........................................................................ .kilometer (km)
The measurement for this item shall be based on the cumulative distance travelled by each
vehicle.
Item 14.07 Attendance upon the Engineer and his staff

(a) Driver for the Engineer's vehicles ..........................................man - month (man-mth)
(b) Chairman ................................................................................man - month (man-mth)
Item 14.08 Additional office and laboratory equipment ordered by the Engineer
(a) Additional equipment..………........ ...............................Provisional Sum (Prov. Sum)
(b) Allow percentage on-cost to invoiced amounts for equipment supplied under..... Item
14.08 (a)................................. .............................................................................Percentage (%)
Payment for Item 14.08 (a) shall be the sum of the invoiced amounts for any additional
equipment ordered by the Engineer under this item.

Payment for Item 14.08 (b) shall be the tendered percentage of the amount paid under Item
14.08(a).
Item 14.09 Building, House Type, Complete, as specified, including fixtures

a) Type A housing ……..........................................................................................(sq. m)
b) Type B housing ……..........................................................................................(sq. m)
c) Type C housing ……..........................................................................................(sq. m)
Item 14.10 Building, Apartment Type, Complete, as specified, including fixtures

................................................................................................................... (sq. m)
Item 14.11 Motel style accommodation complete including, as specified, fixtures ...........
.................................................................................................................... (sq. m)
The measurement of construction of the residential accommodation shall be on square
meters of plinth area (including corridor and veranda) of the accommodation. Except for
items detailed elsewhere in the contract, the payment includes that of providing the
necessary fittings, installations in accordance with the details given in contract and the
furniture, equipment and supplies.
In case the Contractor fails to complete and hand over the complete residential
accommodation within the period stipulated in Sub-Clause 1402 above, an amount set out in
the contract per month or part thereof shall be debited to the Contractor’s account for the
period of delay.
The measurement for maintenance of supervisory staff residential accommodation shall be in
maintenance months and shall be made on completion of satisfactory maintenance every
month. If at any stage the Contractor fails to carry out the required maintenance
satisfactorily, an amount set out in the contract or part thereof shall be debited to the
Contractor’s account. In addition, the months during which the Contractor fails to carry out
the required maintenance satisfactorily shall not be measured for payment.
The work provided in this item shall be as shown in the Bill of Quantities. The Contract unit
rate for constructing and providing residential accommodation for Engineer/ Employer
supervisory staff shall include all the expenses for the work described, supply of furniture
and equipment, including provision of uninterrupted supply of water and power.
Item 14.12 Items measured by number

(a) Air conditioning unit ............................................................................................ (no.)
(b) Heater ................................................................................................................. (no.)
(c) Gas burners (including provision of gas installation) ........................................... (no.)
The unit of measurement shall be the authorized number of units supplied and installed,
complete and in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings together with all minor
fittings, brackets, connections, leads, mountings, etc.
Item 14.13 Services for residential accommodation(s)....................................... per month

Provision of water, electricity, LP gas, tanks, sewage and rubbish removal, cleaning services,
all as specified in this section and including the construction and maintenance of the access
roads, footpaths, fencing, car parks etc:

Item 14.14 Temporary facilities of the Engineer

(i) Office fully fitted, furnished and equipped including all services……...... ……month
(ii) Laboratory fully fitted, furnished and equiped including all services…. .......... .month
(iii) Housing Accommodation fully fitted, furnished and equiped including all services
(a) Type A houses……………………........................................................... .month
(b) Type B houses………………… .......................................................... ….month
(c) Type C houses………………… ........................................................... …month
(iv) Vehicles including all operating costs
(a) Type A…………………… .................................................................. ….month
(b) Type B………………… ................................................................... ……month
(c) Type C……………………… ................................................................... month
Payment of the lump sum tendered items shall be in full compensation for providing the
services specified
Payment for items 14.01, 14.02, 14.03, 14.04 (a), 14.09, 14.10, 14.11 and 14.12 shall be
made as follows:
80% of the amount will be paid when the item is provided and erected, fitted or installed to
the Engineer’s satisfaction. A further 10% will be paid when the value of all permanent work
done, excluding escalation, exceeds one-half of the tendered amount, and the remaining 10%
will be payable in the certificate which follows the removal of the items from the site.
Payment at tendered unit rates for the various items of payment scheduled in this Division,
shall be in full compensation for providing, procuring erecting, installing and/or fitting the
item or service as may be required or specified, for the use of the item or service including
replacements when defective and all transport, handling and other costs.
For time related cost items, the rate shall continue to be applicable during any extended
period of the construction work, unless other rates agreed by the contracting parties.
Payment under Item 14. 05 shall be made in full in the payment certificate following the date
of handover of the vehicle to the Engineer.

DIVISION 1500: TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
1501 SCOPE
This Division covers the construction and maintenance of temporary traffic diversions,
barricades, signs, and the provision and operation of traffic lights and everything necessary
for the safe and easy passage of all public and construction traffic during the performance of
the Contract including the reinstatement of traffic diversions.
(a) General
The existing road reserve will be handed over to the Contractor for maintenance purposes in
lengths in accordance with the requirements of the works program and as agreed upon unless
otherwise specified by the Engineer.
At least 30 days prior to commencement of the Works the Contractor shall prepare and
submit to the Engineer for approval a Traffic Management Plan which will ensure the safe
and easy passage of public and construction traffic through or around the Works at all times.
The Contractor should allow for maintaining through traffic at all times. In exceptional
circumstances road closures of up to one-hour duration may be permitted by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall give reasonable notice of any proposed road closures.
On completion of a day's work the Contractor shall leave the works in such a condition to
allow the safe passage of through traffic. The Contractor shall be responsible for complying
with all regulations relating to the temporary closure of roads.
Should the road width be restricted or should there be any form of obstruction or danger to
traffic, the Contractor shall supply adequate flagmen, signs, barriers, lights, communications
and staff to ensure that the traffic is safely conducted though the Works.
(b) Minimum vertical clearance

The minimum vertical clearance over any portion of a bypass shall be 5.3 m
If the minimum clearance available is less than 5.3 m, the minimum clearance shall be
indicated on approved signs at approved locations on and in advance of the obstruction.
(c) Property and survey monuments

Where possible, Traffic Diversions shall be constructed so as not to damage or displace
property or trigonometrical survey monuments. In exceptional cases where this is not
possible the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in good time so that he may arrange to have
these suitably referenced before they are displaced.
(d) Access to properties

The Contractor shall also provide and allow access to persons whose properties fall within or
adjoin the area over which he is working and in this respect the Contractor's attention is
drawn to the Conditions of Contract. No separate payment shall be made for the provisions
and maintenance of such accesses and facilities except where they extend beyond the road
reserve.

(e) Public services

Public services affected by temporary diversions shall be treated in a similar manner as
services affected by the permanent works and payment shall be made in accordance with the
provisions of section 1200 of these specifications.
(f) Temporary works

The Traffic Diversions provided by the Contractor shall include the construction of
temporary fences, drainage works, and other incidentals considered necessary by the
Engineer.
1503 TRAFFIC BARRIERS, SIGNING AND LIGHTING
(a) Traffic Barriers:

The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain barricades, traffic signs and warning
boards, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(b) Traffic Signing:

The Contractor shall provide warning lights and a sufficient number of flagmen and he shall
take all necessary precautions for the protection of the Works and for the safety of the
travelling public.
(c) Traffic Lights:

The Contractor may provide traffic control by means of three phase traffic lights at locations
where there is inadequate width for two way traffic or where construction plant disrupts the
flow of through traffic.
Traffic lights used in these circumstances shall be permanently manned.
1504 CONSTRUCTION OF TEMPORARY TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS
(a) General
Where described in the Contract, the Contractor shall provide temporary traffic diversions
for the public traffic around the Works.
The temporary traffic diversions provided by the Contractor shall include the construction of
all necessary temporary fences, drainage works and other incidentals.
(b) Maximum Length

Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer the maximum length of a temporary traffic
diversion shall be 10 kilometres.
(c) Minimum Width

Temporary traffic diversions shall be a minimum of 3.5 metres and 7.5 metres width for
single and two way traffic respectively.

1505 ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC WHERE THE ROAD IS CONSTRUCTED IN HALF

WIDTHS
Where it is necessary or impracticable to construct temporary diversions, the Contractor
shall construct the road in half widths, allowing traffic to use that half of the road not under
construction at the time. The lengths of the half width construction shall be kept to a
minimum, with provision for traffic traveling in opposite directions to pass at frequent
intervals.
The Contractor shall so arrange his work that the traffic will at all times have free one-way
access to at least half the width of the roadway during the construction period. He shall
maintain that half of the road, which is being used for traffic for the time being to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
The maximum length of a single working lane shall be 500 meters alternating as shown
below:
The maximum width shall be 3m. (Alternating one-way traffic at a time).

Should the road not be in a safe trafficable condition for two-way traffic over the whole
width at the end of each day's work, the Contractor shall supply adequate flagmen, signs
barriers, lights and necessary staff at his own cost to ensure a reasonable free flow of traffic
alternately in each direction throughout the whole period that the roadway is open to
one-way traffic only.
No separate payment will be made to the Contractor for working in half widths.
1506 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE WORKS

The Contractor shall construct the necessary temporary drainage works to deal adequately
with any surface run-off, such as side drains, catch water drains, miter drains, culverts, etc.
Temporary culverts shall be installed on existing drainage channels wherever required by the
Engineer and of sizes and types ordered by him. Any suitable metal or precast concrete
culverts salvaged from an existing road or abandoned bypass may be re-used if in a good
condition and approved by the Engineer.
1507 EARTHWORKS FOR TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS

The Contractor shall shape and grade the Traffic Diversions making full use of all material
that can be obtained from alongside the Traffic Diversions, from side cut or from the
immediate vicinity. If sufficient material cannot be obtained in this manner, he shall import
material from other sources. Where necessary, cuts shall be made to obtain a satisfactory
vertical alignment.
The Contractor shall also perform the necessary clearing and grubbing including the removal
of all trees and stumps. Where the existing ground is not sufficiently dense in its natural
condition, it shall be compacted as specified in Series 4000 for earthworks these
Specifications prior to the construction of the earthworks.
All fill material shall be spread and compacted in accordance with series 4000.

1508 GRAVELLING OF TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS OR OF EXISTING ROADS USED AS TRAFFIC

DIVERSIONS
When the earthworks for Traffic Diversions as described in Clause 1507 have been
completed, those portions of the Traffic Diversions and of existing gravel roads used as
Traffic Diversions indicated by the Engineer, shall be provided with a wearing course of
suitable granular material approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide, spread, water, mix and compact such material to a density
where it can carry traffic without undue wear and tear. The granular material shall be spread
and compacted in accordance with series 4000.
In case of disagreement between the Engineer and the Contractor as to the adequacy of the
compaction a dry density equal to 93% of AASHTO T180 density shall be taken as the
required minimum density.
1509 SELECTED- GRAVEL LAYERS, CRUSHED STONE OR ASPHALT BASE,

STABILIZATION, AND ROAD MARKING REQUIRED FOR BITUMEN-SURFACED TEMPORARY
DIVERSIONS
Where specified in the project specifications or required by the engineer, gravel layers of
selected subgrade or subbase quality, crushed-stone base, asphalt base or stabilized gravel
layers shall be constructed and road marking shall be done by the contractor, all in
accordance with the requirements of the relevant sections of these specifications and the
engineer's instructions.
1510 EXISTING ROADS USED AS TEMPORARY DIVERSIONS

Where existing roads are to be used as temporary diversions, the contractor shall, after
consultation with the owner or authority having control of such road, carry out any repairs,
alterations or additions to such roads as may be required to bring them in a condition suitable
for traffic. This work will be paid for as stipulated hereinafter.
1511 BITUMEN SURFACED TEMPORARY DIVERSIONS

Where required in the project specifications or by the engineer, temporary diversions shall
be provided with bituminous surfacing in accordance with the requirements of series 6 000
or of the project specifications. or as may be prescribed by the Engineer.
1512 MAINTENANCE OF GRAVEL TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS

All gravel Traffic Diversions shall be maintained by the Contractor in a safe trafficable
condition. Whenever required by the Engineer, the traffic diversion shall be bladed and
rolled by means of self-propelled graders and rollers to provide a smooth riding surface free
of corrugations. All potholes shall be promptly repaired.
The Contractor shall water the Traffic Diversions to keep down dust or in order to facilitate
the proper blading of the surface. All drainage works shall be maintained in good working
order.
1513 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING ROADS

All existing roads shall be maintained by the Contractor in a safe trafficable condition.
Wherever required by the Engineer, gravel roads shall be bladed and rolled by means of self-

propelled graders and rollers to provide a smooth riding surface free of corrugations. All
potholes shall be promptly repaired.
The Contractor shall water the gravel roads to keep down dust or in order to facilitate the
proper blading of the surface. All drainage works shall be maintained in good working
order.
1514 THE CONTRACTOR'S USE OF TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS

When the Contractor constructs Traffic Diversions, haul or construction roads at his own
initiative for accommodating construction traffic, he shall construct and maintain them at his
own cost and only in accordance with details previously agreed upon in writing with the
Engineer. Such roads shall be removed and the surface properly reinstated when no longer
required, also at the Contractor's own cost.
The Contractor shall have the right to use public roads including Traffic Diversions open to
public traffic, but where his own traffic causes excessive damage or wear to such roads or
constitutes a hazardous condition to public traffic, the Engineer shall have the right to
regulate his traffic over such Traffic Diversions and require the Contractor to provide at his
own cost such maintenance, including wearing course gravel and watering, as in the
Engineer's opinion is necessary in addition to what would be required to properly maintain
the Traffic Diversions when not used by the Contractor's construction traffic. Where
regulation of the Contractor's traffic does not alleviate the traffic hazard satisfactorily or the
maintenance of the Traffic Diversions cannot be or is not properly executed, the Contractor
shall, where conditions permit, divert his traffic over construction roads provided and
maintained at his own cost.
1515 REMOVAL OF TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS

When traffic is routed permanently onto the new road following the completion of
construction, the Traffic Diversions, which are no longer required, shall be removed and the
area reinstated to its natural condition.
Item 15.01 Accommodating traffic and maintaining temporary diversions......................

....................................................................... ............................. Kilometer (km)
The unit of measurement shall be the kilometer, measured along the centre lines of
temporary diversions, existing roads used as temporary diversions, and roads constructed in
half-widths. It shall not include sections along which the traffic is diverted onto existing
roads where the contractor is not responsible for the maintenance of such existing roads.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for accommodating traffic and maintaining
temporary diversions, including roads constructed in half-widths and existing roads used as
temporary diversions during construction and maintenance periods, but excluding
maintenance and repair work for which payment is specifically made under the other pay
items provided in section 1500. The tendered rate shall also include full compensation for
the provision of communications equipment required for regulating the traffic arranging for
the moving of services, solving traffic problems, complying with the legal requirements of
all authorities concerned, for providing temporary access to private property, and for the
provision and maintenance of temporary drainage, but excluding the work specifically paid
for under item 15.11. The tendered rate shall also include full compensation for the specified
general requirements and all incidental items of cost, which are required under the

provisions of section 1500, and which are not specifically paid for under the other pay items
provided in section 1500.
Payment will be made in two equal installments in respect of each section. The first
installment will be made when suitable temporary diversions have been approved for use or
when traffic is taken over half-width construction. The second installment will become due
when the traffic can be accommodated on the new road, all temporary diversions have been
obliterated and all general obligations of the contractor have been complied with, all to the
satisfaction of the engineer.
Item 15.02 Earthworks for temporary deviations:

(a) Shaping of temporary diversions .......................................................... kilometer (km)
The unit of measurement shall be the kilometer of temporary diversions shaped, compacted
and constructed in accordance with the provisions of clause 1506 of this section. Where the
contractor has to provide access roads to private property, the length of such access roads
outside the road reserve shall also be included in the quantity measured for payment.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for clearing and grubbing where necessary,
the removal of small trees and stumps, the shaping and grading, watering, mixing and
compacting of the material and all cuts and fills constructed from material obtained from
alongside the temporary diversions or side cut, but including only such portions of the fills
which are less than 0.5 m in height.
(b) Cut and borrow to fill.........................................................................cubic metre (m3 )
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of fill measured in- situ from levelled
cross-sections taken before and after construction where such material is either imported
from a locality more than 100 m from the point of use or is utilised in a portion of a fill
which is in excess of 0.5 m above the original ground level.
Where measurement by cross-sections is impractical the volume can be assumed to be equal
to 70% of the loose volume measured in trucks in the case of soil and gravel material, and
equal to 60% of the loose volume in trucks in the case of hard material consisting
predominantly of particles of which the maximum dimension exceeds 100 mm.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing and the placing
all the classes of material, including transporting over a free-haul distance of 1.5 km.
(c) Cut to spoil..........................................................................................cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of authorized excavation taken from cut in
temporary diversions or removed from fill in temporary diversions which are no longer
required and carted to spoil on the instructions of the engineer, all measured in situ before
excavation by means of levelled cross-sections.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for excavating in all classes of material,
loading, transporting, off-loading, including the shaping and levelling of spoil material and
transporting over a free-haul distance of 1.5 km.
Item 15.03 Temporary traffic - control facilities:

(a) Flagmen ......................................................................................................... man-day
(b) Portable STOP and GO-RY signs .............................................................number (No)
(c) Temporary traffic - control signals as specified or as shown on the drawings ............
..................................................................................................................number (No)

(d) Amber flicker lights................................................................................. number (No)

(e) Road signs, R-and TR-series(size indicated)............................................ number (No)
(f) Road signs, TW-series (size indicated) .................................................... number (No)
(g) Road signs, STW-, DTG-,TGS- AND TG-series (excluding delineators and
barricades) ..................................................................................................... .square metre (m2)
(h) Delineators (DTG5OJ) (size indicated):
(i) Single ............................................................................................. number (No)
(ii) Mounted back to back..................................................................... number (No)
(i) Movable barricade/road sign combination (size indicated....................... number (No)
(j) Traffic cones (size indicated) ................................................................... number (No)
(k) Single guardrails attached to posts ............................................................... metre (m)
(l) Movable barriers (type indicated) ............................................................... metre (m)
(m) Two-way communication devices ........................................................... number (No)
(a) Flagmen
The unit of measurement shall be a day worked by a flagman.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for a flagman who is required to control
traffic by way of flags or portable STOP and GO-RY signs and shall include the provision of
flags and safety jackets.
(b), (c), (d). (e), (f) and (h)

The unit of measurement shall be the number of each sign provided, and. as may be
applicable, completely erected.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for providing, and where applicable,
erecting each sign complete. In the case of subitem (b) it shall also include moving the sign
as may be necessary.
(g) The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of sign face, measured on the face of
each item provided. The tendered rate shall include full compensation for providing and
erecting each sign, complete with posts.
(i) The unit of measurement shall be the number of movable barricades, complete with road
signs provided. The tendered rate shall also include full compensation for moving the
barricades to fresh positions as and when necessary.
(j) The unit of measurement shall be the number of cones provided and the measured
quantity shall be the maximum number in use at any one time in accordance with the layout
shown on the drawings or as directed by the engineer. The tendered rate shall also include
for all moves to new positions for the duration of the contract.
(k) The unit of measurement shall be the metre of straight or curved temporary guardrails
erected, complete with end units, posts, reflective plates, etc.
(l) The unit of measurement shall be the metre of each type of movable barriers provided and
shall include the initial erection.

(m) The unit of measurement shall be the number of two-way communication devices
ordered by the engineer for the duration of the contract.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the supply of two-way communication
devices suitable for the control of one-way traffic when half the width of the roadway is
closed for construction purposes. The tendered rate shall also include full compensation for
the maintenance of the devices and for the provision of operating staff for the duration of the
contract.
General:
The tendered rates for the respective traffic control facilities shall include full compensation
for the supply and initial erection complete with posts, stakes, portable stands and sandbags
as may be required, for cleaning and maintenance, for covering with non-transparent
material when temporarily not required and removal off the site when no longer required.
75% of the tariff will be payable when the items have been provided and erected in position
for their first use on site and 25% when finally removed from the site. Facilities which
become unserviceable or are damaged by vehicles or stolen, in particular delineators, shall
be replaced promptly at no additional cost.
Item 15.04 Relocation of traffic-control facilities............................................... lump sum

The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation for dismantling, storing if necessary,
transporting, re-erecting and inspecting the traffic-control facilities, and for all labour,
equipment, construction plant and incidentals necessary to execute the work complete as
specified or shown on the drawings.
Item 15.05 Gravelling and repair of temporary diversions and existing gravel
shoulders used as temporary diversions :
(a) Temporary diversions .........................................................................cubic metre (m3)
(b) Existing gravel shoulders....................................................................cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of gravel provided as wearing course for
the surfacing of temporary diversions and existing gravel shoulders, computed from the
dimensions of the layer as actually constructed in place, in accordance with the engineer's
instructions.
Where measurement by the above method is considered to be impracticable by the engineer,
the volume may be computed by taking 70% of the loose volume of the gravel as measured
in the hauling vehicles.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing, placing and
compacting the gravel wearing course, including a free-haul distance of 1.5 km, and the
repair of local sections of the temporary diversions and gravel shoulders.
Item 15.06 Watering of temporary diversions................................................. .kilolitre (kl)

The unit of measurement shall be the kilolitre of water applied to the temporary deviations
on the written instruction of the engineer. Water required for the construction of temporary
diversions will not be measured for payment.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the supply, transport and application of
the water. Overhaul shall not apply to transporting the water used for the watering of
temporary diversions.

Item 15.07 Blading by road grader of:

(a) Temporary diversions .......................................................... kilometer-pass (km-pass)
(b) Existing roads used as temporary diversions ..................... kilometer-pass (km-pass)
(c) Existing gravel shoulders used as temporary diversions...............................................
............................................................................................. kilometer- pass (km-pass)
The unit of measurement for using a road grader to blade the surfaces of temporary
diversions, existing roads and existing gravel shoulders used as temporary diversions shall
be the kilometer-pass, that is, each kilometer of the full width of the temporary diversions,
the entire surface of which has been bladed by one pass of the road grader. In the case of
temporary diversions constructed as two separate one-way roads, they shall be considered as
one full width of the temporary diversions for purposes of measurement.
Only the number of kilometer-passes actually authorized by the engineer, in writing, will be
measured.
Where the blading of temporary diversions has not been carried out satisfactorily and the
surface has not been improved as much as can reasonably be expected from such an
operation, the contractor shall carry out further grading work at his own expense until a
satisfactory result is obtained.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for providing the road graders and
operators, flagmen, guards, barricades, signs and all other costs incidental thereto and for
blading the temporary diversions to a smooth surface free from corrugations.
Item 15.08 Repairs, alterations and/or additions to existing roads used as temporary
diversions....................................................................................provisional sum
The provisional sum provided to cover the cost of work ordered by the engineer in terms of
clause 1510 of the specifications shall be expended in accordance with the provisions of
clause 48 of the general conditions of contract. Where the exact nature of the work can be
determined in advance, provision may be made in the project specifications for suitable rates
to be tendered in lieu of providing a provisional sum.
Item 15.09 Accommodation of traffic where the road is constructed in half-widths

...................................................................................................... kilometer (km)
The unit of measurement for accommodating traffic where the road is constructed in half-
widths shall be the kilometer measured along the centre line of the road which road is
constructed in half-widths on the written instructions of the engineer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for providing all plant, equipment, tools,
transport, labour, supervision, flagmen, guards, road signs, lights, barricades and all other
incidentals necessary for the proper and safe handling of traffic as specified and shall also
include full compensation for all additional costs and work resulting from constructing the
road in half widths.
Item 15.10 Traffic signals.............................................................................provisional sum

The provisional sum provided to cover the cost of providing traffic signals shall be expended
in accordance with the provisions of clause 48 of the general conditions of contract.
Item 15.11 Temporary culverts:

(a) Provision and laying of temporary prefabricated culverts complete (state size,
type and bedding) ........................................................................................................ metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of culvert provided and installed by the
contractor.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring and furnishing new culverts,
all excavations, bedding, laying the culverts and backfilling.
(b) Re-use of prefabricated culverts complete state type, size and type of bedding).........
.......................................................................................................................metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of culvert installed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for taking up the culverts from
their previous positions and installing the culverts in fresh positions, including all
excavations, backfilling and bedding, the loading and transporting and off-loading
of the culverts.
(c) Eventual removal of prefabricated culverts ...................................................metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of culvert removed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the eventual removal of
prefabricated culverts that are not to be re-used, including excavation, taking up the
culverts, loading, transporting, off-loading and stacking the culverts at an approved
location, including a free-haul of 1.5 km, and the reinstatement of surfaces. The
culverts remain the property of the employer.
(d) Overhaul on excavated material carted to spoil, backfill material (but excluding
Portland cement), prefabricated culverts removed and reinstalled, and prefabricated culverts
removed and stacked, for haul in excess of a free-haul distance of 1.5 km
. ..................................................................................... cubic metre-kilometer(m3-km)
Measurement and payment for overhaul shall be made in accordance with the
provisions of section 1700.
In the case of culverts, the outer volume of each culvert shall be measured.
Item 15.12 In - situ preparation and compaction of existing gravel shoulders to 93%
of Modified AASHTO density ................................................ cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of shoulder material prepared and
compacted as specified.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for ripping, shaping, mixing, watering,
compacting to a depth of 150 mm below the final road surface, and for all labour, equipment,
construction plant and incidentals necessary to execute the work as specified or shown on
the drawings.
General notes:
The following pay items described in other sections will be listed under this section in the
schedule of quantities where they relate to work executed under this section.
(1) Overhaul as specified in Division 1700.
(2) The clearing and grubbing of large trees as specified in Series 2000.
(3) The removal of overburden as specified in Series 4000.
(4) The construction of mass earthworks and pavement layers as specified in Series
4000.
(5) Bituminous seals as specified in series 6000 or in the project specifications.

(6) Temporary fencing as specified in Series 9000.

(7) Road markings as specified in Series 9000.

DIVISION 1600: ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND MITIGATION

MEASURES
1601 SCOPE
This Division covers all work necessary for the protection of the environment and mitigation
measures to be taken.
1602 LANDSCAPE PRESERVATION
(a) General
The Contractor shall exercise care to preserve the natural landscape and shall conduct his
construction operations so as to prevent any unnecessary destruction, scarring, or defacing of
the natural surroundings m the vicinity of the work. Except where clearing is required for
permanent works, approved construction roads, earthworks operations; all trees, native
shrubbery, and vegetation shall be preserved and shall be protected from damage by the
Contractor's construction operations and equipment. The edges of clearings through trees,
shrubbery, and vegetation shall be irregularly shaped to soften the undesirable visual impact
of straight lines. Movement of labour and equipment within the right-of-way and over routes
provided for access to the work shall be performed in a manner to prevent damage to grazing
land, crops, or property.
Except as otherwise provided in Series 4000 special reseeding or replanting will not be
required under this Specification; however, on completion of the work, all work areas not
seeded shall be scarified and left in a condition which will facilitate natural re-vegetation,
provide for proper drainage, and prevent erosion. All unnecessary destruction, scarring,
damage, or defacing of the landscape resulting from the Contractor's activities shall be
reinstated, replanted, reseeded or otherwise corrected as directed by the Engineer.
(b) Temporary Traffic Diversions and Haul Roads

The location and alignment of temporary traffic diversions and haul roads shall be subject to
the approval of the Engineer. When no longer required these roads shall, if required by the
Engineer, be restored to the original contour and made impassable to vehicular traffic. The
surfaces of such roads shall be scarified as necessary to create a condition, which will
facilitate natural re-vegetation, provide for proper drainage, and prevent erosion.
(c) Contractor’s Facilities

Workshop, office, storage and plant areas shall be located and arranged in a manner that will
preserve trees and vegetation to the maximum practicable. On abandonment, all temporary
buildings, including concrete footings and slabs, and all construction materials and debris
shall be removed from the site and disposed of to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The area
shall be re-graded, as required so that all surfaces drain naturally, blend with the natural
terrain, and are left in a condition that will facilitate natural re-vegetation, provide for proper
drainage, and prevent erosion.

(d) Blasting Precautions

In addition to Dairy requirements of local regulations, the Contractor shall adopt precautions
when using explosives, which will prevent scattering of rocks, stumps, or other debris
outside the work area, and prevent damage to surrounding trees, shrubbery and vegetation.
(e) Quarries, Borrow Pits, Plant and Storage Areas etc.

When they are no longer required, all quarry sites, borrow pits and areas used for the
disposal or storage of surplus materials and asphalt plants, shall be reinstated by landscaping
including the replacement and spreading of topsoil as directed by and to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
1603 TEMPORARY SOIL EROSION CONTROL
(a) General
These Works shall consist of temporary control measures as described in the Contract or
required by the Engineer during the process of the Works, to control soil erosion and water
pollution by use of berms, dikes, silt fences, brush barriers, dams, sediment basins, filter
mats, netting, gravel, mulches, grasses, slope drains, and other erosion control devices or
methods. Appropriate control measures will be required to avoid emission of high
concentration of sediments into wetlands, swampy areas and other particular sensitive areas.
The temporary erosion control provisions shall be coordinated with permanent erosion
control measures to ensure economical, effective and continuous erosion control throughout
the period of the Works.
(b) Construction
A schedule of proposed temporary (and permanent) soil erosion control Works shall be
developed by the Contractor at the commencement of the Contract, in consultation with the
Engineer and to his satisfaction.
The Contractor shall carry out (and maintain) temporary erosion control to prevent soil
erosion that will adversely affect construction operations, damage adjacent properties, or
cause contamination of adjacent streams or other watercourses, lakes, ponds, swamps or
other areas of water impoundment. Such Works may involve construction of temporary
berms, dikes, dams, sediment basins, slope drains or use of temporary mulches, mats,
seeding or other control devices or methods as necessary to control erosion. The slopes of
cuttings and embankments shall be seeded and mulched as the work proceeds, to the extent
considered desirable and practicable by the Engineer.
Temporary erosion control may include construction outside the right-of-way where such
work is necessary, as a result of roadway construction, such as borrow pit and quarry
operations, haul roads and equipment storage areas.
The Contractor shall incorporate all permanent erosion control features as described in the
Contract into the Works at the earliest practicable time as outlined in his schedule, to
minimize the need for temporary erosion control measures.
Where erosion is a problem, clearing and grubbing operations shall be so scheduled and
performed that grading operations and permanent erosion control features can follow
immediately thereafter if conditions permit; otherwise, temporary erosion control measures
may be required between successive construction stages.

The Engineer will limit the area of clearing and grubbing, excavation, borrow and
embankment operations in progress commensurate with the Contractor’s capability and
progress in keeping the finished grading, mulching, seeding and other permanent erosion
control measures current in accordance with the schedule. Should, seasonal limitations make
such co-ordination unrealistic, temporary erosion control measures shall be taken
immediately to the extent feasible and justified.
The Engineer may increase or decrease the amount of surface area of erodible earth material
to be exposed at one time by clearing and grubbing, excavation, borrow and fill operations
as determined by his analysis of project conditions.
In the event that temporary erosion control measures are required due to the Contractor's
negligence, carelessness or failure to install permanent controls as part of the Works,
scheduled or ordered by the Engineer, such Works shall be carried out by the Contractor.
1604 PRESERVATION OF TREES AND SHRUBBERY
(a) Preservation
All trees and shrubbery which are not specifically required to be cleared or removed for
construction purposes shall be preserved and shall be protected from any damage that may
be caused by the Contractor's construction operations and equipment. Special care shall be
exercised where trees or shrubs are exposed to damage by construction equipment, blasting,
excavating, dumping, chemical damage, or other operations, and the Contractor shall
adequately protect such trees by use of protective barriers or other methods approved by the
Engineer. The removal of trees or shrubs will be permitted only after prior approval by the
Engineer.
The layout of the Contractor's construction facilities such as workshops, warehouses, storage
areas, and parking areas; location of access and haul routes; and operation in borrow and
spoil areas shall be planned and conducted in such manner that all trees and shrubbery not
approved for removal by the Engineer shall be preserved and adequately protected from
either direct or indirect damage by the Contractor's operations.
Except in emergency cases or when otherwise approved by the Engineer, trees shall not be
used for anchorages. Where such use is approved, the trunk shall be wrapped with a
sufficient thickness of approved protective material before any rope, cable, or wire is placed.
(b) Repair or Treatment of Damage

The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to trees and shrubs caused by his operations.
The term "damage" shall include, without limitation, bruising, scarring, tearing, and
breaking of roots, trunk or branches. All damaged trees and shrubs shall be repaired or
treated without delay. The Engineer will determine the method of repair or treatment to be
used for damaged trees and shrubs as recommended by an experienced horticulturist or tree
surgeon provided by the Contractor. All repairs or treatment of damaged trees shall be
performed under the direction of an experienced horticulturist or tree surgeon provided by
the Contractor.
(c) Replacement
Trees or shrubs that, in the opinion of the Engineer, are beyond saving shall be removed and
replaced early in the next planting season. The replacement shall be of the same species, or
other approved species, and of the maximum size that is practicable to plant and sustain

growth in the particular environment. Replacement trees and shrubs shall be stayed, watered,
and maintained for a period of one year. Any replacement tree or shrub that dies shall be
removed and replaced, as directed by the Engineer, with such replacements being maintained
for a period of one year from the date of replacement.
1605 PREVENTION OF WATER POLLUTION
(a) General
The Contractor's construction activities shall be performed by methods that will prevent the
entry, or accidental spillage, of solid matter, contaminants, debris, and other pollutants and
wastes into streams, flowing or dry watercourses, lakes, and underground water sources.
Such pollutants and wastes include, but are not restricted to, refuse, garbage, cement,
concrete, sanitary waste, industrial waste, radioactive substances, oil and other petroleum
products, aggregate processing tailings, mineral salts and thermal pollution.
Dewatering work for structure foundations or earthwork operations adjacent to, or
encroaching on, streams or watercourses shall be conducted in a manner to prevent muddy
water and eroded materials from entering the streams or watercourses by construction of
intercepting ditches, bypass channels, barriers, settling ponds, or by other approved means.
Excavated materials or other construction materials shall not be stockpiled or deposited near
or on stream banks, lake shorelines, or other watercourse perimeters where they can be
washed away by high water or storm runoff or can in any way encroach upon the
watercourse itself.
Increases in turbidity in a stream or other bodies of water that are caused by construction
activities shall be strictly controlled. When necessary to perform required construction work
in a stream channel, the turbidity may be increased, as approved by the Engineer for the
shortest practicable period required to complete such work. This required construction work
may include such work as diversion of a stream, construction or removal of cofferdams,
specified earthwork in or adjacent to a stream channel, pile driving, and construction of
turbidity control structures. Mechanised equipment shall not operate in flowing water
except as necessary to construct crossings or to perform the required construction.
Wastewater from aggregate processing, concrete batching, or other construction operations
shall not enter streams, watercourses, or other surface waters without the use of such
turbidity control methods as settling ponds, gravel-filter entrapment dikes, approved
flocculating processes that are not harmful to fish, recirculation systems for washing of
aggregates, or other approved methods. Any such wastewater discharged into surface waters
shall contain the least concentration of settleable material possible. For the purpose of this
Specification, settleable material is defined as that material which will settle from the water
by gravity during a one hour quiescent detention period.
(b) Compliance with Laws and Regulations

The Contractor shall comply with all applicable Sudanese laws, orders, regulations, and
water quality standards concerning the control and abatement of water pollution.

1606 ABATEMENT OF AIR, DUST, NOISE AND LIGHT POLLUTION
(a) Abatement of Air Pollution

The Contractor shall comply with applicable Sudanese laws and regulations concerning the
prevention and control of air pollution. Notwithstanding the above in conduct of
construction activities and operation of equipment, the Contractor shall utilise methods and
devices as are, reasonably available to control, prevent, and otherwise minimise emissions or
discharges of air contaminants.
The emission of dust into the atmosphere shall be strictly controlled during the production,
handling, and storage of concrete and road aggregates, and the Contractor shall use such
methods and equipment as are necessary for the collection and disposal, or prevention, of
dust during these operations. The Contractor’s methods of storing and handling cement and
pozzolans shall also include means of eliminating atmospheric discharges of dust.
Equipment and vehicles that show excessive emissions of exhaust gases due to poor engine
adjustments, or other inefficient operating conditions, shall not be operated until corrective
repairs or adjustments are made.
Burning of materials resulting from clearing of trees and brush, combustible construction
materials, and rubbish will be permitted only when atmospheric conditions for burning are
considered favorable and when authorized by the Engineer. In lieu of burning, such
combustible materials may be disposed of by other methods as provided in Clause 1609.
Where open burning is permitted, the burn piles shall be properly constructed to minimise
smoke, and in no case shall unapproved materials, such as tyres, plastics, rubber products,
asphalt products, or other materials that create heavy black smoke or nuisance odours, be
burned.
Dust nuisance resulting from construction activities shall be prevented in accordance with
the requirements of clause 1606(b).
(b) Dust Abatement

During the performance of the work required by this Specification or any operations
appurtenant thereto, whether within the right-of-way provided by the Contracting Authority
or elsewhere, the Contractor shall furnish all the labour, equipment, materials, and means
required, and shall carry out proper and efficient measure, wherever and as often as
necessary to reduce the dust nuisance, and to prevent dust which has originated from his
operations from damaging crops, orchards, cultivated fields, and dwellings, or causing a
nuisance to persons. The Contractor will be held liable for any damage resulting from dust
originating from his operations under this Specification on the right-of-way or elsewhere.
'The Engineer may direct sprinkling or other measures for dust abatement if necessary to
obtain adequate control. In particular in towns and villages water sprinkling will be required
as often as necessary to reduce the dust nuisance.
To reduce the dust problem the Engineer may direct the Contractor to install temporary
speed limit traffic signs on those sections of the road where dust development is
considerable.
(c) Noise Abatement

The Contractor shall comply with applicable Sudanese laws, orders, and regulations
concerning the prevention, control, and abatement of excessive noise.

Blasting, the use of jack hammers, rock crushing, or other operations producing high
intensity impact noise may be performed at night only upon approval of the Engineer.
(d) Light Abatement

The Contractor shall exercise special care to direct all stationary floodlights to shine
downward at an angle less than horizontal. These floodlights shall also be shielded so as not
to be a nuisance to surrounding areas. No lighting shall include a residence in its direct
beam.
The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting lighting problems when they occur as
directed by the Engineer.
1607 PRESERVATION OF HISTORICAL, ARCHAEOLOGICAL AND CULTURAL REMAINS

If the Contractor discovers evidence of possible scientific, historical, archaeological or
cultural interest or value during the execution of the works, he shall immediately notify the
Engineer giving the nature and location of his findings. Written confirmation shall be
forwarded within 2 days. he Contractor shall exercise care so as not to damage artifacts or
fossils uncovered during excavation operations and shall provide such cooperation and
assistance as may be necessary to preserve the findings for removal or other disposition by
the Contracting Authority.
Where appropriate by reason of a discovery, the Engineer may order delays in the execution
of, or changes in the methods of, executing the work, or both. If such delays, or changes, or
both, are ordered, the period of performance and Contract price shall be adjusted in
accordance with the applicable articles in the General Conditions of Contract.
The Contractor shall include this requirement in any sub-contracts for the construction of
part of the works that he may enter into.
1608 PESTICIDES
Pesticides include herbicides, insecticides, fungicides, etc., surface disinfectants, animal
rerepellents, and insect repellents. Should the Contractor find it necessary to use pesticides
in work areas of this Contract, he shall submit his plan for such use to the Engineer for
written approval.
The Contractor shall read and comply with all labelling requirements when using pesticides.
1609 CLEANUP AND DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
(a) Cleanup
The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the construction area, including storage areas used,
free from accumulations of waste materials or rubbish.
All waste water and sewage from office, residential and mobile camps shall be piped to soak
pits or other disposal areas constructed in accordance with local regulations, and, where and
when such regulations require it, the Contractor shall obtain a permit or other appropriate
documentation approving the disposal methods being used.
All used fuels, oils, other plant or vehicle fluids, and old tyres and tubes shall be collected to
a central disposal point, on a regular basis and disposed of as specified below.

All household, office, workshop and other solid waste shall be collected to a central disposal
area, on a daily basis and disposed of in a manner approved by the Engineer.
Servicing of plant, equipment and vehicles shall, whenever possible, be carried out at a
workshop area. This workshop area shall be equipped with secure storage areas for fuels,
oils and other fluids constructed in such a way as to contain any spillages which may occur,
and similar storage where used fluids can be stored securely prior to their disposal.
When the servicing of plant, equipment and vehicles is carried out away from the workshop
area it shall be done at locations and in such a manner as to avoid spillage and contamination
of streams and other drainage courses. Any spillages shall be cleaned up by either burning
in place or collecting the contaminated soils and burning them at the central disposal area, all
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Prior to completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the work
all plant facilities, buildings, rubbish, unused materials, concrete formworks, and other
similar material, belonging to him or used under his direction during construction, All work
areas shall be graded and left in a neat manner conforming to the natural appearance of the
landscape as provided in Clause 1602.
Any residue deposited on the ground from washing out transit mix trucks or any similar
concrete operations shall be buried or cleaned up in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
In the event of the Contractor's failure to perform the above work, the work may be
performed by the Contracting Authority, at the expense of the Contractor and his sureties
shall be liable thereof.
(b) Disposal of Waste Material

Waste materials including, but not restricted to, refuse, garbage, sanitary wastes, industrial
wastes, and oil and other petroleum products, shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
Disposal of combustible materials shall be by burying, where burial of such materials is
approved by the Engineer; by burning, where burning of approved materials is permitted; or
by removal from the construction area. Disposal of non-combustible materials shall be by
burying, where burial of such materials is approved by the Engineer, or by removal from the
construction area. Waste materials removed from the construction area shall be dumped at
an approved dump.
(c) Disposal of Material by Burying

Only materials approved by the Engineer may be buried. Burial shall be in pits and the
location, size and depth of which shall be approved by the Engineer. The pits shall be
covered by at least 600mm of earth material prior to abandonment.
(d) Disposal of Material by Burning

All materials to be burned shall be piled in designated burning areas in such a manner as will
cause the least fire hazards. Burning shall be thorough and complete and all charred pieces
remaining after burning, except for scattered small pieces, shall be removed from the
construction area and disposed of as otherwise provided in this Section.
The Contractor shall, at all times, take special precautions to prevent fire from spreading
beyond the piles being burned and shall be liable for any damage caused by his burning
operations. The Contractor shall have available, at all times, suitable equipment and

supplies for use in preventing and suppressing fires and shall be subject to all laws and
regulations locally applicable for pre-suppression, suppression, and prevention of fires.
(e) Disposal of Material by Removal

Material to be disposed of by removal from the construction area shall be removed from the
area prior to the completion of the work under the Contract.
Materials to be disposed of by dumping shall be hauled to an approved dump. It shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to make any necessary arrangements with private parties and
with local officials pertinent to locations and regulations of such dumping.

DIVISION 1700: OVERHAUL
1701 SCOPE
This section covers the hauling of overhaul material as defined herein from the place of
excavation or stockpile to the position of placement, where such haul distance is in excess of
the free-haul distance as defined herein.
1702 DEFINITIONS
Overhaul material
Overhaul material shall be transported material to which overhaul shall apply when hauled
in excess of the free-haul distance and shall include only the following materials:
(i) Gravel, soil or rock materials used in the construction of fills, pavement layers,
banks and dykes.
(ii) Topsoil, gravel prescribed by the engineer as wearing course for temporary
deviations, and selected gravel material used for backfilling drain and culvert excavations,
but excluding permeable material used In filter drains.
(iii) Spoil material resulting from the authorized excavations of the road prism, drains,
culverts and other structures and from fills in temporary deviations which are no longer
required.
(iv) Crushed stone used in the construction of sub base and base, but only when
overhaul applies in the circumstances specified in item 51.01 of clause 5113.
(v) Materials (irrespective of the type of material) cut from existing pavement layers
and transported to spoil, or direct to fill elsewhere on the site, or to approved stockpiles, or
from stockpiles to the point of application.
(vi) Materials and products specified elsewhere in the contract.
After reprocessing ordinary overhaul only shall apply to asphalt or any other material that
has been reprocessed in a plant for recycling, and no restricted overhaul shall apply.
Overhaul
Two types of overhaul shall apply to this contract, and, depending on circumstances, any one
or both may apply in respect of the same hauling operation.
Restricted overhaul shall apply to fill material from cut and borrow and to spoil material
from excavations when hauled in excess of the free-haul distance of 0.5 km in respect of
haul up to and including 1.0 km, and shall be measured and paid for by the cubic metre of
material hauled between or over these distances.
Ordinary overhaul shall apply to all overhaul material in respect of haul in excess of 1.0 km,
and shall be measured by the product of the volume of material hauled, measured as
specified hereafter, and the overhaul distance as defined in sub clause 1702(e) hereof.
Both restricted and ordinary overhaul shall be paid in respect of material having a free-haul
distance of 0.5 km when hauled in excess of 1.0 km.

Haul distance
The haul distance for cut to fill shall be the distance between the centre of volume of the
overhaul material in the cut before excavation and the centre of volume of the portion of the
fill constructed with the overhaul material.
The distance between the centres of volume shall be measured along the centre line of the
road, and any additional distance of haul ascribed to the following of a different haul route
will not be considered. Cut and fill volumes for ramps, road approaches and connections on
either side of the road shall be considered as concentrated at the centre line of the main
roadway under construction for computing overhaul quantities for payment, unless otherwise
specified In the project specifications.
The haul distance for borrow material and cut to spoil material shall be measured along the
shortest route determined by the engineer as being feasible and satisfactory. Should the
contractor choose to haul material over some other longer route, computations for payment
shall nevertheless be based on the haul distance measured along the shortest route designated
by the engineer. The haul distance for borrow materials and cut to spoil shall be measured to
the nearest 0.1 km.
Free -haul distance
The free- haul distance shall be the distance up to which overhaul material may be hauled
before overhaul becomes payable. This distance shall be 1.0 km in the case of all overhaul
materials, except cut and borrow to fill and cut to spoil material where the free-haul distance
is 0.5 km.
Overhaul distance
The overhaul distance applying to item 17.02 shall be the haul distance as defined above,
less 1.0 km, measured to the nearest 0.1 km.

Quantity of material
The quantity of material overhauled shall in all cases be measured in the same manner as the
item to which the overhaul applies.
Item 17.01 Overhaul on material hauled in excess of a free - haul distance of 0.5 km,
for haul up to or through 1.0 km (restricted overhaul).........cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of overhaul material hauled over the
distance given above.
Item 17.02 Overhaul on material hauled in excess of 1.0 km (ordinary overhaul) ...........
........................................................................... cubic metre-kilometre (m3-km)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of overhaul material hauled in excess of
1.0 km, multiplied by the overhaul distance.
The tendered rates for overhaul shall include full compensation for hauling material in
excess of the free-haul distance
1704 NOTES:
In the special cases detailed below, overhaul shall be measured as follows:
(1) Gravel crushed and/or screened (series 6000)

The haul distance on crushed and/or screened gravel shall be taken from the point of
excavation or borrow to the crushing/screening plant and thence to the point of final use in
the road or, in the case of material sieved out and discarded, to the point where finally
placed. Overhaul shall be the total haul distance, minus the 1.0 km free-haul.
(2) Crushed-stone base or subbase material (serie 5000)
The following applies to crushed-stone base or subbase material as specified in series 5000
to which overhaul applies, i.e. material not obtained from commercial sources.
The haul distance shall be measured from the approved borrow pit to the crusher site and
thence to the point where used on the road. The quantity shall be the actual quantity only of
subbase or base material measured for payment and does not include material excavated but
discarded or lost at the crusher.
(3) Oversize material removed from the road (sub clause 4405(d))
The haul on all oversize material removed from the road and taken to spoil shall be
considered as two haul operations, and overhaul shall be calculated separately as follows:
(a) Haul from the point of procurement of the oversize material to the point where it is
deposited on the road
Haul and overhaul shall be calculated in the normal manner, but no overhaul will be payable
on the first portion of the oversize material which does not qualify for payment under any
item for the "removal of oversize material".
(b) Haul from the point where it is bladed of the road to the point of disposal
The haul distance shall be from the point alongside the road where the oversize material is
bladed off to the point where it is finally deposited. Overhaul shall apply to all oversize
material removed, including material not paid for under any item for the "removal of
oversize material". Overhaul shall be the haul distance minus the 1.0 km free-haul.
(4) Pavement layers constructed from materials mixed in a mixing plant and placed by
paver
Measurement of and payment for overhaul in regard to material used in pavement layers,
which has been mixed in a mixing plant and placed by paver, shall be the same as that in
regard to material in pavement layers not mixed in a mixing plant or placed by paver,
excepting that the haul distance shall be measured along the shortest direct route from the
approved source to the locality where the material is placed on the road, irrespective of
whether the material has been handled by a longer route from the source to the mixing plant
and thence to the location where it was placed on the road.
The tendered rates for item 17.01 and 17.02 shall also include full compensation for
handling the material for that distance by which the actual route is longer than the shortest
direct route.

Specification for Highway Work - 2006 Series 10000
SERIES 10000: TESTING MATERIALS

AND WORKMANSHIP
TABLE OF CONTENT
LIST OF TABLES AND FIGURES .............................................................................................. 4
SECTION 10100: STANDARD AND TESTING ........................................................................... 5

10101 Scope ........................................................................................................................ 5
10102 Testing Methods........................................................................................................ 5
10103 The Costs Of Testing................................................................................................. 5
(a) Process control .................................................................................................... 5
(b) Producing certificates .......................................................................................... 5
10104 Taking And Submitting Samples ............................................................................... 6
10105 Testing Aggregates.................................................................................................... 6
(a) General................................................................................................................ 6
(b) Determining acid insolubility .............................................................................. 6
(c) Free-water content............................................................................................... 7
(d) Bulking the fine aggregates ................................................................................. 7
(e) Determining the effect of sand on the water demand of a concrete mix................ 7
(f) Accelerated-test method for determining the potential alkali reactivity of aggregates 9
10106 Testing Concrete ..................................................................................................... 10
(a) Determining the compressive strength ............................................................... 10
(b) Consistency....................................................................................................... 11
(c) Air content ........................................................................................................ 11
(d) Drilling and testing the concrete cores ............................................................... 11
(e) Flexural strength test (modulus of rupture) ........................................................ 11
(f) Curing concrete cubes to attain accelerated strength development (55 °C /20 hours) 11
10107 Testing The Soils, Gravels And Crushed Stone Materials For Earthworks And Pavement
Layers ............................................................................................................... 12
(a) Field Density..................................................................................................... 12
(b) Relative Density ................................................................................................ 12
(c) Chemically stabilized material........................................................................... 13
(d) Moisture content at saturation............................................................................ 13
(e) The soundness of mudrock or shale aggregates.................................................. 13
(f) Nuclear device for compaction process control.................................................. 14
10108 Determining The Total Approximate Dry Bulk Relative Density And The Apparent
Relative Density ................................................................................................ 14
(a) Total approximate dry bulk relative density ....................................................... 14
(b) Apparent relative density................................................................................... 17
10109 Testing Tar, Bitumen And Asphalt .......................................................................... 18
(a) Tests described in the standard specifications for tars, bitumens and bituminous
emulsions .......................................................................................................... 18
(b) Determining the film thickness .......................................................................... 18
(c) Cantabro abrasion test ....................................................................................... 19

Series 10000 Specification for Highway Work -2006
(d)Determination of in situ water permeability of bituminous road surfacing or roadbase

layers by using the falling head (MARVIL) apparatus ....................................... 20
(e) Test site, and apparatus preparation and positioning .......................................... 21
10110 Tests Relating To Chemical Stabilization ................................................................ 24
(a) Test for cementitious binder content .................................................................. 24
(b) Canvas-patch test for the spreading rate of cementitious binder ......................... 24
10111 Tests On Pavements ................................................................................................ 25
(a) Determining the texture depth............................................................................ 25
(b) Straightedge test for surface irregularities on surfaces with a coarse surface texture 25
(c) Using the rolling straight-edge for measuring surface irregularities.................... 25
10112 Structural Tests ....................................................................................................... 25
(a) Tests on elastomeric bearings ............................................................................ 25
(b) Prestressed concrete: Testing prestressing steel, anchorage assemblies, couplings and
grout.................................................................................................................. 26
(c) Load test on foundation piles............................................................................. 27
10113 Tests on Silicone Sealants ....................................................................................... 28
(a) Bond to cement mortar ...................................................................................... 28
10114 Tests on Geotextiles and Geotextile-Soil Compatibility Tests.................................. 28
(a) Puncture resistance tests on geotextiles.............................................................. 29
(b) Permeability reduction (flow test)...................................................................... 31
10115 Classifying the Tests ............................................................................................... 33
10116 Testing of Construction Water................................................................................. 34
(a) Compressive strength test .................................................................................. 34
(b) Inorganic impurities criteria............................................................................... 34
10117 Measurement And Payment..................................................................................... 35
Item 101.01 Special tests on elastomeric bearings...................................................... 35
Item 101.02 Other special tests requested by the engineer.......................................... 35
Item 101.03 Providing testing equipment................................................................... 35
SECTION 10200: QUALITY CONTROL (SCHEME 1).............................................................. 46

10201 Scope ...................................................................................................................... 46
10202 Judgement Plans: General ....................................................................................... 46
10203 Definitions .............................................................................................................. 46
10204 General Requirements ............................................................................................. 49
(a) Determining lot size .......................................................................................... 49
(b) Random sampling.............................................................................................. 49
(c) Sample sizes...................................................................................................... 49
(d) Outliers ............................................................................................................. 49
(e) Resubmission .................................................................................................... 52
10205 JUDGEMENT PLAN A (Surface Levels And Layer Thicknesses).......................... 55
(a) Taking the levels ............................................................................................... 55
(b) Calculating the deviations.................................................................................. 55
(c) Identifying outliers ............................................................................................ 55
(d) Assessing the results.......................................................................................... 55
10206 Judgement Plan B.................................................................................................... 56
(a) Taking samples and testing the properties.......................................................... 56
10207 Controlling More Than One Property ....................................................................... 60
10208 Conditional Acceptance .......................................................................................... 61
(a) General.............................................................................................................. 61
(b) Properties to which conditional acceptance applies ............................................ 61

(c) Criteria for conditional acceptance .................................................................... 62

(d) Applying the payment-reduction factor.............................................................. 62
10209 Process Control By The Contractor ......................................................................... 63
10210 Routine Tests And Inspection By The Engineer ...................................................... 64
10211 Determining Rejection Limits In Accordance With Statistical Criteria.................. 65
SECTION 10300: QUALITY CONTROL (SCHEME 2).............................................................. 67

10301 Scope ...................................................................................................................... 67
10302 Judgement Plans: General ....................................................................................... 67
10303 Definitions .............................................................................................................. 67
(a) Lot .................................................................................................................... 67
(b) Random sample................................................................................................. 68
(c) Sample mean ( x ) ............................................................................................ 68
n
(d) Specification limit (Ls) ...................................................................................... 68
(e) Acceptance limit for sample mean (La) .............................................................. 68
(f) Acceptance limits for individual test values Le................................................... 68
(g) Conditional acceptance...................................................................................... 68
(h) Outliers ............................................................................................................. 68
(i) First submission ................................................................................................ 68
(j) Resubmission .................................................................................................... 69
(k) Payment reduction factor (fr) ............................................................................. 69
(l) Rehabilitation and repair work........................................................................... 69
10304 General Requirements ............................................................................................. 69
(a) Determining the lot size..................................................................................... 69
(b) Random sampling.............................................................................................. 70
(c) Sample sizes...................................................................................................... 70
(d) Outliers ............................................................................................................. 70
(e) Resubmission .................................................................................................... 72
10305 Procedures .............................................................................................................. 72
(a) Surface levels of fills and pavement layers ........................................................ 73
(b) Layer thicknesses of pavement layers ................................................................ 73
(c) Relative compaction of pavement layers............................................................ 73
(d) Cementitious binder content of stabilized layers and uniformity of mix ............. 74
(e) Binder content of asphalt ................................................................................... 74
(f) Concrete: 28-day cube compressive strength ..................................................... 76
10306 Controlling More Than One Property ...................................................................... 77
10307 Conditional Acceptance .......................................................................................... 77
(a) General.............................................................................................................. 77
(b) Properties to which conditional acceptance applies ............................................ 78
(c) Criteria for conditional acceptance .................................................................... 78
(d) Determining the payment reduction factor (fr) ................................................... 79
(e) Applying the payment reduction factor.............................................................. 80
10308 Process Control By The Contractor ......................................................................... 81
10309 Quality Of Materials And Workmanship ................................................................. 82

Table 10100/1 Schedule Showing Quantities And Times For Submitting The Materials For
Approval And Mix Designs ................................................................................. 9
Table 10100/2 Recommended Mark ................................................................................... 23
Table 10100/3 Criteria for Inorganic Impurities in Water Used To Manufacture Concrete .. 35
Figure 10100/1 Weathering Apparatus................................................................................ 37
Figure 10100/2 Visual Classification .................................................................................. 38
Figure 10100/3 Marvil Apparatus ....................................................................................... 39
Figure 10100/4 Grease Ring ............................................................................................... 39
Figure 10100/5 Placing Of Prestik ...................................................................................... 40
Figure 10100/6 Placing Of Plaster Of Paris......................................................................... 40
Figure 10100/7 Flow Cone.................................................................................................. 41
Figure 10100/8 Metal Or Glass Container........................................................................... 42
Figure 10100/9 Cone Assembly And Measuring Device ..................................................... 43
Figure 10100/10 Permeameter for Permeability Production Tests (Flow Tests)................... 44
Figure 10100/11 Permeability Reduction Criteria ............................................................... 45
Table 10200/1 Critical Values (Except Roadbase and Asphalt Mixes) ................................ 50
2
Table 10200/2 Values Of x0.99 Distribution........................................................................ 51
Table 10200/3 Outlier Test for Roadbase: Critical Values................................................... 52
Table 10200/4 Outlier Test for Asphalt: Critical Values C .................................................. 52
Table 10200/5 Values of F Distribution (Σ = 0.05).............................................................. 54
Table 10200/6 Values for T-Distribution (Σ = 0.05)............................................................ 55
Table 10200/7 Characteristic Properties: Judgement Plan B................................................ 56
Table 10200/8 Minimum Sample Sizes For Concrete (Structural) ....................................... 57
Formula 10200/1 ................................................................................................................ 57
Table 10200/9 Values Of Constants N, Ls, L's And φ ........................................................ 59
Table 10200/10 Values Of Ka (Single Limits)..................................................................... 60
Table 10200/11 Values Of Kad (Double Limits)................................................................. 61
Table 10200/12 Properties In Respect Of Which Conditional Acceptance May Be Applied 62
Table 10200/13 Rejection Limits (Lr And L'r) For Sample Mean ( x )............................... 63
n
Table 10200/14 Values Of Kr (Single-Limit Specification)................................................. 65
Table 10300/1 Critical Values............................................................................................. 71
Table 10300/2 Outlier Test For Roadbase: Critical Values C .............................................. 72
Table 10300/3 Outlier Test For Asphalt: Critical Values C ................................................. 72
Table 10300/4 Acceptance Limits In Respect Of Compaction............................................. 75
Table 10300/5 Acceptance Limits For Bituminous Binder Content ..................................... 76
Table 10300/6 Acceptance Factors for Strength Concrete ................................................... 77
Table 10300/7 Minimum Sample Sizes for Strength Concrete (Structural).......................... 77
Table 10300/8 Properties To Which Conditional Acceptance May Apply .......................... 78
Table 10300/9 Rejection Limits (Lr And L'r) For The Sample Mean ( xn ).......................... 79
Table 10300/10 Payment Reduction Factors for Conditionally Accepted Bituminous Binder
Application Rates .............................................................................................. 80

SECTION 10100: STANDARD AND TESTING
10101 SCOPE
During the progress of the work tests shall be conducted on materials and workmanship to ensure
compliance with the requirements of the specifications
Certain sampling and testing procedures not covered in the other sections of the specifications by
reference to the standard methods mentioned in clause 10102 are given in this section
10102 TESTING METHODS

All tests shall be conducted in accordance with the standard methods specified in the following, in
order of precedence:
1) Standard methods for testing road construction materials (TMH1 and TMH6) and for
calibration (TMH2) compiled by the Committee of State Road Authorities (CSRA) and published
by the Department of Transport as part of the series Technical Methods for Highways
2) South African Bureau of Standards specifications test methods, codes of practice and
coordinating specifications (abbreviated as SABS and CKS).
3) British Standards Institute Specifications (abbreviated as BS).
4) The specifications of the American Society for Testing and Materials (abbreviated as ASTM)
5) The specifications of the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(abbreviated as AASHTO)
6) The standard methods of testing of the South African Bitumen and Tar Association (SABITA).
In addition to the above standard methods of testing, standard specifications or test methods of
other bodies may also be referred to in these specifications, or test methods may be described
where no acceptable standard methods exist.
Note:
In all cases the latest amendment or revision current at the closing date of the tender is implied
when reference is made to one of the above standards in the specification.
10103 THE COSTS OF TESTING
(a) Process control

The cost of testing undertaken by the contractor in terms of his obligations under clause 36 of the
General Conditions of Contract for purposes of process control, including the taking of samples,
reinstating where samples have been taken, and all testing equipment, labour, materials, etc. shall
be included in the rates tendered for the various items of work supplied and will not be paid for
separately.
(b) Producing certificates

Where the properties of materials or manufactured products are required in these specifications to
comply with specified specifications published by a standards authority. the contractor shall
produce, when called upon to do so, certificates from the manufacturer confirming that the
materials or products supplied comply with the relevant specifications.

10104 TAKING AND SUBMITTING SAMPLES

The method of taking samples shall be as specified in the appropriate sampling and testing
methods. The sampling methods described in TMH5, SABS method 827. ASTM and AASHTO
shall apply where relevant. If no sampling method is specified, the sampling methods described
in TMH5 and in SABS method 827 shall take precedence.
In the case of rehabilitation work the definitions given in the project specifications for lot, lot size,
random sample and sample size shall apply.
Where the contractor is required in these specifications to submit samples of materials or mixtures
to the engineer for approval prior to their being used in the works, the use of these materials or
mixtures without the engineer's written approval shall constitute default on the part of the
contractor, who shall be liable for the consequence of such default. All samples shall be submitted
in sufficient time for proper testing.
The engineer's approval of any materials or mixtures shall in no way relieve the contractor of his
obligation to provide materials, mixtures and workmanship, which comply with the specifications.
All samples for testing shall be taken in a random pattern or as prescribed by the engineer. Where
specified or required by the engineer, stratified random sampling methods shall be followed. For
the testing of layer work stratified random sampling methods shall be used for obtaining all the
sample portions and for determining the locations for in situ tests.
The engineer shall have full access to the works for the purpose of taking samples. The contractor
shall render any assistance necessary for taking the samples and shall be responsible for the
reinstatement of pavement layers or other structures at the positions where the samples have been
taken. Full compensation for rendering assistance with sampling and for reinstatement where
samples have been taken shall be included in the rates tendered for the various items of work
tested, and no additional payment will be made in this respect.
Table 10104/1 provides guidelines in respect of submitting the materials in regard to the time and
quantity of material required for testing, approval and the mix design. As the time stated in this
table does not make any allowance for possible rejection and the resubmission of alternative
materials, the contractor shall submit any materials of uncertain quality at an early stage or
together with alternative materials in order to minimize any delays in final approval.
The contractor shall note that any samples submitted direct to the engineer's laboratory for
approval shall be properly marked and shall be accompanied by a covering letter with all the
required information and countersigned by the engineer's representative.
10105 TESTING AGGREGATES
(a) General
The contractor as part of his process control shall regularly test aggregates, as they are being
manufactured or brought onto the site and used or taken to stockpile.
(b) Determining acid insolubility

A sample of fine aggregate with an approximate mass of 1 kg shall be dried and weighed. The
sample shall then be treated with an adequate amount of a 6 N solution of hydrochloric acid to
react with all the acid-soluble particles in the sample. When the reaction is complete, the residue
shall be removed from the solution by filtration (Whatman No 4 filter paper), washed with water,
screened through a 0.075 mm sieve, dried and weighed. The mass of insoluble residue retained on

the 0.075 mm sieve, expressed as a percentage of the total sample, shall be reported as the acid-
insoluble content.
(c) Free-water content

The free-water content of aggregate shall be determined in accordance with SABS 855. Rapid-
testing methods approved by the engineer may also be applied.
Suitable adaptations of the above method may be used for determining the free-water content of
coarse aggregate.
(d) Bulking the fine aggregates

The bulking of fine aggregates shall be determined in accordance with SABS 856.
(e) Determining the effect of sand on the water demand of a concrete mix
Water demand is defined as the quantity of water per cubic metre of concrete required to give a
slump of 75 mm in a concrete with an optimum quantity of stone with a nominal size of 19 mm.
The following materials are required:
• Ordinary Portland cement
• Crushed stone with a nominal size of 19 mm
• Sand or a sand mix to be tested.
Method:
1) Determine the relative density (Rsa) in accordance with SABS 844 and the fineness
modules (FM) of the sand or sand mix.
2) Determine the compacted bulk density (CBD) of the 19 mm aggregate in accordance
with SABS 845. Also determine the relative density of the stone (Rst)
3) Determine the required quantity of stone (S) per cubic metre of mix (in kg/m3) in
accordance with formula:
S = CBD (0.975 - 0.1 FM).
4) Estimate the water demand (W) of the mix (in l/ m3). (220 l/m3 may be used as a starting
point.)
5) Determine the required cement content (C) for the mix (in kg/m3) by using the water
content (W) as obtained from (4) and a water-cement ratio of 0.59.
6) Determine the desired sand content (SC) of the mix (in kg/m3) in accordance with the
formula:
SC = 1 - (C/3140 + W/1000 + S/Rst)
7) Decide on the mix size, which will apply to the available equipment and calculate the
mix quantities in relation to the calculated quantities per cubic metre. Do not produce a mix of
less than 10 l.
8) Prepare the mix and determine the slump in accordance with SABS 862. Repeat the test
with adjusted quantities of cement, water and sand until a slump of 75 mm is achieved. (As a
rule, a change of 10 l/m3 in the water content either halves or doubles the slump.)

9) The water content giving a slump of 75 mm will then be the water demand for the mix.
10) In order to facilitate the repeatability of results the following parameters should be kept
constant:
• Material temperature
• Mixing time
• Source of cement
• Source of stone.

Table 10100/1 Schedule Showing Quantities And Times For Submitting The Materials For
Approval And Mix Designs
Material Proposed use Submission for quality Submission for quality approval
submitted approval only and mix design
Minimum Minimum Minimum time Minimum
time to be quantity to be to be allowed for quantity
allowed for submitted testing, approval to be submitted
testing and and mix design
approval
Crushed stone 150 kg of each
Coarse 8 weeks for
50 kg of each size of stone for
aggregate for 2 weeks structures and
size of stone each class of
concrete concrete roads
concrete
Bituminous 50 kg of each 50 kg of each size
2 weeks 2 weeks
seals size of stone of stone
50 kg of each 100 kg of each
Asphalt mixes 2 weeks 8 weeks
size of stone size of stone
Crushed-stone
8 weeks
base or 3 weeks 50 kg 200 kg
(stabilization)
subbase
Crusher dust 150 kg of each
50 kg of each
and/or sand Fine aggregate type proposed for
2weeks size of 10 weeks
for concrete use for each class
aggregate
of concrete
15 kg of each 150 kg of each
Asphalt mixes 2weeks size of 8 weeks type proposed for
aggregate use
15 kg of each 50 kg of each type
Slurry or sand
2 weeks type proposed 6 weeks proposed for
seal
for use use
Gravel Subbase 200 kg of each 8 weeks
4weeks 200 kg
and/or base sample (stabilization)
Other materials
e.g. paint,
As specified As prescribed by the engineer
cement, addi-
tives, etc
(f) Accelerated-test method for determining the potential alkali reactivity of aggregates
(i) The method

Three mortar prisms shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 227-90.
The prisms are removed from the mould after 24 hours and immersed in water in a closed
container, placed in an oven and kept at a constant temperature of 80 OC. After 24 hours in the
oven, the prisms are taken to a room with a temperature of 23 OC. where their lengths are
measured with a vertical comparator (an indicator type of deformation meter) to an accuracy of 2
µm before any significant cooling takes place.
This reading will be taken as the nil reading. After the initial reading has been taken, the prisms
are immersed in a 1 N NaOH solution kept at 80 OC in a tightly sealed plastic container, which is

large enough for the prisms to be completely immersed. (Glass and metal containers are
unsuitable as they are susceptible to attack by the caustic solution.) The prisms are measured
every working day for a period of 14 days at a room temperature of 23 OC, and their linear
expansion is calculated. The average expansion of the three prisms for each day is then
calculated. Where none of the values deviate by more than 15% from the average, the
repeatability is regarded as being satisfactory. The average expansion after 10 or 12 days is taken
to be the reference value for determining the potential alkali reactivity.
(ii) Criteria
The criteria proposed provisionally for the accelerated mortar-prism testing method shall be as
follows:
1) Percentage of linear expansion after 10 days.
< 0.08 the alkali reactivity of the aggregate is not harmful
> =0.08 but < 0.20 the alkali reactivity of the aggregate is harmful and the aggregate is expanding
slowly
>=0.20 the alkali reactivity of the aggregate is harmful and the aggregate is expanding rapidly
2) Percentage of linear expansion after 12 days:
< 0.10 the alkali reactivity of the aggregate is not harmful
>=0.10 but < 0.25 The alkali reactivity of the aggregate is harmful and the aggregate is expanding
slowly
>=0.25 The alkali reactivity of the aggregate is harmful and the aggregate is expanding rapidly.
3) Interpretation
For aggregates falling in the slowly expanding group, the alkalinity per m3 of concrete shall not
exceed 2.80 kg of a Na2O equivalent.
For aggregates falling in the rapidly expanding group, the alkalinity per m3 of concrete shall not
exceed a value of 2.10 kg of a Na2O equivalent per m3, depending on the reactivity.
The dilution and palliative effect of extenders in the cementitious binders, such as slagment
(where permitted in structural concrete) and fly ash, shall be taken into account in the
interpretation of the results.
10106 TESTING CONCRETE
(a) Determining the compressive strength

The procedure for sampling and manufacturing, storing, curing and testing test cubes shall be in
accordance with TMH1 method Dl, except that the machines referred to in paragraph 2.3 of
TMH1 method Dl shall also comply with all the requirements of BS 1610 and BS 1881. The
following deviations from the above procedure shall apply:
Where instructed by the engineer, the compaction of concrete specimens in the moulds by means
of a vibrating table shall be obligatory. The method of compaction shall be as follows:

(i) Plastic concrete

Fill the mould halfway and vibrate it and spade it on all four sides with a suitable trowel to
remove air bubbles. Stop the vibration as soon as a wet sheen appears on the surface. Fill the
mould and repeat the procedure, but stop when again a wet sheen appears on the surface.
(ii) Stiff concrete

The same procedure is followed, except that the mould is filled in three to four steps instead of in
two. The vibration is stopped for each layer when a wet sheen appears.
(b) Consistency
The test method described in TMH1 method D3 shall apply in regard to the slump test, and the
method described in BS 881 (Part 104) in regard to the VEBE test.
(c) Air content

The air content of the freshly mixed concrete shall be tested by the method given in TMH1
method D5. Air content tests shall be conducted on the same samples of concrete from which
cubes were made for the 28-day compressive-strength tests.
(d) Drilling and testing the concrete cores

Where sections of concrete that have failed to comply with the specifications are required to be
further investigated by extracting and testing concrete cores, 100 mm or 150 mm cores shall be
drilled and tested. The sampling and testing procedure to be followed shall be in accordance with
SABS 865.
(e) Flexural strength test (modulus of rupture)

The procedure for sampling, making tests beams, curing, storing and testing, and the moulds used,
shall be in accordance with SABS 864.
(f) Curing concrete cubes to attain accelerated strength development (55 °C /20 hours)
(i) Scope
A method is described for curing concrete cubes at 55 OC for 20 hours with a view to predicting
the 28-day compressive strength for purposes of quality control. The accelerated tests are
additional tests and do not replace the 28-day tests.
(ii) Apparatus
The following equipment is required:
• Apparatus for preparing the concrete cubes in accordance with method Dl of
TMH1
• Plastic sheets of 180 mm x 180 mm
• Hessian sheets for covering the samples
• A suitable water bath with a circulation system of adequate capacity and a
thermostat to maintain the temperature constantly at 55 OC +/- 1 OC.

(iii) Method
Prepare the required number of concrete cubes in accordance with method Dl in TMH1 and
completely cover the exposed surface within the cube mould with small plastic sheets and then
with wet hessian. Keep it covered for 3 hours +/- 15 minutes.
Place the concrete cubes in their moulds in the hot-water bath at a rate which will not cause the
water temperature to drop below 54 OC. Record the exact time when each cube is placed into the
water and leave it in the water at a temperature of 55 OC +/- 1 OC for 20 hours +/- 15 minutes.
Remove the moulds containing the cubes from the water and then carefully remove the cubes
from their moulds. Cool the cubes for 2 hours +/- 15 minutes in water at 20 OC +/- 5 OC.
Test the compressive strength of the cubes in accordance with method Dl of TMHl.
(iv) Calculating the compressive strength

The cube compressive strength is calculated in accordance with method Dl of TMH1. In order to
predict 28-day compressive strength of concrete mixes, the ratio between the 28-day compressive
strength and the strength of rapidly-hardened cubes shall be determined for each type of concrete
mix by correlation techniques.
For purposes of the initial work, research has shown that the strength of the cubes treated and
tested as described above will be approximately 0.58 times the 28-day compressive strength for
concrete cubes prepared from Ordinary Portland cement (for strengths between 30 and 65 MPa).
For rapid-hardening cement, the corresponding factor is 0.59, and for PBFC it is 0.66.
10107 TESTING THE SOILS, GRAVELS AND CRUSHED STONE MATERIALS FOR EARTHWORKS
AND PAVEMENT LAYERS
Specimens of soils, gravels and crushed-stone materials in earthworks and pavement layers shall
be taken in accordance with the methods described in TMH5 (unless SABS 827 is specified), and
any tests thereon shall be conducted in accordance with the methods described in TMHl (A
series), all subject to the following additional provisions:
(a) Field Density

All field-density determinations shall be done in accordance with method C (direct transmission)
of method Al0(b). Method A10(a) may be used where so instructed by the engineer. Unless
otherwise directed by the engineer, density testing for layerworks shall be carried out within 24
hours of compaction having been completed. For the determination of the dry density the
moisture content shall be determined by means of a gravimetric method. Method Al0(b) will be
the reference method, except where in the opinion of the engineer the material is of such a nature
that, when the method is applied, disturbances will occur which will affect the results. The
apparatus shall be properly calibrated, and a valid calibration certificate by a recognized
laboratory shall be submitted to the engineer on demand. The engineer may insist on recalibration
at any stage.
(b) Relative Density

The dry bulk relative density and the apparent relative density of crushed-stone material shall be
determined as specified in clause 10108.

(c) Chemically stabilized material

In the case of chemically stabilised material, determining the optimum moisture content and the
maximum dry density shall be completed within the period given in table 3503(1), and field
density shall be determined within 24 hours of compaction having been completed.
(d) Moisture content at saturation

The moisture content at the specified saturation degree (Sr) shall be determined as follows:
(The apparent density (Gs) of the material shall also be determined for this purpose).
Wv = Sr (Xw/ Xd - 1000/ Gs), where:
Wv = moisture content of the specified degree of saturation (%)
Xw = density of water (kg/m3)
Xd = dry field density of the material (kg/m3)
Gs = apparent density of the material (kg/m3)
Sr = specified degree of saturation (%).
(e) The soundness of mudrock or shale aggregates

The soundness of mudrock or shale aggregates shall be determined by weathering the aggregate in
water by means of the following method (Venter test):
(i) Apparatus
o 37.5 mm and 26.5 mm, 300mm diameter sieves, complying with SABS 197.
o Stainless steel weathering basins, 150 mm (L) x 100 mm (W) x 50 mm (H) with perforated
base (see figure 10101/1 (a))
o Stainless steel reaction troughs, 500 mm (L) x 160 mm (W) to hold three (3) weathering
basins (see figure 10101/1(b)).
o Stainless steel drip tray, 500 mm (L) x 450 mm (W) x 25 mm (H), to hold nine (9)
weathering basins for oven drying (see figure 10101/1(c)).
o Force draught oven, capable of maintaining a temperature between 105 OC and 110 OC
o Tank with distilled water supply.
(ii) Preparation of aggregate

For each laboratory sample, obtain six (6) representative aggregate particles passing the 37.5 mm
sieve and retained on the 26.5 mm sieve, without any visible cracks or flaws.
Place the particles in the weathering basin so that they are not touching each other.
(iii) Test procedure (start of first cycle)

Place the weathering basins containing the particles in the oven and dry overnight for 15 hours +/-
30 minutes at a temperature between 105 OC and 110 OC.
Remove from oven and allow to cool to room temperature for at least 30 minutes.

Place the weathering basins with aggregate particles in the reaction trough and add clean water
until the particles are covered by at least 15 mm of water.
Keep the aggregate particles immersed in the water at room temperature for 8 hours +/- 30
minutes.
Lift the weathering basins containing the aggregate particles out of the water and, by tilting it
through 90 degrees, allow the weathering basins to rest on the inner shoulders of the trough for
drip drying. This completes the first cycle.
Visually inspect each particle and record the condition of each particle noting cracks, flaws, extent
of fissures etc before starting the following cycle.
Repeat until five cycles are completed and finally inspect each aggregate particle.
(iv) Evaluation
The disintegration pattern of the aggregate fragments shall be visually classified in accordance
with the five classes specified in (v) and illustrated in figure 10100/2.
The terms to be used to describe the shape of the fragments are as follows:
o Plates - plates of fairly uniform thickness.
o Flakes - fragments of non-uniform thickness, concave, convex, or wedge-shaped.
o Chunks - roughly equi-dimensional fragments (> 3 mm).
o Grains - fragments from about sand size to 3 mm diameter.
o Silt, mud or clay
(v) Classification
The five classes for rating the aggregate are as follows:
Class I: Nil to minimal disintegration with only minor closed cracks and difficult separation along
these fractures planes
Class II: Disintegration into hard fragments with some open cracks.
Class III: Moderate disintegration with a high percentage of open cracks into less hard fragments.
Class IV:Extensive disintegration into soft fragments with total separation along fracture planes.
Class V: Slaking into very soft fragments, silt, mud or clay
(f) Nuclear device for compaction process control

1) The nuclear device for compaction process control shall:
2) be operated by a suitably trained technician;
3) comply with all the statutory regulations governing the use of this equipment;
4) be certified to be suitably calibrated.
10108 DETERMINING THE TOTAL APPROXIMATE DRY BULK RELATIVE DENSITY AND THE
APPARENT RELATIVE DENSITY
(a) Total approximate dry bulk relative density

The total approximate dry bulk relative density of base material shall be determined as follows:

Firstly, the -0.075 mm fraction is removed from the sample and then the sample is divided up into
+4.75 mm and -4.75mm fractions.
For the +4.75 mm fraction, the dry bulk density and water absorption are determined according to
method B14 of TMH1.
The apparent relative density only is required for the -4.75mm fraction.
(i) Definitions
The definitions in methods B14 and B15 of TMH1 are applicable.
(ii) Apparatus
1. +4.75 mm fraction
The same apparatus as that required by method B14,
2. -4.75 mm fraction
• A 2 liter pycnometer.
• A balance with a capacity of at least 5 kg and accurate to 0.5g.
• A vacuum pump capable of maintaining a reduced pressure of 100 mm mercury.
• A water bath capable of maintaining a temperature of 25 C +/-1 OC.
• A drying oven, thermostatically controlled and capable of maintaining a
temperature of 105 OC to 110 OC.
• A 25 ml pipette.
• A 0.075 mm sieve.
(iii) Method
The method is the same as method B14.
After riffling, the volume of the sample shall be 40% =/- 5% of that of the pycnometer.
Wash the sample thoroughly to remove the -0.075 mm fraction and soak the sample for
24 hours +/- 4 hours
After the sample has been soaked transfer it to a clean pycnometer.
Add distilled water to the sample in the pycnometer until the pycnometer is
approximately three-quarters full. Remove any entrapped air by subjecting the sample to
partial vacuum (air pressure approximately 100 mm mercury) for a few minutes. This
can be done by connecting the pycnometer directly to an aspirator or a vacuum pump, or
by using a bell jar. Some soils boil violently when subject to reduced air pressure in
which cases the pressure should be increased Place the pycnometer and contents in the
constant-temperature bath at 25 OC +/- 1 OC and leave it for approximately 20 minutes
until the contents of the pycnometer are at this temperature. With a pipette, fill the
pycnometer up to the mark with distilled water at 25 OC. Dry the pycnometer quickly
and thoroughly, and weigh it.

Gently pour off the water without spilling any of the sample. Dry the pycnometer with
its contents to a constant mass in an oven at 105 OC to ll0 OC and weigh it.
Clean the pycnometer, fill it with distilled water at 25 OC, dry the outside, and weigh it.
Record the mass determinations on a suitable data sheet.
(iv) Calculations
Calculate the dry bulk relative density to the nearest 0.001 g/c m3 from the following
formula:
Dry bulk relative density (25 OC) : Gbc = a/(b-c)
where :
a = mass of oven-dry sample in air
b = mass of saturated surface-dry sample in air
c = mass of saturated surface-dry sample in water at 25 OC.
The test shall be repeated if the duplicate results do not agree within +/- 0.005.
Report the result to the nearest 0.001 g/cm3.
Calculate the percentage of water absorbed from the following formula:
Percentage of water absorption (mass): Pwa = 100 (b – a)/a
Report the result to the nearest 0.1%.
Calculate the apparent relative density to the nearest 0 001 g/cm3 from the following
formula:
Apparent relative density (25 OC): Gaf = (A – E)/[(D - E) - (C - A)]
where:
A= mass of oven-dry sample and pycnometer
C= mass of saturated sample and pycnometer filled with water at 25 OC
D= mass of pycnometer filled with water only. At 25 OC
E= mass of clean, dry pycnometer.
The test shall be repeated if the duplicate results do not agree within + 0.005.
Report the result to the nearest 0.001 g/cm3.
Calculate the dry bulk relative density of the -4.75 mm fraction from the following
formula:
Dry bulk relative density - fines (25 OC): Gbf = Gaf/(Pwa.Gaf/100 + 1)
Calculate the dry bulk relative density of the total sample less the -0.075 mm fraction,
from the following formula:
Dry bulk relative density - total (25 OC): Gbf = 100/(P1/Gbf + P2/Gbs) where :
P1 = percentage passing through the 4.75 mm sieve

P2 = percentage retained on the 4.75 mm sieve.
(v) General requirements

The standard temperature is taken as 25 OC. If the test is conducted at any other temperature, this
shall be stated, or the relative density shall be adjusted for a temperature of 25 OC.
The relative density of material retained on the 4.75 mm sieve can also be determined by using a
pycnometer. The volume of the pycnometer should not be less than 2 l (the volume occupied by
the aggregate shall be 40% + 5% of the pycnometer capacity).
The pycnometer may be a relative-density flask with a perforated glass stopper, or a volumetric
flask, or any other glass container equipped with a suitable means of ensuring that it can be filled
to a constant volume.
When the particle size of the –4.75 mm grains is widely distributed, the test may not be repeatable
and more samples shall be tested.
The apparent relative density of the +4.75 mm fraction is not called for, but if required. calculate it
from the following formula:
Apparent relative density (25 OC): Gac = a/(a - c)
(b) Apparent relative density

The apparent relative density of crushed-stone materials shall be determined as follows:
(i) Apparatus
• A balance to weigh 5 kg accurately to within 0.5 g
• A pycnometer, eg a preservative jar with a smooth flat rim.
• A thermostatically controlled bath capable of maintaining a temperature of 25 OC +/-1OC.
• A drying oven capable of maintaining the temperature between 105 OC and 110 OC.
• A thermometer marked from 0 – 100 OC.
• Towels.
• Teepol (10%) solution.
(ii) Method
Take 3 kg to 4 k g of the material as obtained from a density hole in the road. All the material
obtained from the hole should preferably be used. If it is too much for one pycnometer, more than
one pycnometer shall be used.
Dry the material in the oven at 105 OC – 110 OC to a constant mass.
Ensure that the pycnometer is clean and determine its mass together with that of a marked sheet of
glass.
Place the dried sample into the pycnometer and determine the mass of the pycnometer, glass sheet
and sample together. (The sample shall not take up more than half of the pycnometer's volume.)
Add clean water at 25 OC to the pycnometer until it is approximately three quarters full. Add three
drops of the 10% Teepol solution to the water. Close the pycnometer and shake it thoroughly for
two (2) minutes.

Fill the pycnometer to near the brim with water at 25 OC and place it in a thermostatically
controlled bath at 25 OC. Leave it for thirty (30) minutes (or as long as may be determined by the
engineer) without disturbing.
Remove the pycnometer without shaking or jarring and place it on a spread-out towel. Fill it with
water at 250C and carefully slide the glass sheet over the brim from one side. Make sure that no
air bubbles are trapped beneath the glass sheet. Dry the entire pycnometer and glass sheet
carefully and determine the mass of the filled pycnometer plus the glass sheet.
Remove the contents of the pycnometer, clean and fill it in the same manner with water at 25 OC.
Dry and determine the mass of the pycnometer filled with water together with the glass sheet.
(iii) Calculation
The apparent relative density of the material is calculated as follows:
• Mass of pycnometer + glass sheet = a
• Mass of pycnometer + glass sheet + material = b
• Mass of material only = (b - a)
• Mass of pycnometer + material + water + glass sheet =c
• Mass of pycnometer + water + glass sheet = d
• Apparent relative density of material = 1000[(b-a)/{(d-a) – (c-b)}]
Notes:
1) No chemicals other than the Teepol solution may be added to the water.
2) No suction may be applied to the water to remove air.
3) The temperature of the water shall be 25 OC +/- 1 OC and no other temperature may be used.
4) Where two pycnometers are used, the apparent relative density shall be calculated from the
weighted average of the two results.
5) Where the water absorption of the aggregate exceeds 1.0%, the engineer will determine the
soaking period.
10109 TESTING TAR, BITUMEN AND ASPHALT
(a) Tests described in the standard specifications for tars, bitumens and bituminous
emulsions
The engineer shall be entitled to order the contractor to have materials tested by an approved
laboratory for compliance with all or any of the requirements specified, and the results of such
tests shall be submitted directly to the engineer by the testing laboratory with copies, if requested,
to the contractor.
The cost of such tests shall be borne as specified in Clause 10103.
(b) Determining the film thickness

The film thickness of the binder in asphalt mixes shall be determined as described in the
publication TRH8.

(c) Cantabro abrasion test

Where required the resistance of porous asphalt briquettes to abrasion loss shall be determined by
means of the Cantabro test. The abrasion loss value for freshly compacted specimens shall not
exceed the values specified in table 6400/13.
The details of the test are as follows
(i) Apparatus
The apparatus shall be a Los Angeles Testing Machine as described in ASTM Method C131.
The machine shall consist of a hollow steel cylinder, closed at both ends, having an inside
diameter of 710 mm +/- 5 mm and an inside length of 510 mm +/-5 mm.
The cylinder shall be mounted with stub shafts attached to the end of the cylinder, but not entering
it, and shall be mounted in such a manner that it may be rotated with the axis in a horizontal
position with a tolerance in slope of 1 in 100.
An opening in the cylinder shall be provided for introduction of the test sample.
The opening shall be provided with a suitable, dust-tight cover secured in place by bolts.
The cover shall be designed to maintain the cylindrical contour of the interior surface unless the
shelf is so located that the charge and/or test sample will not fall on the cover, or come in contact
with it during the test.
A removable steel shelf extending the full length of the cylinder and projecting 90 mm +/- 2 mm
inward shall be mounted on the interior cylindrical surface of the cylinder. in such a way that a
plane centred between the large faces coincides with an axial plane.
The shelf shall be 25 mm +- 1 mm thick and mounted by bolts or other suitable means so that it is
firm and rigid.
The position of the shelf shall be such that the distance from the shelf to the opening, measured
along the outside circumference of the cylinder in the direction of rotation, shall not be less than 1
270 mm.
The machine shall be driven and counterbalanced to maintain uniform peripheral speed of 30 - 33
rpm for 300 revolutions.
If an angle is used as the shelf, the direction of rotation shall be such that the charge is caught on
the outside surface of the angle.
(ii) Test Procedure

Marshall Specimens shall be prepared as described in TMH1 - Method C2, but for this test each
Marshall specimen shall be compacted with 50 blows only on each side.
For each binder content, three specimens shall be made for the abrasion test.
The compaction temperature depends on the type of binder to be used. For B20 road-grade (60/70
penetration-grade bitumen it shall be 115 OC to 120 OC and for bitumen-rubber (wet method) it
shall be 135 OC to 140 OC measured in the mould just prior to compaction.
The thickness of the test specimen shall be 63.5 mm +/- 1.25 mm.
The mass of the specimen in air (P1) to the nearest 0.1 g and the average thickness to the nearest
0.1 mm shall be determined.
The test specimen shall be placed in the Los Angeles apparatus without the abrasive charge of
steel balls and the cover shall be fitted.

The machine shall be switched on and allowed to operate for 300 revolutions at a speed between
30 - 33 rpm.
After the required number of revolutions, the machine shall be stopped and the specimen removed
and the mass determined (P2) to the nearest 0.1 g.
The test shall be carried out for each binder content in triplicate.
(iii) Calculations
The percentage abrasion loss for each specimen shall be calculated as follows:
P = 100(P1 - P2)/P1 where:
P1 = mass of specimen before testing.
P2 = mass of specimen after testing.
The mean of the three specimens shall be determined at the various binder contents.
(iv) Notes:
The determination of the optimum binder content is based on the following considerations:
1/ a minimum binder content limit to ensure resistance against aggregate loss due to traffic and to
enhance durability
2/ a maximum binder content limit to avoid binder run-off and to ensure good drainage in the mix
as a layer on the road.
The minimum binder content to ensure adequate coating thickness shall not be less than 4%.
The density of the specimen can also be determined by calculating the volume of the specimen.
The voids in the specimen can also be calculated if the maximum theoretical voidless density
(Rice) is determined:
% Voids in specimen = 100 (Rice density - Specimen density)/Rice Density.
(d) Determination of in situ water permeability of bituminous road surfacing or roadbase

layers by using the falling head (MARVIL) apparatus
(i) Scope
This method describes the determination of the in situ water permeability of asphalt surfacing
and/or roadbase layers and is based on the principle of the falling head permeameter. The
permeability of a layer is an indication of the intensity of interconnected voids in the layer that
may be detrimental to the material due to oxidation of the binder and/or ingress of water to the
lower layers.
(ii) Apparatus
The apparatus consists of the falling head permeability (MARVIL) apparatus with a circular
weight and an acrylic tube with volume markings from 0 ml to 300 ml in 50 ml increments (see
figure 10100/3).
Other items required are:
• Adhesive putty (Prestik or similar approved)
• Water resistant grease (BP LS 3 or wheel bearing grease)

• Plaster of Paris (commercial grade) optional for granular layers

• Stop watch, accurate to 1 second
• Plastic tanks with sufficient drinking water (40 l or more)
• Plastic beakers or aluminium kettles of 5 l capacity
• Mechanical power saw with a corundum blade (optional for cutting through thick
asphalt layers)
(iii) Sundries
• Chisels (25 mm and 100 mm width)
• Hammers (1 kg - 2 kg mass)
• Paint brushes (25 mm and 100 mm width)
• Putty knives (50 mm width)
• Spatula (20 mm width)
• Hand cleaning cream, paper towels
• Toluol (at least 5 l)
(e) Test site, and apparatus preparation and positioning
(i) Asphalt and un-surfaced roadbase layers with smooth surfaces

A test point is randomly chosen or as prescribed in the project specifications. Areas contaminated
with foreign matter such as grease, oil, animal dung, etc. shall be avoided.
Use a brush (100 mm) to clean an area of the surface slightly bigger than the base of the apparatus
of all loose aggregate and dust. Place the apparatus in the middle of the clean area and, using the
base as template, mark the outside with a marker such as chalk. Clean the bottom of the base of all
grease using Toluol (or similar approved organic solvent) and dry with paper towels.
Place a Prestik thread of 5 mm diameter around the inner and outer rims of the base edge and
press firmly so that it adheres to the base. The function of the inner thread is to prevent grease
from being expelled into the test area.
As the test is started under a head of 380 mm of water, the two threads must not be so thick as to
prevent the base of the apparatus from coming in close contact with the surface of the test area.
Fill the space between the threads of Prestik with grease. The grease shall be applied so that it
protrudes below the Prestik (see figure 10100/4). Place the apparatus lightly on the premarked
surface of the road. Lift the apparatus off the surface and apply extra grease over the grease band
left on the road and work it into the surface with a spatula or finger.
Place the apparatus with the undisturbed adhesive threads, and with additional grease added
between the threads, exactly on the pre-marked area. Press firmly until the grease is expelled
from underneath the base. Place the circular weight on the upper side of the base. This is to keep
the apparatus stable and to prevent the water from lifting it.
The expelled grease from underneath the base is worked into the surface to form a band of grease
about 20 mm wide around the base of the apparatus to achieve a watertight seal. The apparatus is
then ready for filling with water.

After testing, carefully lift the apparatus with the aid of a screwdriver from the surface. Inspect the
condition of the threads and if they are loose, press down again or replace and fill with grease
again.
(ii) Asphalt surfacing with uneven rough surface

This procedure is for single or double aggregate seals.
A test point is obtained as before. In the case of double seals, a groove is cut to a depth of between
3 mm and 5 mm and 25 mm inside the inner circumference of the pre-marked circle inner
diameter of groove 225 mm +/- 5 mm) using a thin wall barrel and a carborundum bit
Proceed as before with cleaning the test area, and preparing and placing the apparatus.
Mark a circle on the asphalt surfacing, about 25 mm in diameter larger than the base of the
apparatus or a square area 300 mm x 300 mm. Remove the surfacing by cutting on the delineated
line with a power saw or chisels Lift the surfacing carefully from the lower layer without causing
too much distortion of the surface of the roadbase layer to be tested.
Carefully remove any loose aggregate or surfacing aggregate adhering to the roadbase layer, and,
if required, the prime layer and clean the test surface with a brush.
Only one thick thread of adhesive putty is placed on the bottom in the middle of the base and
formed as shown in figure 10100/5. Place the apparatus in the centre of the hole and press firmly
down.
Prepare a liquid slurry mixture of plaster of Paris (see notes in sub-clause (v)) and water and pour
it around and above the base (see figure 10100/6). Allow the mixture to set to a hard mass (10 - 15
minutes). The apparatus is then ready for filling with water.
After testing, the hard plaster of Paris is chipped away and the apparatus carefully lifted from the
surface with the aid of a screwdriver.
(iii) Test procedure

Fill the apparatus from the top with water to the 0 ml mark or just above this mark, depending on
the permeability of the layer, in the shortest time possible.
For the first reading record the time (in minutes and seconds) taken by the water level to drop
from the zero mark to one of the graduated marks in a period of 2 to 3 minutes. Repeat the test
immediately, by filling the apparatus again to the 0 ml mark, or just above this mark, and record
the time taken by the water to drop from 0 ml to the same graduated mark used for the first
reading. Not more than three repetitions shall be done at a test point.
(iv) Test results and calculations

The readings of each test at each test point are tabulated and the permeability is calculated as
follows:
P = 3.6 Vw /Tsec where
P = permeability in l /h, correct to the nearest 0.1 l/h
Vw = volume of water in millilitres between the zero mark and the selected volume mark
Tsec = time in seconds taken by the water level to drop from the zero mark to the selected volume
mark
The permeability per unit area can also be calculated as follows:
Permeability per unit area (l /h/ m2) = P/A, where

A = surface (in m2) underneath the apparatus exposed to the water.

The change in flow rate with increasing or decreasing saturation can also be graphically indicated
by plotting the values of permeability or permeability per square metre against the number of test
repetitions. The trend of the line may indicate the degree of increasing or decreasing flow.
However, in this case more than three repetitions shall be taken.
(v) Notes
Table 10100/2 indicates the recommended mark to be taken for a reading as indicated by the time
for the water level to reach the graduation mark and the number of repetitions (refills) at a test
point.
When there is a possibility of the wafer level not reaching the 50 ml mark in 10 minutes, estimate
the volume to the nearest 10 ml at 10 minutes, stop the test and calculate the permeability.
The times (or flows) may remain fairly constant when taken three times or more, but a decrease in
flow indicates that the material is becoming saturated. An increase in flow indicates that the water
opens up paths to flow into and if water appears on the surface in the vicinity of the apparatus
there has been horizontal flow through the material and this may also give rise to an increase in
the flow rate.
Table 10100/2 Recommended Mark
Time for water to Number or Recommended mark to be

reach repetitions taken
50 ml mark (minutes)
<1 3 150 ml
1-2 3 100 ml
2-4 3 50 ml
4-6 2 50 ml
6 - 10 1 50 ml
If it is required to test the bond between the surfacing and the base layer, ten repetitions or more
may be required.
If the bond is not sufficient, an increase in the water flow may be encountered and the surface
layer will eventually lift up from the roadbase.
If this does not happen, it is not necessarily an indication of a good bond between the surfacing
and the base. In this case the granular base material may be sufficiently permeable for the water to
penetrate into the base or even lower layers, rather than follow a horizontal path.
The testing for bond strength between the surface and the base, especially in the case of granular
materials, should be considered carefully as the unnecessary over saturation of the layer with
water may be detrimental to the road. This procedure is more applicable to research projects.
The permeability of a layer will depend on many factors such as:
• the degree of saturation of the layer, e.g. after a spell of rain, or due to built-in
moisture content.
• the degree of density of the layer.
• the grading, shape and texture of the material, and

• the degree of saturation of the underlying layer under a thin upper layer.
Testing of the surface where it shows signs of intensive cracking should be considered.
The plaster of Paris should be mixed to obtain approximately 900 ml of slurry which should be
sufficient if the hole is not more than 300 mm in diameter. The procedure is as follows:
Add approximately 1100 g of plaster of Paris to approximately 900 ml of water in a mixing bowl
or small plastic bucket. Let the powder form a small heap in the middle of the water.
Let it stand for a minute or two before mixing. Mix it slowly with the fingers to a watery
consistency. Add more water if necessary until a creamy consistency is obtained so that when the
slurry is poured around the base of the apparatus it will fill all the crevices. The slurry must cover
the base to a depth of 5 mm to 10 mm. The process must be completed before hardening starts. Air
and water temperature may influence the setting of the slurry,
When the surface layer is thinner than the base of the apparatus, the circular weight shall be used
to hold the apparatus in the starting position. Less slurry of plaster of Paris will be required.
10110 TESTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL STABILIZATION
(a) Test for cementitious binder content

The test method used for determining the cementitious binder content of soils, gravels or crushed
stone mixed with a chemical stabilizing agent shall be determined by the engineer and may be any
test method currently recognised by the employer as being acceptable.
Where the cementitious binder content is determined, due allowance shall be made for the
presence in the unstabilized material of naturally occurring MgO or CaO (e.g. basalts, calcretes,
etc) which affects the result of such tests. If the standard deviation of the natural MgO plus CaO
content of the untreated material exceeds 0.35%, any determination of the cementitious binder
content shall be ignored
Sample holes shall be randomly spaced transversely as well as longitudinally over the area to be
tested, or as directed by the engineer, and if the material is road-mixed, samples shall be taken
from the top and bottom of each hole.
(b) Canvas-patch test for the spreading rate of cementitious binder

The following method shall be used for determining the spreading rate of a chemical stabilizing
agent where bulk distributors are used.
At least 10 clean canvas patches, each measuring 1 m x 1 m shall be placed flat on the road in
selected positions in relation to the bulk distributor’s track After the stabilizing agent has been
spread by the bulk distributor the canvas patches shall be carefully lifted and all the material on
the patches transferred to a container and weighed. The total mass of stabilizing agent on each
patch is then recorded and the average rate of application determined. Instead of canvas patches,
flat metal trays may be used for collecting the stabilizing agent.
Test for mix uniformity in chemically stabilized layers
Where required by the engineer, the contractor shall determine the mix uniformity in chemically
stabilized layers by means of unconfined compressive strength tests using an approved method.
The contractor shall timeously make the necessary arrangements to take samples in accordance
with the requirements of the method used.

10111 TESTS ON PAVEMENTS

The following tests shall apply to pavements when specified: texture depth, straightedge, and
rolling straightedge.
(a) Determining the texture depth

The texture depth shall be determined by way of the sand-patch test as described in test method
ST1 of TMH6.
(b) Straightedge test for surface irregularities on surfaces with a coarse surface texture
Where surface irregularities are measured on surfaces with a coarse surface texture such as
grooved concrete pavements, crushed-stone pavement layers, natural gravel roadbase, asphalt with
rolled-in chippings, surface treatments, seals and other like surfaces, the following procedure shall
be followed:
A metal wedge of 100 mm in length and 50 mm in width shall be constructed with a taper of 7.5
horizontal to 1.0 vertical and tapering to a feather edge (50 mm wide). Parallel lines spaced at 7.5
mm intervals shall be engraved on the sloping face and numbered to indicate the positions where
the wedge is 1.0 mm. 2.0 mm, etc, thick.
Where surface irregularities are measured, the 3.0 m straight-edge, which shall have sharp right-
angled corners at the bottom, shall be placed on the road and the thin edge of the wedge inserted
below the straight-edge from the front at the position where a surface irregularity is to be
measured. The size of the irregularity shall be determined in accordance with the mark to which
the wedge can be inserted without lifting the straight-edge. The width of the contact plane of the
straight edge shall be 18 mm +/- 2 mm and its height shall be 80 mm +/- 10 mm.
(c) Using the rolling straight-edge for measuring surface irregularities

The apparatus and testing method for this test shall be in accordance with testing method ST3 of
TMH6.
10112 STRUCTURAL TESTS
(a) Tests on elastomeric bearings
(i) General
Tests on elastomeric bearings shall be conducted in accordance with BS 5400 part 9.2, and the
bearings shall comply with the test requirements specified in the said specification.
(ii) Compression and shear-stiffness tests

When compression and shear-stiffness tests are conducted on sample bearers or on only a limited
number of bearers in a consignment, the stiffness values as determined by the tests shall be within
20% of the required values.

(b) Prestressed concrete: Testing prestressing steel, anchorage assemblies, couplings and
grout
(i) General
Where so directed by the engineer, the contractor shall make arrangements for samples of the
materials he intends to use in the works to be tested by an independent testing authority. The cost
of testing prestressing steel, anchorage assemblies and couplings will be paid for as specified in
sub-clause 10103. Control tests on the viscosity and bleeding of grout will be regarded as part of
the contractor's obligations under clause 36 of the General Conditions of Contract and 10209 for
process control and will not be paid for separately.
Materials represented by samples, which do not comply with the specified requirements, shall be
removed and replaced with suitable material.
(ii) Anchorages and couplers

Anchorages and couplers shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of sub-clause
8603(c). The anchorages and couplers shall be assembled in accordance with their practical
application on the site where all the components necessary for anchoring shall be used, but
excluding the ducts.
(iii) Prestressing steel

Prestressing steel shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of sub-clause 8602(b).
Should any test piece fail to comply with the requirements specified for the prestressing steel, the
material represented by that sample shall not be used without further testing and shall be replaced
with materials conforming to the specifications if further testing confirms that they do not comply
with the specifications.
(iv) Grout
The fluidity of grout shall be measured with a flow cone, immersion apparatus or viscometer. The
instrument shall be accurately calibrated in a laboratory so that the specified viscosity of the grout
can be controlled satisfactorily
The procedure for conducting the flow-cone test for measuring the fluidity of grout shall be as
follows.
Unless otherwise approved, the flow cone shall be as shown in figure 10100/7.
Immediately after the grout has been mixed the pre-wetted flow cone, which is held firmly with its
top rim in a level position, shall be filled with grout to the level indicated by the pre-set pointer,
whilst the bottom orifice is held closed with a finger.
As soon as the required volume of grout (+/- 1,750 ml) is reached, the finger shall be released to
allow the grout to flow out freely through the bottom orifice. A stopwatch shall be used to
determine the flow time for emptying the cone, to the nearest second
The readings obtained during grouting shall be compared with the times determined in the
laboratory for grouts of the specified viscosities.
The bleeding of grout shall be measured in a metal or glass container with an internal diameter of
approximately 100 mm and a height of approximately 120 mm. The grout and water levels in the
container shall be controlled with a metal bridge into which two adjustable studs A and B are
secured. See figure 10100/8 for details of the apparatus.
The procedure for determining the bleeding of grout shall be as follows:

Studs A and B in the metal bridge shall be adjusted and locked so that the distance from the lower
tips of the studs to the bottom of the container will be approximately 100 mm and 107 mm
respectively. The volumes VA and VB for the container at the respective levels of the stud settings
shall then be determined to the nearest millilitre.
The container shall be filled with freshly mixed grout to a level where the grout will just touch the
tip of stud A, which points downwards. The bridge shall then be removed and the container tightly
sealed to prevent evaporation. The container shall then be stored at 20 OC and kept free from
vibrations for the entire duration of the test.
Three hours after the grout has been mixed, the container shall be opened and the free (bleed)
water poured off. The bridge shall be placed over the container with the tip of stud B pointing
downwards and water poured onto the grout with a measuring apparatus until the water level
touches the tip of stud B. The volume of water added shall be determined to the nearest millilitre
and designated as ∆V.
The percentage of bleeding shall be calculated from the formula:
{1-(VB – ∆V)/ VA } x 100
(c) Load test on foundation piles

The head of the test pile shall be exposed for checking position and slope. Where necessary, the
head shall be cut further back so as to expose a full bond length of main reinforcing steel, and a
suitable pile head slab for applying an axial load to the pile shall be cast. As an alternative, the
head may be cut at right angles and the load applied directly to the pile.
The test load shall be applied to the top of the pile with a hydraulic jack. Where more than one
jack is used to apply the load, all the jacks in the circuit shall be activated by the same pumping
unit. The jack(s) shall be so placed as to ensure that the load is applied axially.
The applied load shall be calculated in accordance with the hydraulic pressure, which shall be
monitored by two pressure meters in the circuit. The pressure meter shall be calibrated in divisions
not exceeding 2% of the maximum pressure applied, and the range of the meters shall not exceed
150% of the maximum pressure. The jack(s) and meters shall be calibrated by an approved testing
laboratory not more than 4 weeks before the tests will commence.
The deflection of the pile head shall be measured with two scale rulers and two dial
extensometers. The scale rulers shall be fixed to the pile and placed on both sides of the pile on a
diameter line, and the dial extensometers shall be similarly placed but on a diameter line at right
angles to that in which the scale rulers have been mounted.
Level measurements shall be taken on the scale rulers, and reduced as a level mark to a similar
scale ruler placed at a distance from the test pile. All three scale rulers shall be calibrated in
millimetres and the level-indicating instrument shall be capable of taking readings to 0.5 mm. and
approximate readings of up to 0.1 mm.
The dial extensometers shall have a range of 50 mm, and shall be marked in 0.1 mm divisions to
enable measurements to 0.05 mm to be taken. The plungers of the extensometer shall rest on a
machined metal or glass surface.
The extensometers shall be supported by one or more beams kept in the shade. The supports for
the beams shall be so placed as to limit the effect of earth movements around the test pile on the
deflection readings.

The test load shall be applied in increments of 20 per cent of the specified working load to a
maximum test load equal to twice the specified working load or the ultimate test load whichever is
the smaller.
A load increment may not be applied before the subsidence or heave rate has stabilized at a rate of
not more than 0.10 mm in 20 minutes under the load applied.
After the loading has been completed the maximum test load shall be maintained until the
movement is less than 0.2 mm within a period of 24 hours. The load shall be removed in
decrements of 20 per cent of the specified working load at intervals of not less than 20 minutes.
After the load has been removed the readings on both meters registering the movement of the pile
shall be recorded accurately to 0.1 mm. at intervals of 5, 10 and 20 minutes, and then every 30
minutes until the load is changed. The final recovery shall be recorded 24 hours after the
maximum test load has been removed.
During the test, the pile shall be loaded with up to 100 per cent of the specified working load, and
the load shall then be removed. It shall then be loaded to the maximum test load after which the
test load shall be removed.
10113 TESTS ON SILICONE SEALANTS

The following tests on silicone sealants will apply as determined in sub-clause 7102(f)(iv).
(a) Bond to cement mortar

Three briquettes, shaped in accordance with AASHTO T-132 and moisture-cured for at least 28
days, shall be sawn in half, cleaned and dried to a constant mass in an oven at a temperature of
110 OC +/- 5 OC. After having cooled they shall be bonded with approximately 0.25 mm of
silicone sealant and tested with clamps, which comply with AASHTO T-132. They shall be tested
under stress at a loading rate of 7.62 mm/minute.
(i) Non-adhesive period

Prepare the specimens in a mould with an area exceeding that of the 6.35 mm thick brass weight
described below. Place a 30 g brass weight with dimensions of 41.28 mm x 25.4 mm x 3.18 mm
on a polyethylene strip applied to the sample after the specified curing period. After the weight
has been removed the polyethylene strip is removed by pulling it off at an angle of 90 degrees to
the mix and at a rate of 25.4 mm in 5 seconds. No material may adhere to the polyethylene while
it is non-adhesive.
(ii) Deformability and adhesion

Prepare concrete blocks of 25.4 mm x 25.4 mm x 76.2 mm in accordance with ASTM C-719. A
sawn surface is used as the bonding surface. Seal 50.8 mm of the block and leave 12.7 mm at each
end of the specimen unsealed. The sealant shall be 9.5 mm thick and 12.7 mm wide. Cure the
specimen for 7 days in air at 25 OC +/- 1.7 OC. and for 7 days in water at 25 OC +/- 1.7 OC. Subject
the sealant to deformation in accordance with ASTM C-719. The ductility or compressive rate
shall be 3.18 mm per hour. One cycle is defined as extension to a width of 25.4 mm and returning
to the initial width of 12.7 mm.
10114 TESTS ON GEOTEXTILES AND GEOTEXTILE-SOIL COMPATIBILITY TESTS

Where the term geotextile is used, it shall mean synthetic-fibre filter fabric.

(a) Puncture resistance tests on geotextiles
(i) Apparatus (see figure 10100/9)

1. Clamping device
The specimen shall be positioned and clamped by means of a suitable clamping device
that consists of:
• A mounting-platen/supporting-sleeve assembly;
• An upper and a lower clamping ring provided with the necessary securing bolts,
guide pins and V-grooved concentric matching rings for securing the specimen.
2. Mounting device
The specimen shall be positioned in the clamping rings, in a true plane, free from folds
and stress, by means of a suitable mounting device that consists of:
• A metal base plate at least 4 mm thick;
• A centering device secured to the base plate;
• A means of preventing the rotation of the upper clamping ring when the first two
bolts are tightened (two short sockets welded to the base plate will retain the bolt
heads).
3. Cone assembly
The cone assembly shall consist of:
• A polished brass cone with the following dimensions:
• generating angle of cone = 45°.
• gradius of point of cone = 0.5 mm.
• overall diameter = 50 mm.
• mass of falling assembly = 1kg:
• A means of retaining the point of the cone at a height of 500 mm above the
specimen together with a suitable release system.
4. Measuring device
A suitable conical measuring device with a mass of 700 g +/- 10 g and graduated from
zero to 50 mm diameter at 2 mm intervals over a length of 200 mm to measure the
diameter of the hole formed in the specimen. The device shall have a polished surface.
5. Marking and cutting stencil
A suitable metal stencil with a handhold and studs to secure the stencil on the sample,
capable of accurately locating the position of bolt holes and pin holes on the specimen.
The holes in the stencil shall be 13 mm diameter, i.e. 2 mm larger than the holes to be cut
into the specimen.
6. Felt pen and punch
• A 3 mm diameter felt-tipped pen.
• A punch capable of cutting 11 mm diameter holes in the specimen.
• A suitable cutting device

• A torque wrench
(ii) Specimens
1. Dimensions of specimens
Specimens shall be either 250 mm x 250 mm square. or circular with a diameter of 282
mm.
2. Number of specimens
At least 10 specimens shall be tested.
3. Preparation of specimens
The position of the holes on the specimen shall be marked through the stencil with the
felt-tipped pen. The specimens shall be cut by means of the metal stencil. With the aid of
the stencil, mark on the conditioned sample the positions of the required specimens,
together with the positions of the holes for bolts and locating pins. The specimens shall
be set out in two rows equally spaced across the width of the sample. The spacing of the
specimens shall be as specified, except that the distance between the two rows shall be
150 mm. Where the width of the sample does not allow all the specimens to be set out in
two rows, the number of rows shall be increased.
Carefully cut each specimen from the sample as specified. Centre the punch over the
marked positions and punch out the holes.
Maintain the conditioned specimens in the specified atmosphere. Test the specimens in
the testing atmosphere.
(iii) Procedure
1. Assembly
Place the lower clamping ring with bolts in position on the mounting device and carefully
position the specimen over the bolts and pins so as to ensure that the specimen is free
from stress and is lying flat on the mounting device. Position the upper clamping ring
over the bolts and pins, and carefully lower the ring onto the specimen. Secure the ring in
position by tightening the nuts to a torque of 30 Nm.
2. Testing
Ensure that the mounting-platen supporting-sleeve assembly is central with the line of
the fall of the cone.
Place the clamping-ring assembly on the supporting cylinder.
Operate the cone-release system.
Carefully remove the cone from the specimen and measure the diameter of the hole
formed in the specimen with the measuring device. The device shall be gently lowered
vertically, by hand, into the hole formed in the specimen until penetration under its own
mass stops. The diameter of the hole is taken as the graduation nearest to the line of
contact between the device and the geotextile.
Note:
It is advisable to pack the inside of the supporting cylinder with a resilient material of
sufficient thickness to prevent damage to the cone in the event of complete penetration of
the specimen.

(iv) Calculation and reporting

1. Calculation
Record the diameter of the hole formed for each specimen and calculate the average
diameter of the holes for the sample.
Round off the results correct to 2 mm.
2. Reporting
Report the value of the hole diameter for each specimen and the average diameter for the
sample.
3. Information sheet
An approved information sheet shall be completed in full for each geotextile.
(b) Permeability reduction (flow test)
(i) Apparatus
1. Water supply
A supply of water from an overhead tank with a constant head of 1,000 mm +/- 25 mm
above the geotextile sample.
Permeameter with a suitable means of mounting to ensure that the permeameter remains
in a vertical position throughout the test. The permeameter shall consist of the following:
Two 90 mm internal diameter Perspex cylinders: the bottom cylinder with a recess for the
support mesh and a breather hole.
Two Perspex end caps with inlet/outlet nozzles: machined as shown in figure 10100/10 to
fit over the cylinders and to allow air bubbles to escape through the inlet nozzle; the
upper cap provided with a bleeding hole.
Three brass rods and nuts (wing nuts).
Brass or stainless steel mesh with 2.67 mm openings (standard soil sieve).
2. Cutting device
A means of cutting out a circular specimen with a diameter of at least 110 mm.
3. Miscellaneous equipment
• Containers with capacity of at least 5 litres.
• A riffler with 25.0 mm openings.
• A soil-test sieve with 13.2 mm openings.
• A balance to weigh up to 1 kg, to an accuracy of 1 g.
• Stopwatch.
• Silicone grease.
• Pans.

(ii) Specimens
1. Number of specimens
Conduct one test for each soil/geotextile combination,
2. Geotextile specimens
Mark and cut the required number of specimens and maintain them in the standard
atmosphere until they are tested.
3. Soil samples
Sieve the oven-dried soil through a 13.2 mm sieve and discard the material larger than
13.2 mm. Riffle the remaining soil to obtain specimens of 1,000 g +/- 5 g. Place the
specimens in sample bags and label them.
(iii) Procedure
Place the geotextile specimen between the two cylinders on top of the mesh. Apply silicone grease
to ensure that water does not leak out between the two cylinders.
Mix the amount of water required to bring the soil sample to modified AASHTO optimum
moisture content (OMC). With dispersive soils, friable mudstones and heavy clays remoulding
often gives an impermeable soil mass. In such cases this step shall be omitted and the soil sample
shall be placed dry.
Place the soil sample on top of the geotextile Smooth the surface without compacting the soil.
Place the Perspex end caps in position and fasten the rods and nuts. Place the assembled
permeameter in its mounting.
Close the outlet and the breather hole in the lower cylinder and slowly fill the entire cylinder with
water from the top. Care must be taken not to disturb the surface of the soil sample. This can be
done by using a small-diameter pipe with a spray nozzle, which is inserted through the top inlet to
a height just above the soil surface. Fill the permeameter to the top of the inlet nozzle, remove the
small-diameter pipe, and connect the hose from the constant-head tank. Remove any entrapped air
bubbles through the inlet nozzle and the bleeding hole.
Open the outlet nozzle and breather hole in the lower cylinder and record the time at the beginning
of the test.
The first outflow measurement shall be taken between 1 minute and 5 minutes after the beginning
of the test. Outflow is measured by way of a container and stopwatch. The container shall be
placed under the outflow and the time to fill the 5 litre container, or the amount of flow that occurs
in 30 minutes recorded, whichever occurs first. It is not important that exactly 5 litres or 30
minutes be used, but the time and volume shall be recorded accurately. Record the following
with each outflow measurement:
• Date and time (hours and minutes)
• Flow volume (1,000 mm = 1 ml) - Calculate flow in m3/s
• Flow time (minutes and seconds)
• Height of the sample (soil + geotextile) in mm
• Height of the water head above the bottom of the geotextile in mm (ensure that this height
remains at 1,000 mm +/- 25 mm)
• The discoloration or otherwise of the water at the outlet.

Outflow measurements shall be taken at the beginning of the test (1 minute to 5 minutes after the
outlet has been opened) and thereafter at least once a day. The test shall be continued for at least
400 hours (17 days).
(iv) Calculations
Permeability coefficient. K
Calculate the permeability coefficient for each outflow measurement, as follows:
k = Q/iA (mm/s), where
• Q = outflow (mm3/s)
• i = hydraulic gradient = water head above geotextile (mm) / sample height (mm)
• A = cross-section area (mm2) (= 6 362 mm2 for 90 mm diameter)
The permeability reduction factor, K400, is determined at the end of the test as follows:
K400 = 100 x (K at 400 hours)/K at beginning of test (l/ m3)
If an outflow measurement has not been taken at exactly 400 hours, K at 400 hours may be
determined by linear interpolation
The degree of permeability reduction is determined by means of figure 10100/11.
(v) Information sheet

An approved information sheet shall be completed in full for each geotextile. Failure to provide
the required information may be taken as sufficient motivation for the geotextile to be disqualified
10115 CLASSIFYING THE TESTS

For the purposes of this section tests are defined as follows:
Ordinary tests are tests that are constantly conducted by the contractor on a regular basis in terms
of clause 36 of the General Conditions of Contract and section 10100 for which no specified pay
items have been provided, and which include the following, inter alia:
• Tests for determining the properties of all natural materials provided by the contractor for
use in the works such as, inter alia, sand, stone, water, soil and gravel.
• Tests for determining the properties of processed natural materials, purchased or produced
on the site by the contractor, such as aggregate for concrete, asphalt mixes and seals..
• Tests for determining the properties of products such as concrete and asphalt, etc.
produced specially for use on the works by the contractor, or purchased from commercial
producers or subcontractors.
• Tests on completed elements of construction such as embankments pavement layers,
concrete structures, etc. for establishing compliance with the specified properties.
• Special tests are tests that have to be conducted by the contractor only at the specific
request of the engineer, and include the following:
• Tests on commercial products such as cement, lime, paint, bituminous products, pipes,
valves, cranes and bridge bearings. The requirements are specified as a whole or in part by
reference being made to the specifications of a standards organisation such as the SABS.

• Special tests on structures or elements of structures to determine their efficacy, for which
clear provision for payment has been made in the specifications and the bills of quantities.
• Any test requested by the engineer purely for purposes of acceptance control. Such tests,
however, will not be classified as a special test if the test is requested because the
contractor has neglected to conduct sufficient or proper tests in terms of clause 36 of the
General Conditions of Contract and with a view to submitting the result to the engineer for
his approval of completed work or materials.
Payment will be made under the pay items of clause 10117 only in regard to special tests.
Payment for ordinary tests shall be included in the rates tendered by the contractor for the items of
work to which the ordinary tests relate.
10116 TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION WATER
(a) Compressive strength test

The average 28-day strength of three mortar cubes made with Ordinary Portland Cement and the
water that is to be tested shall be at least 90% of that of three similar cubes made with water of
known purity.
Additional tests shall be carried out to ensure that the setting time of the cement is not adversely
affected by impurities.
(b) Inorganic impurities criteria

The water used to manufacture concrete shall comply with the criteria in table 10100/3 unless
otherwise approved by the engineer.

Table 10100/3 Criteria for Inorganic Impurities in Water Used To Manufacture Concrete
Characteristic Criteria Test Method

pH 4.5 - 8.5 SABS method 113
Sulphates Reinforced concrete: 400 ppm SABS method 212
Pre-stressed concrete: 400 ppm
Mass concrete: 1,000 ppm
Chlorides 500 ppm SABS method 202
Conductivity @ 25 OC 330 mS/m SABS method 213
Total Dissolved Solids @ Reinforced concrete: 1,500 ppm SABS method 84

18 OC Mass concrete: 3,000 ppm
Alkali, Carbonates and 1,000 ppm SABS method 837

Bicarbonates
Sugar Negative
Organic impurities 300 ppm (applicable if pH < 5 Chemical Oxidation

Demand
Item 101.01 Special tests on elastomeric bearings (150% vertical load and 150% shear
distortion) as described in sub-clause 10112(a): ......................... number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of elastomeric bearings tested as described.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for having the test conducted by an approved
laboratory, also for replacing the bearings that may possibly have been damaged during testing.
Item 101.02 Other special tests requested by the engineer........................ provisional sum
The provisional sum provided to cover the cost of special tests as requested by the engineer in
terms of clause 10115 shall be expended in accordance with the provisions of the general
conditions of contract. Payment will not be made for any special test should the test indicate that
the specifications have not been complied with.
Item 101.03 Providing testing equipment:

(a) Rolling straight-edge ..................................................................................... number (No)
(b) Core drill....................................................................................................... number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of each item provided. The rolling straight-edge
shall comply with the requirements of test method ST3 of TMH6. The core drill shall be of an
approved type capable of drilling cores with diameters of 100 mm and 150 mm in concrete and
asphalt respectively. It shall be provided with the necessary drilling parts.

The tendered rates shall include full compensation for providing the apparatus on the site and
making it available and using it on the site for as long as may be necessary. After the work has
been completed the contractor shall remove the apparatus from the site.
Note:
Providing testing equipment for use by the engineer.
Except for the equipment listed in item 101.03, this specification does not envisage the provision
of testing equipment by the contractor for the use of the engineer, but, where necessary, provision
shall be made therefor in the project specifications, and the relevant pay items shall be described.

Figure 10100/1 Weathering Apparatus

Figure 10100/2 Visual Classification

Figure 10100/3 Marvil Apparatus
Figure 10100/4 Grease Ring

Figure 10100/5 Placing Of Prestik
Figure 10100/6 Placing Of Plaster Of Paris

Figure 10100/7 Flow Cone

Figure 10100/8 Metal Or Glass Container

Figure 10100/9 Cone Assembly And Measuring Device

Figure 10100/10 Permeameter for Permeability Production Tests (Flow Tests)

Figure 10100/11 Permeability Reduction Criteria

SECTION 10200: QUALITY CONTROL (SCHEME 1)
10201 SCOPE
This section describes one scheme for determining compliance with certain requirements of the
specifications in regard to the properties of materials and workmanship, by means of
measurements and tests and by applying statistical judgement plans.
It also covers the requirements in regard to the control to be exercised by the contractor to monitor
the quality of his work and materials, and the routine tests and inspection to be carried out by the
engineer.
10202 JUDGEMENT PLANS: GENERAL

Certain requirements and limit values are set out in the specifications in regard to the properties of
materials and workmanship to be supplied. Tests shall be conducted and measurements taken to
control the relevant properties of the workmanship and materials supplied, and the results of such
tests and measurements shall be assessed on the basis of the prescribed criteria for compliance
with the specified requirements.
Two methods are available for assessing compliance. For certain properties statistical judgement
plans are prescribed for assessing the test results, and, where no such statistical judgement plan
has been prescribed, materials and workmanship shall be fully in accordance with the specified
requirements and limit values.
In this section two types of statistical judgement plans are used, as follows:
Judgement plan A is used for judging measurement of the levels and thicknesses of pavement
layers. In accordance with this method the compliance of the individual results is determined only
in respect to the specified requirements: the variability of test results is not computed.
Judgement plan B is used for judging measurements of in situ densities, the strengths of concrete,
and certain other properties. In this judgement plan the variability of the values of tests is
calculated and applied where acceptance limits for sample means are determined.
Despite acceptance of those properties judged by these statistical methods, the materials or work
submitted will be rejected when other properties (which are not controlled by statistical methods)
fail to comply with the requirements of the specifications, or where there are other causes for
rejection such as obviously defective workmanship or excessively variable properties, visible
signs of poor workmanship, and similar considerations which constitute sufficient grounds for
rejecting the work without any further testing.
The engineer shall be entitled to assess separately any specified portion of a lot if, in his opinion,
it exhibits significant deviations as compared with the remainder of the lot.
In order to avoid changing the contractor's or the employer's risks, the statistical judgement plans
shall be strictly adhered to in all cases where they are used, and decisions based on these plans
shall not be altered. The validity of the decisions made on the basis of these judgement plans shall
not be disputed on the grounds of statistical theory or a specified or implied producer’s risk, or
unjust on the grounds of enrichment.
10203 DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this section the following words and symbols shall have the following
meanings:

Lot
A lot is a sizeable portion of work or quantity of material, which is assessed as a unit for the
purposes of quality control, and which is selected to represent material or work produced by
essentially the same process and from essentially the same materials.
Random sample
A random sample is a group of "n" test measurements at "n" separate test positions or on "n"
sample portions obtained from the lot in an unbiased manner.
Random sampling shall mean stratified random sampling, unless inconsistent with the context.
Sample mean ( x )
n
x is the arithmetic mean of a set of "n" test results constituting the sample.
n
Sample standard deviation ( S n )

The sample standard deviation ( S n ) is defined by
S n
= (∑ x − n x )÷ (n−1 ) , where:
2 2
x is the sample mean

n
x is the value of an individual sample portion, i.e. an individual test result or measurement.
n is the sample size, i.e. the number of individual test results or measurements.
Specification limit (Ls)

The Specification limit is the limit value of the property of any product outside which not more
than a certain specified percentage ( φ ) of the population of values representing an acceptable
product property is allowed to lie. The specification limit may be a single lower limit Ls, or a
single upper limit L's, or a double limit consisting of a lower limit Ls and an upper limit L's.
Acceptance limit (La)
The Acceptance limit is the limit value of the sample mean within which the lot will be accepted.
For a lower-limit specification this acceptance limit is denoted by La. For an upper-limit
specification, this acceptance limit is denoted by L'a. For a double limit specification, the lower
and upper limits are denoted by La and L'a respectively.
Conditional acceptance
Conditional acceptance is the acceptance of a lot at reduced payment in lieu of rejection.
Conditional acceptance shall be subject to the provisions of clause 10208.
Rejection limit (Lr)
The Rejection limit is the limit value of the sample mean outside which conditional acceptance
cannot be considered. It may be a lower limit Lr or an upper limit L'r.
Payment reduction factor (fr)
The Payment reduction factor is the factor by which payment at contract rates shall be multiplied
for calculating the payment for conditionally accepted work.

Outliers
Where, in a sample one, or more test results differ significantly from the other values obtained,
this difference could be ascribed to an assignable cause, in which case such test result shall be
regarded as an outlier and disregarded when assessing the lot.
To determine whether or not a test result is an outlier, the procedure given in sub-clause 10204(d)
shall be adopted.
Factors ka, kad, kr, and krd
These factors are used for calculating the various judgement limits, as follows:
Acceptance limits (La and L'a)
ka is used for determining the acceptance limits for single-limit specifications
kad is used for determining the acceptance limits for double-limit specifications.
Rejection limits (Lr and L'r):
Only when specified in the project specifications that rejection limits shall be determined in
accordance with the provisions of clause 10211, the factors kr and krd shall be used.
kr is used for determining the rejection limits in the case of a single-limit specification.
krd is used for determining the rejection limits in the case of a double-limit specification.
The factors ka, kad, kr and krd shall apply to both a first submission and a resubmission.
φ (%)
φ is the maximum percentage of a statistical population of values of a product property permitted
to lie outside the specification limits where the product may still be regarded as being acceptable.
Values for φ may be obtained from table 10200/8.
First submission
The submission of a lot for approval will be classified as a first submission when actually
submitted for the first time or when submitted for a second time on the basis of a second set of test
values to be regarded as a first submission in terms of sub-clause 10204(e), because the properties
of the first and the second sets of test values differ significantly.
Resubmission
The submission of a lot for approval for a second time shall be classified as a resubmission should
it be regarded as a resubmission in terms of sub-clause 10204(e), because the properties of the
first and second sets of test values do not differ significantly.
Rehabilitation and repair work
For rehabilitation or repair works the definitions of lot, lot size and sample size shall be as
specified in the project specifications or as directed by the engineer.

(a) Determining lot size
(i) Road construction layers

The lot size shall normally be a section compacted in one process where essentially the same
materials and construction equipment have been used. Where production is on a continuous
basis, a lot shall normally mean the product of one day's work and shall not exceed the product of
two full days' work. However, a lot of any smaller size may be ordered by the engineer where:
• the properties under investigation exhibit abnormal local variation within the
normal lot size;
• an area is obviously of a different quality than the rest;
• the rate of production is very high.
For rehabilitation or repair work the lot size shall be as specified in the project specifications, or
as determined by the engineer.
(ii) Concrete
The lot size shall be determined by the engineer, with due regard to the size and the type of
structure in which the concrete is placed, the specific portion of the structure and the total quantity
of concrete placed in a day. The lot sizes in concrete structures could therefore vary considerably,
and, particularly in the case of small structures, it could be necessary to combine samples of the
same grade of concrete from different structures, provided that the concrete is obtained from the
same concrete plant and is cast in the same period.
(iii) Other
In other cases, as for example in material stockpiles where the definition of a lot in accordance
with sub-clause 10203 (a) does not apply directly the engineer will determine lot sizes in each
case according to the circumstances.
(b) Random sampling

When any lot is tested, whether a normal sized lot or an isolated section, which clearly exhibits an
abnormal variation of the property under consideration, all samples shall be taken in a stratified
random pattern. For this purpose use shall be made of tables of random numbers, and the
instructions in publication TMH5, Sampling for Road Construction Materials, shall be followed.
(c) Sample sizes

For purposes of acceptance control, the engineer will, in advance, determine sample size "n". No
sample size may be smaller than that given in sub-clause 10205(a) and table 10200/8. For
rehabilitation or repair work the sample size shall be as specified in the project specifications or
prescribed by the engineer.
(d) Outliers
Test results shall be scanned for possible outliers. Where a test result deviates greatly from the
remainder in a lot, it shall, if possible, be re-examined by further testing and, if there is reasonable

evidence to suggest that the test result is erroneous, it shall be regarded as an outlier, rejected, and
replaced with a fresh test result.
Where repeating a test or re-examining a test result is impossible, Method 1 shall be used for
identifying outliers for all work, except roadbase and bituminous pavement and surfacing layers.
Method 2 shall be used for identifying outliers for roadbase and bituminous pavement and
surfacing layers.
(i) Method 1
Calculate the value of To from: To = (x − x )÷ S
o n n
Where:
x n
and S n
are respectively the sample arithmetic mean and standard deviation, and
x o
is the value of the test result differing most from the mean.
Compare the value of To with the value of T for the applicable value of "n", from table 10200/1.
If the absolute value of To is greater than T, then x o
is an outlier.
Table 10200/1 Critical Values (Except Roadbase and Asphalt Mixes)
Number of observations Critical value

(n) (T)
4 1.46
5 1.67
6 1.82
7 1.94
8 2.03
9 2.11
10 2.18
11 2.23
12 2.29
13 2.33
14 2.37
15 2.41
16 2.44
17 2.47
18 2.50
19 2.53
20 2.56
Where S n
is very small, it may be the cause for a value being wrongly classified as an outlier.
For this purpose a minimum value S n
(min) shall be determined for S n
as follows:
2
S n
(min) = ( x0.99 : n - 1) / (n - 1) , where:
2 2
x 0.99
: n -1 = x 0.99
for (n - 1) degrees of freedom as obtained from table 10200/2; and

S n
= mean value for S n
for the particular property as determined by records of previous work.
Every outlier shall be deleted, and, if possible, be replaced with a new random test value.
2
Table 10200/2 Values Of x 0.99
Distribution
2 2 2
(n - 1) x 0.99
(n - 1) x 0.99
(n - 1) x 0.99
1 0.000157 11 3.053 21 8.897
2 0.0201 12 3.571 22 9.542
3 0.115 13 4.107 23 10.196
4 0.297 14 4.660 24 10.856
5 0.554 15 5.229 25 11.524
6 0.872 16 5.812 26 12.198
7 1.239 17 6.408 27 12.879
8 1.646 18 7.015 28 13.565
9 2.088 19 7.633 29 14.256
10 2.558 20 8.260 30 14.953
(ii) Method 2
In the case of roadbase and asphalt work the following procedure shall be used for identifying
outliers where it is impossible to repeat a test or to reinvestigate a test result:
Calculate the absolute value Co from: Co = / xo - x /
n
Where x o
represents the possible outlier.
Compare Co with the critical value C = C0.01; nσ
Where σ is the standard deviation of the population derived from historical data.
If the absolute value Co > C, the test result x o
shall be regarded as an outlier and shall be
excluded from the sample.
The critical values for different values of "n" are given in tables 10200/3 and 10200/4 for the
different product properties.

Table 10200/3 Outlier Test for Roadbase: Critical Values
CRITICAL VALUES C
For For sieve size (mm)
n percentage 26.5 19.0 13.2 4.75 2.00 0.425 0.075 For PI
compaction
4 4.1 6.1 8.5 8.5 7.3 5.6 3.6 3.2 2.4
5 4.4 6.4 9.0 9.0 7.7 5.9 3.9 3.3 2.6
6 4.6 6.7 9.4 9.4 8.0 6.2 4.0 3.5 2.7
7 4.7 6.9 9.7 9.7 8.3 6.3 4.1 3.6 2.8
8 4.8 7.1 9.9 9.9 8.5 6.5 4.2 3.7 2.8
8 4.9 7.2 10.1 10.1 8.6 6.6 4.3 3.7 2.9
10 4.9 7.3 10.2 10.2 8.7 6.7 4.4 3.8 2.9
Table 10200/4 Outlier Test for Asphalt: Critical Values C
CRITICAL VALUES C
n For density For bitumen For voids in mix
content
4 3.2 0.4 2.3
5 3.3 0.5 2.4
6 3.5 0.5 2.5
7 3.6 0.5 2.6
Every outlier shall be discarded and replaced by another random test value. The sample mean
x n
and the sample standard deviation S n
shall then be recalculated. If an outlier cannot be
replaced, the sample mean and standard deviation shall be calculated on the basis of the remaining
test results. The final number of test results used in the assessment after the elimination of an
outlier shall never be less than four.
(e) Resubmission
Where a lot has been accepted conditionally or has been rejected, the engineer may agree to its
resubmission for approval if:
it has been reworked and the engineer is satisfied that a proper attempt was made to improve the
properties which were unacceptable;
or
where, in his opinion, there are valid technical reasons therefor.
In both cases a fresh sample shall be taken, and a fresh (second) set of test values determined.
The first and second sets of test values shall then be compared with each other to determine
whether their properties differ significantly.
Where in the opinion of the engineer a significant difference does occur, the submission of the lot
shall be regarded as a first submission and be assessed as such, and only the second set of test
values shall then be used for this purpose.

Where in the opinion of the engineer no significant difference occurs, the submission of the lot
shall be regarded and assessed as a resubmission, which will mean, inter alia, that the first and
second sets of test values shall be combined for purposes of assessment.
In order to be able to determine theoretically whether there is a significant difference between the
two sets of test values (suffixes a and b), the Fisher F-test shall be conducted, and, if necessary,
also the t-test, all as described below.
The Fisher F-test is conducted as follows:
2 2
Calculate the value of F = S g ÷ S k , where:
S g
= the greater value of S a
and S b
S k
= smaller value of S a
and S b
The value of F 0.05

, U g , U k is obtained from table 10200/5 where
U g
= sample size minus one, from the sample with the larger standard deviation.
U k
= sample size minus one, from the sample with the smaller standard deviation.
Where F >F U , U a significant difference occurs theoretically between the two sets of
0.5
, g k
test values, but where F < F , U , U the difference is not necessarily significant, and the
0.5 g k
t-test shall also be conducted with a view to obtaining a decision.

The t-test is conducted as follows:
Calculate S = {(n − 1)S + (n − 1)S }÷ (n + n − 2)

a
2
a b
2
b a b
Then calculate t = x − x ÷ S (1 / n
a b a
+ 1 / nb )
Where x −x is the absolute value of the difference between x and x and is always positive.
a b a b
Determine the degrees of liberty U = na + nb − 2
The value of t 0.05

,U is obtained from table 10200/6.
Where t >t 0.05 ,U a significant difference occurs between the two sets of results, and if t <t 0.05
,U
there is no significant difference.

Table 10200/5 Values of F Distribution (Σ = 0.05)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 24 26 28 30
Ug
Uk
1 161.44 200.00 216.00 225.00 230.00 234.00 237.00 239.00 241.00 242.00 243.00 244.00 245.00 245.00 246.00 246.00 247.00 247.00 248.00 248.00 249.00 249.00 249.00 250.00 250.00
2 18.51 19.00 19.20 19.20 19.30 19.30 19.40 19.40 19.40 19.40 19.40 19.40 19.40 19.40 19.40 19.40 19.40 19.40 19.40 19.40 19.50 19.50 19.50 19.50 19.50
3 10.13 9.55 9.28 9.12 9.01 8.94 8.89 8.85 8.81 8.79 8.76 8.74 8.73 8.71 8.70 8.69 8.68 8.67 8.67 8.66 8.65 8.64 8.63 8.62 8.62
4 7.71 6.94 6.59 6.39 6.26 6.16 6.09 6.04 6.00 5.96 5.94 5.91 5.98 5.87 5.86 5.84 5.83 5.82 5.81 5.80 5.79 5.77 5.76 5.75 5.75
5 6.61 5.79 5.41 5.19 5.05 4.95 4.88 4.82 4.77 4.74 4.70 4.68 4.66 4.64 4.62 4.60 4.59 4.58 4.57 4.56 4.54 4.53 4.52 4.50 4.50
6 5.99 5.14 4.76 4.53 4.39 4.28 4.21 4.15 4.10 4.06 4.03 4.00 3.98 3.96 3.94 3.92 3.91 3.90 3.88 3.87 3.86 3.84 3.83 3.82 3.81
7 5.59 4.74 4.35 4.12 3.97 3.87 3.79 3.73 3.68 3.64 3.60 3.57 3.55 3.53 3.51 3.49 3.48 3.47 3.46 3.44 3.43 3.41 3.40 3.39 3.38
8 5.32 4.46 4.07 3.84 3.69 3.58 3.50 3.44 3.39 3.35 3.31 3.28 3.26 3.24 3.22 3.20 3.19 3.17 3.16 3.15 3.13 3.12 3.10 3.09 3.08
9 5.12 4.26 3.86 3.63 3.48 3.37 3.29 3.23 3.18 3.14 3.10 3.07 3.05 3.03 3.01 2.99 2.97 2.96 2.95 2.94 2.92 2.90 2.89 2.87 2.86
10 4.96 4.10 3.71 3.48 3.33 3.22 3.14 3.07 3.02 2.98 2.94 2.91 2.89 2.86 2.85 2.83 2.81 2.80 2.78 2.77 2.75 2.74 2.72 2.71 2.70
11 4.84 3.98 3.59 3.36 3.20 3.09 3.01 2.95 2.90 2.85 2.82 2.79 2.76 2.74 2.72 2.70 2.69 2.67 2.66 2.65 2.63 2.61 2.59 2.58 2.57
12 4.75 3.89 3.49 3.26 3.11 3.00 2.91 2.85 2.80 2.75 2.72 2.69 2.66 2.64 2.62 2.60 2.58 2.57 2.56 2.54 2.52 2.51 2.49 2.48 2.47
13 4.67 3.81 3.41 3.18 3.03 2.92 2.83 2.77 2.71 2.67 2.63 2.60 2.58 2.55 2.53 2.51 2.50 2.48 2.47 2.46 2.44 2.42 2.41 2.39 2.38
14 4.60 3.74 3.34 3.11 2.96 2.85 2.76 2.70 2.65 2.60 2.57 2.53 2.51 2.48 2.46 2.44 2.43 2.41 2.40 2.39 2.37 2.35 2.33 2.32 2.31
15 4.54 3.68 3.29 3.06 2.90 2.79 2.71 2.64 2.59 2.54 2.51 2.48 2.45 2.42 2.40 2.38 2.37 2.35 2.34 2.33 2.31 2.29 2.27 2.26 2.25
16 4.49 3.63 3.24 3.01 2.85 2.74 2.66 2.59 2.54 2.49 2.46 2.42 2.40 2.37 2.35 2.33 2.32 2.30 2.29 2.28 2.25 2.24 2.22 2.21 2.19
17 4.45 3.59 3.20 2.96 2.81 2.70 2.61 2.55 2.49 2.45 2.41 2.38 2.35 2.33 2.31 2.29 2.27 2.26 2.24 2.23 2.21 2.19 2.17 2.16 2.15
18 4.41 3.55 3.16 2.93 2.77 2.66 2.58 2.51 2.46 2.41 2.37 2.34 2.31 2.29 2.27 2.25 2.23 2.22 2.20 2.19 2.17 2.15 2.13 2.12 2.11
19 4.38 3.52 3.13 2.90 2.74 2.63 2.54 2.48 2.42 2.38 2.34 2.31 2.28 2.26 2.23 2.21 2.20 2.18 2.17 2.16 2.13 2.11 2.10 2.08 2.07
20 4.35 3.49 3.10 2.87 2.71 2.60 2.51 2.45 2.39 2.35 2.31 2.28 2.25 2.22 2.20 2.18 2.17 2.15 2.14 2.12 2.10 2.08 2.07 2.05 2.04
21 4.32 3.47 3.07 2.84 2.68 2.57 2.49 2.42 2.37 2.32 2.28 2.25 2.22 2.20 2.18 2.16 2.14 2.12 2.11 2.10 2.07 2.05 2.04 2.02 2.01
22 4.30 3.44 3.05 2.82 2.66 2.55 2.46 2.40 2.34 2.30 2.26 2.23 2.20 2.17 2.15 2.13 2.11 2.10 2.08 2.07 2.05 2.03 2.01 2.00 1.98
23 4.28 3.42 3.03 2.80 2.64 2.53 2.44 2.37 2.32 2.27 2.23 2.20 2.18 2.15 2.13 2.11 2.09 2.07 2.06 2.05 2.02 2.00 1.99 1.97 1.96
24 4.26 3.40 3.01 2.78 2.62 2.51 2.42 2.36 2.30 2.25 2.21 2.18 2.15 2.13 2.11 2.09 2.07 2.05 2.04 2.03 2.00 1.98 1.97 1.95 1.94
25 4.24 3.39 2.99 2.76 2.60 2.49 2.40 2.34 2.28 2.24 2.20 2.16 2.14 2.11 2.09 2.07 2.05 2.04 2.02 2.01 1.98 1.96 1.95 1.93 1.92
26 4.23 3.37 2.98 2.74 2.59 2.47 2.39 2.32 2.27 2.22 2.18 2.15 2.12 2.09 2.07 2.05 2.03 2.02 2.00 1.99 1.97 1.95 1.93 1.91 1.90
27 4.21 3.35 2.96 2.73 2.57 2.46 2.37 2.31 2.25 2.20 2.17 2.13 2.10 2.08 2.06 2.04 2.02 2.00 1.99 1.97 1.95 1.93 1.91 1.90 1.88
28 4.20 3.34 2.95 2.71 2.56 2.45 2.36 2.29 2.24 2.19 2.15 2.12 2.09 2.06 2.04 2.02 2.00 1.99 1.97 1.96 1.93 1.91 1.90 1.88 1.87
29 4.18 3.33 2.93 2.70 2.55 2.43 2.35 2.28 2.22 2.18 2.14 2.10 2.08 2.05 2.03 2.01 1.99 1.97 1.96 1.94 1.92 1.90 1.88 1.87 1.85
30 4.17 3.32 2.92 2.69 2.53 2.42 2.33 2.27 2.21 2.16 2.13 2.09 2.06 2.04 2.01 1.99 1.98 1.96 1.95 1.93 1.91 1.89 1.87 1.85 1.8
4

Table 10200/6 Values for T-Distribution (Σ = 0.05)
U t U t U t
1 6.3138 11 1.7959 21 1.7207
2 2.9200 12 1.7823 22 1.7171
3 2.3534 13 1.7709 23 1.7139
4 2.1318 14 1.7613 24 1.7109
5 2.0150 15 1.7530 25 1.7081
6 1.9432 16 1.7459 26 1.7056
7 1.8946 17 1.7396 27 1.7033
8 1.8595 18 1.7341 28 1.7011
9 1.8331 19 1.7291 29 1.6991
10 1.8125 20 1.7247 30 1.6973
10205 JUDGEMENT PLAN A (SURFACE LEVELS AND LAYER THICKNESSES)

Surface levels and layer thicknesses shall be judged in accordance with the following
procedure:
(a) Taking the levels

Level measurements shall be taken in a random pattern, before and after a layer has been
constructed, and levels shall be taken at exactly the same point before and after construction.
Layer thicknesses will then be determined as the difference between the pre- and post-
construction levels, but may be supplemented by determinations made by means of holes
made in the layer.
The number of measurements of layer thicknesses shall be at least 30, and that of surface
levels at least 50. Larger sample sizes will give more reliable results.
In the case of asphalt layers, the engineer may require that layer thicknesses be determined
only by means of measurements taken on drilled cores, in which case the minimum number of
cores shall be 20 per lot and not 30.
For rehabilitation or repair work the number of measurements shall be as specified in the
project specifications or as directed by the engineer.
(b) Calculating the deviations

Compute the difference between the specified level or thickness and the actual level or
thickness. Compute the mean thickness of the layer.
(c) Identifying outliers

Check this work by re-measuring any results that may possibly be defective.
(d) Assessing the results

The following criteria will apply when results are assessed:

Series 10000 Specification for Highway Works -2006
(i) Surface levels

The lot will comply with the requirements specified for surface levels if at least 90% of all
surface levels are within the H90 tolerance specified in each case, before any level corrections
are made.
Individual spots, where the surface level deviates by more than the Hmax tolerance specified in
each case, shall be repaired to bring them to within the H90 tolerance.
(ii) Layer thickness

The layer will comply with the requirements specified for layer thickness if at least 90% of all
thickness measurements taken are equal to or thicker than the specified thickness, minus the
D90 tolerance specified in the relevant section, before any thickness corrections are made, and
the mean layer thickness for the lot is not less than the specified layer thickness minus the
Dave tolerances specified in each case.
Individual spots, where the actual thickness is less than the specified thickness minus the
Dmax tolerance specified in each case, shall be locally repaired to bring them within the D90
tolerance.
10206 JUDGEMENT PLAN B

The characteristic properties to be controlled in accordance with this judgement scheme are as
shown in table 10200/7.
Table 10200/7 Characteristic Properties: Judgement Plan B
Structure Characteristic
Gravel pavement layers Relative compaction
Crushed-stone base or subbase Relative compaction
Asphalt base and surfacing Relative compaction

Binder content of mix
Voids in mix
Chemically stabilized layers Stabilizing agent content
Concrete Compressive strength
The procedure to be followed when assessing the above properties shall be as follows:
(a) Taking samples and testing the properties

Determine the sample size (n) by taking into consideration the minimum sample sizes given
in table 10200/8, and take the samples in a stratified random pattern as specified in sub-clause
10204(b). Conduct the appropriate tests.
For rehabilitation or repair work the sample size shall be as specified in the project
specifications or as directed by the engineer.
Page10000-56 Ministry of Roads and Transport

(i) Identifying outliers

Outliers shall be identified, not taken into account, and, if possible, replaced with fresh test
values, all as prescribed in sub-clause 10204(d).
Table 10200/8 Minimum Sample Sizes For Concrete (Structural)
Size of lot (m3) Minimum sample size (n)

0 - 20 4
21 – 40 6
41 – 70 9
71 – 100 12
101 – 150 14
> 150 16
(ii) Calculating standard deviation and the mean of sample values
Use the sample results for calculating the standard deviation S n

and the mean x n
of the
sample values in accordance with definitions in clause 10203.
Where it is a resubmission (as defined in clause 10203), the first and second sets of sample
results shall be used for determining a combined sample mean x ab
, standard deviation S ab
and sample size nab as determined in formula 10200/1.
(iii) Determining the judgement limits

All judgement limits shall be computed to three decimal figures.
1. First submission
The acceptance limits La and L'a are calculated in accordance with the formulas given
below in the case of a first submission (as defined in clause 10203).
Formula 10200/1
n ab
= na + nb
x ab
= (n x + n x )÷ (n + n )
a a b b a b

S ab = (na − 1)S a + (nb − 1)S b + na
2 2
(x ab − x a) + n (x ab − xb)  ÷ (n + n − 1)
2
b
2
a b
where:
subscript “a” refers to the first set of test values,
subscript “b” refers to the second set of test values
subscript “ab” refers to the combined properties.
• For a lower-limit specification

La = LS + Sn.ka

Accept the lot if the sample mean x is equal to or greater than the acceptance limit
n
La, otherwise reject the lot.
• For an upper-limit specification
L'a = L's - Sn.ka
Accept the lot if the sample mean x is equal to or less than the acceptance limit L'a,
n
otherwise reject the lot.
• For a double-limit specification calculate
La = LS + Sn.kad
L'a = L's - Sn.kad
Accept the lot if the sample mean xfalls between the lower acceptance limit La
n
and the upper acceptance limit L'a or is equal to either one, otherwise reject the lot.
Where a lot has been rejected, it may nevertheless be considered for conditional
acceptance in terms of clause 10208.
2. Resubmission
Where a lot is resubmitted for approval in terms of sub-clause 10204(e) the
acceptance limits are determined as follows:
• For a single-limit specification
La = LS + Sab.ka
L'a = L's – Sab.ka
Accept the lot if xab ≥ La in the case of a lower-limit specification and if xab ≤ L'a in
the case of an upper limit specification, otherwise reject the lot.
• For a double-limit specification
La = LS + Sab.kad
L'a = L's – Sab.kad
Accept the lot if La ≤ xab ≤ L'a. If not, reject the lot.
The values of ka and kad used in the above cases shall agree with the sample size
nab.
Where a resubmitted lot is rejected, it may nevertheless be considered for conditional
acceptance in terms of clause 10208.
The evaluation of a resubmitted lot shall be final and binding on both employer and
contractor. The provisions of this section shall be strictly complied with.
Where a resubmitted lot is rejected, the contractor shall be obliged to bear the costs
of the additional tests conducted on the resubmitted lot.

(iv) Values of constants

The values of the specification limits Ls and L's are given in the relevant sections of the
specifications and are briefly summarised in table 10200/9. The minimum sample size "n" and
the maximum percentage of defectives ( φ ) in an acceptable product are also given in the
table.
The values of ka and kad are given in tables 10200/10 and 10200/11.
Table 10200/9 Values Of Constants N, Ls, L's And φ
Material Properties Minimum Ls L's φ

sample (Lower (Upper (%)
size specification specification
n limit) limit)
Selected subgrade Relative compaction 4 90%, 93% or - 15
95%
Subbase Relative compaction 6 95% or 97% - 15
Gravel roadbase Relative compaction 6 98% and if
- 15
stabilised, 97%
Crushed stone: Relative compaction 6 See Divisions
- 15
subbase or roadbase 5100 & 5200
Asphalt base or Relative compaction 6 15
surfacing Binder content 6 See note 1 See note 1 15
Voids 4 15
Chemically stabilized Cementitious binder 10
See note 2 See note 2 10
layers content
Strength concrete Compressive strength See table See notes 3 and 4
5
(structural) (28 days) 10200/8
Pavement concrete Compressive strength 6 See sub-clause
5
(28 days) 7102(J)(a)(1)
Notes (Table 10200/9)

(6) Asphalt base or surfacing:
Specification limits for :
• Density Ls = (97 - percentage of voids in approved production mix) % of theoretical
maximum density (see clause 6410)
• Binder content (conventional and homogeneous modified binders)
For continuously and semi-gap graded mixes
Ls = specified binder content - 0.30% binder
L's = specified binder content + 0.30% binder
For gap graded mixes. slurry seals and non-homogeneous modified binders
Ls = specified binder content - 0.40% binder
L's = specified binder content + 0.40% binder

• Voids
Ls = specified values - 1.5 percentage points
L's = specified values + 1.5 percentage points
(2) Specification limits for cementitious-binder content
Ls = 70% of the specified cementitious-binder content or as ordered by the engineer.
(3) Specification limits for compressive strength of concrete
Ls = the specified 28-day cube characteristic strength (see clause 8404, e g. for class 25/38
concrete, Ls = 25 MPa.)
Table 10200/10 Values Of Ka (Single Limits)
Sample size ka
(n) φ =5% φ =10% φ =15%
4 0.747 0.445 0.220
5 0.821 0.520 0.300
6 0.878 0.576 0.358
7 0.923 0.620 0.403
8 0.961 0.656 0.440
9 0.993 0.687 0.470
10 1.020 0.713 0.496
12 1.065 0.755 0.538
14 1.101 0.789 0.571
16 1.131 0.817 0.598
18 1.155 0.840 0.620
20 1.177 0.860 0.640
(v) Requirements for non-structural concrete

Where any concrete sections or parts are indicated by the engineer or on the drawings as
being non-structural, the statistical judgement scheme shall not apply, and only compliance
with the specified characteristic strength will be required. Compliance with the specified
characteristic strength means that the mean strength of the sample shall be at least equal to the
specified characteristic strength, and no single test result may be lower than the specified
characteristic strength minus 5 MPa.
10207 CONTROLLING MORE THAN ONE PROPERTY

Where more than one property of a lot is to be controlled, the lot shall be accepted if all the
properties comply with the specified requirements, but the lot shall be rejected if one or more
of the properties do not comply with the specified requirements, or the lot may be
conditionally accepted subject to the requirements of clause 10208.

Table 10200/11 Values Of Kad (Double Limits)
Sample size kad

(n) φ = 5% φ = 10% φ = 15% φ = 20%
4 0.605 0.299 0.061 -0.161
5 0.691 0.390 0.163 -0.038
6 0.756 0.456 0.235 0.043
7 0.809 0.509 0.290 0.103
8 0.852 0.551 0.334 0.149
9 0.888 0.587 0.370 0.188
10 0.919 0.617 0.401 0.219
12 0.971 0.666 0.451 0.271
14 1.012 0.706 0.489 0.310
16 1.046 0.738 0.521 0.342
18 1.074 0.764 0.547 0.369
20 1.099 0.787 0.570 0.391
10208 CONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE
(a) General
Where a lot is rejected under statistical judgement plan B but the test results are such that the
lot complies with the requirements for conditional acceptance specified hereafter, the engineer
may accept the lot conditionally, that is, the lot may be accepted at reduced payment in lieu of
complete rejection, provided that:
1) conditional acceptance shall be in the sole discretion of the engineer and not an option
which may be exercised by the contractor or a right the contractor may claim;
2) the lot is approved in respect of all other requirements not judged by a statistical
judgement plan;
3) the contractor shall have the option to remove and reinstate at his own cost conditionally
accepted work with work which complies with the requirements for acceptance at full
payment;
4) conditional acceptance and the corresponding reduced payment shall apply only in respect
of the work and properties listed in sub-clause 10208(b) below.
(b) Properties to which conditional acceptance applies

Conditional acceptance may be applied in respect of the properties listed below in table
10200/12.

Table 10200/12 Properties In Respect Of Which Conditional Acceptance May Be

Applied
Property Structure
Relative compaction (i) Asphalt base or surfacing
(ii) Chemically stabilized layers
(iii) Plant mixed paver laid layers
(See note 2)
Tar or bitumen binder content Asphalt base or surfacing
Voids in mix Asphalt base or surfacing
Cementitious binder content or Chemically stabilized layers
strength requirements
28-day-cube compressive All strength concrete (concrete
strength pavements not included. See note 1)
Notes:
1) See sub-clause 7120(f) for details regarding reduced payment in the case of inadequate
concrete strength or layer thickness in concrete pavements.
2) Crushed stone layers shall not be subject to conditional acceptance, but, where compaction
to 88% of apparent density is specified but has not been obtained, the engineer in his sole
discretion may accept the layer against payment at the rate for compaction to 86% of apparent
density, provided that the layer complies with all the requirements specified for a crushed
stone layer compacted to 86% of apparent density.
The same provisions shall apply mutatis mutandis where a specified compaction of 102% of
modified AASHTO density cannot be attained, but 100% of modified AASHTO density can
be attained.
(c) Criteria for conditional acceptance

Any lot which does not comply with the requirements for acceptance plan B may be
conditionally accepted should the value of the sample mean x lie within the rejection limits
n
given in table 10200/13.
The payment reduction factor shall be calculated in accordance with the following formula:
For conditional acceptance at a lower limit
fr = 0.67 + 0.3( x -Lr)/( La - Lr)
n
For conditional acceptance at an upper limit

fr = 0.67 + 0.3 (L'r - x n
)/( L'r - L'a)
See clause 10203 for the meaning of the symbols.

Where so required in the project specifications, the rejection limits shall be determined in
accordance with the requirements of clause 10211 instead of table 10200/13.
(d) Applying the payment-reduction factor

The payment-reduction factor shall be applied to the following payment items as relevant and
described in the specifications.

(i) Stabilized layers

Items 42.01, 42.02, 46.01, 46.02, 46.05, 46.06, 46.07, 46.08 and 46.09.
(ii) Asphalt base and surfacing

Items 64.01, 64.02, 64.03, 64.09, 64.10, 64.11, 64.12, 64.13 and 64.16.
(iii) Concrete
Items 84.01, 84.02 and 84.03.
No reduction will apply to payment items for formwork, reinforcing and prestressing tendons.
(iv) Pavement layers mixed in a central mixing plant and placed by paver
Items 71.02, 71.03, 71.12, 71.13, 71.14 and 71.15.
Table 10200/13 Rejection Limits (Lr And L'r) For Sample Mean ( x )
n
Property Structure Rejection limits (Lr and

L'r)
Relative compaction (a) Chemically stabilized Lr = (La -2.000)% of relative
layers in accordance with compaction
sections 3500 or 3700 L'r = (L'a -1.000)% of relative
(b) Asphalt base or surfacing compaction
Concrete compressive All strength concrete Lr = 0.85 La
strength (excepting that in pavement)
Bituminous binder content Asphalt Lr = (La - 0.200)% binder
(%) L'r = (L'a + 0.200)% binder
Voids in mix (%) Asphalt Lr = (La - 0.300)% voids
L'r = (L'a + 0.300)% voids
Cementitious binder content Chemically stabilized layers Lr = 0.800 La
(v) General
Where payment items are introduced into the project specifications or are changed in the
schedule of quantities, the payment reduction factor shall apply to the payment items
corresponding to the payment items mentioned above.
Where a lot is conditionally accepted in regard to more than one property, the payment-
reduction factor for each property shall be computed and the factor that gives the largest
reduction shall be applied, except in the case of concrete pavement when the provisions of
sub-clause 7120(f) shall apply.
10209 PROCESS CONTROL BY THE CONTRACTOR

The onus rests with the contractor to produce work which conforms in quality and accuracy of
detail to all the requirements of the specifications and drawings, and the contractor shall, at
his own expense, institute a quality control system and provide experienced engineers,
foremen, surveyors, materials technicians, other technicians and other technical staff,

together with all transport, Instruments and equipment, to ensure adequate supervision and
positive control of the works at all times.
The contractor shall conduct tests or have them conducted continually on a regular basis, to
check the properties of natural materials and processed natural materials and of products
manufactured on the site, such as concrete and asphalt mixes. Although not a requirement for
the contractor to conduct regular tests on any commercially produced products such a.
cement, bitumen, steel and pipes, the contractor shall remain fully responsible for any
defective material or equipment provided by him. Similarly, the quality of all elements of the
works shall be checked on a regular basis so as to ensure compliance with the requirements of
the specifications.
The intensity of control and of tests to be conducted by the contractor shall be adequate to
ensure that proper control is being exercised.
Where any natural materials or products made from natural materials are supplied, and upon
completion of each element of the construction work, the contractor shall test and check such
materials, products and/or elements for compliance with the specified requirements and shall
submit his results to the engineer for approval. Such submission shall include all his
measurements and test results and shall furnish adequate proof of compliance with the
specified requirements.
No specific pay items are provided as compensation for the above obligations, including the
provision of all samples delivered to the engineer, the repair of places from which samples
were taken, and the provision of the necessary personnel and testing apparatus and facilities,
for which compensation shall be Included in the tendered rates of the contractor for the
various items of work to which these obligations apply.
The contractor’s attention is also drawn to the provisions of clauses 10209 or 10308 in regard
to instituting specific process-control systems.
For continuous concrete and asphalt-production processes. the engineer may order the
contractor to augment the above-mentioned control system by introducing a system of process
control for monitoring the various properties to be controlled. The specific system used shall
be subject to the engineer's approval, and the attention of the contractor is drawn to the
systems described in clause 4.4 of TRH5, which is normally regarded as suitable.
The contractor shall take immediate steps to rectify any deviation from the specified
requirements indicated by his process-control system, and the engineer shall have the right to
inspect and be given all details of tests and testing procedures in order to satisfy himself that
the contractor is implementing an adequate process-control system.
10210 ROUTINE TESTS AND INSPECTION BY THE ENGINEER

The engineer will inspect and test materials and completed work at regular intervals for
compliance with the specified requirements and, where applicable, the various judgement
plans specified will be applied. The testing frequencies and sample and lot sizes for routine
testing shall be at the engineer's discretion.
All sections of completed work shall be submitted to the engineer for routine inspection and
testing. and the contractor shall not cover up or construct any work on top of sections of
completed work before being advised by the engineer of the outcome of his testing and
inspection. The contractor shall make arrangements for the submission of work for testing in a
manner which will afford the engineer reasonable opportunity for inspecting and testing the
work.

10211 DETERMINING REJECTION LIMITS IN ACCORDANCE WITH STATISTICAL

CRITERIA
Where required in the project specifications that the rejection limits be determined in
accordance with statistical criteria such as TRH5, it shall be done as follows:
For a single-limit specification
First submission
Lr = Ls + Sn.kr
L'r = L's - Sn.kr
The lot shall be accepted conditionally where x ≥ Lr in the case of a lower-limit

n
specification, or where x ≤ L'r in the case of an upper-limit specification, otherwise reject

n
the lot.
For a double-limit specification
Lr = Ls + Sab.krd
L'r = L's - Sab.krd
The lot shall be conditionally accepted where x ≥ Lr and ≤ L'r , otherwise reject the lot.
n
The values of kr and krd are given in tables 10200/14 and 10200/15.
Table 10200/14 Values Of Kr (Single-Limit Specification)
Sample kr
size (n) φ = 5% φ = 10% φ = 15%
4 0.446 0.123 -0.148
5 0.547 0.238 -0.004
6 0.622 0.320 0.089
7 0.682 0.382 0.158
8 0.732 0.432 0.211
9 0.773 0.474 0.255
10 0.809 0.509 0.292
12 0.867 0.567 0.357
14 0.914 0.612 0.397
16 0.952 0.649 0.434
18 0.985 0.680 0.465
20 1.013 0.707 0.491

Table 10200/15
VALUES OF krd (DOUBLE-LIMIT SPECIFICATION)
Sample krd
size (n) φ = 5%φ = 10%φ = 15%φ = 20%
4 0.338 -0.007 -0.324 -0.708
5 0.451 0.132 -0.130 -0.389
6 0.534 0.226 -0.016 -0.241
7 0.600 0.296 0.065 -0.144
8 0.653 0.352 0.126 -0.073
9 0.698 0.398 0.176 -0.018
10 0.736 0.437 0.217 0.027
12 0.800 0.500 0.283 0.098
14 0.850 0.550 0.334 0.152
16 0.891 0.590 0.375 0.194
18 0.926 0.624 0.409 0.229
20 0.956 0.653 0.438 0.259

SECTION 10300: QUALITY CONTROL (SCHEME 2)
10301 SCOPE
This section describes one scheme used for determining compliance with certain requirements
of the specifications in regard to the properties of materials and workmanship, by means of
tests and measurements and by applying statistical judgement plans.
It also covers the requirements in regard to the control to be exercised by the contractor for
monitoring the quality of his work and materials, and the routine tests and inspections to be
carried out by the engineer.
10302 JUDGEMENT PLANS: GENERAL

Certain requirements and limit values are set out in the specifications in regard to the
properties of materials and workmanship to be supplied. Tests shall be conducted and
measurements taken to control the relevant properties of the workmanship and materials
supplied, and the results of such tests and measurements shall be assessed on the basis of the
prescribed criteria for compliance with the specified requirements.
Wherever possible, acceptance criteria shall be determined by way of statistical principles
described in this section. Wherever impracticable and where no statistical judgement criteria
have been prescribed, there shall be full compliance with the requirements and limit values in
the specifications.
Despite acceptance of those properties judged by these statistical methods, the materials or
work submitted will be rejected when other properties (which are not controlled by statistical
methods) fail to comply with the requirements of the specifications, or where there are other
causes for rejection such as obviously defective workmanship or excessively variable
properties, visible signs of poor workmanship, and similar considerations which constitute
sufficient grounds for rejecting the work without any further testing.
The engineer shall be entitled to assess separately any specified portion of a lot if, in his
opinion, it exhibits significant deviations as compared with the remainder of the lot.
In order to avoid changing the contractor's or the employer's risks, the statistical judgement
plans shall be strictly adhered to in all cases where they are used, and decisions based on these
plans shall not be altered. The validity of the decisions made on the basis of these judgement
plans shall not be disputed on the grounds of statistical theory or a specified or implied
producer’s risk, or unjust on the grounds of enrichment.
10303 DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this section the following definitions of terms and symbols shall apply:
(a) Lot
A lot is a sizeable portion of work or quantity of material which is assessed as a unit for the
purposes of quality control, and selected to represent material or work produced by essentially
the same process and from essentially the same materials.

(b) Random sample

A random sample is a group of "n" test measurements at "n" separate test positions or on "n"
sample portions obtained from the lot in an unbiased manner.
Random sampling shall mean stratified random sampling, unless inconsistent with the context
(c) Sample mean ( x )

n
x is the arithmetic mean of a set of "n" test results constituting the sample.
n
(d) Specification limit (Ls)

This is the limit value of the property of any product outside which not more than a specified
percentage ( φ ) of the population of values representing an acceptable product property is
allowed to lie. The specification limit may be a single lower limit Ls, or a single upper limit
L's or a double limit consisting of a lower limit Ls and an upper limit L's.
(e) Acceptance limit for sample mean (La)

This is the limit value of a product property within which the sample mean shall lie for a
product to be acceptable.
For a lower-limit specification, the acceptance limit is denoted by La. For an upper-limit
specification, this acceptance limit is denoted by L'a. For a double-limit specification, the
lower and upper limits are denoted by La and L'a.
(f) Acceptance limits for individual test values Le

These are the limit values of a product property within which the sample values representing a
product shall lie for the product to be acceptable.
The limit values will depend on the sample sizes "n" and may be a lower limit Le, an upper
limit L'e, or double limits Le and L'e.
(g) Conditional acceptance

This is the acceptance of a lot at reduced payment in lieu of rejection. Conditional acceptance
shall be subject to the provisions of clause 10307.
(h) Outliers
Where, in a sample, one or more test results differ significantly from the other values
obtained, this difference could be ascribed to an assignable cause, in which case such test
result shall be regarded as an outlier and disregarded when assessing the lot.
To determine whether or not a test result is an outlier, the method given in sub-clause
10304(d) shall be adopted.
(i) First submission

The submission of a lot for approval will be classified as a first submission when actually
submitted for the first time or when submitted for a second time on the basis of a second set of

test values which shall be regarded as a first submission in terms of sub-clause 10304(e),
because the properties of the first and the second set of test values differ significantly.
(j) Resubmission
The submission of a lot for approval for a second time shall be classified as a resubmission
should it be regarded as a resubmission in terms of sub-clause 10304(e), as the properties of
the first and second sets of test values do not differ significantly.
(k) Payment reduction factor (fr)

This is the factor by which payment at contract rates shall be multiplied for calculating
payment for conditionally accepted work.
(l) Rehabilitation and repair work

For rehabilitation or repair works the definitions for lot, lot size and sample size shall be as
specified in the project specifications or as directed by the engineer.
(a) Determining the lot size
(i) Road construction layers

The lot size shall normally be a section compacted in one process where essentially the same
materials and construction equipment have been used. Where production is on a continuous
basis, a lot shall normally mean the product of one day's work and shall not exceed the
product of two full days' work. However, a lot of any smaller size may be ordered by the
engineer where:
- the properties under investigation exhibit abnormal local variation within the normal lot
size;
- an area is obviously of a different quality than the rest;
- the rate of production is very high.
For rehabilitation or repair work the lot size shall be as specified in the project specifications,
or as determined by the engineer.
(ii) Concrete
The lot size shall be determined by the engineer, with due regard to the size and the type of
structure in which the concrete is placed, the specific portion of the structure, and the total
quantity of concrete placed in a day. The lot sizes in concrete structures may therefore vary
considerably, and, particularly in the case of small structures, it may be necessary to combine
samples of the same grade of concrete from different structures, provided that the concrete has
been obtained from the same concrete plant in the same period.
(iii) Other
In other cases, as for example in material stockpiles where the definition of a lot in
accordance with sub-clause 10303(a) does not apply directly, the engineer will determine lot
sizes in each case according to the circumstances.

(b) Random sampling

When any lot is tested, whether a normally sized lot or an isolated section which clearly
exhibits an abnormal variation of the properties under consideration, all samples shall be
taken in a stratified random pattern. For this purpose use shall be made of tables of random
numbers, and the instructions in publication TMH5, Sampling for Road Construction
Materials, shall be followed.
(c) Sample sizes

For purposes of acceptance control, the engineer will, in advance, determine sample size "n".
No sample size may be smaller than that given in clause 10305. For rehabilitation or repair
work the sample size shall be as specified in the project specifications or prescribed by the
engineer.
(d) Outliers
Test results shall be scanned for possible outliers. Where a test result deviates greatly from the
remainder in a lot, it shall, if possible, be re-examined by further testing, and, if there is
reasonable evidence to suggest that the test result is erroneous, it shall be regarded as an
outlier, rejected, and replaced with a fresh test result.
Where repeating a test or re-examining a test result is impossible, method 1 described below
shall be used for identifying outliers for all work except roadbase and bituminous pavement
and surfacing layers. Method 2 shall be used for identifying outliers for roadbase and
bituminous pavement and surfacing layers.
(i) Method 1
Calculate the value of To from: To = (x − x )÷ S
o n n
, where
x and S are respectively the sample arithmetic mean and standard deviation, and
n n
x is the value of the test result differing most from the mean.
o
Compare the value of To with the value of T for the applicable value of "n", from the table
10300/1.
If the absolute value of To is greater than T, than x o
is an outlier.
Every outlier shall be discarded, and, if possible, be replaced with a new random test value.

Table 10300/1 Critical Values
No of observations Critical values (T)

(n)
4 1.46
5 1.67
6 1.82
7 1.94
8 2.03
9 2.11
10 2.18
11 2.23
12 2.29
13 2.33
14 2.37
15 2.41
16 2.44
17 2.47
18 2.50
19 2.53
20 2.56
(ii) Method 2
In the case of roadbase and asphalt work the following procedure shall be used for identifying
outliers where it is impossible to repeat a test or to reinvestigate a test result:
Calculate the absolute value Co from Co = / xo - x / , where x o
represents the possible
n
outlier.
Compare Co with the critical value C = C0.01; nσ
Where σ is the standard deviation of the population derived from historical data.
If the absolute value Co > C, then the test result x o
shall be regarded as an outlier and shall
be excluded from the sample.
The critical values for different values of "n" are given in tables 10300/2 and 10300/3 for the
different product properties.
Every outlier shall be discarded and replaced by another random test value. The sample mean
x n
and the sample standard deviation S n
shall then be recalculated, if an outlier cannot be
replaced, the sample mean and standard deviation shall be calculated on the basis of the
remaining test results. The final number of test results used in the assessment after the
elimination of an outlier shall never be less than four (4).

Table 10300/2 Outlier Test For Roadbase: Critical Values C
n For For sieve size (mm)

percentage 26.5 19.0 13.2 4.75 2.00 0.425 0.075 For PI
compaction
4 4.1 6.1 8.5 8.5 7.3 5.6 3.8 3.2 2.4
5 4.4 6.4 9.0 9.0 7.7 5.9 3.9 3.3 2.6
6 4.6 6.7 9.4 9.4 8.0 6.2 4.0 3.5 2.7
7 4.7 6.9 9.7 9.7 8.3 6.3 4.1 3.6 2.8
8 4.8 7.1 9.9 9.9 8.5 6.5 4.2 3.7 2.8
9 4.9 7.2 10.1 10.1 8.6 6.6 4.3 3.7 2.9
10 4.9 7.3 10.2 10.2 8.7 6.7 4.4 3.8 2.9
Table 10300/3 Outlier Test For Asphalt: Critical Values C
CRITICAL VALUES C
n
For density For bitumen content For voids in mix
4 3.2 0.4 2.3
5 3.3 0.5 2.4
6 3.5 0.5 2.5
7 3.6 0.5 2.6
(e) Resubmission
Where a lot has been accepted conditionally or has been rejected, the engineer may agree to
its resubmission for approval if:
--it has been reworked and the engineer is satisfied that a proper attempt was made to improve
the properties which were unacceptable;
or
--where, in his opinion there are valid technical reasons therefore.
In both cases a fresh sample shall be taken, and a fresh (second) set of test values determined.
The first and second sets of test values snail then be compared with each other to determine
whether their properties differ significantly.
Where in the opinion of the engineer a significant difference does occur, the submission of the
lot shall be regarded as a first submission and assessed as such, and only the second set of test
values shall then be used for this purpose.
Where in the opinion of the engineer no significant difference occurs, the submission of the
lot shall be regarded and assessed as a resubmission. Where a lot is resubmitted, it shall be
assessed on the same basis as a first submission, except that the original and the second set of
sample results shall be combined for purposes of assessment.
10305 PROCEDURES
The statistical judgement procedures described below will apply to the corresponding product
properties for purposes of acceptance control.
Note:

For rehabilitation or repair work the number of measurements, tests or samples for acceptance
control in respect of the product properties specified in sub-clauses (a) to (f) below shall be as
specified in the project specifications or prescribed by the engineer.
(a) Surface levels of fills and pavement layers

At least fifty (50) surface level measurements shall be made according to a stratified random
pattern for each lot of completed layer work, and the deviation from the corresponding
specified level shall be determined.
Outliers shall be identified and examined.
The lot will be considered to comply with the requirements in respect of surface levels if,
before any repair work is undertaken, at least 90% of the level measurements show a
deviation from the specified levels which is smaller than the H90 tolerance specified for the
layer under evaluation.
Isolated spots, where the surface levels deviate by more than the appropriate Hmax tolerance
of the specified levels shall be repaired to bring the deviation to within the H90 tolerance.
(b) Layer thicknesses of pavement layers

At least thirty (30), but preferably more, layer thicknesses shall be determined in accordance
with a stratified random pattern for each lot of completed layer work. Layer thicknesses shall
be determined by means of level measurements taken before and after construction of the
layer in exactly the same position, but may be augmented by thicknesses measurements taken
by means of holes made in the layer.
In the case of asphalt layers, the engineer may require thickness determinations to be made
only by means of measurements on drilled cores, in which case the minimum number of cores
per lot shall be twenty (20).
Outliers shall be identified, eliminated, and, if possible, replaced.
The lot will be considered to comply with the requirements for layer thicknesses if:
1) at least 90% of all the thickness measurements taken before any thickness repairs are made
is equal to or greater than the specified thickness, minus the D90 tolerances specified in the
appropriate section; and
2) the mean layer thickness of the lot is not less than the specified thickness, minus the
Dmean tolerance.
Isolated spots where the actual thickness is less than the specified thickness less the Dmax
tolerance shall be repaired so as to fall within the D90 tolerance.
(c) Relative compaction of pavement layers

At least four (4) relative density determinations shall be taken in the case of selected layers
and at least six (6) in the case of all other pavement layers in accordance with a random
pattern. After outliers have been identified and replaced, compliance with the specified
density requirements shall be determined as follows:

The sample mean x shall not less than the acceptance limit (La) for the sample mean as
n
given in table 10300/4, and no single test value shall be lower than the acceptance limit (Le)
for single values.
(d) Cementitious binder content of stabilized layers and uniformity of mix

At least fifty (50) samples shall be taken according to a random pattern and their
cementitious-binder content determined.
As described in sub-clause 10110(a), due allowance shall be made for the presence, in the
material to be stabilized, of minerals, which may affect the test results.
The quantity of cementitious binder in the mixed material, determined as specified, shall fall
within the following limits:
1) The mean cementitious-binder content shall be not less than 91% of the specified binder
content.
2) The cementitious binder content in at least 75% of the samples shall be at least 70% of the
specified binder content.
The requirements for uniformity of the mix shall apply only on condition that the variation of
these adjustments fall within the limits specified in sub-clause 10110(a).
(e) Binder content of asphalt

At least four (4) specimens of asphalt shall be taken in a random pattern and the binder
content determined.
After determining the sample mean, the lot shall be assessed using the following criteria:
The binder content of asphalt mixes shall not deviate from the specified binder content by
more than the value given in table 10300/5.

Specification for Highway Works – 2006 Series 10000
Table 10300/4 Acceptance Limits In Respect Of Compaction
Required Minimum average relative compaction Minimum value for any single test for
Layer Compactio Test Method for the following sample sizes the following sample sizes
n 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 6 7 8 9
Selected layer 90% AASHTO T-180 density 90.1 90.4 90.6 90.7 90.9 91.0 86.4 86.2 86.0 85.9 85.8 85.7
93% AASHTO T-180 density 93.1 93.4 93.6 93.7 93.9 94.0 89.4 89.2 89.0 88.9 88.8 88.7
95% AASHTO T-180 density 95.1 95.4 95.6 95.7 95.9 96.0 91.4 91.2 91.0 90.9 90.8 90.7
100% AASHTO T-180 density 100.1 100.4 100.6 100.8 100.9 101.0 96.4 96.2 96.0 95.9 95.8 95.7
Subbase 95% AASHTO T-180 density 95.1 95.4 95.6 95.7 95.9 96.0 91.4 91.2 91.0 90.9 90.8 90.7
96% AASHTO T-180 density 96.1 96.4 96.6 96.7 96.9 97.0 92.4 92.2 92.0 91.9 91.8 91.7
97% AASHTO T-180 density 97.1 97.4 97.6 97.7 97.9 98.0 93.4 93.2 93.0 92.9 92.8 92.7
Gravel roadbase 97% AASHTO T-180 density 97.1 97.4 97.6 97.7 97.9 98.0 93.4 93.2 93.0 92.9 92.8 92.7
98% AASHTO T-180 density 98.1 98.4 98.6 98.7 98.9 99.0 94.4 94.2 94.0 93.9 93.8 93.7
100% AASHTO T-180 density 100.1 100.4 100.6 100.8 100.9 101.0 96.4 96.2 96.0 95.9 95.8 95.7
Crushed-stone roadbase
G1 88% Apparent relative density 88.1 88.4 88.5 88.7 88.8 88.9 84.7 84.6 84.4 84.3 84.2 84.1
G2 85% Bulk relative density 85.1 85.4 85.6 95.7 85.9 86.0 81.4 81.2 81.0 80.9 80.8 80.7
G3 98% AASHTO T-180 density 98.1 98.4 98.6 98.7 98.9 99.0 94.4 94.2 94.0 93.9 93.8 93.7
G4 100% AASHTO T-180 density 100.1 100.4 100.6 100.8 100.9 101.0 96.4 96.2 96.0 95.9 95.8 95.7
Asphalt base and 100% (97-% voids in mix) %
100.1 100.3 100.5 100.6 100.7 100.8 97.1 96.9 96.8 96.7 96.6 96.5
surfacing of theoretical density
Shoulders and wearing 93% AASHTO T-180 density
93.2 93.6 93.8 94.0 94.2 94.3 87.9 87.6 87.4 87.2 87.0 86.9
course
Plant mixed pavement 100% AASHTO T-180 density
100.1 100.3 100.5 100.7 100.8 100.9 96.4 96.2 96.0 95.9 95.8 95.7
layers (section 3700)
Ministry of Roads and Transport Page 1000-75

Table 10300/5 Acceptance Limits For Bituminous Binder Content
Sample Maximum deviation from the sample Maximum deviation of any single test
size mean from the sample binder content value from the specified binder
(number) (%of binder) content
(% of binder)
Gap-graded and Continuous, semi- Gap-graded and Continuous and
non-homogeneous gap-graded and semi-gap-graded open-graded mixes
modified binder open-graded mixes
mixes and slurry conventional and
seals homogeneous
modified binder
mixes
2 0.51 0.37 0.76 0.54
3 0.44 0.33 0.81 0.58
4 0.41 0.30 0.84 0.60
5 0.38 0.29 0.87 0.62
6 0.36 0.27 0.89 0.64
7 0.35 0.25 0.91 0.65
8 0.33 0.25 0.92 0.66
(f) Concrete: 28-day cube compressive strength

At least the minimum number of samples given in table 10300/7 shall be obtained according
to a random pattern and test cubes made according to an approved method and tested for
compressive strength after 28 days.
Outliers shall be identified and eliminated.
Compliance with the requirements for the characteristic strength of the lot shall be assessed
according to the following criteria:
1) x n
≥ Ls + ∆A, where:
x = a mean value of the 28-day cube compressive strength tests

n
Ls = characteristic strength specified in the concrete-class indication (see clause 6404)
∆A = the applicable value given in table 10300/6
2) x ≥ Ls -
n ∆B, where:
x = the 28-day cube compressive strength of a single test

n
∆B = the applicable value given in table 10300/6.

Specification for Highway Works - 2006 Series 10000
Table 10300/6 Acceptance Factors for Strength Concrete
Sample size (MPa) (MPa)

(n)
3 0.5 3.9
4 1.1 4.2
5 1.4 4.5
6 1.7 4.7
7 1.9 4.9
8 2.1 5.0
9 2.2 5.2
10 2.3 5.3
11 2.4 5.4
12 2.5 5.5
13 2.8 5.6
14 2.7 5.7
15 2.7 5.8
Table 10300/7 Minimum Sample Sizes for Strength Concrete (Structural)
Volume of lot (m3) Minimum sample size

0-20 4
21-40 6
41-70 9
71-100 12
101-150 14
> 150 16
10306 CONTROLLING MORE THAN ONE PROPERTY

Where more than one property of a lot is being controlled, the lot shall be accepted if all the
properties comply with the specified requirements. But if one or more of the properties do not
comply with the requirements, the lot shall be rejected, or it may be conditionally accepted
subject to the provisions of clause10307.
10307 CONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE
(a) General
Where a lot is rejected under a statistical judgement plan described in this section but the test
results are such that the lot complies with the requirements for conditional acceptance
specified hereafter, the engineer may accept the lot conditionally, that is, the lot may be
accepted at reduced payment in lieu of complete rejection, provided that
1) conditional acceptance shall be in the sole discretion of the engineer and is not an option
which may be exercised by the contractor or a right he may claim;
2) the lot is approved in respect of all other requirements not judged by a statistical judgement
plan:

3) the contractor shall have the option, at his own cost, to remove work which has been
conditionally accepted and replace it with work which complies with the requirements for
acceptance at full payment;
4) conditional acceptance and the corresponding reduced payment shall apply only in respect
of the work and properties listed in sub-clause 10307(b) below.
(b) Properties to which conditional acceptance applies

Conditional acceptance may be applied in respect of the properties of structures listed below
in table 10300/8.
Note:
Conditional acceptance shall not apply to crushed-stone layers, but, where compaction to 88%
of apparent density has been specified but cannot be attained, the engineer may accept the
layer for payment at the rate for compaction to 86% of apparent density on condition that the
layer complies with the requirements for this compaction standard.
The same provisions shall apply mutatis mutandis where a specified density of 102% of
modified AASHTO density cannot be but 100% of modified AASHTO density has in fact
been attained.
Table 10300/8 Properties To Which Conditional

Acceptance May Apply
Property Structure
Relative compaction (i) Asphalt base or surfacing
(ii) Chemically stabilized layers
(iii) Plant mixed paver laid layers
Bituminous-binder content Asphalt base or surfacing
Cementitious-binder content or Chemically stabilized layers
strength requirements
28-day cube compressive All structural concrete (excepting concrete
strength pavements)
(c) Criteria for conditional acceptance

In terms of the respective judgement plans relating to the properties to which conditional
acceptance applies, two requirements shall always apply, viz one in relation to the sample
mean ( xn ). and one In relation to individual test values x . A lot may be conditionally
n
accepted when it complies with one of the two requirements for acceptance, but not with the
second requirement provided that it complies with the requirements for conditional
acceptance in relation to the second requirement. There are therefore always two cases:
(i) Case 1
The lot complies with the requirement for sample mean, but not in all cases with the
requirement for individual test values.
The lot may be accepted conditionally, subject to the following additional conditions:

(1) in regard to the RELATIVE COMPACTION OF PAVEMENT LAYERS, the

BITUMINOUS-BINDER CONTENT OF ASPHALT MIXES and the CONCRETE CUBE
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH, not more than one test value shall fail to comply with the
requirements of individual test values.
(2) In regard to the CEMENTITIOUS-BINDER CONTENT, the binder content may be
below 70% of the specified binder content in not more than 25% of cases.
(ii) Case 2
The lot complies with the requirements for individual test values but not with the
requirements for sample mean.
The lot may be accepted conditionally on condition that the sample mean x n
lies within the
rejection limits given in table 10300/9.
Table 10300/9 Rejection Limits

(Lr And L'r) For The Sample Mean ( xn )
Property Structure Rejection limits (Lr and L'r)

Relative compaction(a) Chemically stabilized layers in Lr = (La - 2.000)% relative
accordance with section 3500 or compaction
3700
(b) Asphalt base or surfacing
Lr = (La - 1.000)% relative
compaction
Cube Compressive All strength concrete Lr = 0.85 La
strength (excluding pavement concrete)
Bituminous binder Asphalt Lr = (La - 0.200)% binder
content % L'r = (L'a + 0.200)% binder
Cementitious-binder Chemically stabilized layers Lr = 0.80 La
content
Strength Chemically stabilized layers Lr = 0.85 La
(d) Determining the payment reduction factor (fr)

Where a lot is conditionally accepted, compensation will be reduced by multiplying the tender
rates for the Items concerned, as set out below, with the payment reduction factor fr
The factor fr is determined as follows in regard to the two cases set out in sub-clause 10307(c)
above.
(i) Case 1
The lot complies with the requirements for sample mean but not in all cases with the
requirements for single values.
fr is always taken as being equal to 0.85.

(ii) Case 2
The lot complies with the requirements for single values, but not with the requirements for
sample mean ( x ).
n
For conditional acceptance at a lower limit

fr = 0.67 + 0.3( x - Lr)/( La - Lr)
n
For conditional acceptance at an upper limit

fr = 0.67 + 0.3 (L'r - x ) / (L'r - L'a)
n
(See clause 10303 for definitions of symbols).

Where a lot is conditionally accepted with regard to bituminous binder application rates, the
appropriate payment reduction factor in table 10300/10 shall be applicable.
Table 10300/10 Payment Reduction Factors for Conditionally Accepted Bituminous

Binder Application Rates
Conventional and homogeneous modified Bitumen-rubber binders

binders
Deviation from the Payment Deviation from the Payment
specified rate reduction factor specified rate at reduction factor
(net cold bitumen) spraying temperature
2
l/m fr (%) fr
+/- 0.06 1.00 +/- 5.0 1.00
+/- 0.07 0.95 +/- 6.0 0.97
+/- 0.08 0.90 +/- 7.0 0.95
+/- 0.09 0.85 +/- 8.0 0.90
+/- 0.10 0.80 +/- 9.0 0.95
+/- 10.0 0.80
If the deviation exceeds +/- 0.10 l/m2, the lot If the deviation exceeds +/- 10%, the lot
shall be rejected. shall be rejected.
(e) Applying the payment reduction factor

The payment-reduction factor shall be applied to the following payment items as described in
the specifications.
(i) Chemically stabilized layers

Items 42.01, 42.02, 46.01, 46.02, 46.05, 46.06, 46.07, 46.08 and 46.09.
(ii) Asphalt surfacing and base

Items 64.01, 64.02, 64.03, 64.09, 64.10, 64.11, 64.12, 64.13 and 64.16.
(iii) Surface treatments and seals (bituminous binder application rates)

Items 63B.01, 63B.02, 63C.01, 63C.02, 63D.01, 63D.02, 63E.01, 63E.02 and 63E.03.

(iv) Concrete
Items 84.01, 84.02 and 84.03.
No reduction shall apply to payment items for formwork, reinforcing or pre-stressing tendons.
(v) Plant-mixed pavement layers placed by paver

Items 71.02, 71.03, 71.12, 71.13, 71.14 and 71.15.
(vi) General
Where payment items are incorporated in the project specifications or have been amended in
the bills of quantities, the payment-reduction factor shall apply to the payment items
corresponding to the payment items mentioned above.
Where a lot is conditionally accepted in regard to more than one property, the payment-
reduction factor for each property shall be calculated, and the factor giving rise to the largest
reduction shall be applied, except in the case of concrete pavements when the provisions of
clause 7120(f) shall apply.
10308 PROCESS CONTROL BY THE CONTRACTOR

The onus rests with the contractor to produce work which conforms in quality and accuracy of
detail to all the requirements of the specifications and drawings, and the contractor shall, at
his own expense, institute a quality control system and provide experienced engineers,
foremen, surveyors, materials technicians, other technicians and other technical staff,
together with all transport, Instruments and equipment, to ensure adequate supervision and
positive control of the works at all times.
The contractor shall conduct tests or have them conducted continually on a regular basis, to
check the properties of natural materials and processed natural materials and of products
manufactured on the site, such as concrete and asphalt mixes. Although not a requirement for
the contractor to conduct regular tests on any commercially produced products such a.
cement, bitumen, steel and pipes, the contractor shall remain fully responsible for any
defective material or equipment provided by him. Similarly, the quality of all elements of the
works shall be checked on a regular basis so as to ensure compliance with the requirements of
the specifications.
The intensity of control and of tests to be conducted by the contractor shall be adequate to
ensure that proper control is being exercised.
Where any natural materials or products made from natural materials are supplied, and upon
completion of each element of the construction work, the contractor shall test and check such
materials, products and/or elements for compliance with the specified requirements and shall
submit his results to the engineer for approval. Such submission shall include all his
measurements and test results and shall furnish adequate proof of compliance with the
No specific pay items are provided as compensation for the above obligations, including the
provision of all samples delivered to the engineer, the repair of places from which samples
were taken, and the provision of the necessary personnel and testing apparatus and facilities,
for which compensation shall be Included in the tendered rates of the contractor for the
various items of work to which these obligations apply.

The contractor’s attention is also drawn to the provisions of clauses 10209 or 10308 in regard
to instituting specific process-control systems.
For continuous concrete and asphalt-production processes, the engineer may order the
contractor to augment the above control system by introducing a process control system for
monitoring the various properties to be controlled. The specific system to be applied shall be
subject to the engineer's approval, and the attention of the contractor is drawn to the Systems
described In clause 4.4 of TRH5, which will normally be regarded as suitable.
The contractor shall take immediate steps to rectify any deviation from the specified
requirements indicated by his process-control system, and the engineer shall have the right to
inspect and be given all details of tests and testing procedures in order to satisfy himself that
the contractor is implementing adequate process control system.
10309 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

The engineer will at regular intervals inspect and test materials and completed work for
compliance with the specified requirements, and, where applicable, the various specified
judgement plans will be applied. The testing frequencies and sample and lot sizes for routine
testing shall be at the discretion of the Engineer.
All sections of completed work shall be submitted to the Engineer for routine inspection and
testing, and the contractor shall not cover up or construct any work on top of sections of
completed work before being advised by the Engineer of the outcome of the inspection or
testing. The Contractor shall arrange for the submission of work for testing in such a manner
as will afford the Engineer reasonable opportunity for inspection and testing.

Specification for Highway Works - 2006 Series 2000 Site Clearance
SERIES 2000: SITE CLEARANCE
TABLE OF CONTENT
DIVISION 2100: CLEARING AND GRUBBING.............................................................................2

2101 Scope ................................................................................................................................2
2102 Description of Work .........................................................................................................2
2103 Execution of Work ...........................................................................................................3
2104 Measurement and Payment...............................................................................................4
Item 21.01 Clearing and grubbing ...................................................................................4
Item 21.02 Removal and grabbing of large trees and tree stumps...................................4
Item 21.03 Reclearing of surfaces ...................................................................................4
Item 21.04 Removal and storage of selected vegetation: ................................................4
DIVISION 2200: DEMOLITION, REMOVAL, DISPOSAL OR STORAGE OF EXISTING

STRUCTURES AND INSTALLATIONS ...........................................................................................5
2201 Scope ................................................................................................................................5
2202 Construction Requirements for Demolition and Removal of Existing Structures ...........5
2203 Construction Requirements for Demolition And Removal of Existing Road
Pavements.........................................................................................................................5
2204 Construction Requirements for Existing Public Utilities .................................................6
2205 Measurement and Payment...............................................................................................6
Item 22.01 Clearing and grubbing at inlets and outlets of hydraulic structures ..............6
Item 22.02 Cleaning out of hydraulic structures..............................................................6
Item 22.03 Take up or down and set aside for reuse or remove to store off Site ............6

Series 2000 Site Clearance Specification for Highway Works -2006
DIVISION 2100: CLEARING AND GRUBBING
2101 SCOPE
This Division covers the clearing of the Site and grubbing necessary for the construction of
the Works covered by the Contract, in accordance with these Specifications, and the
removal and disposal of materials resulting from clearing and grubbing. This work shall
also include the preservation from injury or defacement of all vegetation and objects
designated to remain.
2102 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
(a) Clearing
Clearing shall consist of the removal of all trees, brush, other vegetation, rubbish, fences
and all other objectionable material including the disposal of all material resulting from the
clearing and grubbing.
It shall also include the removal and disposal of structures that obtrude, encroach upon or
otherwise obstruct the work and which can be cleared by means of a bulldozer of
approximately 22 tons mass and flywheel power of approximatel 270kW.
The moving of a certain amount of soil or gravel material may be inherent to or
unavoidable during the process of clearing and no extra payment will be made for this.
Clearing shall include the removal of all rocks and boulders of up to 0.15 cu.m. in size
which are exposed or lying on the surface.
Where fences have to be taken down and the material sorted, coiled and stacked, payment
for this work shall be made under series 9000.
(b) Grubbing
Where directed by the Engineer, all stumps and roots larger than 75mm in diameter shall
be removed to a depth of not less than 600 mm below the finished road level and a
minimum of 75 mm below original ground level. Where the existing ground has to be
compacted, all stumps and roots including matted roots shall be removed to a depth of at
least 200 mm below the cleared surface, except where otherwise specified or directed by
the Engineer.
Except at borrow areas the cavities resulting from the grubbing shall be backfilled with
approved material and compacted to a density not less than the density of the surrounding
ground.
(c) Conservation of topsoil

Where suitable topsoil exists within the limits of the area to be cleared and/or grubbed, the
Contractor shall, if ordered by the Engineer, remove the topsoil together with any grass and
other suitable vegetation. If not used immediately, the topsoil shall be transported and
deposited in stockpiles for later use. The Contractor will not be required to remove topsoil
to an average depth of less than 150 mm from any particular area.

This work shall be measured and paid for under Division 9600, pay item 96.01. Where
topsoil can be removed without the necessity of first performing clearing and grubbing, no
payment will be made for clearing and grubbing under this Division.
(d) Conservation of vegetation

Where provided for in the project specification, certain designated plants encountered in
the road reserve and borrow areas shall be carefully protected by the Contractor.
2103 EXECUTION OF WORK
(a) Areas to be cleared and/or grubbed.

The portions of the road reserve that fall within the limits of the road prism as well as
certain borrow areas may require to be cleared and/or grubbed. The Engineer shall
designate the areas to be cleared and such areas shall not necessarily be limited to those
mentioned above.
The Contractor shall note that in order to avoid reclearing, the clearing and/or grubbing
may have to be done immediately before subsequent construction activities.
Individual trees designated in writing by the Engineer shall be left standing and uninjured.
A penalty equal to the amount specified in the project specifications shall be imposed for
every such tree, which is unnecessarily removed or damaged.
(b) Cutting of trees

The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to prevent damage to structures and
other private or public property. If necessary trees shall be cut in sections from the top
downwards. The branches of trees to be left standing shall be trimmed so as not to intrude
into the space for up to 7 m in height above the roadway.
(c) Disposal of material

Material obtained from clearing and/or grubbing shall be disposed of, as indicated by the
Engineer, in borrow pits or other suitable places and covered up with soil or gravel. The
burning of combustible material will normally be permitted but may only be done with the
prior written approval of the Engineer. Care must be taken to observe any regulations
concerning pollution of the air.
All tree trunks and branches in excess of 150 mm in diameter shall be cleaned of secondary
branches, sawn into suitable lengths and stacked at sites indicated by the Engineer. Such
timber shall not be used by the Contractor for any purpose and shall remain the property of
the Employer unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
Fencing wire shall be neatly wound into reels and all such wire, together with all fence
posts and other usable material from structures, etc., shall be stacked at sites indicated by
the Engineer.


Item 21.01 Clearing and grubbing .........................................................................hectare
The unit of measurement for clearing and grubbing is the hectare. The quantity shall be
taken as the area in hectares (to the nearest 0.1 ha) designated by the Engineer and cleared
and grubbed in accordance with these Specifications. The area occupied by the existing
road prism will be included.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all work necessary for the clearing of
the surface, the removal and grubbing of trees and tree stumps, cutting of branches,
backfilling of cavities, demolishing and disposal of structures and the removal,
transporting and disposal of material all as specified in this Division.
Item 21.02 Removal and grabbing of large trees and tree stumps
(a) Girth exceeding 1 m up to and including 2 m........................................number (No)
(b) Girth exceeding 2 m up to and including 3 m........................................number (No)
(c) Etc. in steps of 1 m girth.
The girth of trees or stumps shall be measured at the narrowest point of the tree or stump in
the first meter of its height above ground level. Trees and stumps with a girth exceeding 1
m shall be measured individually and classified according to size in increments of 1 m as
indicated above.
Item 21.03 Re-clearing of surfaces (on the written instructions of the engineer only) .
........................................................................................................ hectare (ha)
The unit of measurement for re-clearing areas which have previously been cleared shall be
the hectare. The quantity shall be measured to the nearest 0.1 ha.
Item 21.04 Removal and storage of selected vegetation:

(a) Cost of removal, storing, protection and replanting in a protected and fenced-off
area of selected vegetation ..............................................................................provisional sum
(b) Charge on provisional sum ............................................................... percentage (%)

DIVISION 2200: DEMOLITION, REMOVAL, DISPOSAL OR STORAGE

OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND INSTALLATIONS
2201 SCOPE
This Division covers the demolition, disconnection, removal or part removal, disposal and
or storage of buildings, bridges, drainage structures, retaining walls, wells, buildings,
service ducts, foundations, fencing, walls, kerbs, old pavements, abandoned pipelines,
disused public utilities and any other obstructions which are not designated or permitted to
remain, except for the obstructions to be removed and disposed of under other items in the
contract.
2202 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL

OF EXISTING STRUCTURES
Existing structures and installations shall be demolished as described in the Contract or as
instructed by the Engineer. The existing structures and installations shall be removed in
such a way as to leave no obstructions to the new Works. Those structures and
installations, which are to be partially demolished, shall be shored, braced and supported in
such a manner that the integrity of the structure shall be maintained. All supports shall be
kept outside the right of way.
The Contractor shall carefully remove and store materials salvaged from demolished
structures and installations. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, such materials shall
become the property of the owner. This material shall be carefully transported and stored in
an acceptable manner upon the owner's adjacent property or at a location to be identified
by the Engineer.
(i) Whenever materials are stored within the right-of-way, the Contractor shall be
responsible for its care and preservation until its authorised removal. The Contractor shall
satisfactorily dispose of all material designated by the Engineer as having no salvage value
in accordance with the requirements of Division 1600.
The Contractor shall remove structures and installations or part of structure and
installations, which obstruct with the installation of a new structure or installation.
(ii) Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer any voids below ground level in existing
structures or installations shall be filled with natural sand or crushed fine aggregate.
Latrine pits, septic tanks etc. shall be cleaned out and disinfected and the contents disposed
of in accordance with the requirements of Division 1600 before the filling with approved
material.
2203 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL

OF EXISTING ROAD PAVEMENTS
(a) Method and Equipment

Existing road pavements shall be demolished by excavation, scarifying or milling using
appropriate equipment approved by the Engineer.

(b) Disposal or Storage of Materials

Material resulting from the demolition of existing road pavements shall be disposed of or
stored as instructed by the Engineer.
2204 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR EXISTING PUBLIC UTILITIES
(a) Disconnections
Before the commencement of demolition operations, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer who shall arrange for the disconnection of all disused public utilities, including
electricity, telephone, sewer, water and other facilities encountered.
(b) Protection of Existing Public Utilities

Existing utilities, which are to remain in place, such as sewers, drains, water pipes,
conduits, poles, etc. are to be carefully protected from injury and are not to be displaced.
(c) Relocation of Existing Public Utilities

The Contracting Authority shall arrange with the appropriate authorities for the necessary
relocation of any public utilities, which would otherwise obstruct the Works. The
Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Clause 1207.

Item 22.01 Clearing and grubbing at inlets and outlets of hydraulic structures ...........
...............................................................................................square meter (m2)
The unit of measurement for clearing and grubbing at inlets and outlets of hydraulic
structures is in square meter (m2) measured within the limits of the areas designated by the
Engineer, which are cleared and grubbed in accordance with these Specifications.
Item 22.02 Cleaning out of hydraulic structures
(a) Pipes with an internal diameter up to and including 750 mm .........cubic meter (m3)
(b) Pipes with an internal diameter exceeding 750 mm ........................cubic meter (m3)
(c) Box culverts up to and including 1.5 m vertical dimension ........... cubic meter (m3)
(d) Box culverts exceeding 1.5 m vertical dimension ......................... cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter (m3) of material removed from hydraulic
structures where instructed by the Engineer so that the structures are cleaned as specified.
Payment under this item will normally only be made once during the duration of the
contract.
Item 22.03 Take up or down and set aside for reuse or remove to store off Site the
following
(i) Blockwork and stone work .............................................................cubic meter (m3)

(ii) Paved areas and the like, brickwork............................................. square meter (m2)
(iii) kerbs, channels, edgings, combined drainage and curb blocks, fencing, safety
fences and the like, copings, string courses and the like .............................linear meter (lm)
(iv) Cable............................................................................................... linear meter (lm)
(v) Road lighting columns, brackets and wall mountings, traffic signs, reflecting
road studs, gates, stiles, street furniture, communications cabinets, posts, brackets, signal
indicators, shelves, racking, frames, electronic units and the like............................... number
(vi) Chamber covers and frames, gully gratings and frames and the like.............number
(vii) Individual blocks, features or stones ............................................................ number
The measurement for take up or down and set aside for reuse or remove to store off Site
blockwork, stonework, paved areas and the like, brickwork, kerbs, channels, edgings,
combined drainage and kerb blocks, fencing, safety fences and the like, copings, string
courses and the like, cable, road lighting columns, brackets and wall mountings, traffic
signs, reflecting road studs, gates, stiles, street furniture and the like; communications
cabinets, posts, brackets, signal indicators, shelves, racking, frames, electronic units and
the like; chamber covers and frames, gully, gratings and frames and the like; individual
blocks, features or stones shall be the volumes, areas, lengths or numbers stated in the
Contract.

Specification for Highway Works – 2006 Series 3000 Drainage
SERIES 3000: DRAINAGE
TABLE OF CONTENT
TABLES AND FIGURES................................................................................................................. 5
DIVISION 3100: DRAINS ............................................................................................................ 6
3101 Scope .............................................................................................................................. 6

3102 Dimensions ..................................................................................................................... 6
3103 Open Drains (Ditches) .................................................................................................... 6
3104 Furrow Ditches ............................................................................................................... 7
3105 Mitre Drains.................................................................................................................... 7
(a) Mitre Drains Type 1 .................................................................................................7
(b) Mitre Drain Type 2 ...................................................................................................7
3106 Banks And Dykes ........................................................................................................... 7
3107 Subsoil (Subsurface) Drains ........................................................................................... 8
(a) Materials ...................................................................................................................8
(b) Construction of subsoil drainage systems ..............................................................10
(c) Test flushing ...........................................................................................................12
3108 Manholes, Outlet Structures And Cleaning Eyes ......................................................... 12
3109 Classification Of Materials........................................................................................... 12
(a) Hard material: .........................................................................................................12
(b) Soft material: ..........................................................................................................13
3110 Measurements And Payment ........................................................................................ 13
Item 31.01 Excavation for open drains...........................................................................13
Item 31.02 clearing and shaping existing open drains....................................................13
Item 31.03 Excavation for subsoil drainage Systems .....................................................13
Item 31.04 Impermeable backfilling to subsoil drainage systems..................................14
Item 31.05 Banks and dykes ...........................................................................................14
Item 31.06 Natural permeable material in subsoil drainage systems (crushed stone) ....14
Item 31.07 Natural permeable material in subsoil drainage systems (sand)...................15
Item 31.08 Pipes in subsoil drainage systems: ...............................................................15
Item 31.09 Polyethylene sheeting,0.15 mm thick, or similar approved material, for
lining subsoil drainage systems ..............................................................................15
Item 31.10 Synthetic-fibre filter fabric ...........................................................................15
Item 31.11 Composite in-plane drainage systems ..........................................................16
Item 31.12 Concrete outlet structures, manhole boxes, junction boxes and cleaning eyes
for subsoil drainage systems:..................................................................................16
Item 31.13 Concrete caps for subsoil drain pipes...........................................................16
Item 31.14 Repairing or replacing existing drainage Systems .......................................16
Item 31.15 Overhaul for material hauled in excess of 1.5 km free-haul ........................16
Item 31.16 Backfilling existing eroded side drains ........................................................17
Item 31.17 Test flushing of pipe subsoil drains..............................................................17
Item 31.18 Excavation for the clearing of existing drainage Systems............................17
Item 31.19 Selected backfill material under concrete-lined side drains .........................17

Series 3000 Drainage Specification for Highway Works -2006
DIVISION 3200: CULVERTS AND APPURTENANT STRUCTURES ..............................................18
3201 Scope.............................................................................................................................18
3202 Dimensions ...................................................................................................................18
3203 Types of Culverts ..........................................................................................................18
3203 Materials........................................................................................................................18
(a) Concrete Pipes ....................................................................................................... 18
(b) Corrugated Metal Pipes.......................................................................................... 19
(c) PVC Drain Pipes ................................................................................................... 19
(d) Corrugated polyethylene drainage tubing drain pipe............................................. 19
(e) Corrugated polyethylene drain pipe....................................................................... 19
3204 Construction Methods ...................................................................................................19
3205 Excavation by Trench Method......................................................................................20
(a) Depth of excavation ............................................................................................... 20
(b) Width of excavation ............................................................................................... 21
3206 Unsuitable Foundation Conditions................................................................................21
3207 Excavation For Embankment Conditions .....................................................................22
3208 Disposal Of Excavated Material ...................................................................................22
3209 Bedding And Laying Of Prefabricated Culverts...........................................................22
(a) Concrete Pipe Culverts and Drains ........................................................................ 22
(b) Box/slab culverts.................................................................................................... 23
(c) Metal Culverts........................................................................................................ 24
(d) Extension of existing culverts ................................................................................ 24
(e) Construction of culverts in half widths in existing roads....................................... 24
(f) General ................................................................................................................... 24
3210 Backfilling Of Prefabricated Culverts And Stormwater Drains ...................................25
3211 Inlet And Outlet Structures, Catchpits And Manholes .................................................26
(a) Excavation and Backfilling.................................................................................... 26
(b) Concrete Work ....................................................................................................... 26
3212 Removal Of Existing Work...........................................................................................26
3213 Joining New Work To Old............................................................................................27
3214 Service Ducts ................................................................................................................27
3215 Culverts On Steep Gradients.........................................................................................28
3216 Stormwater Ducts, Treamies And Other Closed Conduits ...........................................28
3217 Measurement And Payment ..........................................................................................28
Item 32.01 Excavation.................................................................................................... 28
Item 32.02 Backfilling.................................................................................................... 29
Item 32.03 Concrete pipe culverts.................................................................................. 30
Item 32.04 Portal and rectangular (Box or Slab) culverts.............................................. 30
Item 32.05 Metal and other culverts............................................................................... 30
Item 32.06 Extra over items 32.03, 32.04 and 32.05 for constructing inclined culverts 31
Item 32.07 Cast in- situ concrete and formwork ............................................................ 31
Item 32.08 Concrete backfill for culverts (class indicated)............................................ 31
Item 32.09 Prefabricated concrete inlets and outlets to culverts.................................... 32
Item 32.10 Steel reinforcement: ..................................................................................... 32
Item 32.11 Dowels for joining old and new concrete .................................................... 32
Item 32.12 Removing existing concrete......................................................................... 32
Item 32.13 Removing and relaying existing pipes ......................................................... 32
Item 32.14 Removing and stacking existing prefabricated culverts .............................. 33
Item 32.15 Treating surfaces with epoxy resin for joining new to old concrete............ 33
Page 3000-2 Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS)

Item 32.16 Protective mastic asphalt coating for corrugated metal culvert units...........33
Item 32.17 Manholes, catchpits, pre-cast inlet and outlet structures complete ..............33
Item 32.18 Accessories ...................................................................................................34
Item 32.19 Anchors for pipes (description) ....................................................................34
Item 32.20 Service ducts.................................................................................................34
Item 32.21 Duct marker blocks.......................................................................................34
Item 32.22 Chambers for ducts.......................................................................................34
Item 32.23 Hand excavation to determine the positions of existing services.................35
Item 32.24 Reinstating trenches crossing roads: ............................................................35
Item 32.25 Prefabricated reinforced concrete skew end units for concrete culverts
constructed at a skew angle type and dimensions of unit and class of bedding
indicated) ................................................................................................................35
DIVISION 3300: CURBING, CHANNELLING, OPEN CHUTES, DOWNPIPES, AND CONCRETE

LINING OF OPEN DRAINS......................................................................................................... 37
3301 Scope ............................................................................................................................ 37

3302 Curbing And Channelling............................................................................................. 37
(a) Dimensions .............................................................................................................37
(b) Material Requirements for Curbing and Channelling ............................................37
(c) Construction Requirements for Curbing and channelling ......................................38
(d) Construction sequence............................................................................................41
3303 Open Concrete Chutes and Downpipes, and Concrete Linings for Open Drains......... 42
(a) Dimensions .............................................................................................................42
(b) Material Requirements for Open Chutes, Downpipes, and Concrete linings for
open drains..............................................................................................................42
(c) Construction Requirements for Open Chutes, down pipes, and linings for open
drains ......................................................................................................................42
3304 Inlet and Outlet Structures and Transition Sections ..................................................... 43
3305 Construction Tolerances and Surface Finish ................................................................ 44
(a) Concrete curbing and channelling ..........................................................................44
(b) Concrete-lined channels .........................................................................................44
(c) Surface finish..........................................................................................................45
3306 Measurement And Payment ......................................................................................... 45
Item 33.01 Curbing .........................................................................................................45
Item 33.02 Curbing -Channelling combination ..............................................................45
Item 33.03 Chutes ...........................................................................................................45
Item 33.04 Cast in- situ concrete chutes .........................................................................45
Item 33.05 Inlet, outlet, transition and similar structures (typical designs)....................46
Item 33.06 Inlet, outlet, transition and similar structures (measured by components)...46
Item 33.07 Trimming of excavations for concrete-lined open drains.............................46
Item 33.08 Concrete lining for open drains ....................................................................47
Item 33.09 Formwork to cast in- situ concrete lining for open drains (class F2 surface
finish)......................................................................................................................47
Item 33.10 Sealed joints in concrete linings of open drains ...........................................47
Item 33.11 Concrete screed or backfill below chutes .....................................................47
Item 33.12 Steel reinforcement.......................................................................................47
Item 33.13 Polyethylene sheeting (0.15 mm thick) for concrete-lined opendrains ........48
Item 33.14 Cutting bituminous surfacing and pavement layers for concrete kerbing,
channelling or concrete-lined drains.......................................................................48

Item 33.15 Pre-cast concrete blocks in outlet structures ................................................ 48
DIVISION 3400: PITCHING, STONEWORK, AND EROSION PROTECTION .................................49
3401 Scope.............................................................................................................................49
3402 Materials........................................................................................................................49
(a) Stone ...................................................................................................................... 49
(b) Cement ................................................................................................................... 49
(c) Sand........................................................................................................................ 49
(d) Pre-cast concrete blocks......................................................................................... 50
(e) Concrete ................................................................................................................. 50
(f) Wire........................................................................................................................ 50
(g) Permeable material for filter layer ......................................................................... 50
(h) Synthetic fiber filter fabric (Geotextiles) ............................................................... 50
3403 Stone Pitching ...............................................................................................................51
(a) Dry stone pitching.................................................................................................. 51
(b) Grouted stone pitching ........................................................................................... 51
(c) Wired and grouted stone pitching .......................................................................... 52
(d) Grouted stone pitching on a concrete bed.............................................................. 52
3404 Riprap............................................................................................................................52
(a) General ................................................................................................................... 52
(b) Filter bed ................................................................................................................ 52
(c) Packed riprap.......................................................................................................... 53
(d) Dumped riprap ....................................................................................................... 53
3405 Dry Stone Masonry Walls.............................................................................................54
(a) General ................................................................................................................... 54
(b) Dry stone masonry walls........................................................................................ 54
(c) Cement mortared stone masonry walls .................................................................. 55
3406 Concrete Block Pitching ...............................................................................................55
(a) General ................................................................................................................... 55
(b) Interlocking type concrete blocks .......................................................................... 56
(c) Pre-cast concrete blocks for sidewalk pavements.................................................. 56
3407 Cast In Situ Concrete Pitching ......................................................................................56
Item 34.01 Stone Pitching .............................................................................................. 57
Item 34.02 Riprap........................................................................................................... 57
Item 34.03 Stone masonry walls .................................................................................... 57
Item 34.04 Concrete pitching ......................................................................................... 58
Item 34.05 Concrete in edge beams and foundation trenches........................................ 58
Item 34.06 Excavations for edge beams and foundation trenches ................................. 58
Item 34.07 Provision Of approved herbicide and ant poison ......................................... 58

Table 3107/1 Range of Grading of Filter Material.................................................................... 8

Table 3107/2 Natural permeable materials: sand ...................................................................... 9
Table 3107/3 Physical Requirements For Subsurface Drainage Geotextile............................. 10
Table 3404/1 Gradation Requirements for Riprap ................................................................... 54

DIVISION 3100: DRAINS
3101 SCOPE
This Division covers all work in connection with the excavation and construction of open
drains, subsoil (Sub surface) drainage and banks and dykes at the locations and to the sizes,
shapes, grades and dimensions as shown on the drawings or as directed by the engineer, and
the test flushing of subsoil drains.
It also covers the cleaning of open drains and the repairing of subsoil (Sub surface) drainage.
In special circumstances this work may be executed outside the road reserve.
It also covers the clearing of existing culverts, including amongst others the removal of all
undesirable materials that have accumulated in and around Inlet and outlet structures and in
the barrels of the culverts.
3102 DIMENSIONS
Excavations for open drains and trenches for piped and sub-soil drains shall be true to line,
gradient and cross section as described in the Contract.
The alignment of pipes for piped and sub-soil drains shall be true to line, gradient and cross
section as described in the Contract.
The lining of open drains shall be constructed in accordance with the dimension described in
the Contract.
3103 OPEN DRAINS (DITCHES)

(a) Open drain excavation shall consist of re-excavating or excavating open drains and
channels inside or outside the road reserve, including channels to direct the course of
streams, all as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
(b) Open drain excavation shall include all excavation required to construct V- shaped
channels with side slopes as defined on the drawings. Any excavation required to construct a
channel with side slopes equal to or flatter or a width more than those indicated on the
drawings shall be classed as cut and shall be measured and paid for under Division 4000.
Furthermore, drains within the road prism consisting of median drains, side drains, miter
drains, furrow ditches and drains on excavated slope benches shall be classed as cut and shall
be measured and paid for under Division 4000, except where, due to the shape of such drains,
excavation by bulk excavating equipment would not be feasible and either hand excavation
or special excavating equipment, such as draglines or similar, would be required, in which
case such excavation shall be paid for as open drain excavation.
(c) Open drains shall be constructed true to line, grade, and cross section and shall be so
maintained for the duration of the Contract.
Care shall be exercised to avoid excavation below the required grade for the drains and any
excavation carried below the required grade shall be backfilled with suitable material and
compacted to at least 93% of modified AASHTO density at the Contractor's own expense.

(d) Material resulting from the excavation of open drains shall be used in the
construction of fills, banks and dykes, or for other purposes, or disposed of to spoil,
depending on the classification of such material.
In respect of material resulting from open drain excavation and not taken to spoil but used
elsewhere in the construction of the Works, payment shall be made for open drain excavation
as well as for any item of permanent construction built from such material. Material from
open drain excavation and taken to spoil will be paid as open drain excavation only.
3104 FURROW DITCHES

Furrow ditches shall be formed by ploughing a continuous furrow along the line indicated in
the Contract or as directed by the Engineer. Methods other than ploughing may be used if
acceptable to the Engineer. The excavated material shall be placed on the downside of the
ditch and shall be compacted to 90% of modified AASHTO density in layers not exceeding
150 mm in thickness. The bottom of the finished ditch shall be at least 500 mm below the
crest of the down hill material. Flow lines shall provide satisfactory shape to provide
drainage to the outlet without causing scour, sedimentation or damage to adjacent property.
3105 MITRE DRAINS
(a) Mitre Drains Type 1

Mitre Drain Type 1 shall be constructed of suitable material, to be approved by the Engineer,
and shall be placed in such a way that the water will flow on the natural ground and against
the mitre bank. The mitre bank shall be compacted to 90% of modified AASHTO density in
layers not exceeding 150 mm in thickness, unless the Engineer has approved thicker layers.
(b) Mitre Drain Type 2

Mitre Drain Type 2 shall be constructed from rip rap in accordance with Division 3400
Riprap. The interstices shall be filled with a suitable cohesive soil, to be approved by the
Engineer.
3106 BANKS AND DYKES

Mitre banks, catchwater banks and dykes shall be constructed of approved soil or gravel
obtained from open drain excavation or, if no suitable material can be obtained from the
source, from suitable alternative sources, and be placed in such a way that the water will flow
on the natural ground and against the bank.
The banks and dykes shall be properly compacted to 90% of modified AASHTO density in
layers not exceeding 150 mm in thickness, unless thicker layers have been approved by the
engineer.
If so preferred by the contractor and approved by the engineer, mitre banks may also be
constructed of handpacked stone, provided that the interstices are filled with an approved
cohesive soil.

3107 SUBSOIL (SUBSURFACE) DRAINS
(a) Materials
(i) Pipes
Pipes for subsoil drainage shall have the specified internal diameter, which shall be not less
than 100 mm, and shall be one of the following types:
Perforated or slotted PVC pipes complying with AASHTO M304.
Perforated polyethylene pipes complying with the requirements of AASHTO M252.
The size of perforations in perforated pipes shall in all cases be 8 mm in diameter ± 1.5 mm
and the number of perforations per meter shall be not less than 26 for 150 mm pipes and 52
for 150 mm pipes. Perforations shall be spaced in two rows for 100 mm pipes and as shown
on the drawings for 150 mm pipes.
Slotted pipes shall have a slot width of 8 mm ± 1.5 mm. The arrangement of slots shall be
subject to the engineer’s approval, but the total slot area shall be not less than that presented
for perforations.
Pipes without slots or perforations required for conveying ground water from the subsoil
drainage proper to the point of discharge, shall be PVC or polyethylene pipes of the types
specified above, or concrete pipes complying with the requirements of AASHTO M86M or
M175M.
(ii) Natural Filter Materials for Sub-soil Drains

Natural permeable filter materials for subsoil drainage shall consist of sand and/or crushed
stone or natural gravel of suitable grading. The grading shall comply with the requirements
of Table 3107/1.
Gravel filter material shall consist of Type A, Type B or Type C filter material within the
grading limits shown in Table 3107/1. The filter material shall be clean, hard, durable and
free from organic impurities crushed rock or gravel. The aggregate crushing value of the
material shall not exceed 30 per cent. The material passing the 425 μm BS Sieve shall be
non-plastic when tested in accordance with BS 1377.
Table 3107/1 Range of Grading of Filter Material
Percentage by mass passing

BS sieve size Type A Type B Type C
63 mm - 100 100
37.5 mm 100 85 - 100 0
20 mm 45 - 100 0 - 20 -
10 mm 45 - 100 0-5 -
3.35 mm 25 - 80 - -
600 μm 8 - 45 - -
150 μm 0 - 10 - -
75 μm 0-5 - -

Sand shall be clean, hard sand obtained from approved borrow pits. The sand shall comply
with the requirements of series 4000. The nominal maximum particle size for the various
grades shall be as shown in Table 3107/2.
Table 3107/2 Natural permeable materials: sand
Grade Nominal maximum Particle size

(mm)
Coarse 4.75
Medium 2.00
Fine 0.20
Crushed stone shall comply with the requirements given in series 4000. Stone for concrete,
and shall be either coarse (19.0 mm nominal size) or fine (13.2 mm nominal size) as
specified.
The aggregate shall be evenly graded. The aggregate crushing value of the stone shall not
exceed 30 when tested in accordance with methods given in series 4000.
When no suitable sand and/or crushed stone is available from borrow pits, the engineer may
require that it be procured from commercial sources outside the site.
The engineer shall indicate the grades of sand and crushed stone to be used in each case to
comply with the requirements.
In the case of any sand and/or crushed stone, not more than 5% of the material shall pass
through the 0.075 mm sieve.
(iii) Synthetic-fiber filter fabric

Should the use of synthetic-fiber filter fabric in subsoil drainage, or as filter blankets, or for
any other purposes, be specified, it shall comply with the requirements as specified in table
3104/2.

Table 3107/3 Physical Requirements For Subsurface Drainage Geotextile
Property Test Units Specifications(1)

Method Type I-A Type I- Type I- Type I- Type I-E Type I-F
ASTM B C D
Grab Strength
D 4632 N 1100/700 1100/700 1100/700 800/500 800/500 800/500
Sewn Seam
D 4632 N 990/630 990/630 990/630 720/450 720/450 720/450
Strength
Tear Strength D 4533 N 400(3)/250 400(3)/250 400(3)/250 300/175 300/175 300/175
Puncture
D 4833 N 400/250 400/250 400/250 300/175 300/175 300/175
Strength
Burst Strength D 3786 kPa 2750/1350 2750/1350 2750/1350 2100/650 2100/950 2100/950
Permittivity D 4491 s-1 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.5 0.2 0.1
Apparent
D 4751 mm 0.45(2) 0.25(2) 0.22(2) 0.45(2) 0.25(2) 0.22(2)
Opening Size
Ultraviolet
Stability D 4355 % 50% after 500 hours of exposure
The first values in a column apply to geotextiles that break at <50 percent elongation (ASTM
D 4632).
The second values in a column apply to geotextiles that break at ≥50 elongation (ASTM D
4632). Maximum average roll value.
The minimum average roll tear strength for woven monofilament geotextile is 245 N.
(iv) Composite in-plane draining fabric

The make and class of fabric shown on the drawings or approved by the engineer shall be
used.
(v) Concrete
All concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of series 8000 and
with the details shown on the drawings.
(vi) Galvanized woven wire mesh

Galvanized woven wire mesh manufactured from 3.5 mm dia wire, 250 mm x 250 mm in
area, with a 12 mm x 12 mm maximum mesh size, shall be built into the outlets of subsoil
drainage systems in accordance with the details shown on the drawings.
(b) Construction of subsoil drainage systems
(i) With natural permeable material

Trenches for subsoil drainage systems shall be excavated to the dimensions and gradients
shown on the drawings or as directed by the engineer.

A layer of natural permeable material of the grade and thickness as shown on the drawings
shall be placed on the bottom of the trench and be lightly tamped and finished to the required
gradient.
Pipes of the type and size required shall then be firmly bedded on the natural material, true to
level and grade, and be coupled in accordance with requirements. Thereafter the trench shall
be backfilled with natural permeable material to such height above the pipes as shown on the
drawings or as directed by the engineer. The natural permeable material shall be lightly
compacted and trimmed to the required level. Further layers of finer natural permeable
materials shall then be placed, lightly compacted and finished to an even surface, as directed
by the engineer. The remainder of the trench, if any, shall be backfilled with approved
impermeable material and as required by the engineer, in layers not exceeding 100 mm, and
compacted to at least the same density as the surrounding material. The trench shall be
specially protected against the ingress of water until the impermeable layer has been
completed. The width of the backfill that will be measured for payment shall not exceed the
specified width of the trench.
Natural permeable material shall be placed in layers not exceeding 300 mm in thickness at a
time and be lightly compacted. The total thickness of each type of natural permeable
material shall be carefully controlled, and when the thinner layers are placed suitable spacers
shall be used. When successive layers are placed, the lower layer shall not be walked on and,
as for as possible, shall not be disturbed. Care shall be taken to prevent the contamination of
natural permeable material during construction of the subsoil drainage system and all natural
permeable material contaminated by soil or silt shall be removed and replaced by the
contractor at his own expense.
Perforated and slotted pipes shall be jointed by means of couplings. Perforated pipes shall be
laid with perforations at the top or bottom as may be prescribed.
The higher end of each subsoil drainage pipe shall be sealed off with a loose concrete cap of
class 20/19 concrete, as shown on the drawings, and at the lower end the pipe shall be built
into a concrete head wall providing a positive outlet or it shall be connected to storm water
pipes or culverts. The complete system together with head walls, shall be constructed in one
process starting at the lower head wall.
Any section of a subsoil drainage system constructed of pipes without perforations or slots
shall be backfilled with impermeable backfill material as described herein. Where suitable,
the excavated material may be used for backfilling.
(ii) With polyethylene lining to trenches for subsoil drainage systems

Where shown on the drawings or directed by the engineer, trenches for subsoil drainage
systems shall be limed with approved polyethylene sheeting 0.15 mm thick. The
polyethylene sheet shall cover the bottom of the trench and shall extend upwards on both
sides for as far as may be directed by the engineer in each particular case, in order to form a
waterproof channel. At joints the polyethylene sheeting shall be heat-welded together or
lapped by a minimum of 200 mm.
When backfilling the trench with natural permeable material, care shall be taken not to
displace or damage the polyethylene liming in any way. The use of plastics other than
polyethylene will be considered provided that the material is of equal quality and is approved
by the engineer.

(iii) With synthetic-fiber filter fabric

Where specified that synthetic-fiber filter fabric shall be used for liming in subsoil drainage
systems, it shall be procured, furnished and installed as specified and shown on the drawings.
The lining shall not be displaced or damaged in any way when the trench is being filled with
natural permeable material. The filter fabric shall be lapped both longitudinally and
transversely by the least 300 mm or as instructed by the manufacturers. The transverse lap
shall be positioned on top of the box forming the drain and shall be stitched together with
plastic/galvanized wire or strong synthetic thread at meter intervals. The longitudinal lap
shall be in the direction of flow.
Filter fabric shall be stored under suitable cover and shall not be exposed to direct sunlight
for prolonged periods and shall be protected from mechanical damage during installation and
construction.
(iv) With composite in-plane drainage fabric

Wherever specified, composite in-plane drainage systems shall be constructed in accordance
with the details shown on the drawings. The elements of the system shall be assembled
above ground in manageable lengths, and all exposed surfaces shall be sealed with an
approved geofiber seal. The trench sides shall be vertical, and the composite in-plane system
shall be installed against the side through which the subsoil flow is expected. The trench
shall then be backfilled with sand, which shall be saturated with water after placement up to
the prescribed level. The upper part of the trench shall be backfilled with impermeable
material, which shall be compacted to the density of the surrounding material, in layers not
exceeding 100 mm in thickness.
(c) Test flushing

Final acceptance of longitudinal subsoil drains will be subject to satisfactory test flushing
after completion and installation of the rodding eye inlets. Flushing tests shall be carried out
in the presence of the engineer’s representative by flushing the drain and metering outflow to
ensure the drain is clear of blockage. Should blockages be apparent the contractor shall
locate and clear the obstruction and repeat the test.
3108 MANHOLES, OUTLET STRUCTURES AND CLEANING EYES

Manholes, outlet structures and cleaning eyes for subsoil drainage systems shall be
constructed in accordance with the details shown on the drawings or in positions as instructed
by the engineer.
3109 CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIALS

All excavated materials for open drains and subsoil drainage system shall be classified as
follows for payment purposes:
(a) Hard material:

Material which cannot be excavated except by drilling and blasting or the use of pneumatic
tools or mechanical breakers and boulders in excess of 0.10 m3 in volume, shall be classified
as hard material.

Where more than 40% of any material (by volume) consists of boulders each exceeding 0.10
m3 in size, the material shall be classified as hard material.
(b) Soft material:

All material not classified as hard material shall be classified as soft material.
Notwithstanding the above classification, all material excavated from previously constructed
fills, subgrades and subbases shall be classified as soft material.
3110 MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT

Item 31.01 Excavation for open drains
(a) Excavating soft material situated within the following depth ranges below the surface level:
(i) 0 m up to 1.5 m ......................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
(ii) Exceeding 1.5 m and up to3.0m ............................................... cubic metre (m3)
iii) Etc, in increments of 1.5 m
(b) Extra over sub item 31.01(a) for excavation in hard material, irrespective of depth ....
............................................................................................................ cubic metre (m3)
(c) Mitre Drains
(i) Type 1........................................................................................ cubic metre (m3)
(ii) Type 2....................................................................................... .cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of material excavated in accordance with
the authorized dimensions, measured in place before excavation. Excavation for open drains
only as defined in clause 3103 and 3105 shall be measured.
Irrespective of the total depth of the excavation, the quantity of material in each depth range
shall be measured and paid for separately.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for the excavation of the material to the
required lines, levels and grades and the disposal of the material as directed, including a free
haul of 1.5 km.
For payment purposes a distinction shall be made between soft and hard material as defined
in clause 3109.
Item 31.02 Clearing and shaping existing open drains ............................cubic metre (m3)
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for excavating the material, protecting the
existing drainage structures, trimming the floors and sides of the open drains and disposing
of material as prescribed including free-haul over a distance of 1.5 km.
Item 31.03 Excavation for subsoil drainage Systems

(a) Excavating soft material situated within the following depth ranges below the
surface level:
(i) 0 m up to 1.5 m ......................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
(ii) Exceeding 1.5 m and up............................................................ cubic metre (m3)

(b) Extra over sub item 31.03(a) for excavation in hard material irrespective of depth ....
............................................................................................................cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of material excavated in accordance with
the authorized dimensions, measured in place before excavation, irrespective of the total
depth of excavation, the quantity of the material in each depth range shall be measured and
paid for separately.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for the excavation of the material to the
required lines, levels and grades, all temporary shoring and strutting, and the disposal of the
material as directed, including a free haul of 1.5 km. For payment purposes a distinction shall
be made between soft and hard material, as defined in clause 3109.
Where subsoil drainage systems are adjacent to structures such as culverts, that part of the
excavation for subsoil drainage systems which can be made by widening the excavation for
the structure shall be measured and paid for under excavation for such structure, and not
under excavation for the subsoil drainage systems.
Item 31.04 Impermeable backfilling to subsoil drainage systems ......... cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of completed backfill, measured in place in
the subsoil drainage systems and calculated in accordance with the authorized dimensions.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing, placing and
compacting the backfilling for a free haul of 1.5 km.
Item 31.05 Banks and dykes...................................................................... cubic metre (m3)

The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of material, measured in place in the banks
or dykes, and calculated in accordance with the authorized dimensions.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing, placing,
watering, compacting, shaping and trimming the material in the banks and dykes and a free
haul of 1.5 km.
Item 31.06 Natural permeable material in subsoil drainage systems (crushed stone)
(a) Crushed stone obtained from approved sources on the site (state grade).....................
........................................................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of approved crushed stone in place in the
drains, calculated in accordance with the authorized dimensions. The volume occupied by the
pipes shall be deducted when calculating the volume of the permeable material.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing and transporting
from the borrow areas over a free-haul distance of 1.5 km and placing the material as
specified.
For payment purposes a distinction shall be made between the different grades of crushed
stone.
(b) Crushed stone obtained from commercial sources (state grade) ....... cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of crushed stone in place in the drains,
calculated in accordance with the authorized dimensions. The volume occupied by the pipes
shall be deducted when calculating the volume of the permeable material.

The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring; furnishing and transporting
approved crushed stone from commercial suppliers, including the cost of transporting the
material to the site, and placing the materials as specified. For payment purposes a distinction
shall be made between the different grades of crushed stone.
Item 31.07 Natural permeable material in subsoil drainage systems (sand)

(a) Sand obtained from approved sources on the site (state grade) ........ cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of approved sand in place in the drains,
calculated in accordance with the authorized dimensions. The volume occupied by the pipes
shall be deducted when calculating the volume of the permeable material.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing, transporting from
the borrow areas over a free-haul distance of 1.5 km, and placing the sand as specified.
For payment purposes a distinction shall be made between the different grades of sand.
(b) Sand from commercial sources (state grade) ..................................... cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of sand in place in the drains, calculated in
accordance with the authorized dimensions. The volume occupied by the pipes shall be
deducted when calculating the volume of the permeable material.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing and transporting
approved sand from commercial suppliers, including the cost of transporting the material to
the site, and placing the material as specified.
Item 31.08 Pipes in subsoil drainage systems:

(a) Pitch-fiber pipes and fittings complete with couplings (state size and whether or not
perforated) .................................................................................................................. metre (m)
(b) Unplasticized PVC pipes and fittings, normal duty, complete with couplings (state
size and whether or not perforated or slotted) .......................................................... metre (m)
(c) High-density type poly ethylene pressure pipes and fittings, complete with couplings
(state size, type and class and whether or not perforated) ........................................... metre (m)
(d) Concrete pipes (state type and diameter) ..................................................... metre (m)
The unit of measurement for pipes shall be the metre of pipe, measured in place along its
centre line, including the length of fittings.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing, laying and
jointing the pipes and fittings as specified.
Item 31.09 Polyethylene sheeting,0.15 mm thick, or similar approved material, for

lining subsoil drainage systems ............................................ square metre (m²)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of polyethylene sheeting installed,
measured net from the specified dimensions.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring, supplying, cutting,
overlapping, jointing, placing and protecting the sheeting as specified, as well as for wastage.
Item 31.10 Synthetic-fibre filter fabric (describe type, grade, etc) ...... square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of filter fabric supplied and installed as
specified.

The tendered rate shall include full compensation for furnishing, procuring, cutting,
overlapping, jointing, placing and protecting the filter fabric as specified, as well as for
wastage.
Item 31.11 Composite in-plane drainage systems (state size, type, grade, etc). ...............
............................................................................................................... metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of composite in-plane drainage system measured
in place along the centre line of the system.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing, assembling,
installing and jointing the composite in-plane drainage system, including perforated or other
types of pipes, complete as specified.
Item 31.12 Concrete outlet structures, manhole boxes, junction boxes and cleaning eyes
for subsoil drainage systems:
(a) Outlet structures ....................................................................................... number(No)
(b) Manholes boxes .........................................................................................number(No)
(c) Junction boxes.......................................................................................... number (No)
(d) Cleaning eyes........................................................................................... number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of outlet structures, manhole boxes, junction
boxes and cleaning eyes for subsoil drainage systems constructed in accordance with the
details on the drawings and the engineer's instructions.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for all excavation, backfilling, compacting
to 90% of modified AASHTO density, disposing of surplus excavated material, keeping the
excavations safe, dealing with any surface or subsurface water, procuring and furnishing all
materials, providing, erecting and removing formwork, mixing, transporting, placing and
curing the concrete, and all labour and construction plant required for constructing the
concrete outlet structures, manhole boxes, junction boxes and cleaning eyes, complete as
specified.
Item 31.13 Concrete caps for subsoil drain pipes.......................................... .number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of caps supplied, and the tendered rate shall
include full compensation for supplying and installing the caps.
Item 31.14 Repairing or replacing existing drainage Systems................. provisional sum

The provisional sum given for repairing or replacing existing drainage systems shall be
expended in terms of the general conditions of contract.
Item 31.15 Overhaul for material hauled in excess of 1.5 km free-haul (normal
overhaul) .......................................................... cubic metre-kilometre (m3-km)
The measurement and payment for overhauling material referred to in items 31.01, 31.02,
31.03, 31.04, 31.05, 31.06, 31.07 and 31.16 shall be in accordance with Division 1700, and
the overhaul quantities shall be listed in sub clause 3110.

Item 31.16 Backfilling existing eroded side drains ...................................cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of approved granular material placed and
compacted to 93% of modified AASHTO density, measured in place after compaction, where
instructed by the engineer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for trimming the side drains disposing of
the resulting material and procuring, furnishing, transporting, placing and compacting the
granular material and a free-haul of 1.5 km.
Item 31.17 Test flushing of pipe subsoil drains ...............................................number (No)

The unit of measurement shall be the number of tests satisfactorily completed on unblocked
sections of drain. No payment will be made for tests, which have to be repeated due to
blocked pipes or faulty workmanship.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the provision of a water tanker, water,
equipment and labour necessary to carry out the tests, complete as specified.
Item 31.18 Excavation for the clearing of existing drainage Systems:

(a) Manholes and inlet and outlet structures............................................ cubic metre (m3)
(b) Culvert barrels ................................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
(c) Concrete side drains .......................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of material excavated and removed,
measured in place before excavation.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for excavating the material, protecting the
existing drainage structures, dealing with any surface or subsurface water, and disposing of
the excavated material, including shaping and levelling-off piles of spoil material. The
tendered rate shall also include full compensation for transporting the excavated material for
a free-haul distance of 1.5 km.
Item 31.19 Selected backfill material under concrete-lined side drains compacted to
93% of modified AASHTO density ........................................cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be a cubic metre of compacted material and the quantity shall
be calculated from the authorised dimensions given on the drawings.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring, as if from soft excavation or
borrow pits, breaking down, placing and compacting the material in 150 mm layers,
transporting for a free haul distance of 1.5 km, and for shaping the top surface in accordance
with the drawings.

DIVISION 3200: CULVERTS AND APPURTENANT

STRUCTURES
3201 SCOPE
This Division covers the work in connection with the construction of in-situ and
prefabricated culverts together with inlet and outlet structures, and other appurtenant
structures.
3202 DIMENSIONS
Culverts shall be constructed to the dimensions and levels described in the Contract.
Excavations for culverts and appurtenant structures shall be true to line, gradient and cross
section as described in the Contract or as instructed by the Engineer.
The alignment of culverts and appurtenant structures shall be true to line, gradient and cross
section as described in the Contract or as instructed by the Engineer.
3203 TYPES OF CULVERTS

(a) Prefabricated concrete pipes of circular section, hereinafter called 'concrete pipe
culverts'.
(b) Prefabricated corrugated metal pipes and pipe arches, hereinafter called 'metal
culverts'. These may be of steel or aluminium construction.
Box/slab culverts may be cast in place or prefabricated. In-situ reinforced concrete box
culverts/slab culverts constructed in accordance with series 8000 prefabricated concrete
culverts other than pipe culverts are hereinafter called portal culverts or rectangular culverts.
Other types of prefabricated culverts not mentioned above, if required, will be shown in the
drawings.
3203 MATERIALS
(a) Concrete Pipes

In-situ concrete culverts, bidding concrete and surrounds to metal culverts shall conform to
the requirements of series 8000.
Pre-cast concrete pipes used for the construction of culverts shall be manufactured in
accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M-170 (ASTM C 76 or ASTM C 118) or
AASHTO M-242 and shall be the Class as described in the Contract.
Concrete used for the construction of culverts shall be Class 20/40 in accordance with the
requirements of Division 8400.
Reinforcement used for the construction of pre-cast or in-situ concrete culverts shall be steel
reinforcement complying with the requirements of Division 8300.

(b) Corrugated Metal Pipes

Corrugated metal pipes sections used for the construction of culverts shall be manufactured
in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M-36 from material, which shall have
minimum yield strength of 229 N/mm2. Nuts and bolts shall comply with the requirements
of AASHTO M-167.
Fabricate under drain pipe from steel sheets with a minimum thickness of 1.32 millimetres.
Use any class of perforation specified in AASHTO M 36M.
Coatings for Corrugated Metal Pipes shall be :
(a) Galvanized zinc coatings shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M 36.
Units on which the zinc coating has been damaged shall be re-galvanized or the surface
prepared and painted with 2 coats of zinc-rich paint.
(b) Bituminous coatings shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M-190.
Coupling bands for zinc coated (galvanized) or aluminium coated (aluminized) corrugated
iron or steel under drain pipe shall meet the requirements of coupling bands for Type III pipe
of AASHTO M 36.
(c) PVC Drain Pipes

PVC drainpipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 278. The maximum size of pipe
shall be 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter.
(d) Corrugated polyethylene drainage tubing drain pipe

Corrugated polyethylene drainage tubing drainpipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO
M 252. The maximum size of pipe shall be 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter.
(e) Corrugated polyethylene drain pipe

The corrugation shall form smooth continuous curves and tangents. Corrugations shall form
circumferential rings about the longitudinal axis of the structure.
3204 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

Prefabricated culverts shall be installed under either:
(a) 'trenched conditions', where the units are laid in a trench excavated below existing
ground level or in a trench excavated in previously constructed subgrade and, if necessary,
subbase layers; or
(b) 'embankment conditions', where the units are laid approximately on the existing
ground surface and the subgrade is then constructed on either side and over the culvert.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, all pipe culverts shall be constructed under
trenched conditions. The only exceptions shall be those permitted by the Engineer.
Surface drainage must be controlled by the construction of temporary earth berms and
drainage channels to prevent stormwater from entering the trench.
The Contractor shall make good with bedding materials any excavation at or below the
bottom of drainage trenches if the Contractor allows the trench bottom to become soft or
otherwise unsuitable for the construction of the culvert.

3205 EXCAVATION BY TRENCH METHOD
(a) Depth of excavation

In the case of culverts to be constructed under trenched conditions, the Contractor shall first
construct the fill, subgrade and, if necessary, the subbase to such a level as will provide a
minimum cover above the proposed level of the top of the culvert as described hereinafter for
the various types of culvert. Thereafter, the Contractor may commence excavation of the
trench for the culvert.
Where authorized by the Engineer, and in particular in areas of swampy or marshy
conditions, the Contractor may construct the fill to the top of subgrade before commencing
excavation for the trench for the culvert.
The side of trenches shall be adequately supported at all times. Except where otherwise
authorised by the Engineer, they shall not be battered.
The amount by which the excavation is to exceed the proposed level of the invert of the
culvert shall be sufficient to allow for the type and thickness of bedding material to be placed
as specified or as shown on the Drawings.
The minimum cover above the top of the culvert and minimum depth of excavation below
the underside of the culvert shall be as follows:
(i) Concrete Pipe Culverts

The minimum height of embankment construction over the top of the proposed pipe culvert
before excavation may commence if the minimum cover specified on the Drawings for the
type of pipe and bedding condition is used.
The minimum amount by which the excavations is to exceed the proposed level of the
underside of the pipe shall be 250 mm or such other amount required to accommodate the
type of bedding required for the pipe in each case.
(ii) Box/slab culverts

The minimum height of embankment construction over the top of the proposed culvert before
excavation may commence if 100 mm or such greater height as may be shown on the
Drawings, whichever is the greater.
The minimum amount by which the excavation is to exceed the proposed level of the
underside of the culvert invert slab shall be 250 mm in the case of culverts with pre-cast
invert slabs. In the case of culverts with cast in situ invert slabs, the excavations shall exactly
accommodate the invert slab.
(iii) Metal Culverts

The minimum height of embankment construction over the top of the proposed metal culvert
before excavation may commence if the minimum cover specified on the Drawings for the
type of metal culvert, or 0.25 times the diameter of pipes or 0.25 times the span of pipe
arches, whichever is the greater.
The minimum amount by which the excavation is to exceed the proposed level of the bottom
of the pipe shall be 250 mm or such other amount required to accommodate the type of
bedding required for the culvert in each case.

(b) Width of excavation

The widths of trenches shall be sufficient to allow for proper laying, bedding and backfilling
culverts, but shall not exceed four-thirds of the external diameter of the pipe(s), plus 400mm
for single barrel culverts and also plus the allowable gap between each pipe for multiple
barrel culverts.
If the width of any trench is increased by slipping or collapsing of the trench, the Contractor
shall immediately inform the Engineer and not proceed with any further pipe-laying or
backfilling until the Engineer has reviewed the circumstances and given instructions as to the
need for any altering of the class of pipe or bedding conditions.
(i) Concrete Pipe Culverts

The width of excavation shall be equal to the nominal internal diameter of the pipe plus 0.5
m on each side.
(ii) Box/slab culverts

Where it is required to backfill the trench with concrete as described hereinafter, the width of
excavation shall be equal to the total outside width of the culvert portal plus 0.5 m for both
single and multiple openings. In the case of rectangular culverts up to 1.200 mm span, which
are located so that the tops of the culverts are in or just below the subbase layer, the Engineer
may require that the excavation width shall be the net width of the cast in-situ invert slabs or
the net width of pre-cast invert slabs plus 100 mm.
Where backfilling is to be done with soil or gravel material, the width of excavation shall be
the outside width of the portal plus 200 mm on either side, for both single and multiple
culverts.
(iii) Metal Culverts

The width of excavation shall be equal to the internal diameter or span of the metal pipe or
pipe arch plus 0.5 m on each side of the culvert.
Where metal culverts consist of two or more units next to each other, the minimum clearance
between adjacent culverts shall be as shown on the drawings.
3206 UNSUITABLE FOUNDATION CONDITIONS

Where the bottom of the trench as excavated does not provide a suitably firm foundation for
the culvert, due to soft or otherwise unsuitable material being encountered, the unsuitable
material shall be excavated to a depth below the bottom of the culvert as indicated by the
Engineer and replaced with gravel or other approved material properly compacted to provide
a firm earth cushion. When ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall construct a blinding
layer of concrete to provide a suitable working floor.
The width of the excavation and earth cushion shall be as directed by the Engineer but, in the
case of culverts to be constructed under embankment conditions, the width shall be at least
one diameter or span, as the case may be, wider than the culvert on either side.
Other special construction methods may be shown on the Drawings.

3207 EXCAVATION FOR EMBANKMENT CONDITIONS

Where culverts are to be constructed under embankment conditions as defined in clause 3204
above, the Contractor shall level the existing ground by excavating and filling and
compacting as required so that the foundation for the culvert is true to grade and of uniform
density over the whole length of the culvert.
The finished level of the ground on which the culvert is to be bedded shall be below the
proposed level of the underside of the culvert by the same amounts as specified in clause
3205 (A) above, for the various types of culverts.
3208 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL

Where excavated material does not comply with the requirements for backfilling material as
specified hereafter or is surplus to backfilling requirements, such excavated material shall be
removed from the Site and disposed of in disused borrow pits or other places. Material
suitable for use in the Works, shall however, be used as prescribed by the engineer.
Payment for such material will be made as for excavation under item 32.01, and also under
the appropriate item for such part of the works as may be constructed from such material.
All excavated material shall be subject to a free-haul distance of 1.0 km.
3209 BEDDING AND LAYING OF PREFABRICATED CULVERTS
(a) Concrete Pipe Culverts and Drains

Concrete pipe culverts and drains shall be laid on Class A, B, C or D bedding as shown on
the Standard Detail Drawings and as directed by the Engineer. The pipes shall be laid hard
up against each other so as to obtain tight joints. Ogee type pipes must be laid with the
spigot ends pointing downstream.
The inside of the pipes shall be smooth with no displaced joints. All pipes shall be laid true
to line and level.
(i) Class A bedding

The pipe shall be laid with the bottom portion on Class 20/40 concrete of specified thickness
below the lowest part of the pipe and extending upwards on each side of the pipe to a
specified proportion of its height. The thickness of concrete below the pipe and the height to
which it is extended upwards shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Pipes shall be supported
on suitably shaped temporary cradles during concreting. No longitudinal construction joints
on the horizontal plane will be permitted.
(ii) Class B and class C beddings

The pipe shall be laid on a bedding cradle of compacted selected granular material as
specified. The bedding shall extend upwards on both sides of the pipe to a specified portion
of its height, as shown on the drawings. Joint holes shall be formed in the bedding cradle for
pipe sockets and couplings, to ensure that each pipe is fully supported throughout the length
of its barrel on the bedding cradle.

(iii) Class D bedding

The pipe shall be laid on the in situ material in the excavation bottom after the bottom has
been hand trimmed to support the pipe along the entire length of its barrel in accordance with
the details shown on the drawings. Wherever necessary, the in situ material shall first be
stabilized in accordance with the details shown on the drawings or as prescribed by the
engineer. Joint holes shall be formed in the trench bottom for pipe sockets and couplings.
(iv) Rock foundation

Where rock, shale or other hard material is encountered on the bottom of excavations,
construction of pipes on Class A bedding shall proceed as follows:
The material below the pipe shall be excavated and replaced with an equalizing bed of sand
or approved gravel or soil to a depth as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
The backfill material shall be watered and compacted to provide a firm earth cushion. Class
A bedding shall then be prepared as described in clause (a)(ii) of this Clause.
(v) Concrete casing

Where shown on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer, pipes shall be fully encased in
Class 20/40 concrete with the dimensions as shown on the Drawings or as ordered by the
Engineer. Temporary supports shall be provided near the pipe ends to support the pipes
during placing of the concrete. The placing of concrete shall be such that all spaces under the
pipe are completely filled. Use shall be made of poker vibrators to ensure proper filling of all
spaces under and around the pipes with concrete. Concrete casing shall be cast in one
continuous operation until completed.
(b) Box/slab culverts
(i) Cast in situ invert slabs

Cast in situ invert slabs shall be constructed to the dimensions and at the locations as shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. They shall be reinforced with steel
reinforcement as detailed on the Drawings.
(ii) Precast invert slabs

A layer of fine granular material of at least 250 mm thickness shall be placed on the bottom
of the excavation, levelled, compacted to 98% Mod AASHTO and trimmed to grade and line,
to form a bed to receive the pre-cast invert slabs.
The slabs shall be carefully placed on the prepared bed, true to line and grade, and bedded in
such a manner that they are uniformly supported over their whole area on the bedding.
(iii) Placing of upper portion of culverts

The upper portion of box/slab culverts shall be placed accurately on the invert slabs, with a
thin layer of 1:3 cement sand mortar between the contact surfaces to ensure a firm and
uniform support.
Where two or more culverts are placed side by side to form a multi-barrel culvert, the space
between the culverts shall be filled with concrete up to the level of the top of the culvert.
Where prescribed, filter fabric shall be applied to the vertical outer faces in accordance with
the details shown on the drawings.

(c) Metal Culverts

The excavation shall be trimmed to the contour of the invert of the culvert and shaped to
enable the culverts to be bedded as shown on the Drawings.
Where rock is encountered, the depth of excavation shall extend to a depth of at least 325
mm below the contour of the culvert and filled with granular material as before.
The culverts shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as
approved by the Engineer. In case of conflict between these Specifications and the
manufacturer's recommendations, these Specifications shall apply. Anchor bolts where
specified or shown on the drawings shall be installed at the ends of metal pipe culverts in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to tie them to inlet and outlet head walls.
(d) Extension of existing culverts

Where an existing culvert requires extension or portal replacement, the new section shall be
placed at the same grade and, where it joints the existing structure, at the same level as the
existing structure.
Any sections of existing wing walls, approach slabs and head walls, which may obstruct any
new work, shall be demolished and removed. Existing culverts ends shall not be damaged,
but, should damage occur, the repair work shall be done before the placement of any fresh
concrete or new culverts. Loose material shall be removed and joint faces thoroughly
cleaned to the satisfaction of the engineer.
Jointing shall be done in accordance with Sub clause 8704.
After completion of the extension or partial replacement of a culvert, new approach slabs,
head walls, wing walls, catchpits, etc, shall be constructed in accordance with the drawings.
(e) Construction of culverts in half widths in existing roads

If necessary for taking up traffic or for any other reasons, or if so instructed by the engineer,
culverts shall be constructed in half widths.
Unless otherwise prescribed, the downstream section shall be constructed first. The end of
the excavation adjoining the traffic lane shall be properly supported to prevent displacement
from occurring. The necessary warning signs shall be erected in accordance with the
requirements of Division 1500.
Where the culvert is constructed in an existing road and it has been so prescribed by the
engineer, the pavement layers at least shall be benched and recompacted during backfilling.
The depth of benching shall equal the respective layer thicknesses, and the width shall be at
least 150 mm.
(f) General
Construction of culverts shall begin at the one end, the position of which shall be fixed as
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The position of the other end of the
pipe shall normally be determined by the end of the last whole unit, the top of which breaks
through the fill slope. However, in the case of skew culverts or culverts with a cover of less
than 0.5 m at the shoulder, the Engineer may order that the end unit be cut to the length and
skew required.

Any units which deform or crack, or which are not constructed to the required lines, levels
and grades, or which become displaced in the process of the work or during the Maintenance
Period, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
Pre-cast units shall be lifted and handled by means of approved lifting devices only. Lifting
eyes shall be caulked with a suitable mortar after the units are installed.
The Contractor shall exercise due care not to damage, overstress or displace any
prefabricated pipes with his own traffic or compaction equipment. Where loads in excess of
those prescribed in the Schedule for Drainage Works or Drawings are likely to pass over
completed culverts, the Contractor shall provide additional cover over the pipes so as to
ensure that the design stresses on the pipes are not exceeded.
All concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with the provision of Series 8000 of
these Specifications.
3210 BACKFILLING OF PREFABRICATED CULVERTS AND STORMWATER

DRAINS
After the pipes have been firmly laid on the required bedding as described above in clause
3209, backfilling shall be carried out as follows:
The material used for the backfilling of those portions of culverts or pipes subject to traffic
loads shall be selected material of at least subbase quality. Where the excavated material is
not of adequate quality, selected material shall be imported for this purpose.
Metal culverts shall be temporarily ballasted during backfilling to prevent them from lifting.
Backfilling alongside and over all pipes shall be placed and compacted in layers not
exceeding 150 mm after compaction, to a density of at least the density required for the
material in adjoining layers of fill, subgrade and subbase. The density of backfilling in
excavations made in the natural ground shall be at least 90% of modified AASHTO density.
Backfilling shall be carried out simultaneously and equally on both sides of a pipe to avoid
any unequal lateral forces.
Where the Engineer so directs, metal culverts with large diameters or spans, or culverts with
multiple openings, shall be constructed under embankment conditions as defined in clause
3204(b). In such cases, the backfilling shall be carried out to the same standard as described
above, simultaneously and equally on both sides of the culvert and over the culvert until the
minimum specified cover is obtained. The width of backfill on each side of the culvert, after
completion, shall be at least equal to the diameter (or span) of one of the openings of the
culvert.
Metal culverts shall be backfilled symmetrically to prevent distortion of the units and the
Contractor shall also ensure that the required cover, as specified in clause 3205 (A) (iii), is
provided over the culvert before routing his construction equipment across the culvert.
Whenever specified or as may be instructed by the engineer, the backfilling shall consist of
concrete placed between the side of the culvert and the excavation up to the top of the
culvert.
When specified or ordered by the engineer, the backfilling of culverts shall be done using a
wet or a stiff mixture of soil cement in lieu of a compacted gravel or lean concrete. A wet
mixture of soil cement shall consist of an approved soil or gravel mixed with 5% of Portland
cement and only sufficient water to give a consistency that will permit the soil cement to be
placed with vibrators so that all voids between the pipes and the sides of excavations and

between culverts in the case of multi-barrel culverts will be properly filled. A stiff mixture of
soil cement shall contain 3% of Portland cement and just sufficient water for it to be placed
and compacted like ordinary backfill material. The height to which the soil cement backfill
shall be taken shall be as prescribed by the engineer or shown on the drawings, and any
remaining backfill shall be carried out as described above with a granular material.
The aggregate used for soil cement shall preferably be a sandy material but may contain
larger particles up to 38 mm, and it shall not have a plasticity index exceeding10. Detrimental
percentages of silt or clay shall be avoided, and the aggregate shall be obtained from an
approved source.
The soil cement shall be mixed on the site with suitable concrete mixers, and the water and
cement contents shall be carefully controlled. The material shall be placed and then
thoroughly compacted so that all voids are filled as described above. At culvert ends stones
shall be packed to prevent the soil cement from flowing beyond the required limits.
Soil cement shall not be used for backfilling corrugated metal culverts.
A free-haul distance of 1.0 km shall apply in respect of all imported materials used for
backfilling the culverts but no overhaul shall be paid on any cement, water or concrete
aggregates used.
3211 INLET AND OUTLET STRUCTURES, CATCHPITS AND MANHOLES

Inlet and outlet structures for prefabricated culverts as well as catchpits and manholes shall
be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings.
(a) Excavation and Backfilling

The Specifications given in this Division for the excavation and backfilling of culverts, shall
apply for inlet and outlet structures, catchpits and manholes.
(b) Concrete Work

Concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with the provision of series 8000 of these
Specifications. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall be Class 20/20.
3212 REMOVAL OF EXISTING WORK

Where shown on the Drawings or where directed by the Engineer, existing inlets or outlets to
pipe culverts shall be broken down or demolished and debris or rubbish removed off site.
Existing pipes shall be removed when necessary. All such work shall be carried out in a
manner to prevent damage to old work which is to remain.
The Contractor's attention is directed to the provisions of Series 2000 which specifies the
structures that have to be removed as part of the clearing and grubbing operations and the
removal of which will, therefore, not be measured and paid for under this Division.
For the removal of existing concrete, payment shall distinguish between plain concrete and
reinforced concrete, the latter being defined for this purpose as concrete containing not less
than 0.2% steel reinforcement measured by volume.
Undamaged pipes shall be re-used in the works where indicated by the engineer. Pipes which
cannot be re-used shall remain the property of the employer and shall be stacked within the
road reserve or where directed by the engineer.

3213 JOINING NEW WORK TO OLD

Where partial demolition is required for extension work to existing structures, the contact
face shall be cut to predetermined lines and levels, any loose and fragmented material shall
be removed, and projecting steel cleaned and bent as directed by the engineer. Where partial
demolition is not required but extension work only, the contact surface shall be roughened
and cleaned of all dirt and loose particles.
If dowels are required, they shall be installed in holes drilled into the existing structure, in
accordance with the details shown on the drawings, and secured by means of an approved
type of epoxy resin grout.
Fresh concrete shall be bonded to the old concrete in accordance with the requirements
specified in series 8000.
Reinforced or plain concrete removed in the process of partial demolition shall be measured
and paid for under item 32.12 and the installation of dowels and those surfaces treated with
an epoxy bonding compound will be paid for separately, but no separate payment will be
made for any other work described above, the cost of which shall be deemed to be included
in the rates tendered for the concrete supplied for the extensions to the existing structures.
3214 SERVICE DUCTS

Where required, the contractor shall construct service ducts for the easy installation and
maintenance of existing, new and future cables and other services. Services ducts shall be
constructed from one or more of the following materials:
(i) Normal-duty PVC pipes in accordance with AASHTO M278.
(ii) Reinforced concrete pipes in accordance with AASHTO M170M.
Where required, the pipes shall be cut lengthwise and accurately in two halves. The actual
type of pipe required shall be in accordance with the specifications. The pipes shall be
installed in the required positions, and accurate records shall be kept regarding the depth,
position and number of pipes installed in each duct. Pipes shall be laid at the grades shown
on the drawings to facilitate flushing with water and shall, where required, be encased in
concrete or soil cement.
The width of excavation for service-duct trenches shall be equal to the nominal inside
diameter of the pipe, plus 150 mm on each side of the duct. Where ducts consist of two or
more units, the minimum spacing between the units shall be 75 mm, and the 150 mm side
clearance specified above shall apply to the outside units of the group.
Below the carriageway the depth of excavation shall accommodate a minimum cover of 1.0m
above the upper side of the installed service duct.
All pipes shall be joined with watertight couplings made from the same material as the pipe.
Fibre-cement couplings shall be of the rubber-ring type.
Split pipes shall normally be used only for providing ducting for existing services which
cannot be severed and threaded through the ducts. The pipes shall be accurately cut
longitudinally in two halves and opposite halves shall be matched as sawn. Split pipes shall
be placed around the service as required, firmly bound by steel straps and finally encased in
concrete if required.
Excavating, laying and bedding the pipes shall be in accordance with the specifications for
prefabricated culverts with any modifications as may be necessary or specified here.

Duct ends shall be provided with suitable conical wooden stoppers to prevent dirt from
entering the ducts. Two strands, 2.5mm in diameter, of galvanized steel wire shall be
threaded through each unit and shall extend 2m beyond each end and firmly wedged into
position with the wooden stoppers.
The end of each duct shall be marked with a marker block constructed to the details shown
on the drawings. Each duct marker block shall be at least 50mm proud of the finished
surface level.
3215 CULVERTS ON STEEP GRADIENTS

Where culverts are constructed on gradients exceeding 1 in 4, they shall be referred to as
inclined culverts. Inclined culverts shall be constructed from the type of unit required,
normally either circular concrete pipe units or metal culvert units as described in sub clause
3203.
Particular care shall be taken to protect excavations against storm water damage. The
trenches shall be excavated down to firm ground, and backfilled with selected gravel or
concrete if it is necessary to over-excavate for obtaining a firm floor.
After the outlet structure has first been completed, the culvert units shall be laid in the normal
manner by starting from the lower end and placing successive units firmly against each other
to prevent subsequent movement. The lower unit shall be securely cast into the outlet
structure, and metal culverts shall be provided with the necessary anchor bolts at both inlet
and outlet structures and also at all thrust and anchor blocks.
Thrust and anchor blocks shall be constructed from concrete as required in accordance with
the drawings and details furnished by the engineer. Anchor bolts, straps and other anchoring
devices required at anchor and thrust blocks shall be provided.
The backfilling of trenches shall be done in horizontal layers starting at the lower end.
3216 STORMWATER DUCTS, TREAMIES AND OTHER CLOSED CONDUITS

The specifications given in this Division for culverts, shall apply mutatis mutandis to the
construction of storm water ducts, tremies or any other closed conducts constructed from the
prefabricated units described in sub clause 3203, whether intended for drainage or for any
other purpose.
No distinction will be made in the schedule of quantities between the construction of culverts
as defined in Division 3100 and that of the other closed conduits described above, all being
classed as culverts.
Tremies constructed from prefabricated units shall be classed as inclined culverts where laid
to a grade steeper than 1 in 4.

Item 32.01 Excavation
(a) Excavating soft material situated within the following depth ranges below the
surface level:
(i) 0 m up to 1.5 m..........................................................................cubic metre (m3)
(ii) Exceeding 1.5 m and up to3.0m ...............................................cubic metre (m3)

(iii) Etc, in increments of 1.5 m

(b) Extra over sub item 32.01(a) for excavation in hard material, irrespective of depth ....
............................................................................................................ cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of material excavated within the specified
widths over the lengths and depths authorised by the Engineer in each case. Excavation in
excess of the widths specified or authorised by the Engineer shall not be measured for
payment.
When measuring excavation for removal of existing culverts, the volume occupied by the
culvert shall not be subtracted from the calculated volume of excavation.
In case of manholes and catchpits, the dimensions for determining the volume of excavation
shall be the neat outside dimensions of the structure and plus an allowance of 0.5 m of
working room around the structure.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all excavation, temporary timbering,
shoring and strutting, for preparing the bottom of the excavation for the culvert beds, for
disposal of excavated material unsuitable for backfilling, for keeping excavations safe, for
dealing with any surface or sub-surface water and for any other operations necessary to
complete the work as specified.
Payment shall distinguish between soft and hard material as defined in clause 3109.
Item 32.02 Backfilling

(a) Using the excavated............................................................................ cubic metre (m³)
(b) Using imported selected material ...................................................... cubic metre (m³)
(c) Extra over subitems 32.02(a) and (b) for soil cement backfilling (Percentage of
cement indicated).............................................................................................. cubic metre (m³)
The unit of measurement shall be cubic metre of material in place after compaction and the
quantity shall be calculated from the specified dimensions of the backfilling as specified or
authorised by the Engineer.
If excavations are carried out in excess of the dimensions authorised by the Engineer,
quantity of backfilling will nevertheless be based on the authorised dimensions. The volume
occupied by the culvert or pipe shall be subtracted when calculating the volume of
backfilling.
Payment at tendered rates shall include full compensation for backfilling under, alongside
and over conduits, for watering and for compacting the backfill material to the specified
density. The tendered rate for subitem 32.02(b) shall, in addition, include full compensation
for supplying selected material of subbase quality from approved sources, including a free
haul of 1.0km.
The tendered rate for subitem 32.02(c) shall be additional to the rates tendered for subitems
32.02(a) and (b) and shall include full compensation for all incidentals required for the
complete backfilling with soil cement as specified.
The cost of backfilling of excavations for manholes, catchpits and structures after
construction will not be paid for, and the Contractor must allow, in his prices, for backfilling
around manholes, catchpits and structures.

Item 32.03 Concrete pipe culverts

(i) On Class A bedding (type and diameter indicated) ......................................metre (m)
(ii) On Class B bedding (type and diameter indicated) .......................................metre (m)
(iii) On Class C bedding (type and diameter indicated) .......................................metre (m)
(iv) On Class D bedding (type and diameter indicated) ......................................metre (m)
The unit of measurement for concrete pipe culverts shall be the metre of culvert laid as
shown on the drawings or ordered by the engineer. The length shall be measured along the
soffit of the culvert.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for providing, testing, loading,
transporting and unloading the culverts, for providing and placing the selected granular
material, where required, and for the installation, laying and jointing of the culverts, as
specified.
Should it be inevitable for a section to be cut off from a concrete pipe unit of standard length,
the full standard length of the unit shall be measured for payment. No additional
compensation for cutting and disposing of such section will be paid.
Upon payment, differentiation shall be made between the various types and sizes of culverts
and between the culverts placed on A, B, C and D classes of bedding.
Item 32.04 Portal and rectangular (Box or Slab) culverts

(a) Complete with pre-cast invert slabs (size and type indicated) ......................metre (m)
(b) Without pre-cast invert slabs (size and type indicated) ................................metre (m)
The unit of measurement for prefabricated portal or rectangular culverts shall be the metre of
culvert laid as shown on the drawings or as directed by the engineer.
The length shall be measured along the soffit of the culvert.
The tendered rates shall, include full compensation for supplying, testing, loading,
transporting and off-loading the culverts, for providing and placing fine-grained material
where required for the installation of culverts, and installing, laying and jointing the culverts
as specified, including cutting them on the site, and waste.
Payment shall be made separately for floor slabs of cast in- situ concrete. Payment shall
distinguish between the different sizes and types of culverts and between culverts installed
with or without prefabricated floor slabs.
Item 32.05 Metal and other culverts

(Metal Culverts, PVC Drain Pipes, Corrugated polyethylene drainage tubing drain pipe and
Corrugated polyethylene drain pipe)
(a) Size, wall thickness and type indicated ........................................................metre (m)
(b) Bevelled ends (size and type indicated)...................................................Number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of culvert laid as shown on the drawings or
ordered by the engineer.
In all cases, the culvert length shall be measured along the pipe centre line. In the case of a
metal pipe arch, the culvert length shall be measured along the bottom of the pipe arch. In
both cases the length of bevelled and/or skew ends shall be included.

The tendered rates shall include full compensation for providing, testing, loading,
transporting and off-loading the culverts/drain pipes, for providing and placing fine-grained
material where required for the installation, and for installing, laying and jointing the culverts
as specified. Upon payment, a differentiation shall be made between the various types and
sizes of culverts/drain pipes and also between culverts with differing wall thicknesses.
Payment shall be made separately for the cutting of bevelled and/or skew ends, and the
tendered rate shall include full compensation for all work in connection with the cutting of
ends.
Item 32.06 Extra over items 32.03, 32.04 and 32.05 for constructing inclined culverts ..
............................................................................................................... metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of culvert installed at a grade steeper than 1:4 as
specified in clause 3215.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for additional or more difficult work of any
nature in regard to laying, excavating and backfilling as may be required for installing the
culverts at a grade steeper than 1:4.
Item 32.07 Cast in- situ concrete and formwork

(a) In Class A bedding, screeds and the encasing for pipes, including formwork (class of
concrete indicated)............................................................................................ cubic metre (m³)
(b) In invert slabs to portals or rectangular (box /slab) culverts, including formwork,
joints and Class U2 surface finish (class of concrete indicated) ..................... cubic metre (m³)
(c) In inlet and outlet structures, skewed ends, catchpits, manholes, thrust and anchor
blocks, excluding formwork but including Class U2 surface finish (class of concrete
indicated) ......................................................................................................... cubic metre (m³)
(d) Formwork of concrete under Item 32.07 (c) above (type of finish indicated) ..............
.......................................................................................................... square metre (m²)
(e) In concrete linings for the inverts of metal culverts under Item 32.05, including
formwork and class U2 surface finish (class of concrete indicated) ............... cubic metre (m³)
Measurement of formwork and concrete cast in-situ shall be as specified in Division 8200
and 8400 of these Specifications, except that formwork for pipe beddings and invert slabs
shall not be measured for payment.
Payment for formwork and concrete cast in-situ shall be made as provided for in Division
8200 and 8400 of these Specifications, except that payment for the formwork for concreting
in subitems 32.07 (a),(b) and (e) shall not be payable separately, and the Contractor's rates for
concrete shall include full compensation therefor.
No separate payment shall be made for the construction of joints in culvert floor slabs or at
inlet and outlet structures, and the tendered rates for concrete shall include full compensation
for forming the joints complete in accordance with the details shown on the drawings.
Item 32.08 Concrete backfill for culverts (class indicated)......................cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre. The quantity shall be calculated from the
dimensions of the excavation as specified or as may be authorized by the engineer, minus the
volume taken up by the culverts, irrespective of whether the actual excavation to be
backfilled exceeds the specified or authorized dimensions.

Payment shall be made as for concrete in item 32.07(a) above.
Item 32.09 Prefabricated concrete inlets and outlets to culverts

Prefabricated concrete inlets and outlets for concrete pipe culverts shall be measured per inlet
or outlet, complete in position.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring, providing, loading,
transporting, off-loading and installing the inlets or outlets as specified.
Item 32.10 Steel reinforcement:

(a) Mild steel .............................................................................................................ton (t)
(b) High tensile steel..................................................................................................ton (t)
(c) Mild steel mesh..................................................................................... .Kilogram (kg)
(d) High tensile steel mesh .......................................................................... Kilogram (kg)
Measurement and payment for steel reinforcement shall be made as specified in Division
8300 of these Specifications.
Item 32.11 Dowels for joining old and new concrete .................................... kilogram (kg)
The unit of measurement shall be the kilogram of steel dowels installed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for supplying all materials, all cutting,
drilling and grouting, and any other operation or thing necessary for the proper execution of
the work.
Item 32.12 Removing existing concrete

(a) Plain concrete......................................................................................cubic metre (m³)
(b) Reinforced concrete ............................................................................cubic metre (m³)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of existing concrete removed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all demolition and for the loading,
transporting and disposal of the products of demolition, including a free haul of 1.0 km.
Payment shall distinguish between plain and reinforced concrete. For the purposes of this
item, reinforced concrete shall be defined as concrete containing at least 0.2% of steel
reinforcement measured by volume. The tendered rates shall also include full compensation
for cutting straight grooves of the specified depth at joint positions where shown on the
drawings.
Item 32.13 Removing and relaying existing pipes (size and type of bedding indicated) ..
............................................................................................................... metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of existing pipe removed and re-laid.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for lifting, loading, transporting for a free-
haul distance of 5.0 km. off-loading, and laying pipes according to the ............. specifications.
Payment for any excavation and backfilling required for the removal and relaying of existing
pipes shall be made separately under items 32.01 and 32.02.

Where existing pipes are loaded, transported and used in temporary diversions, they shall not
be measured for payment under this item, but payment therefor shall be made in terms of
Division 1500.
Item 32.14 Removing and stacking existing prefabricated culverts (type and size
indicated) ............................................................................................. metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of existing prefabricated culverts removed and
stacked.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for lifting, loading, transporting to stack,
off-loading, and stacking the prefabricated culverts.
Payment for any excavation and backfilling required for removing and stacking the existing
prefabricated culverts shall be made separately under items 32.01 and 32.02. The free-haul
distance shall be 5.0 km.
Item 32.15 Treating surfaces with epoxy resin for joining new to old concrete (type of
epoxy resin specified)................................................................................ litre (l)
The unit of measurement shall be the litre of epoxy-resin compound used at the specified rate
of application.
Item 32.16 Protective mastic asphalt coating for corrugated metal culvert units (state
whether to be applied by brush or by spray gun).............. square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of protective coating applied as specified
and as directed by the engineer. When both inside and outside surfaces are treated, both
surfaces shall be measured.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring and furnishing the mastic
asphalt, applying the material, and for all other additional work and incidentals required for
providing the protective coating as specified.
Item 32.17 Manholes, catchpits, pre-cast inlet and outlet structures complete
(a) Manholes (type indicated) ...................................................................... Number (No.)
(b) Catchpits (type indicated) ...................................................................... Number (No.)
(c) Pre-cast inlet and outlet structures (type indicated) ............................... Number (No.)
(d) Extra over or less than subitem 32.17(a) for variations in the depths of manholes
from the standard depth designated for tendering purposes (standard depth and type of
manhole indicated) ............................................................................................... .Number (No)
(e) Extra over or less than subitem 32.17(b) for variations in the depths of catchpits
from the standard depth designated for tendering purposes (standard depth and type of catch-
pit indicated) ................................................................................................................ metre (m)
The unit of measurement, in the case of subitems (a), (b) and (c) above, shall be the complete
unit as shown on the drawings, including all concrete, brickwork, covers, frames, grids and
other accessories.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing and installing,
and laying where applicable, the complete units except for excavation and backfilling, which
shall be measured separately. The tendered rate shall also include full compensation for
connecting up to and building any conduits into the walls of the various structures.

The unit of measurement in the case of subitems (d) and (e) above shall be the metre of
increased or decreased depth of the manhole or catchpit measured in relation to the standard
depth furnished for tendering purposes.
The tendered rates per metre shall be an adjustment to the compensation for the standard
item, payable either as an increased compensation to the contractor in the case of an
increased depth, or as a decrease in compensation in the case of a decreased depth in relation
to the standard depth.
Concrete and formwork shall be measured and paid for under subitems 32.07(c) and (d)
respectively, excavation under item 32.01, and backfilling under item 32.02.
Item 32.18 Accessories

(a) Manhole covers including frames (description) .......................................number (No)
(b) Inlet grids including frames (description).................................................number (No)
(c) Step irons (description) .............................................................................number (No)
(d) Etc for other accessories ...........................................................................number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of each type of accessory delivered and
installed.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing and installing the
accessories.
Item 32.19 Anchors for pipes (description) .................................................... number (No)

The unit of measurement shall be the complete anchor installed, including straps, bolts, etc.
but excluding any concrete work, which shall be measured under subitem 32.07(c) and (d).
Item 32.20 Service ducts

(a) Ordinary pipes (type and diameter indicated)................................................metre (m)
(b) Split pipes (type and diameter indicated) ......................................................metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be a metre of service duct laid.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for procuring, providing and laying the
pipes, including end stoppers, draw wires and complete installation, but shall exclude
excavation, backfilling, and encasing with concrete, which shall be measured for payment
under the appropriate items of payment of this Division.
Item 32.21 Duct marker blocks (type indicated) ..........................................Number (No.)

The unit of measurement shall be the number of marker blocks installed and the tendered
price shall include full compensation for the manufacture, delivery and installation of the
marker blocks, complete as shown on the drawings.
Item 32.22 Chambers for ducts.......................................................................Number (No.)

The unit of measurement shall be the number of chambers.
All tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing all materials and
for constructing the chambers complete.

Item 32.23 Hand excavation to determine the positions of existing services ....................
....................................................................................................cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be a cubic metre of material excavated within the lengths and
widths authorized by the engineer and the depth required to expose the service. Excavation in
excess of the authorized dimensions shall not be measured for payment.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all excavation, backfilling, compacting
to 90% of modified AASHTO density, disposing of any surplus excavated material, keeping
the excavations safe, dealing with any surface or subsurface water, taking special care to
ensure that services are not damaged in any way and any other operation necessary for
completing the work. The tendered rate shall also include the transporting of surplus
excavated material for a free-haul distance of 1.0 km. Any damage to a service caused by the
contractor shall be repaired at his own cost, to the satisfaction of the owner of the service and
the engineer.
No distinction will be made between hard and soft material, neither will distinction be made
between the various types of services to be exposed or the depths to which excavations are
taken.
Item 32.24 Reinstating trenches crossing roads:

(a) Selected layers.................................................................................. square metre (m2)
(b) Subbase............................................................................................. square metre (m2)
(c) Base (including prime coat) ............................................................. square metre (m2)
(d) Bituminous surfacing(including tack coat) ...................................... square metre (m2)
(e) Kerbing.......................................................................................................... metre (m)
The unit of measurement for subitems (a) to (d) shall be the square metre of the layer
reinstated where instructed by the engineer.
The unit of measurement for subitem (e) shall be the metre of kerbing replaced due to trench
excavations where instructed by the engineer.
Any reinstatement required beyond the agreed or instructed dimensions owing to damage
caused by the contractor will not be measured for payment.
The appropriate Divisions of the specifications shall also be applicable to the reinstatement
of the trenches.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing, placing,
compacting and finishing all materials, providing all labour and constructional plant, cutting
and preparing the edges of the existing surfacing, and protecting and maintaining the
completed reinstatement as specified.
Item 32.25 Prefabricated reinforced concrete skew end units for concrete culverts
constructed at a skew angle type and dimensions of unit and class of
bedding indicated) ..........................................................................number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of each type and size of prefabricated
reinforced-concrete skew end unit provided and installed, irrespective of the angle of skew.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for providing, testing, loading and
unloading the units, constructing the prescribed class of bedding, and for installing, laying

and joining the units, complete as specified and in accordance with the details shown on the
drawings.

DIVISION 3300: CURBING, CHANNELLING, OPEN CHUTES,

DOWNPIPES, AND CONCRETE LINING OF OPEN DRAINS
3301 SCOPE
This Division covers the construction of concrete curbing and channeling, curb inlets, chutes
and downpipes, and concrete linings for open drains, at the locations and to the details as
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
3302 CURBING AND CHANNELLING

Curbing may include barrier curbs, mountable or semi-mountable types. All these elements
may be pre-cast units or constructed in a continuous operation using slip forms.
Channelling may be formed in- situ, using fixed forms or slip forms construction. The
concrete lining of open channels shall be cast in- situ or pre-cast concrete.
(a) Dimensions
Curbing and channelling shall be provided and constructed in accordance with the details,
dimensions, lines and levels shown in the Contract.
(b) Material Requirements for Curbing and Channelling
(i) General
Curbs shall be of natural stone, concrete or asphalt, as described in the Contract. Natural
stone and pre-cast concrete curbs shall have a maximum length of 1 metre and a minimum
length of 400mm.
The ends of all natural stone and pre-cast concrete curbs shall be at right angles to the
longitudinal axis of the element.
(ii) Natural Stone

Natural stone shall be obtained from cutting or blasting limestone, sandstone, or granite from
an approved source. Unless other wise directed one type of stone shall be used for a
particular section. Stone with visible drill marks or holes on the exposed faces shall not be
used.
Natural stone shall be sawn or dressed to the cross-sectional profiles shown in the Contract.
(iii) Concrete for Curbing and channelling

Concrete for curbing and Channelling shall be class 30/20 concrete complying with the
requirements of Division 8400 of these Specifications.
Pre-cast curbing and Channelling shall comply with the requirements of BS 340, or class
20/20 when not specified. In- situ Channelling shall be of the class of concrete indicated.
Concrete for Curbing and channelling Foundations and Backing (Excluding Asphalt Curbs)
Concrete for foundations and backing shall be Grade 20 concrete complying with the
requirements of Division 8400, except where foundations and backing are cast monolithically

with the curbing and channelling, in which case it shall be class 30/20. Curing of the
completed foundation shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of Clause
8410.
Concrete shall not be placed during rain. Surface water shall not be allowed to come into
contact with the freshly compacted concrete.
(iv) Mortar for Bedding of Curbing and channelling

Mortar for bedding shall be a semi-dry mixture of four parts by volume of fine aggregate
complying with the requirements of clause 8402(c) to one part by volume of cement
complying with the requirements of clause 8402(a).
(v) Water for Curbing and channelling

Mixing water for concrete and mortar shall be water quality Type A as stipulated in clause
8402(d).
(vi) Asphalt Curbing

The constituents of the asphalt mix shall be 60-70 penetration grade bitumen complying with
the requirements of clause 63A02(a), and aggregates complying with the requirements of
clause 63A02(c) .The percentage of binder by mass of the total mixture shall be between 6
and 9 percent. The nominal size of aggregate shall not exceed 20mm.
The mix shall be designed by the Contractor within the above limitations. The Contractor
shall carry out trial mixes of the asphaltic composition using the same plant as will be used in
the works to the satisfaction of the Engineer. When a proposed mix has been approved, no
variations shall be made in the mix proportions or in the type, size, grading or source of any
of the constituents without the agreement of the Engineer, who may require further tests to be
made.
(c) Construction Requirements for Curbing and channelling
(i) General
Natural stone curbs shall be laid on separately constructed foundations.
Concrete Curbing and channelling shall be of either pre-cast elements laid on separately
constructed foundation, or constructed in-situ between fixed or sliding side forms.
Asphalt curbs shall be constructed in-situ.
(ii) Equipment
Equipment for constructing in-situ concrete Curbing and channelling shall be purpose made
slip forming or extruding equipment approved by the Engineer.
Equipment for constructing asphalt curbs between sliding forms shall be purpose made
extruding equipment approved by the Engineer.
(iii) Excavation for Foundations

Foundations for natural stone, pre-cast and in-situ concrete Curbing and channelling shall be
excavated to the required width and depth indicated in the Contract, and all unsuitable
material shall be removed and replaced with a layer of approved bedding material at least 75
mm thick.

The bedding shall be compacted and accurately shaped to the required grade. No concrete
shall be placed on uncompacted or disturbed material.
The sides and bottoms of excavations shall be neatly trimmed to the lines and levels
described in the Contract and any unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with
approved granular material compacted to a density of not less than 95% of the maximum dry
density when determined in accordance with AASHTO T-180.
The bottom of excavations shall be compacted to a density of not less than 95% of the
maximum dry density when determined in accordance with AASHTO T-180.
(iv) Laying Natural Stone or Pre-cast Concrete Curbing and channelling

Mortar complying with the requirements of clause 8904(c) shall be evenly spread on the
concrete foundations to the required depth.
Curbing and channelling shall be placed vertically to line and level on the mortar bed relative
to a guide line fixed along the top front edge of the curb and firmly tamped into position.
Each curb laid shall be firmly abutted against the end of the previously laid curb.
Curbs laid on horizontal curves shall be either purpose made radius curbs or 400mm long
straight curbs.
Prior to the placing of the backing concrete, the laid curbs shall be approved by the Engineer.
Backing concrete shall be placed against the back of the laid Curbing and channelling shall
be lightly compacted by hand to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The backing concrete shall
be cured with hessian and polythene sheeting for a minimum period of four days.
Natural stone or pre-cast concrete Curbing and channelling shall not be damaged during
transport or laying. Broken or spalled elements shall not be used and shall be removed and
replaced by undamaged elements.
The Curbs and channels shall be constructed true to line and elevation and shall have a neat
appearance. Where transverse cracks occur, the contractor shall replace the entire section
between the contraction joints at his own cost.
Cast In-situ Concrete Curbing and channelling (Fixed Forms)
Cast in-situ concrete curbs and channels may be cast monolithically with the foundation
and/or backing.
Formwork shall consist of materials as specified in division 8200.
Concrete for cast in-situ concrete curbs and channels shall be mixed, transported, placed and
compacted in accordance with the requirements of Division 8400.
Forms shall be placed to line and level to a guideline accurately fixed along the top front
edge of the curb.
Curbs constructed on horizontal curves shall be constructed using either purpose made radius
forms or straight forms not exceeding 400mm in length.
Forms shall be removed from any concrete surfaces that will be exposed, within a period of
24 hours of the concrete having been placed. Minor defects shall be repaired with 2:1 sand:
cement mortar. Plastering shall not be permitted on exposed faces and all rejected portions
shall be removed and replaced at the contractor's expense. When completed, the sections
shall be cured in accordance with the requirements specified in clause 8410.

The completed kerbs and channels shall be true to line and elevation and shall have an even
and neat appearance.
Joints shall be constructed at intervals not exceeding 3 metres and at right angles to the
longitudinal axis of the completed curb either by wet forming in the plastic concrete or by
sawing in the hardened concrete in a manner approved by the Engineer.
Curing of the completed curb shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of
CLAUSE 8410.
Concrete Curbs and Channels shall not be placed during rain. Surface water shall not be
allowed to come into contact with the freshly compacted concrete.
Cast In-situ Concrete Curbs and Channels (Sliding Forms)
Curbs and Channels may be constructed in-situ between sliding forms either on previously
constructed foundations or monolithically with the foundation, and/or backing.
Slip form or extruding machines used for constructing in-situ curbs shall be electronically
guided for line and level along a guide line accurately fixed relative to the finished line and
level of the Curbs and Channels.
The guide line shall be off-set at a constant height above, and parallel to, the top edge of the
Curbs and Channels to an accuracy that will ensure compliance with the tolerances given in
this Division. The guideline shall be supported from stakes not more than 5 metres apart by
connectors capable of fine adjustment. The spacing of stakes on horizontal curves shall be
appropriate to the radius of the curve.
The guide wires shall be supported from stakes not more than 8 metres apart by connectors
capable of fine horizontal and vertical adjustment. The guide wires shall be tensioned on the
stakes so that a 500 gram weight shall produce a deflection of not more than 20mm when
suspended at the mid point between any pair of stakes. The ends of the guide wire shall be
anchored to fixing points which shall not be closer to the edge of the slab than the row of
stakes and in no circumstances shall a guide wire be anchored to a stake.
The stakes shall be positioned and the connectors maintained at their correct height and
alignment from 12:00 hours on the day before concreting takes place until 36 hours after the
concrete has been finished. The guide wire shall be erected and tensioned on the connectors
at any section for at least two hours before concreting that section.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for his approval of line and level; the stakes,
connectors and guide wires which are ready for use alongside the length of slab to be next
constructed, by 09:00 hours on the working day prior to the day on which the slab is to be
constructed. Any deficiencies, which are notified by the Engineer, shall be rectified by the
Contractor who shall then reapply for the approval of the affected stakes. Work shall not
proceed until the Engineer has given his approval. If any deficiencies are rectified by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer before 18:00 hours, or such later time agreed by the
Engineer, the Contractor may proceed with construction the next day. Otherwise the
Contractor shall resubmit any rectified stakes for approval on the next day.
Concrete for in-situ concrete Curbs and Channels constructed between sliding forms shall be
mixed and transported in accordance with the requirements of Division 8400.
Curbs and Channels constructed between sliding forms shall have a Class F2 formed surface
finish in accordance with the requirements of CLAUSE 8205.
Concrete shall be provided to the slip form or extruding machine at such frequency as will
enable the machine to move forward continuously at the planned rate of progress.

Joints shall be constructed at intervals not exceeding 3 metres and at right angles to the
longitudinal axis of the completed curb either by wet forming in the plastic concrete or by
sawing in the hardened concrete in a manner approved by the Engineer.
Curing of the completed Curbs and Channels shall be carried out in accordance with the
requirements of CLAUSE 8410.
Concrete Curbs and Channels shall not be placed during rain. Surface water shall not be
allowed to come into contact with the freshly compacted concrete.
(v) Cast In-situ Asphalt Curbs

The materials shall be weighed and measured into a mechanical mixer and thoroughly mixed
so that all particles of the aggregate are completely and uniformly coated. The temperature
during mixing shall be within the range of 1650C to 1850C.
The curbs shall be laid on a tack coat complying with the requirements of Division 6200 as
soon as practicable after the completion of the surface on which they one to be laid. The
asphalt curb shall firmly adhere to the underlying surface.
Asphalt curbs shall not be placed during rain.
(d) Construction sequence
(i) Where Curbs and Channels are constructed before the base
In this case slip-form units or cast in-situ units may be constructed. During working and
constructing the base, precautionary measures shall be taken to prevent the concrete work
from being damaged or shifted.
(ii) Where Curbs and Channels are constructed after the base
The base shall be constructed wider than the specified width, after which a neat trench shall
be dug for the Curbing or channelling. Any over-excavation shall be filled with concrete cast
simultaneously with the Curbing and Channelling.
(iii) Where Curbs and Channels are constructed after the asphalt base and/or asphalt
surfacing
The asphalt base and/or asphalt surfacing shall be constructed wider than the specified width
and shall then be cut back accurately with a mechanical saw to a marked line to give a neat
joint line between the Curbs and Channels and the asphalt layer. The base shall then be
removed to the required depth.
Any concrete spilt onto the asphalt surface shall be removed. Where so required by the
engineer, the contractor shall, without any additional compensation, paint emulsion over the
stained surface.

3303 OPEN CONCRETE CHUTES AND DOWNPIPES, AND CONCRETE LININGS

FOR OPEN DRAINS
(a) Dimensions
Open concrete chutes, down pipes, and concrete linings for open drains shall be constructed
to the lines, gradients and cross sections shown in the Contract or as instructed by the
Engineer.
(b) Material Requirements for Open Chutes, Downpipes, and Concrete linings for open
drains
(i) Concrete
Concrete used for the construction of Open concrete chutes, down pipes, and concrete linings
for open drains shall be Class 20/40 in accordance with the requirements of Division 8400.
(ii) Reinforcement
Reinforcement used for the construction of Open concrete chutes, down pipes, and concrete
linings for open drains shall be steel reinforcement complying with the requirements of
Division 8300.
(iii) Masonry and Stone Pitching

Masonry and stone pitching used for the construction of open chutes, down pipes, and linings
for open drains shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 8600.
(c) Construction Requirements for Open Chutes, down pipes, and linings for open
drains
(i) Excavation, and preparation of bedding

The Contractor shall take the utmost care to avoid excavation below the required levels. Any
excavation carried out below the required level due to over excavation or removal of
unsuitable material or the presence of voids, shall be reinstated with suitable material
approved by the Engineer and placed and compacted.
(ii) Concrete linings

The excavation work for open drains shall be executed and paid for in accordance with the
provisions of section 4200.
The excavations shall then be neatly trimmed to the lines and levels specified so as to permit
the accurate construction of the concrete linings. All loose material shall be compacted to a
density of not less than 93% of modified AASHTO density.
Where the in-situ material is unsuitable, the Engineer may order that it be removed to the
required depth and replaced with selected material compacted to a density of 93% of
modified AASHTO density.
Where excavations for open drains are in rock, overbreak shall be backfilled as ordered,
either with mass concrete or with selected natural gravel or soil compacted to a modified
AASHTO density of at least 93%.

(iii) Chutes
Excavations for chutes shall be neatly trimmed. All loose material shall be thoroughly
compacted, and where overbreak occurs in hard material, the excavations shall be backfilled
with mass concrete. If required by the engineer, the excavations shall be taken deeper to
accommodate a concrete screed cast to act as a working platform for the construction of the
chutes.
Prefabricated chutes and downpipes on side slopes of fills and cuts
Prefabricated chutes and down pipes shall be manufactured in accordance with the
dimensions shown on the drawings, and the units shall fit neatly into each other as shown.
The bottom unit shall rest against the outlet structure or footing as shown on the drawings.
The units shall be laid true to line and grade from the bottom up so that each unit fits neatly
into the previous one.
A transition section shall be constructed at the inlet to lead the water into the chute or
downpipe as shown on the drawings.
(iv) Cast in situ chutes on cut slopes

Cast in situ concrete chutes on cut slopes, together with the inlet and outlet structures, shall
be constructed in accordance with the drawings. The class of concrete shall be as indicated
on the drawings.
Where required by the engineer, a concrete screed shall first be cast on excavations that
cannot be trimmed accurately. The screed shall be accurately finished to the level of the
underside of the chute floor slab and allowed to set before the floor slab is cast. Where the
material being excavated cannot be accurately trimmed or where the chute sides have to
extend above the surface of cut slopes, the outer faces of the sides shall be cast against
formwork.
(v) Concrete-lined open drains

The exposed surfaces of the concrete linings of open drains shall be given a class U2 surface
finish. Concrete shall be cured in accordance with the requirements of clause 8410.
Sealed joints in concrete shall be in accordance with the details indicated on the drawings
and the provisions of section 8408. Cold joints shall be painted with a coat of approved
bituminous emulsion containing 60% of pure bitumen by mass, or with an approved anti-
adhesive before any adjoining slabs are cast.
Expansion joints shall be made in accordance with the drawings.
Where required, the surfaces on which concrete lining is to be cast shall, after having been
trimmed, be covered with polyethylene sheeting 0.15 mm thick and all joints in the sheeting
shall be overlapped by at least 150 mm.
3304 INLET AND OUTLET STRUCTURES AND TRANSITION SECTIONS

Transition sections on curbing, curbing-channelling combinations and concrete-lined
channels shall be constructed to the same standards and using the same methods described
for the uniform sections, but with the required modifications. Sections may be either pre-cast
or cast in- situ units.

Inlet and outlet structures may be either pre-cast or partially pre-cast concrete units or cast in
situ concrete.
3305 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES AND SURFACE FINISH
(a) Concrete curbing and channelling

Concrete curbing and channelling shall be constructed to within the following dimensional
and alignment tolerances:
(i) Horizontal alignment

Maximum deviation of edges, centre line, or vertical surfaces from specified positions, 25
mm.
(ii) Vertical alignment and level

The inside edge of channelling shall nowhere be above the finished road level nor more than
10 mm below the finished road surface. The invert level of channels and drains and the top
of curbing shall nowhere deviate more than 10 mm from the required level and nowhere shall
channels or drains have any adverse grade.
(iii) Trueness of exposed surfaces

When tested with a 3 m straight edge no surface irregularities shall exceed 6 mm.
(iv) Cross-sectional dimensions

All cross-sectional dimensions shall be within 6 mm of the specified dimensions except that
the underside of channelling may extend up to 25 mm below the level at which it would have
the required thickness.
(b) Concrete-lined channels

Concrete-lined channels shall be constructed to within the following tolerances:
(i) Horizontal alignment

The maximum deviation from the true position of the edges or centre line shall be 25 mm.
(ii) Vertical alignment

The invert level of concrete-lined open channels shall nowhere deviate more than 25 mm
from the required level and nowhere shall the channel inverts have an adverse grade.
(iii) Trueness of exposed surfaces

When tested with a 3 m straight edge no exposed surface shall show surface irregularities or
more than 10 mm.
(iv) Cross-sectional dimensions

All cross-sectional dimensions shall be within 10 mm of the specified dimensions and the
average thickness of any invert or side slab shall not be less than the specified thickness
when considering any complete slab or any slab section having a surface area of 10 sq m or

more and disregarding any thickness of more than 10 mm in excess of the specified thick-
ness.
(c) Surface finish

All exposed concrete surface shall be Class U2 surface finish for unformed work and Class
F2 surface finish for formed surfaces.

Item 33.01 Curbing
(a) Concrete Curbing (class of concrete indicated for in situ concrete) (Descriptions of
type with reference to Drawing)................................................................................. metre (m)
(b) Stone Curbing (type of stone indicated) (Descriptions of type with reference to
Drawing)..................................................................................................................... .metre (m)
Item 33.02 Curbing -Channelling combination

(a) Concrete (class of concrete indicated for in situ concrete) (Descriptions of type with
reference to Drawing).................................................................................................. metre (m)
(b) Stone (type of stone indicated) (Descriptions of type with reference to Drawing).......
....................................................................................................................... metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of concrete or stone curbing or curbing-
channelling combination complete as constructed, measured along the front face of the curb.
The tendered rate for each metre of concrete or stone curbing and /or curbing -channelling
combination shall include full compensation for the necessary excavation, bedding,
backfilling formwork, concrete haunching or stone sawing, finishing, and for procuring,
furnishing and installing all materials as specified.
Item 33.03 Chutes

(a) Concrete (class of concrete indicated for in situ concrete) (Descriptions of type with
reference to Drawing).................................................................................................. metre (m)
(b) Stone (type of stone indicated) (Descriptions of type with reference to Drawing)
....................................................................................................................... metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of completed chute as constructed, including any
overlap, measured along the slope as laid but excluding transition sections and inlet and
outlet structures measured separately.
The tendered rate per metre shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing and
installing the completed chutes as specified and for all excavation and the preparation of
bedding, backfilling, formwork and finishing required.
Item 33.04 Cast in- situ concrete chutes (measured by components)

(a) Concrete (class indicated) ................................................................. cubic metre (m3)
(b) Formwork (surface finish indicated) ................................................ square metre (m2)

Measurement and payment for formwork and concrete shall be as specified in sections 8200
and 8400, except that payment for excavation and gravel or soil backfilling shall be deemed
to be included in the rates tendered for concrete and shall not be measured and paid for
separately.
Item 33.05 Inlet, outlet, transition and similar structures (typical designs)
(a) Concrete (Description of structure, type, etc, with reference to drawing and class of
concrete)..................................................................................................................number (No)
(b) Stone masonry (Description of structure, type, etc, with reference to drawing) ..........
.................................................................................................................Number (No)
The unit of measurement and payment shall be the number of completed units of each type of
structure constructed, and payment shall include full compensation for all formwork,
concrete or stone, excavation, trimming and backfilling, including such accessories as grids,
etc, as may be specified on the typical drawings.
Item 33.06 Inlet, outlet, transition and similar structures (measured by components)
(a) Concrete (class indicated)...................................................................cubic metre (m3)
(b) Stone masonry (class indicated)..........................................................cubic metre (m3)
2
(c) Formwork (surface finish indicated).................................................square metre (m )
(d) Other components .....................................................................................number (No)
The measurement and payment for formwork and concrete and shall be as specified in
sections 8200 and 8400, except that excavation, trimming and backfilling shall not be
measured and paid for separately, the cost of which shall be deemed to be included in the
rates tendered for concrete and stone masonry.
The unit of measurement for other components such as grids shall be the number of each type
of component installed. The tendered rates shall include full compensation for procuring,
furnishing and installing the components, including any painting or protective coating
specified in the project specifications or as shown on the drawings.
Item 33.07 Trimming of excavations for concrete-lined open drains

2
(a) In soft material ..................................................................................square metre (m )
2
(b) In hard material.................................................................................square metre (m )
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of excavation trimmed to receive concrete
lining.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for all labour, plant, materials and other
additional work and incidentals necessary for trimming the excavations for open drains to the
standard of finish required for the construction of concrete linings. All excavation, including
the removal of unsuitable ground and backfilling with suitable material, shall be measured
and paid for under section 4200. Payment shall distinguish between trimming in soft material
and trimming in hard material as defined in clause 4204. No extra payment shall be made in
respect of any soil or gravel backfilling, additional concrete or mass-concrete backfilling
required on account of overbreak or unavoidable unevenness of the excavations in difficult
ground, the cost of which shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates for trimming
in hard material.

Item 33.08 Concrete lining for open drains

(a) Cast in-situ concrete lining (concrete and type of open drain indicated)......................
........................................................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
(b) Class U2 surface finish to cast in situ concrete (type of open drain indicated) ...........
2
......................................................................................................... square metre (m )
Measurement of and payment for concrete shall be as specified in section 8400, but the
tendered rate shall include full compensation for painting open joint surfaces as specified.
The unit of measurement for surface finish shall be the square metre of finished surface.
The tendered rate for surface finish shall include full compensation for all labour, plant,
material and other additional work and incidentals required for trimming the concrete lining
as specified.
Item 33.09 Formwork to cast in- situ concrete lining for open drains (class F2 surface
finish)
2
(a) To sides with formwork on the internal face only............................ square metre (m )
(b) To sides with formwork on both internal and external faces (each face measured) .....
2
.......................................................................................................... square metre (m )
2
(c) To ends of slabs ................................................................................ square metre (m )
Measurement of and payment for formwork shall be as specified in section 8200. Formwork
under item 33.09(a) shall be measured and paid for only when the side slope of the slabs
exceeds 1 in 2 and the slabs cannot be constructed without formwork even when a stiff
concrete mix is used. When the contractor elects to use pre-cast side slabs, payment will be
made for formwork as if cast in- situ concrete had been used.
Item 33.10 Sealed joints in concrete linings of open drains (description of type with
reference to drawing) .......................................................................... metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of completed joint of each size and type.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the supply of all materials and for all
labour, formwork and incidentals necessary for sealing the joint as shown on the drawings or
specified in the project specifications.
Item 33.11 Concrete screed or backfill below chutes (class of concrete indicated) ) .........
....................................................................................................cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of concrete screed or backfill as may be
instructed by the engineer to be placed below chutes.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for furnishing, procuring and placing the
concrete in screed or backfill.
Item 33.12 Steel reinforcement

(a) Mild steel bars ..................................................................................................... ton (t)
(b) High-tensile steel bars ......................................................................................... ton (t)
(c) Welded steel fabric ..................................................................................kilogram (kg)

Measurement and payment shall be in accordance with the provisions of section 8300.
Item 33.13 Polyethylene sheeting (0.15 mm thick) for concrete-lined opendrains............

..................................................................................................square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of area covered with polyethylene
sheeting.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing and installing the
polyethylene sheeting, including wastage and overlap.
Item 33.14 Cutting bituminous surfacing and pavement layers for concrete kerbing,
channelling or concrete-lined drains ................................................. metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of bituminous surfacing and pavement layers cut
where instructed by the engineer, irrespective of the depth of cut. The various layers shall not
be measured separately for payment.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all labour, construction plant and
materials required for cutting the surfacing and pavement layers to the required depth,
removing and disposing of the debris, and protecting and keeping the surfacing clean, all as
specified.
Item 33.15 Pre-cast concrete blocks in outlet structures ............................... number (No)
The unit of measurement is the number of pre-cast concrete blocks provided and installed as
shown on the drawings or directed by the engineer.

DIVISION 3400: PITCHING, STONEWORK, AND EROSION

PROTECTION
3401 SCOPE
This Division covers the furnishing of materials and construction of a protective covering in
stone pitching, or cast in situ concrete pitching on exposed surfaces such as earth slopes,
drains and stream beds, as well as heavier protection in the form of riprap all as shown on the
Drawings or ordered by the Engineer.
3402 MATERIALS
(a) Stone
(i) Stone for pitching shall be sound, tough and durable, with no stone less than 200
mm in minimum dimension, except that smaller pieces or spalls may be used for filling
spaces between the larger stones. Rocks or stone shall be of such a shape as to form a stable
protection structure of the required section. Rounded boulders or cobbles shall not be used
on slopes steeper than 2:1 unless grouted.
All stone intended for use on any particular pitching job shall receive the prior approval of
the Engineer.
(ii) Stone for riprap shall be hard field or quarry stone not susceptible to disintegration
or excessive weathering on exposure to the atmosphere or water. It shall be free from soft
material such as sand, clay, shale or organic material and shall not contain an excessive
amount of elongated stone.
The required size of stone will be determined by the "critical mass" specified. At least 50%
by mass of the material comprising the riprap shall consist of stones having a mass heavier
than the critical mass and not more than 10% by mass of the material shall consist of stone
having a mass of less than 10% of the critical mass or more than 5 times the critical mass.
(b) Cement
Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement complying with the requirements of BS 12 Part 2
or Type II, AASHTO M 85.
(c) Sand
(i) Sand for cement mortar

Sand for the cement mortar shall comply with the requirements of BS 882.
(ii) Sand for bedding

Sand for bedding used for paving blocks shall not contain any deleterious impurities and
shall comply with the following grading requirements:

Sieve size (mm) % Passing through

9.52 100
4.75 95-100
2.36 80 - 100
1.18 50-85
0.600 25 - 60
0.300 30 - 10
0.150 5 - 15
0.075 50 - 10
(iii) Sand for joints

Sand used for being brushed into the joints between pavement blocks shall all pass through a
1.18 mm sieve, and between 10 and 15 per cent of it shall pass through a 0.075 mm sieve.
(d) Pre-cast concrete blocks

Interlocking concrete blocks shall be factory produced pre-cast concrete blocks manufactured
from concrete having a 28- day crushing strength of not less than 20 MPa. The design shall
be subject to the Engineer's approval and must ensure a sound interlock between adjacent
blocks. The thickness shall be as indicated on the Drawings and the blocks shall be
manufactured to a tolerance of 3 mm in any dimension.
Square precast concrete blocks for sidewalks shall, unless otherwise specified, measure 450 x
450 x 50 mm and shall be manufactured from Class 20/20 concrete. The requirements for
appearance shall be as specified in BS 368. The upper surface of the concrete block shall
have an approved skid resistant pattern.
(e) Concrete
Concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of Division 8400.
(f) Wire
Wire for wired pitching shall consist of 4.0 mm diameter galvanized wire complying with the
requirements of BS 183.
(g) Permeable material for filter layer

Permeable material for filter layer shall comply with the requirements specified for
permeable material for subsurface drains in Sub-clause 3107 (ii).
(h) Synthetic fiber filter fabric (Geotextiles)

Synthetic fiber filter fabric shall be of the grade and type specified in the Schedule of
Quantities or project specifications, and shall comply with the requirements of sub-clause
3107 (iii)

3403 STONE PITCHING
(a) Dry stone pitching

The area shall be prepared by excavation, shaping and trimming to accommodate the stone
work and shall be thoroughly compacted by hand-ramming to minimize subsequent
settlement. A trench shall be excavated as directed by the Engineer along the toe of any slope
to be pitched or along the unprotected edge of the pitching in the beds of streams.
(i) Method 1
Commencing at the bottom of the trench, the stone shall be laid and firmly bedded into the
slope and against adjoining stones. The stones shall be laid with their longitudinal axes at
right angles to the slope and invert and with their surfaces in contact so as to break joint. The
stones shall be well rammed into the bank or surface to be protected and the spaces between
the larger stones shall be filled with fragments of approved pitching stone securely rammed
into place.
Placing of rock by dumping shall not be allowed.
(ii) Method 2
The technique and requirements laid down in method 1 shall also apply to method 2, except
in the following aspects:
(i) No small stones or spalls shall be used to fill in spaces between larger stones.
(ii) Simultaneously with the placing of stones, topsoil shall be introduced between individual
stones, and sufficiently rammed so as to provide a firm bonded structure. The topsoil shall be
provided to the full depth of the stone pitching at any point.
(iii) Rooted grass or tufts of grass shall then be planted in the topsoil between stones, and
watered immediately and copiously and thereafter at regular intervals until grass has been
established.
Whichever of the above two methods is adopted, the finished surface of the pitching shall
present an even, tight and neat appearance with no stones varying by more than 25 mm from
the specified surface grades or lines. The thickness of the pitching, measured at right angles
to the surface, shall not be less than 200 mm.
(b) Grouted stone pitching

This work shall be done in accordance with all the requirements specified for dry pitching in
Subclause 3403(a) above, except that the spaces between the stones shall be filled with
cement mortar composed of one part of cement to three parts of sand. Before the mortar is
applied the surfaces of the stones shall be thoroughly cleaned of adhering dirt and clay and
then moistened.
The mortar shall be placed in a continuous operation for any day's run at any one location.
The mortar shall be worked into the pitching so as to ensure that all spaces or voids between
the stones are completely filled with mortar, and to the depth of stone pitching.
After the grout has been placed, the stones shall be thoroughly brushed so that their top
surfaces are exposed. The grouted pitching shall be cured for a period of not less than four
days after grouting with wet sacking or other approved wet cover, and shall not be subjected

to loading until adequate strength has been developed. Where required, weep holes shall be
formed in the pitching.
(c) Wired and grouted stone pitching

The pitching shall be held in position below and above with wire nets of 150 mm square
mesh. The lower net with wire ties fastened to it at 600 mm centers and projecting outwards,
shall fist be placed over the surface to be pitched. The stone shall then be laid on this net in
accordance with the requirements specified for dry stone pitching in Subclause 3403(a)
above. After the stone has been laid the upper wire net shall be drawn tightly over the stone
course and securely fastened down by means of the wire ties passing from the lower net
through the pitching. After tying, these ties shall be turned down into the pitching. The whole
area of wired pitching shall then be grouted and finished off with cement mortar in
accordance with all the requirements specified for grouted stone pitching in Subclause
3403(a) above.
(d) Grouted stone pitching on a concrete bed

The area to be pitched shall be prepared as described in subclause 3403(a) and a concrete bed
in accordance with the provisions of Division 6400 with a thickness of at least 75 mm shall
then be placed. The stone pitching shall be of stones with a minimum dimension of 200 mm,
which shall be laid while the concrete is still fresh. Openings between stones shall be filled
with cement grout as described in subclause 3403(b), and care shall be taken not to spill the
grout onto the finally exposed surfaces of the stones. Grout spilt onto the exposed surfaces of
the stones shall be removed while still soft, and the joints between stones shall be neatly
finished.
Curing shall be done as described for grouted stone pitching in subclause 3403(b).
The completed pitching shall have an even compacted appearance, and nowhere may the
surface deviate by more than 25 mm from the specified lines and grades.
3404 RIPRAP
(a) General
Riprap shall consist of a course or courses of large rock placed on bank slopes and toes, river
and streambeds and other localities where protection of this type may be required. Stone for
riprap shall conform to 3402(a)ii. Two types of riprap are specified, one type where the
rocks are individually packed, designated as packed riprap and another type where the stone
is dumped and then spread by machines, designated as dumped riprap.
The surface of areas to receive riprap shall be neatly trimmed to line and level and all loose
material compacted. The perimeters of riprap shall be protected by the construction of either
rock-filled trenches, walls or other structures as may be required. Perimeter trenches shall
normally be backfilled with rock of the same size and quality as used in the construction of
the riprap it adjoins but any cavities shall be filled with smaller material and the whole
backfill well consolidated.
(b) Filter bed

Filter bed shall consist of a layer or layers of permeable material placed on the prepared
surface to the required thickness and finished to an even surface and thickness after placing

each layer. Compaction of previous material will not be required. Care shall be taken neither
to mix various grades of filter materials nor to disturb material already placed when
constructing subsequent layers or riprap.
When the use of synthetic fibber filter fabric is required the material shall be placed on the
prepared surface, or on the filter backing as may be required. The overlap between adjacent
sheets shall be 150 mm unless otherwise specified. Care shall be taken not to damage the
filter fabric when placing subsequent layers, nor to expose the filter fabric when placing
subsequent layers, nor to expose the filter fabric to the sun for periods of more than a day
before covering up.
(c) Packed riprap

Packed riprap shall be constructed from rocks individually placed to break joints and firmly
bedded on the prepared surface. The spaces between larger stones shall be filled with spalls
and smaller stones securely rammed into place. On inclined surfaces the rock shall be laid in
long horizontal lengths starting from the bottom and not in strips up the slope. The
completed riprap shall present an even, tight surface. Local surface irregularities of the riprap
shall not exceed 150 mm.
(d) Dumped riprap

Dumped riprap shall be constructed by dumping the stone on the prepared surfaces,
spreading it by means of bulldozers, or other suitable earthmoving equipment and trimming
to the required lines and levels. The material shall be placed in a manner that will prevent
segregation of the small and larger stone and the final layer shall be tight with a minimum of
voids.
The gradation requirements for riprap are shown in Table 3404/1:

Table 3404/1 Gradation Requirements for Riprap
Mean Critical Percent of Approximate

Class Diameter Mass Rock By Mass Cubic
D50 Kg. Mass Kg. Dimension
Mm
20 10 to 15 150 to 200
1 30 5 to 10 125 to 150
125 5 40 0.5 to 5 50 to 125
10 0 to 0.5 0 to 50
20 25 to 50 200 to 250
2 30 10 to 25 150 to 200
175 10 40 1 to 10 75 to 150
10 0 to 1 0 to 75
20 100 to 150 350 to 400
3 30 50 to 100 250 to 350
300 50 40 5 to 50 125 to 250
10 0 to 5 0 to 125
20 250 to 350 450 to 500
30 100 to 250 350 to 450
4 400 100 40 10 to 100 150 to 350
10 0 to 10 0 to 150
20 700 to 1000 650 to 700
30 350 to 700 500 to 650
5 500 350 40 25 to 350 200 to 500
10 0 to 25 0 to 200
20 850 to 1600 700 to 850
30 500 to 850 550 to 700
6 600 500 40 50 to 500 250 to 550
10 0 to 50 0 to 250
3405 DRY STONE MASONRY WALLS
(a) General
Stone masonry walls may be plain with dry joints or constructed with stones set in cement
mortar as indicated on the Drawings, specified or ordered.
The minimum mass of stone shall be 10 kg. The minimum dimension of stone shall be 75
mm.
(b) Dry stone masonry walls

A foundation trench shall be excavated down to rock, or to material of adequate bearing
capacity at a minimum depth of 300 mm below ground level. Large selected stones shall be
laid with the largest dimension in the horizontal plane. Stones shall be individually placed to
break joints and to provide a minimum of voids, and shall be firmly bedded against adjoining
stones. The spaces between the larger stones shall be filled with spalls securely rammed into
place. The larger stones shall not bear on the spalls used to fill the voids. The top and ends

of the wall shall be neatly finished with selected coping stones laid with their largest
dimension in the horizontal plane.
The finished surface of the wall shall present an even, tight and neat appearance with no
stones varying by more than 50mm from the specified surface grade or line.
All stones shall be carefully set with a bond stone provided at the rate of not less than one to
every square meter of exposed face. Bond stones shall measure not less than 150mm by
150mm on the exposed face and not less than 450mm in length or the full thickness of the
wall if the latter is less than 450 mm.
(c) Cement mortared stone masonry walls

The walling shall be constructed as specified in (b) above, with the exception that the stones
shall be wetted and set in a 6:1 sand: cement mortar. Exposed stones on the wall faces shall
be cleaned of mortar by washing or wire brushing. The mortar shall be flush pointed to the
approval of the Engineer.
Weep holes shall be provided as ordered and shall be cleaned of mortar and any other
clogging material that may have entered during construction.
The walling shall be protected from the elements and kept moist for a minimum period of
four days after completion.
3406 CONCRETE BLOCK PITCHING
(a) General
The underlying layers for surfaces to be pitched shall be constructed as specified or as
indicated on the drawings. Where no specified requirements have been set in respect of the
underlying layers, the top layer shall be mechanically compacted to at least 90% of modified
AASHTO density down to at least 150 mm from the top. During this process the top layer
shall be trimmed to the required grades and levels.
Where specified or required by the engineer the prepared surface shall be treated with
approved environmentally friendly herbicide and ant poison before the layer of sand for
bedding is placed.
Where required a layer of sand for bedding shall be placed on top of the prepared surface,
and, when still loose, accurately floated to an uncompacted thickness of 30 mm (plus or
minus 5 mm) so as to afford the correct level to the pavement after compaction. Sand for
bedding shall be placed immediately before the paving blocks are laid and shall not be
compacted before the blocks have been laid.
The pattern for laying the paving blocks shall be that as shown on the drawings or approved
or prescribed earlier on by the engineer. Unbroken blocks shall first be laid and filler pieces
afterwards. Filler pieces shall be neatly sawn or hewn to fit exactly into the space to be
filled.
Spaces of less than 25% of a full-sized block may be filled with 25 MPa concrete. The joints
between blocks shall be sized between 2 and 6 mm, and the top faces of blocks shall be flush.
After the paving blocks have been laid, and where required, the pavement shall be compacted
by vibrating-plate compactor. After compaction of the pavement as described above, joint
sand shall be spread and brushed into the joints until the joints have been properly filled. Any

surplus sand shall then be broomed off and where required the pavement shall then be
subjected to two further passes by the plate vibrator.
(b) Interlocking type concrete blocks

On surfaces paved for pedestrian or cycle traffics a 50 mm layer of sand shall first be spread
and leveled on the surfaces to be paved. When required the prepared surfaces shall be treated
with approved vegetation destroyer and/or ant poison in accordance with the Engineer's
instructions. The concrete blocks shall then be laid up against each other with each block
interlocking with the previously laid blocks.
At edges special edge blocks shall be placed or the edges shall be finished by means of
concrete edge beams to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. Concrete shall be Class
20/20 concrete. Earth cuts may be used as forms for the vertical surfaces of edge beams if
such cuts are suitable. Where formed vertical faces are used they shall be Class F2 finish.
The upper surface shall be Class U2 surface finish.
The finished surface of the pitching shall present an even and neat appearance with no
concrete blocks projecting above the surface. The pitching shall not vary by more than 15
mm from the specified lines and grades.
(c) Pre-cast concrete blocks for sidewalk pavements

The areas shall be prepared as specified for interlocking type concrete blocks including a 50
mm sand bed. Hereafter the concrete blocks shall be placed on the prepared areas. Where
required the joints shall be grouted with 3:1 sand: cement mortar. The finished surface shall
not vary by more than 10 mm from the specified surface lines and grades and shall be flush
with any kerbing at the edges.
3407 CAST IN SITU CONCRETE PITCHING

The areas where cast in- situ concrete pitching is to be constructed shall be compacted,
trimmed and prepared as described in subclause 3406 for concrete block pitching. The areas
shall also be treated with vegetation destroyer and ant poison if required.
Prior to the placing of concrete the surface shall be watered and kept damp until concrete is
placed. The type of concrete used shall, unless otherwise specified, be Class 25/20 and shall
be accurately laid in alternate panels to the lines and levels indicated. Accurate screeds shall
be set to achieve the required line and slope. The concrete shall be thoroughly compacted
and finished to a Class U2 surface finish.
Where indicated the concrete pitching shall be contained by the construction of concrete edge
beams constructed as described in Clause 3406(b) for interlocking type concrete blocks.
The concrete pitching shall be cured for at least seven days and no traffic shall be allowed to
move across the pitching before the specified 28-day strength has been reached.
The final surface may nowhere deviate by more than 25 mm from the specified levels and
planes, and no irregularities exceeding 10 mm may occur during testing with a 3 m straight-
edge.


Item 34.01 Stone Pitching
(a) Plain pitching
i) Method 1 ................................................................................ square meter (m 2)
ii) Method 2 ................................................................................ square meter (m 2)
(b) Grouted pitching.............................................................................. square meter (m 2)
(c) Wired and grouted pitching ............................................................. square meter (m 2)
The unit of measurement for pitching shall be the square meter of each type of pitching in
place.
The tendered rate for each type of stone pitching shall include full compensation for
furnishing all materials, excavations excluding trench and bulk excavations, compaction and
trimming of excavated areas, forming and cleaning of weep holes, placing of stones, grouting
where applicable; and for all other work necessary to complete the pitching as specified. The
tendered rate for grouted stone pitching on a concrete bed shall also include full
compensation for the concrete bed.
Excavations for foundation trenches and edge beams and the construction of edge beams will
be paid for separately.
Item 34.02 Riprap

(a) Packed riprap (class indicated)........................................................... cubic meter (m3)
(b) Dumped riprap (class indicated) ) ..................................................... cubic meter (m3)
(c) Filter layer [Subclause 3104(a)] and 3104 (b)
(i) Crushed stone............................................................................ cubic meter (m3)
(ii) Filter sand obtained from borrow pits) ..................................... cubic meter (m3)
(d) Synthetic fiber filter fabric (type class and grade stated)................ square meter (m 2)
The unit of measurement for riprap, (sub items (a), (b) and (c) above) shall be the cubic
meter of riprap in place including rock in trench backfill. The unit of measurement for
sub-item (d) shall be the square meter of filter fabric laid as specified including overlaps.
The rates tendered for sub items (a), (b) and (c) shall include full compensation for the
preparation of surfaces, including excavation but excluding excavation for trenches and bulk
excavations and for the furnishing, transporting, handling, and placing of riprap. The rate
tendered for subitem (d) shall include full compensation for procuring and furnishing the
filter fabric and for laying it as specified, including wastage. Collectively the rates shall also
include full compensation for all other incidentals necessary for completing the work as
specified.
Item 34.03 Stone masonry walls

(a) Dry stone masonry walls .................................................................... cubic meter (m3)
(b) Cement-mortared stone walls............................................................. cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement for stone masonry walls shall be the cubic meter of actual walling
constructed and accepted.

The tendered rate for each type shall include full compensation for furnishing all materials,
trimming of areas, placing of stones and cement-mortar where necessary and all other work
necessary to complete the walls as specified. Excavation of foundation trenches will be paid
separately.
Item 34.04 Concrete pitching

(a) Cast in situ concrete pitching (Class of concrete and thickness of pitching indicated)
.........................................................................................................square meter (m 2)
(b) Interlocking pre-cast concrete block pitching (Type and thickness indicated).............
.........................................................................................................square meter (m 2)
(c) Pre-cast concrete blocks for side walk pavement (thickness indicated) .......................
....................................................................................................... square meter (m 2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square meter of each type constructed.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for furnishing all materials, all excavation
(but excluding bulk excavation and excavation for foundation trenches and edge beams),
compacting and trimming of all excavated areas, provisions of sand bedding (Sub- items (b)
and (d) topsoiling and grassing, (Sub-item (c)), the forming and cleaning of weep holes
(Sub-item (a) and for all other work necessary to complete the Work as specified.
Item 34.05 Concrete in edge beams and foundation trenches (Class of concrete
indicated) ................................................................................. cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of concrete in edge beams and foundation
trenches constructed as instructed.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for furnishing all materials and labor,
including formwork as necessary, for placing concrete and shaping all surfaces.
Item 34.06 Excavations for edge beams and foundation trenches

(a) In solid rock (material requiring blasting) ..........................................cubic meter (m3)
(b) In all other classes of material ...........................................................cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement in each class of material shall be the cubic meter of excavation
made in accordance with the authorized dimensions.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for excavation in each class of material
including for overbreak and any additional concrete necessitated by overbreak, for trimming
of trenches and compaction of the trench inverts and for the disposal of surplus excavated
material to spoil.
Item 34.07 Provision Of approved herbicide and ant poison

(a) Provision of materials ........................................................................... prime cost sum
(b) Contractor's charges and profit added to the prime cost sum ....................per cent (%)
Payment under the prime cost sum for providing ant poison and herbicide and the
contractor's costs and profit in this respect shall be made in accordance with the provisions of
the general conditions of contract, but, in addition, the contractor's tendered rate for costs and
profit shall include full compensation for applying the chemicals as specified.

SERIES 4000: EARTHWORKS
TABLE OF CONTENT
LIST OF TABLES AND FIGURES ................................................................................................... 5
DIVISION 4100: PREPARATION OF ROAD BED AND PROTECTION OF EARTHWORKS ............... 6
4101 General............................................................................................................................ 6
(a) Scope ........................................................................................................................6
(b) Dimensions ...............................................................................................................6
4102 Construction Requirements for the Preparation of Road Bed and Sub-Grade ............... 6
(a) Equipment.................................................................................................................6
(b) Shaping and Compaction of the Roadbed on Suitable Material...............................6
4103 Treatment of The Existing Ground and of the Road Bed Materials in Cut.................... 6
(a) Removal of Unsuitable Material ..............................................................................6
(b) Three-pass roller compaction ...................................................................................7
(c) Preparation and compaction of existing ground in fill sections and of roadbed
material in cut sections .............................................................................................8
(d) Draining of Existing Ground and Road Bed ............................................................8
(e) In Situ Treatment of Roadbed ..................................................................................8
(f) Widening the roadbed...............................................................................................9
4104 Protection of Earthworks ................................................................................................ 9
(a) Scope ........................................................................................................................9
(b) Construction Requirements for Protection of Earthworks .......................................9
4105 Measurement and Payment........................................................................................... 10
Item 41.01 Removal of unsuitable material (including free-haul of 1.5 km) .................10
Item 41.02 Three roller passes compaction ....................................................................10
Item 41.03 Roadbed preparation and the compaction of material .................................10
Item 41.04 In situ treatment of roadbed..........................................................................11
Item 41.05 Material bladed to windrow.........................................................................11
Item 41.06 Extra over items 41.02, 41.03 and 41.04 for preparing and /or treating the
roadbed and compacting material in restricted areas..............................................11
DIVISION 4200: ROADWAY AND BORROW EXCAVATION ......................................................... 12
4201 General.......................................................................................................................... 12
(a) Scope ......................................................................................................................12
(b) Dimensions .............................................................................................................12
4202 Topsoil .......................................................................................................................... 12
4203 Borrow .......................................................................................................................... 12
4204 Classes of Excavation................................................................................................... 12
(a) Common (Normal) Excavation ..............................................................................12
(b) Intermediate Excavation .........................................................................................13
(c) Rock (Hard) Excavation .........................................................................................13

(d) Boulder Excavation................................................................................................ 13

4205 Unsuitable Material Excavation....................................................................................13
4206 Method Of Classifying..................................................................................................14
4207 Construction Requirements for The Excavation of Cuttings ........................................14
(a) Equipment .............................................................................................................. 14
(b) Excavation General ................................................................................................ 14
(c) Dimension of Cuttings ........................................................................................... 15
(d) Use of Excavated Material.................................................................................... 15
(e) Disposal of Surplus Excavated Soil or Rock ......................................................... 16
General directions .................................................................................................. 16
Item 42.01 Cut and Borrow to Fill including free- haul up to 1.5 km ........................... 17
Item 42.02 Extra over item 42.01 for excavating and breaking down material ............. 18
Item 42.03 Cut to spoil, including free-haul up to 1.5 km ............................................. 18
Item 42.04 Over break in rock(hard) and boulder class A excavation........................... 19
Item 42.05 Widening of cuts (extra over items 42.01, and 42.03)................................ 19
DIVISION 4300: BORROW MATERIALS ....................................................................................21
4301 Scope.............................................................................................................................21
4302 Obtaining Of Borrow Materials ....................................................................................21
(a) Borrow Pit Locations ............................................................................................. 21
(b) Use of borrow materials. ........................................................................................ 21
4303 Opening And Working of Borrow Pits .........................................................................21
(a) Removal of topsoil ................................................................................................. 21
(b) Clearing and grubbing............................................................................................ 22
(c) Excess overburden ................................................................................................. 22
(d) Excavation of Borrow Material.............................................................................. 22
(e) Control at Borrow Pits ........................................................................................... 23
(f) Protection of Borrow Pits....................................................................................... 23
4304 Reinstatement of Borrow Areas ....................................................................................23
4305 Disposal of Borrow Material.........................................................................................23
4306 Classification of Borrow Pits for Gravel Materials for Pavement Layers ....................24
4307 Measurement and Payment ...........................................................................................24
Item 43.01 Excess overburden ....................................................................................... 24
Item 43.02 Excess over burden in borrow pits for obtaining crushed stone for pavement
layers ...................................................................................................................... 24
Item 43.03 Finishing - off borrow areas........................................................................ 25
DIVISION 4400: EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................26
4401 General ..........................................................................................................................26

(a) Scope...................................................................................................................... 26
(b) Sources of Materials............................................................................................... 26
4402 Material Requirements For Construction of Embankments in Suitable Material.........26
(a) Californian Bearing Ratio (CBR) .......................................................................... 26
(b) Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index .......................................................................... 26
(c) Maximum Particle Size.......................................................................................... 26
4403 Material Requirements For Construction Of Embankments In Rock Fill ....................26
4404 Material For Side Fill....................................................................................................27
Page 4000-2 Ministry of Roads and transport (GOSS)

4405 Construction Requirements For Embankments............................................................ 27

(a) Equipment...............................................................................................................27
(b) General....................................................................................................................27
(c) Spreading of Materials............................................................................................28
(d) Oversize Particles ...................................................................................................28
(e) Compaction.............................................................................................................28
(f) Benching.................................................................................................................28
(g) Constructing a pioneer layer...................................................................................28
(h) Construction of Drainage Blankets.........................................................................29
(i) Construction of high fills........................................................................................29
(j) Sand fill and sand filter blankets ............................................................................29
(k) Construction of fills near structures .......................................................................30
(l) Constructing toes for rook fill embankments .........................................................30
(m) Side Fill Material ....................................................................................................30
(n) Trial Areas ..............................................................................................................30
4406 Measurement And Payment.......................................................................................... 30
Item 44.01 widening of fills............................................................................................30
Item 44.02 Extra over item 42.03 for spoiling material excavated from benches
constructed for widening existing fills ...................................................................31
Item 44.03 Extra over sub item 42.01(c) for correcting rock fills that are deficient in
fine material............................................................................................................31
Item 44.04 Sand fills ......................................................................................................31
DIVISION 4500 : FINISHING OF SLOPES ................................................................................... 33
4501 General.......................................................................................................................... 33
(a) Scope ......................................................................................................................33
(b) Dimensions .............................................................................................................33
4502 Construction Requirements For Finishing Of Slopes................................................... 33
(a) Equipment...............................................................................................................33
(b) General....................................................................................................................33
4503 Cutting Slopes .............................................................................................................. 33
4504 Embankment Slopes ..................................................................................................... 33
4505 Measurement And Payment.......................................................................................... 34
DIVISION 4600 : STABILIZATION ............................................................................................ 35
4601 Scope ............................................................................................................................... 35

4602 Materials ....................................................................................................................... 35
(a) Material to be stabilized .........................................................................................35
(b) Chemical stabilizing agents ....................................................................................35
4603 Chemical Stabilization.................................................................................................. 36
(a) Preparation of Layer ...............................................................................................36
(b) Application of Stabilizing Agent............................................................................36
(c) Mixing in of stabilizing agent.................................................................................37
(d) Watering .................................................................................................................37
(e) Compaction.............................................................................................................37
(f) Finishing at Junctions .............................................................................................38
(g) Curing of Stabilized Work......................................................................................38
(h) Construction Limitations ........................................................................................39

4604 Mechanical Modification ..............................................................................................39

(a) Modifying soil and gravel by the addition of a soil binder.................................... 39
(b) Mixing materials from various sources.................................................................. 40
(c) Recombining recovered material ........................................................................... 40
4605 Bituminous Stabilization...............................................................................................40
(a) Preparing the material ............................................................................................ 40
(b) Mixing in the additive ............................................................................................ 40
(c) Heating and diluting the bituminous stabilizing agent........................................... 40
(d) Applying the stabilizing agent ............................................................................... 41
(e) Compaction ............................................................................................................ 41
(f) Finishing at Junctions............................................................................................. 42
(g) Construction limitations......................................................................................... 42
4606 Construction Tolerances ...............................................................................................42
(a) Rate of Application ................................................................................................ 42
(b) Uniformity of mix .................................................................................................. 42
4607 Construction of Trial Section........................................................................................42
4608 Stabilization Work In Restricted Areas ...........................................................................43
(a) General requirements ............................................................................................. 43
(b) Chemical stabilization............................................................................................ 43
(c) Bituminous stabilization ........................................................................................ 43
4609 Quality Control .............................................................................................................44
(a) Process Control ...................................................................................................... 44
(b) Routine Inspection and Testing.............................................................................. 44
(c) Defective Work or Materials.................................................................................. 44
Item 46.01 Chemical stabilization.................................................................................. 45
Item 46.02 Chemical stabilizing agent ........................................................................... 45
Item 46.03 Mechanical modification (extra over untreated layer) ................................. 45
Item 46.04 Provision and application of water for curing.............................................. 46
Item 46.05 Curing by covering with the subsequent layer............................................. 46
Item 46.06 Bituminous stabilization .............................................................................. 46
Item 46.07 Bituminous stabilizing agent........................................................................ 46
Item 46.08 Additive for bituminous stabilization .......................................................... 47
Item 46.09 Extra over item 46.01 for chemical stabilization in restricted areas ............ 47
Item 46.10 Extra over item 46.03 for mechanical modification in restricted areas ....... 47
Item 46.11 Extra over item 46.06 for bituminous stabilization in restricted areas ........ 47
Item 46.12 Extra over items 46.01 and 46.06 for trial sections ..................................... 47

Table 4400 /1 Grading Requirements for Rock Fill................................................................. 27

Table 4600/1 Maximum time for completion in stabilization.................................................. 39

DIVISION 4100: PREPARATION OF ROAD BED AND PROTECTION OF

EARTHWORKS
4101 GENERAL
(a) Scope
This Division covers all work in connection with the preparation of the road bed, prior to the
construction of the embankments or capping layers, and the preparation of the sub-grade prior
to the construction of the pavement layers.
(b) Dimensions
The dimensions shall be in accordance with the cross sections and details shown in the
Contract or as instructed by the Engineer.
4102 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR THE PREPARATION OF ROAD BED

AND SUB-GRADE
(a) Equipment
Equipment used for the preparation of the roadbed and sub-grade shall be suitable for use on
the surface to be prepared.
(b) Shaping and Compaction of the Roadbed on Suitable Material

The existing ground beneath embankments or the bottoms of cuttings classified as suitable
material which has a density of less then 95% of the maximum dry density determined in
accordance with AASHTO T-180, shall be scarified to a minimum depth of 150mm, watered
and re-compacted in accordance with the requirements of Clause 4405.
4103 TREATMENT OF THE EXISTING GROUND AND OF THE ROAD BED

MATERIALS IN CUT
After areas of the existing ground that are to be covered by fill have been cleared and
grubbed, or after excavation in cut has reached the top of road bed, the Contractor shall treat
the existing ground in fill sections, or the roadbed materials in cut sections as specified
hereunder.
(a) Removal of Unsuitable Material

Any material, occurring below the existing ground surface in fill areas or roadbed material in
cut areas, which is considered by the Engineer to be of a quality that would be detrimental to
the performance of the completed road, shall be removed to such widths and depths as
ordered by the Engineer and disposed of as directed. The excavated spaces shall then be
backfilled with approved imported material compacted to the required density.
The Engineer may also order that unsuitable material which is too wet to provide a stable
platform for the construction of the fill be removed and replaced with suitable dry material,

and the Contractor shall be paid for this work provided the Engineer is satisfied that, despite
adequate temporary drainage installed by the Contractor and permanent drainage that the
Contractor may have installed, the wet conditions are not likely to be remedied within a
reasonable time and could not have been reasonably foreseen and avoided by proper advance
planning for construction during a dry period.
The removal of unsuitable material shall be paid for under item 41.01. For payment, a
distinction shall first be made in respect of the stability of the material and the construction
equipment to be used. Any unstable material will be paid for under item 41.01. For removing
stable material, payment will be made under item 41.01 should the instruction to remove be
given after completion of the excavations in accordance with the original instructions. If not,
payment will be made therefore under Division 4200 as for ordinary excavated material that is
taken to spoil.
For the purpose of this clause and of payment item 41.01 stable material shall be defined as
material which can be removed effectively by means of normal road-construction equipment
such as bulldozers, graders, scrapers, mechanical shovels, back hoes or excavators. Unstable
material shall be material which can be removed effectively only by means of dragline
scrapers or similar equipment.
(b) Three-pass roller compaction

Where the existing ground in fill sections, or the roadbed in cut sections, by reason of its
inadequate in situ density is specified or prescribed by the Engineer to be given three roller
passes compaction, it shall be prepared by shaping if necessary and compacting with a heavy
pneumatic tired, vibratory flat steel drum, pad foot (tamping) or grid roller complying with
the requirements specified or with an impact roller. The pneumatic roller shall consist of
pneumatic tired wheels mounted on a rigid frame with loading platform or body suitable for
ballast loading to produce a load of between 25 kN and 80 kN on each wheel and arranged in
a manner that will allow all wheels to bear equally while operating on uneven surfaces.
The total load on any axle line shall not exceed 300 kN. Tires shall be uniformly inflated
under operating conditions to a pressure within the range 500 kPa to 800 kPa. The roller shall
be ballasted in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer.
The vibratory flat steel drum and pad foot roller shall be capable of exerting a combined static
and dynamic load of not less than 120 kN/m at an operating frequency not exceeding 1500
rpm.
The grid roller shall have a mass of not less than 13 tons when ballasted, and shall be loaded
to this mass.
The impact roller shall be a multi-aced roller having a maximum of five flat or nearly flat
faces and a roller mass of between 5 and 10 tons. The roller and towing mechanism, which
shall be of the free fall type, shall be so designed that all the energy applied in lifting the roller
when the roller is supported on the ridge between consecutive faces, will be available for
dissipation on impact when the roller drops down again. The roller shall be towed at a speed
of between 8 km and 12 km per hour.
Unless authorized by the Engineer, compaction shall comprise not less than three complete
coverage’s by the wheels of the roller specified or ordered over every portion of the area
being compacted. While it is not the intention that water be applied to the road bed by the
Contractor under this class of compaction and while no rigid control of moisture will be
exercised during compaction, the Contractor shall nevertheless satisfy the Engineer that every

endeavor is being made to take full advantage of more favorable soil moisture conditions
during the year and to carry out such compaction as far as possible, when the road bed is
neither excessively dry nor excessively wet.
The Engineer shall be fully authorized to decide as to when conditions are favorable for
compaction and where such compaction shall be done at any particular time. He is authorized
to instruct the Contractor to water the existing ground or roadbed at the Contractor’s expense
where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor has failed to comply with these
requirements. Where required, three roller passes compaction shall be followed up by the
process described in c) below.
(c) Preparation and compaction of existing ground in fill sections and of roadbed
material in cut sections
Any part of the existing ground in fill sections or roadbed material in cut sections classified as
suitable for use in place except that it fails to meet the requirements for density, shall be
scarified, watered and compacted to a percentage of AASHTO T 180 maximum dry density.
The type of compaction and the depth of compaction shall be as directed by the Engineer. If
necessary, the material may have to be temporarily bladed off to windrow in order to achieve
the necessary depth of compaction.
Where any additional material has to be imported to obtain the required levels and layer
thickness, and where the thickness of the imported material, measured after compaction,
would be less than the specified layer thickness, then the material shall be scarified, the
necessary imported material placed, and this combined material mixed and compacted to the
full specified depth of the layer. The imported material shall be measured and paid for under
“Cut and borrow to fill” and the original existing material shall be measured and paid for
under “Preparation and compaction of existing ground in fill sections and of roadbed material
in cut sections”.
(d) Draining of Existing Ground and Road Bed

Any drainable waterlogged existing ground and road bed, such as saturated material overlying
less pervious strata shall first be drained by the installation of all permanent surface or subsoil
drainage shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, before any other construction
is started on these sections.
Such drains shall be constructed, measured and paid for in accordance with the requirements
of Division 3100.
(e) In Situ Treatment of Roadbed

Wherever shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, the roadbed in cuts shall be
treated in situ by breaking up undesirable formations of hard or rocky materials in order to
achieve a uniform standard of compaction or to improve drainage.
Treatment in situ shall consist of ripping or blasting the roadbed to depths, which, on
normally cambered sections, shall increase from the center of the roadbed to the edges. Unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, the depth of ripping in the
center of the roadbed shall not be less than 300 mm and at the edges of the roadbed not less
than 500 mm. Similarly the depth of drilling and blasting shall not be less than 700 mm at the
center of the roadbed, and shall slope outwards to not less than 1000 mm at the edges of the
roadbed. On super elevated sections the treatment shall, if so directed by the Engineer or

shown on the Drawings, have a uniform cross fall and a minimum depth of 400 mm in the
case of ripping and 850 mm in the case of blasting.
After ripping or blasting the material shall be processed as follows:
Where the Engineer instructs the Contractor to rip the in situ material, the whole of the
material shall be sized by rolling or breaking until the maximum dimension of any clod or
spall is not more than two-thirds of the thickness of the layer after compaction. The material
shall then be compacted as described in this Sub-clause.
Where the Engineer instructs the Contractor to blast the in situ material, the whole of the
material shall be processed and compacted as described in this clause or as directed by the
Engineer.
In both cases surplus material arising from bulking after treatment in place shall be removed
and disposed of or utilized elsewhere as directed by the Engineer.
(f) widening the roadbed

Where the road is to be widened, and where so instructed by the engineer, the roadbed shall
be treated in accordance with the provisions of clause 4103. Where uncompacted roadbed
material occurs below the outer part of the fills, the fill material shall be cut back or cut away
to expose the full width of the roadbed widening to be treated.
Such widening shall be constructed, measured and paid for in accordance with the
requirements of Series4000.
4104 PROTECTION OF EARTHWORKS
(a) Scope
This section covers all work in connection with the protection of earthworks (including,
excavations, embankments, slopes, road bed and sub-grade) from the effects of weather.
(b) Construction Requirements for Protection of Earthworks

Earthworks shall be protected from the weather at all times. The compacted layers of fill and
the bottom of excavations shall be adequately drained and shaped to prevent free water
standing on or scouring the completed layer or the in-situ material. Any windrows or ridges,
which will impede the free drainage of water, shall be removed from the surface. No fill
material for a succeeding layer has been shall be placed if the underlying layer has been
softened by excessive moisture.
All permanent drains, plus additional necessary temporary drains, shall be constructed as soon
as possible to protect the earthworks. Ruts, potholes and other damaged sections of
earthworks and slopes shall be reinstated. Drains shall be so constructed as to avoid damage,
caused by erosion, to embankments.
Any runnels or erosion channels, which develop during the Contract, shall be back filled with
suitable material, and the areas reinstated. The Contractor shall not allow erosion to develop
on a large scale before effecting repairs and all erosion damage shall be repaired as soon as
possible.


Item 41.01 Removal of unsuitable material (including free-haul of 1.5 km):
(a) In layer thicknesses of 200 mm and less:
3
(i) Stable material ........................................................................... cubic metre (m )
3
(ii) Unstable material .......................................................................cubic metre (m )
(b) In layer thicknesses exceeding 200 mm:
3
(i) Stable material ............................................................................cubic metre (m )
3
(ii) Unstable material........................................................................cubic metre (m )
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of unsuitable material removed by the
contractor in accordance with the engineer’s instructions and it shall be the in situ volume of
the material calculated in accordance with its authorized dimensions.
For the purposes of this clause the definitions of stable and unstable material shall be as set
out in clause 4103(A).
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for the removal of all classes of unsuitable
material and shall distinguish only between stable and unstable material and layer thicknesses
of less than and exceeding 200 mm. It will also include compensation for free-haul of 1.5 km.
Item 41.02 Three roller passes compaction:

Vibratory roller ................................................................................................ square meter (m²)
Oscillatory roller .............................................................................................. square meter (m²)
Grid roller......................................................................................................... square meter (m²)
Tamping roller.................................................................................................. square meter (m²)
Impact roller..................................................................................................... square meter (m²)
Pneumatic-tyred roller ..................................................................................... square meter (m²)
The unit of measurement shall be the square meter of roadbed compacted in accordance with
the provisions of clause 4103(b). The quantity will be computed in accordance with the
authorized dimensions of the area to be treated.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for shaping, providing the rollers, keeping
the rollers ready for use when soil-moisture conditions are favorable as specified, and
compacting the roadbed by three roller passes.
Item 41.03 Roadbed preparation and the compaction of material:

(a) Compaction to 90% of modified AASHTO density ...........................cubic meter (m3)
(b) Compaction to 93% of modified AASHTO density ............................cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of roadbed material prepared and
compacted as specified in clause 4103(c). The quantity shall be computed in accordance with
the authorized dimensions of the completed layers.

The tendered rates shall include full compensation for shaping, scarifying, mixing of in situ
and imported material if required, and preparing and compacting the material’s as specified.
Item 41.04 In situ treatment of roadbed:

(a) In situ treatment by ripping ............................................................... cubic meter (m3)
(b) In situ treatment by blasting ................................................................ cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of in situ material treated in situ as specified
in clause 4103(e). The quantity shall be computed in accordance with the authorized
dimensions of the completed in situ treatment.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for ripping or blasting, shaping, scarifying,
sizing, knapping, rolling, mixing of in situ and imported material if required, and preparing
and compacting the material as specified. Payment shall distinguish between in situ treatment
by ripping and in situ treatment by blasting. Surplus material shall be measured and paid for
as in Division 4200.
Item 41.05 Material bladed to windrow .......................................................cubic meter (m3)

The unit of measurement in respect of material temporarily bladed to windrow as specified in
clause 4103(c) shall be the cubic meter of material to be bladed off, measured in the original
position before balding off in accordance with the method of average end areas.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the temporary removal of such material
and its later replacement, and for all clearing work, which may be necessary after replacement
of the material.
Only material bladed to windrow on the instructions of the engineer for exposing the
underlying roadbed material for treatment will be measured and paid for as described above.
Item 41.06 Extra over items 41.02, 41.03 and 41.04 for preparing and /or treating the
roadbed and compacting material in restricted areas
(a) Item 41.02 for three roller passes compaction .................................. square metre (m2)
(b) Item 41.03 for roadbed preparation and the compaction of material .. cubic meter (m3)
(c) Item 41.04 for in situ treatment of roadbed......................................... cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter or square meter of prepared and/or treated
roadbed or compacted material, depending on the type of work required, as indicated for the
various items where such work is required to be done in restricted areas. The quantities shall
be calculated as specified under items 41.02, 41.03 or 41.04 whichever may be the case.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the additional cost of executing the work
in restricted areas.
No distinction in payment will be made between the various density requirements, the various
types of rollers, and between ripping and blasting.

DIVISION 4200: ROADWAY AND BORROW EXCAVATION
4201 GENERAL
(a) Scope
This Division covers all work in connection with the excavation of soil and rock within the
road prism and borrow areas except for excavation for foundations.
(b) Dimensions
The dimensions of cuttings and other excavations shall be in accordance with the cross
sections and details as described in the Contract and further amended during the course of
construction by instructions from the Engineer.
4202 TOPSOIL
After clearing and grubbing of the natural ground surface within the width of the road prism,
the Contractor shall obtain from the Engineer an instruction as to whether topsoil is to be
removed and as to the required treatment of any topsoil on the section concerned.
This shall indicate the depth to which the topsoil is to be removed, whether it is for re-use or
spoil, and the location of stockpiles, spoil areas or placement. The depth of removal of topsoil
will be either zero or an average depth between 150 mm and 400 mm.
Topsoil shall be stockpiled in heaps not more than 3 meters high.
This work shall be measured and paid for under Division 4100.
4203 BORROW
Where sufficient quantities of suitable material are not available from roadway excavation as
planned, additional materials shall be excavated from borrow pits indicated on the plans or
4204 CLASSES OF EXCAVATION
(a) Common (Normal) Excavation

Common excavation shall be excavation in material, which can be efficiently removed or
loaded by any of the following equipment without prior ripping:
A bulldozer with a mass of at least 22 tons and an engine developing approximately 145 kW
at the flywheel; or
A tractor-scraper unit with a mass of at least 28 tons and an engine developing approximately
245 kW at the flywheel, pushed during loading by a bulldozer as specified above, or
A track-type front-end loader with a mass of at least 22 tons and an engine developing
approximately 140 kW at the flywheel.

(b) Intermediate Excavation

Intermediate excavation shall be excavation in material, which can be efficiently ripped by a
bulldozer with a mass of at least 35 tons when fitted with a single tine ripper and an engine
developing approximately 220 kW at the flywheel.
(c) Rock (Hard) Excavation

Rock excavation shall be excavation (excluding boulder excavation) in material which cannot
be efficiently ripped by a bulldozer fitted with a ripper with properties equivalent to those
described in (ii) above.
(d) Boulder Excavation

Boulder excavation shall be classified in the following three classes:
(i) Class A Boulder

Boulder excavation class A shall be excavation in material containing in excess of 40% by
volume of boulders between 0.03 m3 and 20 m3 in size. In a matrix of common material or
smaller boulders.
(ii) Class B Boulder

Boulder excavation class A shall be excavation in material containing of 40% or less by
volume of boulders between 0.03 m3 and 20 m3 in size. In a matrix of common material or
smaller boulders.
(iii) Class C Boulder

Isolated individual boulders within a cutting of common or intermediate excavation and not
less than 1 m3 in volume, which can be bodily removed by the contractor’s equipment,
without prior blasting shall be classified as class C boulders.
4205 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL EXCAVATION

Unsuitable Material Excavation shall consist of the excavation and disposal of trash, rubble,
wood, debris, non- regulated industrial wastes and other miscellaneous materials including
soil or rock cover and intermingled soil or rock materials, which is unsuitable.
Materials unsuitable for use in the Works shall include:
Peat, materials from swaps, marshes and bogs that contain excessive amounts of black cotton
soil, logs, tree stumps and other perishable materials;
Soil having a liquid limit exceeding 60% or a plasticity index exceeding 30 when determined
in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T-89 and T-90 which are sufficiently wet
and soft to prevent them being trafficked or excavated by normal bulk earthmoving
equipment.
Regulated Industrial Wastes - Regulated industrial wastes excavation shall consist of the
excavation and disposal of these materials classified as regulated industrial wastes in the
Special Provision.

Wet Excavation - Wet excavation shall consist of the excavation of muck, mud, unstable
materials and all other materials and objects of whatever nature encountered that cannot be
excavated by ordinary dry excavation methods and equipment.
Removal of Concrete Base and Surface Courses - Removal of Concrete base and surface
courses shall consist of the excavation of reinforced and non -reinforced concrete courses
including any overlying surface courses.
Removal of Bituminous Concrete Overlay - Removal of bituminous concrete overlay shall
consist of the Removal of bituminous concrete, block and brick surfaces from reinforced and
non-reinforced concrete bases.
4206 METHOD OF CLASSIFYING

The Contractor shall be at liberty to use any method he wishes to excavate any class of
material but the method of excavation shall not determine the classification of the excavation.
The Engineer shall determine the classification of the excavation. In the first instance the
classification shall be based on an inspection and evaluation of the material to be excavated.
This classification shall be determined before excavation commences. In the event of a
disagreement between the Contractor and the Engineer, the Contractor shall, if required, make
available such mechanical equipment at his own cost, in order to determine whether or not to
the material can reasonably be removed. The decision of the Engineer as to the classification
shall thereafter be final and binding.
The Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer if and when the nature of the material
being excavated changes to the extent that a new classification for further excavation is
warranted. Failure on the part of the Contractor to timely advise the Engineer shall entitle the
Engineer to classify in his sole discretion, such excavation as may have been executed in
material of a different nature.
4207 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR THE EXCAVATION OF CUTTINGS
(a) Equipment
Equipment used for the excavation of cuttings shall be suitable for the type of material to be
excavated.
(b) Excavation General

The Contractor shall exercise proper care when excavating material not to loosen, where this
can be avoided, any material outside the specified cutting line, whether by ripping, blasting or
other means, thereby endangering the stability of the slopes or subsequently causing undue
erosion or disintegration of the batters. his would normally entail modifying the methods of
excavating when working in the vicinity of the final cutting surface.
Care shall also be exercised not to undercut any slopes and proper control shall at all times be
exercised by regular survey checking and the use of batter boards at close intervals. Where
the batters are nevertheless undercut, back filling and compacting with imported material will
not normally be considered as a suitable remedy and the Engineer may order such remedial
measures, as he considers necessary to be carried out at the Contractor’s expense. This may, in
serious cases, include cutting back the whole or major portions of the batter to a uniform
slope.

Construction equipment shall not use the surface of the bottom of a cutting unless the cutting
is in rock containing no soft material or the Contractor maintains the level of the bottom
surface at least 300 mm above finished subgrade level. The Contractor shall reinstate any
damage to the subgrade or roadbed level arising from such uses of the surface. From the time
the Contractor begins to trim the remaining material to subgrade or roadbed level on any
given area, the movement and use of construction equipment thereon, other than that used to
complete this operation, shall be kept to a minimum.
(c) Dimension of Cuttings

The dimensions of cuttings shall be in accordance with the cross sections and details as shown
on the Drawings and further amended during the course of construction by instructions from
the Engineer.
All cuttings excavated below the specified levels shall be back-filled with suitable material
and compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor should anticipate that a
certain amount of over-break might be inevitable in hard excavation or in the presence of
boulders.
During excavation the Contractor shall limit vertical and other temporary faces to such
heights as are suitable to the nature of the exposed soil. If in the course of the Works any slips,
slides or subsidence extend below the line and slopes or below the levels shown on the
Drawings, the excess excavation shall be carried out at the Contractor’s own expense. The
Contractor shall reinstate the slopes in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Unless he can
show that the slip, slide or subsidence was not due to his failure to comply with the
Specifications. The Engineer may, when he considers it necessary, instruct the Contractor to
widen cuts already existing, completed or partially completed either uniformly or by altering
the slope of the sides of cut, or by cutting benches, or in any other way.
(d) Use of Excavated Material

All materials excavated from the road prism shall, insofar as is practicable, be used for the
construction of embankments, pavement layers and for such other purposes as shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall not dispose of any excavated material without the approval of the
Engineer. Excavated material, which is unsuitable for use in any part of the Works, or surplus
to requirements, shall be disposed of at points approved by the Engineer and in a manner
satisfactory to him. Spoil heaps shall be neatly trimmed and finished to even surfaces. Comment [BSB1]: Insert a clause on
spoil.
Coarse rock encountered in cuts shall be utilized for the construction of the lower layers of
fills high enough to accommodate thick layers, or, where so required, shall be conserved and
used as directed for constructing the sides of embankments or for serving as protection against
embankment or channel erosion.
The Engineer shall have full control of the use of all material from excavations of cuttings,
but the Contractor shall plan his operations and particularly his cut-to-fill operations in such a
manner that all cut material may be used to the best advantage of the Employer. No material
shall be unnecessarily spoiled or borrowed. The Contractor shall neither borrow nor spoil any
material without the Engineer’s approval and without satisfying the Engineer that this is
necessary and the most economical method of constructing the Works.

Generally the works shall progress in an orderly fashion with suitable material being cut to
adjacent fills. In general the excavated materials shall be placed directly in their final position
in fill.
Hauling of material from cuts to embankments or other areas of fill shall only take place when
sufficient compaction equipment is operating at the place of deposition to ensure compliance
with the relevant clauses of this Division.
The Contractor shall utilize only equipment, which is suited to the soils to be handled. He
shall not at any time use any equipment, which damages or reduces the natural strength more
than necessary of the soil either in its in-situ state or during handling and placing or in its final
compacted state.
Where directed by the Engineer prior to commencement of work, the Contractor shall submit
a statement of his proposed plan of operation and if so directed the Contractor shall not
commence the work until the Engineer approves such plan. The plan shall be additional to any
construction program required under the Contract.
(e) Disposal of Surplus Excavated Soil or Rock

The Contractor shall not dispose of any excavated soil or rock without the prior approval of
the Engineer.
Excavated soil or rock which is either unsuitable for use in the works or is surplus to
requirements, shall be disposed of in specially designated areas, identified by the Contractor
and approved by the Engineer. If necessary, the area shall be cleared and grubbed in
accordance with the requirements of Division 2100 prior to the surplus soil or rock being
tipped and spread in layers and compacted to the approval of the Engineer. After compaction
the surface and slopes of the finished disposal area shall be trimmed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
General directions
(i) Determining the quantities

Upon completion of all work in connection with clearing and grubbing and working the
roadbed, and where the classification of the excavations change, the contractor, at his own
cost, shall take cross-sections at 20 m intervals so as to determine quantities, and shall submit
the results so obtained to the engineer for approval. The engineer will take control
measurements to determine the accuracy and adequacy of the cross-sections, and may instruct
the contractor to correct any faulty work and to take such additional measurements and cross-
sections as may be deemed necessary by him. Such cross-sections shall be taken before any
cut or fill work is done. Where the contractor proceeds with such work before final approval
of the cross-sections and before the contractor and the engineer have agreed on the cross-
sections, the engineer’s decision regarding the cross-sections to be used shall be final and
binding on the contractor.
Where there is valid reasons for believing that the roadbed is subsiding as fills are being
constructed, and after the roadbed work has been completed and cross-sections have been
agreed on, the contractor may request that the fill quantities shall be adjusted accordingly.
Such request shall be lodged without delay, and the contractor shall submit the required

supporting evidence to the engineer. Where the engineer is satisfied that significant
subsidence is occurring, he, together with the contractor, shall decide as to how the extent of
the subsidence is to be determined, and, where no agreement can be reached, the decision of
the engineer shall be final. Any adjustments of this nature shall be made only where the
average subsidence exceeds 50 mm.
(ii) Material from commercial sources

If specified in the project specifications, material from commercial sources shall be used for
the construction of fills. In such cases the items listed below shall be applicable, except that
the tendered rates shall also include full compensation for all transport costs, and no overhaul
shall be measured and paid for.
(iii) Work in restricted areas

Special rates for works in restricted areas are applicable solely to work that has to be executed
in an area of which the width is less than 3.0 m or the length is less than 150.0 m.
Item 42.01 Cut and Borrow to Fill including free- haul up to 1.5 km:
(a) Material in compacted layer thicknesses of 200 mm and less:
(i) Compacted to 90% of modified AASHTO density.................... cubic metre (m3)
(ii) Compacted to 93% of modified AASHTO density.................... cubic metre (m3)
(b) Material in compacted layer thicknesses exceeding 200 mm:
(i) Compacted to 90% of modified AASHTO density.................... cubic metre (m3)
(ii) Compacted to 93% of modified AASHTO density................... cubic metre (m3)
(c) Rock fill (as specified in subclause 4403)........................................... cubic metre (m3)
(d) Toes for rock fill embankments (as specified in subclause 4405(l)) .............................
............................................................................................................. cubic metre (m3)
(e) Pioneer layer (as specified in subclause 4405(g)) ............................... cubic metre (m3)
(f) Sand filter blanket (as specified in subclause 3307(h))....................... cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of material measured in the compacted fill.
For sub - items (a), (b) and (c) the quantity measured shall be computed by the method of
average end areas from levelled cross-sections prepared from the ground line after clearing
and grubbing and the removal of topsoil and the completion of any preparatory roadbed
treatment which may have been ordered by the engineer, but prior to the construction of the
fill, and the final specified or authorized fill cross-section superimposed thereon at 20 m
intervals along the center line of the road. All measurement shall be neat, and that part of the
fill placed in excess of the authorized cross-section shown on the drawings or directed by the
engineer, will not be paid for irrespective of the tolerances in workmanship allowed under the
contract. Where the roadbed has subsided under the fills, the quantities shall be adjusted to
make allowance for such subsidence, as set out in the note at the commencement of this
clause. Measurement of fill shall distinguish between the alternative methods of processing
and compacting.
The quantities for subitems (d) and (f) shall be calculated from the authorized dimensions.

For subitem (e) the compacted volume of the material in the pioneer layer may be taken as
equal to 70% of the loose volume of the material in the trucks as an alternative to taking
cross-sections before and after construction.
Material excavated for the construction of open drains, subsoil drains, culverts, bridge
foundations and other structures, shall, if suitable and if so directed by the engineer, be used
for the construction of fills, and payment shall be made under item 42.01 irrespective of any
payment made previously for the excavation of such material. All such material shall be
classified as Common (Normal) excavation.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing and placing the
material, including excavating as if in Common (Normal) excavation, the cutting of benches,
for transporting the material for a free-haul distance of 1.5 km; for preparing, processing,
shaping, watering, mixing, and compacting the materials to the densities or in the manner
specified herein and for removing and disposing of up to 5% oversize material from the road
after processing, including transport for a free-haul distance of 2.5 km.
The tendered rates shall also include full compensation for the supply and installation of
synthetic-fiber filter material where specified or indicated on the drawings.
Payment shall distinguish between the various materials and methods of processing and
compacting specified, as itemized above.
Item 42.02 Extra over item 42.01 for excavating and breaking down material in:
(a) Common (Normal) excavation ........................................................... cubic meter (m3)
(b) Intermediate excavation .......................................................................cubic meter (m3)
(c) Rock (Hard) excavation .....................................................................cubic meter (m3)
(d) Boulder excavation class A ................................................................ cubic meter (m3)
(e) Boulder excavation class B..................................................................cubic meter (m3)
(f) Boulder excavation class C.................................................................cubic meter (m 3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of material removed as specified.
Measurement of items (a), (b), (c) and (d) shall be in the original position in the cut or borrow
pit and the quantity shall be computed by the method of average end areas from levelled
cross-sections at intervals not exceeding 20 m measured along the center line of the road in
the case of cuts and at intervals not exceeding 10 m and parallel to one another in the case of
borrow pits before and after the removal of the material Measurement of boulder excavations
in class B and class C shall be by the volume of individual boulders being measured after
removal or where this is considered to be impracticable by taking the in situ volume of
boulder excavation to be equivalent to 50% of the loose volume in the hauling vehicles
The tendered rates shall be paid as extra over the rates applying to Common (Normal)
excavation in item 42.01 and shall include full compensation for additional costs to excavate
and break down the various classes of material including the cost of all the necessary
additional effort plant tools materials, labour and supervision.
The extra over payment shall distinguish between common (normal), intermediate, rock
(hard), boulder class A, boulder class B and boulder class C excavation.
Item 42.03 Cut to spoil, including free-haul up to 1.5 km Material obtained from:
(a) Common (normal) excavation .............................................................cubic meter (m3)

(b) Intermediate excavation ...................................................................... cubic meter (m3)

(c) Rock (Hard) excavation........................................................................ cubic meter(m3)
(d) Boulder excavation class A ................................................................. cubic meter (m3)
(e) Boulder excavation class B ................................................................. cubic meter (m3)
(f) Boulder excavation class C .................................................................. cubic meter(m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of material measured in its original position
in cut and computed by the method of average end areas from levelled cross-sections taken
along the ground line after clearing and grubbing and the removal of topsoil, if any, but prior
to excavating the cut with the final specified or authorized cross-section of the cut
superimposed thereon at intervals not exceeding 20 m along the center line of the road.
Measurement of boulder excavation class B and class C shall be by the volume of individual
boulders being measured after removal or where this is considered to be impracticable by
taking the in situ volume of boulder excavation to be equivalent to 50% of the loose volume
in the hauling vehicles.
Where measurement by cross-sections is considered by the engineer to be impracticable cut to
spoil may be measured in the hauling vehicles by taking the in situ volume of the material in
the case of soils and gravel to be the equivalent of 70% of the loose volume in the haul
vehicles and in the case of boulder material as equal to 50% of the loose volume in the haul
vehicles.
The tendered rates for cut to spoil shall include full compensation for excavating from the
road prism and roadbed in the various classes of excavation, for loading, transporting the
material for a free-haul distance of 1.5 km, off-loading and disposing of the material as
specified, including shaping and levelling-off any piles of spoil material
This payment item will also apply to the removal of unsuitable roadbed material provided that
it is stable material and that instruction in respect of its removal be given before the
excavations reach the level of the roadbed material to be removed, all as described in Division
4100.
Except where the temporary storage of spoil material is ordered by the engineer, the tendered
rates shall also include full compensation for the temporary storage of spoil material, the later
loading, transporting, off-loading and grading of the spoil material within the borrow areas,
and for reinstating the storage site to its original condition.
Item 42.04 Over break in rock(hard) and boulder class A excavation .square meter (m 2 )
The unit of measurement shall be the square meter of exposed roadbed in completed rock
(hard) and boulder class A cuttings.
The tendered rate for over break in rock (hard) and boulder class A cuttings shall include full
compensation for unavoidable over break which may occur during excavation and for the cost
of backfilling with suitable rack material and compacting it to the lines and levels specified
for the excavation. This item shall not apply when item 41.04 of Division 4100 is applied in
respect of the same area.
Item 42.05 Widening of cuts (extra over items 42.01, and 42.03):
(a) In rock (hard) material........................................................................ cubic meter (m3)

(b) In boulder material class A ,B or class C .............................................cubic meter (m3)

(c) In all other materials .............................................................................cubic meter(m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of material excavated during the widening
of cuts where they are more than 2. 5 m deep (measured vertically from the top of the cut to
the shoulder breakpoint), and where the cut is widened by less than 4 m.
Measurement of the material shall be in the original position in the cut and the quantity shall
be computed by the method of average end areas from levelled cross-sections at intervals not
exceeding 20 m measured along the centerline of the road before and after removal of the
material.
The tendered rates for widening the cuts shall be paid extra over the rates tendered for items
42.01, and 42.03 and shall include full compensation for the additional costs involved (over
and above those for excavating new cuttings) for excavating material during the widening of a
cut where the cut exceeds 2.5 m in depth and is widened by less than 4 m.

DIVISION 4300: BORROW MATERIALS
4301 SCOPE
This Division covers the work involved in obtaining materials for construction of the Works
from borrow areas. It includes clearing the site, stripping overburden including topsoil,
excavating selected material for use in the Works, and reinstatement of the borrow area.
4302 OBTAINING OF BORROW MATERIALS
(a) Borrow Pit Locations

Borrow material shall be located and obtained by the Contractor. Borrow material shall
comply with the requirements of the Specifications for the use for which the material is
intended.
The Contractor shall excavate the necessary trial holes, take such samples and perform or
have performed such tests as are necessary. The Contractor shall submit all the results to the
Engineer in sufficient detail to satisfy him that the quality and quantity of material available in
the proposed borrow area is acceptable for the intended use, all at the Contractor’s own
expense.
Approval of borrow pits or borrow areas shall apply only to those portions of the pit or area
from which acceptable materials can be obtained or produced. The Contractor shall conduct
his operations in any approved pit or borrow area or portions thereof so as to produce
acceptable material.
Any approval given by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of
ensuring that material obtained from a borrow pit complies in all respects with the
specification for the material.
Procuring and furnishing borrow material shall not be payable directly but shall be considered
as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor covered under the contract prices paid for the
various items of work in which the materials are used, as provided in these Specifications.
Certain items of work shall, however, be paid for separately where so specified.
(b) Use of borrow materials.

The Engineer shall not approve the use of any material from borrow areas unless the
Contractor has made full use of all available materials within the Site.
4303 OPENING AND WORKING OF BORROW PITS
(a) Removal of topsoil

Prior to the opening of a borrow pit the Contractor shall ascertain from the Engineer whether
the removal of topsoil is required and shall remove and stockpile such topsoil as instructed by
the Engineer.
This work shall be carried out, measured, and paid for, in accordance with the provisions of
Division 4100.

(b) Clearing and grubbing

Clearing and grubbing of borrow areas will be measured for payment in accordance with the
provisions of Division 2100 of these Specifications before excavation is commenced, but only
in the following cases unless otherwise directed by the Engineer:
(i) in borrow areas located in plantations.
(ii) in borrow areas where no excess overburden exists but the removal of grass, shrubs,
and roots is required.
No clearing and grubbing will be measured or paid for in borrow areas opened for obtaining
rock or sand used in the construction of stone pitching, concrete work, crushed stone base or
subbase, permeable subsurface drain material or bituminous asphalt or surfacing.
(c) Excess overburden

The Contractor shall advise the Engineer in good time of his intention to operate from any
borrow area before any excavation at such borrow area is commenced, in order that a survey
of site can be made for the purpose of computing the quantity of excess overburden, if any, to
be removed.
No removal of overburden of other quarrying operations shall be proceeded with until
agreement has been reached between the Engineer and the Contractor in regard to the quantity
of such overburden.
The measurement of excess overburden shall be made only after removal of topsoil and
clearing and grubbing, if any, has been performed.
Excess overburden shall be moved, as instructed by the Engineer, to the outer limits of the
proposed borrow area and if this area is later increased the excess overburden shall be moved
further to the new outer limits or where possible at that stage, replaced in the borrow pits as
described in clause 4304.
(d) Excavation of Borrow Material

Where any borrow pit contains different types of materials in separate layers which require to
be mixed in order to produce a suitable product, the materials shall be excavated over the full
depth of approved face in one operation without separation of the different types of material.
The Contractor shall exercise all reasonable care so as to avoid contamination of approved
borrow material by the inclusion of clayey or otherwise unsuitable material from the floor of
the borrow pit, from overburden, from unsuitable layers or from areas beyond the approved
limits of the borrow area. During loading hard oversize material which will not break down
during processing on the road shall be excluded as far as is practicable, including if necessary
the use of a grizzly. During the course of borrow operations and especially when excavating
near the floor and outer boundaries of borrow areas the Contractor shall plan his operations so
as to reduce as far as possible the amount of earthmoving that will be necessary for the
finishing-off of borrow pits. Indiscriminate excavation without due regard for the desired
final shape of the borrow pit will not be permitted.
The material in borrow pits shall be blasted, ripped or excavated in a manner that will ensure
the effective breaking down of the material. Any oversize particles in material which is to be
used for sub-bases, road bases or gravel wearing courses shall be removed by screening or
other approved means before it is taken from the borrow pit.

(e) Control at Borrow Pits

The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling his operations at every borrow pit where
material is being excavated, to ensure compliance with the requirements of clause 4303
above.
He shall carry out sufficient tests on the material being excavated from the borrow pit in order
to satisfy himself that the quality of the material will comply with the specified requirements
for the particular layer for which it will be used.
If there is any doubt concerning the quality of borrow material being excavated at any time,
the Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately, and in any case before such material is
brought onto the road. The results of all tests, which are carried out by the Contractor, shall be
submitted to the engineer on request. The Engineer will, after further testing or inspection if
necessary, instruct the Contractor regarding the use of the material in the borrow area, or he
may order the borrow pit to be finished off and abandoned.
(f) Protection of Borrow Pits

Borrow pits shall be continuously protected against the ingress of surface water and the
Contractor shall construct such temporary banks as may be required to divert surface water
and as far as possible his operations shall be planned in such a way that the borrow pit is self-
draining. Where this is not possible, borrow pits shall be dewatered by pumping. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for keeping borrow areas dry and ensuring that borrow
material is sufficiently dry when required for use.
4304 REINSTATEMENT OF BORROW AREAS

On completion of his operations in a borrow area the Contractor shall reinstate the entire area
so as to blend with the surrounding area and to permit the re-establishment of vegetation. For
this purpose the borrow area shall be shaped to even contours. All material in and around the
borrow area, whether spoil from road building operations, excess stockpiled material, oversize
material left in the borrow pit, material resulting from clearing and grubbing operations and
excess overburden, shall be used or disposed of as directed by the Engineer. Material not
capable of supporting vegetation shall be buried and used in shaping the borrow area and
subsequently covered with soft material. All available soft material shall be spread evenly to
the thickness directed and where sufficient material is not available for this purpose to cover
the entire area, the remaining portions shall be scarified along the contours so as to avoid
undue erosion.
The shaping and reinstatement of the borrow pit shall be done in such a way that the borrow
pit will be properly drained whenever practicable and where required the Contractor shall
place earth banks to divert any surface water away from the borrow area.
The reinstatement of any borrow pit shall be to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
4305 DISPOSAL OF BORROW MATERIAL

The Contractor shall not have the right to use material obtained from borrow pits for any
purpose other than for the execution of this Contract. He shall not dispose of any borrow
material whether processed or not either by sale or donation to any person without the written
authority of the Employer.

4306 CLASSIFICATION OF BORROW PITS FOR GRAVEL MATERIALS FOR

PAVEMENT LAYERS
Borrow pits for the exploitation of gravel materials shall be classified in accordance with the
same classification as that described in clause 4204 for construction of the earthworks.
Borrow pits for exploiting stone for pitching or crushing, and borrow pits for sand shall not be
classified for purposes of payment.
The engineer shall have the right to decide which borrow pit shall be operated by the
contractor at any particular stage of the work and to approve new borrow pits during the
construction period.

Item 43.01 Excess overburden ...................................................................... cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of excess overburden measured in place
before stripping and such measurement shall be based on the depth of overburden measured in
trial pits excavated by the Contractor in a square pattern at intervals of 10 m over the whole
area concerned.
Where the borrow material consists of rock or sand which is used in the construction of stone
pitching, concrete work, crushed stone for sub-base and base, permeable subsurface drain
materials and in bituminous paving and surfacing, no excess overburden shall be measured or
paid for.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the digging of trial pits; stripping
clearing and grubbing, and removing the excess overburden prior to the excavation of borrow
material; for replacing the excess overburden in the borrow pit after completion of the
excavation of borrow material and for levelling-off the excess overburden in the borrow area.
Item 43.02 Excess over burden in borrow pits for obtaining crushed stone for pavement
layers
(a) Overburden in common (normal) or intermediate excavation.............cubic metre(m3)
(b) Overburden in rock (hard) excavation .................................................cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of excess overburden measured in place
before stripping. The quantity shall be based on the depth of the overburden as measured in
test pits. Distinction shall be made between common (normal) and intermediate material on
the one hand and rock (hard) material on the other, in accordance with the classification as
described in Sub- clause 4204 under Division 4200 for excavations.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for stripping, removing and stockpiling
excess overburden prior to the borrow material being excavated, replacing the excess
overburden in the borrow pit after excavation of the borrow material has been completed and
levelling-off the excess overburden in the borrow area.
Where the stockpiled excess overburden has to be moved to beyond the limits originally
indicated by the engineer, it shall be measured once more for payment but only under item
43.01.
Where overburden material is used for filling or for other purposes, payment will not be made
for removing such overburden material, but will be made in accordance with the purpose for
which such material will be used.

Item 43.03 Finishing - off borrow areas

(a) Rock (Hard) material................................................................................... hectare (ha)
(b) Intermediate material.................................................................................. .hectare (ha)
(c) Common (Normal) ....................................................................... material. hectare (ha)
The unit of measurement for finishing-off borrow areas shall be the hectare measured in
accordance with the finally excavated area of the borrow pit before it is finished off.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for finishing-off the borrow pits as
specified, including any further earth moving necessary for finishing, but excluding the
establishment of grass. Borrow pits shall be classified in accordance with the classification of
the material removed therefrom and where more than one class of material is taken from a
borrow area, the area shall be apportioned prorata for classification purposes, in accordance
with the volumes of each type of material removed.

DIVISION 4400: EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION
4401 GENERAL
(a) Scope
This Division covers all work in connection with the construction of embankments within the
road prism up to the sub-grade level, using soil or rock excavated from the road prism or from
approved borrow areas in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the
lines, grades, cross section, and dimensions shown on the plans or as instructed by the
Engineer.
(b) Sources of Materials

Material used for the construction of embankments shall be obtained from cuttings, trenches
or foundations within the limit of the Works or from borrow areas identified by the Contractor
and approved by the Engineer.
4402 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF EMBANKMENTS IN

SUITABLE MATERIAL
(a) Californian Bearing Ratio (CBR)

The fill material shall have a minimum soaked Californian Bearing Ratio (CBR) of not less
than 4% and a swell value of not more than 1.5% (with two surcharge rings) when determined
in accordance with AASHTO T-193.
The Californian Bearing Ratio (CBR) shall be determined at a density of 95% of the
maximum dry density determined in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T-180
method D
(b) Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index

The fill material shall have a liquid limit not exceeding 60% and a plasticity index not
exceeding 30 when determined in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T-89 and T-
90.
(c) Maximum Particle Size

The fill material shall not contain particles with a maximum dimension exceeding two-thirds
of the specified layer thickness after compaction, except in the case of rock fill.
4403 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF EMBANKMENTS IN

ROCK FILL
Rock fill shall be material obtained from rock or intermediate excavation and shall comply
with the following requirements:
Rock fill processing and compaction shall apply to material consisting predominantly of stone
and boulders, with some fine material in between, which, on account of the mechanical

interlock of the rock, cannot be effectively compacted by construction methods normally used
for soils and gravel.
When the layer thickness after compaction is 500 mm or less as instructed by the engineer, the
processing and compaction of such material shall not be classified as rock-fill processing and
compaction, and the engineer may prescribe that the material be compacted as described in
clause (b)hard material.
The maximum size of rock, which may be used in rock fill, is 750 mm. and the layer
thickness before compaction shall not be in excess of one and a half times the average actual
size of the rock. The engineer may prescribe that 5% of the oversize material shall be bladed
off the road after the material has been dumped onto the road, and it shall be disposed of as
described in clause 3210, so that the layer thickness will not be determined by the presence of
isolated large rock fragments.
The compacted layer shall not contain any rock fragments the largest dimension of which
exceeds the thickness of the compacted layer.
The material to be compacted shall be off-loaded by the end-tipping method. The material
shall then be spread by bulldozer or other suitable plant and shall be so bulldozed and levelled
as to properly mix the fine material with the rock.
The rock fill shall contain sufficient finer fractions to fill the voids in order to obtain the
maximum density. If the rock fill material is deficient in fines, approved fines shall be added
to the rock fill and placed as specified in Sub-clause 4405. The addition of approved fines will
be paid for separately as specified in item 44.03.
Table 4400 /1 Grading Requirements for Rock Fill
Sieve Size Percentage Passing

500mm 100
125mm 0 - 90
600 µm 0 - 25
63 µm < 15
4404 MATERIAL FOR SIDE FILL

Material for use in side fill shall be either material which is unsuitable for use in the
construction of embankments, material which is surplus to requirements, or any material from
borrow areas.
4405 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR EMBANKMENTS
(a) Equipment
Fill material shall be compacted by the use of purpose made compaction equipment, which
shall apply uniform compaction effort across the full width of the machine. Each type of fill
material shall be compacted by equipment, which is suitable for the purpose.
(b) General
Fill, other than rock fill, shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 200mm compacted
thickness. Each layer shall extend over the full width of the embankment.

Fill material shall be placed in successive layers approximately parallel to the final road
surface. The construction of tapered layers shall be restricted to the bottom layers of
embankments where this may be unavoidable due to cross-fall, tapering out of fills or super
elevation of the final road surface.
(c) Spreading of Materials

Fill material shall be deposited on the compacted underlying surface, and evenly spread over
the whole of the designated area for the layer concerned in such quantity that the thickness of
any one layer, when measured after compaction, shall comply with the specified requirement.
Any new layer of less than 100mm in compacted thickness shall be mixed in to the previous
layer by scarifying to such a depth that the total compacted thickness of the new layer plus the
scarified portion of the previous layer will not be less than 100mm.
Rock fill shall be deposited and spread in horizontal layers not exceeding 750mm loose depth
and shall extend over the full width of the embankment except for specified external cover to
slopes. Each layer shall be blinded with granular material before the next layer is placed.
Rock fill shall not be used for the top 400mm of the embankment.
(d) Oversize Particles

Any oversize particles which are not broken down to comply with the requirements of Clause
4402(c), prior to compaction, shall be removed from the layer and disposed of in accordance
with the requirements of Clause 4207(e).
(e) Compaction
The moisture content of fill material, other than rock fill, at the time of compaction shall be
the optimum for the equipment being used and not more than 2% above the optimum for the
material determined in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T-180. Each layer of
fill shall be compacted to the following requirements:
1) For fill material other than rock fill: - not less than 95% of the maximum dry density
determined in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T-180;
2) For rock fill; Each layer of rock used as fill in embankment shall be systematically
compacted by at least 8 passes of a vibrating roller with a static load of at least 36 kN per 1
metre width of roll or a grid roller with a static load of at least 80 kN per 1 metre width of
roll or other equipment approved on site trials.
(f) Benching
Where the slope of the existing ground, in any direction, is greater than 20%, the existing
ground shall be excavated to form horizontal benches which shall be a minimum of 1 metre
wide or otherwise as described in the Contract. Each bench shall be excavated as the fill
material is compacted and the embankment is raised. This requirement shall also apply to
embankments constructed on rock.
Suitable material excavated from the benches shall be incorporated into the embankment.
(g) Constructing a pioneer layer

Where fill is to be constructed across water-logged or soft clayey ground exhibiting excessive
movement under normal compaction equipment and haulage trucks, and such conditions

preclude the effective compaction of the bottom fill layers, the engineer may direct that a
pioneer layer be constructed on the unstable ground. This layer shall be constructed by
successive loads of suitable coarse material being dumped and spread in a uniform layer with
a thickness just sufficient to provide a stable working platform for constructing the further fill
layers which are to be compacted to a controlled density. Light hauling equipment shall be
used, and, where necessary, end tipping for placing the material, and the layer shall be
compacted by light compaction equipment being used, which will give the most effective
compaction without the roadbed being overstressed. Pioneer layers will not require
compaction to a controlled density.
(h) Construction of Drainage Blankets

Drainage blankets shall be constructed with natural filter material complying with the
requirements of Clause 3107.
The surface on which the drainage blanket is to be constructed shall be smooth and even and
the filter material shall be spread to an even thickness as required and lightly compacted with
suitable rollers. The final surface of the drainage blanket shall be finished off true to line and
level.
(i) Construction of high fills

The construction of high fills may require special techniques to prevent the development of
excessive pore pressure and ensure the stability of such fills during and after construction.
These may include, inter alia, the selection of better class material for use in the bottom layers
of the fill, the construction of sand filter blankets and the strict control of moisture content
during compaction. Where these measures are required, such fills shall be designated as high
fills, which shall be constructed in accordance with the project specifications.
(j) Sand fill and sand filter blankets

Sand, which for the purposes of this requirement is specified as non- plastic sand with not less
than 95% passing through the 4.75 mm sieve, but with not more than 20% passing through the
0.075 mm sieve, shall be compacted to 100% of modified AASHTO density. Should more
than 20% pass through the 0.075 mm sieve, the sand shall be compacted to 95% of modified
AASHTO density.
At the bottom of fills, and sometimes at intermediate levels, the construction of sand filter
blankets may be required to facilitate the drainage of fills. Sand filter blankets shall be
constructed in accordance with the details on the drawings and shall normally consist of a
layer of selected sand with a suitable grading to provide effective drainage and to prevent the
infiltration of fill or roadbed material into the sand filter blanket. The surface on which the
sand filter blanket is to be constructed, shall be smooth and even and the sand shall he spread
evenly to the required thickness and be given a light compaction with suitable rollers. The
final surface of the sand filter blanket shall be finished off true to line and level.
The engineer may require the layers immediately below and above the filter blanket to be
constructed from selected soil or gravel. Sand filter blankets will be measured and paid for
separately.

(k) Construction of fills near structures

At all fills adjoining uncompleted structures such as bridges and large culverts, where the
construction of the fill and the backfilling behind the structure cannot be done simultaneously,
the fills shall be so constructed that the longitudinal slope of the surface of the fill at all stages
will form a continuous plane sloping towards ground level at the structure at a gradient not
exceeding 10%. When the structure is completed, the remaining portion of the fill shall be
similarly completed simultaneously with the backfilling behind the structure, while the
backfill behind the structure is being maintained at the same elevation as the adjoining fill. No
additional payment will be made for constructing fills in this manner outside the restricted
areas as defined in clause 8108
(l) Constructing toes for rook fill embankments

Where required rock fill embankments shall be protected by special toes which shall be
installed as shown on the drawings and as directed by the engineer.
The toe shall be constructed simultaneously with the rest of the fill and shall consist of
selected rock material varying in size between 150 mm and 750 mm. If shown on the
drawings, a layer of synthetic-fiber filter material and a sand blanket shall be installed at the
interface between the normal fill and the rock protection. Care shall be taken not to damage or
tear such material.
The outer part of the toe shall consist of larger boulders properly bedded by means of smaller
fragments so as to form a stable interlocking surface.
If placing with mechanical construction equipment does not achieve the required results, the
equipment shall be supplemented by manual labour to select, bar and place keystones in
between the larger boulders until the correct placing is achieved and the rocks are firmly
interlocked.
No additional payment will be made for the supply and installation of synthetic - fibre filter
material and sand blankets.
(m) Side Fill Material

Side fill shall be constructed to lines and cross sections described in the Contract and
compacted to the highest density possible by the use of the spreading equipment.
(n) Trial Areas

Prior to the commencement of normal working the Contractor shall construct a trial area of
not less than 500 square meters using the materials and equipment proposed for the work to
demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this Clause.

When specified in the contract, embankments constructed will be measured and paid for in
accordance with the terms set forth. Unless otherwise provided, embankments will not be paid
for directly, but will be considered a necessary part of the work paid for under items included
in the contract prescribed under Sections 203 and 204.
Item 44.01 widening of fills as specified in sub clause 4405 extra over
(a) Item 42.01(a)........................................................................................cubic metre (m3)

(b) Item 42.01(b) ....................................................................................... cubic metre (m3)

(c) Item 42.01 (c) Rock fill ....................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
(d) Item 42.01 (d) Toes for rock fill embankments ................................... cubic metre (m3)
(e) Item 42.01 (e) Pioneer layer ................................................................ cubic metre (m3)
(f) Item 42.01 (f) Sand filter blanket ....................................................... cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be a cubic metre of material placed in the widening of existing
fills.
The tendered rates shall be paid extra over the rates applicable to normal full width
construction, and shall include full compensation for all additional transport, equipment,
labour, supervision as well as any additional costs for the widening of fills, including the
cutting of benches.
The tendered rates shall also include full compensation for widening fills in restricted areas.
Item 44.02 Extra over item 42.03 for spoiling material excavated from benches
constructed for widening existing fills. ......................................cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be a cubic metre of material excavated from benches in the
widening of existing fills and which is spoiled on the instructions of the engineer.
The quantity shall be calculated in accordance with the authorized dimensions of the benches.
The tendered rate shall be paid extra over the rates applicable to item 42.03 and shall
include full compensation for all additional costs for spoiling the material including amongst
others all additional work, construction equipment, labour and supervision, irrespective of
the size and depth of the benches and the class of material
No extra-over payment will be made for work in restricted areas
Item 44.03 Extra over sub item 42.01(c) for correcting rock fills that are deficient in
fine material .................................................................................cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of corrected rock fill.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring and furnishing approved
material that passed through the 4.75 mm sieve, including all transport, for placing and
spreading, watering and rolling, for removing all excess fines from the surface of the rock fill,
and for all other incidentals necessary for completing the work as specified.
Item 44.04 Sand fills

Sand fills (as described in Sub-clause 4405(j), including free haul up to1.5 km):
(a) Non-plastic sand with up to 20% passing through the 0.075mm sieve compacted
to100% of modified AASHTO density ............................................................ cubic metre (m 3)
(b) Non-plastic sand with more than 20% passing through the 0.075 mm sieve
compacted to 95% of modified AASHTO density .......................................... cubic metre (m 3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of sand measured in fills as determined in
item 42.01 but with the difference that no distinction will be made between different layer
thicknesses in which the material is placed and compacted.

The tendered rates shall include full compensation for procuring, placing and compacting the
sand fills as well as 1.5 km free-haul.

DIVISION 4500 : FINISHING OF SLOPES
4501 GENERAL
(a) Scope
This Division covers all work in connection with the trimming and finishing of slopes to
cuttings and embankments.
(b) Dimensions
The dimensions shall be in accordance with the cross sections and details shown in the
Contract or as instructed by the Engineer.
4502 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR FINISHING OF SLOPES
(a) Equipment
Equipment used for the finishing of slopes shall be suitable for use on the surface to be
finished.
(b) General
The slopes of cuttings and embankments shall be trimmed by hand or by approved
mechanical means to remove loose material and to provide uniform slopes as described in the
Contract or as instructed by the Engineer. Such trimming shall be completed prior to
construction of the pavement.
Slopes of cuttings and embankments shall be finished to a uniform appearance. Except in
solid rock, the tops and bottoms of all slopes shall be rounded unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer. Slopes at transitions between cuttings and embankments shall be landscaped to
merge one with the other. Slopes shall be adjusted, if required by the Engineer, to avoid
unnecessary injury or destruction to standing trees and to harmonise with the existing
landscape features. The transition to such adjusted slopes shall be gradual.
Slopes of cuttings and embankments which are flatter than 1 in 4 shall have a standard of
finish that can be obtained by a motor grader.
4503 CUTTING SLOPES

The slopes of cuttings shall be trimmed to neat lines and to a standard that is generally
attainable with proper care and workmanship in the type of material concerned. All loose
rocks, stones, and other material shall be removed from the slopes. The final surface of slopes
shall have a rough surface suitable for subsequent grassing or which will allow the natural
vegetation to grow as described in the Contract.
4504 EMBANKMENT SLOPES

Embankment slopes shall be finished as described in the Contract. All loose rock and
uncompacted material shall be removed. The final surface of the slope shall depend on the

nature of the embankment material but shall be as smooth as is consistent with the material
used.
In the case of rock fill soft material shall be used to fill the interstices of the rock up to the
surface of the slope.

Performance of work prescribed in this section is not payable directly but shall be considered
as a subsidiary obligation of the contractor, covered under the contract unit prices for
performance of work under the other Earthwork payment items.

DIVISION 4600 : STABILIZATION
4601 SCOPE
This section covers the stabilization of materials used in the construction of the in-situ sub-
grade, sub-base and road base by the addition of a chemical stabilizing agent or by the
mechanical modification of the material by mixing various materials or by treating the
material with a bituminous stabilizing agent. It includes the furnishing, spreading and mixing-
in of the stabilizing agent or soil binder. In the case of chemically stabilized material the layer
is given a curing treatment.
4602 MATERIALS
(a) Material to be stabilized

Material to be stabilised shall be any naturally occurring cohesive or non-cohesive soil or
processed material, the properties of which can be permanently improved by the process of
stabilisation to comply with the requirements of this Specification for the relevant material. It
shall have a minimum coefficient of uniformity of 5.
(b) Chemical stabilizing agents

The stabilizing agent shall be either one or more of the following agents specified on the
drawings, in the schedule of quantities or in the project specifications or ordered by the
engineer.
(i) Road Lime

Road lime shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M-216. The use of unslaked lime
will not be permitted.
(ii) Ordinary Portland cement

Portland cement shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M- 85, Type II or
equivalent ISO standard class. The use of rapid-hardening Portland cement will not be
permitted unless approved by the Engineer.
(iii) Soil binder

Soil binder for mechanical modification shall be taken from within the limits of an approved
source and shall be subject to such requirements regarding grading, plasticity index or other
properties, given in Division 5100, 5200 and 5400 or as may be indicated on the borrow-pit
plans, or prescribed by the engineer.
(iv) Material for bituminous stabilization

Bituminous stabilizing agents
The bituminous stabilizing agent shall be one or more of the following agents as specified on
the Drawings, in the Schedule of Quantities or in the project specifications, or as may be
instructed by the engineer, and shall comply with the appropriate AASHTO specification
given below:

Stable-grade bituminous emulsion: (60% net bitumen) AASHTO M- 140 (anionic) or

AASHTO M-208 (cationic)
Fillers
Fillers such as road lime or Portland cement added for improving adhesion and/or stability
shall comply with the requirements of sub-clause 4602(b) above.
Aggregate
Material for bituminous stabilization shall be subject to the requirements prescribed for
chemically stabilized gravel or crushed-stone base, with the provision that the plasticity index
shall not exceed 6 after the addition of chemical stabilizing agent (if required) and before
stabilization.
In the case of gravel material, the percentage of material smaller than 0.075 mm shall not
exceed 12%. No gravel from weathered igneous rock may be used, unless it is prescribed in
the project specifications.
Where gravel material or crushed stone has been recovered from existing pavements, the
engineer may allow up to 15% material smaller than 0.075 mm to be present in material
intended for bituminous stabilization.
Where specified in the project specifications, material from existing pavements mixed with
existing bituminous surfacing material may be used in bituminous stabilized base where so
approved by the engineer, in writing. However, the material from existing surfacing shall not
be more than 30% by volume, and no fragment shall be more than 37.5 mm in size.
(v) General
From the time of purchase to the time of use, all stabilizing agents shall be kept under proper
cover and protected from moisture.
Consignments of these materials shall be used in the same sequence as they are delivered to
the Works. Stocks, which may have been stored on site for longer periods than three months,
shall not be used in the Work, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer.
4603 CHEMICAL STABILIZATION
(a) Preparation of Layer

The material to be stabilized shall be prepared and placed as specified in the respective
Divisions for sub grade, sub-bases and bases.
(b) Application of Stabilizing Agent

After preparation of the layer of soil or gravel, the stabilizing agent shall be spread uniformly
over the full width of the layer by means of an approved type of mechanical spreader at the
prescribed rate of application in a continuous operation or it may be spread by hand.
When spreading is done by hand, pockets or bags of stabilizing agent shall be accurately
spaced at equal intervals along the section to be stabilized so as to provide the specified rate
of application. The bags shall be opened and the stabilizing agent spread in transverse rows
across the full specified width of stabilization. Such spreading shall be done as evenly as
possible, and uniform distribution of the stabilizing agent over the entire surface to be treated

shall then be obtained by leveling-off the rows of stabilizing agent by means of hand rakes
and/or screeds.
The Engineer may permit spreading of the hand spotted stabilizing agent by means of motor
grader, provided he is satisfied that an even distribution of stabilizing agent is obtained.
(c) Mixing in of stabilizing agent

Immediately after the stabilizing agent has been spread, it shall be mixed with the material for
the full depth of treatment. Care shall be exercised not to disturb the compacted layer under-
neath, nor to mix the agent below the desired depth. Mixing shall be continued and repeated
as often as may be required to ensure a thorough, uniform and intimate mix of the soil or
gravel and stabilizing agent over the full width and depth of material to be treated and until
the resulting mixture is homogeneous and of uniform appearance throughout. Mixing should
be completed as quickly as possible.
Mixing shall be done by grader, disc harrow, rotary mixer or equivalent plant. Working over
the full area and depth of the layer to be stabilized by means of successive passes of the
equipment
Mixing may also be done in central batch-mixing plants, but the contractor will not be entitled
to payment for additional overhaul or incidentals resulting from such procedure.
(d) Watering
Immediately after the stabilizing agent has been properly mixed with the material, the
moisture content of the mixture shall be determined and the required amount of water. The
amount of water to be added shall be sufficient to bring the mixed material to the optimum
moisture content for the compaction equipment used and the density required in the respective
Divisions for sub grade, sub-bases and bases.
Each application or increment of water shall be well mixed with the material so as to avoid
concentration of water near the surface or flow of water over the surface of the layer.
Particular care shall be exercised to ensure uniform and satisfactory moisture distribution over
the full depth, width and length of the section being stabilized and to prevent any portion of
the work from getting excessively wet after the stabilizing agent has been added. Any portion
of the work that becomes too wet after the stabilizing agent has been added and before the
mixture has been compacted will be rejected and such portions shall be scarified, re-
stabilized, re-compacted and again finished off in accordance with the requirements herein
specified, all at the expense of the Contractor.
The water supply and watering equipment shall be adequate to ensure that all water required
is added and mixed with the material being treated within a short enough period to enable
compaction and finishing to be completed within the period specified in Sub-clause 4603(H)
below.
(e) Compaction
The Compaction provisions of the respective Divisions for sub grade, sub-bases and bases
shall apply.
During compaction, loss of moisture through evaporation shall be corrected by further light
applications of water. At the completion of the primary compaction the surface shall be cut to
the finished level and all cuttings removed from the surface before final rolling.

Final rolling shall be done with equipment that will give a smooth surface conforming to the
surface tolerance specified. The minimum compaction requirements shall be as specified for
the particular layer in the various Divisions of these Specifications.
A sufficient number of compacting units shall be employed on the work to ensure that from
the time the stabilizing agent is first applied to the layer, the process of mixing, applying
water, compaction, shaping and final finishing, is completed within the periods specified in
Sub-clause 4603(h) below.
Vibrating rollers will only be used with the written approval of the Engineer.
(f) Finishing at Junctions

Any finished portion of the stabilized layer adjacent to new work, and which is used as a
turn-around area by equipment in constructing the adjoining section, shall be provided with a
protective cover of soil or gravel at least 100 mm in thickness over a sufficient length to
prevent damage to work already completed.
At the time of final finishing of the adjoining section, such cover shall be removed to permit
the making of a smooth joint at the junction of the different section.
Material in the vicinity of the joint, which cannot be processed satisfactorily with normal
construction equipment, shall be mixed and compacted by hand or with suitable
hand-operated machines.
(g) Curing of Stabilized Work

The stabilized layer shall be protected against rapid drying out for at least seven days
following completion of the layer.
The methods of protection may be any one or more of the following:
1) Immediately following completion, the stabilized layer shall be kept continuously wet or
damp by spraying with water at frequent intervals. This method will be permitted for up to a
maximum period of 24 hours after which time one of the methods (2), (3), or (4) must be
applied. The Contractor is warned that the Engineer in his sole discretion may reject work that
is not kept continuously wet or damp but subjected to wet-dry cycles.
2) The stabilized layer shall be covered with the material required for the layer on top thereof
whilst the stabilized layer is still in a wet or damp condition. The material forming the
protective layer shall be watered at such intervals as may be required to keep the stabilized
layer continuously wet or damp, and in dry weather this shall be done at least once in every 24
hours.
3) The layer shall be covered with an approved curing membrane applied at the rate directed
by the Engineer.
4) Where bituminous surfacing is specified on top of the stabilized base or sub-base, the
prime or tack coat together with the first application of bituminous surfacing may be utilized
as a curing membrane and shall be applied as specified in Division 6100 of these
Specifications.
5) The stabilized layer shall be kept continuously wet for seven days by an effective fog-
spraying system that will not damage the surface of the layer or by any other system approved
by the Engineer. During this period the application of water shall be so controlled that it will
not unduly wet the layer but at the same time will not allow the layer to dry out. Layers

allowed to dry out may be rejected if damaged thereby. In regard to this method payment will
be made only for the application of water.
No additional payment will be made for curing as described above except that the application
of a curing membrane or water in accordance with method (5) above will be paid for when the
application of such methods has been ordered by the engineer.
(h) Construction Limitations

The stabilizing agent shall only be applied to such an area that all processing, watering,
compacting and finishing can be completed within the period stated hereunder:
Table 4600/1 Maximum time for completion in stabilization
Stabilizing Agent Maximum time for completion

after stabilizing agent comes into
contact with the material to be
stabilized.
Ordinary Portland 8 hours
cement, and/or approved
Portland cement blends
Lime 10 hours
No stabilizing agent shall be applied when the moisture content of the material to be stabilized
exceeds the optimum moisture for the compaction equipment proposed by more than 2% of
the dry mass of the materials.
No stabilization shall be done during wet weather or when, in the opinion of the Engineer,
windy conditions may adversely affect the stabilizing operations.
Any rain falling on the working area during the process of stabilization may be sufficient
cause for the Engineer to order such areas as are affected to be reconstructed at the
Contractor’s own cost.
No traffic or any equipment not actually used in the processing of the layer shall be allowed to
pass over the freshly spread stabilizing agent. Only equipment required for curing or priming
shall be allowed over the treated layers during the specified curing period.
4604 MECHANICAL MODIFICATION

Mechanical modification shall consist of the addition of an approved soil binder to material to
improve its properties, or the mixing of material originating from various sources, as
described hereafter.
(a) Modifying soil and gravel by the addition of a soil binder

The modification of soils and gravels, by the addition of a soil binder [4602 (b)], shall consist
of the addition of an approved soil binder to the material, in order to improve the properties of
the material.
This process involves the addition and mixing of an approved soil binder, which shall not
exceed 20% by mass of the total mixture, to the material to be improved.

The material to be treated shall be prepared and spread to the required loose thickness as
specified in the respective Divisions for sub grade, sub-bases and bases.
An approved binder material shall then be spread over the prepared material at the required
rate, and the materials shall be mixed by a suitable method by motor grader, disc harrow
and/or other suitable plant until the binder material is uniformly and intimately mixed with the
material being treated.
The mixed materials shall then be watered, mixed and compacted as described in the
respective Divisions for sub grade, sub-bases and bases.
(b) Mixing materials from various sources

The mixing of materials from various sources requires the material from the first source to be
dumped onto the road, prepared, broken down and spread in a layer of uniform thickness,
after which it is lightly rolled with a steel-wheeled roller.
The material from the second source shall then be dumped onto the road, prepared, broken
down and evenly spread, after which the two materials shall be thoroughly mixed.
The mixing of materials from different sources will apply only when the smallest component
of the mixture exceeds 20% of the total mass of the mixture. If not, the process will be
regarded as the addition of a soil binder as described above in sub-clause (A).
(c) Recombining recovered material

Where specified in the project specifications or required by the Engineer, recovered material
shall be recombined to comply with the requirements of the layer for which it is destined.
4605 BITUMINOUS STABILIZATION
(a) Preparing the material

The material to be stabilized shall be prepared and placed as specified in the respective
Divisions for sub grade, sub-bases and bases, and shall be ploughed into furrows.
The moisture content of the material shall be just below the optimum moisture content during
mixing-in of the stabilizing agent. Immediately before the stabilizing agent is applied, the
material shall again be lightly wetted. No dry material whatsoever may then be present.
(b) Mixing in the additive

Where an additive (lime, cement, etc.) has been specified, or if so required by the engineer, it
shall first be spread and mixed in as described in Sub-clause 4603(c). Separate payment will
be made for providing, applying and mixing-in the additives.
(c) Heating and diluting the bituminous stabilizing agent

The bituminous stabilizing agent shall be heated as specified in Division 6300. During
dilution of the bituminous emulsion with water, care shall be taken to prevent its breaking.
This will mean that clean water shall be added gradually during constant stirring of the
emulsion or its circulation by pumps.

(d) Applying the stabilizing agent

After preparing the material, the stabilizing agent shall be uniformly applied by an approved
binder distributor in a continuous process at the prescribed rate of application over the full
area of the layer.
Multiple applications may be necessary. In such cases it shall be ensured that the moisture
escaping on account of drying-out is replaced by water being applied. Care shall be taken not
to allow the stabilizing agent to run from the layer before it has been mixed in.
The stabilizing agent shall be diluted with water to obtain a better distribution.
In cases where, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is impracticable to apply the stabilizing agent
by mechanical binder distributor, hand distributors may be used.
Where so required by the Engineer, a certain part (not more than 10% of the total quantity) of
the stabilizing agent shall be sprayed onto the surface in a diluted form (with a maximum of 2
parts of water to 1 part of bituminous stabilizing agent) immediately, before the final finishing
of the layer.
The stabilizing agent shall, immediately after each application, be mixed with the loose
material, to the full depth of the treated layer. This work shall be done carefully so as not to
disturb the underlying compacted layer and as not to mix in the stabilizing agent deeper than
the required depth.
During mixing-in, the moisture content of the material shall be immediately below or at
optimum moisture content.
Mixing shall be proceeded with for so long as may be necessary and shall be repeated as
frequently as may be necessary to ensure the thorough, uniform and proper mixing of the
gravel or the aggregate and the stabilizing agent over the full surface and depth of the material
to be treated, until the resulting mixture is homogeneous and has the same appearance
throughout, without any individual spots of the stabilizing agent being visible, and until the
mixture has reached the required moisture content of compaction.
Mixing shall be done by road grader, disc harrow, rotary mixer or similar plant, which will
work the layer to be stabilized by way of successive passes over its full surface and depth.
Mixing may also be done in a central batch-mixing plant, but the contractor shall not be
entitled to payment for extra overhaul or other costs arising from this method of work.
(e) Compaction
The provisions of sub-clause 4603(e) shall apply.
The moisture content during the compaction of stabilized layers shall not exceed the optimum
of the gravel or aggregate. However, the Engineer may amend these required moisture
contents.
Where the required densities for a pavement layer in accordance with AASHTO density is
specified, the field densities shall be determined on the material as obtained from the road,
and the field densities shall not be adjusted on account of the presence of bituminous
stabilizing agents.

(f) Finishing at Junctions

The junctions of sections shall be finished in accordance with sub-clause 4603(f) for obtaining
an even and well-compacted joint and so as not to cause damage to the adjacent parts of the
sections.
(g) Construction limitations

When gravel is being stabilized with a bituminous emulsion, the layer shall be mixed and
compacted within 24 hours.
Limited slushing shall be done within 48 hours.
Where crushed stone is stabilized with bituminous emulsion and used for repairing sub-base
or base layers, it shall be mixed in, placed, and compacted within 5 hours.
4606 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
(a) Rate of Application

The average rate of application of chemical stabilizing agents, when applied by mechanical
bulk spreading equipment and measured by the “canvas patch” or “trays” method, shall be
equal to the specified rate of application + 5% measured over any section not exceeding 1.0
km in length and no single measurement shall show a value of more than 20% below the
specified rate.
When hand spotted, stabilizing agents shall be spread exactly to the specified rate of
application.
The average rate of application of a bituminous stabilizing agent as measured in the binder
distributor shall be within 5% of the specified rate of application.
(b) Uniformity of mix

The cementitious binder content of the mixed material as determined on 50 samples per lot
when sampled and tested as specified by the Engineer, shall be within the following limits:
The average cementitious binder content of all 50 samples shall not be less then 95% of the
specified binder content.
Not more than 9 samples out of the 50 shall show a cementitious binder content lower than
70% of the specified binder content.
The test results shall be adjusted to allow for the presence, in the material to be stabilized, of
minerals that affect the test results. The above requirements for uniformity of mix shall only
be applied provided that the variation in these adjustments is within the specified limits.
4607 CONSTRUCTION OF TRIAL SECTION

Before the Contractor commences with the construction of stabilized layers, he shall
demonstrate by constructing a trial section that the equipment and procedure he proposes to
use will result in him constructing the layers in accordance with these specifications.
The trial section shall be at least 2,000 m2 in area and shall be constructed in its proper
position in the pavement. Only when such a trial section has been satisfactorily constructed

and accepted will the contractor be permitted to proceed with the stabilized layer in the
permanent work.
In the event of the trial section being unsuccessful, the Contractor shall remove the trial
section should the engineer so require.
The trial section shall be paid for separately only when it complies with all the requirements
of these specifications and has been approved by the Engineer.
After approval has been obtained, the mixing process and equipment shall remain unaltered
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
4608 STABILIZATION WORK IN RESTRICTED AREAS
(a) General requirements

Suitable equipment and methods acceptable to the Engineer shall be used in restricted areas so
that the required densities will met throughout the thickness of the layer. If necessary, the
layers shall be placed in thicknesses, which are less than the specified layer thickness.
Where existing and new work are joined (longitudinal joints - and others) material shall be
satisfactorily mixed and compacted without any permeable or loose patches.
In regard to the curing of stabilized layers in restricted areas the construction of the
subsequent layers may be commenced as soon as practicable with the permission of the
engineer.
(b) Chemical stabilization

Where pavement layers are to be widened no chemical stabilizing agent may be spread or
mixed beyond the required width.
The contractor will not be permitted to mix material for stabilization on adjacent surfaces
unless he has obtained prior permission from the engineer in writing.
Where the existing surfaces of the road may not be used for this purpose the contractor shall
apply other approved methods of mixing.
Payment over and above payment for work in restricted areas will not be considered for
additional overhaul or other - costs arising from this manner of mixing or working.
(c) Bituminous stabilization

No mixing of material with bituminous stabilizing agent will be permitted on the existing
surfacing without the written permission of the engineer, and then only where such surface is
required to be resealed or provided with a resurfacing layer.
Where restricted areas are such that mixing in them will not be practicable and/or mixing on
adjacent surfaces is not permitted, mixing shall be done in a central mixing plant. In the case
of smaller quantities, approved concrete mixers may be used.
Payment over and above payment for work in restricted areas will not be considered for
additional overhaul or other costs arising from this manner of mixing or working.

4609 QUALITY CONTROL
(a) Process Control
(i) Stabilizing Agent

The Contractor shall keep detailed records of the quantities of stabilizing agent applied to the
road and the volumes of material stabilized, and make these records available to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall also monitor the rate of application when using bulk-spreading
equipment by taking a canvas patch or tray every 200 m, unless, with the Engineer’s
permission, this may be reduced.
When using a bulk spreader on site the first time or after it has been adjusted or repaired,
spread rate shall be checked by at least five tests over a short distance as practicable with the
equipment running at normal speed without stops. Spreading shall not continue on a large
scale until the spread rate is within allowable tolerances.
(ii) Compaction
The requirements for process control in respect of compaction shall be the same as stated for
the unstabilized layers in each section. Densities shall be determined as described in
AASHTO T 180.
Unless noted otherwise the top 600 mm of embankment/ fill shall be compacted to 95 % of
the maximum density, as determined by the test method given in (ii-1) above, and all material
below the top 600 mm shall be compacted to 90 % of the maximum dry density.
(b) Routine Inspection and Testing

Routine inspections will be carried out by the Engineer to test the quality of materials and
workmanship for compliance with the requirements of this Division.
Compliance with the requirements for the compaction of stabilized materials shall be as
specified in the relevant section for each layer.
The requirements for uniformity of mix and rate of application shall be deemed to have been
complied with if the mixture meets with the requirements of Clause 4606.
When the tests for uniformity of mix are not applicable as stated in Sub-clause 4606(B), the
material shall be visually appraised for uniformity of mix.
(c) Defective Work or Materials

Any materials or work which do not comply with the requirements specified, shall be
removed and replaced with new materials or work complying with the specified requirements
OR
If the Engineer permits, shall be repaired as specified in Clause 1208, so that after being
repaired it will comply with the specified requirements.
In cases where, in the opinion of the engineer it is impracticable to apply the stabilizing agent
by mechanical binder distributor, hand distributors may be used.


Items 46.10, 46.11 and 46.12 are applicable solely to stabilization work that has to be
executed in a restricted area of which the width is less than 3.0 m or the length is less than
150.0 m.
Item 46.01 Chemical stabilization (layer thickness indicated) extra over unstabilized
compacted layers (layer to be stabilized indicated).................cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of stabilized material, the quantity of which
shall be determined in accordance with the authorized dimensions of the layers treated as
instructed by the engineer.
The tendered rates for chemical stabilization shall be paid as extra over the rates tendered for
constructing the unstabilized layers. The tendered rates shall therefore include full
compensation for spreading and mixing the stabilizing agent, curing the stabilized sections,
any extra water required, and all materials, supervision, labour, plant, equipment, tools and
incidentals (extra over those provided for in the rates tendered for constructing the
unstabilized layer) necessary for completing the specified work, but excluding the cost of
supplying the stabilizing agent. No distinction will be made in respect of the type of
stabilizing agent used, the time for completion or the specific layer being stabilized, and the
extra over rate tendered shall apply to any combination thereof. The engineer reserves to
himself the right to vary the thickness of the layer to be stabilized by up to 20 mm, and the
contract rate for this work shall not be amended by such change.
Item 46.02 Chemical stabilizing agent:

(i) Ordinary Portland cement. ................................................................................. .ton (t)
(ii) Portland blast-furnace cement ............................................................................. .ton (t)
(iii) Road lime (type indicated). .................................................................................. ton (t)
(iv) Other stabilizing agents (type specified) .............................................................. ton (t)
The unit of measurement shall be the ton of stabilizing agent. Measurement shall distinguish
between the various stabilizing agents used. When mixtures of cement or lime are used, the
quantity of each constituent shall be measured separately and not the mixture as a whole.
The quantity will be determined in accordance with the authorized rate of application.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for providing the stabilizing agent at the
works, irrespective of the rate of application specified or ordered by the engineer, but shall
make allowance for the differences in mixing and compaction times specified for various
stabilizing agents.
Item 46.03 Mechanical modification (extra over untreated layer):

(i) By adding a soil binder........................................................................ cubic meter (m3)
(ii) By mixing materials from different sources....................................... cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of compacted material that has been
mechanically modified as specified in clause 4604, and the quantity shall be calculated in
accordance with the authorized dimensions of the mechanically modified layer.
The tendered rates for mechanical modification shall be paid as extra over the rate for the
construction of an untreated layer and shall include full compensation for all the work, plant
and other incidentals necessary for supplying and hauling the material for a distance of 1.0

km, and for spreading the soil binder and mixing it with the material to be treated or for
mixing materials from different sources as specified.
The addition of material during a crushing or screening process, whether it is specially
imported material, which is not the product of the crushing process or whether it is crushed
material screened out and then replaced in part or as a whole, will not be regarded as
treatment with soil binder for measurement and payment purposes but will be regarded as part
of the process of producing crushed stone for sub-base, base or other construction work. The
cost of which shall be included in the tendered rates for those items of work.
Item 46.04 Provision and application of water for curing.................................. kilolitre (kl)
The unit of measurement shall be the kilolitre of water provided and applied in accordance
with the engineer’s instructions for curing the stabilized layer as specified in sub-clause
4603(g)(5).
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for furnishing, transporting and applying the
water and for the provision of spraying equipment. Water applied within the first 24 hours of
completion of the stabilized layer will not be calculated for payment.
Item 46.05 Curing by covering with the subsequent layer. ................... .square meter (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square meter of stabilized pavement layer being cured
by covering it with the subsequent layer as specified in sub-clause 4603(g)(2). The quantity
will be determined by the authorized dimensions of the layer to be treated.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for incidentals in respect of applying the
subsequent layer for curing as specified, including the cost of regularly supplying and
applying water.
Item 46.06 Bituminous stabilization (extra over the untreated layer) .... .cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of material stabilized: the quantity shall be
determined in accordance with the authorized dimensions of the completed layer.
The tendered rate for bituminous stabilization shall be paid extra over the rates for
constructing the untreated layer and sha11 include full compensation for all incidentals,
excepting the compensation covered by items 46.07 and 46.08, which are necessary for
treating the material as specified. No distinction shall be made in regard to the type of
bituminous stabilizer used, the time for completion, and the particular layer to be stabilized
and the tendered extra rate shall apply to any combination thereof. The engineer reserves to
himself the right to alter the thickness of the layer to be stabilized, and the contract rates will
remain applicable to all layer thicknesses between the limits of 100 mm and 200 mm.
Item 46.07 Bituminous stabilizing agent:

(i) Anionic stable grade bituminous emulsion (60% net bitumen).......................... liter (l)
(ii) Cationic stable grade bituminous emulsion (60% net bitumen) ........................ liter (l)
(iii) Other (specify). ................................................................................................... liter (l)
The unit of measurement shall be the liter of bituminous stabilizing agent applied on the
instruction of the engineer.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for providing, diluting and applying the
stabilizing agent, irrespective of the prescribed rate of application.

Item 46.08 Additive for bituminous stabilization:

(i) Ordinary Portland cement. .................................................................................. .ton (t)
(ii) Road lime ........................................................................................................... ..ton (t)
The unit of measurement shall be the ton of additive applied on the Instruction of the
engineer.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for providing and spreading the additive
and for the incidentals required for mixing it in. The tendered rates shall apply irrespective of
the percentage of additive prescribed between the limits of 0.5% and 1.5% by mass.
Item 46.09 Extra over item 46.01 for chemical stabilization in restricted areas:
(i) Mixing in mechanical mixers. ............................................................. cubic meter (m3)
(ii) In situ mixing....................................................................................... cubic meter (m3)
(iii) Mixing as for in situ mixing but on adjacent surfaces. ....................... cubic meter (m3)
Item 46.10 Extra over item 46.03 for mechanical modification in restricted areas:
(i) Mixing in mechanical mixers ............................................................. cubic meter (m3)
(ii) In situ mixing ..................................................................................... cubic meter (m3)
(iii) Mixing as for in situ mixing but on adjacent surfaces ........................ cubic meter (m3)
Item 46.11 Extra over item 46.06 for bituminous stabilization in restricted areas:
(i) Mixing in mechanical mixers. ............................................................. cubic meter (m3)
(ii) In situ mixing....................................................................................... cubic meter (m3)
(iii) Mixing as for in situ mixing but on adjacent surfaces ........................ cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be a cubic meter of chemically stabilized or modified material,
mechanically modified material, or bituminous stabilized material in restricted areas measured
in place after placement irrespective of the layer treated. Payment shall apply only to bases,
sub-bases and selected layers.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for all additional costs for executing the
work in restricted areas, and shall amongst others include full compensation for the additional
costs for applying stabilizing agents or soil binders in restricted areas, as well as for curing
chemically stabilized layers in restricted areas (irrespective of the method of curing), and the
application of additives for bituminous stabilization in restricted areas.
Payment under item 46.09 will not distinguish between the various types of chemical
stabilizing agents.
Payment under item 46.10 will not distinguish between the addition of soil binder and the
mixing of material from various sources.
Payment under item 46.11 will not distinguish between the various types of bituminous
stabilizing agents or various types of additives.
Item 46.12 Extra over items 46.01 and 46.06 for trial sections. ................cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of compacted stabilized layer that has been
placed as a trial section and approved by the engineer.

The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all additional work, testing and
incidentals associated with the construction of an approved trial section as specified. It shall
also include full compensation for trial sections removed as excess/unsatisfactory material.

SERIES 5000: SUBBASE ROAD BASE

AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE
TABLE OF CONTENT
TABLES AND FIGURES................................................................................................................. 6
DIVISION 5100: SUB-BASES ....................................................................................................... 7
5101 Scope..................................................................................................................................7
5102 Materials.............................................................................................................................7
5103 Material Sources for Sub-Bases.........................................................................................7
5104 Material Requirements For Gravel Sub-Base ..................................................................7
(a) General .....................................................................................................................7
(b) Grading Limits..........................................................................................................7
(c) Grading Modulus......................................................................................................8
(d) Plasticity Index .........................................................................................................8
(e) Californian Bearing Ratio (CBR).............................................................................8
(f) Compaction requirements.........................................................................................8
(g) Los Angeles Abrasion ..............................................................................................9
5105 Material Requirements For Crushed Stone Sub-Base........................................................9
(a) General .....................................................................................................................9
(b) Grading Limits..........................................................................................................9
(c) Grading Modulus....................................................................................................10
(d) Plasticity Index (PI) ................................................................................................10
(e) Compaction Requirements .....................................................................................10
(f) Los Angeles Abrasion ............................................................................................10
(g) Particle shape; Flakiness Index...............................................................................10
5106 Construction Requirements For Sub-Bases Using Recycled Material ............................10
(a) General ...................................................................................................................10
(b) Milling/Scarifying ..................................................................................................10
(c) Placing, Spreading and Compacting.......................................................................11
5107 Construction Requirements..............................................................................................11
(a) General. ..................................................................................................................11
(b) Stabilization ............................................................................................................11
(c) Trial Areas ..............................................................................................................11
(d) Traffic on Sub-base ................................................................................................11
5108 Protection and Maintenance.............................................................................................12
5109 Sub-Base as a Filter or Separating Layer.........................................................................12
5110 Classification of Layers for Payment Purposes ...............................................................12
5111 Construction Tolerances ..................................................................................................12
(a) Levels .....................................................................................................................12
(b) Width ......................................................................................................................13
(c) Thickness ................................................................................................................13

(d) Cross Section ......................................................................................................... 13

U U U U
5112 Testing ............................................................................................................................. 13

(a) Process Control ...................................................................................................... 13
(b) Routine Inspection and Testing.............................................................................. 13
5113 Measurement And Payment ............................................................................................ 14
Item 51.01 Sub-base layer constructed from gravel or Crushed stone:.......................... 14
Item 51.02 Extra over Pay item 51.01 for excavation of material in: ............................ 15
Item 51.03 Sub-base layer constructed from gravel or crushed stone obtained from
existing pavement layers:....................................................................................... 15
Item 51.04 In situ reconstruction of existing Sub-base layer as:.................................... 16
Item 51.05 Sub-base layer constructed Extra over Pay item 51.03 (a),(b),(c)&(d) and
Pay item 51.04 (a),(b)&(c) from recovered pavement material mixed with existing
bituminous surfacing material................................................................................ 17
Item 51.06 Extra over Pay item 51.04 for adding extra material ................................... 17
Item 51.07 Extra over Pay item 51.04 for blading the material to windrow.................. 18
Item 51.08 Extra over Pay item 51.03 for excavating material in existing pavement
layers in restricted areas......................................................................................... 18
Item 51.09 Compacting the floors of pavement excavations ......................................... 18
Item 51.10 Watering the pavement excavation floor ..................................................... 19
Item 51.11 Variations in the number of roller passes applicable to pay item 51.09 ...... 19
Item 51.12 Extra over Pay item 51.09 for compacting pavement excavation floor in
restricted areas........................................................................................................ 19
DIVISION 5200: ROAD BASES ...................................................................................................20
5201 Scope ............................................................................................................................... 20

5202 Dimensions ...................................................................................................................... 20
5203 Materials .......................................................................................................................... 20
(a) Sources of Material ................................................................................................ 20
(b) Road Base Material Types ..................................................................................... 20
5204 Material Requirements For Crushed Rock Or Stone....................................................... 20
(a) General ................................................................................................................... 20
(b) Grading................................................................................................................... 20
(c) Plasticity Index....................................................................................................... 21
(d) Californian Bearing Ratio (CBR) .......................................................................... 21
(e) Aggregate Crushing Value (ACV)......................................................................... 21
(f) Mechanical Strength Requirements(TFVT)........................................................... 21
(g) Flakiness Index ...................................................................................................... 22
5205 Material Requirements for Naturally Occurring Granular Materials .............................. 22
(a) General ................................................................................................................... 22
(b) Grading................................................................................................................... 22
(c) Plasticity Index....................................................................................................... 23
(d) Californian Bearing Ratio (CBR) .......................................................................... 23
(e) Aggregate Crushing Value (ACV)......................................................................... 23
(f) Abrasion ................................................................................................................. 23
(g) Flakiness Index ...................................................................................................... 23
(h) Crushed Ratio......................................................................................................... 24
(i) Grading Modulus ................................................................................................... 24
5206 Material Requirements for Dense Bitumen Macadam .................................................... 24
(a) Coarse Aggregates ................................................................................................. 24

(b) Fine Aggregate .......................................................................................................25

U U U U
(c) Filler .......................................................................................................................25

(d) Binder .....................................................................................................................25
5207 Material Requirements For Mixed Bitumen Macadam ...................................................25
(a) Combined Aggregate Grading................................................................................25
(b) Mix Design Parameters for Dense Bitumen Macadam ..........................................26
5208 Construction Requirements For Crushed Rock And Crushed Boulder Road Bases........27
(a) Equipment...............................................................................................................27
(b) Placing and Compaction.........................................................................................27
(c) Stabilization ............................................................................................................28
(d) Trial Sections..........................................................................................................28
(e) Traffic on Road base...............................................................................................28
5209 Construction Requirements For Crushed Gravel Road Base...........................................29
(a) Equipment...............................................................................................................29
(c) Stabilization ............................................................................................................30
(d) Trial Sections..........................................................................................................30
(e) Traffic on Road Base..............................................................................................30
5210 Construction Requirements For Dense Bitumen Macadam Road Base ..........................30
(a) Equipment...............................................................................................................30
(c) Trial Sections..........................................................................................................32
(d) Traffic on Road Base..............................................................................................32
(e) Weather Limitations ...............................................................................................33
5211 Construction Tolerances ..................................................................................................33
(a) Level and Grade......................................................................................................33
(b) Width ......................................................................................................................33
(c) Thickness ................................................................................................................33
(d) Cross Section ..........................................................................................................34
5212 Measurement And Payment .............................................................................................34
Item 52.01 Base layer construction.................................................................................34
Item 52.02 Extra over Pay Item 52.1 for excavation of material....................................35
Item 52.03 Base layer constructed from from existing pavement layers........................35
Item 52.04 In situ reconstruction of existing base layer ................................................37
Item 52.05 Extra over Pay item 52.04 for adding extra material....................................38
Item 52.06 Extra over Pay item 52.04 for t blading the material to windrow ................39
layers in restricted areas: ........................................................................................39
Item 52.08 Compacting the floors of pavement excavations..........................................39
Item 52.09 Watering the pavement excavation floor......................................................40
Item 52.10 Variations in the number of roller passes applicable to pay item 52.08.......40
restricted areas ........................................................................................................40
Item 52.12 Trial Sections..............................................................................................40
Note on additional Pay Items ...................................................................................................41
DIVISION 5300: BREAKING UP EXISTING PAVEMENT LAYERS ............................................... 42
5301 Scope................................................................................................................................42
5302 Selecting The Material .....................................................................................................42

5303 Classifying The Material ................................................................................................. 42

U U U U
(a) Existing bituminous material ................................................................................. 42

(b) Non-cemented material .......................................................................................... 42
(c) Cemented material ................................................................................................. 42
5304 Plant And Equipment ...................................................................................................... 42
(a) General ................................................................................................................... 42
(b) Milling equipment.................................................................................................. 43
5305 Construction .................................................................................................................... 43
(a) General ................................................................................................................... 43
(b) Milling.................................................................................................................... 44
5306 Storing Recovered Pavement Material............................................................................ 45
General ............................................................................................................................ 46
Item 53.01 Excavating and removing existing bituminous material.............................. 47
Item 53.02 Milling out existing bituminous material..................................................... 47
Item 53.03 Excavating and spoiling material from an existing pavement and/or the
underlying fill......................................................................................................... 48
Item 53.04 Sawing or cutting asphalt or cemented pavement layers ............................. 48
Item 53.05 Removing the remaining asphalt from the underlying layer........................ 48
Item 53.06 Preparing stockpile sites............................................................................... 49
DIVISION 5400: GRAVEL WEARING COURSE AND GRAVEL SHOULDERS ................................50
5401 Scope ............................................................................................................................... 50

5402 Sources of Material.......................................................................................................... 50
5403 Material Requirements for Gravel Wearing Course........................................................ 50
(a) General ................................................................................................................... 50
(b) Grading................................................................................................................... 50
(c) Gravel Wearing Course Material Specification ..................................................... 51
5404 Construction Requirements For Gravel Wearing Course................................................ 52
(a) Equipment .............................................................................................................. 52
(b) Crushing and Screening ......................................................................................... 52
(c) Transport, Placing and Spreading .......................................................................... 53
(d) Compaction ............................................................................................................ 53
(e) Trial Areas.............................................................................................................. 53
5405 Construction Tolerances .................................................................................................. 53
5406 Testing ............................................................................................................................. 54
Item 54.01 Gravel Wearing course and Shoulder .......................................................... 55
Item 54.02 Extra over Pay item 54.01 for excavation of material in ............................. 55
Item 54.03 Gravel Wearing course and Shoulder constructed from gravel obtained from
existing pavement layers........................................................................................ 56
Item 54.04 In situ reconstruction of existing gravel wearing course and shoulder....... 57
Item 54.05 Extra over Pay item 54.04 for adding extra material .................................. 57
Item 54.06 Extra over Pay item 54.04 for blading the material to windrow.................. 58
layers in restricted areas ......................................................................................... 58
Item 54.08 Compacting the floors of pavement excavations ......................................... 58
Item 54.09 Watering the pavement excavation floor ..................................................... 59
Item 54.10 Variations in the number of roller passes applicable to pay item 54.08 ...... 59

U U U
restricted areas ........................................................................................................59

Table 5104/1 Grading Requirements for Sub-base Material: ................................................... 8

Table 5105/1 Grading Requirements for Crushed Stone Sub-base Material............................ 9
Table 5112/1 Testing Frequency............................................................................................. 13
Table 5112/2 Density requirements: ....................................................................................... 14
Table 5200/1 Grading Limits for Graded Crushed Stone Base Course Materials (GB1)....... 21
Table 5200/2 Mechanical Strength Requirements for the Aggregate Fraction of Crushed
Stone Base Course Materials (GB1) as Defined by the Ten Percent Fines Test 22
Table 5203/3 Recommended Particle Size Distributions for Mechanically Stable Natural
Gravels and Weathered Rocks for Use as Base Course Material (GB2, GB3) . 23
Table 5200/4 Combined Aggregate Grading Limits for Dense Bitumen Macadam .............. 26
Table 5200/5 Mix Design Parameters for Dense Bitumen Macadam .................................... 26
Table 5403/1 Grading Requirements for Gravel Wearing Course and Gravel Shoulder ....... 51
Table 5404/1 Longitudinal grade tolerance ............................................................................ 54
Table 5405/2 Density requirements: ....................................................................................... 55

DIVISION 5100: SUB-BASES
5101 SCOPE
This Division covers the specification of materials for, and the construction of, sub-base
pavement layers including the in-situ recycling of existing pavements.
5102 MATERIALS
Sub-base material shall be obtained from sources located by the Contractor and approved by
the Engineer or from existing pavement layers. The Contractor is required to obtain suitable
sources, which are closest to the area where subbase is being placed.
5103 MATERIAL SOURCES FOR SUB-BASES

The materials used for the construction of sub-base layers shall be either:
1. Natural Gravel;
2. Scoria (Cinder Gravel);
3. Weathered Rock;
4. Crushed Gravel;
5. Crushed Rock or crushed Boulders;
6. Recycled Pavement Material.
Any other granular material complying with the requirements of this clause.
5104 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR GRAVEL SUB-BASE
(a) General
Gravel material to be used for sub-base shall be obtained from approved sources in borrow
areas, cuts or existing pavement layers. The complete sub-base shall contain no material
having a maximum dimension exceeding two-thirds of the completed layer thickness.
Gravel Sub-base material shall, unless otherwise stated, conform to the following
requirements.
(b) Grading Limits

The sub-base material shall comply with one of the gradings shown in Table 5104/1 as
described in the Contract. The material shall have a smooth continuous grading within the
limits for grading A, B or C given below.

Table 5104/1 Grading Requirements for Sub-base Material:
Sieve Size (mm) Mass Percent Passing

A B C D
63.0 100 - -
50.0 90 - 100 100 100 -
37.5 80-100
25.0 51 - 80 55 - 85 100
20 60-100
9.5 - 40 - 70 51 - 85
5 30-100
4.75 35 - 70 30 - 60 35 - 65
2.0 - 20 - 51 25 - 51
1.18 17-75
0.425 - 10 - 30 15 - 30
0.3 9-50
0.075 5 - 15 5 - 15 5-25 5 - 15
The complete sub-base shall contain no material having a maximum dimension exceeding
two-thirds of the compacted layer thickness.
Sub-base material shall, unless otherwise authorized, conform to the following requirements
when finally placed:
(c) Grading Modulus

The minimum Grading Modulus shall be 1.5 except where a material, having a lower Grading
Modulus but not less than 1.2, is approved for use by the Engineer.
(d) Plasticity Index

All sub-base materials shall have a maximum Plasticity Index of 6 or 12, as described in the
Contract, and when determined in accordance with AASHTO T-90. The plasticity product
(PP = PI x percentage passing the 0.075mm sieve) shall not be greater than 75.
(e) Californian Bearing Ratio (CBR)

The minimum soaked Californian Bearing Ratio (CBR) shall be 30% when determined in
accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T-193. The Californian Bearing Ratio (CBR)
shall be determined at a density of 95% of the maximum dry density when determined in
accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T-180 method D.
(f) Compaction requirements

The minimum in- situ dry density of sub-base material shall be as specified hereinafter for the
layers in terms of a percentage of modified AASHTO density.
(i) 95% or 97% as required for material not chemically stabilized.
(ii) 95% or 96 % as required for chemically stabilized material.

(g) Los Angeles Abrasion

The Los Angeles abrasion value shall not exceed 51% when determined in accordance with
the requirements of AASHTO T-96.
5105 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CRUSHED STONE SUB-BASE
(a) General
The aggregate used for crushed stone sub-base shall be derived from a parent rock that is
hard, sound, durable, and unweathered. It shall be obtained from sound rock from an
approved quarry or clean sound boulders. It shall contain no deleterious material such as
decomposed rock, clay, shale, or mica. The crushed aggregate shall comply with the following
requirements:
(b) Grading Limits

The grading of the crushed stone sub-base shall comply with one of the gradings shown in
Table 5105/1 as described in the Contract, or as approved or directed by the Engineer. The
grading shall follow a smooth curve without any marked gaps or excessive quantities at a
particular size, unless specified otherwise.
Table 5105/1 Grading Requirements for Crushed Stone Sub-base Material.
Sieve Size (mm) Percentage Passing by weight

A B C
Nominal size Nominal size Nominal size
37.5 mm 28 mm 20 mm
50.0 100
37.5 95-100 100
28 100
20 60-80 70-85 90-100
10 40-60 50-65 60-75
5 25-40 35-55 40-60
2.36 15-30 25-40 30-45
0.425 7-19 12-24 13-27
0.075 5 - 12 5 - 12 5-12
Tests to determine whether the crushed stone material complies with the specified grading
requirements shall be conducted after the material has been mixed on the road and spread out.
The aggregate shall be produced entirely by the crushing of rock or boulders. Single stage
crushing will not be allowed and the crusher installation shall be capable of producing
material complying with the specified requirements. If, however, the nature of the parent rock
is such that despite every effort made the material remains deficient in the finer fractions, the
Engineer may allow the addition of approved soil fines, crusher fines or sand in controlled
quantities not exceeding 15% by mass of the aggregate. Fines shall be introduced at the
crushing plant.

(c) Grading Modulus

The minimum Grading Modulus shall be 1.5 except where a material, having a lower Grading
Modulus but not less than 1.2, is approved for use by the Engineer.
(d) Plasticity Index (PI)

The Plasticity Index shall not exceed 6.
(e) Compaction Requirements

The minimum dry density to which the material shall be compacted shall be 95% unless
specified otherwise, shown on the drawings or ordered by the Engineer, of the maximum dry
density as determined by AASHTO T 180. Field dry densities shall be determined by the sand
replacement method as specified in AASHTO T 191 or nuclear method as specified in
AASHTO T 238.
(f) Los Angeles Abrasion

The Los Angeles abrasion value shall not exceed 45% when determined in accordance with
(g) Particle shape; Flakiness Index

The flakiness index, determined by testing in accordance with BS812, Part 105 or ASTM D
3398, shall not exceed 35.
The crushed aggregate portion, which is retained on the 5 mm sieve, shall have at least 75
percent by weight of particles with at least two fractured faces and 100 percent with at least
one fractured face. The area of each face shall be equal to at least 75 percent of the smallest
midsection area of the piece. When two fractured faces are contiguous, the angle between the
planes of fractures shall be at least 30 degrees to count as two fractured faces.
5106 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR SUB-BASES USING RECYCLED (IN-

SITU) PAVEMENT MATERIAL
(a) General
Construction of sub-bases using recycled (in-situ) existing pavement materials shall comply
with the requirements of Clause 5105 and with the requirements of this Clause.
(b) Milling/Scarifying
(i) Before scarification or milling is commenced, the surface of the existing pavement
shall be clean and free from soil and other deleterious matter.
(ii) The existing pavement shall be broken up to the depth described in the Contract
either by scarifying or by the use of an approved milling machine.

(c) Placing, Spreading and Compacting

Any material which is required to be added, to either supplement or modify the scarified
milled material, shall be evenly spread and thoroughly mixed into the scarified/milled
material to form a homogeneous material prior to compaction.
The material shall be placed, spread and compacted in accordance with the requirements of
Clause 5105.
5107 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
(a) General.
Sub-base material shall be spread on the approved sub-grade by mechanical means without
segregation. The material shall be loosely spread in layers to give a compacted thickness not
exceeding 200mm and not less than 100mm. The final compacted layer shall be free from
concentrations of coarse or fine materials.
1. The surface of each completed layer shall be moistened prior to the construction of
the succeeding layer. Determine the optimum moisture content according to AASHTO T 180
method D. Mix the aggregate and adjust the moisture content to obtain a uniform mixture
with moisture content within 2 percent of the optimum moisture content. Spread and shape
the mixture on the prepared surface in a uniform layer.
2. The material shall be compacted by the use of approved rollers progressing gradually
from the outside towards the centre of the layer, except on superelevated curves, where the
rolling shall begin at the low side and progress to the high side. Compact each layer full
width. Roll from the sides to the center, parallel to the centerline of the road. Along curbs,
headers, walls, and all places not accessible to the roller, compact the material with approved
tampers or compactors. Each succeeding pass shall overlap the previous pass by at least one
third of the roller width. Rolling shall continue until the entire thickness of each layer is
thoroughly and uniformly compacted to the specified density. Compact each layer to at least
95 percent of maximum density. Determine the in place density and moisture content
according to AASHTO T 238 and AASHTO T 239 or other approved test procedures.
(b) Stabilization
When specified in the contract or required by the engineer, sub-base layers shall be stabilized
as specified in Division 4600.
(c) Trial Areas

not less than 1000 square metres using the materials and equipment proposed for the work to
(d) Traffic on Sub-base

The completed sub-base layer may be used by construction and public traffic subject to the
approval of the Engineer. Any such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to maintain and repair any damage caused to the layer.

5108 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE

The Contractor shall protect and maintain the completed sub-base at his own expense.
Maintenance shall include immediate repairs of any damage or defects, which may occur and
shall be repeated as often as is necessary to keep the subbase continuously intact. Repairs
shall be made in a manner that will ensure restoration to an even and uniform surface.
5109 SUB-BASE AS A FILTER OR SEPARATING LAYER

This may be required to protect a drainage layer from blockage by a finer material or to
prevent migration of fines and the mixing of two layers. The two functions are similar except
that for use as a filter the material needs to be capable of allowing drainage to take place and
therefore the amount of material passing the 0.075 mm sieve must be restricted.
The following criteria should be used to evaluate a sub-base as a separating or filter layer:
a) The ratio D15(coarse layer) should be less than 5
D85(fine layer)
where D15 is the sieve size through which 15% by weight of the material passes and D85 is the
sieve size through which 85% passes.
b) The ratio D50(coarse layer) should be less than 25
D50(fine layer)
For a filter to possess the required drainage characteristics a further requirement is:
c) The ratio D15(coarse layer) should lie between 5 and 40
D15(fine layer)
These criteria shall be applied to the materials at both the base course/sub-base and the sub-
base/subgrade interfaces.
5110 CLASSIFICATION OF LAYERS FOR PAYMENT PURPOSES

Payment for sub-base layers constructed from gravel material shall distinguish between layers
constructed with material from borrow pits, cuts or existing pavement layers, and in-situ
recompacted layers with or without the use of additional material.
Sub-base layers constructed from crushed-stone material recovered from existing crushed-
stone pavement layers shall be placed and paid for as gravel material, unless otherwise
determined by the Engineer. Where the Engineer determines, in writing, which the material
shall be processed and placed as crushed stone.

The completed subbase shall conform to the dimensional tolerances stated below:
(a) Levels
The lot shall be deemed to comply with the requirements specified for surface levels if, before
any repair work is undertaken, at least 90% of the level measurements are within + 25 mm of
the specified levels.
Isolated spots , where the surface levels deviate by more than 33 mm of the specified levels
shall be repaired to bring the deviation to within the + 25 mm tolerance.

(b) Width
The average width of the sub-base shall not be less than the specified width and nowhere shall
the outer edge of the sub-base be more than 75 mm inside the lines shown on the Drawings.
(c) Thickness
The lot will be considered to comply with the requirements for layer thicknesses if:
At least 90 % of all the thickness measurements taken before any thickness repairs are made
is equal to or greater than the specified thickness minus 27 mm; and
The mean layer thickness of the lot is not less than the specified thickness minus 5 mm
Isolated spots where the actual thickness is less than the specified thickness less 35 mm shall
be repaired so as to fall within the 27 mm tolerance.
(d) Cross Section

At any transverse section the difference in level between any two points shall not vary by
more than 20 mm from their difference in level as computed from the cross sections as shown
on the Drawings.
5112 TESTING
(a) Process Control

The minimum testing frequency that will be required from the Contractor in terms of Clause
1202, for the purpose of process control, shall be as shown on Table 5112/1 below.
Table 5112/1 Testing Frequency
Testing Frequency
Test One test Minimum number of tests per lot
every
Materials
Field density and OMC 2 510 m2 4
Atterberg limits and gradings 2 510 m2 4

Construction Tolerances
Surface levels 20 m (3 points per cross section)
Thickness 20 m (3 points per cross section)
Width 20 m -
Cross section 20 m -
(b) Routine Inspection and Testing.

Routine inspection and testing will be carried out by the Engineer to test the quality of
materials and workmanship for compliance with the requirements of this Division.

The density requirements specified in Clause 5105 for compaction of subbase shall be deemed
to have been complied with if the minimum dry densities as shown in Table 5112/2 are
equaled or exceeded.
In calculating the mean, density values differing by more than 5 percentage points from the
mean shall be disregarded and a new mean calculated.
Any material or workmanship that does not comply with the specified requirements shall be
removed and replaced with materials and workmanship complying with the specified
requirements, or if the Engineer permits, be repaired as specified in Clause 1208 so that after
being repaired it will comply with the specified requirements.
Table 5112/2 Density requirements
Specified density (% of Number of tests Minimum mean Minimum density for

AASHTO T 180 MDD) per lot density (% of any single test (% of
AASHTO T 180 AASHTO T 180 MDD)
MDD)
95 (unstabilized) 3&4 95. 6 92. 0
5 95. 8 91. 8
6 95. 9 91. 6
Note: The determination of field dry density expressed as a percentage of AASHTO T 180
MDD implies an AASHTO T 180 density determination for each field density. Where
material is homogeneous, this ratio can be decreased to one laboratory determination for up to
four field densities.

Items 51.08, 51.09 and 51.012 are applicable solely to work that has to be executed in a
restricted area of which the width is less than 3.0 m or the length is less than 150.0 m.
Item 51.01 Sub-base layer constructed from gravel or Crushed stone:

a) Gravel sub-base (unstabilized gravel) compacted to:
(i) 95% of modified AASHTO density
(specify compacted layer thickness) ....................................................cubic metre (m3)
(ii) 97% of modified AASHTO density
(specify compacted layer thickness) ...................................................cubic metre (m3)
b) Gravel sub-base (chemically stabilized material) compacted to:
(specify compacted layer thickness) ...................................................cubic metre (m3)
(c) Crushed stone Sub-base 95% of modified AASHTO density (specify compacted
layer thickness) .................................................................................................cubic metre (m3)

The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of compacted pavement layer, and the
quantity shall be calculated from the authorized dimensions of the completed layer.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for procuring, crushing or soft excavation
or pits, breaking down, placing and compacting the material, including transporting the
material for a distance of 1.0 km and its removal, disposal and transporting for a distance of
1.0 km, of up to 5% by volume of oversize material, and the protection and maintenance of
the layer and the conducting of control tests, all as specified.
Item 51.02 Extra over Pay item 51.01 for excavation of material in:
(a) Intermediate excavation ..................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
(b) Hard excavation................................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of material obtained from intermediate or
hard excavation.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for the additional costs involved for taking
material from classes of material harder than soft excavation and for the additional costs, if
any, for processing such material in the pavement layers.
Item 51.03 Sub-base layer constructed from gravel or crushed stone obtained from
existing pavement layers:
(a) Gravel sub-base (unstabilized gravel) compacted to 95% of modified AASHTO
density, using:
(i) Non-cemented material (specify compacted layer thickness) ... cubic metre (m3)
(ii) Cemented material (specify compacted layer thickness)........... cubic metre (m3)
(b) Gravel sub-base (unstabilized gravel) compacted to 97% of modified AASHTO

density using:
(c) Gravel sub-base (chemically stabilized material) compacted to 95% of modified

AASHTO density, using:
(d) Gravel sub-base (chemically stabilized material) compacted to 96% of modified

(e) Crushed Stone sub-base (unstabilized) compacted to 95% of modified AASHTO

density using:

(ii) Cemented material (specify compacted layer thickness) ...........cubic metre (m3)
(f) Crushed Stone sub-base (chemically stabilized material) compacted to 95% of

modified AASHTO density, using:
(i) Non-cemented material (specify compacted layer thickness)....cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of compacted pavement layer, the quantity
of which shall be calculated in accordance with the authorized dimensions of the completed
layer if the underlying layer has also been reconstructed or reworked. Where the underlying
layer has not been reconstructed or reworked but only rolled, or where no work has been done
on it, quantities shall be calculated with the aid of cross-sections taken of the layer before and
after construction. Where the material consist of recovered pavement material in part and
imported material in part the quantity of imported material obtained from cut or borrow shall
be paid for under pay item 51.01, calculated in accordance with the volume relation of the
respective materials.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for breaking up the existing pavement layer,
excavating the material in the existing pavement, procuring, breaking down, placing and
compacting the material, including haul for a free-haul distance of 1.0 km, and for the
protection and maintenance of the layer as well as for the performance of control tests, all as
specified.
Where excavation is executed over sections of the road payment shall also include
compensation for the proper measuring and marking-off of the excavation, and the protection
of the adjacent existing pavement and its repair should it be damaged.
The tendered rate for cemented material shall include full compensation of breaking down the
material to comply with the specified grading requirements.
Item 51.04 In situ reconstruction of existing Sub-base layer as:

(a) Gravel sub-base (unstabilized gravel) compacted to 95% of modified AASHTO
density, using:
(b) Gravel sub-base (chemically stabilized material) compacted to 95% of modified

AASHTO density using:
(c) Gravel sub-base (chemically stabilized material) compacted to 96% of modified

(ii) Cemented material (specify compacted layer thickness) ..........cubic metre (m3)

(d) Crushed stone Sub-base (unstabilized) compacted to 95% of modified AASHTO

density, using:
(ii) Cemented material (specify compacted layer thickness) ......... cubic metre (m3)
(e) Crushed stone Sub-base (chemically stabilized) compacted to 95% of modified

AASHTO density using:
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of compacted pavement layer reworked in
situ, the quantity of which shall be calculated in accordance with the authorized dimensions of
the completed layer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for breaking up the existing pavement layer
to the specified depth, breaking down and preparing the material, placing and compacting the
material as well as the protection and maintenance of the layer, conducting control tests,
measuring and demarcating the work where layers are reprocessed partly, protecting the
adjacent pavement and its repair should it be damaged.
The tendered rate shall also include full compensation for spreading and mixing in any
additional material should the existing layer thickness be inadequate and it be specified or
instructed by the engineer that the thickness be increased.
Material which is temporarily bladed to windrow for the removal of an underlying layer and
then bladed back and compacted, will be classed as in situ reconstruction and paid for under
this item. The temporary blading of the material to windrow will be paid for under Pay item
51.07.
The tendered rate for cemented material shall include full compensation for breaking down
the material to comply with the specified grading requirements.
Item 51.05 Sub-base layer constructed Extra over Pay item 51.03 (a),(b),(c)&(d) and
Pay item 51.04 (a),(b)&(c) from recovered pavement material mixed with
existing bituminous surfacing material
The unit of measurement shall be in cubic metre (m3).
The tendered extra-over rate for constructing the pavement layers from material recovered
from existing pavements and mixed with existing bituminous surfacing material shall include
full compensation for breaking down the surfacing material into fragments not exceeding 37.5
mm in size, uniformly mixing it with the other material, manually removing any over-sized
fragments, and for any other incidentals.
Item 51.06 Extra over Pay item 51.04 for adding extra material as specified below:
(a) Gravel sub-base ................................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
(b) Crushed stone Sub-base....................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
Where the thickness of any existing pavement layer requires to be supplemented and the
thickness of the added material after compaction will be less than 100 mm, the existing layer
shall be scarified to a depth that will give a layer thickness of at least 100 mm after

compacting together the loosened existing and added material. In the case of gravel or
crushed-stone sub-bases the engineer may direct the existing layer to be broken down to its
full depth.
The composite layer shall be watered mixed and compacted as determined in the clause for
placing and compaction. Payment for adding the material will be made as per this pay item.
The unit of measurement shall be a cubic metre of material added on the instruction of the
engineer, which quantity shall be taken as 70% of the loose volume measured in trucks, unless
instructed by the engineer that the quantity be determined by way of cross-sections.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring and adding the material to the
in situ broken- down pavement layer and for haul over a free-haul distance of 1.0 km.
Item 51.07 Extra over Pay item 51.04 for temporarily blading the material to windrow
The unit of measurement shall be a cubic metre (m3) of material from an existing pavement
layer, temporarily bladed to windrow and measured in its original position before removal.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all additional costs involved in
temporarily blading the material to windrow and later blading back and also for all clearing-
up work which may be necessary after the material has been bladed back.
Only material bladed to windrow on the instruction of the engineer in order to expose the
underlying layer shall be measured and paid for.
Material bladed or cut from restricted areas to windrow, and material temporarily stockpiled,
will not be paid for under this item.
layers in restricted areas:
(a) Non-cemented material........................................................................cubic metre (m3)
(b) Cemented material ...............................................................................cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be a cubic metre of material excavated in a restricted area, the
quantity of which shall be calculated in accordance with the area and the average thickness of
the layers excavated.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all additional costs for excavating the
material in restricted areas.
Item 51.09 Compacting the floors of pavement excavations (5 roller passes) with:
(a) Vibratory rollers ................................................................................. square metre (m2)
(b) Oscillatory rollers .............................................................................. square metre (m2)
(c) Grid rollers......................................................................................... square metre (m2)
(d) Flat-wheeled rollers ........................................................................... square metre (m2)
(e) Pneumatic-tyred rollers...................................................................... square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be a square metre of floor of pavement excavations compacted
by 5 roller passes. Payment will differentiate between the above types of rollers.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for supplying the roller, applying 5 roller
passes, and removing the roller after completion of the compacting process. The engineer may

increase or decrease the number of roller passes, in which case payment will be adjusted in
accordance with pay item 51.11.
Item 51.10 Watering the pavement excavation floor.

The unit of measurement shall be kilolitre (kl) of water applied to the floor of the excavation
to be compacted on the instruction of the engineer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring and applying the water,
including all hauls.
Item 51.11 Variations in the number of roller passes applicable to pay item 51.09:
(a) Vibratory rollers ............................................................. square metre- pass (m2 -pass)
(b) Oscillatory rollers ............................................................ square metre- pass (m2 -pass)
(c) Grid rollers ...................................................................... square metre- pass (m2 -pass)
(d) Flat-wheeled rollers......................................................... square metre- pass (m2 -pass)
(e) Pneumatic-tyred rollers ................................................... square metre- pass (m2 -pass)
restricted areas
The unit of measurement shall be a square metre (m2) of pavement excavation floor
compacted in restricted areas.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all additional costs for compacting the
pavement excavation floor in a restricted area irrespective of the compaction plant used.

DIVISION 5200: ROAD BASES
5201 SCOPE
This Division covers the specifications of materials for, and the construction of road base
pavement layers from approved base materials. It includes the use of crushed, screened or
crushed and screened stones or gravels, natural gravels, and stabilized base materials.
5202 DIMENSIONS
The road base layer shall be constructed to the dimensions and cross sectional profiles shown
in the Contract.
5203 MATERIALS
(a) Sources of Material

Road base material shall be obtained from sources located by the Contractor and approved by
the Engineer.
(b) Road Base Material Types

The materials used for the construction of road base layers shall be one of the following as
described in the Contract:
• Crushed Rock or Stone;
• Naturally occurring Granular Materials, Boulders, Weathered Rock;
• Dense Bitumen Macadam.
5204 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CRUSHED ROCK OR STONE
(a) General
Graded crushed stone (GB1):
This material is produced by crushing fresh, quarried rock (GB1) and may be an all-in
product, usually termed a 'crusher-run', or alternatively the material may be separated by
screening and recombined to produce a desired particle size distribution, as per the
specifications. The material shall be clean and free from organic matter, lumps of clay or other
deleterious substances. The material shall be of such a nature that it can be readily
transported, spread and compacted without segregation.
(b) Grading
The combined grading of the material shall be a smooth continuous curve falling within the
grading limits shown in Table 5200/1 when determined in accordance with the requirements
of AASHTO T-27. The mass of material passing the 0.075mm sieve shall be determined in
accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T-11.

Table 5200/1: Grading Limits for Graded Crushed Stone Base Course Materials (GB1)
Test sieve (mm) Percentage by mass of total aggregate passing test sieve
Nominal maximum particle size
37.5 mm 28 mm 20 mm
50 100 - -
37.5 95 – 100 100 -
28 - - 100
20 60 – 80 70 - 85 90 – 100
10 40 – 60 50 - 65 60 – 75
5 25 - 40 35 - 55 40 – 60
2.36 15 – 30 25 - 40 30 – 45
0.425 7 – 19 12 - 24 13 – 27
0.075(1) 5 – 12 5 - 12 5 – 12
Note 1. For paver-laid materials a lower fine content may be accepted.
(c) Plasticity Index

The fine fraction of a GB1 material shall be non-plastic or shall have a maximum Plasticity
Index of 6 when determined in accordance with AASHTO T-90.
(d) Californian Bearing Ratio (CBR)

The in- situ dry density of the placed material should be a minimum of 98% of the maximum
dry density obtained in the ASTM Test Method D 1557 (Heavy Compaction). The compacted
thickness of each layer should not exceed 200 mm.
Crushed stone base courses constructed with proper care with GB1 materials described above
should have CBR values in excess of 100 per cent.
(e) Aggregate Crushing Value (ACV)

Requirements expressed in terms of the results of the Aggregate Crushing Value (ACV)
(British Standard 812, Part 110) may be used: the ACV should preferably be less than 25 and
in any case less than 29.
Other simpler tests e.g. the Aggregate Impact Test (British Standard 812, Part 112, 1990) may
be used in quality control testing provided a relationship between the results of the chosen test
and the Ten percent Fines Value (TFV) has been determined.
(f) Mechanical Strength Requirements (TFVT)

To ensure that the materials are sufficiently durable, they should satisfy the criteria given in
Table 5200/2. These are a minimum Ten Per Cent Fines Value (TFV) (British Standard 812,
Part 111) and limits on the maximum loss in strength following a period of 24 hours of
soaking in water. The likely moisture conditions in the pavement are taken into account in
broad terms based on annual rainfall.

Table 5200/2: Mechanical Strength Requirements for the Aggregate Fraction of

Crushed Stone Base Course Materials (GB1) as Defined by the Ten Percent
Fines Test
Typical Annual Rainfall Minimum 10% Minimum Ratio

(mm) Fines Values (kN) Wet/Dry Test (%)
>500 110 75
<500 110 60
(g) Flakiness Index

The flakiness index shall not exceed 30% when determined in accordance with BS 812 Part
105-1990.
5205 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR NATURALLY OCCURRING GRANULAR

MATERIALS, BOULDERS, WEATHERED ROCK
(a) General
Graded Natural Gravel (GB2, GB3):
A wide range of materials including lateritic, calcareous and quartzitic gravels, river gravels,
boulders and other transported gravels, or granular materials resulting from the weathering of
rocks can be used successfully as base course materials. The material shall be of such a nature
that it can be readily transported, spread and compacted without segregation.
(b) Grading
The particle size distribution should be approximately parallel with the grading envelope, to
ensure that the material has maximum mechanical stability, in the grading limits shown in
Table 5203/3 when determined in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T-27. The
mass of material passing the 0.075mm sieve shall be determined in accordance with the
requirements of AASHTO T-11. Table 5200/3 contains two recommended particle size
distributions for suitable materials corresponding to maximum nominal sizes of 37.5 mm and
20 mm.

Table 5200/3: Recommended Particle Size Distributions for Mechanically Stable

Natural Gravels and Weathered Rocks for Use as Base Course Material
(GB2, GB3)
Test sieve (mm) Percentage by mass of total aggregate passing test sieve
Nominal maximum particle size
37.5 mm 20 mm
50 100 -
37.5 80 – 100 100
20 60 – 80 80 – 100
10 45 – 65 55 – 80
5 30 – 50 40 – 60
2.36 20 – 40 30 – 50
0.425 10 – 25 12 – 27
0.075 5 – 15 5 – 15
(c) Plasticity Index

The fine fraction of a GB1 material shall be non-plastic or shall have a maximum Plasticity
Index of 6 when determined in accordance with AASHTO T-90.
If the PI approaches the upper limit of 6, it is desirable that the fines content be restricted to
the lower end of the range. To ensure this, a maximum PP of 60 is recommended or
alternatively a maximum Plasticity Modulus (PM) of 90 where:
PM = PI x (percentage passing the 0.425 mm sieve)
If difficulties are encountered in meeting the plasticity criteria, consideration should be given
to modifying the material by the addition of a low percentage of hydrated lime or cement.
(d) Californian Bearing Ratio (CBR)

When used as a base course, the material should be compacted to a density equal to or greater
than 98 per cent of the maximum dry density achieved in the ASTM Test Method D 1557
(Heavy Compaction). When compacted to this density in the laboratory, the material should
have a minimum CBR of 80% after four days immersion in water (ASTM D 1883).
(e) Aggregate Crushing Value (ACV)

Minimum soaked Ten percent Fines Value (TFV) Value (BS 812, Part 111) shall be 50 KN.
(f) Abrasion
The Los Angeles Abrasion value, determined by testing in accordance with AASHTO T96
shall not exceed 45 at 500 revolutions unless otherwise specified in the Project Specifications.
(g) Flakiness Index

The flakiness index shall not exceed 30% when determined in accordance with BS 812 Part
105-1990.

(h) Crushed Ratio

The crushed ratio shall be a minimum of 60%.
(i) Grading Modulus

The minimum Grading Modulus for material once placed and compacted on the road shall be:
For natural material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.00
For material to be chemically stabilized. . . . . . . . . . 1.75
5206 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DENSE BITUMEN MACADAM
(a) Coarse Aggregates

The material shall consist of hard durable particles produced by crushing rock or boulders and
shall be clean and free from organic matter, lumps of clay or other deleterious substances and
complying with the requirements of AASHTO M-80.
Crushed rock or crushed boulders shall be produced from one or more of the following rock
types;
• Basalt;
• Gabbro;
• Granite;
• Gritstone;
• Hornfels;
• Limestone;
• Porphyry or Quartzite.
• Aggregate Crushing Value
The aggregate crushing value of the coarse aggregate shall not exceed 25 when determined in
accordance with BS 812 Part 3.
(i) Los Angeles Abrasion

The Los Angeles Abrasion value shall not exceed 35% when determined in accordance with
(ii) Soundness
The loss of soundness of the coarse aggregate shall not be greater than 12% when tested in
accordance with AASHTO T-104.
(iii) Flakiness index

The flakiness index, shall not exceed 45% when determined in accordance with the
requirements of BS 812 Part 105-1990.
(iv) Crushed Ratio

The crushed ratio shall be a minimum of 100%.

(v) Water Absorption

The water absorption shall not exceed 2% when determined in accordance with the
requirements of AASHTO T-85.
(vi) Coating of Chippings

The coating of chippings with binder shall not be less than 60% when determined in
accordance with the requirements of prEN 12697-11:1998E for compatibility between
aggregate and bitumen. Comment [BSB1]: include euro code
ref.
(b) Fine Aggregate

Fine aggregate shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M-6 and shall consist of one
of the following:
(i) Crushed rock or crushed boulders;
(ii) Natural sand;
(iii) A blend of (i) and (ii) above.
(c) Filler
Where necessary to improve the combined grading or other properties of the mix, a filler of
either hydrated lime, cement or crushed rock or crushed boulder dust may be added. Filler
shall be material passing the 0.075mm sieve. If used as an anti-stripping agent, the quantity of
hydrated lime shall be at least 1.5% by weight of total aggregates and in no case shall the
quantity exceed 3% by weight of total aggregates.
(d) Binder
The binder shall be 60/70 penetration grade bitumen complying with the requirements of
AASHTO M-20.
5207 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MIXED BITUMEN MACADAM
(a) Combined Aggregate Grading

The combined grading of the aggregates shall be a smooth continuous curve falling within the
grading limits shown in Table 5200/4 when determined in accordance with AASHTO T-27.
The mass of material passing the 0.075mm sieve shall be determined in accordance with
AASHTO T-11.

Table 5200/4 Combined Aggregate Grading Limits for Dense Bitumen Macadam
Test sieve (mm) Percentage by mass of total aggregate

passing test sieve
28 100
20 95 – 100
14 65 – 85
10 52 – 72
6.3 39– 55
3.35 32 – 46
1.18 -
0.3 7 – 21
0.075 (1) 2–8
Notes:
1. When gravel other than limestone is used, the anti-stripping properties shall be improved
by including 2% Portland cement or hydrated lime in the material passing the 0.075 mm
sieve.
2. Limestone and gravel shall not be used for wearing courses where high skidding resistance
is required.
(b) Mix Design Parameters for Dense Bitumen Macadam

The parameters for dense bitumen macadam shall comply with the requirements as shown in
Table 5200/5.
Table 5200/5 Mix Design Parameters for Dense Bitumen Macadam
Property Unit Value

Bitumen content (1) (per % 5.0 ± 0.6
cent by mass of total mix)
Bitumen grade (2) pen 60/70 or 80/100
Minimum Marshal Stability kN 3.5-9
(Depending on Design
traffic)
Flow mm 2-4
Air Voids % 4.0 - 8.0
Voids in Mineral Aggregate % 16.0 - 22.0
Voids Filled with Bitumen % 65.0 - 85.0
Filler/Bitumen Ratio* % 1.0 - 1.6
Compaction Level Number of blows 2x50, 2x75 - To refusal
(Depending on Design
traffic)
Note :
1. For aggregate with fine microtexture e.g. limestone, the bitumen content should be reduced
by 0.1 to 0.3%.
2. 60/70 grade bitumen is preferred.

The mix proportions for each type of mixture to be used in the Works shall be determined
initially in accordance with the requirements of the Asphalt Institute Mix Design Manual
(MS2) using at least five binder contents. The Marshall specimens shall be compacted using
75 blows on each face. Trial mixes shall be carried out using various combined aggregate
gradings within the limits stipulated within Table 5200/4 in order to determine the optimum
design within the stipulated parameters in Table 5200/5 for the materials being used.
Prior to final approval of the proposed job mix formula, mixes shall be compacted to refusal
using the extended Marshall compaction method (in accordance with the requirements of BS
598 Part 104 (1989)) and the resulting air voids in the mix shall not be less than 3%.
5208 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR CRUSHED ROCK AND CRUSHED

BOULDER ROAD BASES
(a) Equipment
The material shall be laid either by a self-propelled paving machine or by means of a grader,
as described in the Contract. It shall be so designed and operated as to produce a mixture of
laid material complying with the requirements of this Specification.
The equipment used shall be of adequate rated capacity, in good working order, and subject to
the approval of the Engineer.
Obsolete or worn out equipment will not be permitted on the Site.
The mixing plant shall be either a batch or a continuous type, as approved by the Engineer,
and shall be equipped with satisfactory means of accurately controlling the proportions of all
constituent materials.
The crushing and screening plant shall be capable of crushing and screening the aggregates, to
be used for crushed rock or crushed boulder road base material, into at least four different
sized fractions.
Compaction shall be carried out using self-propelled 8 – 10 tonnes deadweight smooth
wheeled rollers having a width of roll not less than 450mm, or by multi-wheeled pneumatic
tyred rollers of equivalent mass, or by vibratory rollers of equivalent compactive
performance, or a combination of these.
Rollers shall be equipped with adjustable scrapers for cleaning the drums and an efficient
means of moistening the drums to prevent adhesion of asphalt. The rollers shall be fitted with
a quick and smooth acting reversing mechanism.
(b) Placing and Compaction

The surface on which the crushed rock and crushed boulder road base is to be laid shall be
free from loose or deleterious material.
The crushed material shall be screened into at least four different aggregate fractions.
The aggregate shall be recombined in a mixing plant in the proportions necessary to produce a
smooth continuous combined grading curve complying with the requirements of Table
5200/1.
The mixing plant shall be an approved type and shall be equipped with satisfactory means of
controlling the mix proportions and the addition of the required quantity of water to achieve
the optimum, which is required for compaction purposes.

The mixed material shall be transported at the required moisture content and in such a way,
that no segregation occurs.
Unless otherwise described in the Contract, the material shall be laid by a self-propelled
paving machine approved by the Engineer. The rate of travel of the paver and its method of
operation shall be adjusted to produce an even and uniform flow of material across the full
laying width free from dragging and without segregation.
The material shall be spread in layers not exceeding 200mm and not less than 100mm
compacted thickness.
The material shall be compacted by the use of approved rollers progressing gradually from the
outside towards the centre of the layer, except on superelevated curves, where the rolling shall
begin at the low side and progress to the high side. Each succeeding pass shall overlap the
previous pass by at least one third of the roller width. Rolling shall continue until the entire
thickness of each layer is thoroughly and uniformly compacted to the specified density.
Any area, which is inaccessible to rolling equipment, shall be compacted by means of
mechanical tampers or other equipment approved by the Engineer.
Upon completion of compaction, the surface of the completed layer shall be tightly bound,
free from movement under the compaction plant, and free from laminations, ridges, cracks or
loose or segregated material.
The in-situ density of the completed layer shall not be less than 98% of the maximum dry
density determined in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T-180 method D.
The in-situ density of the completed layer shall be determined in accordance with the
Alternatively, if approved by the Engineer, the dry density may be determined by use of a
nuclear densometer in direct transmission mode in accordance with AASHTO T238-86
Method B or ASTM D 2992-96. The nuclear densometer shall be accurately calibrated before
use, and at interval thereafter, and correlated against results obtained in accordance with
AASHTO T-191.
(c) Stabilization
When specified in the contract or required by the engineer, base layers shall be stabilized as
specified in Division 4600.
(d) Trial Sections

Prior to the commencement of normal working the Contractor shall construct a trial section of
(e) Traffic on Road base

The completed road base layer shall not be used by construction or public traffic prior to the
application of the prime coat in accordance with the requirements of Division 6100 of these
specifications and without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
The approval by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations to maintain
the road base in a satisfactory condition and to undertake any repairs as instructed by the
Engineer.

5209 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR CRUSHED GRAVEL ROAD BASE
(a) Equipment
The material shall be laid either by a self-propelled paving machine or by means of a grader,
as described in the Contract. It shall be so designed and operated as to produce a mixture of
laid material complying with the requirements this Specification.
The equipment used shall be of adequate rated capacity in good working order and subject to
Compaction shall be carried out using self-propelled 8 – 10 tonnes deadweight smooth

The surface on which the crushed gravel road base is to be laid shall be free from loose and
deleterious material.
Crushed gravel road base shall be spread on the sub-base material by mechanical means
without segregation.
The material shall be loosely spread in layers to give a compacted thickness not exceeding
200mm and not less than 100mm. The final compacted layer shall be free from
concentrations of coarse or fine materials.
The surface of each completed layer shall be moistened prior to the construction of the
succeeding layer.
Prior to compaction, the moisture content of the spread material shall be adjusted as necessary
either by the uniform application of water or drying out, to achieve within -1% to +2% of the
optimum moisture content when determined in accordance with AASHTO T-180.
The in-situ density of the completed layer shall not be less than 98% of the maximum dry
density determined in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T-180 method D.

The in-situ density of the completed layer shall be determined in accordance with the
nuclear densometer in direct transmission mode in accordance with AASHTO T238-86
Method B or ASTM D 2992-96. The nuclear densometer shall be accurately calibrated before
use, and at interval thereafter, and correlated against results obtained in accordance with
AASHTO T-191.
(c) Stabilization
When specified in the contract or required by the engineer, base layers shall be stabilized as
specified in Division 4600.
(d) Trial Sections

Prior to the commencement of normal working the Contractor shall construct a trial section of
(e) Traffic on Road Base

The completed road base layer shall not be used by construction or public traffic prior to the
application of the prime coat in accordance with the requirements of Division 6100 of these
specifications and without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations to maintain the road base in a
satisfactory condition and to undertake any repairs as instructed by the Engineer.
5210 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR DENSE BITUMEN MACADAM ROAD

BASE
(a) Equipment
All equipment used for the mixing and paving of the Dense Bitumen Macadam Road Base
material shall be so designed and operated as to produce a mixture of laid material complying
with the requirements this Specification.
The equipment used shall be of adequate rated capacity in good working order and subject to
The mixing plant shall be either a batch or a continuous type complying with the requirements
of AASHTO 156 and approved by the Engineer. It shall be equipped with satisfactory means
of accurately controlling the mix proportions of all constituent materials.
The crushing and screening plant shall be capable of crushing and screening the aggregates, to
be used for Dense Bitumen Macadam Road Base material, into at least four different sized
fractions.
Vehicle used for transporting the mixed material shall have tipping bodies capable of
discharging directly into the paving machine. The bodies of the vehicles shall be capable of
containing the mixed material without spillage.

All vehicles shall be equipped with a canvas or other approved type of cover which shall be
used to cover the mixed material upon loading at the mixing plant and shall not be removed
until the mixed material is discharged into the paving machine.
Dense Bitumen Macadam Road Base material shall be laid by an approved type of self-
propelled spreading/finishing machine capable of laying to the required widths, thicknesses
and cross sectional profiles shown in the Contract without causing segregation, dragging or
other surface defects.
All paving machines shall be fitted with automatic electronic screed control. Paving machines
shall be equipped with heated screeds and with 60o or 45o angle, confining side plates. Paving
machines shall also be equipped with an infra-red joint heating system.
Compaction shall be carried out using self-propelled 8 – 10 tonnes deadweight smooth, steel

The surface on which the Dense Bitumen Macadam Road Base it to be laid shall be free of
loose and deleterious material.
The crushed material shall be screened into at least four different aggregate fractions.
The aggregate shall be recombined in a mixing plant in the proportions necessary to produce a
smooth continuous combined grading curve complying with the requirements of Table 5200/4
and the approved mix design.
The maximum temperature of the material during mixing shall not exceed 165o C. On
discharge from the mixer the aggregate shall be completely coated with binder and the fine
aggregate shall be evenly dispersed throughout the mix.
The material shall be transported at the required temperature and in such a way, that no
segregation occurs. During transport the material shall be insulated against heat loss and
protected from the ingress of moisture by the use of covers as approved and instructed by the
Engineer.
The interior of the bodies of the transporting vehicles shall periodically be coated as necessary
with a material approved by the Engineer to prevent adhesion and facilitate discharge of, the
mixed material.
The sequence of delivery of the mixed material shall be such that it can be immediately
discharged upon arrival and in sufficient quantity to enable continuous forward movement of
the paving machine.
Manual laying of asphalt will be permitted only in the following circumstances:
• For laying irregular shapes and varying thicknesses;
• In confined spaces where it is impracticable for a paving machine to operate;
• For footways;
• Adjacent to expansion joints at bridges or other structures.

All transverse and longitudinal construction joints shall be made vertical and offset at least
300mm from joints in the underlying layer. Prior to the spreading of the adjacent layer the
cold edge of the joint shall be reheated to at least the minimum rolling temperature and
primed with cut-back bitumen to the approval of the Engineer.
The rate of travel of the paver and its method of operation shall be adjusted to produce an
even and uniform flow of material across the full laying width free from dragging and without
segregation.
The material shall be spread in layers not exceeding 125mm and not less than 55mm
compacted thickness.
Compaction shall be carried out using rollers stipulated in Clause 5210(a) above.
Vibrating rollers, if used, shall be set in a non-vibrating mode. Rolling shall progress
gradually from the outside towards the centre of the layer, except on superelevated curves,
where the rolling shall begin at the low side and progress to the high side. Each succeeding
pass shall overlap the previous pass by at least one third of the roller width. Rolling shall
continue until the entire thickness of each layer is thoroughly and uniformly compacted to the
specified density.
The temperature of the spread material at the time compaction commences shall not be less
than 135o C. The compaction shall be completed before the temperature of the laid material
falls below 105o C.
free from movement under the compaction plant and free from laminations, ridges, cracks or
The density of the compacted layer shall be related to the daily Marshall Density, which shall
be determined by making four standard Marshall specimens from samples of the mix taken
from the mixing plant and the paving machine. The density of each sample shall be
determined and compared with the mean value. Any individual result, which varies from the
mean by more than 0.015, shall be rejected. Marshall tests shall be repeated on a daily basis to
establish the daily Marshall Density for each day’s production.
The daily Marshall Density shall not vary from the job mix design density by more than ±2%.
The density achieved in the completed layer shall be shall not less than 97% of the Marshall
Density for each day’s production.
(c) Trial Sections

Prior to the commencement of normal working, and the Contractor is satisfied that his plant is
capable of producing a consistent mix, the Contractor shall construct a trial sections of not
less than 1000 square metres using the materials and equipment proposed for the work to
(d) Traffic on Road Base

The completed road base layer shall not be used by construction or public traffic without the
prior written approval of the Engineer.
Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations to maintain the road base in a
satisfactory condition and to undertake any repairs as instructed by the Engineer.

(e) Weather Limitations

Dense Bitumen Macadam Road Base layers shall not be constructed in the following adverse
weather conditions:
• During foggy or wet conditions;
• When rain is imminent;
• When the surface on which the layer is to be constructed is wet (i.e. more than
damp);
• When the temperature of the surface on which the layer is to be constructed is
less than 10oC.

The completed base shall comply with the construction tolerances given below:
(a) Level and Grade

The lot shall be deemed to comply with the requirements specified for surface levels if, before
any repair work is undertaken, at least 90 % of the level measurements are within + 20 mm of
the specified levels.
Isolated spots, where the surface levels deviate by more than 25 mm of the specified levels
shall be repaired to bring the deviation to within the + 20 mm tolerance.
Deviation from the specified longitudinal grade due to deviations from level shall not exceed
the following:
Length of Grade Maximum Variation
Measured in meter from Specified Grade
(%)
2 0.34
5 0.27
10 0.21
20 0.13
30 0.08
(b) Width
The average width of the base shall be at least equal to that shown on the Drawings and
nowhere shall the outer edge of the base be more than 50 mm inside the edge lines shown on
the Drawings.
(c) Thickness
The lot will be considered to comply with the requirements for layer thickness if:
• At least 90 % of all the thickness measurements taken before any thickness repairs are made
is equal to or greater than the specified thickness minus 27 mm; and
• The mean layer thickness of the lot is not less than the specified thickness minus 5 mm.

Isolated spots where the actual thickness is less than the specified thickness less 35 mm shall
be repaired so as to fall within the 27 mm tolerance.
(d) Cross Section

When tested with a 3 m straight-edge laid at right angles to the road center line the surface
shall not deviate from the bottom of the straight-edge by more than 10 mm.
At any transverse section the difference in level between any two points shall not vary from
their difference in level computed from the cross sections shown on the Drawings by more
than 20 mm.

Pay Items 52.07 and 52.11 are applicable solely to work that has to be executed in a restricted
area of which the width is less than 3.00 m or the length is less than 150.00 m.
Item 52.01 Base layer construction

(a) Gravel base taken from cut or borrow, including free-haul up to 1.0 km:
Gravel base (unstabilized gravel) compacted to:
(Specify compacted layer thickness)..........................................cubic metre (m3)
(Specify compacted layer thickness)........................................cubic metre (m3)
Gravel base (chemically stabilized material) compacted to:

(iii) 97% of modified AASHTO density
(iv) 98% of modified AASHTO density
(b) Crushed-stone base compacted to :

(Layer thickness indicated) ........................................................cubic metre (m3)
(Layer thickness indicated) .......................................................cubic metre (m3)
(c) Dense Bitumen Macadam basecompacted to:

(Layer thickness indicated) ...........................................square metre (m2) or ton.
(Layer thickness indicated) ...........................................square metre (m2) or ton.

The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of completed gravel base or crushed-stone
base in place as the case may be, and compacted to the specified density. The quantity shall be
calculated from the authorized dimensions of the layer as shown on the drawings or
prescribed by the engineer.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for procuring, as if from soft excavation or
pits, breaking down, placing and compacting the material, including transporting the material
for a distance of 1.0 km and its removal, disposal and transporting for a distance of 1.0 km, of
up to 5% by volume of oversize material, and the protection and maintenance of the layer and
the conducting of control tests, all as specified.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing and placing all
materials, including the crusher fines or sand (if approved) necessary for correcting the
grading of the crushed stone, for crushing and screening, for hauling the material over an
unlimited free-haul distance where material is obtained from commercial sources, and over a
1.0 km free-haul distance where material is obtained from approved borrow pits, for rolling,
slushing and correcting the layers, and for testing, protecting and maintaining the work as
specified.
Macadam base course , completed and accepted , will be measured in square metre or in tons
as called for in the proposal. The tendered rates shall include full compensation for procuring,
furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing and compacting all materials, priming as specified and
for all labour, equipment, tools, maintenance and incidentals necessary to complete the work
described in this division.
Item 52.02 Extra over Pay Item 52.1 for excavation of material
(a) Intermediate excavation. ..................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
(b) Hard excavation................................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
hard excavation.
Item 52.03 Base layer constructed from material obtained from existing pavement
layers:
1. Gravel base material:
(a) Gravel base (unstabilized gravel) compacted to 98% of modified AASHTO density,
using:
(i) Non-cemented material
(Specify compacted layer thickness) ......................................... cubic metre (m3)
(ii) Cemented material
(b) Gravel base (unstabilized gravel) compacted to 100% of modified AASHTO density
using:

(specify compacted layer thickness)...........................................cubic metre (m3)

(specify compacted layer thickness).......................................... cubic metre (m3)
(c) Gravel base (chemically stabilized material) compacted to 97% of modified

(d) Gravel base (chemically stabilized material) compacted to 98% of modified
2. Crushed stone base material:

(a) Material compacted to 98% of modified AASHTO density:
Material from existing uncemented crushed-stone layers:
(i) Unscreened .................................................................................cubic metre (m3)
(ii) Screened and recombined in a plant.......................................... cubic metre (m3)
(iii) Material from existing cemented crushed-stone layers, not milled but crushed,
screened and recombined in a plant.....................................................cubic metre (m3)
(iv) Milled-out material.................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
(b) Material compacted to 100% of modified AASHTO density:
Material from existing uncemented crushed-stone layers:
(i) Unscreened .................................................................................cubic metre (m3)
(ii) Screened and recombined in a plant.......................................... cubic metre (m3)
(iii) Material from existing cemented crushed-stone layers, not milled but crushed,
screened and recombined in a plant.....................................................cubic metre (m3)
(iv) Milled-out material.................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of compacted pavement layer, the quantity
of which shall be calculated in accordance with the authorized dimensions of the completed
layer if the underlying layer has also been reconstructed or reworked. Where the underlying
layer has not been reconstructed or reworked but only rolled, or where no work has been done
on it, quantities shall be calculated with the aid of cross-sections taken of the layer before and

after construction. Where the material consist of recovered pavement material in part and
imported material in part the quantity of imported material shall be paid for under pay item
52.01, calculated in accordance with the volume relation of the respective materials.
specified.
The tendered rates for milled-out material shall also include full compensation for loading the
material at the stockpile and for hauling it to a screening plant where applicable or to the point
of use for a free-haul distance of 1.0 km, and for any additional processing required to bring
the material up to the required standards, but shall not include compensation for milling.
The tendered rates for material mixed with existing surfacing material shall also include full
compensation for breaking down fragments of bituminous material to the specified maximum
size and for removing over-sized fragments by hand.
Item 52.04 In situ reconstruction of existing base layer as:

1. Gravel base material:
(a) Gravel base (unstabilized gravel) compacted to 98% of modified AASHTO density,
using:
(specify compacted layer thickness).................................................... cubic metre (m3)
(specify compacted layer thickness).................................................... cubic metre (m3)
(b) Gravel base (unstabilized gravel chemically stabilized material) compacted to 100%
of modified AASHTO density using:
(specify compacted layer thickness) .......................................... cubic metre (m3)
(c) Gravel base (chemically stabilized material) compacted to 97% of modified



(specify compacted layer thickness) .................................................. cubic metre (m3)
(d) Gravel base (chemically stabilized material) compacted to 98% of modified

2. Uncemented Crushed stone base material:

(a) Material compacted to 98% of modified AASHTO density................cubic metre (m3)
(b) Material compacted to 100% of modified AASHTO density............. cubic metre (m3)
3. Dense Bitumen Macadam base:

(a) 98% of modified AASHTO density (layer thickness indicated)....................................
...............................................................................................square metre (m2) or ton.
(b) 100% of modified AASHTO density (layer thickness indicated)..................................
........................................... .................................................. square metre (m2) or ton.
The unit of measurement shall be as shown for the three cases, compacted pavement layer
reworked in situ, the quantity of which shall be calculated in accordance with the authorized
dimensions of the completed layer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for breaking up the existing pavement layer
to the specified depth, breaking down and preparing the material, placing and compacting the
52.06.
(a) Gravel base ........................................................................................ cubic metre (m3)
(b) Crusher fines for improving the grading of recovered crushed stone

(i) Material from approved borrow pits ......................................... cubic metre (m3)
(ii) Material from commercial sources ............................................ cubic metre (m3)
(c) Macadam base materials added.............................................. square meter (m2) or ton
crushed-stone bases the engineer may direct the existing layer to be broken down to its full
depth.
engineer for gravel and crushed stone bases, which quantity shall be taken as 70% of the loose
volume measured in trucks, unless instructed by the engineer that the quantity be determined
by way of cross-sections.
....................................................................................................Cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be a cubic metre of material from an existing pavement layer,
temporarily bladed to windrow and measured in its original position before removal.
(a) Non-cemented material ...................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
(b) Cemented material............................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
Item 52.08 Compacting the floors of pavement excavations (5 roller passes) with:
(a) Vibratory rollers area ........................................................................ square metre (m2)
(b) Oscillatory rollers area ..................................................................... square metre (m2)

(c) Grid rollers area ................................................................................ square metre (m2)

(d) Flat-wheeled rollers area ................................................................... square metre (m2)
(e) Pneumatic-tyred rollers area ............................................................. square metre (m2)
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for supplying the roller, applying 5 roller
Item 52.09 Watering the pavement excavation floor ........................................ kilolitre (kl)
The unit of measurement shall be kilolitre of water applied to the floor of the excavation to be
compacted on the instruction of the engineer.
Item 52.10 Variations in the number of roller passes applicable to pay item 52.08:
(a) Vibratory rollers area ........................................................................ square metre (m2)
(b) Oscillatory rollers area...................................................................... square metre (m2)
(c) Grid rollers area ................................................................................ square metre (m2)
(d) Flat-wheeled rollers area ................................................................... square metre (m2)
(e) Pneumatic-tyred rollers area ............................................................. square metre (m2)
restricted areas .......................................................................square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be a square metre of pavement excavation floor compacted in
restricted areas.
Item 52.12 Trial Sections

(a) Gravel base trial section (thickness indicated) constructed in accordance with the
provisions of this division areas....................................................................... square metre (m2)
(b) Crushed-stone base trial section (thickness indicated) constructed in accordance with
the provisions of this division areas................................................................. square metre (m2)
(c) Dense Bitumen Macadam base trial section (thickness indicated) constructed in
accordance with the provisions of this division areas...................................... square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of completed trial section approved by the
engineer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for constructing the trial section complete as
specified.

Only trial sections in which the base material and the completed layer comply with all the
requirements of the specifications shall be paid for.
NOTE ON ADDITIONAL PAY ITEMS

Where the following items of work are required in connection with constructing the base
layer, the appropriate payment items shall appear in Division 5200 of the schedule of
quantities.
1) Overhaul of material for a distance in exceeding 1.0 km

2) Excess overburden
3) Finishing-off borrow areas
4) Provision of crushing and/or screening plant
5) Re-erection of crushing and/or screening plant
6) Crushing and screening
7) Removal of oversize pavement material
8) Chemical stabilization
9) Chemical stabilizing agent
10) Mechanical modification
11) Provision and application of water for curing
12) Curing by covering with the subsequent layer
13) Bituminous stabilization
14) Bituminous stabilizing agent
15) Additive for bituminous stabilization.

DIVISION 5300: BREAKING UP EXISTING PAVEMENT LAYERS
5301 SCOPE
This section covers the breaking up and excavation of existing pavement layers by
conventional means or by milling, selecting the material, and the removal thereof to spoil
dumps or to stockpiles for later reprocessing or recycling.
5302 SELECTING THE MATERIAL

Material from existing pavements may only be used for purposes approved by the Engineer.
The material shall be so excavated that material from the various pavement layers will not be
mixed unless so permitted by the Engineer, in writing.
5303 CLASSIFYING THE MATERIAL

Material from existing pavements shall be classified as follows for excavation and processing
purposes:
(a) Existing bituminous material

Existing bituminous material shall be asphalt or other bituminous seal or base material
removed separately from the existing layers on the instruction of the Engineer. Where
underlying material is broken down or excavated together with bituminous materials, the
mixture will not be classified as bituminous material for payment purposes.
(b) Non-cemented material

Non-cemented material shall be existing pavement material which can be ripped with the
teeth of a 140G Caterpillar or similar grader.
(c) Cemented material

Cemented material shall be existing pavement material, which cannot be ripped with a type
140G caterpillar, or similar grader. Existing stabilized material will not necessarily be
classified as cemented material.
5304 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
(a) General
1) The equipment to be used for the conventional breaking-up and excavation of existing
pavement layers will be determined by the size and depth of the pavement section to be
processed or excavated, taking into consideration the fact that work may have to be carried
out in restricted areas.
2) No additional pavement will be made for restricted areas.
3) Only approved cutting or sawing equipment may be used for cutting or sawing the
asphalt layers. The equipment shall be capable of cutting the asphalt layers to the specified

depth in one operation without fragmenting the material, and in straight lines within the
required tolerances.
(b) Milling equipment

Only approved milling equipment may be used.
The equipment shall be so equipped that it will be able to mill out asphalt and/or cemented
material to the prescribed depth in one operation over the width specified in the project
specifications. The milling depth shall be controlled electronically.
The direction and speed of the milling machine and the speed of rotation of the milling drum
shall be adjustable so as to obtain the required grading of the milled material.
The machine shall be capable of making a neat vertical cut at the outer edges when milling the
layer and to leave the floor of the cut level and with a uniform texture.
Unless otherwise specified in the Project Specifications, the milling machine shall be
equipped with a self-loading conveyor belt, which can be easily removed and installed and
adjusted for slope and direction.
5305 CONSTRUCTION
(a) General
Where all or a part of the existing surfacing material is to be reprocessed together with the
underlying layer, the surfacing shall be properly broken down and mixed through the full
depth of the existing base material to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Fragments of bituminous material shall be broken down to sizes not exceeding 37.5 mm.
Where specified in the project specifications or ordered by the Engineer, the existing
bituminous material shall first be removed before the underlying layers are broken up.
Bituminous material may be milled out or otherwise broken up and removed to approved
stockpile sites for recycling or to spoil sites, whichever is required. Where the underlying
material is to be reprocessed as base, the exposed surface shall be cleaned to the satisfaction
of the Engineer after removal of the bituminous material. All remaining fragments of
bituminous material shall be removed, and not more than 5% of the surface may be covered
with bituminous material.
The existing pavement material shall be broken down to the specified depth and removed, or
reprocessed in place, whichever may be required. The underlying layers may not be damaged,
and material from one layer may not be mixed with that of another layer. Where such mixing
occurs or where the material is contaminated in any other way by the actions of the contractor,
he shall remove such material and replace it with other approved material, all at his own cost.
Where a layer or layers require to be broken down over part of the pavement width only, the
limit of the work shall be clearly demarcated, which limit shall not be exceeded by the
contractor by more than 100 mm. Pavement layers broken down outside the specified limits
shall be repaired by the contractor at his own cost, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Where so ordered by the Engineer, asphalt and cemented layers shall be cut or sawn through
to the specified depth along the measured limit with approved equipment. Payment will be
made for sawing only where specified on the drawings or ordered, in writing, by the engineer.

Where existing roads have to be widened, the existing pavement layers shall be cut back to a
firm, well-compacted or cemented material. Material so broken up, if acceptable, may be used
together with imported material in the widening process, expect in the case of crushed stone
base. Where existing pavement layers are widened, separate payment will not be made for
cutting back into the existing pavement layers unless so specified in the project specifications,
irrespective of the type of material in the existing pavement layer.
Where pavement layers are broken down over a section of he road width or where pavement
layers are widened, the Engineer may order, in writing, that the various pavement layers be
excavated in benches in accordance with his instructions. No additional payment will be made
for excavating benches.
(b) Milling
(i) General
The floor of the milled excavation shall be level and with an even texture without any loose
patches or patches of unsuitable material occurring.
Loose patches and patches with unsuitable material shall be remedied in accordance with the
instructions of the engineer. Payment for removing and replacing unsuitable material and
remedying loose patches shall be as specified elsewhere in these specifications. Where such
remedial work is done in restricted areas, the extra over payment concerned shall be in
accordance with the provisions of the appropriate clauses.
Where the floor of an excavation is tested in the longitudinal direction with a 3 m straight-
edge, and in other directions with a 3 m straight-edge or a straight-edge of such shorter length
as fits in between the longitudinal sides of the excavation, the surface shall not deviate by
more than 7 mm from the bottom edge of the straight-edge.
Payment for milling will distinguish between various milling depths.
(ii) Preparing the pavement surface

Before milling may be commenced, the pavement surface shall be clean and free from soil or
other deleterious material.
Where only part of the pavement is to be milled out, the milling area shall be properly
demarcated. Milling may not exceed the required width by more than 50 mm.
Payment will not be made for milling beyond the required width, which shall be backfilled
with approved material in accordance with the provisions for the specified pavement material
at the cost of the Contractor.
(iii) Trial milling

Where ordered by the Engineer, the contractor shall execute trial milling on the various
materials to be milled.
During the trial work, the Contractor will be expected to vary the direction and speed of the
milling machine, the speed of rotation of the milling drum, and also the milling depth, in
order to obtain milled material of the required grade.
(iv) Asphalt
Where the asphalt and/or the cemented base must be reused, the asphalt shall be removed
separately.

Where the asphalt consists of layers of various mixes or grades, the Engineer may instruct the
separate removal of the layers to different stockpiles.
Where the milled material is not conveyed directly by conveyor belt and then loaded, and the
Engineer so approves, the material shall first be cut to windrow and then loaded. During
loading, the floor of the excavation or the underlying material shall not be damaged.
The milled material shall be inspected and classified in accordance with the various types of
asphalt and its suitability for recycling.
Different stockpiles shall be used for the different types of material as ordered by the
Engineer.
Contamination of the asphalt with underlying material will not be permitted, and the
contractor shall adjust the depths of milling in accordance with the thickness of the layer.
(v) Cemented material

Unless otherwise specified milled cemented material to be reprocessed on the road shall first
be windrowed with a view to inspecting the underlying surface for any patches of poor or
unsuitable material.
Where unsuitable material is encountered in the floor of the excavation, such material shall
first be removed by further milling (where the underlying layer also consists of the cemented
material), or by other approved methods, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The unsuitable material shall be replaced with approved material of the required type, which
shall be placed in accordance with the specifications for the relevant underlying layer.
Where in the opinion of the Engineer it may be necessary, he may instruct the Contractor to
taper the ends or edges of a milled excavation for which payment will be made, provided that
the tapering is not the result of defective work.
5306 STORING RECOVERED PAVEMENT MATERIAL

Excavated pavement material intended for reprocessing but which cannot be reprocessed in
place or, in the opinion of the Engineer, cannot be windrowed next to the excavation, nor
placed in position directly at any other place, and material intended for recycling or
reprocessing in a plant, shall be transported to approved stockpiles with the written
permission of the Engineer.
The stockpile site shall be cleaned, and all loose stones, vegetation and other materials, which
may cause contamination, shall be removed.
The site shall be graded smooth with an adequate slope to ensure proper drainage of water.
Where so instructed by the Engineer, the surface shall be watered and compacted to a depth of
at least 150 mm to a density of 90% of AASHTO T 180 maximum density. The compacted
surface shall be firm without any loose patches.
Where asphalt is recovered for recycling, the Engineer may order the surface to be chemically
stabilized to a depth of 150 mm. upon completion, this surface shall be swept clean.
Stockpile sites shall be sufficiently large to allow the placing of stockpiles of different types
of material or types of recovered asphalt without the stockpiles overlapping or the limits of
the prepared site being exceeded. The enlargement of the stockpile site after the stockpiles
have already been placed will not be permitted without the approval of the Engineer.

Stockpiles of milled material shall be shaped in a manner, which will limit segregation to a
minimum.
The stockpiling of asphalt shall be done in a manner that will limit consolidation to a
minimum. Adequate approved covers shall be provided for recovered asphalt stockpiles to
prevent them from becoming wet, or being contaminated by dust.
Upon completion of the work, the stockpile sites shall be broken up in accordance with the
instructions of the Engineer.
The stockpiling of excavated material will not be paid for directly, but full compensation
therefor shall be included in the rates for the various items of work in which the stockpiled
material will be used.
Separate payment will be made for the preparation of storage sites.

General
(i) Material to be reprocessed

Direct payment will not be made for breaking up and excavating existing pavement material
that is reprocessed and re-used, except when:
The material is milled out in accordance with the provisions of the project specifications or
upon the written instruction of the Engineer.
Bituminous surfacing or other bituminous pavement layers are removed separately from the
underlying material in accordance with the Project Specifications or the written instructions of
the Engineer.
Full compensation for excavating existing pavement material, where the excavation thereof is
not payable separately, shall be included in the rates tendered for the various pavement layers
and items of work in which the material is used, as provided in the relevant specifications.
(ii) Removal of bituminous layers (except milled material)

Separate payment will be made for removing existing bituminous material separately from the
underlying layer, when it is not milled out in accordance with the project specifications or the
instructions of the Engineer, irrespective of whether or not it requires recycling.
(iii) Material from existing pavements which is not reprocessed

Existing gravel pavement material, gravel, or existing bituminous material not intended for
reprocessing, shall be used for other specified purposes or taken to spoil. Payment for the
excavation of such material will be made directly under Pay Item 53.03 unless it is used for
other purposes.
(iv) Milling
Milling will be paid for directly irrespective of whether or not the material will be re-used.
(v) Measurement for excavating existing pavement material and underlying fill
Where payment is made separately for the excavation of existing pavement material and
underlying fill, the quantity will be calculated in accordance with the authorized horizontal

dimensions of the excavated layer and the average depth of excavation. The average depth of
excavation will be determined in accordance with the test holes made or cores drilled at
intervals not exceeding 10 m, and which are so distributed over the surface that a realistic
estimate of the depth can be obtained.
Item 53.01 Excavating and removing existing bituminous material (except milled
material)
(a) Material intended for recycling with the average depth of excavation:
(i) Not exceeding 30 mm ................. .............................................square meter (m2)
(ii) Exceeding 30 mm but not exceeding 60 mm........................... square meter (m2)
(iii) Exceeding 60 mm ................ ....................................................square meter (m2)
(b) Material to be disposed of with the average depth of excavation:

(i) Not exceeding 30 mm .................. ............................................square meter (m2)
(ii) Exceeding 30 mm but not exceeding 60 mm............................. quare meter (m2)
(iii) Exceeding 60 mm .................. ..................................................square meter (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be a square meter layer of bituminous material excavated from
existing pavements separately from the underlying material on the instruction of the engineer,
and removed to approved stockpile or spoil sites.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for determining the average thickness of the
layer of bituminous material to be excavated, including the excavation of holes or the drilling
of cores, if so instructed, for breaking down, excavating, loading, and transporting the
material to approved stockpiles or spoil sites and for loading and properly placing the material
in stockpiles or spoil dumps.
The volume used for calculating overhaul shall be taken as 70% of the loose volume of the
material measured in the hauling vehicles.
Item 53.02 Milling out existing bituminous material with an average milling depth:
(a) Not exceeding 30 mm............................ ..............................................cubic meter (m3)
(b) Exceeding 30 mm but not exceeding 60 mm ..................................... cubic meter (m3)
(c) Exceeding 60 mm............................. ...................................................cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be a cubic meter of asphalt milled out and removed to
approved stockpiles.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for providing milling equipment and milling
out the material to the specified depth and in accordance with the requirements for evenness
and for all measurements, labor, supervision and incidentals for executing the work and
obtaining milled material which will comply with the specified requirements.
The tendered rate shall also include full compensation for loading and transporting the
material to approved irrespective of the method of loading, and for unloading the material and
placing it in stockpile, also for screening out the oversize material if necessary. Separate
payment will be made for preparing the stockpile site.

Payment for milling the material will distinguish between the various average depths of
excavation, irrespective of the required number of passes by the plant for milling out the
material.
Item 53.03 Excavating and spoiling material from an existing pavement and/or the
underlying fill:
(a) Non-cemented material........................................................................cubic meter (m3)
(b) Cemented material ...............................................................................cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be a cubic meter of material, with or without existing
bituminous material, excavated from the existing pavement and/or fill and removed to spoil
dumps.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for excavating the material from the
existing pavement and/or fill, irrespective of layer thickness, for loading, transporting, off-
loading, and placing the material in approved spoil dumps.
Payment will not distinguish between material with or without existing bituminous material.
Item 53.04 Sawing or cutting asphalt or cemented pavement layers

(a) Sawing asphalt ................................... ................................................square meter (m2)
(b) Cutting asphalt ............................................................................................... meter (m)
(c) Sawing cemented material ..................................... ............................square meter (m2)
The unit of measurement for subitems (a) and (c) shall be the square meter of sawcut area
calculated in accordance with the authorized length of sawcut and the average saw depth
measured after excavation of the material. The unit of measurement for subitem (b) shall be
the meter of cut measured in accordance with the authorized saw length.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all material and sawing or cutting costs
and for all incidentals for cutting or sawing the pavement in accordance with the instructions
of the engineer.
Payment will not distinguish between the various depths of sawing or cutting work,
irrespective of the number of separate cuts, which may be required for sawing or cutting the
layer to the required depth. Where surfacing of less than 30 mm thickness is sawn together
with a cemented pavement, the surfacing section shall be deemed to be cemented material for
payment purposes.
Item 53.05 Removing the remaining asphalt from the underlying layer
The unit of measurement shall be the square meter of excavation floor cleaned on the
instruction of the Engineer.
The quantity will be calculated in accordance with the authorized dimensions of the surface
from which the remaining bituminous material will have to be removed after the existing
bituminous layer has been taken off. Only surfaces of existing layers to be reprocessed as base
will be paid for and only if so instructed by the Engineer.

The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the removal of any remaining
bituminous material from the excavation floor as specified and the disposal thereof, all to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Item 53.06 Preparing stockpile sites

The unit of measurement shall be the square meter of stockpile site prepared on the instruction
of the Engineer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for demarcating, clearing, leveling,
watering, compacting, and draining the stockpile site as specified.
Payment will not be made for preparing the sites for spoil dumps unless such preparation has
been instructed, in writing, by the Engineer.

DIVISION 5400: GRAVEL WEARING COURSE AND GRAVEL SHOULDERS
5401 SCOPE
This Division covers the specification of materials for, and the construction of, gravel wearing
course and gravel shoulders from crushed rock, crushed boulders, crushed gravel or as-ripped
weathered rock.
The gravel wearing course and gravel shoulders shall be constructed to the dimensions and
cross sectional profiles shown in the Contract drawings.
5402 SOURCES OF MATERIAL

Gravel wearing course and gravel shoulder materials shall be obtained from approved sources
in borrow areas, cuts or existing pavement layers. The materials shall be located by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
5403 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR GRAVEL WEARING COURSE
(a) General
The material shall consist of hard durable angular particles produced by crushing rock,
crushing gravel or from natural sources and shall be clean and free from organic matter, lumps
of clay or other deleterious substances.
The material shall be of such a nature that it can be readily laid and compacted without
segregation.
They should have sufficient cohesion to prevent ravelling and corrugating (especially in dry
conditions).
The amount of fines (particularly plastic fines) should be limited to avoid a slippery surface
under wet conditions.
Selected material shall consist of hard durable angular particles of fragments of stone or
gravel. The material shall be free from vegetable matter and lumps or balls of clay.
(b) Grading
The grading of the gravel after placing and compaction shall be a smooth continuous curve
within and approximately parallel to the envelopes or the grading limits shown in Table
5403/1 when determined in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T-27.
The mass of material passing the 0.075mm sieve shall be determined in accordance with the

Table 5403/1 Grading Requirements for Gravel Wearing Course and Gravel Shoulder
Test Sieve Percent (%) by mass of total aggregate passing test sieve
Size(mm)
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 Type 6
- - - 100 - -
50
100 - 100 80-100 - -
37.5
- 100 95 - 100 - - -
28
80 - 100 95 - 100 85-100 60-80 100 -
20
- 80-100 65 - 100 - - -
14
55 - 100 65 - 100 55 - 100 45-65 80 - 100 100
10
40 - 60 45 - 85 35-90 30-50 60 -85 80-100
5
30 - 50 - - 20-40 45-70 50-80
2.36
- 30 - 65 22-75 - - -
2
- 25-55 18-60 - - -
1
15 - 30 18 - 45 15-50 10-25 25-45 25-45
0.425
5 - 15 12-32 10-40 5-15 10-25 10-25
0.075
(c) Gravel Wearing Course Material Specification

Unless and otherwise stated Type 1 gravel wearing course shall be used for all roads which
have Annual Average Daily Traffic design greater than 50.
Type 4 gravel wearing course shall be used in the new construction of roads having Annual
Average Daily Traffic design less than 50.
The other Types of gravel wearing course materials shall be used as shown in the contract or
as directed by the Engineer.
(i) Type 1
The grading of this gravel after placing and compaction shall be a smooth curve within and
approximately parallel to the envelopes detailed in Table 5403/1.
The material shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 50 at 500 revolutions, as
determined by AASHTO T96.
The material shall be compacted to a minimum in-situ density of 95% of the maximum dry
density determined in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T 180.

The plasticity index should be not greater than 15 and not less than 8 for wet climatic zones
and should be not greater than 20 and not less than 10 for dry climatic zones.
The linear Shrinkage should be in a range of 3-10%.
Note that the above gradation and plasticity requirements are only to be used with angular
particles and that crushing and screening are likely to be required in many instances for this
purpose. The crushed ratio shall be a minimum of 60%.
(ii) Type 2 & 3

These materials may be more rounded particles fulfilling the following:
The Plasticity Index lies in a range of 5-12% in wet areas, and in any case less than 16% in
other areas
The materials have the sanction of local experience
Use of more rounded particles may allow the use of river gravel. Trials should nevertheless be
conducted to verify whether crushing occurs under traffic or whether crushing should be
considered prior to use. Subject to trials, a minimum percentage by weight of particles with at
least one fractured face of 40% may be considered. This requirement may also be expressed
in terms of crushing ratio.
The CBR should be in excess of 20% after 4 days of soaking at 95% of maximum dry density
under Heavy Compaction. For very low traffic, the requirement may be relaxed to a CBR of
15.
(iii) Type 4
This material gradation allows for larger size material and corresponds to the gradation of a
base course material. The use of this gradation of materials is subject to the local experience
and shall be used with PIs in a range of 10-20.
(iv) Type 5 & 6

These materials gradations are recommended for smaller size particles. They may be used if
sanctioned by experience with plasticity characteristics as for material Type 1.
5404 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR GRAVEL WEARING COURSE
(a) Equipment
Gravel wearing course and gravel shoulder material shall be spread by means of graders or
other equipment approved by the Engineer.
Gravel wearing course and gravel shoulder material shall be compacted by means of self-
propelled or towed steel wheeled rollers which are capable of achieving the density
requirements stipulated in this Clause.
Water shall be applied by means of equipment, which is capable of distributing the applied
water uniformly over the surface of the layer.
(b) Crushing and Screening

The gravel wearing course and gravel shoulder material shall be crushed and/or screened at
source to remove all oversize material.

(c) Transport, Placing and Spreading

The material shall be transported in such a way, that no segregation occurs.
The material shall be placed, spread, broken down, watered if necessary and mixed in layers
not exceeding 200mm and not less than 100mm compacted thickness for Type 1, Type 2, Type
3, Type 5, Type 6 and 150mm compacted thickness for Type 4.
(d) Compaction
Prior to compaction, the moisture content of the spread material shall be adjusted as necessary
either by the uniform application of water or drying out, to achieve within -1% to +2% of the
optimum moisture content when determined in accordance with AASHTO T-180.
The in-situ density of the completed layer shall be 95% of the maximum dry density when
determined in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T-180 method D. The dry
density shall be determined in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T-190.
nuclear densometer, which shall be accurately calibrated before use, and at intervals
thereafter, against results obtained in accordance with AASHTO T-190.
(e) Trial Areas

not less than 1000 square metres for gravel wearing courses and 250 square metres for gravel
shoulder using the materials and equipment proposed for the work to demonstrate compliance
with the requirements of this Clause.

The completed wearing course shall comply with the construction tolerances given below.
The tolerances shall be maximum permissible deviations from the specified dimensions,
levels, alignment, positions, etc. as shown on the Drawings or as given below:
(i) Level and Grade

The level tolerance shall be + 25 mm.
Deviation from the specified longitudinal grade due to deviations from level shall not exceed
the following Table 5405/1.

Table 5405/1 Longitudinal grade tolerance
Length of Grade Measured in Maximum Variation from

meter Specified Grade (%)
2 0.34
5 0.27
10 0.21
20 0.13
30 0.08
(ii) Width
The average total width of the wearing course and shoulders shall be at least equal to that
shown on the Drawings and nowhere shall the outer edge of the shoulders be more than 75
mm inside the edge lines shown on the Drawings.
(iii) Thickness
The thickness tolerance shall be + 30 mm.
(iv) Cross Section

When tested with a 3 m straight-edge laid at right angles to the road centerline the surface
shall not deviate from the bottom of the straight-edge by more than 10 mm.
At any transverse section the difference in level between any two points shall not vary from
their difference in level computed from the cross sections shown on the Drawings by more
than 20 mm.
5406 TESTING
The minimum testing frequency that will be required from the Contractor in terms of
conditions of contract for the purpose of process control, shall be the following:
Table 5406/1 Testing Frequency
Testing Frequency
Test One test every Minimum number of tests per lot
Materials
Field density and OMC 2 500 m2 4
Indicator tests 2 500 m2 4
Construction Tolerances
Surface levels
Thickness 20 m*
Width 20 m*
Cross section 200 m
Smoothness 20m
40 m2
*3 pts per cross
section
Note: The determination of field dry density expressed as a percentage of AASHTO T180 maximum dry density implies a
AASHTO T180 determination for each field density. Where material is homogeneous, this ratio can be decreased to one
laboratory density determination for up to four field densities.

The minimum dry densities given in Table 5406/2 shall be equaled or exceeded.
Table 5406/2 Density requirements:
Specified Number Minimum Minimum value of any

Density (% of of Tests mean density single test (% of
AASHTO per lot (% of AASHTO T180 MDD)
T180 MDD) AASHTO
T180 MDD)
95 4 95. 6 93. 0
5 95. 8 92. 8
6 95. 9 92. 6
In calculating the mean, density values differing by more than five percentage points from the
mean shall be disregarded and a new mean taken.
Any materials or workmanship that do not comply with the specified requirements shall be
removed and replaced with materials and workmanship complying with the specified
requirements, or if the Engineer permits, be repaired as specified in Clause 1208, so that after
being repaired they will comply with the specified requirements.
(i) Routine Inspection and Testing

Routine inspection and testing will be carried out by the Engineer to test the quality of
materials and workmanship for compliance with the requirements of this Division.

Pay Items 54.08, 54.09 and 54.11 are applicable solely to work that has to be executed in a
restricted area of which the width is less than 3.0 m or the length is less than 150.0 m.
Item 54.01 Gravel Wearing course and Shoulder constructed from gravel taken from
cut or borrow, including free-haul up to 1.0 km
(a) Gravel wearing course compacted to 95% of modified AASHTO density specify
compacted layer thickness)............................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
(b) Gravel shoulders wearing course compacted to 95% of modified AASHTO density
(specify compacted layer thickness).................................................................. cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of compacted pavement layer, and the
quantity shall be calculated from the authorized dimensions of the completed layer.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for procuring, as if from soft excavation or
pits, breaking down, placing and compacting the material, including transporting the material
for a distance of 1.0 km and its removal, disposal and transporting for a distance of 1.0 km, of
up to 5% by volume of oversize material, and the protection and maintenance of the layer and
the conducting of control tests, all as specified.
Item 54.02 Extra over Pay item 54.01 for excavation of material in
(a) Intermediate excavation ..................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
(b) Hard excavation .................................................................................. cubic metre (m3)

hard excavation.
Item 54.03 Gravel Wearing course and Shoulder constructed from gravel obtained
from existing pavement layers:
(a) Gravel wearing course compacted to 95% of modified AASHTO density, using:
(b) Gravel shoulder wearing course compacted to 95% of modified AASHTO density,
using:
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of compacted layer, the quantity of which
shall be calculated in accordance with the authorized dimensions of the completed layer if the
underlying layer has also been reconstructed or reworked. Where the underlying layer has not
been reconstructed or reworked but only rolled, or where no work has been done on it,
quantities shall be calculated with the aid of cross-sections taken of the layer before and after
construction. Where the material consists of recovered pavement material in part and
imported material in part the quantity of imported material obtained from cut or borrow shall
be paid for under pay item 54.01, calculated in accordance with the volume relation of the
respective materials.
specified.

Item 54.04 In situ reconstruction of existing gravel wearing course and shoulder layer
as
(a) Gravel wearing course compacted to 95% of modified AASHTO density, using:
(b) Gravel shoulder wearing course compacted to 93% of modified AASHTO density,
using:
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of compacted pavement layer reworked in
situ, the quantity of which shall be calculated in accordance with the authorized dimensions of
the completed layer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for breaking up the existing layer to the
specified depth, breaking down and preparing the material, placing and compacting the
54.06.
(a) Gravel wearing course......................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
(b) Gravel shoulder wearing course .......................................................... cubic metre (m3)
crushed-stone wearing courses the engineer may direct the existing layer to be broken down
to its full depth.

engineer, which quantity shall be taken as 70% of the loose volume measured in trucks, unless
instructed by the engineer that the quantity be determined by way of cross-sections.
The unit of measurement shall be a cubic metre (m3) of material from an existing pavement
layer, temporarily bladed to windrow and measured in its original position before removal.
(a) Non-cemented material ...................................................................... cubic metre (m3)
(b) Cemented material ..............................................................................cubic metre (m3)
Item 54.08 compacting the floors of pavement excavations (5 roller passes) with:
(a) Vibratory rollers ................................................................................. square metre (m2)
(b) Oscillatory rollers ............................................................................. square metre (m2)
(c) Grid rollers ....................................................................................... square metre (m2)
(d) Flat-wheeled rollers ......................................................................... square metre (m2)
(e) Pneumatic-tyred rollers .................................................................... square metre (m2)
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for supplying the roller, applying 5 rollers

Item 54.09 Watering the pavement excavation floor

The unit of measurement shall be kilolitre (kl) of water applied to the floor of the excavation
to be compacted on the instruction of the engineer.
Item 54.10 Variations in the number of roller passes applicable to pay item 54.08
(a) Vibratory rollers ................................................................................ square metre (m2)
(b) Oscillatory rollers .............................................................................. square metre (m2)
(c) Grid rollers ....................................................................................... square metre (m2)
(d) Flat-wheeled rollers........................................................................... square metre (m2)
(e) Pneumatic-tyred rollers ..................................................................... square metre (m2)
restricted areas
The unit of measurement shall be a square metre (m2) of pavement excavation floor
compacted in restricted areas.

SERIES 8000: STRUCTURES

CONTENT
LIST OF TABLES AND FIGURES ................................................................................................ 11
DIVISION 8100: FOUNDATIONS FOR STRUCTURES ................................................................ 12

8101 Scope .............................................................................................................................. 12
8102 Materials......................................................................................................................... 12
(a) General .................................................................................................................. 12
(b) Rock (for rock fill) ................................................................................................ 12
(c) Crushed stone ........................................................................................................ 13
(d) Granular fill ........................................................................................................... 13
(e) Sand fill ................................................................................................................. 13
(f) Structural steel....................................................................................................... 13
(g) Permanent Pile Casings ......................................................................................... 14
(h) Driven Pile Casings ............................................................................................... 14
(i) Sheet Piles ............................................................................................................. 14
(j) Grouting................................................................................................................. 14
8103 General ........................................................................................................................... 14
(a) Subsurface Data..................................................................................................... 14
(b) Channel preservation............................................................................................. 15
8104 Cofferdams, Artificial Islands And Dewatering............................................................. 15
(a) General .................................................................................................................. 15
(b) Access.................................................................................................................... 15
(c) Dewatering ............................................................................................................ 15
8105 Excavation ...................................................................................................................... 16
(a) General .................................................................................................................. 16
(b) Ground surface for excavation .............................................................................. 16
(c) Excavation ............................................................................................................. 16
(d) Classification of excavated material...................................................................... 17
(e) Blasting.................................................................................................................. 17
(f) Deterioration of foundation excavations ............................................................... 17
(g) Excavation safety .................................................................................................. 18
(h) Inspection .............................................................................................................. 18
(i) Excavation by hand ............................................................................................... 18
8106 Foundation...................................................................................................................... 18
8107 Utilization Of Excavated Material ................................................................................. 19
8108 Backfill And Fill Near Structures................................................................................... 19
(a) General .................................................................................................................. 19
(b) Backfill .................................................................................................................. 19
(c) Fill ......................................................................................................................... 20
(d) Select Granular Backfill ........................................................................................ 20
(e) Fill within restricted areas ..................................................................................... 20
8109 Foundation Fill ............................................................................................................... 21
8110 Grouting Of Rock Fissures............................................................................................. 21
8111 Foundation Dowels......................................................................................................... 22

8112 Foundation Lining ..........................................................................................................22

8113 Foundation Piling............................................................................................................22
(a) General...................................................................................................................22
(b) Piling Layout .........................................................................................................22
(c) Alternative Designs for Piling and Piling Layouts ................................................22
(d) Details to be furnished by the Contractor ..............................................................25
(e) Pile-installation Frames and Equipment................................................................25
(f) Piling Platforms .....................................................................................................25
(g) Setting Out .............................................................................................................26
(h) Ground Surface of Foundation Piling....................................................................26
(i) Cast in situ concrete piles ......................................................................................26
(j) Precast Concrete Piles............................................................................................27
(k) Steel Piles...............................................................................................................28
(l) Driving Piles .........................................................................................................29
(m) Augering and Boring .............................................................................................30
(n) Rock Sockets .........................................................................................................31
(o) Obstructions...........................................................................................................31
(p) Determining Pile Lengths ......................................................................................32
(q) Piling Data .............................................................................................................33
(r) Stripping the Pile Heads ........................................................................................33
(s) Construction of Pile-capping Slab .........................................................................34
(t) Core Drilling..........................................................................................................34
(u) Load Test ...............................................................................................................34
(v) Defective Piles .......................................................................................................35
(w) Standing Time in Respect of Piles-installation Frames.........................................35
8114 Caissons ..........................................................................................................................36
(a) General...................................................................................................................36
(b) Construction and sinking .......................................................................................36
(c) Founding ................................................................................................................37
(d) Data........................................................................................................................37
(e) Filling the caissons ................................................................................................38
(f) Stripping ................................................................................................................38
(g) Concrete screed below the caisson cover slabs .....................................................38
8115 Measurement And Payment............................................................................................39
Item 81.01 Additional foundation investigations Provisional Sum ...............................39
Item 81.02 Excavation of materials ...............................................................................39
Item 81.03 Access lump sum .........................................................................................40
Item 81.04 Drainage Lump Sum....................................................................................40
Item 81.05 Backfill to excavations utilizing ..................................................................40
Item 81.06 Fill within restricted areas ...........................................................................40
Item 81.07 Overhaul in excess of 1.0 km, on excavated Material and on material
imported for backfill, foundation fill and fill for caissons.....................................41
Item 81.08 Over break in excavation in hard material...................................................41
Item 81.09 Foundation fill .............................................................................................41
Item 81.10 Establishment on site for the grouting of rock fissures ...............................41
Item 81.11 Move to and set up equipment at each hole to be drilled ............................42
Item 81.12 Drilling of holes...........................................................................................42
Item 81.13 Grouting of holes .........................................................................................42
Item 81.14 Doweling into rock ......................................................................................42
Item 81.15 Foundation lining.........................................................................................42
Item 81.16 Establishment on the site for piling .............................................................42

Item 81.17 Moving to, and setting up the equipment at each position for
installing the piles.................................................................................................. 43
Item 81.18 Augered or bored holes for piles ................................................................. 43
Item 81.19 Driving the temporary casing for driven displacement piling systems
for forming holes for piles..................................................................................... 43
Item 81.20 Manufacturing, supplying and delivering prefabricated piles..................... 44
Item 81.21 Installation of prefabricated piles ................................................................ 44
Item 81.22 Extra over item 81.18, irrespective of the depth, to form augered and
bored pile holes through identified obstructions ................................................... 44
Item 81.23 Forming augered and bored pile holes through unidentified
obstructions ........................................................................................................... 45
Item 81.24 Driving temporary casings for driven displacement piling systems or
installing prefabricated piles through identified or unidentified obstructions ...... 45
Item 81.25 Extra over items 81.18, 81.19 and 81.21 for raking piles ........................... 45
Item 81.26 Forming under reams for piles .................................................................... 45
Item 81.27 Forming the bulbous bases for piles............................................................ 45
Item 81.28 Socketing piles into rock formation ............................................................ 46
Item 81.29 Installing and removing temporary casings in augered holes for piles ....... 46
Item 81.30 Installing permanent pile casing for piles................................................... 46
Item 81.31 Steel reinforcement in cast in situ piles:...................................................... 46
Item 81.32 Cast in situ concrete in piles, under reams, bulbous bases and sockets ...... 46
Item 81.33 Extra over item 81.32 for concrete cast under water................................... 46
Item 81.34 Splicing/coupling prefabricated piles for lengthening ................................ 47
Item 81.35 Stripping/cutting the pile heads.................................................................. 47
Item 81.36 Establishment on the site of the load testing of piles .................................. 47
Item 81.37 Load tests on piles ....................................................................................... 47
Item 81.38 Establishment on the site for core drilling................................................... 47
Item 81.39 Moving the equipment to and assembling it at each location where
cores are to be drilled ............................................................................................ 47
Item 81.40 Drilling the cores ......................................................................................... 48
Item 81.41 Standing time for pile-installation frame..................................................... 48
Item 81.42 Establishment on the site for constructing the caisson................................ 48
Item 81.43 Formwork for caissons ................................................................................ 48
Item 81.44 Steel reinforcement for caissons.................................................................. 48
Item 81.45 Cast in situ concrete in caissons and concrete seals.................................... 49
Item 81.46 Cutting edge for caissons ............................................................................ 49
Item 81.47 Sinking caissons through material situated ................................................. 49
Item 81.48 Excavation for caissons ............................................................................... 50
Item 81.49 Filling the caissons ...................................................................................... 50
Item 81.50 Stripping the caisson heads. ........................................................................ 50
Item 81.51 Nuclear integrity testing on bored piles: ..................................................... 50
DIVISION 8200 FALSEWORK, FORMWORK, AND CONCRETE FINISHES ................................ 52

8201 Scope .............................................................................................................................. 52
8202 Dimensions..................................................................................................................... 52
8203 Material Requirements For Falsework And Formwork ................................................. 52
(a) Falsework .............................................................................................................. 52
(b) Formwork .............................................................................................................. 52
8204 Design And Construction Requirements........................................................................ 54
(a) Drawings ............................................................................................................... 54
(b) Design.................................................................................................................... 55
(c) Construction...........................................................................................................56
(d) Removal of forms and falsework...........................................................................61
8205 Formed Surfaces: Classes Of Finish...............................................................................62
(a) General...................................................................................................................62
(b) Class F1 surface finish...........................................................................................63
(c) Class F2 surface finish...........................................................................................63
(d) Class F3 surface finish...........................................................................................63
(e) Board surface finish...............................................................................................63
(f) Protecting the surfaces...........................................................................................63
8206 Remedial Treatment Of Formed Surfaces ......................................................................63
(a) General...................................................................................................................63
(b) Repairs to surface defects ......................................................................................64
(c) Rubbing the surfaces..............................................................................................64
8207 Unformed Surfaces: Classes Of Finish...........................................................................64
(a) Class U1 surface finish (rough) .............................................................................64
(b) Class U2 surface finish (floated) ...........................................................................65
(c) Class U3 surface finish (smoothly finished)..........................................................65
Item 82.01 Formwork for indicated class of finish........................................................65
Item 82.02 Vertical formwork for indicated class of finish...........................................65
Item 82.03 Horizontal formwork for indicated class of finish.......................................65
Item 82.04 Inclined formwork for indicated class of finish...........................................65
Item 82.05 Permanent formwork ...................................................................................66
Item 82.06 Formwork to form open joints.....................................................................66
Item 82.07 Establishment on the site for sliding formwork operations .........................66
Item 82.08 Transporting to and setting up the sliding formwork assembly ..................66
Item 82.09 Forming the concrete by sliding formwork for structures ...........................67
DIVISION 8300: STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR STRUCTURES ................................................68

8301 Scope...............................................................................................................................68
8302 Materials Requirement....................................................................................................68
(a) Steel reinforcement................................................................................................68
(b) Mechanical couplers ..............................................................................................68
(c) Storage of Materials...............................................................................................68
8303 Construction Requirements ............................................................................................68
(a) Equipment..............................................................................................................68
(b) Bending of Reinforcement.....................................................................................69
(c) Surface Conditions.................................................................................................69
(d) Placing and Fixing .................................................................................................69
(e) Cover......................................................................................................................70
(f) Laps and Joints ......................................................................................................71
(g) Welding..................................................................................................................71
Item 83.01 Steel reinforcement for structure .................................................................72
Item 83.02 Mechanical couplers for ..............................................................................72
Item 83.03 Spacer "ladders"...........................................................................................72
DIVISION 8400: CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES ......................................................................73

8401 Scope...............................................................................................................................73
8402 Materials .........................................................................................................................73

(a) Cement................................................................................................................... 73
(b) Admixtures ............................................................................................................ 73
(c) Aggregates............................................................................................................. 74
(d) Water ..................................................................................................................... 75
8403 Storage Of Materials ...................................................................................................... 76
(a) Cement................................................................................................................... 76
(b) Aggregates............................................................................................................. 76
(c) Storage Capacity.................................................................................................... 76
(d) Deteriorated Material ............................................................................................ 77
8404 Concrete For Structures.................................................................................................. 77
(a) Concrete Grade and Class ..................................................................................... 77
(b) Minimum Cement Content.................................................................................... 77
(c) Maximum Water/Cement Ratio ............................................................................ 77
(d) Maximum Cement Content ................................................................................... 77
(e) Design of Concrete Mixes for Structures .............................................................. 77
(f) Prescribed mix....................................................................................................... 78
8405 Construction Requirements ............................................................................................ 79
(a) Storage and Handling of Material ......................................................................... 79
(b) Measuring Material. .............................................................................................. 80
(c) Batching Plant, Mixers, and Agitators .................................................................. 80
(d) Mixing ................................................................................................................... 81
(e) Delivery ................................................................................................................. 81
(f) Batching and Mixing ............................................................................................. 82
(g) Trial Mixes ............................................................................................................ 84
(h) Consistency and Workability ................................................................................ 84
(i) Temperature and Weather Conditions................................................................... 85
8406 Handling, Placing And Compaction Of Concrete .......................................................... 86
(a) General .................................................................................................................. 86
(b) Placing ................................................................................................................... 87
8407 Construction Joints ......................................................................................................... 92
(a) General .................................................................................................................. 92
(b) Preparation of Surfaces ......................................................................................... 92
(c) Placing Fresh Concrete at Construction Joints...................................................... 92
(d) Bonding ................................................................................................................. 93
(e) Bonding and Doweling to Existing Structures ...................................................... 93
8408 Expansion And Contraction Joints ................................................................................. 93
(a) Open joints ............................................................................................................ 93
(b) Filled joints............................................................................................................ 93
(c) Steel joints ............................................................................................................. 94
(d) Water stops ............................................................................................................ 94
(e) Compression joint seals......................................................................................... 94
(f) Elastomeric expansion joint seal ........................................................................... 94
8409 Finishing Plastic Concrete.............................................................................................. 94
(a) General .................................................................................................................. 94
(b) Striking of Formwork............................................................................................ 95
8410 Curing Concrete ............................................................................................................. 95
(a) General .................................................................................................................. 95
(b) Forms inplace method ........................................................................................... 95
(c) Water method ........................................................................................................ 96
(d) Liquid membrane curing compound method ........................................................ 96
(e) Steam curing (precast units) .................................................................................. 96

8411 Pipes And Conduits ........................................................................................................97

8412 Precast Concrete .............................................................................................................97
Item 84.01 Cast in situ concrete.....................................................................................98
Item 84.02 Manufacturing pre-cast concrete members..................................................98
Item 84.03 Transporting and erecting pre-cast concrete members ................................98
Item 84.04 Epoxy bonding of new concrete surfaces to old..........................................98
Item 84.05 Demolishing existing concrete ....................................................................98
DIVISION 8500 : TIMBER STRUCTURES ................................................................................100

8501 scope .............................................................................................................................100
8502 Material For Timber Structures ....................................................................................100
(a) Untreated Structural Timber and Lumber............................................................100
(b) Treated Structural Timber and Lumber ...............................................................100
(c) Hardware..............................................................................................................100
(d) Yard lumber .........................................................................................................100
(e) Structural Shapes, Rods, and plates.....................................................................101
(f) Paint .....................................................................................................................101
(g) Preservative Treatment of Timber ......................................................................101
8503 Construction Requirements ..........................................................................................102
(a) General.................................................................................................................102
(b) Storage of Materials.............................................................................................102
(c) Treated Timber ....................................................................................................103
(d) Untreated Timber.................................................................................................103
(e) Holes for Bolts, Dowels, Rods, and Lag Screws.................................................103
(f) Bolts and Washers ...............................................................................................103
(g) Countersinking.....................................................................................................104
(h) Framing................................................................................................................104
(i) Framing Bents......................................................................................................104
(j) Caps for all Bents.................................................................................................104
(k) Bracing.................................................................................................................104
(l) Stringers...............................................................................................................105
(m) Plank Floors .........................................................................................................105
(n) Transversely Nail-Laminated Decks ...................................................................106
(o) Wheel Guards and Railings .................................................................................106
(p) Trusses .................................................................................................................106
(q) Drains...................................................................................................................106
(r) Painting ................................................................................................................107
(s) Acceptance...........................................................................................................107
8504 Measurement And Payment..........................................................................................107
Item 85.01 Untreated structural timber and lumber.....................................................107
Item 85.02 Treated structural timber and lumber ........................................................107
DIVISION 8600: PRESTRESSING ............................................................................................108

8601 Scope.............................................................................................................................108
8602 Materials .......................................................................................................................108
(a) General.................................................................................................................108
(b) Prestressing steel..................................................................................................108
(c) Anchorages and couplers.....................................................................................110
(d) Sheaths.................................................................................................................110

(e) Cable supports ..................................................................................................... 111

(f) Positioning of Tendons and Duct Formers for Pre-stressing Tendons................ 111
(g) Tendon spacers .................................................................................................... 111
(h) Grout.................................................................................................................... 111
(i) Protecting agents for unbonded tendons ............................................................. 112
(j) Testing ................................................................................................................. 112
8603 Construction Requirements .......................................................................................... 113
(a) Equipment ........................................................................................................... 113
(b) Technical Data..................................................................................................... 114
(c) Prestressing System............................................................................................. 115
(d) Drawings Prepared By the Contractor................................................................. 116
(e) Precasting ............................................................................................................ 116
(f) Pre-Tensioning .................................................................................................... 117
(g) Post-Tensioning................................................................................................... 118
8604 Loss Of Prestress .......................................................................................................... 124
Item 86.01 Prestressing tendons .................................................................................. 124
Item 86.02 Anchorages and couplers........................................................................... 125
Item 86.03 Extra over pay item 86.02 for partially tensioning the tendons ................ 125
DIVISION 8700 BRIDGE BEARINGS… ................................................................................... 126

8701 Scope ............................................................................................................................ 126
8702 Bridge Bearings............................................................................................................ 126
(a) Material ............................................................................................................... 126
(b) Concrete Hinges .................................................................................................. 127
(c) Roofing Felt......................................................................................................... 128
(d) Elastomeric Bearings........................................................................................... 128
(e) Proprietary Bearings............................................................................................ 129
(f) Dowels and Guides.............................................................................................. 132
(g) Storage and Handling .......................................................................................... 132
(h) Installation ........................................................................................................... 132
8703 Bridge Parapets, Railings And Sidewalks.................................................................... 133
(a) Materials.............................................................................................................. 133
(b) Concrete Parapets ................................................................................................ 133
(c) Metal Railings ..................................................................................................... 134
(d) Bridge Number Plates ......................................................................................... 134
(e) Concrete Sidewalks ............................................................................................. 135
(f) Concrete Surface Finish Requirements ............................................................... 135
(g) Construction Tolerances...................................................................................... 135
8704 Joints In Structures ....................................................................................................... 135
(a) General ................................................................................................................ 135
(b) Movement joints.................................................................................................. 135
(c) Materials.............................................................................................................. 136
(d) Filled and unfilled joints...................................................................................... 138
(e) Epoxy Mortar Nosings ........................................................................................ 139
(f) Concrete Nosings ................................................................................................ 139
(g) Plug type expansion joint systems....................................................................... 140
(h) Sealing Of Joints ................................................................................................. 140
(i) Proprietary Expansion Joints............................................................................... 141
(j) Installation Of Expansion Joints.......................................................................... 142
8705 No-Fines Concrete........................................................................................................ 142
(a) Materials ..............................................................................................................142

(b) Grades on No-Fines Concrete..............................................................................143
(c) Batching and Mixing ...........................................................................................143
(d) Placing .................................................................................................................143
(e) Protection.............................................................................................................143
8706 Drainage for Structures.................................................................................................144
(a) Weep holes, drainage pipes and channelling.......................................................144
(b) No-fines concrete blocks .....................................................................................144
(c) Synthetic-fibre filter fabric ..................................................................................144
(d) Crushed stone in drainage strips behind walls.....................................................144
8707 Measurement And Payment..........................................................................................144
Item 87.01 Proprietary bearings...................................................................................144
Item 87.02 Installing the proprietary bearings ............................................................145
Item 87.03 Bearings .....................................................................................................145
Item 87.04 Concrete hinges .........................................................................................145
Item 87.05 Bearing strips .............................................................................................145
Item 87.06 Dowels/guides............................................................................................145
Item 87.07 Concrete parapets.......................................................................................146
Item 87.08 Steel railings ..............................................................................................146
Item 87.09 End blocks .................................................................................................146
Item 87.10 Numbers for structures ..............................................................................146
Item 87.11 Proprietary expansion joints ......................................................................146
Item 87.12 Installation of proprietary expansion joints ...............................................147
Item 87.13 Expansion joints.........................................................................................147
Item 87.14 Filled joints: ...............................................................................................147
Item 87.15 Unfilled joints ............................................................................................147
Item 87.16 Sealing joints .............................................................................................148
Item 87.17 Cast in situ no- fines concrete....................................................................148
Item 87.18 Precast no-fines concrete units ..................................................................148
Item 87.19 Drainage pipes and weep holes..................................................................148
Item 87. 20 Drainage gulleys .......................................................................................149
Item 87. 21 Synthetic-fiber filter fabric .......................................................................149
Item 87. 22 Concrete channeling .................................................................................149
Item 87. 23 Crushed stone in drainage strips ...............................................................149
Item 87. 24 Nose endings at balustrades......................................................................149
Item 87.25 Concrete transition blocks .........................................................................149
DIVISION 8800:STRUCTURAL STEELWORK ..........................................................................151

8801 scope .............................................................................................................................151
8802 Materials .......................................................................................................................151
(a) Structural steel .....................................................................................................151
(b) Bolts, nuts and washers........................................................................................151
(c) Friction-grip fasteners..........................................................................................151
(d) Welding consumables..........................................................................................151
(e) Test certificates....................................................................................................152
8803 Codes Of Practice .........................................................................................................152
8804 Shop Details..................................................................................................................152
8805 Fabrication And Assembly ...........................................................................................152
(a) General.................................................................................................................152
(b) Marking the steel .................................................................................................152
(c) Cutting .................................................................................................................152
(d) Holes for fasteners............................................................................................... 152

(e) Joints in compression .......................................................................................... 153
(f) Hollow sections ................................................................................................... 153
(g) Alignment of holes .............................................................................................. 153
(h) Welding ............................................................................................................... 153
(i) Bolting ................................................................................................................. 153
(j) Welded Stud Shear Connectors........................................................................... 154
(k) Friction-grip fastening......................................................................................... 154
(l) Riveting ............................................................................................................... 154
(m) Trimming............................................................................................................. 154
(n) Corrosion prevention........................................................................................... 154
8806 Erection ........................................................................................................................ 155
(a) General ................................................................................................................ 155
(b) Safety during erection ......................................................................................... 155
(c) Alignment............................................................................................................ 155
(d) Corrections .......................................................................................................... 155
(e) Grouting............................................................................................................... 155
8807 Testing .......................................................................................................................... 156
(a) Testing by the engineer ....................................................................................... 156
(b) Process control .................................................................................................... 156
Item 88.01 Structural steel........................................................................................... 156
Item 88.02 Anchor bolts .............................................................................................. 157
Item 88.03 Corrosion protection.................................................................................. 157
DIVISION 8900: STONE MASONRY STRUCTURES ................................................................. 158

8901 scope............................................................................................................................. 158
8902 Stone Masonry Walls ................................................................................................... 158
8903 Classes Of Masonry...................................................................................................... 158
8904 Material Requirements For Stone Masonry Structures ................................................ 159
(a) Stone.................................................................................................................... 159
(b) Quarry Operations ............................................................................................... 161
(c) Mortar.................................................................................................................. 161
8905 Construction Requirements .......................................................................................... 162
(a) Excavation and backfill ....................................................................................... 162
(b) Falsework ............................................................................................................ 162
(c) Selection and Placing .......................................................................................... 162
(d) Beds and Joints.................................................................................................... 163
(e) Headers................................................................................................................ 164
(f) Backing................................................................................................................ 164
(g) Coping ................................................................................................................. 164
(h) Parapet walls........................................................................................................ 164
(i) Facing for Concrete ............................................................................................. 165
(j) Pointing ............................................................................................................... 166
(k) Weep Holes ......................................................................................................... 166
(l) Cleaning Exposed Faces...................................................................................... 166
(m) Weather Limitations ............................................................................................ 166
Item 89.01 Stone masonry walls.................................................................................. 167

DIVISION T8000: CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES FOR STRUCTURES ..................................168

T8001 Scope.......................................................................................................................168
T8002 Definitions ..............................................................................................................168
T8003 Tolerances...............................................................................................................168
(a) Foundations..........................................................................................................169
(b) Footings, pile capping slabs, caisson cover slabs, etc. ........................................170
(c) Columns, walls, pier, abutments, etc ...................................................................170
(d) Bridge And Culvert Superstructure .....................................................................171
(e) Precast Beams......................................................................................................171
(f) Precast Beams And Panels...................................................................................172
(g) Precast Prestressed Concrete Structural Elements...............................................173
(h) Reinforcing Steel .................................................................................................174
(i) Prestressing ..........................................................................................................175
(j) Bridge Bearings ...................................................................................................175
(k) Fabrication And Assembly Tolerances For Structural Steel ...............................176
(l) Concrete Pavement Slab ......................................................................................176
(m) Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................179

Table 8102-1: Rock Classification .......................................................................................... 13

Table 8108-1 Select Granular Backfill Gradation................................................................... 20
Table 8204-1 Minimum Form/Support Release Criteria ........................................................ 62
Table 8303-1 Minimum concrete cover over reinforcement................................................... 71
Table 8304-1 Mass of Reinforcing Bars ................................................................................. 72
Table 8402-1 Maximum amount of deleterious substances.................................................... 74
Table 8402-2 Grading of Fine Aggregate ............................................................................... 75
Table 8402-3 Nominal Size and Grading of Coarse Aggregate.............................................. 75
Table 8404-1 Grade of Concrete for Structures ...................................................................... 77
Table 8404-2 Nominal Mixes.................................................................................................. 79
Table 8406-1 Hand Held Vibratory Requirements ................................................................. 91
Table 8409-1 Minimum Period Before Striking Formwork for Concrete for Structures ....... 95
Table 8700-2 Types of movement joints............................................................................... 136
Table 8700-1 Grades of No-Fines concrete .......................................................................... 143

DIVISION 8100: FOUNDATIONS FOR STRUCTURES
8101 SCOPE
This Division provides specifications for the construction of foundations for structures
including bridges, retaining walls, box and slab culverts etc. It provides in particular
specifications for excavation, and back filling and for the construction of the
foundation it self as well as the pile capping slabs or the caisson cover slabs.
8102 MATERIALS
(a) General
Materials used in the permanent foundation work shall comply with the requirements
specified for the particular material in series 8000 of the Specifications.
(b) Rock (for rock fill)

Stones shall be hard, angular, field or quarry stones of such quality that they will not
disintegrate on exposure to water or weathering.
The stones shall be free from overburden, shale, and organic material.
Neither the breadth nor thickness of a single stone shall be less than one-third its
length.
Not more than 10% of the total volume of rock fill shall consist of stones having a
mass of less than 0.5 of the mass specified and not more than 10% of the total volume
of rock fill shall consist of stones having a mass more than 5 times the mass specified.
Not less than 50% of the total volume of rock fill shall consist of stones larger than the
specified mass.

Table 8102-1: Rock Classification
Class Description Description of Hardness Unconfined

Field Indicator Tests Compressive
Strength
(MPa)
R1 Very soft Material crumbles under firm (moderate) blows with a 0.7 to 3.0
rock sharp end of geological pick and can be peeled off
with a knife; it is too hard to cut a tri-axial sample by
hand
R2 Soft rock Can just be scraped and peeled with a knife; 3.0 to 10.0
indentations 1 mm to 3 mm show in specimens with
firm (moderate) blows of the pick point
R3 Hard rock Cannot be scraped or peeled with a knife; handheld 10.0 to
specimen can be broken with hammer end of a 20.0
geological pick with a single firm (moderate) blow
R4 Very hard Hand-held specimen Breaks with hammer end of pick 20.0 to
rock under more than one below 70.0
R5 Extremely Specimen requires many blows with geological pick More than
hard rock to break through intact material 70.0
(c) Crushed stone

Crushed stone used for the construction of crushed stone fill shall be from sound
unweathered rock approved by the Engineer.
(d) Granular fill

Granular fill used for the construction of compacted granular fill shall be approved
granular material of at least gravel sub-base quality.
Granular back fill required for compacting against earth-retaining structures shall
consist of well-graded crushed or uncrushed gravel, stone, rock fill, or natural sand or
a combination of any of these. It shall not contain a soluble sulphate content
exceeding 2.5 g per liter as determined in accordance with the requirements of
AASHTO.
Not less than 95 per cent of the material shall pass a 125mm BS sieve and at least 90
per cent shall pass the 75mm BS sieve but not more than 10 per cent shall pass the 75-
micron BS sieve.
(e) Sand fill

Sand used for filling of caissons shall be clean, hard and free from lumps of clay,
organic or other deleterious matter.
(f) Structural steel

Steel in steel piles shall comply with the requirements of BS 4360 and/or AASHTO M
183 for the grade of steel specified on the Drawings.
I and H sections shall comply with the requirements of BS 4: Part 1.

Fabricated sections shall comply with the details shown on the Drawings.
(g) Permanent Pile Casings

Permanent piles casings shall be sufficiently rigid so as not to deform permanently or
damage during handing and construction.
The casings shall be sufficiently dense to prevent the fluid components of the concrete
from leaking during the placing of the concrete or thereafter.
Where steel casings contribute to the strength of the pile, the casings shall have a
minimum wall thickness of 4.5 mm and shall comply with the requirements of ASTM
A 252-68. Welded joints shall comply with the requirements of Division 8800 of these
specifications.
(h) Driven Pile Casings

Driven pile casings shall have sufficient strength to permit their being driven and not
being distorted by the driving of adjacent piles, and they shall be sufficiently
watertight to prevent water leaking through the casing walls during the placing of
concrete.
(i) Sheet Piles

For steel sheet piles, conform to AASHTO M 202M or M 223M.
For all other sheet piles, conform to the requirements prescribed above for the
particular material specified. Make the joints practically watertight when the piles are
in place.
(j) Grouting
(i) Cement grout

Cement grout shall meet the appropriate requirements of sub-clause 8602(h) of these
specifications.
(ii) Proprietary-brand grout

Proprietary brand grout shall be prepared and used strictly in accordance with the
instructions of the manufacturer.
8103 GENERAL
(a) Subsurface Data

If it is found during the course of excavation that the load bearing strata differs from
that shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer.
The Engineer shall be entitled, as often as he may deem necessary during the course of
excavation, to call upon the Contractor to perform additional foundation investigation
and/or tests at or below the respective foundation levels to establish safe bearing
pressures and foundation depths.

(b) Channel preservation

Stream flow and preservation of marine and freshwater life shall be maintained at all
times.
Access to cofferdams, artificial islands and piling platforms shall be accomplished
without disrupting the stream flow at the point of crossing unless otherwise specified
in the Special Provisions.
On completion of the work surplus excavated materials, including materials excavated
from caisson compartments and piles, materials used in cofferdams and other
temporary works, as well as in-situ material, shall be removed and disposed of by the
Contractor to the original bed level or such lower elevation as agreed to by the
Engineer or required for stream channelization works.
8104 COFFERDAMS, ARTIFICIAL ISLANDS AND DEWATERING
(a) General
This clause covers the provision of access, including the construction of cofferdams,
and draining the excavations.
Where it is unnecessary to provide access in terms of sub-clause 8104(b), the
contractor shall be paid separately for draining the excavations.
After Completion of the permanent works, all temporary works shall be completely
removed, the ground leveled and the site left neat. Where this is impracticable, such
portions as have not been removed, shall be dealt with in accordance with the
engineer’s instructions.
(b) Access
Where temporary banks or artificial islands are constructed in view of affording
access to the location where structural members, piles or caissons are to be
constructed, the banks or islands shall be adequately compacted in view of supporting
any plant and material without any undue settling, which may have a harmful effect on
the end product.
The contractor may use any material deemed by him to be suitable for constructing the
islands, but he shall note that no separate payment will be made in terms of items
81.02(b), 81.22, 81.24 and 81.48(b) for any obstructions or hard materials occurring in
the material used for constructing temporary banks or artificial islands.
Designing and constructing any cofferdams shall comply with the requirements of BS
8004. Before starting with construction, the contractor shall submit drawings to the
engineer, which show details of the cofferdams and the method of construction.
(c) Dewatering
The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing the ingress of water into
excavations.
The preventative measures shall include the construction of proper drainage channels,
diversion channels, sumps, the supply and operation of the necessary bailing and
pumping equipment and the construction of suitable watertight cofferdams.

The dewatering measures, with the exception of pumping, shall be maintained until
the backfilling has been completed.
Between the various construction stages pumping may be interrupted as agreed by the
Engineer. Any draining or pumping of water from cofferdams or the interior of any
foundation enclosure shall be done in such a manner as to preclude the possibility of
any portion of the concrete materials being carried away.
8105 EXCAVATION
(a) General
This work shall include excavations, not provided for elsewhere in these
Specifications, required for the foundation of structures as well as for the excavating
required for existing bridges and culverts where these have to be demolished,
extended or modified.
Excavation required for diverting, channeling or widening streams within 5.0 m of
concrete structures shall be measured and paid for under item 81.02. Excavations
beyond the 5.0 m limit shall be measured and paid for under the appropriate items of
series 3000 and 4000 of these specifications.
The Engineer may require additional excavation, to that described in the Contract, to
remove any pockets of soft soil or loose rock and the resulting voids and any natural
voids shall be filled with Grade 20/20 concrete complying with the requirements of Comment [BSB1]: insert ref.
clause 8404 of these specifications or other material as instructed by the Engineer.
No trimming of the sides of the excavation shall be carried out within 24 hours of the
placing of any blinding concrete.
Any additional excavation below the bottom of foundations, including that resulting
from removal of material which the Contractor has allowed to deteriorate shall be
replaced with Grade 20/20 concrete complying with the requirements of Division Comment [BSB2]: insert ref.
8400 A of these specifications or other material as instructed by the Engineer.
The sides of the excavation for foundations for structures shall either be vertically or
sloped at a safe angle for the material to be excavated. Except in rock, vertical sides
shall be adequately supported at all times to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
All practical measures shall be taken to prevent the ingress of surface water into the
excavated foundations. Any water collecting in the excavated foundation shall be
removed as soon as possible thereafter.
(b) Ground surface for excavation

Prior to commencement of any excavation, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in
good time to ensure that measurements, cross sections and levels of the undisturbed
ground can be taken in order that an average ground surface from which the
excavation is to be measured can be established and agreed upon between the
Engineer and the Contractor.
(c) Excavation
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the casting of concrete against the excavated
earth faces is not permissible, or where formwork has to be provided, the extremities

of the excavation, for purposes of measurement and payment, shall be deemed to be

the vertical planes parallel to and 0.6 m outside the perimeter of the member for which
formwork is to be provided.
Where suitable stable material is encountered during excavation, that part of the
trench or foundation pit shall be excavated to the neat dimensions of the base unless
directed otherwise by the Engineer.
Over excavation (over break) in hard material shall be backfield with the same class of
concrete as that in the base or with mass concrete fill as specified or as directed by the
Engineer.
Where blasting is required, the contractor shall complete the entire foundation
excavation before he commences with the construction of any permanent concrete
work, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Boulders, logs, or any other unsuitable material excavated shall be spoiled.
When hard material suitable for foundation is encountered at the foundation level, it
shall be cut and trimmed to a firm surface, either level, stepped or serrated, as
required.
Where the material at the foundation level is soft material or hard material that
deteriorates rapidly on exposure, excavation to final grade and elevation shall not be
made until just before the blinding layer is placed.
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, unsuitable material is encountered at
foundation level, such material shall be removed and replaced with foundation fill in
accordance with Clause 8109 and as directed by the Engineer.
(d) Classification of excavated material

Distinction shall be made for payment purposes between excavation in hard and soft
material. All excavation for the foundations of structures shall be classified in
accordance with the following classifications:
(i) Hard material

Material, which cannot be excavated except by drilling and blasting, or the use of
pneumatic tools or mechanical breakers shall be classified as hard material.
(ii) Soft material

All material not classified as hard material shall be classified as soft material.
(e) Blasting
Where blasting is permitted it shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract.
(f) Deterioration of foundation excavations

Where the bottoms or sides of excavations, in which bases are to be cast, are softened
due to negligence on the part of the Contractor in allowing storm or other water to
enter the excavations, the softened material shall be removed and replaced with
foundation fill as directed by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.

(g) Excavation safety

The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to safeguard the stability and
safety of the excavations and adjacent structures.
The personal safety of any person shall not be placed in jeopardy nor shall any
situation be allowed to arise which may result in damage of whatsoever nature.
(h) Inspection
No concrete shall be placed before the excavation has been properly cleaned and
inspected and approved by the Engineer.
(i) Excavation by hand

Where circumstances prevent the use of mechanical excavators and material can be
removed only by hand implements, the Engineer shall authorise the supplementary
payment to the contractor for such work at the tendered rates for excavation by hand
should he be satisfied that the contractor had been unable to prevent the necessity for
excavation by hand by proper planning and precautionary measures.
The supplementary rate for excavation by hand shall not apply to minor finishing or
clearing jobs in excavations which are otherwise being done by mass excavation plant.
8106 FOUNDATION
In consequence of possible variations of anticipated foundation conditions the
dimensions and foundation levels specified or shown on the Drawings may have to be
varied during construction.
The Engineer has the full and absolute power in terms of this contract to order such
variations and to specify the actual foundation level for each foundation fill, base, or
caisson during construction and his decision shall be final and binding on the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment in consequence of any
such variation in the dimensions or foundation depths over and above that provided
for in Clause 8115 regardless of the stage of construction at which the instruction to
vary the dimensions or foundation depths is given. However, if in consequence of
such variation order the Contractor is compelled to substitute machines and equipment
with other machines and equipment in order to successfully complete the work, the
Engineer may, at his discretion, reimburse the Contractor for additional expenses
incurred provided that the original machines and equipment were suited to the work
required prior to the variation order being issued.
No base, caisson, or pile shall be founded unless authorized by the Engineer. Each
foundation level shall be accurately measured and recorded.
The term “foundation level” used in these Specifications shall be deemed to have the
following meanings in respect of:
(i) Foundation fill : The surface of the in-situ material that has been prepared to
receive foundation fills.
(ii) Bases : The underside of the base.

(iii) Piles : The underside of the under ream, bulbous base or rock socket; the tip of the
pile shoe or lower pile end, as may be relevant.
8107 UTILIZATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL

Excavated material and material recovered from temporary work shall, so far as it is
suitable, be utilized for backfill.
Material unsuitable for use as backfill or in excess of the quantity required to complete
the backfill shall be spoiled or utilized as directed by the Engineer.
Excavated material not used for backfill or not taken to spoil but used in the
construction of embankments or other parts of the work, as directed by the Engineer,
will be paid for under foundation excavation as well as under the relevant item for the
purpose for which it is used.
The free-haul distance on excavated material and imported material for backfill shall
be 1.0 km.
Excavated and stockpiled material shall be deposited so as not to endanger the
uncompleted structure, either by direct pressure or indirectly by overloading the banks
contiguous to the structure or in any other way.
8108 BACKFILL AND FILL NEAR STRUCTURES
(a) General
In placing backfill and fill, the following precautions shall be taken:
The material shall be placed simultaneously, in so far as is possible, to approximately
the same elevation on both sides of an abutment, pier, or wall where appropriate.
If conditions require placing backfill or fill appreciably higher on one side than on the
opposite, the additional material on the higher side shall not be placed until authorized
by the Engineer and preferably not until the concrete has been in place 14 days, or
until tests show that the concrete has attained sufficient strength to safely withstand
any pressure created by the backfill or fill, or the method of construction.
The material behind abutments restrained at the top by the superstructure. e.g., portal
type structures, shall be placed as stated on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
The material behind the walls of concrete culverts shall not be placed until the top slab
is placed and cured, unless authorized otherwise by the Engineer.
(b) Backfill
Excavated areas around structures shall be backfilled with approved material in
horizontal layers, not exceeding 150 mm in depth after compaction, to the level of the
original ground surfaces.
Each layer shall be moistened or dried to optimum moisture content for the material
and compacted to a density of not less than 93% of Modified AASHTO density.

(c) Fill
To prevent wedge action against the structure and bounding slopes, the slopes shall be
benched or serrated.
In no case shall the toe of the bounding fill be closer to the concrete face than the
height of the exposed face of the abutment or wall.
(d) Select Granular Backfill

Select granular backfill shall be sound, durable, granular material free from organic
matter or other deleterious material (such as shale or other soft particles with poor
durability).
Select granular backfill shall conform to the following:
(i) Quality Requirements

(1) Gradation according to; Table 8108-1
(2) Shear angle of internal friction, AASHTO T 236 34o min.
Note:
Samples shall be compacted as per AASHTO T 236 to 95 percent of the maximum
density determined according to AASHTO T99 method C or D and corrected for
oversized material according to AASHTO T 99, Note 7.
(3) Sodium sulfate soundness loss (5 cycles);15% max. according toAASHTO T
104.
(4) Los Angeles abrasion, according to AASHTO T96; 50% max.
(5) Liquid limit, according to AASHTO T89; 30 max.
(ii) Electrochemical requirements

(1) Resistively, AASHTO T 226 3000 Ω • cm min.
(2) pH, AASHTO T 289; 5.0 to 10.0
(3) Sulfate content, AASHTO T 290 1000 ppm max.
(4) Chloride content, AASHTO T 291 200 ppm max.
Note: Tests for sulfate and chloride content are not required when pH is between 6.0
and 8.0 and the receptivity is greater than 5000 ohm centimeters.
Table 8108-1 Select Granular Backfill Gradation
Sieve Size Percent by Mass Passing Designated Sieve

(AASHTO T27 and T11)
100 mm 100
75 mm 75 – 100
75 μm 0 – 15
(e) Fill within restricted areas

The portion of the fill within 3 meters of the concrete faces of the structure and the
whole of the spill through portion, or the extent shown on the Drawings, shall be
termed "fill within restricted area".

Fill within the restricted area shall comply with the requirements of Series 4000
except that it shall be compacted to a density of not less than 93% of Modified
AASHTO density. In order to achieve the specified density, the Contractor shall,
where necessary, import material of suitable quality.
Payment in accordance with Pay item 81.06 for the construction of fill within
restricted areas shall only be made when specifically provided for in the Bill of
Quantities.
8109 FOUNDATION FILL

If it is found during the course of excavation that the material at the indicated
foundation depth does not have the required bearing capacity as specified on the
Drawings, the excavations shall be extended at the discretion of the Engineer until
satisfactory foundation material is encountered.
The Engineer reserves the right to order the Contractor to make up the difference in
levels with foundation fill.
Where the foundation fill consists of rock or crushed stone fill, it shall be constructed
in accordance with the requirements of the Special Provisions or as directed by the
Engineer.
Foundation fill consisting of granular material shall be constructed in layers not
exceeding 150 mm in thickness after compaction. Each layer shall be moistened or
dried to optimum moisture content for the material and compacted to a density of not
less than 95% of Modified AASHTO density.
Mass concrete fill to be used shall be of the class or mix as specified or directed by the
Engineer.
Unless specified or directed otherwise by the Engineer, the minimum foundation fill
consisting of rock fill, crushed stone fill or compacted granular fill to be constructed
shall be defined by a prism with plan area coinciding with the lower base of a
truncated pyramid the sides of which slope at an angle of 60o with the horizontal from
the underside of the footing or slab to the foundation level.
A concrete blinding of 75mm thickness and Grade 15/20 concrete shall be placed
underneath all bases except where mass concrete fill is used or where authorized by
the Engineer.
Where mass concrete is constructed under a base it shall be constructed accurately to
the final levels of the underside of the base.
8110 GROUTING OF ROCK FISSURES

Where specified, fissures in the rock below and around the base shall be sealed by
pressure grouting with a neat cement or sand-cement grout with a water cement ratio
as agreed to by the Engineer. The extent of fissuring shall be established by water
testing under pressure.
Holes of at least 40 mm diameter shall be drilled in positions ordered by the Engineer
and grout pumped into these holes under suitable pressures.
Grouting shall be carried out in 3-meter stages to the maximum depth ordered. Care
shall be taken to avoid further fracturing of the rock strata due to excessive grouting
pressures.
Grouting of rock fissures shall be carried out by specialized operators with adequate
experience in this class of work.
8111 FOUNDATION DOWELS

Where required, foundation dowels of the specified material, diameter and length shall
be installed at the positions and to the dimensions shown on the Drawings or as
After exposure, clearing and trimming of the rock formation, holes of not less than 40
mm diameter and of specified depth shall be drilled into the rock into which the
dowels shall be fox-wedged and grouted with a 2:1 sand: cement grout.
8112 FOUNDATION LINING

Where specified or directed by the Engineer, foundation lining shall be installed as
described hereinafter.
The Engineer shall have the right to order the use of lining against sides of
excavations and underside of bases and slabs in lieu of formwork and concrete
building.
All surfaces to be lined shall be covered with approved sheeting to provide a clean
impervious layer. The material shall be of sufficient strength to provide a durable
working surface and to support the concrete and reinforcement without tearing.
The joints between strips shall have a 150 mm overlap and the lining shall be held
firmly in position by nails, pegs, etc.
Polyethylene sheeting of 0.15 mm thickness is generally considered adequate for the
use under approach (jockey) slabs and bases.
8113 FOUNDATION PILING
(a) General
This section covers the construction of bearing piles of concrete or steel or a
combination of these materials.
(b) Piling Layout

The piling layout, the minimum pile size and/or bearing capacity and type together
with the steel reinforcement and class of concrete required shall be as detailed and
specified on the drawing unless otherwise specified in the project specifications.
(c) Alternative Designs for Piling and Piling Layouts
(i) Submission
The priced schedule of quantities submitted for alterative designs shall be complied
strictly in accordance with the relevant measurement and payment clauses of these
specifications.

Where pay items defined in these specifications have been omitted, it shall mean
either that the items do not apply, or that where the engineer requires work falling
under such items to be done, it shall be done without any cost to the employer. The
inclusion of "rate-only" items will not be permitted.
Where pay items not defined in these specifications are used, the measurement and
payment requirements for such items shall be specified in detail by the contractor. In
the absence of such definitions, or in the case of any ambiguity, the interpretation of
the engineer shall be final and binding.
Except in piling-only contracts or where otherwise provided in the Project
specifications, the contractor shall price the schedule of quantities for the original
design irrespective of whether or not an alterative design is offered.
(ii) Design
The critical design-load combinations acting upon the underside and the center of
gravity of the pile-capping slab, the maximum permissible stet of the pile-capping
slab, and the technical data required for designing alternative piles and/or piling
layouts will be indicated on the drawings.
Alternative designs shall comply with the provisions of the Contract and the
prescriptions set out below.
For alternative designs submitted the contractor shall submit with his tender a detailed
description of the method of analysis used in the design of the piles and the pile-group
layouts.
The average length of pile and/or of the piles per group on which the quantities in the
schedule of quantities for the alternative designs are based shall be stated in each case.
The type of pile offered shall be defined in terms of size, materials, working and
breaking load.
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall bear the cost for redesigning,
drafting and submitting the detail drawings for any structural element affected by the
alternative pile design. Any economy or incidental caused by constructing such
element as compared to the original design shall be for the account of the contractor.
The contractor shall, as specified in the Contract, submit to the Engineer at least three
months prior to work being commenced, drawings detailing the piling-group layout
and piles, incorporating such amendments to his original design as may be required by
the engineer, and drawings detailing the amendments required to the pile-capping slab
dimensions and reinforcement as a result of the layout of the piles, all as applicable.
No work of whatsoever nature shall be commenced on the piling until the drawings
have been submitted to and have been approved by the engineer, in writing.
After approval of the drawings, no departure there from shall be made with out
authorization by the Engineer.
Where the alternative piles fail in regard to the load test specified in sub-clause
8113(u) of these specifications, the contractor shall be responsible for the cost of the
work required for improving the piles and pile layout so as to comply with the design
requirements.

(iii) Basis of payment

Where the quantities in the schedule of quantities referred to in sub-clause 8113(c)(i),
on the one part, differ from the number of piles and the average pile length given in
the submission for the alternative pile design, on the other part, the Engineer shall
accept the sum in the said schedule of quantities, correct the quantities, and adjust the
rates for the applicable pay items accordingly.
In addition to these corrections, the employer shall be justified in using one of the
following methods for paying for piles constructed in accordance with the alternative
design:
Method 1
The employer may check the alternative designs, calculate the quantities and adjust
the rates as set out in the first paragraph of sub-clause 8113(c)(iii). The employer will
then pay for the work in accordance with the actually measured quantities.
Method 2
The employer may use the following formulae for calculating the quantities under pay
items 81.17 to 81.35 for payment:
Np=Nd
Lp = Nd .Ld + Nb(Lb-Ld)K for Nd > Nb
and
Lp = Nd . Ld + Nd(Lb-Ld)K for Nd < Nb
Lb Ld
K= for Ld > Lb and K = for Ld ≤ Lb
Ld Lb
Where: P = paid, d = designed and, b = built.

The term "units" means items of work measured and paid for in the respective pay
items such as piles, raking piles, casings, underreams, concrete, etc.
Np = number of "units" measured and finally paid for in a particular pile group.
Nd =number of "units" provided for in the tender for the alternative design in the same
pile group.
Nb = number of approved and accepted "units' finally installed in the same pile group.
Lp = the length of the "units" measured and paid for or the length to be used in
calculating quantities which are a direct function of the length of the "units" for the
same pile group.
Ld = the average length of the "units" provided for in the tender for the alternative
design in the same pile group.
Lb = the average length of the Nb "units" actually installed in the same pile group.
The values Nd and Ld for each pile group for which an alternative design has been
offered shall be supplied with his tender by the contractor for the respective "units".

The values of Nd, Nb, Ld and Lb for each pile group for which to be used in the
formulae for determining the quantity for a particular pay item shall relate only to the
piles the item measured.
(d) Details to be furnished by the Contractor

In all cases where the choice of the type of pile to be used is left to the contractor, full
particulars, specifications, calculations and drawings of the piles proposed for use by
the contractor shall be submitted with the tender.
The contractor shall submit the following information to the Engineer, 2 weeks before
any piles are driven or holes are formed:
1) How the piles and casings will be installed or the holes will be formed;
2) How the piles and casings will be installed or the holes will be made through
identified obstructions:
3) The mass of the hammer;
4) The set during the last ten blows;
5) The expected size of the bulbous base, underream, rock socket, etc, if any;
6) How concrete or grout is to be placed and compacted in the case of cast in situ
piles;
7) How reinforcing steel is to be placed and held in place during placing and
compacting the concrete in cast in situ piles;
8) Details of permanent casing, if any;
9) The mix design for the concrete together with an adequate quantity of cement and
aggregate to enable the engineer to conduct the necessary tests.
(e) Pile-installation Frames and Equipment

The pile-installation frames and equipment used for driving the piles or forming the
holes of for other methods of sinking the piles shall be in a good working condition
and to the prior approval of the Engineer and shall comply with the relevant legal
provisions.
The contractor shall supply the necessary equipment, gear and instruments required
for the prescribed investigations and inspections.
The installation frames shall be so designed as to ensure that piles can be installed in
their proper positions and true to line and slope.
(f) Piling Platforms

Piling platforms shall include the prepared in situ material or artificial islands or any
structure (excluding the piling equipment) constructed for gaining access to the
position where the pile is to be installed and for carrying out the piling operations.
Structural piling platforms shall be rigid, and floating barges used for piling operations
shall afford sufficient stability to enable piles to be properly installed.
On completion of the piling, the contractor shall remove all the artificial, constructed
platforms and reinstate the site to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

(g) Setting Out

The contractor shall set out the pile positions and shall stake these positions with a
durable marker.
Where the level from which the piling is undertaken is above the underside of the pile-
capping slab, due allowance shall be made for the offset of raking piles at the
underside of the pile-capping slab will be in the correct position.
(h) Ground Surface of Foundation Piling

Before starting any piling work, the contractor shall notify the Engineer in good time
to ensure that levels of the ground surface be taken in order that an average ground
surface from which the piling is to be measured can be established and agreed on by
the Engineer and the contractor.
Where foundation piling at a site is preceded by excavation or the construction of fill,
the surface from which the piling is to be done shall be formed as near as possible to
the underside of the pile-capping slab as directed by the Engineer.
(i) Cast in situ concrete piles
(i) Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall not be placed in the pile holes until immediately before
concreting.
Before the reinforcement is placed in position, all mud, water, and any loose or soft
material shall be removed from the hole.
Steel reinforcing shall be accurately maintained in position without damage being
done to the sides of the hole or the reinforcing itself.
Spacers shall be used to keep the reinforcing steel at the required distance from the
inside face of the pile casing and wall of the pile hole but shall not cause zones
through which aggressive ground water may penetrate to the reinforcement.
Pile reinforcement will not be shown in the bending schedules.
Only the number, diameter and type of bars and their arrangement will be shown on
the drawings.
The contractor may replace the bars shown on the drawings with bars with different
diameters and spacing and of different types, on a basis of equivalent strength.
The reinforcement shall be assembled in cages, which shall be sufficiently robust to
prevent their permanent deformation during handing. In the case of cast in situ piles,
the inner sides of the cages shall be kept open in view of the unrestricted placing of
concrete therein.
The longitudinal bars shall project above the cut-off point by the distance shown on
the drawings, or by 40 times the bars diameter if no dimension has been given.
Splicing the reinforcing may be ordered, and the contractor shall keep available on the
site sufficient steel reinforcing so that an additional length of pile reinforcing can be
assembled whenever necessary.
The assembly of this additional reinforcing shall be carried out expeditiously and
before any concreting of any specific pile commences.

If splices have to be provided, the longitudinal bars shall overlap for a distance of 40
bar diameters, or as required by the Engineer.
(ii) The Concreting of Piles

The concreting of the piles shall not be commenced before the engineer has given his
permission therefore.
Except in self-supporting pile holes, a temporary or permanent casing shall be
installed for the full depth of the hole to prevent lumps of material from falling from
the sides of the hole into the concrete.
Where concrete is to be placed under the drilling mud, the temporary casing may be
omitted, except at the top end of the hole.
The concrete shall be so proportioned as to be of sufficient strength, but shall be
sufficiently workable to enable it being properly placed, and, where self-compacting
concrete is not used, it shall be thoroughly compacted by approved means.
Extraction of the temporary casing during placement of the concrete shall be such that
no damage is caused to the pile and the advancing concrete level is at all times kept
considerably above the temporary casing’s trailing edge.
Concrete shall generally be placed in the dry, but where this is impracticable, it shall
be placed by tremie.
The requirements of clause 8406 of these specifications together with the following
requirements shall apply when concrete is placed under water by tremie:
The cement content shall be not less than 400 kg per m3 and the slump shall be such
that the concrete of the specified strength and desired density can be obtained.
The hopper and tremie shall be a closed unit, which cannot be penetrated by water.
The tremie shall be at least 150 mm in diameter for 19.0 mm aggregate and larger for
larger aggregates.
The concrete shall be so placed as to prevent the mixing of water and concrete. The
tremie shall at all times penetrate into the concrete.
Placing the concrete in that part of the pile below the water level in the casing shall be
done in one operation, and the same method of placing the concrete shall be
maintained throughout.
All tremies shall be thoroughly cleaned before and after use.
Before placing the concrete in the water, the contractor shall ensure that no silt or
other materials have collected at the bottom of the hole, and where drilling mud is
used, the contractor shall ensure that no drilling mud suspension with a relative
density exceeding 1.3 has collected at the bottom of the hole.
Whenever practicable, concrete shall be placed in a manner that will prevent
segregation.
(j) Precast Concrete Piles

The piles shall be of reinforced or prestressed concrete and shall be manufactured,
handled, stored and installed in accordance with BS 8004, unless otherwise specified
in these specifications.

(i) Manufacture
The piles may be manufactured in a factory or a casting yard on the site of the works.
The contractor shall ensure that the factory or casting yard will at all reasonable times
be accessible for inspection by the Engineer.
The relevant requirements of Division 8400 shall apply to the concrete work.
Transverse reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of BS 8004.
The piles shall be cast on a rigid horizontal platform in approved moulds. Particular
care shall ensure that the reinforcement, coupler sockets and piles shoes are accurately
in position. Adequate provision shall be made for lifting the piles.
Each pile shall be clearly marked with the date of casting, a reference number, and
from the tip of the pile at meter intervals, with distance marks.
Piles shall be cured for a period sufficient to develop the strength required to
withstand, without damage to the pile, the stresses caused by handing, transporting,
storing and driving. The piles shall not be driven before the concrete in the pile has
attained the specified strength.
(ii) Handing, Transport and Storage

Care shall be taken at the stages of lifting, handling and transporting to ensure that the
piles are not damaged or cracked.
Piles shall be stored on firm ground, which will not settle unequally under the weight
of the stack of piles. The piles shall be placed on timber supports, which are truly level
and spaced so as to avoid undue bending in the piles. The supports in the stack shall
be located vertically above one another.
(iii) Lengthening of Precast Piles

Piles shall be lengthened where required by such means and methods as approved by
the Engineer. Care shall be taken to ensure that the additional length of pile joined is
truly axially in line with the original pile within the tolerance requirements for
straightness set out in Division 10100 of these specifications.
Driving shall not be resumed until the pile extension and any bonding agent used has
attained the required strength.
(k) Steel Piles

Hollow steel piles may be filled with cast in situ concrete and, provided that adequate
connections are provided between the steel and the concrete with a view to
transferring the load, the concrete may be deemed to assist in carrying the load.
Wherever steel piles are used, they shall be given a protective coating of bitumen,
coal-tar pitch or synthetic resins to the satisfaction of the Engineer or as specified.
The cross-sectional area of the steel shall be adapted to the aggressiveness of the
subsurface conditions to compensate for possible reduction in the pile wall thickness
caused by abrasion and corrosion during the service life of the pile.
Steel piles shall be used only where permitted by the Engineer.

(l) Driving Piles
(i) Pile-installation frames

Piles and pile casings shall be driven with a gravity hammer, a rapid-action power
hammer or by other approved means.
Prestressed-concrete piles shall be driven with a hammer with a mass of at least equal
to that of the pile. Other piles shall preferably be driven by a hammer with similar
mass characteristics. The hammer shall not, during driving operations, damage any
permanent component of the pile.
Pile driving leaders shall ensure freedom of movement of the hammer and shall be
held in position to ensure adequate support for the pile or pile casing during
installation. Inclined leaders shall be used for installing raking piles.
The heads of precast concrete piles shall be protected with packing of resilient
material, care being taken to ensure that it is evenly spread and held in place. A
helmet shall be placed over the packing, and a dolly of hardwood or other material not
thicker than the diameter of the pile shall be placed on top.
(ii) Water Jetting

The contractor may employ water jetting to install piles in granular material.
Jetting shall be discontinued before the leading end of the pile reaches of depth of 80
percent of the anticipated final depth or a depth as agreed on with the Engineer.
After jetting, piles or their casings shall be driven to the required depth, level or set.
(iii) Installation Sequence

Unless otherwise specified or ordered, the sequence for installing the piles shall be left
of the contractor.
However, the sequence for driving the piles in a group shall be programmed to
minimize the creation of consolidated blocks of ground into which piles cannot be
driven or which cause fictitious penetration values.
Piling shall generally commence at the center of the group and be progressively
extended to the perimeter piles unless otherwise agreed on by the Engineer.
The installation of piles shall be undertaken in such a manner that structural damage,
distortion or positioning defects will not be caused to previously installed piles or
casings.
(iv) Heaving of Piles

In soils in which the installation of piles may cause previously installed piles to heave,
accurate level marks shall be placed on each pile immediately after installation and all
piles that have heaved shall be redriven to the required resistance, unless redriving
tests on neighbouring piles have shown this to be unnecessary.
Piles shall not be concerted neither shall any pile-capping slab be constructed until the
piles within a heave-influence zone have been redriven as required.
(v) Bulbous Bases

Where required, bulbous (enlarged) bases shall be formed after the driven casing has
reached the required depth.

The base shall be formed by progressively displacing the surrounding subsoil with
concrete placed by the repeated action of a gravity hammer.
The size of the base will depend on the compressibility of the surrounding subsoil but
shall in no case have a diameter of less than 1.5 times the diameter of the pile.
(vi) Piling Alignment

Where the inclination of a precast concrete pile deviates from the correct slope during
installation, the pile shall not be forced into the correct position, and the slope of the
guiding frame shall be adjusted so as to coincide with the actual inclination of the pile
to preclude the bending of the pile.
Where the verticality or the inclination of the installed pile falls outside the specified
tolerances, the pile will be classified as being defective.
(m) Augering and Boring
(i) Auger and Bore Pile Holes

The augering and boring of pile holes shall be carried out as expeditiously as local
conditions permit taking due account of services or other restrictions on the site.
Holes shall be cleaned after augering and boring to obtain a clean and level surface.
Where indicated by the Engineer, suitable casing shall be installed in those parts of the
augered holes where the sides are in danger of caving in before the concreting has
been completed.
During extraction of the casing, care shall be taken to avoid lifting the concrete and
damaging the pile.
The use of water for augering and boring holes shall not be permitted unless approved
by the Engineer.
Surface water shall not be allowed to enter the hole.
(ii) Underreaming
Where required, the holes shall be enlarged or belled out to form an underream. The
earth excavated shall be removed in a manner, which will not damage the walls of the
hole.
The shape of the underream shall be a truncated cone of which the base diameter
depends on the bearing capacity of the founding material, but it shall be not less than
twice the shaft diameter.
The base angle of the cone between the inclined face and horizontal plane shall be not
less than 60o.
Full safety measures shall be enforced to protect workmen working at the bottom of
the pile hole.
(iii) Bulbous Bases

Bulbous bases shall comply with the requirements of sub-clause 8113 (m).

(iv) Inspecting Performed Holes

Immediately before the reinforcement is to be installed or the concrete placed, the
Engineer shall be informed thereof with a view to inspecting the pile holes.
When piles are to be undreamed, the excavation shall be inspected twice by the
Engineer, firstly to ascertain that suitable founding material has been obtained before
Underreaming may start, and secondly, after the Underreaming has been completed
for approval to be given by the engineer for casting the pile.
(n) Rock Sockets

Where required, rock sockets to the required dimensions shall be formed in rock
formations of adequate strength, quality and thickness for transmitting the specified
load.
(o) Obstructions
(i) Definitions
Identified Obstructions
Identified obstruction shall mean any obstruction described on the drawings or in the
project specifications and for which provision for payment has been made in the
schedule of quantities in respect of penetrating the obstructions.
Unidentified Obstructions
Where provision has been made in the schedule of quantities in terms of pay item
81.22 for penetrating identified obstructions and obstructions not described are
encountered, such obstructions shall be classified as unidentified obstructions and the
penetration of such obstructions shall be paid for under item 81.23 subject to the
condition that the rate of penetration drops to below that achieved for identified
obstructions when the same method and effort are used, or subject to additional
methods and effort over and above those required for identified obstructions being
required for penetrating the obstructions.
OR
Where no provision has been made in the schedule of quantities for penetrating
identified obstructions and obstructions are encountered and, after resorting to the
methods specified in the submission in terms of sub-clause 8113(d), it is found to be
impossible to form the holes in the proper positions and at the proper inclinations and
depths, and the contractor has to resort to additional methods for forming the pile
holes successfully, such obstructions shall be classified as unidentified obstructions.
(ii) Classification of Materials

For piling only the following classification of materials shall apply to the
identification and description of obstructions.
Matrix
The matrix shall comprise that part of the material which will pass through a sieve
with 50 mm x 50 mm openings.

Coarse gravel
Coarse gravel shall comprise that part of the material (stones, pebbles, cobbles, etc.)
which will pass through a 200 mm x 200 mm opening, but will not pass through a 50
mm x 50 mm opening. The gravel shall be obtained from material with at least a class
R2 hardness as given in Sub-clause 8102(b) in Table 8102-1 of these specifications.
Boulders
Boulders shall mean any rock mass with a hardness of at least class R2 which will
pass through a square opening with dimensions equal to the maximum size boulder
specified in the schedule of quantities but will not pass through a 200 mm x 200 mm
opening.
Rock Formation
A rock formation shall be any rock mass with a hardness of at least class R2 which
will not pass through a square opening with dimensions equal to the maximum size
boulder specified in the schedule of quantities.
Where a boulder is cut through and part of it is left imbedded in the wall of the hole,
such boulder obstruction shall be classified as rock formation.
(iii) Driven Displacement and Prefabricated Piles

Where obstructions make it difficult to install driven displacement and prefabricated
piles in the positions and at the inclinations shown and to the proper lengths by the
methods specified in the submission in terms of sub-clause 8113(e), the contractor
shall resort to additional methods, which are suitable for the type of pile.
If the successful installation of a pile proves to be impossible after such methods have
been tried, the engineer may order an additional pile or piles to be installed.
All such work and additional piles shall be paid for in accordance with the tendered
rates where applicable, or where they do not apply, under pay item 81.24.
(iv) Auger and Bore Pile Holes

Where identified or unidentified obstructions are encountered when shaping holes for
piles, payment for penetrating the obstructions shall be made against the appropriate
pay items.
(p) Determining Pile Lengths

The design of the piles and pile groups, and the quantities in the schedule of quantities
are based on the subsurface date shown on the drawings.
The Engineer will determine the depth of piles as work proceeds.
Where variations in the subsurface conditions occur as regards the material and height
of the water table, the engineer shall be informed immediately.
If the contractor is not satisfied that the piles will be capable of carrying the specified
loads at the depth determined by the Engineer he may, in consultation with the
Engineer, lengthen the piles to reach a suitable founding depth.
Where the Engineer and the contractor cannot agree on the founding depth, the
Engineer may require the contractor to:

• Undertake additional foundation investigation and/or core drilling in

accordance with sub-clauses 8103(a) and 8113(t) respectively and/or
• Install one or more test piles and conduct a load test in accordance with
sub-clause 8113(u). The engineer will prescribe the positions for each
test pile. Test piles shall comply with the specified requirements for
piling.
(q) Piling Data

The following data on each pile installed shall be recorded in a form prescribed by the
Engineer:
• The effort used for driving the pile and the resistance to penetration at
founding level.
• A description of subsurface material, the presence of ground water and
the quality of material on which the pile is founded.
• The quality of the materials used in the construction or manufacture of
the pile, as well as of the permanent casing if used.
• The method of placing and compacting the concrete in cast in situ piles.
• The method of founding of the piles eg. bulbous bases, underreams,
rock sockets, etc, and their dimensions.
• The maximum working load of the pile in the Service Load state.
• The length of the pile and the accuracy of installation in respect of
position and inclination.
• Nominal dimensions and type of pile.
• Length and details of any temporary and permanent casings used.
(r) Stripping the Pile Heads

Precast piles shall be installed to a level of at least 1 .0 m above the cut-off level, and
cast in situ piles shall be cast to a level of at least 150 mm above the cut-off level.
The excess concrete shall be so stripped off that only sound concrete will project into
the pile-capping slab.
Before a pile head is stripped, the cut-off plane shall be marked by cutting a 20 mm
deep groove with a grinding machine along the full circumference of the pile.
Heavy concrete demolishing equipment may not be used for the stripping of pile
heads.
All loose aggregate shall be removed from the cut-off plane.
The concrete shall be so stripped off that the pile below the cut-off level will not be
damaged, or, should defective concrete be found in the completed pile, the damaged or
defective concrete shall be cut away by the contractor at his own cost and replaced
with new concrete well bonded to the old concrete, or the pile shall be replaced as

The main reinforcement of the piles shall extend at least 40 times the diameters of the
reinforcing bar beyond the cut-off level into the pile-capping slab. This reinforcement
shall be left straight unless otherwise directed by the engineer.
The cut-off level for piles shall be the level shown on the drawings.
(s) Construction of Pile-capping Slab

The contractor shall not construct the pile-capping slab before the engineer has
confirmed, in writing, that all the relevant load tests have been completed and the piles
have been accepted.
(t) Core Drilling

The Engineer may instruct core drilling to be done with a view to obtaining cores of
the founding formation and/or of the concrete in the completed structural member. In
the case of piling, the core drilling may precede the piling or may be done through the
completed pile, as specified, or as instructed by the Engineer.
The contractor shall supply the necessary construction plant on the site for drilling
under the above conditions. The plant and techniques used shall be suitable for
ensuring 100% core recovery.
The diameters, depths and lengths of the cores shall agree with the specifications or
the instructions of the Engineer.
The contractor shall keep accurate records of the drilling, which, together with the
cores, shall be handed over to the Engineer.
The cores shall be placed in the correct sequence in a clearly identified wooden core
box with a lid.
(u) Load Test
(i) General
The Engineer may order certain selected piles to be load tested.
The procedure for loading tests shall comply with the requirements of Division 10112(d)
of these specifications. During the period of testing, driving of other piles, which may
affect the testing, shall cease.
No working pile shall be used as an anchor pile. Where another pile or earth anchors
are required for providing reaction, they shall be so placed as to have a minimal effect
on the test results.
The contractor shall provide the complete testing assembly, the necessary plant,
equipment, instruments and labour for carrying out the test and for determining
accurately the settlement of the piles under each increase or decrease of the load. The
test assembly, plant, equipment and instruments used shall be subject to the approval
of the Engineer.
Within two days of having completed the tests, the contractor shall supply the
engineer with the test results and neatly plotted load against settlement, load against
time, and settlement against time graphs.

(ii) Loading
The maximum test load applied shall be equal to twice the specified working load or
the ultimate test load, whichever shall be the smaller.
The maximum working load shall be half of the maximum test load or the test load,
which corresponds with the allowable settlement, which ever shall be the smaller.
The allowable settlement shall be as specified on the drawings.
(iii) Ultimate Test Load

The ultimate test load in the compression load test shall be the load where settlement
suddenly increases disproportionately to the load applied.
The ultimate test load in the tension-load test shall be the load where upward
movement suddenly increases disproportionately to the load applied or the load
producing a permanent use of 10 mm at the top of the pile, whichever is the smaller.
(v) Defective Piles

The test piles and the piles represented by the test pile shall be classified as defective
if shown in terms of sub-clause 8113(u) to have a maximum working load of less than
the specified working load, or to exhibit excessive settlement.
Defective piles shall also include piles damaged beyond repair, piles with structural
defects, or piles, which do not comply with the tolerance requirements of Division
T8000 of these specifications.
If required, the defective piles shall be corrected by the contractor at his own cost, by
applying one of the following methods approved by the Engineer:
• Extracting the pile and replacing it with a new pile
• Installing a new pile adjacent to the defective pile
• Lengthening the pile to the correct length if defective in length only
• Altering the design to fit in with the new conditions caused by the defective
pile(s).
(w) Standing Time in Respect of Piles-installation Frames

Standing time shall only be paid for pile-installation frames standing during normal
working hours as laid down in the general conditions of contract for such periods
during which the pile installation work has come to a standstill following an action by
the employer.
As soon as the pile-installation frames have come to a standstill, the contractor shall
inform the Engineer, in writing, that he intends to claim standing time, and shall also
furnish:
• Full particulars of the action, which gave, rise to the claim.
• A list of pile-installation frames in respect of which standing time will
be claimed, complete with date and time.
The period in respect of which a claim is lodged shall become operative from the
moment when the notice has been handed over to the Engineer and shall continue until
the restriction has been removed and normal procedure may be resumed.

8114 CAISSONS
(a) General
Caissons shall, for the purposes of these specifications, be hollow concrete vessels,
which are wholly or partly constructed at a higher level and lowered by internal
excavation or kentledge to the desired founding level to form structural bearing
members.
Caissons may be of circular, rectangular or any other shape and may contain one or
more excavation compartments, all as detailed on the drawings.
Unless otherwise specified hereafter, the provisions of BS 8004 shall apply in regard
to the construction of caissons.
(b) Construction and sinking

A firm horizontal base shall be prepared on which the cutting edge of the caisson shall
be laid truly horizontally.
The level of the base shall be determined and shall be agreed on by the engineer and
the contractor and shall serve as the ground surface from which the excavation inside
the caisson will be measured.
Successive stages of the caisson shall be of convenient height, or as directed by the
engineer, and shall be lined up accurately with the preceding stages.
All precast elements shall have properly constructed joints in accordance with the
drawings to ensure that they fit snugly together.
For in situ phase construction, all construction joints in the walls shall be reinforced
and the joints shall be made as specified in clause 8407 of these specifications.
The lowest element of every caisson, which contains the cutting edges, shall be cured
for at least 4 days or shall have reached a strength of at least 50% of the specified
strength before sinking is commenced. Subsequent elements shall be cast in sufficient
good time to ensure adequate strength for safely resisting the applied forces.
During constructing and sinking, the caissons shall be maintained truly vertically and
kept in their correct positions.
The position and inclination of each caisson shall be determined accurately by
measurement after every 2 m of sinking, or after sinking through the depth of one
element, whichever distance is the smaller.
With a view to eliminating excess friction, the contractor may use bentonite or a
similar lubricant, or a water-jet system.
Excavation inside caisson compartments shall, unless otherwise specified herein,
comply with the provisions of clause 8105.
In multi-compartmented caissons, the excavation in any one compartment shall not be
taken deeper than 0.6 m below that in any other compartment, except where necessary
for correcting deviations.
Cutting edges shall be frequently inspected or probed to locate obstacles, which shall
be removed immediately.

The contractor shall supply all grabs, pumps, diving gear and other plant required for
sinking and founding all caissons and shall allow the engineer to use the diving suit
and equipment for inspection purposes.
The contractor shall employ a competent diver to carry out work under water and shall
make provision in the rates tendered for the respective items for this cost.
Where the caisson strikes a hard inclined layer and work has to be carried out below
the cutting edge, such work shall be measured and paid for under the relevant items of
clause 8115, and, where no applicable items exist, such work shall be paid for as extra
work.
Should the contractor wish to apply the pneumatic caisson method (with a compressed
air chamber) for construction, he shall furnish the engineer with full details of the
plant, equipment and method for approval.
(c) Founding
The material at the founding level, if sloping and/or irregular, shall in so far as is
possible be cut to as nearly level a surface as possible until the entire cutting edge is
evenly and firmly supported on the material.
Subject to the approval of the engineer, blasting may be used for this purpose. If
blasting should be resorted to, only light charges may be used and the caisson shall be
protected against damage by suitable cushioning being provided.
Should the sloping surface be of hard rock which cannot be cut or broken by any safe
and feasible means, the foundation shall be built up by means of a solid wedge of
concrete which fills the entire space between the bedrock surface and the horizontal
plane through the cutting edge. This concrete shall be of the same class as that
specified on the drawings or in the schedule of quantities for the concrete seal.
The rock or hard material on which the structure is to be founded shall be completely
uncovered.
The founding surface shall be cleared of all loose material before inspection by the
Engineer immediately prior to casting the concrete seal.
No concrete shall be placed in the wedge or the seal before the Engineer has inspected
and approved the foundation. For this purpose the contractor shall adequately dewater
the caisson to enable the engineer to conduct the inspection.
In the event of a caisson not being vertical or in its correct position when it has
reached the required depth, or in the event of a caisson being cracked during the
sinking process, the contractor shall at his own cost carry out the necessary remedial
work to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(d) Data
The contractor shall provide the Engineer with a complete record of the types of
material excavated during sinking, together with the level at which each type of the
material was found. In addition, a log showing the rate of sinking shall be kept by the
contractor and furnished to the Engineer.

(e) Filling the caissons
(i) Concrete seal

The seal shall be constructed of mass concrete of the class specified and shall be
placed in accordance with the dimensions and levels shown on the drawings or as
prescribed by the Engineer.
If this seal cannot be placed in the dry and has to be placed under water, the method of
placing this concrete shall be approved by the Engineer.
The contractor shall cease placing the concrete under water when sufficient concrete
has been placed to seal the foundation effectively.
After the concrete has been placed, the concrete seal and the head of water over it
shall remain undisturbed for a period of at least 7 days after which the caisson shall be
dewatered by pumping for inspection. If more water is still leaking into the caisson,
the process of sealing as specified herein shall be continued until the water level
within the caisson does not rise at a rate exceeding 10 mm per hour.
The relevant requirements of Division 8400 of these specifications and 8113(i)(ii)
shall apply for placing the concrete under water.
For concrete placed under water by methods other than by tremie, the cement content
shall be 20% more than the quantity required for ordinary concrete of the same mix
but shall be not less than 450 kg per m 3 of concrete.
(ii) Filling
Subsequent to inspection of the caisson compartments above the concrete seal, the
compartments shall be filled with sand. The sand shall be sufficiently wetted to
obviate bulking.
The first 2.0 m of filling above the concrete seal shall be lowered gently into position.
The sand may then be poured from the top and compacted sufficiently to prevent
settlement while the cover slab concrete is being placed.
The top of the sand fill within the caisson shall be finished off to the level specified
below the underside of the caisson cover slab.
(f) Stripping
Where the walls of the caisson have been overbuilt, the concrete shall be stripped to
the required level without damage being done to the concrete below the cut-off level.
The longitudinal reinforcement of the caisson shall project above the cut-off level by a
distance of at least 40 times the bar diameter.
(g) Concrete screed below the caisson cover slabs

A concrete screed of the specified thickness and class of concrete shall be provided to
the level shown on the drawings over the area covered by the cover slab, including the
area within the caissons on top of the sand filling, except where the underside of the
cover slab is being formed with formwork.

Item 81.01 Additional foundation investigations...................................... Provisional Sum

A provisional sum is allowed in the Bill of Quantities to cover the cost of this work.
Item 81.02 Excavation of materials

(a) Excavation of soft material situated in the following successive ranges:
(i) 0 m to 2m .......................................................... ........................cubic meter (m3)
(ii) Exceeding 2m to 4 m .............. ..................................................cubic meter (m3)
Etc in increments of 1m depth ........................................................... cubic meter (m3)
(b) for excavation in hard material irrespective of depth ................................. cubic meter (m3)
(c) for additional excavation required by the Engineer after the excavation has been
completed .................................................................................................................................... cub
The limits for the successive depth ranges shall be measured down from the average
ground surface [Subclause 8105 (b)] to the agreed foundation level (Clause 8106).
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of material, measured in the original
position before excavation. The quantity of excavation for each depth range shall be
calculated from the neat outlines of the base of floor and the depth of excavation
completed within each range.
Irrespective of the total depth of the excavation the quantity of material within each
depth range shall be measured and paid for separately.
Supplementary payment for excavation by hand as specified in sub-clause 8l05 (i),
shall be the full compensation for incidentals for hand-excavating the materials
instead of with mass-excavating equipment.
At the face of any concrete for which formwork has to be provided an additional
quantity of excavation shall be measured to 0.6m outside the concrete perimeter to
provide for a working space.
Where foundation fill is constructed in an excavation, the quantity of excavated
material measured for payment shall be the material contained within the vertical
planes through the lower base of the truncated pyramid defined in Clause 8109 or as
In no case shall any of the following excavation be included in the measurement for
payment :
• The volume of excavation in excess of the above mentioned limits.
• The volume included with in the excavated road prism, contiguous
channels, ditches, etc., for which payment is provided elsewhere in
the Specifications.
• The volume of water or other liquid, except the volume of mud, muck
or similar semi-solid matter not resulting from construction operations
and which cannot be pumped or drained away.
The tender rate shall include full compensation for excavation in each class of
material, the spoiling or stockpiling of material, for any additional excavation the
contractor may require for additional working space outside the authorized limits, for

trimming and cleaning the bottoms and sides of excavation, for strutting, shoring and
safeguarding excavations.
If, after any foundation excavation is completed, cleaned and trimmed ready for
blinding, the Engineer orders further excavations due to changed dimensions and/or
foundation conditions, an extra over payment (pay item 81.02(c)) on the additional
excavation measured for payment shall be payable in full compensation for any
additional costs to the contractor over and above the normal excavation costs.
Item 81.03 Access ....................................................................................................lump sum

The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation for providing access, which
inter alia, shall include constructing temporary banks, artificial islands and/or
cofferdams, their protection, safeguarding and maintenance, draining and keeping dry
the working areas and draining the excavations within the access, and any incidentals
in respect of work to be done below standing water.
75% of the lump sum will be paid when the access has been constructed. The
remaining 25% will be paid after the access has been removed.
Item 81.04 Drainage............................................................................................. Lump Sum

Drainage where no Access has been provided shall be measured in lump sum.
Payment will be made for this work by way of a lump sum for each structure or series
of structures appearing separately in the schedule of quantities. The lump sum shall
be paid on a pro rata basis as the work progresses.
The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation for drainage by pumping or in
any other way and for any other work necessary for keeping the excavation dry or for
working in the dry.
Item 81.05 Backfill to excavations utilizing :

(a) Material from the excavation..............................................................cubic meter (m3)
(b) Imported material ..............................................................................cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of backfill material measured in the
excavations. The quantity measured shall be calculated from within the neat outlines
defined for the excavation under pay item 81.02 and the height over which the
backfilling is constructed.
The height shall be determined by the upper surface of the road prism or the reference
ground surfaces (Sub-clause 8105(b)) whichever is the lower.
The tendered rate for each cubic meter of backfill shall include full compensation for
furnishing and replacing all materials within the entire excavation, for transporting
materials within the free haul distance of 1.0 km, and for preparing, processing,
shaping, watering, mixing and compacting the material to the specified densities.
Item 81.06 Fill within restricted areas

The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter (m3) and the quantity shall be taken
as the total volume of material within the restricted area as defined in Sub-clause 8108
(e). The quantity shall not include the volume of backfill, which is measured, and paid
for under pay item 81.05 above.

The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all additional work necessitated
due to working in the restricted area and for the increased density required in the
restricted area.
Item 81.07 Overhaul in excess of 1.0 km, on excavated Material and on material
imported for backfill, foundation fill and fill for caissons ...........Cubic meter
Overhaul shall be measured and paid for as specified in Division 1700 of these
specifications and shall apply only to that portion of the material qualifying for
payment under pay items 81.02, 81.05(b), 81.09 (a) and (c), and 81.48.
Overhaul shall not apply to concrete used in the foundation fill.
Item 81.08 Over break in excavation in hard material................................ Square Meter

The unit of measurement shall be the square meter (m2) of surface area of the vertical
outer faces of the bases.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the over break material removed
from the excavation, for the concrete fill in accordance with sub-clause 8105 (c) and
any additional screeding concrete required.
Item 81.09 Foundation fill

(a) Rock fill ............................................................................................ .cubic meter (m3)
(b) Crushed stone fill ............................................................................... cubic meter (m3)
(c) Compacted granular fill...................................................................... cubic meter (m3)
(d) Mass concrete (Grade indicated)........................................................ cubic meter (m3)
(e) Blinding layer (Grade of concrete and thickness indicated) ............. .cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of approved material placed and
compacted below the bases as specified or where directed by the Engineer.
The quantity of foundation fill to be measured for payment shall be the material
contained within the prism specified in Clause 8109 for minimum foundation fill to be
constructed or to the outlines shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the procuring, furnishing,
transporting, placing, and compacting of the material.
Item 81.10 Establishment on site for the grouting of rock fissures

The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation for establishment on site and
subsequent removal of all special plant for the grouting of rock fissures and for
carrying out operations, the cost of which does not vary with the actual amount of
work to be done.
This work will be paid for as a lump sum, of which 75% will become payable when
all equipment is on the site and the first hole has been grouted, and the remaining 25%
will become payable after all the holes have been grouted and the equipment has been
removed from the site.

Item 81.11 Move to and set up equipment at each hole to be drilled

The unit of measurement shall be the number (No) of positions to which the
equipment for drilling and grouting of rock fissures has to be moved and set up in
position (equals the number of holes to be drilled).
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all costs involved in moving and
setting up equipment.
Item 81.12 Drilling of holes ..........................................................................................meter

The unit of measurement shall be the meter (m) of hole drilled.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for drilling and cleaning of holes as
specified.
Item 81.13 Grouting of holes ............................................................................................. kg

The unit measurement for grouting shall be the mass in kilograms (kg) of cement used
in the grouting operation.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for providing and pumping into the
drilled holes the grout as specified by the Engineer.
Item 81.14 Doweling into rock:

(a) Drilling and cleaning .....................................................................................meter (m)
(b) Supply and installation of dowel bars .....................................................kilogram (kg)
The unit of measurement for the drilling and cleaning of holes in rock shall be the
meter of hole drilled.
The unit of measurement for the dowel bars shall be the mass in kilograms of bars
actually provided and secured in position.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for drilling and cleaning of holes,
supplying, positioning and grouting of dowel bars as specified.
Item 81.15 Foundation lining .......................................................................... square meter

The unit of measurement for foundation lining shall be (type of material and thickness
indicated) the square meter (m2) of concrete surface lined.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the procuring, furnishing, and
placing of all material and for labor and incidentals required to complete the work as
specified.
Item 81.16 Establishment on the site for piling....................................................lump sum

The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation for generally, leveling the
piling site, establishing on the site and subsequently removing all structural platforms,
rafts, and all special constructional plant and equipment for foundation piling and for
carrying out operations, the cost of which does not vary with the actual amount of
piling done.
This work will be paid for by way of a lump sum, 50% of which will become payable
when all equipment is on the site and the first pile has been installed. The second
installment of 25% of the lump sum will be payable after half the total number of piles

have been installed, and the final installment of 25% after all the piles have been
completed and the equipment has been removed from the site.
Item 81.17 Moving to, and setting up the equipment at each position for
installing the piles
The unit of measurement shall be the number (No) of positions to which the
installation equipment has to be moved and set up in position. The quantity measured
shall be the number of piles installed plus the number of piles redriven on the
instruction of the engineer, plus any piles provided in addition for load tests, which do
not form part of a specific pile group.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all costs involved in moving and
setting up any equipment.
Item 81.18 Augered or bored holes for piles

With a diameter of (diameter indicated) through material situated within the following
successive depth ranges:
(a) Augered holes:
(1) 0 m up to 10 m ....................................................................... ..............meter (m)
(2) Exceeding 10 m and up to 15 m ................................. .........................meter (m)
(3) Etc in increments of 5 m depths. ......................................................... meter (m)
(b) Bored holes
(1)° 0 m up to 10 m .................................................................................. ...meter (m)
(2) Exceeding 10 m and up to 15 m ................................ ..........................meter (m)
(3) Etc in increments of 5 m depths .......................................................... meter (m)
ground surface (sub-clause 8113 (i)) to the agreed founding level (clause 8106).
The unit of measurement shall be the meter of hole, including the depth of the bulbous
base formed, as may be applicable. The depth of the bulbous base shall be deemed to
be equal to the diameter of a sphere, the volume of which shall be equal to the
quantity of compacted concrete in the bulbous base.
Irrespective of the total depth of the hole, the quantity within each, depth range shall
be measured and paid for separately.
The tendered rates for forming augered holes shall include full compensation for
boring, supplying, installing and extracting the driven temporary casing as well as for
disposing of surplus material resulting from the hole having been formed.
Item 81.19 Driving the temporary casing for driven displacement piling systems
for forming holes for piles
With a diameter of (diameter indicated) through material situated within the following
successive depth ranges:
(a) 0 m up to 10 m .......................................................................................... ...meter (m)
(b) Exceeding 10 m and up to 15 m.................................................................... meter (m)
(c) Etc in increments of 5 m depths..................................... ...............................meter (m)

ground surface (sub-clause 8113(h)) to the agreed founding level (clause 8106).
The unit of measurement shall be the meter of hole plus the depth of bulbous base
formed, as may be applicable. The depth of the bulbous base shall be deemed to be
equal to the diameter of a sphere, the volume of which shall be equal to the quantity of
compacted concrete in the bulbous base.
Irrespective of the total depth of the hole, the quantity within each depth range shall be
measured and paid for separately.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for supplying, driving and
subsequently extracting the temporary casing.
Item 81.20 Manufacturing, supplying and delivering prefabricated piles

The unit of measurement shall be the meter (m) of accepted prefabricated pile (type
and size indicated) delivered on the site in accordance with the engineer's written
instructions.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for supplying all the materials,
manufacturing, transporting and delivering to the point of use and handling the
prefabricated piles.
Item 81.21 Installation of prefabricated piles

Type and size indicate, through material situated within the following successive
depth ranges:
(a) 0 m up to 10 m...............................................................................................meter (m)
(b) Exceeding 10 m and up to 15 m ....................................................................meter (m)
(c) Etc in increments of 5 m depths ....................................................................meter (m)
ground surface (sub-clause 8113(h)) to the founding depth agreed on (clause 8106).
The unit of measurement shall be the meter of prefabricated pile installed. That part of
the prefabricated pile projecting above the average ground surface shall not be
measured and paid for.
Irrespective of the total length of pile installed, the quantity installed within each
depth range shall be measured and paid for separately.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for hoisting and driving the pile.
Item 81.22 Extra over item 81.18, irrespective of the depth, to form augered and
bored pile holes through identified obstructions consisting of:
(a) Coarse gravel with a matrix content of less than (maximum percentage
indicated) ..................................................................................................................................... m
(b) Boulders (description of and maximum size indicated) ................................meter (m)
(c) Rock formation (description and class of rock indicated).............................meter (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the meter of pile hole formed through the identified
obstruction, measured from the depth at which the identified obstruction is
encountered to the depth at which normal auger drilling or boring can be resumed or
another type of identified obstruction is encountered.

The tendered rates shall include full compensation for all additional work and
incidentals required for forming the pile hole through the identified obstruction.
Notes:
Sub Pay item 81.22(a): The matrix content indicated shall be the percentage by
volume of matrix in material containing coarse gravel. Where the maximum
percentage indicated is exceeded, payment for forming holes through such material
shall be made under item 81.18. Unless otherwise specified, the maximum percentage
of matrix shall be accepted to be 60%.
Where obstructions other than those provided for in Pay item 81.22 can be identified,
they shall be described on the drawings and/or in the project specifications. Provision
therefore shall be made in the schedule of quantities under extensions to Pay item
81.22.
Item 81.23 Forming augered and bored pile holes through unidentified
obstructions
A provisional sum is allowed in the schedule of quantities for covering the cost of this
work.
Payment for the work authorized by the engineer shall be in accordance with the
provisions of the general conditions of contract.
Item 81.24 Driving temporary casings for driven displacement piling systems or
installing prefabricated piles through identified or unidentified
obstructions
A provisional sum is allowed in the schedule of quantities for covering the cost of this
work.
The method of payment for the work authorised by the Engineer shall be in
accordance with the provisions of the general conditions of contract.
Item 81.25 Extra over items 81.18, 81.19 and 81.21 for raking piles:
(a) Holes for piles of (diameter and rake indicated) .......................................... .meter (m)
(b) Temporary casing for driven displacement pile systems (diameter and rake
indicated) ..................................................................................................................................... me
(c) Prefabricated piles (type, size and rate Indicated) ........................................ meter (m)
The tender rates shall include full compensation for all additional work and incidentals
for forming the pile holes or for driving and later extracting the temporary casing, or
for installing prefabricated piles to the rake shown.
Item 81.26 Forming under reams for piles ..................................................... number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of (No) pile (diameter indicated) holes
under reamed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all work to be done in forming
the under reams.
Item 81.27 Forming the bulbous bases for piles ............................................. number (No)
(diameter indicated)
The unit of measurement shall be the number (No) of bulbous bases formed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for al work to be done in forming
the bulbous bases but shall exclude the concrete work.
Item 81.28 Socketing piles into rock formation ..............................................number (No)

(class of rock and length of socket indicated)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of (No) sockets, the length of which
shall be not less than the specified length, formed in rock, the hardness of which shall
be not less than that of the specified class of rock.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all work to be done for socketing
into the rock formation.
Item 81.29 Installing and removing temporary casings in augered holes for piles..meter
The unit of measurement shall be (diameter indicated) the meter (m) of temporary
casing installed as directed by the Engineer or shown on the drawings. Only the
installed temporary casing below the average ground surface (sub-clause 8113(h))
shall be measured for payment.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for supplying, installing and
removing the temporary casings.
Item 81.30 Installing permanent pile casing for piles

The unit of measurement shall be (diameter indicated)the meter (m) of permanent casing installed as inst
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for supplying and installing
permanent pile casing.
Item 81.31 Steel reinforcement in cast in situ piles:

(a) Mild-steel bars .....................................................................................................ton (t)
(b) High-yield stress-steel bars (type indicated) .......................................................ton (t)
The unit of measurement for steel bars shall be the ton of reinforcement in place in
accordance with the drawings or as authorised.
Ties and other steel used for keeping the reinforcing steel in position shall be
measured as steel reinforcing under the appropriate Sub-item.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for supplying, delivering, cutting,
bending, welding, trial welds, placing and fixing the steel reinforcing, including all
tying wires, spacers and waste.
Item 81.32 Cast in situ concrete in piles, under reams, bulbous bases and sockets...... m3
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter (m3) of Concrete placed in the cast
insitu piles, under reams, bulbous bases and sockets.
Item 81.33 Extra over item 81.32 for concrete cast under water............. cubic meter(m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter (m3) of concrete cast under water,
the quantity being calculated as for pay item 81.32.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all additional work, incidentals
and extra cement required for placing the concrete under water.

Item 81.34 Splicing/coupling prefabricated piles for lengthening ................ number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be (size of pile indicated) the number (No) of
splices/couplings in prefabricated piles for each size of pile.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all work required for
splicing/coupling the piles in accordance with the specifications.
Item 81.35 Stripping/cutting the pile heads ..................................................... number(No)

The unit of measurement shall be (type and diameter/size of pile indicated) the
number (No) of heads of each type and diameter/size of pile stripped/cut.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for providing all tools and
stripping/cuffing the pile heads.
Item 81.36 Establishment on the site of the load testing of piles........................ lump sum
The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation for the establishment on the
site and subsequently removing all the special plant and equipment required for
conducting the load tests on piles. This cost does not vary with the number of load
tests to be conducted.
Payment for this work shall be made by way of a lump sum, 100% of which will paid
after the testing assembly has been completely assembled and the first load test has
been started.
Item 81.37 Load tests on piles .......................................................................... number (No)

The unit of measurement shall be (compression/tension test, diameter/size, specified
working load indicated) the number (No) of load tests conducted on the instruction of
the Engineer, for each specified working load.
Test piles, but not anchor piles and anchors, shall be measured as specified above for
permanent piles. Anchor piles and anchors shall be deemed to form part of the testing
equipment under this item.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for installing the anchor piles and
anchors where necessary; conducting load tests, and processing and submitting the
results.
Item 81.38 Establishment on the site for core drilling ........................................ lump sum
site and subsequently removing all the equipment required for conducting the core
drilling. This cost does not vary with the quantity of work to be done.
This work will be paid for by way of a lump sum, 100% of which will become
payable when the equipment has been set up at the first location and drilling has
started.
Item 81.39 Moving the equipment to and assembling it at each location where
cores are to be drilled .................................................................... number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number (No) of locations to which the core-
drilling equipment is to be moved and at which it has to be assembled.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the cost of moving and
assembling the equipment.

Item 81.40 Drilling the cores (Diameter indicated) in:

(a) Concrete.........................................................................................................meter (m)
(b) Founding formation:
(1) Irrespective of hardness .......................................................................meter (m)
(2) With a hardness of (hardness indicated) ..............................................meter (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the meter of hole drilled. The tendered rate shall
include full compensation for drilling, recovering and packing the cores, keeping the
drilling records, providing core boxes, providing and installing the casings, and
backfilling the holes with grout.
Item 81.41 Standing time for pile-installation frame ..............................................hour(h)

The unit of measurement for the standing time of a pile- installation frame shall be the
hour (h) during which the pile- installation frame is standing in terms of sub-clause
6113(w).
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all fixed costs for the pile-
installation frame, which is not connected with its operation and the quantity of work
done.
Item 81.42 Establishment on the site for constructing the caisson.....................lump sum
site and later removing all special plant and equipment necessary for constructing the
caissons. This cost shall not vary in accordance with the number of caissons
constructed.
This work will be paid for by way of a lump sum, 50% of which will be paid when all
the equipment is on the site and the first caisson has been constructed. The second
payment of 25% of the lump sum will be paid after half the number of caissons have
been completed, and the final installment of 25% after all the caissons have been
completed and the equipment has been removed from the site.
Item 81.43 Formwork for caissons .................................................................. square meter

The unit of measurement shall be (class of finish indicated) the square meter (m2) of
formwork, and only the area of formwork in contact with the finished face of the
concrete shall be measured.
Formwork for construction joints shall be measured for payment under class F1
surface finish but shall be measured only for construction joints shown on the
drawings or as prescribed by the Engineer.
erecting the false work and formwork, constructing the forms, forming the grooves,
fillets, chamfers, stop ends for construction joints, treating the forms, all accessories,
and stripping and removing the formwork after completion of the work. Payment for
formwork shall be made only after the formwork has been stripped and the surface
finish approved.
Item 81.44 Steel reinforcement for caissons:

(a) Mild-steel bars .....................................................................................................ton (t)
(b) High-yield-stress-steel bars (type indicated) .......................................................ton (t)

accordance with the drawings or as may have been authorised.
Ties and other steel used for positioning the reinforcing steel shall be measured as
steel reinforcing under the appropriate sub-item.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for supplying, delivering, cutting,
bending, welding, trial welding joints, placing and fixing the steel, including all tying
wire, spacers and waste.
Item 81.45 Cast in situ concrete in caissons and concrete seals ..............cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement for cast in situ concrete shall be (class of concrete indicated)
the cubic meter (m3) of concrete in place.
Concrete quantities in the caissons shall be calculated from the dimensions shown on
the drawings or authorised by the Engineer, and the length of the caisson from the
founding level to the specified cut-off level. The quantity of concrete in the concrete
seal shall be calculated in accordance with the dimensions shown on the drawings or
authorised by the Engineer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring and furnishing all the
materials, storing the material, providing all plant, mixing, transporting, placing and
compacting the concrete, all sealing, curing the concrete and repairing defective
concrete. Payment shall distinguish between the different classes of concrete.
Item 81.46 Cutting edge for caissons ............................................................... number (No)

The unit of measurement shall be (diameter/ size indicated) the number (No) of
caissons provided with cutting edges, irrespective of the material they have been
constructed of.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for manufacturing, supplying,
delivering and installing the complete cutting edge as well as for joining the cutting
edge to the caisson unit. Where the cutting edge is of concrete and forms part of the
bottom element, the tendered rate shall include full compensation for all additional
work required for completing the element.
Item 81.47 Sinking caissons through material situated

Within the following successive depth ranges (diameter/size indicated):
(a) Omupt05m..................................................................................................... meter (m)
(b) Exceeding 5 m and up to 10 m...................................................................... meter (m)
(c) Etc in increments of 5 m depths.................................................................... meter (m)
The limits of the successive depth ranges shall be measured down from the firm
horizontal base (sub-clause 8114(b)) to the agreed founding level (clause 8106).
The unit of measurement shall be the meter of caisson sunk. Irrespective of the length
of caisson sunk, the quantity for each depth range shall be measured and paid for
separately.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for locating and holding in
position, dewatering, pumping, kentledge and lubricating the sides of the caisson, and
for all work in connection with the sinking of the caisson which is not paid for
elsewhere.

Item 81.48 Excavation for caissons:

(a) Excavating soft material situated within the following successive depth
ranges:
(1) 0m up to 2m. .............................................................................cubic meter (m3)
(2) Exceeding 2 m and up to 4 m ...................................................cubic meter (m3)
(3) Etc in increments of 2 m depths................................................cubic meter (m3)
(b) Extra over sub-pay item 81.48(a) for excavation in hard material irrespective
of depth ............................................................................................................cubic meter (m3)
The limits for the successive depth ranges shall be measured down from the firm
horizontal base (sub-clause 8114(b)) to the excavated level inside the caisson.
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of material, measured in the original
position before excavation. The quantity of excavation for each depth range shall be
calculated from the gross area of the caisson in plan and the depth of excavation
completed within each depth range.
Irrespective of the total depth of excavation, the quantity of material within each depth
range shall be measured and paid for separately.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for excavation in the classified
material, spoiling or stockpiling the material, hauling the excavated material for the
free- haul distance of 1.0 km, trimming the bottom of the excavation, dewatering,
pumping and removing the material leaking into the caisson before sealing.
Item 81.49 Filling the caissons

The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of sand placed above the concrete
seal in the caisson compartments.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for supplying and placing the sand,
transporting the material within a free-haul distance of 1.0 km, and compacting the
material as specified.
Item 81.50 Stripping the caisson heads.

The unit of measurement shall be (size of caisson indicated) the number (No) of
caissons of each size stripped.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for cutting away, trimming and
disposing of the concrete removed.
Item 81.51 Nuclear integrity testing on bored piles:

(a) Constructing 5.0 m long calibration piles of (indicate diameter) ............ number (No)
(b) Installing 65 mm internal diameter steel ducts in the piles ...........................meter (m)
(c) Performing integrity tests using:
(1) The nuclear method......................................................................... number (No)
(2) The neutron method ........................................................................ number (No)
The unit of measurement for sub-pay item (a) shall be the number of calibration piles
constructed. The unit of measurement for sub- pay item (b) shall be the meter of 65

mm internal diameter steel duct installed. The unit of measurement for sub-pay item
(c) shall be the number of integrity tests performed by each method.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for procuring and furnishing all
materials, constructional plant, equipment, labor and incidentals for forming the bored
holes, constructing the calibration piles, installing the steel ducts, and performing the
prescribed integrity tests, complete as specified.

DIVISION 8200 FALSEWORK, FORMWORK, AND

CONCRETE FINISHES
8201 SCOPE
This Division covers the design, the specification of materials, supply and erection of
all falsework and formwork used in the construction of permanent work..
This Division also covers the specification of materials for classes of concrete surface
finishes on formed and unformed concrete surfaces.
8202 DIMENSIONS
The dimensions shall be in accordance with the details shown in the Contract.
8203 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK
(a) Falsework
Falsework shall consist of either purpose made or proprietary timber or metal, props,
beams or ties adequate to support the forces imposed during construction of the
concrete structure without excessive deflection.
(b) Formwork
Formwork shall be provided to produce hardened concrete to the lines, levels and
shapes shown on the drawings or specified elsewhere. It shall have adequate strength
to carry all applied loads, including the pressure of fresh concrete, vibration loads,
weight of workers and equipment, without loss of shape.
Forms shall be mortar tight and designed to allow removal without risk of damage to
the completed structure.
Joints in the formwork shall be perpendicular to the main axis of the shape of the
concrete.
Design of formwork for high sections shall be such that it shall not be necessary to
drop concrete freely from a height greater than 1.6 metres or to move concrete along
the formwork after deposition.
Material used for formwork shall be sound and suitable for the purpose intended and
surface finish specified.
Provision shall be made for the accurate location and firm support of fittings, bolts,
anchorages and formers of holes as shown on the drawings. Temporary fittings used
for the support of the formwork shall be arranged to permit removal without damage
to the concrete.
The use of wires and or bolts extending to the surface of the concrete shall not be
permitted except where shown on the Drawings.
Forms for edges of concrete shall be filleted and for re-entrant angles chamfered as
shown on the Drawings.

Formwork shall consist of purpose made or proprietary timber, metal or plastic

boarding or sheeting adequate to support the forces during construction of the concrete
structure without excessive deflection. The following are recommended formworks:
(i) Tongue-and-groove boarding

Tongue-and-groove boarding shall be of suitably dried timber, which will not warp,
distort or cause discoloration of the concrete. The widths of the boards shall be as
specified on the drawings or in the schedule of quantities or as prescribed by the
Engineer. Boards shall be supplied in lengths not shorter than 3 m.
(ii) Steel forms to exposed surfaces

For classes F2 and F3 surface finish the individual panels shall be assembled
sufficiently rigidly and so clamped as not to deform or kick during handling or under
the pressure of the wet concrete. The surfaces of forms, which are to be in contact
with the concrete, shall be clean, free from deposits or adhering matter, ridges or
spatter, which will impart irregularities and blemishes to the concrete surface, and
shall also be free from indentations and warps.
(iii) Void formers

Void formers used in permanent work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Where void formers of a special design are required, details thereof will be specified.
Void formers shall be manufactured from material which will not leak, tear or be
damaged during the course of construction and shall be of such tight construction as to
prevent undue loss of the mortar component of the concrete through leakage. The
units shall be sufficiently rigid so as not to deform during handling or under the
pressure of the wet concrete.
For mild-steel spiral-lock-formed void formers, the metal thickness shall be as
follows, unless otherwise specified:
(1) Unbraced void formers
0.6 mm for diameters of up to 600 mm
0.8 mm for diameters exceeding 600 mm and up to 800 mm
1.0 mm for diameters exceeding 800 mm and up to 1 000 mm.
(2) Braced void formers
0.6 mm for diameters of up to 800 mm
0.8 mm for diameters exceeding 800 mm and up to 1 000 mm
1.0 mm for diameters exceeding 1 000 mm and up to 1 200 mm
1.2 mm for diameters exceeding 1 200 mm.
The thickness specified for braced void formers shall apply to formers internally
braced with timber or equivalent braces. The braces shall be at spacings not exceeding
2.0 m and not further than 1.0 m from the end of each unit. Timber cross braces shall
consist of members with cross- sectional dimensions of at least 50 mm x 50 mm.
All hollow void-former units shall be provided with a 12 mm diameter drainage hole
at each end.

(iv) Chamfer and recess fillets

Timber fillets used for forming chamfers and recesses on exposed surfaces shall be
made from new material unless otherwise authorized.
(v) Jack rods for sliding formwork

The jack rods, base plates and couplers shall be strong enough to carry the design load
under all operating conditions without buckling, distorting or causing damage to the
concrete. Jack rods which are to remain permanently embedded in the concrete shall
comply with the requirements for storing and surface condition of steel reinforcement.
Under no circumstances shall bent rods be used in the work.
The jack rods used shall have a diameter of at least 25mm.
8204 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
(a) Drawings
When complete details for forms and falsework are not shown in the Contract, the
Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings according to Division 102 of these
specifications. The Contractor shall:
1) Design and show the details for constructing safe and adequate forms and
falsework that provide the necessary rigidity, support the loads imposed, and produce
in the finished structure the required lines and grades.
2) Show the maximum applied structural load on the foundation material. Include a
drainage plan or description of how foundations will be protected from saturation,
erosion, and/or scour.
3) Precisely describe all proposed material. Describe the material that is not
describable by standard nomenclature (such as AASHTO or ASTM specifications)
based on manufacturer's tests and recommended working loads.
4) Evaluate falsework material and ascertain whether the physical properties and
conditions of the material is such that it can support the loads assumed in the design.
5) Furnish design calculations and material specifications showing that the proposed
system will support the imposed concrete pressures and other loads. Provide an
outline of the proposed concrete placement operation listing the equipment, labor, and
procedures to be used for the duration of each operation. Include proposed placement
rates and design pressures for each pour. Include a superstructure placing diagram
showing the concrete placing sequence and construction joint locations.
6) Provide design calculations for proposed bridge falsework.
7) A registered professional Engineer proficient in structural design shall design, sign,
and seal the drawings. The falsework design calculations shall show the stresses and
deflections in load supporting members.
8) Show anticipated total settlements of falsework and forms. Include falsework
footing settlement and joint take-up. Design for anticipated settlements not to exceed
25 mm.
9) Design and detail falsework supporting deck slabs and overhangs on girder bridges
so there is no differential settlement between the girders and the deck forms during
placement of deck concrete.

10) Design and construct the falsework to elevations that include anticipated
settlement during concrete placement and required camber to compensate for member
deflections during construction.
11) Show the support systems for form panels supporting concrete deck slabs and
overhangs on girder bridges.
12) Show details for strengthening and protecting falsework over or adjacent to
roadways and railroads during each phase of erection and removal.
13) Include intended steel erection procedures with calculations in sufficient
detail to substantiate that the girder geometry will be correct.
14) Submit details of proposed anchorage and ties for void forms.
15) Submit separate falsework drawings for each structure, except for identical
structures with identical falsework design and details.
16) Do not start construction of any unit of falsework until the drawings for that
unit are reviewed and accepted.
(b) Design
(i) General
The contractor's design and drawings of the falsework and formwork shall comply
amongst others with all statutory requirements.
The Engineer may require the contractor to submit to him for consideration and
approval the design and drawings of the falsework and formwork for any structure.
The contractor shall submit his design criteria and calculations and detail drawings of
the falsework and formwork to the Engineer at least 14 days before the Engineer's
approval is required.
(ii) Falsework
The contractor shall make his own assessment of the allowable bearing pressure on
the foundation material and shall design the footings and falsework to prevent
overloading, differential settlement and unacceptable overall settlement.
In assessing the allowable bearing pressure, due account shall be taken of the effect of
wetting on the foundation material.
In designing the falsework, cognizance shall also be taken of the redistribution of load
which may occur on account of the effect of temperature, wind force, the prestressing
of curved and skewed structures, stage construction, flooding and debris.
Particular attention shall be given to providing transverse and diagonal bracing as well
as rib stiffeners on cross bearers.
(iii) Formwork
(1) General
Formwork shall be so designed as to be sufficiently rigid to ensure that the specified
dimensional tolerances can be achieved under the combined action of self-weight,
dead load and imposed loads as well as the additional loads resulting from the rate of
concreting, the layer thickness of the concrete cast in one operation and the method of
placing and compaction.

(2) Sliding formwork

The contractor shall be responsible for the design of the sliding formwork. Prior to
fabrication or bringing the sliding formwork and any additional equipment to the site,
the contractor shall submit drawings of the complete sliding- formwork assembly to
the Engineer for approval.
The drawings shall show full details of the forms, jacking frames, access ladders,
hanging platforms, safety rails and curing skirts as well as details of the jacks and jack
layouts.
The contractor shall be required to submit to the Engineer, before slide casting
commences, an instruction manual in which the sliding techniques, jacking procedure,
methods of keeping the formwork level, the procedure to be adopted to prevent
bonding of the concrete to the forms and a method for releasing the forms in the event
of bonding, the instrumentation and monitoring of the slide casting and correcting for
verticality, twisting and levelness are described in detail.
The formwork panels shall be inclined to give a small taper, the forms being slightly
wider at the bottom than at the top.
The taper shall be so designed as to produce the specified concrete thickness at the
mid-lift level of the form..
The spacing of the jacks with their jack rods shall be so designed that the dead load of
the sliding-formwork assembly, the frictional load, and the mass of materials,
personnel and equipment will be evenly distributed and within the design capacity of
the jacks used.
(c) Construction
(i) General
Notwithstanding approval given by the Engineer for the design and drawings prepared
by the contractor for the falsework and formwork, and the acceptance of the falsework
and formwork as constructed, the contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety
and adequacy of the falsework and formwork and shall indemnify and keep
indemnified the employer and Engineer against any losses, claims or damage to
persons or property whatsoever which may arise out of or in consequence of the
design, construction, use and maintenance of the falsework and formwork and against
all claims, demands, proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in
respect thereof or in relation thereto.
For works on, over, under or adjacent to any railway line which is controlled by a
statutory authority, the contractor shall comply, inter alia, with the requirements for
the preparation and submission of drawings for falsework and formwork, and the
submission of certificates for the proper' construction thereof, all in accordance with
the official specifications of such authority.
After having constructed the falsework and formwork, and prior to placing the
reinforcing steel and/or the concrete, the contractor shall inspect the falsework and
formwork. Dimensions shall be checked, unevenness of surface shall be corrected, and
special attention paid to the adequacy and tightness of all bolts, ties and bracings as
well as to the soundness of the foundations.
The contractor shall give the Engineer at least 24 hours notice of his intention to place
the concrete to enable the Engineer to inspect all aspects of the completed work.

However, before notifying the Engineer, the contractor shall satisfy himself that the
work complies in all respects with the specifications.
Concrete sections with dimension of smaller than 200 mm shall not be formed with
sliding formwork unless authorized by the Engineer.
Where no provision has been made in the schedule of quantities for sliding formwork,
the contractor may, in a covering letter to the tender, submit a lump sum which reflects
a saving in the cost for the use of sliding formwork in lieu of conventional formwork.
(ii) Falsework
Falsework shall be erected in accordance with the approved drawings incorporating
such modifications as required by the Engineer.
The contractor shall take precautions to prevent deterioration of the foundations
during the course of construction.
The falsework shall incorporate features, which will permit adjustment to the
alignment of the formwork to neutralize the expected settlement and deflection under
load.
(iii) Formwork
(1) General
The formwork for bridge decks shall be erected to levels calculated from the
information given on the plans for roadworks and bridges.
The levels shall be adapted to make provision for the specified precamber as well as
for the expected deflection and settlement of the fully loaded falsework and
formwork. The levels shall be set out and checked at intervals not exceeding 2.50 m.
For constructing the formwork, the contractor may, subject to the provisions of clause
8203 of this Division, use any material suitable for and compatible with the class of
surface finish and dimensional tolerances specified for the particular member.
Formwork shall be sufficiently rigid to maintain the forms in their correct position,
shape and profile and shall be of such tight construction that the concrete can be
placed and compacted without undue loss or leakage of the mortar component of the
concrete.
The joints between contiguous formwork elements shall be of a tight fit and, where
necessary, the joints shall be caulked, taped or packed with a sealing gasket, all at no
extra payment if undue leakage occurs or can be expected. Paper, cloth or similar
material shall not be used for this purpose.
The formwork construction shall permit accurate erection and easy stripping without
shock, disturbance or damage to the cast concrete. Where necessary, the formwork
assembly shall permit the removal or release of side forms independently of the soffit
forms.
Metal supports, ties, hangers and accessories embedded in the concrete shall be
removed to a depth of not less than the cover specified for the reinforcement. No wire
ties shall be used.
All external corners shall be chamfered by fillet strips being fixed into the corners of
the formwork to form 25 mm x 25 mm chamfers. Re-entrant angles need not be
chamfered unless specified.

Where polystyrene or similar material, susceptible to damage is used, it shall be lined

with a hard surface on the side to be concreted. The hard material shall be sufficiently
resilient to ensure that the required quality of work can be achieved.
Where it is specified, all formwork ties shall be provided with recoverable truncated
cones between sleeve ends and formwork faces to ensure that sleeve ends are not
exposed on concrete surfaces. The cones shall have a minimum depth of 15 mm.
(2) Formwork to exposed surfaces
The formwork and boards shall be so arranged as to form a uniform and regular
pattern in line with and perpendicular to the main axis of the member, unless
otherwise approved or directed by the Engineer.
Joints between contiguous members shall, after caulking, taping or sealing, be treated
to prevent blemishes, stains and undue marks from being imparted to the concrete
surface.
Bolt and tie positions shall be so arranged that they conform to the symmetry of the
formwork panels or boards. Bolt and rivet heads which will be in contact with the
formed surface shall be of the countersunk type and shall be treated to prevent marks
from forming on the concrete surface.
The formwork at construction joints shall be braced to prevent steps from forming in
the concrete surfaces at the joints between successive stages of construction. Where
moulding or recess strips are specified, they shall be neatly butted or mitred.
(3) Formwork for open joints
The requirements for formwork for open joints shall, unless otherwise specified, apply
only to cases where the distance between opposite concrete surfaces is equal to or less
than 150 mm.
Formwork for open joints shall be constructed to produce a class F1 surface finish to
concealed surfaces or a class F2 or F3 surface finish corresponding to the in-plane
surface finish of the bordering concrete surfaces. The material used and construction
of the formwork shall permit its complete removal to form the open joint.
No solvent shall be used to remove formwork unless approved by the Engineer.
(4) Openings and wall chases
Openings and wall chases shall be provided only where indicated on the drawings or
as authorized by the Engineer.
Frames for openings shall be rigid and firmly secured in position to prevent their
moving. Temporary holes shall be so formed that they will not create an irregular
pattern in relation to the rest of the exposed formed concrete surface.
(iv) Sliding formwork

(1) Plant and equipment
Unless otherwise specified in the project specifications, hoisting equipment for sliding
formwork, which operates stepwise with upward movements of between 10 mm and
100 mm will be acceptable. However, the use of linked hydraulic or pneumatic jacks
is preferable, which are reversible and driven by an electrically operated pump, and
which can hoist at a steady rate. The jacks shall have independent controls for
regulating verticality and levelness. The jacking system shall ensure that the sliding-
formwork assembly can be hoisted evenly.

The use of hoisting systems, which operate without jack rods, shall be subject to the
All equipment shall be thoroughly tested and inspected before installation and shall be
maintained in a good working order throughout the entire sliding operation.
The contractor shall keep adequate back-up plant, equipment and quantities of
materials on the site to ensure that the slide casting can proceed without interruption.
(2) Instrumentation and monitoring
The contractor shall supply and install suitable instrumentation on the sliding platform
and foundations and against the sides of the structure for monitoring the height,
verticality, levelness and twisting at regular distances. The equipment used, its
utilization and the frequency of recording any readings shall be approved by the
Engineer.
The contractor shall be responsible for all monitoring work and shall ensure that
records of all readings and measurements taken are filed systematically and are at all
times available to the Engineer and the person in control of the sliding operation.
Unless otherwise specified, the verticality of the structure shall be controlled with
laser alignment apparatus or optical plummets, and the levelness of the sliding forms
with a water-level system with reference control points placed at strategic locations.
Height and verticality shall be monitored at intervals not exceeding 4 hours. The
readings shall be plotted immediately on graphs. When the structure is more than 10
mm out of vertical, the Engineer shall be notified immediately.
(3) Supervision
During the entire period of the sliding operation, a competent person who is fully
acquainted with the sliding technique and the contractor's methods of construction
shall be in attendance on the sliding platform and in control of the sliding operations.
(4) Construction
The jacking frame shall be constructed with adequate clearance between the underside
of the cross members and top of the formwork to allow the horizontal reinforcement
and embedded items to be correctly installed.
A control procedure shall be agreed on by the contractor and the Engineer to ensure
that all the reinforcement is placed. At all times there shall be horizontal reinforcement
above the level of the top of the formwork panel.
Guides shall be provided to ensure that the vertical reinforcement can be correctly
placed and the specified concrete cover over the reinforcement maintained.
Where the jack rods are to be recovered, adequate precautions shall be taken in respect
of their removal without damage being caused to the concrete.
Where jack rods occur at openings or wall chases, adequate lateral support shall be
provided to prevent their buckling.
Equipment and material shall be so distributed on the working platforms that the load
will be evenly distributed over the jacks.
Guard plates shall be provided at the tops of the forms to the outside walls to prevent
the concrete from falling down the outside.

The framework, forms and platforms shall be regularly cleared and the accumulation
thereon of redundant concrete prevented.
The contractor shall take all precautions to prevent contamination of the concrete by
leaking oil or other causes.
(5) The sliding process
The contractor shall give the Engineer 24 hours notice of his intention to commence
with slide casting.
Permission to commence with the sliding shall not be given by the Engineer before the
sliding-formwork assembly is fully operative and the complete stock of all materials
required for the slide casting as well as back-up plant and equipment are on the site.
The contractor shall ensure that the rate of sliding is such that the concrete at the
bottom of the formwork has obtained sufficient strength to support itself and all loads
which may be placed on the concrete at the time, and that the concrete does not adhere
to the sides of the forms.
The slide-casting operation shall be continuous, without any interruptions, until the
full height of the structure has been reached, and shall be geared and organized so as
to maintain an average rate of sliding of 350 mm per hour.
(6) Interruptions
When the sliding operations are delayed for more than 45 minutes, the contractor shall
prevent adhesion of the setting concrete to the formwork panels by easing the forms or
moving them slightly every 10 minutes, or alternatively, where reversible jacks are
used, by lowering the forms by 10 mm to 25 mm.
Wherever interruptions occur, emergency construction joints shall be formed and
treated in accordance with Division 8400 of these specifications. Before concreting is
restarted, the form shall be adjusted to fit snugly onto the hardened concrete so as to
prevent steps from being formed on the exposed concrete surface.
When slide casting is recommenced, care shall be taken to prevent the fresh concrete
from being lifted off from the old concrete.
(v) Permanent formwork

Void formers shall be secured in position at regular intervals to prevent displacement
and distortion during concreting. The void formers shall be supported on precast
concrete blocks or rigid welded steel cradles, all subject to approval by the Engineer.
The ties securing the void formers shall be attached to the formwork and cross bearers
of the falsework. The void formers shall not be tied to or supported on the
reinforcement.
Fiber-cement plates shall be supported so that the plate spans in the direction parallel
to the orientation of the asbestos fibers.
Preparing the formwork
The surfaces of forms which are to be in contact with fresh (wet) concrete shall be
treated to ensure non-adhesion of the concrete to the forms and easy release from the
concrete during the stripping of the formwork.
Release agents shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions, and every precaution shall be taken to avoid the contamination of the

reinforcement, prestressing tendons and anchorages. In the selection of release agents,

due regard shall be given to the necessity for maintaining a uniform color and
appearance throughout on the exposed concrete surfaces.
Before the concrete is placed, all dirt and foreign matter shall be removed from the
forms and the forms shall be thoroughly wetted with water.
(d) Removal of forms and falsework

Falsework and formwork shall not be removed before the concrete has attained
sufficient strength to support its own mass and any loads, which may be imposed on it.
This condition shall be assumed to require the formwork to remain in place after the
concrete has been placed, for the appropriate minimum period of time given in Table
8204-1.
Forms that do not support the dead load of concrete members and forms for railings
and barriers may be removed 24 hours after the concrete is placed.
Falsework and formwork shall be carefully removed without exposing the cast
concrete to damage, disturbance or shock.
Weather may be regarded as being "normal" when atmospheric temperatures adjacent
to the concrete, as measured by a maximum-and- minimum thermometer, do not fall
below 15 ° C, and as "cold" when temperatures, similarly measured, fall below 5°C.
When the minimum temperatures fall between these values, the length of the period
after which the formwork may be removed shall be determined by interpolation
between the periods specified for normal and cold weather.
Any period during which the temperature remains below 2°C shall be disregarded in
calculating the minimum time, which shall elapse before the forms are removed.

Table 8204-1 Minimum Form/Support Release Criteria
Structural Element Percent of Specified Minimum

28-Day Strength Number of
(f'c ) Days Since
Last Pour
(a) Columns and wall faces 50 3

(not yet supporting loads)
(b) Mass piers and mass abutments 50 3
(not yet supporting loads) except pier caps
(c) Box Girders 80 14
(d) Simple span girders, T-beam girders, slab 80 14
bridges, cross beams, caps, pier caps not
continuously
supported, struts, and top slabs of concrete
box culverts.
(e) Trestle slabs where supported on wood 70 10
stringers
(f) Slabs and overhangs where supported on 70 10
steelstringers or prestressed concrete girders
(g) Pier caps continuously supported 60 7
(h) Arches, continuous span bridges, rigid 90 21
frames
On continuously reinforced concrete structures the falsework and supporting

formwork shall not be removed before the concrete of the last pour has reached the
appropriate minimum age given in table 8204-1 or the appropriate minimum strength.
Where the structure is constructed in stages, the falsework and supporting formwork
shall be removed as specified or authorized.
On prestressed-concrete structures the falsework and supporting formwork shall be
removed after the full prestressing force relating to the particular stage of construction
has been applied, unless otherwise specified or authorized.
Falsework supporting the deck of rigid frame structures, excluding box culverts, shall
not be removed, until backfill material is placed and compacted against the vertical
legs of the frame.
8205 FORMED SURFACES: CLASSES OF FINISH
(a) General
In addition to complying with the tolerances specified in Division T8000 of these
specifications, the surface finish on formed concrete surfaces shall also comply with
the following requirements.

(b) Class F1 surface finish

After repair work has been done to surface defects in accordance with sub-clause
8206(b), no further treatment of the as-stripped finish will be required. This finish is
required on concealed formed surfaces.
(c) Class F2 surface finish

This finish shall be equivalent to that obtained from the use of square-edged timber
panels and boards wrought to the correct thickness, or shutter boards or steel forms
arranged in a regular pattern. This finish is intended to be left, as struck but surface
defects shall be remedied in accordance with sub-clause 8206(b). Although minor
surface blemishes and slight discolorations will be permitted, large blemishes and
severe stains and discoloration shall be repaired where so directed by the Engineer.
(d) Class F3 surface finish

This finish shall be that obtained by first producing a class F2 surface finish with joint
marks which form an approved regular pattern to fit in with the appearance of the
structure. All projections shall then be removed, irregularities repaired and the surface
rubbed or treated to form a smooth finish of uniform texture, appearance and color.
This surface finish is required on all exposed formed surfaces unless a class F2 finish
is specified.
Unless specified to the contrary, steel forms may be used to form surfaces with a class
F3 surface finish.
(e) Board surface finish

This finish shall be that obtained by using tongue-and- groove timber boarding
arranged in an approved regular pattern.
The finish is intended to be left as struck but surface defects shall be remedied in
accordance with sub-clause 8206 (b) and large fins trimmed where directed by the
Engineer.
(f) Protecting the surfaces

The contractor shall ensure that permanently exposed concrete surfaces are protected
from rust marks, spillage and stains of all kinds and other damage during construction.
8206 REMEDIAL TREATMENT OF FORMED SURFACES
(a) General
Agreement shall be reached with the Engineer regarding any remedial treatment to be
given after the surfaces have been inspected immediately after the formwork has been
removed, which treatment shall be carried out without delay. No surfaces may be
treated before inspection by the Engineer.

(b) Repairs to surface defects

Surface defects such as small areas of honeycombing, cavities produced by form ties,
large isolated blow-holes, broken corner edges, etc, shall be repaired with mortar
having a cement and sand ratio equal to that of the concrete being repaired.
For the repair of large or deep areas of honeycombing and defects, special approved
methods and techniques, such as pneumatically applied mortar, pressure grouting,
epoxy bonding agents, etc, may be used.
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the extent of the honeycombing or defects is of
such a degree that doubt exists about the effectiveness of repair work, the contractor
shall at his own cost perform a load test, to prove that the structural safety of the
repaired member has not been prejudiced, failing which, the structure shall be rebuilt
in part or in full at the contractor's cost.
Where the concrete has been damaged by adhesion to the formwork panel, the cracked
and loose concrete shall be removed; or where the fresh concrete has lifted off at
construction joints, the crack shall be scraped out immediately on both sides of the
wall to a depth of at least 50 mm. The cavities so formed shall then be repaired as
described above.
(c) Rubbing the surfaces

If the finish of exposed formed surfaces does not comply with the requirements for
uniformity of texture, appearance and color, the contractor shall, when so instructed
by the Engineer, rub down the exposed surfaces of the entire structure or of any part of
it as specified below.
The surface shall be saturated with water for at least one hour. Initial rubbing shall be
done with a medium-coarse carborundum stone, where a small amount of mortar,
having a sand and cement ratio equal to that of the concrete being repaired, is used on
the surface. Rubbing shall be continued until all form marks, projections and
irregularities have been removed and a uniform surface has been obtained. The paste
produced by the rubbing shall be left in place. The final rubbing shall be carried out
with a fine carborundum stone and water. This rubbing shall continue until the entire
surface is of a smooth, even texture and is uniform in color. The surface shall then be
washed with a brush to remove surplus paste and powder.
Where the concrete surfaces formed by sliding formwork require treatment to achieve
the surface finish specified for the member, the concrete shall, as soon as the surfaces
under the formwork are exposed, be floated with rubber- lined floats to the desired
finish.
8207 UNFORMED SURFACES: CLASSES OF FINISH
(a) Class U1 surface finish (rough)

This surface finish is required on those portions of bridge decks or culvert decks
which are to receive asphalt or concrete surfacing or which are to be covered by
backfilling material.
Where the placing and compacting of the concrete have been completed as specified
in with Division 8400 of these specifications, the top surface shall be screeded off
with a template to the required cross-section and tamped with a tamping board to

compact the surface thoroughly and to bring mortar to the surface, so as to leave the
surface slightly rough but generally at the required elevation.
(b) Class U2 surface finish (floated)

This surface finish is required on sidewalks; the tops of wing walls and retaining
walls; exposed concrete shoulders and unsurfaced areas on bridge decks; the inverts of
box culverts; and decks which are to receive surfacing other than asphalt or concrete.
The surface shall first be given a class U1 surface finish and after the concrete has
hardened sufficiently, it shall be wood-floated to a uniform surface free from trowel
marks. For non-skid surfaces such as on sidewalks and bridge decks, the surface shall
then be given a broom finish. The corrugations so produced shall be approximately 1
mm deep, uniform of appearance and width and shall be perpendicular to the center
line of the pavement.
(c) Class U3 surface finish (smoothly finished)

This surface finish shall be required at bearing areas and the tops of concrete railings.
The surface shall first be given a class U1 surface finish, and after the concrete has
hardened sufficiently, it shall be floated with a steel float to a smooth surface to within
the dimensional tolerances specified in with Division T8000 of these specifications.
Rubbing with carborundum stone after the concrete has hardened shall be allowed but
under no circumstances will plastering of the surface be permitted.
Item 82.01 Formwork for indicated class of finish.........................................square meter

The unit of measurement shall be the square meter (m2) (class of finish indicated as
F1, F2, F3 or board) surface finish to (description of member to which applicable).
Item 82.02 Vertical formwork for indicated class of finish............................square meter

Item 82.03 Horizontal formwork for indicated class of finish ......................square meter
Item 82.04 Inclined formwork for indicated class of finish .............................square meter
The unit of measurement shall be the square meter, and only the actual area of
formwork in contact with the finished face of the concrete shall be measured.
Formwork for the different classes of finish shall be measured separately. Formwork
for construction joints shall be measured for payment under class F1 surface finish,
but only formwork for mandatory construction joints shall be measured for payment.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for procuring and furnishing all
materials required, erecting the falsework and formwork, constructing the forms,

forming the grooves, fillets, chamfers and stop-ends for construction joints, treating
and preparing the forms, all bolts, nuts, ties, struts and stays, stripping and removing
the formwork after completion of the work, all labor, equipment and incidentals, and
rubbing and surface treatment. Payment of 80% of the amount due for formwork will
be made when the formwork has been removed, and payment of the remaining 20%
will be made on approval of the concrete surface finish.
Item 82.05 Permanent formwork

(a) To form voids of (diameter size of void indicated), in (description of member
to which applicable)........................................................................................ square meter (m2)
(b) Of (description of material \and member to which applicable) ......... square meter (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square meter of concrete area formed with
permanent formwork.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for procuring and furnishing all the
materials required, installing the formwork, and labor, equipment and incidentals.
Item 82.06 Formwork to form open joints ....................................................... square meter

(description of member to which applicable, and location)
The unit of measurement shall be the square meter of concrete area formed.
Surfaces formed prior to the construction of the final surface for completing the joint,
shall be measured under items Pay Item 82.01, Pay Item 82.02, Pay Item 82.03 or Pay
Item 82.04, as may be applicable.
materials required, constructing the formwork and subsequently removing all the
material within the joint space, as well as labour, equipment and incidentals. Payment
for formwork to open joints shall be made only after the forms and filler material have
been completely removed and approval of the surface finish has been obtained.
Item 82.07 Establishment on the site for sliding formwork operations.............lump sum
The unit of measurement is tendered in lump sum, shall include full compensation for
the establishment on the site and the subsequent removal of the complete sliding-
formwork assembly, special plant and equipment, and incidentals for the sliding work,
the cost of which does not vary with the actual amount of sliding work done.
This work will be paid for by way of a lump sum, 75% of which will become payable
when the sliding-formwork assembly, plant and equipment have been fully installed at
the first structural member on the site, and the remaining 25% will become payable
after all sliding work has been completed and the said items have been removed from
the site.
Item 82.08 Transporting to and setting up the sliding formwork assembly......... number
(description of each structure)
The unit of measurement shall be the number(No) of structures to which the complete
sliding-formwork assembly has to be transported and set up in position ready to be
commissioned.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all costs involved in dismantling,
transporting and erecting of the complete sliding-formwork assembly.

Item 82.09 Forming the concrete by sliding formwork for structures ..................... meter
(for description of each structure and class of surface finish to exposed surfaces
indicated)
The quantity measured shall be the actual height of each structure formed by the
sliding technique.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for sliding, instrumentation and
monitoring, the maintenance of the complete sliding-formwork assembly, plant and
equipment, supplying, installing and recovering the jack rods, floating, repairing and
treating the concrete surfaces, forming the emergency construction joints, and all
labour, equipment and incidentals.

DIVISION 8300: STEEL

REINFORCEMENT FOR STRUCTURES
8301 SCOPE
This Division covers the furnishing and placing of steel reinforcement in concrete
structures.
8302 MATERIALS REQUIREMENT
(a) Steel reinforcement

Reinforcing bars shall comply with NZS 3402P and/or deformed steel bars for
concrete shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 31 (ASTM A615).
Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement shall be Grade 40 or
Grade 60 or ASTM A 706. The nominal area of the bar, as given in Table 1 of
AASHTO M 31 or ASTM A 706, shall be used for computation.
In all cases where a 25 mm bar is shown on the drawings these can be replaced by a
24 mm bar.
Steel fabric reinforcement shall comply with BS 4483 and/or AASHTO M 225, M 55,
M 32 OR M 221 as appropriate.
Hard drawn mild steel wire reinforcement shall comply with BS 4482 and/or
AASHTO M 55, Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
Deformed Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement shall comply with AASHTO M 225
& Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement shall comply with AASHTO M
32.
(b) Mechanical couplers

Mechanical couplers may only be used with the approval of the Engineer.
(c) Storage of Materials

Steel reinforcement shall be stacked off the ground and, in aggressive environments,
protection shall be provided in the form of sheds or tarpaulins.
Mild steel reinforcement and high yield steel reinforcement shall be stored in separate
locations and shall be clearly identified.
(a) Equipment
The equipment used for the cutting, cropping and bending of the reinforcement shall
be capable of producing prefabricated or in-situ assemblies complying with the
requirements of this Division.

(b) Bending of Reinforcement

Reinforcement shall be cut and bent to the dimensions shown on the Bending
Schedules and in accordance with BS 4466 and/or ACI 318.
All reinforcement shall be bent at temperatures in the range of 5oC to 100oC.
Contractor shall submit a Bar Bending Schedule at least 30 days prior to the
placement of the rebars, for the Engineer's approval. All costs for the preparation of
the schedule shall be incidental to the work.
No flame cutting of high tensile steel bars shall be permitted except with the approval
of the Engineer.
Except as approved, all bars shall be bent cold and bending shall be done slowly, a
steady, even pressure being used without jerk or impact.
If approved, hot bending of bars of at least 32 mm diameter will be permitted,
provided that the bars do not depend for their strength on cold working.
When hot bending is approved, the bars shall be heated slowly to a cherry red heat
(not above 8400 C) and after bending shall be allowed to cool slowly in air. Quenching
with water shall not be permitted.
Reinforcing bars that have already been bent shall not be re-bent at the location of the
original bend without the permission of the Engineer.
Cold worked bars and hot rolled high yield bars shall not be straightened or bent again
once having been bent.
Where it is necessary to bend mild steel reinforcement projecting from the concrete,
the internal radius of bend shall be not less than twice the diameter of the bar.
(c) Surface Conditions

Immediately before the concrete is placed around the reinforcement, the reinforcement
shall be clean, free from mud, oil, grease, paint, loose rust, loose mill scale or any
other substance that can have an adverse chemical effect on the steel or concrete, or
reduce the bond.
(d) Placing and Fixing

Reinforcement shall be secured against displacement during the placement and
compaction of the concrete.
Reinforcement shall be positioned as shown on the Drawings and accurately secured
in these positions within the tolerance given in Division T8000 of these specifications
by tying with 1.6 or 1.25 mm diameter annealed wire or by the use of suitable clips or,
where permitted by the Engineer, by tack welding.
Cover and spacer blocks required to support the reinforcement shall be as small as
possible consistent with their use and be of approved design and material.
Projecting ends of ties or clips shall not encroach into the concrete cover.
Where protruding bars are exposed to the elements for an indefinite period the bars
shall be adequately protected against corrosion and damage and shall be properly
cleaned before being permanently encased in concrete.

In members that are formed with sliding formwork, spacer "ladders" for the placing
and fixing of the wall reinforcement shall be used at spacing indicated on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The ladders shall consist of two 3.7 m long
bars with lateral ties of 4 mm diameter welded to them in the form of a ladder. The ties
shall be spaced at multiples of horizontal bar spacing in the wall, and be used to
secure the horizontal reinforcement. The laps in the horizontal reinforcement shall be
staggered to ensure that no part of two laps in any four consecutive layers lie in the
same vertical plane.
(e) Cover
The term "cover" in this context shall mean the minimum clear thickness of concrete
between the surface of the reinforcement and face of the concrete.
The cover to any bar in an outer layer of reinforcement shall not be less than the
minimum cover shown on the Drawings and shall not exceed the minimum by more
than 4% of the overall dimension of the member, measured in the same direction, or
by more than 20 mm, whichever is the lesser. Where no cover is indicated, the
minimum thickness provided shall not be less than the appropriate values shown in
Table 8303-1below.
The cover shall be increased by the expected depth of any surface treatment, e.g. when
concrete is bush hammered or when rebates are provided.
Additional cover as directed by the Engineer shall be provided if porous aggregates
are used.
Concrete spacer blocks shall be made with 5 mm maximum size aggregate and shall
be of the same strength and material source as the surrounding concrete. Tying wire
complying with the requirements of this clause shall be cast into the block for the
purpose of tying it to the reinforcement. The blocks shall be formed in specially
manufactured moulds and the concrete compacted in a table vibrator all to the
Cover blocks or spacers required for ensuring that the specified cover is obtained shall
be of a material, shape, and design acceptable to the Engineer.
The contractor shall provide stools as shown on the drawings, or, where they are not
detailed on the drawings, wherever the engineer requires them to be installed. The
stools shall be suitably robust, and fixed securely so that they cannot swivel or move.
The stools shall have sufficient strength to perform the required functions, taking into
account amongst others temporary loads such as the weight of workmen and wet
concrete, and forces caused by vibrators and other methods of compacting the
concrete.

Table 8303-1 Minimum concrete cover over reinforcement
Water/Cement Ratio ≤0.40 ≤0.45 ≤0.50

SITUATION COVER COVER COVER
(mm) (mm) (mm)
Direct exposure to salt water 80 100 120
Cast against earth (i.e. Bottom of footings) 60 75 90
Exterior other than above 40 50 60
Interior other than above (i.e. hollow structures)
• Up to ∅35 Bar
• ∅45 and ∅55Bars 32 40 48
40 50 60
Bottom of cast-in-place slabs
• Up to ∅35 Bar 25 25 30
• ∅45 and ∅55Bars 40 50 60
Precast soffit form panels 20 20 24
Precast Reinforced Piles
• Non-corrosive environments 32 40 48
• Corrosive environments 60 75 90
Precast Prestressed Piles 40 50 60
Cast-in-place Piles
• Non-corrosive environments 40 50 60
• Corrosive environments
General 60 75 90
Protected 60 75 90
• Shells 40 50 60
• Auger cast, tremie concrete or slurry 60 75 90
construction
(f) Laps and Joints

Laps, joints, splices and mechanical couplings shall be made only by the methods
specified and at the positions shown on the Drawings, refer ACI 318 or as agreed to
by the Engineer.
(g) Welding
Welding of reinforcement shall only be carried out where shown on the Drawings or
agreed to by the Engineer. Refer ACI 318.
Flash butt welding shall only be carried out with the combination of flashing, heating,
upsetting and annealing to the Engineer's approval and only those machines that
automatically control this cycle of operations shall be used.
Metal-arc welding of reinforcement shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5135
and the recommendations of the reinforcement manufacturers subject to the approval
of the Engineer and the satisfactory performance of trial joints.
Other methods of welding e.g. resistance welding may be used subject to the approval
of the Engineer and to their satisfactory performance of trial joints.
Welded joints shall be full strength welds and their strength shall be assessed by tests
to destruction on samples selected by the Engineer.
Item 83.01 Steel reinforcement for structure

(a) Mild steel bars (Type and Grade indicated)........................................................ ton (t)
(b) High yield stress steel bars (Type Class and Grade indicated)............................ton (t)
(c) Welded steel fabric .................................................................................Kilogram (kg)
accordance with the Drawings or as authorized by the Engineer.
The unit of measurement for welded steel fabric shall be the Kilogram of fabric
reinforcement in place and the quantity shall be calculated from the net area covered
by the mesh, excluding laps.
Clips, ties, separators, chairs, and other steel used for positioning reinforcement shall
not be measured unless shown on the Bending Schedule.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the supply, delivery, cutting,
bending, welding, placing and fixing of the steel reinforcement, including all tying
wire, spacers, stools, supports and waste.
Item 83.02 Mechanical couplers for (diameter of bar indicated) ................ Number(No.)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of mechanical couplers for each bar
diameter installed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the supply of all material, for
preparing and modifying the bar ends to be joined as well as for all tools, equipment
and labor required to complete the work.
Item 83.03 Spacer "ladders"

The pay item for Spacer "ladders" shall be the ton of steel in place in accordance with
the Drawings or as authorized by the Engineer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the supply, delivery, cutting,
bending, welding, placing and fixing of the "ladders" including all tying wire, spacers,
stools, supports and waste.
Mass of Reinforcing Bars is shown in the following Table 8304-1, Contractor shall
provide the manufacturer's chart for the exact calculations.
Table 8304-1 Mass of Reinforcing Bars
Bar Diameter in Mass in kg/m

mm
10 0.559
12 0.994
16 1.55
19 2.24
22 3.05
25 3.98
28 5.03
32 6.22

DIVISION 8400: CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
8401 SCOPE
This Division covers the manufacture, transport, placing, and testing of concrete used
in the Work where plain, reinforced, or prestressed concrete is specified.
8402 MATERIALS
(a) Cement
Cement used for structures shall be either ordinary Portland or sulphate resisting
cement complying with the requirements of AASHTO M-85 or blended hydraulic
cement complying with the requirements of AASHTO M-240.
(b) Admixtures
Admixtures shall not be used in concrete without the approval of the Engineer who
may require tests to be made before their use to prove their suitability.
Admixtures, if allowed, shall comply with the following:
(i) Air-Entraining Admixtures

Air-entraining admixtures shall comply with AASHTO M 154.
For structural concrete, air- entraining admixtures shall be admixtures classified as
vinsol resin or neutralized vinsol resin.
Where the contractor wishes to use an alternative air-entraining agent, he shall
demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, its compliance with AASHTO M 154
when tested with the cement, aggregates and other admixtures approved for use in the
Works.
(ii) Chemical Admixtures

Chemical admixtures can be accelerating, retarding and /or water reducing, and
combinations thereof , conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 194.
When a retarding admixture is required it shall be Type D, a water - reducing -
retarding admixture as designated in AASHTO M 194.
Type F or G high range admixtures may be used if approved by the Engineer for
additional workability and/or to educe the water cement ratio.
Chemical admixtures shall be compatible with the other ingredients of the mix as
demonstrated by tests carried out on site by the Contractor in the presence of the
Engineer at least 30 days before it is proposed to use the agent.

(c) Aggregates
(i) General
Aggregates, which are to be used in the works, shall have negligible alkaline
reactivity. when tested in accordance with ASTM C 227, the mean mortar bar
expansion values at 3 and 6 months shall be less than +0.5% and +0.10% respectively.
When tested in accordance with ASTM 289, the aggregate shall be proven to be non-
reactive.
Aggregate for structures shall be considered not susceptible to alkali aggregate
reaction if all of the significant rock components belong to the petrological group
listed below.
A significant rock component is defined as one, which forms, more than 4% by weight
of the coarse or fine aggregate.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with details of the significant rock
components contained in the aggregates.
Any aggregate containing the mineral opal shall be considered susceptible to alkali
aggregate reaction. A qualified Geologist shall carry out the identification of rock and
its placing in the appropriate group.
Aggregates shall not contain deleterious amounts of organic materials such as grass,
timber or similar materials as shown in Table 8402-1.
Table 8402-1 Maximum amount of deleterious substances
Maximum
Item Percentage by Mass
Fine Coarse
Aggregate Aggregate
Material Passing 0.075 mm sieve
Lightweight material 2.0 1.0
Organic matter 2.0 2.0
Clay lumps Zero Zero
Other deleterious substances 1.0 0.5
2.0 1.0
The sum of the percentage of all deleterious substances in aggregate as delivered to

the mixer, shall not exceed 3 percent for fine aggregate and 2 per cent for coarse
aggregate. If there is a potential danger of alkali aggregate reaction the Engineers
decision as to the suitability of the aggregate shall be final and binding.
(ii) Fine Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete.

Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand, manufactured sand, or a combination of
natural and manufactured sand conforming to AASHTO M 6 class B including the
reactive aggregate supplementary requirement, except as amended or supplemented by
the following:
Material passing standard sieve size 0.075 mm shall not exceed 3.0% when tested in
accordance with AASHTO T 11.

The Sand equivalent value in accordance with AASHTO T 176 shall not be more than
75.
For lightweight fine aggregate, conform to AASHTO M 195.
Table 8402-2 Grading of Fine Aggregate
Sieve size percentage of total mass passing

(mm) sieve
10 100
4.76 95-100
2.38 68 - 86
1.19 47 - 65
0.59 27 - 42
0.30 9 - 20
0.15 0-7
0.075 0 - 2.5
(iii) Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete.

Coarse aggregate shall Conform to AASHTO M 80 class A, except as amended or
supplemented by the following:
(a) The Los Angeles abrasion value shall not exceed 40% when determined in
accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T 96.
(b) The Adherent coating value shall not exceed 1.0% when determined in accordance
with the requirements of FLH T 512.
For bridge decks or surface courses, aggregates known to polish or carbonate
aggregates containing less than 25 percent by mass of insoluble residue as determined
by ASTM D 3042 shall not be used.
For lightweight coarse aggregate shall conform to AASHTO M 195.
Table 8402-3 Nominal Size and Grading of Coarse Aggregate
Nominal Percentage of total mass passing sieve

Size Sieve size (mm)
(mm) 31.25 25 19 12.5 10 4.75 0.075
25 90 - 100 - 0 – 20 0-2 - 0 - 0.5
20 100 80 – 100 - 10 - 40 0-4 0 - 0.5
10 100 90 - 100 40 - 70 0 - 15 0 - 0.5
(d) Water
Water shall be clean and free from detrimental concentration of acids, alkalis, urine,
salts, sugar, and other organic or chemical substances.
If the water used is not obtained from a public drinking water main the Engineer may
require the Contractor to have the suitability of the water proved by tests carried out
by an approved laboratory. Such tests shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO
T 26 and in particular:

The total percentage of solids by weight shall not exceed 2.25 percent.
For reinforced concrete construction the requirements are as:
Chloride (as Cl2) (ASTM D 512) 400 ppm max.
Sulfates (as SO3 ) (ASTM D 516) 500 ppm max.
Alkali Carbonates and Bicabonates 750 ppm max
Total dissolved solid (ASTM D 1888) 2000 ppm max.
pH 7 to 9
Concrete made with water not meeting the requirements specified herein may be
rejected for inclusion in the works.
8403 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
(a) Cement
Cement, which is stored on site, shall be kept under cover, that provides adequate
protection against moisture and other factors which may promote deterioration.
When the cement is supplied in bags, they shall be closely and neatly stacked to a
height not exceeding 12 bags and arranged so that they can be used in the order in
which they were delivered to the site.
Storage of cement in bulk in silos or similar containers shall be permitted provided
that the cement drawn for use is measured by mass and not be volume.
Cement shall not be kept in storage for longer than six weeks without the Engineer's
permission and different brands and/or types of the same brand shall be stored
separately.
(b) Aggregates
Aggregates of different nominal sizes shall be stored separately and in such a way that
segregation is avoided. Intermixing of different materials and contamination by
foreign matter shall be avoided.
Aggregates exposed to a marine environment shall be covered to protect them from
salt contamination.
Where concrete is batched on site, the aggregates shall be stored in bins with a 3.0 m
wide concrete apron slab constructed around the outer edge of the aggregated
stockpile area to prevent contamination during the process of tippling and hoisting the
aggregate. The aggregates shall be tipped on the concrete apron slab. The storage bin
shall have a concrete floor of 150 mm thickness.
(c) Storage Capacity

The storage capacity provided and the amount of material stored (whether cement,
aggregates, or water) shall be sufficient to ensure that no interruptions to the progress
of the work are occasioned by lack of materials.
Special Storage facility shall be provided for storing cement to ensure that cement
does not get exposed to moisture. Engineer shall make the decision for the duration of
storage.

(d) Deteriorated Material

Material that has deteriorated, or that has been contaminated or otherwise damaged,
shall not be used in concrete. Such materials shall be removed from the site without
delay.
8404 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
(a) Concrete Grade and Class

The Grade and/or Class of concrete used for structures shall be as described in the
Contract.
For each Grade of concrete the specified minimum 28-day cube compressive strength
in N/mm2 shall be as given in Table 8404-1.
The Class of concrete shall be defined by its Grade followed by the maximum size of
aggregate.
Table 8404-1 Grade of Concrete for Structures
Grade Minimum 28 days Cube Strength

(N/mm2)
20 20.0
25 25.0
30 30.0
40 40.0
50 50.0
60 60.0
(b) Minimum Cement Content

The minimum cement content shall be that which is required to ensure compliance
with the minimum strength requirement in Table 8404-1.
(c) Maximum Water/Cement Ratio

The ratio of the weight of free water to the weight of cement in the mix shall not
exceed 0.5 unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
(d) Maximum Cement Content

The cement content shall not exceed 550 kg/m3 unless otherwise described in the
Contract or agreed by the Engineer.
(e) Design of Concrete Mixes for Structures

Unless otherwise specified, concrete mixes for structures shall be designed in
accordance with an internationally approved method as approved by the Engineer.
Prior to the design of the mix the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the nature
and source of each of the constituent materials that he proposes to use.

The water content shall be the minimum required to provide the workability necessary
for the placing and compaction of the concrete as determined by trial mixes.
The 7 to 28 day strength relationship shall be established during the mix design
procedure by making 6 pairs of cubes and testing of one from each pair to be tested at
seven days and the other at 28 days.
The workability of the concrete shall be determined by the Contractor and shall be the
optimum required for the proper placing and full compaction of the concrete around
the reinforcement tendons and ducts and completely fills the formwork.
The workability of the fresh concrete shall be determined by the slump test in
accordance with the requirements of ASTM Cl43.
(f) Prescribed mix

When a "prescribed mix" is specified, the Engineer will specify the mix proportions
and the Contractor, or the manufacturer, will undertake to provide properly mixed
concrete containing the constituents in the specified proportions in accordance with
the following:
The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying the constituent materials for the
concrete, and he shall, at least two months before the start of any concrete work on the
site, supply to the Engineer samples of each aggregate for testing purposes.
If the materials comply with the specification, the Contractor shall supply further
samples of sizes indicated by the Engineer, for determination of the mix proportions
for each class of concrete.
The class of concrete is indicated by the characteristic 28 day cylinder crushing
strength in MPa and the maximum size of coarse aggregate in the mix; e.g. Grade
30/40 concrete means concrete with the characteristic cylinder crushing strength of 30
MPa at 28 days and a maximum size of coarse aggregate of 40 mm.
The classes of concrete for prescribed mixes shall be specified in the Special
Provisions, except for the three "nominal" classes specified hereinafter. For each class
the following shall be specified.
• The estimated minimum compressive strength in MPa at 28 days.
• The maximum nominal size of coarse aggregate in mm, and its
proportions in the mix.
• The proportion of the fine aggregate in the mix.
• The type and proportion of cement in the mix.
• The cement/water ratio.
• The slump in mm.
The Engineer shall have the right to vary, as the work proceeds, the proportions of the
constituents of the concrete. Payment for variations shall be made at the tendered rates
as specified in the Special Provisions.
The nominal mixes specified for use where indicated on the drawings or in the Bills of
Quantities or where ordered by the Engineer are given in Table 8404-2.

Table 8404-2 Nominal Mixes
Constituent or Property Grade Grade Grade

1:4:8 1:3:6 1:2:4
Concrete Concrete Concrete
Cement (kg) 50 50 50
Total aggregate (cu. m) 0.40 0.30 0.20
Max. total water (liter) 50 42 30
Estimated 28 day
compressive strength (MPa) 8 15 20
Note:
The maximum size of coarse aggregate in mm required in a mix shall be designated as
a suffix to the class, e.g. Grade 1:4:8/40. Numeral /40 indicates the nominal size of the
coarse aggregate.
The ratio of fine to coarse aggregate shall be adjusted to produce a dense workable
mix.
The total quantity of water shall include moisture content contained in the aggregates.
The Grade showing proportions are approximately only. Such as 1:4:8 indicates
approximation of one part cement:, four parts of fine aggregate and 8 parts of coarse
aggregate, and are intended to be used for identification purposes only.
(a) Storage and Handling of Material

All material shall be stored and handled in a manner that prevents segregation,
contamination, or other harmful effects.
Aggregate shall be stored and handled in a manner that ensures uniform moisture
content at the time of batching.
Different cements and pozzolana shall be stored in separate silos. Alternatively these
materials may be stored in bags under dry weatherproof covers on raised floors and
each consignment shall be kept separate and distinct.
Any cement that has become injuriously affected by damp or other causes shall be
removed from the site immediately. No cement shall be stored on site for longer than 3
months.
Aggregates shall be stored on site in different single sizes of coarse and fine aggregate
which shall be kept separate from each other.
All aggregates shall be kept free from contact with deleterious matter with adequate
provision for drainage, and shall be stored and handled so as to avoid segregation.
Aggregates shall be delivered and stored in such a way as to ensure that they can be
used in the same order in which they are delivered.
Fine aggregate shall be deposited at the site of mixing for at least 8 hours before use.

(b) Measuring Material.
(i) Cement
Where cement is supplied in standard bags the bags shall be assumed to contain 50 kg.
All cement taken from bulk storage containers and from partially used bags shall be
batched by mass, to an accuracy of within 3 per cent.
(ii) Water
Mixing water for each batch shall be measured, either by mass or by volume to an
accuracy of within 3 per cent.
(iii) Aggregates
All aggregates shall be measured separately by mass, except as otherwise provided in
this Clause, to an accuracy of within 3 percent.
Separate fine and coarse aggregates shall be used except for classes 7, 10, and 15
where all-in aggregate may be used.
Aggregates for prescribed mix concrete as specified in sub-clause 8404(f), may be
measured separately by volume.
Batching boxes for volume batching shall be filled without tamping, ramming, or
consolidation of any kind (other than that occurring naturally during the filling
process), and shall be screeded off level with their topmost edges.
Any adjustment of the volume shall be made by supplementary containers of a
suitable size. Adjustments by the incomplete filling of batching boxes to marks on
their inside faces shall not be permitted.
Fine aggregate shall be tested for bulking at the beginning of and half way through
each concreting shift, and adjustment shall be made to the batch volume to give the
true volume required.
The measurement of cement in gauge boxes will not be permitted and volume
batching shall be planned to use whole bags of cement.
(iv) Admixtures
Any solid admixtures to be added shall be measured by mass, but liquid or paste
admixtures may be measured by volume or mass. The quantity shall be measured to an
accuracy of within 5 per cent.
(v) Adjustment to mix Proportions

During production adjustments of mix proportions may be made in order to minimize
the variability of strength and to approach more closely the target mean strength. Such
adjustments are regarded as part of the proper control of production but the specified
limits of minimum cement content and maximum water/cement ratio shall be
maintained. Changes in cement content shall be declared. Such adjustments to mix
proportions shall not be taken to imply any change to the current margin.
(c) Batching Plant, Mixers, and Agitators

The batching plant, mixer, and agitator shall conform to AASHTO M 157.
Continuous volumetric mixing equipment shall conform to AASHTO M 241.

(d) Mixing
The concrete shall be mixed in a central-mix plant or in truck mixers.
All equipment shall be operated within manufacturer's recommended capacity.
The produced concrete shall be of uniform consistency.
(i) Central-Mix Plant

Liquid admixtures shall be dispensed through a controlled flowmeter.
Dispensers shall have sufficient capacity to measure, at one time, the full quantity of
admixture required for each batch.
If more than one admixture is used, each admixture shall be dispensed with separate
equipment.
The coarse aggregate, one third of the water, and all air entraining admixture shall be
charged into the mixer first, then the remainder material shall be added.
The batch shall be mixed for at least 50 seconds. The mixing time shall be counted
after all cement and aggregate are in the drum.
The contents of an individual mixer shall be removed before a succeeding batch is
charged into the drum.
(ii) Truck Mixer

Concrete shall be mixed in a truck mixer capable of combining the ingredients of the
concrete within the specified number of mixing revolutions into a thoroughly mixed
and uniform mass and discharging the concrete with a satisfactory degree of
uniformity.
The volume of mixed concrete permitted in the drum of truck mixers shall not exceed
the manufacturer's ratting on the capacity plate. Agitators shall similarly be capable of
producing concrete with a satisfactory degree of uniformity.
Mixers with any section of the blades worn by 25 mm or more below the original
manufactured height shall not be used.
Mixers and agitators with accumulated hard concrete or mortar in the mixing drum
shall not be used.
Admixtures shall be added to the mix water before or during mixing.
The batch shall be charged into the drum so a portion of the mixing water enters in
advance of the cement.
Each batch of concrete shall be mixed not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions
of the drum or blades at mixing speed. The count of mixing revolutions shall begun as
soon as all material, including water, is in the mixer drum.
(e) Delivery
Concrete shall be produced and delivered to permit a continuous placement with no
concrete achieving initial set before the remaining concrete being placed adjacent to it.
The methods of delivering, handling, and placing used shall minimize re-handling of
the concrete and prevent any damage to the structure.
Concrete that has developed an initial set shall not be used.

Concrete shall not be re-tempered by adding water.
(i) Truck mixer/agitator

The agitating speed shall be used for all rotation after mixing.
When a truck mixer or truck agitator is used to transport concrete that is completely
mixed in a stationary central construction mixer, mixing during transportation shall be
done as per the manufacturer's recommended agitating speed.
Water and admixtures (if in the approved mix design) may be added at the project to
obtain the required slump or air content, provided that, the total of all water in the mix
does not exceed the maximum water/cement ratio and the concrete has not obtained an
initial set. If additional water is necessary, water shall be added only once and shall be
re-mixed with 30 revolutions at mixing speed. Complete the re-mixing shall be
completed within 45 minutes after the initial introduction of mixing water to cement
or cement to aggregates.
(ii) Non-Agitating Equipment

Non-agitating equipment may be used to deliver concrete if the concrete discharge is
completed within 20 minutes from the beginning of the addition of the cement to the
mixing drum.
The equipment used shall have smooth, mortar tight, metal containers capable of
discharging the concrete at a controlled rate without segregation. Covers shall be
provided when needed for protection.
(f) Batching and Mixing
(i) General
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, concrete shall be mixed on the Site.
The quantities of cement, fine aggregate and the various sizes of coarse aggregate
shall be measured by weight unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer. Alternatively,
cementitious materials may be measured by using a whole number of bags in each
mix.
The quantity of water required to be added to the mix shall be measured by volume or
weight. Any admixture to be added to the mix shall be measured by volume or weight
and, if solid, shall be measured by weight.
Different types of cement shall not be mixed.
The batch weight of aggregate shall be adjusted to allow for the free moisture content
of the aggregate being used.
All constituent materials shall be thoroughly mixed and any admixtures uniformly
distributed throughout the batch.
Following the addition of water, the concrete shall be mixed for at least the minimum
time recommended by the manufacturer of the mixing plant prior to discharge from
the mixer.
Mixers that have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned
before any fresh concrete is mixed. Mixing plants shall be thoroughly cleaned before
changing from one type of cement to another.

An experienced operator shall conduct mixing of materials for concrete.

Unless otherwise approved, mixing shall be carried out in a mechanical batch mixer of
approved type and capable of producing a uniform distribution of ingredients through
the batch.
(ii) Charging the Mixer

The Engineer shall approve the sequence of charging and, unless otherwise instructed,
the same sequence shall be maintained.
The volume of the mixed material per batch shall not exceed the manufacturers rated
capacity of the mixer.
(iii) Mixing and Discharge

The period of mixing shall be measured from the time when all materials are in the
drum until the commencement of discharge.
The mixing period shall be 90 seconds and may only be reduced if, on the basis of site
tests, the Engineer is satisfied that the reduced mixing time will produce concrete
having essentially the same strength and uniformity as concrete mixed for 90 seconds.
The reduced mixing time shall, however, not be less than 50 seconds or the
manufacturers recommended mixing time, whichever is the greater. A suitable timing
device shall be attached to the mixer to ensure that the maximum mixing time is
complied with.
The first batch to be run when starting with a clean mixer, shall contain only 2/3 of the
required amount of coarse aggregate to facilitate "coating" of the mixer drum.
Discharge shall be so carried out that there is no segregation of the materials in the
mix. The mixer shall be emptied completely before it is recharged.
(iv) Maintenance and Cleaning of the Mixer

If the mixer has stopped running for any period in excess of 30 minutes, it shall be
thoroughly cleaned out, particular attention being paid to the removal of any build up
of materials in the drum, in the loader, and around the blades or paddles. Worn or bent
blades and paddles shall be replaced.
Before any concrete is mixed, the inner surfaces of the mixer shall be cleaned and all
hardened concrete shall be removed.
(v) Standby Mixer

When casting sections where it is important that casting should continue without
interruption a standby mixer shall be held in readiness to run on 15 minutes notice in
case of breakdown of the stock mixer.
(vi) Ready Mixed Concrete

Ready mixed concrete as defined in BS 5328 batched off the site may be used only
with the agreement of the Engineer and shall comply with all requirements of the
contract.
The concrete shall be carried in purpose made agitators, operating continuously, or
truck mixers. The concrete shall be compacted and in its final position within two
hours of the introduction of cement to the aggregates, unless a longer time is agreed

by the Engineer. The time of such introduction shall be recorded on the delivery note,
together with the weight of the constituents of each mix.
When truck mixed concrete is used, water shall be added under supervision, either at
the site or at the central batching plant, as agreed by the Engineer but in no
circumstances shall water be added in transit.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, truck mixer units and their mixing and
discharge performance shall comply with the requirements of BS 4251 and/or ASTM
C 94. Mixing shall continue for the number and rate of revolutions recommended in
accordance with item 9 in Appendix B of BS 4251 or, in the absence of the manu-
facturers instructions, mixing shall continue for not less than 100 revolutions at a rate
of not less than 7 revolutions per minute.
(g) Trial Mixes

At least 60 days prior to commencing concrete work the Contractor shall carry out
laboratory trials of designed mixes with the materials from all sources to be used in
the Works including all admixtures.
Trial mixes shall be made in the presence of the Engineer or his representative and
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Trial mixes shall be repeated if necessary until the proportions that will produce a
concrete which complies in all respects with this Specification have been determined.
The proportions determined as a result of the laboratory trial mixes may be adjusted if
necessary during the construction of the trial length. Thereafter neither the materials
nor the mix proportions shall be varied in any way except with the written approval of
the Engineer.
Any change in sources of materials or mix proportions that are proposed by the
Contractor during the course of the works shall be assessed by making new laboratory
trial mixes except that the Engineer may approve minor alterations to the mix.
(h) Consistency and Workability

The concrete shall be of suitable workability without the excessive use of water so that
it can be readily compacted into the corners of the formwork and around
reinforcement, tendons, and ducts without segregation of the material.
Workability shall be assessed by means of the slump test, compacting factor test, or
VB consistometer test as directed by the Engineer.
The quantities of mixing water and admixtures to be used will be determined in each
case by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer to obtain a consistency in the
range of 25 mm to 100 mm and no changes shall be made without the Engineer's
approval.
Concrete shall be acceptable when the slump, as measured in accordance with
AASHTO T-119, or SC-T-42, is 25mm to 100mm.
The Contractor shall have on hand at the job site a suitable amount of cement in bags
for drying up over wet concrete and for other purposes.
In the event additional water is required to obtain the specified slump at the job site,
the Engineer may approve adding water normally at the rate of 5 liters per cubic

meters, per 25 mm of desired slump provided a maximum water cement ratio is not
exceeded.
When additional cement or water is added, a minimum of 25 revolutions of the truck
mixer drum at mixing speed shall be required before discharge of the concrete.
(i) Temperature and Weather Conditions
(i) General
The temperature of the concrete mixture just before placement shall be maintained
between 11 degree C and 36 degree C., except for bridge decks between 11 degree C
and 30 degree C.
Work shall not proceed when the temperature of the concrete upon discharge from the
delivery vehicle exceeds 30 degrees C.
The temperature of the concrete shall be measured by the use of a suitable
thermometer approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall take all practical measures agreed with the Engineer to keep the
temperature of the mixed concrete as low as possible at all times consistent with the
requirements of this Sub-clause.
No aggregates in a frozen condition shall be incorporated into the Works but it may be
used if acceptable when thawed out.
Before placing concrete, the formwork, reinforcement, pre-stressing steel and any
surface with which the fresh concrete will be in contact shall be free from snow, ice
and frost.
The temperature of concrete shall not be less than 50C at the point of delivery.
Concrete shall not be laid when the air temperature in the shade falls below 30C and
laying shall not be resumed until the rising air temperature in the shade reaches 30C.
During hot weather the Contractor shall ensure that the constituent materials of the
concrete are sufficiently cool to prevent the concrete from stiffening in the interval
between its discharge from the mixer and compaction in its final position.
Cement shall not be allowed to come into contact with water at a temperature greater
than 60oC.
Concrete shall not be placed during rain.
(ii) Cold Weather

Concrete shall not be placed during falling temperatures when the ambient air
temperatures fall below 7o C or during rising temperatures when the ambient air
temperature is below 3o C.
When placing concrete at air temperature 5o C the concrete temperature shall not be
below 10oC.
The temperature of placed concrete shall not be allowed to fall below 5o C until the
concrete has attained a strength of at least 5 MPa and the Contractor shall be responsi-
ble for all protective measure necessary to ensure this.
When cold weather is reasonably expected or has occurred within 7 days of
anticipated concrete placement, the Contractor shall submit a detailed plan for the
production, transporting, placing, protecting, curing and temperature monitoring of

concrete during cold weather. The Contractor shall also include procedures for
accommodating abrupt changes in weather conditions. The placement of concrete
shall not commence until the plan is accepted by the Engineer. The Engineer shall
notify the acceptance or rejection of the plan within 3 days to the Contractor.
All concrete that has been damaged by frost or the formation of ice in the concrete
shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
The Contractor shall have all material and equipment required for protection available
at or near the site before commencing cold weather concreting.
(iii) Hot Weather

When the ambient air temperature exceeds 32o C during a concreting operation the
Contractor shall take measures approved by the Engineer to control the temperature of
the concrete ingredients so that the temperature of the placed concrete does not exceed
25o C.
Such measures will include spraying aggregate stock piles with water to promote
cooling down by evaporation and where feasible shading of stock piles and the area
where concreting is carried out. Curing shall commence immediately after placing of
the concrete to prevent excessive moisture loss.
In hot weather, all surfaces that will come in contact with the mix shall be cooled
down to below 36 degree C.
8406 HANDLING, PLACING AND COMPACTION OF CONCRETE
(a) General
Before placing of concrete the Structural excavation and backfill, design and
construction of flsework and forms, construction of reinforcing steel, Structural steel,
Bearing devices jointing material and miscellaneous items shall be performed to the
satisfaction of the Engineer according to the appropriate Sections of these
specifications.
Concrete shall not be placed until the forms, all materials to be embedded and, for
spread footings, the adequacy of the foundation material have been inspected and
Concrete shall be transported and placed in a manner that will prevent segregation, or
loss of constituent materials and contamination.
Concrete shall not be placed in any part of the works until the Engineer's approval has
been given. If concreting is not started within 24 hours of approval being given
approval shall again be obtained from the Engineer.
Concreting operations shall only be carried out during daylight hours unless proper
lighting arrangements have been made and lights are in working order by noon.
Workman shall not be allowed to work double shifts and the Contractor shall provide
a fresh team for nightshifts.
The placing and compaction of concrete shall at all times be under the direct
supervision of an experienced concrete supervisor.
Once concreting has begun it shall be carried out in a continuous process between
construction or expansion joints.

The delivery rate, placing sequence, and methods shall be such that fresh concrete is
always placed and consolidated against previously placed concrete before initial set
has occurred in the previously placed concrete.
Concrete shall be placed within 15 minutes from completion of mixing and within one
hour from the start of mixing.
All excavations and other contact surfaces of an absorbent nature such as timber
formwork shall be damp but no free water shall be permitted to remain on these
surfaces. The formwork shall be cleaned internally.
The method used shall not cause displacement of reinforcing steel or other embedded
materials.
Retempering the concrete by adding water to mix shall not be permitted.
Temporary form spreader devices may be left in place until concrete placement
precludes their need, after which they shall be removed.
During and after placement of concrete, care shall be taken not to injure the concrete
or break the bond with reinforcement.
Once the concrete is set, care shall be taken not to disturb the forms or reinforcing
bars that project from the concrete until it is of sufficient strength to resist damage.
(b) Placing
(i) General
Whenever possible, concrete shall be deposited vertically into its final position.
Where chutes are used the length and slope shall be such as not to cause segregation
and suitable spouts or baffles shall be provided at the lower end to prevent
segregation.
The displacement of concrete by vibration instead of direct placing will not be
allowed. Concrete shall not be allowed to fall freely through a height of more than
1.5m.
Care shall be taken when casting bridge decks of substantial thickness to avoid
layering of concrete and the whole thickness shall be placed in one pass. Fresh
concrete shall not be placed against concrete that has been in position for more than
30 minutes unless a construction joint is formed.
Pumping of concrete shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Aluminum pipes
shall not be used for this purpose.
In plain concrete of thickness more than 300 mm, hard clean stone "plums" of mass
15-55 kg may, if approved, be included to displace concrete for up to 20 per cent of
the total volume provided that:
• Such plums have no adhering films or coatings;
• No plums have a dimension greater than one third of the smallest
dimension of the concrete member or 300 mm whichever is less; and
• Each plum is surrounded by at least 75 mm of concrete.
Concrete for columns, substructures and culvert walls, and other similar vertical
members shall be placed and allowed to set and settle for a period of time before
concrete for integral horizontal members, such as caps, slabs, or footing is placed.
Such period shall be adequate to allow completion of settlement due to loss of bleed
water and shall not be less than 12 hours for vertical members over 4.5 m height and
not less than 30 minutes for members over 1.5 m but not over 4.5 m in height. The
vertical members shall have been in place at least 7 days and shall have attained its
specified strength before loads from horizontal members are applied.
(ii) Sequence of Placement

(1) Substructures
Loads shall not be placed on finished bents, piers, or abutments until concrete cylinder
tests from the same concrete cured under the same conditions as the substructure
element indicate that all concrete has at least 80 percent of its required 28-day
compressive strength.
(2) Vertical members
For vertical members over 4.5 meters in height, the concrete shall be allowed
to set for at least 4 hours before placing concrete for integral horizontal
members.
For vertical members less than 4.5 meters in height, the concrete shall be
allowed to set for at least 30 minutes.
Loads shall not be applied from horizontal members until the vertical
member has attained its required strength.
(3) Superstructures
Concrete shall not be placed in the superstructure until substructure forms
have been stripped sufficiently to determine the acceptability of the
supporting substructure concrete. Concrete shall not be placed in the
superstructure until the substructure has attained the required strength.
Concrete shall be placed for T-beams in 2 separate operations. Concrete
placing on the top deck slab concrete shall be done waiting at least 5 days
after stem placement.
Concrete for box girders may be placed in 2 or 3 separate operations
consisting of bottom slab, girder webs, and top slab or as shown on the plans.
However, the bottom slab shall be placed first and the top slab shall not be
placed until the girder webs have been in place for at least 5 days.
(4) Arches
Concrete shall be placed in arch rings so that the centering is loaded
uniformly and symmetrically.
(5) Box culverts
The base slab of box culverts shall be placed and allow to set 24 hours before
the remainder of the culvert is constructed.
For sidewall heights of 1.5 meters or less, the sidewalls and top slab may be
placed in one continuous operation.
For sidewalls greater than 1.5 meters but less than 4.5 meters in height,
sidewall concrete shall be allowed to set at least 30 minutes before placing
concrete in the top slab.

For sidewalls 4.5 meters or higher, sidewall concrete shall be allowed to set
at least 12 hours before placing concrete in the top slab.
(6) Precast elements
Concrete shall be placed and consolidated so that shrinkage cracks are not
produced in the member.
(iii) Placing underwater

Normally concrete shall only be placed in the dry.
Placing under water shall be allowed only in exceptional circumstances where in the
opinion of the Engineer it is not feasible to dewater before placing.
No concrete shall be placed in flowing water.
Underwater placement of concrete is permitted only for seal concrete and drilled
shafts. If other than seal concrete is used, the minimum cement content shall be
increased by 10 percent.
The concrete mix used for under water placing shall be specifically designed and
approved for this purpose to ensure good flowability, plasticity, and cohesion.
Increased sand and cement contents over normal mixes will usually be required.
Tremies, concrete pumps, or other approved methods shall be used for under water
concrete placement. Full details of the method proposed shall be submitted in advance
to the Engineer for his approval. Placing by skip or pipeline will also be considered in
certain circumstances.
(1) Tremies
Watertight tremies shall have a diameter of 250mm or more and the top shall
be fitted with a hopper. Multiple tremies shall be used as required.
Tremies shall be made capable of being rapidly lowered to retard or stop the
flow of concrete. At the start of concrete placement, the discharge end shall
be sealed and the tube shall be filled with concrete.
The tremie tube shall be kept full of concrete to the bottom during placement.
If water enters the tube, the tremie shall be withdrawn and the discharge end
resealed.
Continuous concrete flow shall be maintained until the placement is
completed.
(2) Concrete pumps
Concrete pumps shall have a device at the end of the discharge tube to seal
out water while the tube is first being filled with concrete.
When concrete flow is started, the end of the discharge tube shall be kept full
of concrete and below the surface of the deposited concrete until placement
has been completed.
Underwater concrete shall be placed continuously from start to finish in a
dense mass.
Each succeeding layer of concrete shall be placed before the preceding layer
has taken initial set. The Contractor shall use more than one tremie or pump
as necessary to ensure compliance with this requirement.

The concrete surface shall be kept as horizontal as practicable.

Dewatering shall be done after test specimens are cured under similar
conditions and the concrete has gained sufficient strength to resist the
expected loads. During and after concreting under water, pumping or
dewatering operations in the immediate vicinity shall be suspended until the
Engineer permits them to be continued.
All laitance or other unsatisfactory material shall be removed from the
exposed concrete.
(iv) Placing Methods

Equipment used for placing of concrete shall have sufficient capacity that is designed
and operated to prevent mix segregation and mortar loss. Equipment that causes
vibrations that could damage the freshly placed concrete shall not be used.
Equipment with aluminum parts that come in contact with the concrete shall not be
used in placing of concrete. Set or dried mortar shall be removed from inside surfaces
of placing equipment.
Concrete shall be placed as near as possible to its final position. Concrete shall not be
placed in horizontal layers greater than 0.45 meters thick.
The vibrator capacity shall not exceed to consolidate and merge the new layer with the
previous layer. Concrete shall not be placed at a rate that, when corrected for
temperature, exceeds the design loading of the forms.
Unconfined concrete shall not be dropped more than 4.5 meters when placing.
Concrete may be confined by using a tube fitted with a hopper head or other approved
device that prevents mix segregation and mortar spattering. This does not apply to
cast-in-place piling when concrete placement is completed before initial set occurs in
the concrete placed first.
Concrete pumps shall be operated so that a continuous stream of concrete without air
pockets is delivered at the tube discharge.
Conveyor belt systems longer than 165 meters when measured from end to end of the
total belt assembly shall not be used for placing concrete. The belt assembly shall be
arranged so that each section discharges into a vertical hopper to the next section
without mortar adhering to the belt. A hopper, chute, and deflectors shall be used at
the discharge end of the conveyor belt system to cause the concrete to drop vertically.
(v) Compaction
Concrete shall be fully compacted by approved means during and immediately after
placing. It shall be thoroughly worked against the formwork around the reinforcement
tendons, ducts, and embedded fittings and into corners to form a solid mass free from
voids.
The concrete shall be free from honeycombing and planes of weakness and successive
layers of the same lift shall be thoroughly bonded together. In no case shall the depth
of a lift exceed 0.6 m. When placing operation would involve dropping the concrete
more than 1.5 m, the concrete shall be dropped through a tremie or chute as required.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer concrete shall be compacted by means of
vibrators. Internal vibrators shall be capable of producing not less than 10,000 cycles

per minute and external vibrators not less than 3,000 cycles per minute. Sufficient
standby vibrators shall be held available in case of breakdown.
Vibrators shall be applied by experienced labor and over vibration resulting in
segregation, surface water and leakage shall be avoided. Contact with reinforcement
and formwork shall, as far as practicable be avoided when using internal vibrators.
Concrete shall not be subjected to disturbance by vibration within 4 to 24 hours after
compaction.
Whenever vibration is applied externally, the design of the formwork and positioning
of vibrator shall be such as to ensure efficient compaction and avoidance of surface
blemishes all subject to prior approval of the Engineer.
Special attention shall be given to the compaction of concrete in the anchorage zones
and behind the anchor plates and in all places where high concentrations of
reinforcing steel or cables occur.
In such cases where the placing and compaction of concrete is difficult a mix
containing small size aggregate may be used but only with the approval of the
Engineer and after a mix containing such aggregate has been designed and tested.
Sufficient number of vibrators shall be provided to consolidate each batch as it is
placed. Provide.
External form vibrators shall be used only when the forms have been designed for
external vibration and when internal vibration is not possible.
The concrete shall be vibrated at the point of deposit and at uniformly spaced points
not farther apart than 1.5 times the radius over which the vibration is visibly effective.
Vibrators shall not be used to move concrete and shall be inserted vertically and
withdrawn slowly from the concrete.
The vibration shall be of sufficient duration and intensity to thoroughly consolidate
the concrete, but not to cause segregation and at any one point long enough to cause
localized areas of grout to form.
Reinforcement bars shall not be vibrated in order to vibrate the concrete.
Hand held vibrators shall conform to Table 8406-1. Rubber coated vibrators shall be
provided when epoxy coated reinforcement is used.
Table 8406-1 Hand Held Vibratory Requirements
Head Diameter Frequency Radius of Action

millimeters vibrations/minute millimeters
19 to 38 10,000 to 15,000 75 to 125

31 to 63 9,000 to 13,500 125 to 250
50 to 88 8,000 to 12,000 250 to 475

8407 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
(a) General
Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to the construction joint shown on the
working drawings or as approved, except that is, because of an emergency (such as
breakdown of the mixing plant or the occurrence of unsuitable weather), concreting
has to be interrupted, a construction joint shall be formed at the place of stoppage in
the manner which will least impair the durability, appearance, and proper functioning
of the concrete.
Unless otherwise shown on the drawings the exact position of horizontal construction
joints shall be marked on the formwork by means of grout checks in order to obtain
truly horizontal joints.
Stub columns or stub walls on footings shall be cast integrally with the footings and
not afterwards.
(b) Preparation of Surfaces

When the concrete has set and while it is still green the surface film and all loose
material shall be removed, without disturbing the aggregates, by means of a water jet
assisted by light brushing to expose the aggregate and leave a sound, irregular surface.
Where this is not possible the surface film should be removed after the concrete has
hardened by mechanical means appropriate to the degree of hardness to the concrete
so as to expose the aggregate and leave a sound, irregular surface. The roughened
surface shall be washed with clean water to remove all latencies, dirt, and loose
particles.
(c) Placing Fresh Concrete at Construction Joints

When fresh concrete is placed the same day as the construction joint was formed the
fresh concrete shall be cast directly against the face of the construction joint.
When concreting recommences a day or more after the forming of the construction
joint the following procedure shall be followed:
• The construction joint shall be kept continuously wet for a period of at
least two hours before concreting starts but shortly before reconcreting
further application of water shall cease so that the surface is just damp
when further concreting has to commence.
• Any dirt, excess water, and loose particles shall be removed prior to
starting reconcreting.
• For horizontal construction joint surfaces a freshly mixed slurry
consisting of sand, cement and water mixed in the same proportions as
used in the concrete shall be applied approximately 10 mm thick in the
construction joint surface immediately ahead of concreting. The slurry
must still be in a plastic state when applied.
• For vertical construction joint faces a thin coat of a freshly mixed paste
of neat cement and water, using a little water as practical, shall be applied
to the construction joint immediately ahead of concreting.

• Epoxy resins specially designed for bonding old concrete to new shall
be used at construction joints where so directed by the Engineer. The
preparation of the construction joint surface and the application of the
epoxy resin shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and the Engineer's instructions. The actual brand and
type of resin used shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.
(d) Bonding
Unless otherwise shown on the plans, horizontal joints may be made without keys and
vertical joints shall be constructed with shear keys. Surfaces of fresh concrete at
horizontal joints construction joints shall be rough floated sufficient to thoroughly
consolidate the surface and intentionally left in a roughened condition.
Shear keys shall consist of formed depression in the surface covering approximately
one -third of the contact surface. The forms for key shall be beveled so that removal
will not damage the concrete.
All construction joints shall be cleaned of surface laitance, curing compound and other
foreign materials before fresh concrete is placed against the surface of the joint.
(e) Bonding and Doweling to Existing Structures

When new concrete is shown on the plans to be bonded to existing concrete structures,
the existing concrete shall be cleaned and flushed. When the plans show reinforcing
dowels grouted into holes drilled in the existing concrete at such construction joints,
the holes shall be drilled by methods that will not shatter or damage the concrete
adjacent to the holes. The diameters of the drilled holes shall be 6 mm larger than the
nominal diameter of the dowels unless shown otherwise on the drawings. The grout
shall be neat cement paste of Portland cement and water. The water content shall be
not more than 15 liter per 50 kg of cement. Sufficient grout shall be placed in the
holes so that no voids remain after the dowels are inserted. Grout shall be cured for a
period of at least 3 days or until dowels is encased in concrete.
When specified or approved by the Engineer, epoxy may be used in lieu of Portland
cement grout for bonding of dowels in existing concrete. When used, epoxy shall be
mixed and placed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
8408 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS
(a) Open joints

Open joints shall be formed with a wooden strip, metal plate, or other approved
material.
Joint forming material shall be removed without chipping or breaking the corners of
the concrete.
Reinforcement shall not be extended across an open joint.
(b) Filled joints

Premolded expansion joint filler shall be cut to the shape and size of the surface being
jointed.

The joint filler shall be secured on one surface of the joint using galvanized nails or
other acceptable means and spliced according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
After form removal, all concrete or mortar that has sealed across the joint shall be
removed and neatly cut.
All joint gaps 3 mm or wider shall be filled with hot asphalt or other approved filler.
All necessary dowels, load transfer devices, and other devices shall be placed as
shown on the plans or as directed.
(c) Steel joints

Plates, angles, or other structural shapes shall be fabricated accurately to conform to
the concrete surface.
Joint opening shall be set to conform to the ambient temperature at the time of
concrete placement. Securely fasten.
The joints shall be securely fastened to keep them in correct position.
(d) Water stops

Water stops shall be of copper, plastic or rubber water stops according to AASHTO
requirements.
(e) Compression joint seals

One-piece compression joint seals shall be used for transverse joints and the longest
practicable length for longitudinal joints.
Joints shall be cleaned and dried and spalls and irregularities shall be removed.
A lubricant- adhesive shall be applied as a covering film to both sides of the seal
immediately before installation.
The seal shall be compressed and placed in the joint as recommended by the
manufacturer and the seal shall be in full contact with the joint walls throughout its
length.
All seals that are twisted, curled, nicked or improperly formed shall be removed and
discarded. All joint seals that elongate more than 5 percent of their original length
when compressed shall be removed and reinstalled. All excess lubricant adhesive
shall be removed before it dries.
(f) Elastomeric expansion joint seal

Install the joint according to the manufacturer's recommendations and in conformance
with the plans.
8409 FINISHING PLASTIC CONCRETE
(a) General
Finishing of plastic concrete shall be done in accordance with the requirements of
Division 8200 of these specifications.

(b) Striking of Formwork

Formwork shall be removed in accordance with the minimum requirements stipulated
in Table 8409-1
Table 8409-1 Minimum Period Before Striking Formwork for Concrete for
Structures
Minimum Period for Striking

Surface Temperature of Concrete
Type of Formwork
16°C 7°C t°C (any temperature
between 0°C and 25°C)
Vertical formwork to 300
columns, walls and large 12 hours 18 hours hours
beams t + 10
Soffit formwork to slabs 100
4 days 6 days hours
t + 10
Props to slabs 250
10 days 15 days hours
t + 10
Soffit formwork to beams 230
t + 10
Props to beams 360
t + 10
8410 CURING CONCRETE
(a) General
Curing shall begin immediately after the free surface water has evaporated and the
finishing is completed.
If the surface of the concrete begins to dry before the selected cure method can be
implemented, concrete surface shall be kept moist using a fog spray without damaging
the surface.
Surfaces to be rubbed shall be kept moist after forms are removed and curing shall
commence immediately following the first rub.
Top surfaces of bridge decks shall be cured using the liquid membrane curing
compound method combined with the water method. Apply Liquid membrane curing
compound shall be applied immediately after finishing.
The water cure shall be applied within 4 hours after finishing. All concrete shall be
cured uninterrupted for at least 7 days.
If pozzolan is in excess of 10 percent by mass of the Portland cement is used in the
mix, the concrete shall be cured uninterrupted for at least 10 days.
(b) Forms inplace method

For formed surfaces, the forms in place shall be left without loosening.

If forms are removed during the curing period to facilitate rubbing, only strip forms
from those areas able to be rubbed during the same shift. During rubbing, the surface
of the exposed concrete shall be kept moist. After the rubbing is complete, curing
process shall be continued using the water method or by applying a clear curing
compound for the remainder of the curing period.
(c) Water method

The concrete surface shall be kept continuously wet by ponding, spraying, or covering
with material that is kept continuously and thoroughly wet.
Covering material may consist of cotton mats, multiple layers of burlap, or other
approved material that does not discolor or otherwise damage the concrete.
The covering material shall be covered with a waterproof sheet material that prevents
moisture loss from the concrete. Adjacent sheets shall be lapped at least 150mm and
tightly sealed all seams with pressure sensitive tape, mastic, glue, or other approved
methods and all material shall be secured so that wind will not displace it.
Sheets that are broken or damaged shall be immediately repaired.
(d) Liquid membrane curing compound method

Liquid membrane method shall not be used on surfaces to receive a rubbed finish.
Liquid membrane shall be used construction joint surfaces only if the compound is
removed by sandblasting before placement of concrete against the joint.
Type 2, white pigmented, liquid membrane according to AASHTO shall be used only
on the top surfaces of bridge decks or on surfaces not exposed to view in the
completed work and Type 1 or 1-D clear curing compounds on other surfaces.
Membrane curing solutions containing pigments shall be mixed before use and shall
be continuously agitated during application and the equipment shall be capable of
producing a fine spray.
Curing compound shall be applied at a minimum rate of 3 liters per 10 square meters
in one or two uniform applications. If the solution is applied in 2 applications, the first
application shall be followed with the second application within 30 minutes and shall
be applied at right angles to the first application.
If the membrane is damaged by rain or other means during the curing period, a new
coat shall be immediately applied over the damaged areas.
(e) Steam curing (precast units)

The method of curing adopted shall be subject to the Engineer's approval and shall not
cause staining, contamination, or marring of the surface of the concrete.
The curing period shall be continuous for at least 5 days for concrete made from
Portland cement, at least 2 days for that made with rapid hardening Portland cement.
When the temperature of concrete falls below 5o C these minimum-curing periods
shall be extended by the period during which the temperature of the concrete was
below 5o C.
When using sliding formwork the concrete shall be protected against the weather and
rapid drying out by means of a 4 m wide skirt attached to the lower perimeter of the

formwork and hanging over the working platform. The skirt shall consist of Hessian in
summer months but in winter months, canvass or other suitable material shall be used.
The skirt shall be weighted at the bottom to prevent it flapping around in windy
conditions.
Curing of the concrete shall be accomplished by means of a fog spray to keep it wet
continuously for the period stated above or until a curing compound is applied.
Wetting of the concrete shall be by means of a fixed spray bar along the full length of
the sliding formwork. The spray bar shall be connected to a suitable high pressure
water supply. Wetting shall be discontinued when the ambient air temperature drops
below 5o C and care shall be exercised to ensure that the water does not erode the
fresh concrete surface.
8411 PIPES AND CONDUITS

No pipes and conduits other than those shown on the drawings shall be embedded in
the concrete without the Engineer's approval.
The clear space between such pipes and any reinforcement shall be at least 40 mm or
the maximum size of the aggregate plus 5 mm whichever is the greater. The amount of
concrete cover over pipes and fittings shall be at least 25 mm.
The ends of all ferrules used for bracing formwork shall be neatly finished off to the
details shown on the Drawings. Where no details are given on the Drawings ferrules
shall be cut back and the holes filled in with mortar and finished off flush with the
concrete surface.
8412 PRECAST CONCRETE

This clause applied to all reinforced and prestressed concrete members other than
precast concrete piles, culverts and pipes in as far as they are dealt with separately
elsewhere in the Specifications.
All precast members shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements
specified for cast in situ members in as far as these requirements are relevant. In
addition the following shall apply:
The Contractor shall take all necessary safety measures and precautions during the
handling and erection of precast members and for the stability of members as
positioned prior to casting-in.
Where concrete members are precast off site the manufacturer shall keep, and make
available to the Engineer, full records of all concrete mixes and strength tests
pertaining to the members cast. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in advance of
the casting dates to arrange for inspection and testing of precast members.
For the purpose of identification all members shall be marked with paint in neat
lettering with the member number shown on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer
and an identification number relating to the manufacturing records, letters etc. shall be
so positioned as not to be visible when the member is placed in its final position in the
completed structure.
All precast members that have been chipped, cracked, warped or otherwise damaged
to the extent that such damage will in the opinion of the Engineer prejudice the

appearance, function or structural integrity of the members shall be rejected or where

so allowed, repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Item 84.01 Cast in situ concrete

(a) (Class of concrete and part of structure or use indicated) .................. cubic meter(m3)
(b) Etc for other classes of concrete and other uses or parts of the structure
The unit of measurement for cast in situ concrete shall be the cubic meter of concrete
in place.
Quantities shall be calculated from the dimensions shown on the drawings or as
authorized. No deduction in volume measured for payment shall be made for the
volume of any reinforcing steel, inserts and pipes or conduits up to 150 mm in
diameter embedded in the concrete.
materials, storing the materials, providing all plant, mixing, transporting, placing and
compacting the concrete, forming the inserts, construction joints (except mandatory
construction joints), and contraction joints, curing and protecting the concrete,
repairing defective surfaces, and finishing the concrete surfaces as specified. Payment
shall distinguish between the different classes of concrete.
Item 84.02 Manufacturing pre-cast concrete members ..................................................No

(description of member with reference to drawing)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of complete members or elements of
each type and size in position in the works.
The tendered rate for each pre-cast member shall include full compensation for
concrete work, formwork, curing and safeguarding, and for reinforcing steel .
Item 84.03 Transporting and erecting pre-cast concrete members................................No

(description of member and approximate mass to be given)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of pre-cast concrete members of each
type and size placed into position.
The tendered rate for each pre-cast member shall include full compensation for all
work, costs and equipment required for transporting, stacking, erecting and installing
the pre-cast concrete member in its final position, complete as specified.
Item 84.04 Epoxy bonding of new concrete surfaces to old .................. Square meter(m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square meter of new concrete surface bonded to
old by means of an approved epoxy bonding agent as set out in the specifications.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for preparing the surfaces and for
furnishing and applying the bonding agent, and for chamfering the concrete on visible
joints, complete as shown on the drawings.
Item 84.05 Demolishing existing concrete

(a) Plain concrete (Member indicated) ....................................................cubic meter (m3)

(b) Reinforced concrete (Member indicated)............................................ cubic meter(m3)

The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of plain or reinforced concrete
demolished for each member or portion thereof scheduled separately in the schedule
of quantities.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all labor, plant and equipment
required to demolish the existing concrete and disposal of the product of the
demolition to a borrow pit within a free-haul distance of 1 km. The tendered rate shall
also include full compensation for any necessary measures to ensure no debris falls
into rivers and for any debris that has fallen into rivers to be recovered.

DIVISION 8500 : TIMBER STRUCTURES
8501 SCOPE
This work consists of furnishing, preparing, erecting, and painting of structural timber
of the stress values and sizes. It also includes all required yard lumber and hardware of
the sizes and grade specified, all in accordance with the design shown on the plans or
as directed by the Engineer.
8502 MATERIAL FOR TIMBER STRUCTURES
(a) Untreated Structural Timber and Lumber

Structural timber, lumber, and piling shall conform to AASHTO M 168.
No boxed-heart pieces of Douglas fir or redwood shall be used in outside stringers,
floor beams, caps, posts, sills, or rail posts. Boxed-heart pieces are defined as timber
so sawed that at any point in the length of a sawed piece the pith lies entirely inside
the four faces.
(b) Treated Structural Timber and Lumber

This work shall conform to Sub-clause 8502(a) above and make all dimensional cuts
and incisions in the wood before pressure treatment.
The wood shall be treated according to AASHTO M 133.
When wood is to be painted, the contractor shall use water borne ammoniacal copper
arsenate or chromated copper arsenate preservative.
(c) Hardware
Machine bolts, drift bolts and dowels may be medium steel. Washers shall be
fabricated from gray iron or malleable iron castings unless structural washers are
specified.
Bolts and nuts shall be square headed and unless otherwise stated nails shall be cut or
round nails of standard form. Spikes shall be cut or round, as specified.
All hardware shall be galvanized according to AASHTO M 232 or cadmium plates all
hardware according to ASTM B 766 class 12, type III.
Ring or shear plate timber connectors shall be of approved design and made of no
corrosive metal.
(d) Yard lumber

Yard lumber shall be of the kinds and grade called for on the plans. Round poles and
posts shall be of the kinds indicated on the plans.

(e) Structural Shapes, Rods, and plates

All structural shapes, rods, and plates shall be of structural steel or wrought iron, as
specified or indicated on the plans, meeting the requirements prescribed in Division
8300 of this specification.
No welds will be permitted in truss rods, or in main members of trusses or girders.
(f) Paint
Paint for Timber structures shall conform to :
Primer. FSS TT-P-25, TT-P-96D, or TT-P-001984.
Paint. FSS TT-P-102 class A, TT-P-96D, TT-P-102F, or TT-P 19D.
The paint shall be white unless otherwise specified.
(g) Preservative Treatment of Timber
(i) Description
Treated timber shall be structural timber, lumber and piling conforming to the
requirements of Sub-clause 8502(c).
Preservative treatment for timber, lumber, guardrail posts and piling shall be in
accordance with the following specifications. The material to be treated will normally
be inspected prior to treatment and the inspection of the treatment process will be
made while the process is actually taking place.
(ii) Treating plant Equipment

Plants for treating lumber and timber shall be equipped with thermometers and gages
necessary to indicate and record accurately the conditions at all stages of treatment,
and all equipment shall be maintained in a condition satisfactory to the Engineer.
The apparatus and chemicals necessary for making the analyses and tests required by
the Engineer shall be provided by the Contractor.
(iii) Preservatives
The Preservatives to be used shall conform to the following specifications:

PRESERVATIVES SPECIFICATIONS
Creosote AWPA P 1
Creosote-Coal Tar solution AWPA P 2
Creosote-Petroleum solution AWPA P 3
Petroleum for blending with Creosote AWPA P 4

Pentachlorophenol AWPA P 8
Solvents used in Pentachlorophenol AWPA P 9
solutions
Acid copper chromate AWPA P5
Ammoniacal copper Arsenite AWPA P5
Chromated copper Arsenite AWPA P5
Chromated Zinc chloride AWPA P5
Flour Chromed Arsenate Phenol AWPA P5
Tests of the Preservatives shall be made in accordance with AASHTO M 133 for the
particular preservative involved.
(a) General
Excavation and backfill for timber structures shall be performed in accordance with
Division 8100 of this specification.
The Contractor shall furnish the required structural lumber and timber of stress grade.
The ground under and in the vicinity of all stored material of stacks of weeds, rubbish,
or other objectionable material shall be cleared by the Contractor.
The bottom layer of material shall be placed at least 205 mm above the ground level.
Sufficient support shall be provided to prevent sagging.
Workmanship shall be first-class throughout. None but competent bridge carpenters
shall be employed and all framing shall be true and exact.
Unless otherwise specified, nails and spikes shall be driven with just sufficient force
to set the heads flush with the surface of the wood. Deep hammer marks in wood
surfaces shall be considered evidence of poor workmanship and sufficient cause for
removal of the workman responsible for them.
(b) Storage of Materials

All lumber and timber on the site of the work shall be stacked to prevent warping.
When required by the Engineer, it shall be protected from the weather by suitable
covering.
The materials shall not be covered with impervious membranes such as polyethylene
film during dry weather.
Individual wrappings shall be slitted full length or punctured on the lower side to
permit drainage of water.

Untreated Material shall be Open-stacked at least 310 mm above the ground surface
and so piled to shed water. The material shall be stacked in layers on spacers (stickers)
that extend across the full width of the stack to allow for free air circulation and all
stickers shall be aligned vertically and spaced at regular intervals.
Treated timber shall be close-stacked to shed water.
(c) Treated Timber

Treated timber shall be framed before treatment and shall be handled carefully without
dropping, breaking of outer fibers, or bruising or penetrating the surface with tools.
Cant dogs, hooks, or pike poles shall not be used.
In coastal waters, cutting or boring timber below the high-water mark shall be
avoided.
All cuts and abrasions in timber or lumber shall be treated with 3 brush coats of the
same type of preservative used in the original treatment.
Before driving bolts, all holes bored after treatment shall be impregnated with the
same preservative using equipment suitable for proper application of the preservative
and all unused holes shall be plugged with preservative treated plugs.
(d) Untreated Timber

In structures of untreated timber, the surfaces named below shall be coated thoroughly
with two coats of hot creosate oil or any preservative approved by the Engineer before
the timber is assembled:
Ends, tops, and all contact surfaces of posts, sills, and caps
Ends, joints, and contact surfaces of bracing and truss members
Surfaces of timber bumpers and the back faces of bulkheads
Other timber that will be in contact with earth
(e) Holes for Bolts, Dowels, Rods, and Lag Screws

All holes shall be bored before using preservative to treat the wood. Bore holes for
round drift bolts and dowels shall be bored 1.60 mm smaller in diameter than that of
the bolt or dowel to be used. The diameter of holes for square drift bolts or dowels
shall be equal to the side dimension of the bolt or dowel.
Holes for machine bolts shall be bored with a bit of the same diameter as that of the
bolt.
Holes for lag screws shall be bored with a bit not larger than the body of the screw at
the base of the thread and depth of lag screw boltholes shall be 26mm less than length
under screw head.
(f) Bolts and Washers

Washers of the size and type specified shall be used under all bolt heads or nuts in
contact with wood.
Cast-iron washers shall be used when the timber is in contact with the ground.

Cast-iron washers shall have a thickness equal to the diameter of the bolt, and the
diameter of the washer shall be four times its thickness. All nuts shall be checked or
burred effectively with a pointed tool after final tightening, to prevent turning.
(g) Countersinking
Countersinking of nuts and bolt heads shall be done wherever smooth faces are
required by the contract.
Recesses formed for countersinking, except in railings, shall be painted with an
approved preservative and, after bolts or screws are in place, the holes shall be filled
with hot pitch or other approved filler.
(h) Framing
Treated piles shall not be slabbed or trimmed for fitting sway or sash braces.
All gaps that occur between braces and piles shall be filled with treated blocks so that
the bracing is securely fastened to the piles
(i) Framing Bents

Mudsills shall be firmly and evenly bedded to solid bearing and tamped in place.
Concrete pedestals for the support of framed bents shall be finished carefully so that
sills or posts will bear evenly upon them.
Dowels for anchoring sills and posts shall be set when the concrete is cast and shall
project at least 154 mm above the tops of the pedestals.
Sills shall have true and even bearing on mudsills, piles, or pedestals. They shall be
driftbolted with bolts extending into the mud sills or piles for at least 154 mm. Where
possible, all earth shall be removed in contact with sills for free circulation of air
around the sills.
(j) Caps for all Bents

Timber caps shall be placed to obtain even and uniform bearing over the tops of the
supporting posts or piles with their ends in alignment.
All caps shall be secured with driftbolts and set approximately at the center of and
extending at least 230 mm into the posts or piles.
(k) Bracing
The ends of bracing shall be bolted through the pile, post, cap, or sill. Bracing at
intermediate interdivisions with posts or piles shall be bolted or spiked with wire or
boat spikes, as required. In all cases galvanized spikes shall be used in addition to
bolts.
All bracing shall be secured firmly against the pile or cap to which it is bolted.
Shims shall be provided and placed as necessary to prevent bending the bracing more
than 26 mm out of line when bracing bolts are tightened.
Shims shall not be used, where the space between the bracing and cap or pile is less
than 26 mm.

Where the space between the bracing and the cap or pile is 38.5 mm ± 13 mm, 2 ogee
washers shall be placed with their narrow faces together or other approved washers on
each bolt which passes through the space.
Where the space between the bracing and the cap or pile is over 51 mm, wooden
shims of the proper thickness shall be used. The wooden shims shall be fabricated
from white oak or from the same treated wood used in the structure. Built-up wooden
shims shall not be used. Wooden shims shall be made from a single piece of lumber
with the width not less than 102.5 mm and the length not less than the width of the
bracing measured along the cap or pile. Any treated member shall not be adzed,
trimmed, or cut to avoid the use of shims.
(l) Stringers
Size Stringers shall be sized at bearings and shall be placed in position so that knots
near edges will be in the top portions of the stringers.
Outside stringers may have butt joints with the ends cut on a taper, but interior
stringers shall be lapped to take bearing over the full width of the floor beam or cap at
each end.
The lapped ends of untreated stringers shall be separated by at least 13 mm for air
circulation and shall be securely fastened by drift - bolting where specified.
When stringers are 2 panels in length the joints shall be staggered.
Cross bridging between stringers shall be securely toe nailed with at least 2 nails in
each end.
All cross-bridging members shall be cut for a full bearing at each end against the sides
of the stringers.
Unless otherwise specified in the contract, cross bridging shall be placed at the center
of each span.
(m) Plank Floors

Use Plank shall be the grade specified and shall be surfaced on four sides (S4S).
Single-ply timber floors shall consist of a single thickness of planks supported on
stringers. The planks shall be laid heart side down with 6.4 mm space between them
for seasoned material and with tight joints for unseasoned material.
Each plank shall be securely spiked to each stringer. The planks shall be carefully
graded as to thickness and so laid that no 2 adjacent planks vary in thickness by more
than 1.6 mm.
Two-ply timber floors shall consist of 2 layers of flooring supported on stringers. The
lower layer shall be pressure- treated with creosote oil. The top layer may be laid
either diagonally or parallel to the centerline of roadway, as specified, and each floor
piece shall be securely fastened to the lower layer. Joints shall be staggered at least 0.9
meters. If the top layer is placed parallel to the centerline of the roadway, special care
shall be taken to securely fasten the ends of the flooring. The ends of top layer
members at each end of the structure shall be beveled.

(n) Transversely Nail-Laminated Decks

Pieces for laminated or strip floors shall have a nominal thickness of 51 mm
laminations, and shall be surfaced one edge hit or miss 3 mm scant (SIE-H or M 1/8
inch scant), and one side hit or miss 3 mm scant (SIS-H or M 1/8 inch scant).
The pieces shall be of the grade specified. They shall be placed on edge and at right
angles to the centerline of roadway. Each piece shall be spiked to the preceding piece
at each end and at approximately 461.5 mm intervals with the galvanized spikes
driven alternately near the top and bottom edges.
The spikes shall be of sufficient length to pass through 2 pieces and at least halfway
through the third piece. The size of spikes shall be as shown on the plans.
Where timber stringers are used, every other piece shall be toenailed to every other
stringer.
When steel stringers are used, they shall be securely attached to the pieces using
approved galvanized metal clips.
Pieces shall be of sufficient length to bear on at least 4 stringers. No splicing of pieces
between stringers will be allowed.
End joints on any one stringer shall be no closer than every third piece.
End joints in adjoining pieces shall be no closer than every second stringer.
(o) Wheel Guards and Railings

Wheel Guards and Railings shall be accurately framed in accordance with the plans
and erected true to line and grade.
Unless otherwise specified, wheel guards, rails, and posts shall be surfaced on four
sides (S4S).
Place Wheel guards shall be placed in Divisions not less than 3.60 meter in length.
All rails shall be squarely butt-joined at the posts and the rails shall break joints.
(p) Trusses
Trusses, when completed, shall show no irregularities of line.
Chords shall be straight and true from end to end in horizontal projection and, in
vertical projection, shall show a smooth, corded curve through panel points
conforming to the correct camber.
All bearing surfaces and joints shall fit accurately. Uneven or rough cuts at the points
of bearing shall be cause for rejection of the pieces containing the defect.
(q) Drains
Drains shall be provided where indicated on the plans.
Drains shall be constructed with galvanize iron linings and shall be arranged to
discharge free of the structure.

(r) Painting
Rails and rail posts shall be painted with three coats of white paint unless otherwise
specified on the plans.
Other parts of the structure shall be painted when so designated on the plans.
(s) Acceptance
Material for timber structures will be evaluated by visual inspection and Certification.
Furnish a production certification with each shipment of structural timber and lumber.
Construction of timber structures will be evaluated by Visual inspection and by
Measurement as given under the construction tolerances Division T8000 of this
specification.
Painting will be evaluated under Series 9000 of this specification.

Measure untreated and treated structural timber and lumber by the thousand meter
board measure (MBM) in the structure. Compute the quantities from nominal
dimensions and actual lengths; except for transversely nail laminated decks. Measure
transversely nail-laminated decks in place after dressing.
The accepted quantities, measured as provided above, will be paid at the contract price
per unit of measurement for the pay items listed below that are shown in the bid
schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Division.
Payment will be made under:
Item 85.01 Untreated structural timber and lumber

The unit of measurement shall be in MBM
Item 85.02 Treated structural timber and lumber

The unit of measurement shall be in MBM

DIVISION 8600: PRESTRESSING
8601 SCOPE
This Division covers the specification of materials, equipment and methods for the
pre-stressing of structural concrete elements by means of pre-tensioning and post-
tensioning in accordance with the dimensions and details shown in the Contract.
8602 MATERIALS
(a) General
All materials and prestressing systems used in the prestressing of structural concrete
members shall be subject to approval.
(b) Prestressing steel
(i) General
The type of prestressing steel shall be designated in accordance with the requirements
of sub-clauses 8602 5(b)(ii) and (iii) respectively.
The contractor shall keep proper records of all material analyses and test certificates
for the batches of prestressing steel used in the works.
Where required by the Engineer, the contractor shall produce certificates from
recognized testing authorities certifying compliance of the prestressing steel with the
Where prestressing steel is available in weld-free lengths (production lengths) and
lengths containing welds (standard lengths), the batches delivered at the site shall be
clearly labeled for identifications purposes.
In no circumstances shall prestressing steel after manufacture be subjected to heat
treatment other than provided for in these specifications
(ii) Bars
Cold-worked high-tensile alloy steel bars for prestressed concrete shall comply at least
with the requirements of BS 4486.
The type of prestressing steel shall be indicated in accordance with the requirements
of clause 4.2 of BS 4486, e g BS 4486-RR-32-1230 for 32 mm diameter ribbed bar
with a nominal tensile strength of 1 230 MPa.
(iii) Wires and seven-wire steel strand

Steel wire and seven-wire steel strand for prestressed concrete shall comply at least
with the requirements of BS 5896.
The type of prestressing steel shall be indicated in accordance with the requirements
of clauses 14 and 20 of BS 5896 for wire and strands respectively, e g:
BS 5896/2 wire 1770-7-PE-relax 1 for a 7 mm nominal diameter straightened smooth
wire of class I relaxation with a nominal tensile strength of 1 770 MPa; and BS 5896/3

superstrand 1860-12.9-relax 2 for a 12.9 mm nominal diameter seven-wire superstrand

of class 2 relaxation with a nominal tensile strength of 1 860 MPa.
(iv) Straightness
Prestressing bars delivered at the site shall be straight. Only small adjustments for
straightness may be made, which shall be done by hand on the site at a temperature
above 5oC and under the supervision of the engineer. Where heating of the bars is
required, this shall be by means of steam or hot water. Bars bent in the threaded
portion shall not be used.
Prestressing wire and strand shall be supplied in coils with a sufficiently large
diameter to ensure that the wire and strand will pay off straight.
(v) Surface condition

Prestressing steel shall be clean, free from faults or defects, and without any harmful
films and matter, which may impair adhesion to the grout of concrete. A film of rust is
not necessarily harmful and may improve the bond. It may, however, increase the
friction between the tendon and duct.
The depth of imperfections or pits on the surface of prestressing steel shall not exceed
0.1 mm for wire with a diameter up to and including 8 mm, or 0.2 mm for bars or wire
with a diameter exceeding 8 mm.
Tendons may be cleaned by wire brushing or by passing through a pressure box
containing carborundum powder. Solvent solutions shall not be used for cleaning
without the approval of the engineer.
Prestressing steel shall be delivered at the site suitably protected against damage and
corrosion. Such protection or the use of a corrosion inhibitor where allowed by the
Engineer, shall not have any deleterious effect on the steel or concrete or impair the
bond between the two.
(vi) Cutting of Pre-stressing Tendons

All cutting of tendons shall be carried out using either:
A high-speed abrasive cutting disc or friction saw used at not less than one diameter
from the anchor, or any other mechanical method approved by the Engineer.
An oxyacetylene cutting flame, using excess oxygen to ensure a cutting rather than a
melting action used not less than 75mm from the anchor, whilst the temperature of the
tendon adjacent to the anchor shall not be greater than 200oC. Neither the flame nor
splashes from the cutting operation shall come into contact with either the anchorages
or tendons.
(vii) Galvanising
Galvanised prestressing steel shall not be used unless specified.
In no circumstances shall prestressing steel be subjected to galvanising after
manufacture.
(viii) Welds
Prestressing steel used in structural prestressed concrete shall be weld-free.

Where the steel is supplied in standard lengths, the welds shall be cut out and
delivered to the Engineer.
(c) Anchorages and couplers

Anchorages and couplers to be used in prestressed concrete shall comply with the
requirements of BS 4447 and shall be of a proved and approved type, constructed
from durable material completely free from imperfections and shall not damage,
distort or kink the prestressing steel in a manner as will result in ultimate tensile
strength reduction. They shall resist, without failure and/or excessive deformation or
relaxation of the force in the tendons, the full ultimate tensile strength of the tendons.
The characteristic value for anchorages and couplers, determined in accordance with
BS 4447, shall not be less than 90%.
The anchorages shall effectively distribute the force in the tendon to the structural
member, and the resulting local stresses and strains in the member shall be so limited
as to prevent damage. Unless otherwise approved by the engineer, all anchorages and
couplers shall be provided with anchorage reinforcement.
Wedges and the insides of barrels or cones shall be clean to allow the free movement
and seating of the wedges inside the taper.
The threads of bars, nuts, anchorages and couplers shall be suitably protected against
damage and corrosion. The protection shall be removed at the last moment and the
threads properly lubricated before use.
(d) Sheaths
Sheaths shall be grout-tight and of such material and configuration that bond forces
can be transferred from the grout to the surrounding concrete.
The properties of the sheath material shall be such that no corrosion attack of the
prestressing steel will be induced.
The sheath shall be sufficiently flexible to accept the required curvature without
kinking, and strong enough to retain its cross-section and alignment and to resist
damage on account of handling, transporting, tying and contact with vibrators during
concreting.
Unless otherwise approved by the engineer, the thickness of the metal of steel sheaths
shall not be less than 0.4 mm.
Metal sheathing shall be delivered at the site suitably protected against damage and
corrosion. At the time of Incorporation into the structural member, the sheathing shall
be free from loose mill scale, loose rust, lubricants and harmful matter.
Galvanised sheathing shall not be used unless specified.
Unless otherwise specified, the internal diameter of the sheath shall be at least 10 mm
greater than the diameter of the tendon.
For vertical tendons and where tendons are to be drawn into cast-in sheaths, the cross-
sectional duct area shall be at least three times the cross-sectional area of the tendon.

(e) Cable supports

Supports of reinforcing steel or structural steel suitably braced to prevent buckling
under load shall be used to support the cables.
The cable saddles shall be rigid and secured in position by welding or by equivalent
mechanical means to resist both gravitational and buoyancy forces.
Normal web reinforcement shall not be utilised to support cables.
Saddles for external cables shall be of special design and material to ensure low
friction and to prevent the tendon or parts thereof from grooving the surface. The
saddle plates shall be curved to the requisite radius to prevent the tendon or part
thereof from bearing on the end of the plate and shall incorporate features to ensure
that individual bars, wires and strands are seated separately.
(f) Positioning of Tendons and Duct Formers for Pre-stressing Tendons

Tendons and duct formers shall be accurately located and maintained in position both
vertically and horizontally as described in the Contract. Unless otherwise described in
the Contract the tolerance in the location of the centerline of sheath or duct shall be ±
5mm.
Where tendons are described in the Contract as being debonded from the concrete,
they shall be covered with sleeves approved by the Engineer. The ends of the sleeves
shall be taped around the tendon to prevent the ingress of grout.
(g) Tendon spacers

Tendon spacers used inside the ducts to separate individual bars, wires or strands of
the tendon shall be of a proved and approved type and manufactured from material
which will not induce corrosion of the prestressing steel.
(h) Grout
(i) Materials
In addition to the requirements of sub-clause 8402 (d) of these specifications, water
shall not contain more than 500 mg of Cl ions per ltre of water.
Only ordinary Portland cement that complies with the requirements of AASHTO M-
85 or blended hydraulic cement complying with the requirements of AASHTO M-240
shall be used.
The temperature of the cement shall be less than 40oC, and the cement shall be stored
In accordance with the requirements of sub-clause 8403(a) of these specifications.
Fine aggregate shall comply with the requirements of sub-clause 8402(c)(ii) of these
specifications.
The use of fine aggregate shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall be
restricted to grout for ducts with a diameter exceeding 150 mm. The aggregate
content in the grout shall not exceed 30% of the mass of the cement.
The use of admixtures shall be subject to tests having shown that their use improves
the properties of the grout, e g by increasing workability, reducing bleeding,
entraining air, or expanding the grout.

Admixtures shall be free from any product liable to damage the steel or the grout
itself, such as halides, nitrates, sulphides, sulphates, etc. The quantity of admixture to
be used shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
(ii) Properties of the grout

The mixed grout shall have the following properties:
The Cl ions content shall not exceed 750 mg per liter.
The viscosity of the grout measured in accordance with Division 10100 of these
specifications, for horizontal cables shall be 500 to 2 500 cP and for vertical cables
400 to 1 500 cP. The viscosity of the grout, 20 minutes after mixing, shall not exceed
2 500 cP and 1 500 cP for horizontal and vertical cables respectively,
Bleeding at 20 0 C measured in accordance with Division 10100 of these specifications, shall
not exceed 2% by volume 3 hours after the grout has been mixed, and the maximum
bleeding shall not exceed 4%. In addition, the separated (bleed) water must be
reabsorbed after 24 hours.
The cube compressive strength of 100 mm cubes made of the grout and cured in a
moist atmosphere for the first 24 hours and then in water at 20 0 C shall exceed 20
MPa at 7 days.
(i) Protecting agents for unbonded tendons

The material used for permanent protection of unbonded tendons shall have the
following properties:
It shall remain free from cracks and shall not become brittle or fluid within the
temperature range of -20oC to 70o C.
It shall be chemically stable for the entire life of the structure.
It shall be non-reactive with the surrounding materials, i.e. concrete, tendons,
wrapping or sheathing.
It shall be non-corrosive or corrosion inhibiting.
It shall be impervious to moisture shall be sufficiently tough to withstand the abrasion
caused when a tendon, precoated with the material, is drawn into the sheath.
It shall have no appreciable shrinkage or excessive volume increase.
It shall have a suitable viscosity at ambient temperature or require only moderate
preheating to permit injection
(j) Testing
Prestressing steel, anchorages and couplers, and grout shall be tested in accordance
with the requirements of Division 10100 of these specifications.
Testing shall be carried out at the frequencies as directed by the engineer.

(a) Equipment
(i) General
All equipment used shall be in a good working order and properly maintained.
(ii) Tensioning and measuring equipment

Tensioning and measuring equipment shall be such that the tendon force can be
established to an accuracy of ± 2% during any stage of the tensioning operation.
Unless otherwise authorised by the Engineer, the tensioning equipment shall be power
driven and capable of gradually applying a controlled total force without inducing
dangerous secondary stresses in the tendon, anchorage or concrete.
The force in the tendon during tensioning shall be measured by a direct-reading
dynamometer (load cell type) or obtained direct from pressure gauges fitted in the
hydraulic system to determine the pressure in the jacks.
Pressure gauges shall have concentric scale dials, which comply with the requirements
of BS 1780. The dials shall not be less than 150 mm in diameter and the gauges shall
be used within the range of 50 - 90% of their full capacity at maximum service
pressure.
When pressure gauges not using glycerine are used, a snubber or similar device shall
be fitted to protect the gauge against any sudden release of pressure. Provision shall
also be made for T-connections for the attachment, when required, of supplementary
control gauges.
Only self-sealing connections shall be used in the hydraulic circuit. Where the
pressure input pipe is connected to the jack, a pipe rupture valve shall be installed in
the circuit.
Tensioning equipment shall be calibrated before the tensioning operation and
thereafter at frequent intervals, as directed by the engineer, with a master gauge or
proving ring, and the engineer shall be furnished with a calibration chart. The load-
measuring devices shall be calibrated to an accuracy of ± 2%.
The extension of tendons shall be measured to an accuracy of ± 2% or ± 2 mm,
whichever is the more accurate, and pull-in and release to an accuracy of ± 2 mm.
(iii) Grouting equipment

(1) Mixer
Mechanically operated mixers only, of a type capable of producing high local
turbulences while imparting only a slow motion to the body of the grout shall be used.
The mixer shall be equipped with a screen with openings not exceeding 1 mm and
shall be capable of consistently producing grout with a colloidal consistency.
(2) Agitator
Where the capacity of the mixer is insufficient to fill the duct completely with grout,
an agitator shall be used.
Mechanical agitators only shall be used, which are capable of maintaining the
colloidal condition of the grout fill during the storing and injection processes.

The grout shall be delivered at the structure from the agitator, and the system shall
make provision for recirculating the grout from the pump back to the agitator.
(3) Injection equipment
The pump shall be of the positive displacement type (piston, screw or similar type),
capable of exerting a constant pressure of at least 10 bars on completely grouted
cables and shall incorporate a safety device for preventing the build-up of pressure
above 20 bars.
The pump shall be fitted with a pressure gauge and a valve, which can be locked-off
without loss of pressure in the cable.
The pump shall be capable of delivering grout at a speed as will produce a speed of
the grout in the cable of between 6 and 12 m per min.
All connections in the pipes and between the pipe and the cable shall be airtight. Only
bayonet, threaded, or similar types of connectors shall be used.
(b) Technical Data

The following technical data for pre-tensioned and post-tensioned structural members
required for the contract will be furnished on the drawings:
(i) Tendon alignment

A diagram showing the alignment of each tendon or group of tendons in both the
horizontal and vertical planes, together with the horizontal and vertical coordinates,
and curve equations of the centroid of the tendon (s), as may be relevant.
(ii) Tendon system

The design is based on the system shown on the drawings, but the contractor may use
any suitable system, which will meet all the specified requirements, subject to
approval by the Engineer.
(iii) Tensioning the tendons

Full particulars regarding the partial tensioning of the tendons, the stage during which
the tendons shall be tensioned, and the sequence of tensioning to be followed.
(iv) Tensioning force

The maximum tensioning force and the effective force at the live anchorages, after
transfer, as well as the corresponding stress level in the prestressing steel, for each
tendon or group of tendons. The forces will be given in MN units, and the stress
levels will be expressed as a percentage of the characteristic strength.
(v) Extension
The extension per tendon or group of tendons under the maximum tensioning force,
together with the modulus of elasticity (E) on which it has been based. The release to
be attained at each live anchorage as well as the pull-in for which provision has been
made.
The contractor shall show on his drawings the expected extension based on the actual
modulus of elasticity of the strand as well as the expected wedge pull-in and any
provision for shimming.

(vi) Prestressing losses in tendons

The losses allowed for in the design from the causes listed below will be given as
follows:
(1) Friction loss
The formula used for determining the tendon/duct friction loss together with the
values adopted for the friction coefficient (u) caused by curvature, and the wobble
factor (k) caused by unintentional variation from the specified alignment.
(2) Elastic deformation of concrete
The elastic factor, which, when multiplied by the compressive stress in the concrete
adjacent to the tendon, will give the loss caused by the deformation of the concrete.
(3) Creep of the concrete
The creep factor, which, when multiplied by the compressive stress in the concrete
adjacent to the tendon, will give the loss caused by the creep of the concrete.
(4) Shrinkage of the concrete
The stress loss in MPa caused by the shrinkage of the concrete.
(5) Relaxation of prestressing steel
The stress loss in MPa at a stress level of 70% of the characteristic strength of the
prestressing steel caused by the relaxation of the prestressing steel.
(vii) Anchorages
The positions where loop or fan-type dead-end anchorage may be used,
(viii) Bursting reinforcement

The bursting reinforcement for the prestressing system on which the design is based.
(ix) Precamber
The precamber at intervals not exceeding 0.25 times the span length.
(x) Compressive strength of the concrete during transfer

The compressive strength to be attained by the concrete in the relevant member before
transfer may be effected.
(c) Prestressing System

The use of all prestressing systems will be subject to approval by the engineer.
Within one month of the tender having been awarded, or within a period agreed on
with the engineer, the contractor shall submit full details regarding the prestressing
system(s), materials and equipment he intends using, as well as regarding the methods
he proposed to adopt in the prestressing and related operations.
The engineer, at his own discretion, may call for further information in the form of
detailed drawings, proof of successful previous use, performance certificates from an
approved independent testing authority, and calculations substantiating the adequacy
of the system. The contractor shall furnish such information within 2 weeks of being
called upon to do so or within a period agreed on with the Engineer.

If, after investigating all the information, the engineer is not satisfied that the
prestressing of the structural member can be carried out satisfactorily with the
prestressing system offered by the contractor, the engineer reserves to himself the
right to order the contractor to use any system which is suited to the work and which
is readily available to the contractor.
Only minor alterations to the concrete dimensions shown on the drawings will be
considered in order to accommodate the prestressing system finally selected. Major
alterations occasioned by the prestressing system offered by the contractor and which
is at variance with the tendon system specified in sub-clause 8603 B (b) shall be
treated as alternative designs and shall be dealt as per the contract.
(d) Drawings Prepared By the Contractor

All drawings prepared by the contractor and submitted to the engineer for
consideration shall comply with the requirements of the Contract.
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer at least 2 months before he intends
commencing with the prestressing work, drawings detailing the layout and alignment
for the individual tendons, the cable supports, modifications to the bursting and other
reinforcement, anchorage recesses, tensioning sequence, tensioning loads and
extensions, as well as requirements for controlling the tensioning operations.
For the prestressing system finally selected, the technical data, which are at variance
with the information given on the drawings, shall be shown on the drawings.
Each tendon shall be separately numbered for identification.
Where required, the contractor shall submit calculations in respect of the variation of
the tendon force along the length of the tendon, the expected extension and the
bursting forces.
After approval by the Engineer of the drawings and calculations prepared by the
contractor, no departure shall be permitted from the forces, stresses and extensions
shown thereon, without authorization by the Engineer.
The prestressing work shall not be commenced before the relevant drawings have
been accepted by the Engineer.
(e) Precasting
(i) Casting yard on the site

Subject to approval by the engineer, precast work may be done at any location
selected by the contractor.
Before the casting yard is established, the contractor shall submit plans to the
Engineer, which demarcate the site and detail the layout of the works, together with a
flow diagram of the construction stages and storage.
(ii) Manufacture off the site

The contractor shall notify the engineer in advance of the dates when tensioning of
tendons, casting of members and transfer, will be undertaken.

Within 7 days of transfer, the contractor shall submit to the Engineer a certificate
giving the tendon force(s) and extension(s) attained as well as records of the cube
crushing strength and age of concrete at transfer.
Test results relating to all aspects of the work shall be sent to the Engineer
immediately upon their becoming available.
Where the engineer requires tests to be conducted on completed members, no member
to which the tests relate shall be dispatched to the site until the tests have been
satisfactorily completed and the members accepted by the Engineer.
(iii) Manufacture
Before work is commenced, details of the manufacture, curing and phasing of the
work shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. After approval no changes shall
be made to the methods or systems without approval by the Engineer.
The contractor shall ensure that the specified precamber is incorporated in the
formwork. The magnitude of the precamber shown on the drawings shall be subject to
variation depending on the contractor's construction programme, and the contractor
shall, before manufacture, ascertain in writing from the Engineer, the increase or
decrease in precamber. This procedure shall also apply to the cases where no
precamber has been specified.
Lifting and supporting the precast members shall be made only at the points marked
and provided on the members.
Precast members which have not been fully tensioned or fully stage-tensioned or
which have ungrouted tensioned tendons shall not be handled without authorization by
the Engineer.
Where members with ungrouted tensioned tendons are handled, control shall be
exercised to guard against possible slip of the tendon at the anchorage.
Prestressed precast concrete members shall also comply with the requirements of
clause 8412 of these specifications.
(f) Pre-Tensioning
During the period between tensioning and transfer, the force in the tendon shall be
fully maintained by some positive means. At transfer, detensioning shall take place
slowly to minimize any shock, which could adversely affect the transmission length of
the tendon.
In the long-line method of pre-tensioning, sufficient locator plates shall be distributed
throughout the length of the bed to ensure that the straight tendons are maintained in
their proper position during concreting. Where a number of units are manufactured in
line, they shall be free to slide in the direction of their length so as to permit transfer
of the tendon force to the concrete along the entire line.
In the individual-mould system, the moulds shall be sufficiently rigid to provide the
reaction to the tendon force without distortion.
Where possible, the mechanism for holding clown or holding up deflected tendons
shall ensure that the part in contact with the tendon will be free to move in the line of
the tendon so that friction losses are eliminated. If, however, a system is used which
develops a frictional force, this force shall be determined by test and due allowance
made therefore.

For single tendons, the deflector in contact with the tendon shall have a radius of not
less than 5 times the tendon diameter for wire, or 10 times the tendon diameter for a
strand, and the total angle of deflection shall not exceed 15o.
Transfer of the tendon force to the concrete shall be effected in conjunction with the
release of hold-down and hold-up forces in accordance with an approved method.
Transfer shall not be effected until compressive-strength tests on the concrete show
that the concrete of the particular member has attained a compressive strength of at
least the compressive strength shown on the drawings.
The transmission length is affected by the concrete strength, and the necessary
modification for the concrete strength at transfer shall be made in conjunction with the
Engineer.
The tendons shall be cut off flush with the end of the member and the exposed ends
covered with a heavy coat of approved bituminous material or epoxy resin. The
cutting of the prestressing steel shall be performed with-4 high-speed abrasive cutting
wheel. Flame cutting will not be permitted.
(g) Post-Tensioning
(i) Storage, handling and protection

During storage, transit, and construction after installation the sheaths, prestressing
steel, anchorages and couplers shall be protected against corrosion, damage or
permanent deformation. The manner and extent of protection required will depend on
the environmental factors and the length of time before permanent corrosion
protection is applied, and shall be to the satisfaction of the engineer. Under severe
corrosive conditions in coastal, damp and wet areas and under aggressive conditions
the materials shall be stored in weatherproof sheds.
All materials shall be stored clear of the ground and while in storage shall not be
exposed to the weather.
When prestressing steel has been stored for a prolonged period and there is evidence
of its deterioration, the contractor may be called on to prove by tests that the quality of
the steel has not been significantly impaired and that the prestressing steel still
complies with the provisions of these specifications.
Suitable protection shall be provided to the threaded ends of bars.
After fabrication, the cable ends shall be covered with protective wrapping to prevent
the ingress of moisture into the duct.
When the tendon is to be left untensioned for a prolonged period after installation,
precautions shall be taken to protect the tendon against corrosion.
Corrosion inhibitors, oils or similar materials used as lubrication or to provide
temporary protection shall be such that they can be completely removed before
permanent protection is effected.
(ii) Fabrication
All cutting of prestressing steel shall be performed with a high-speed abrasive cutting
wheel or by a method approved by the engineer. Flame cutting will not be permitted.
Care shall be taken to prevent the prestressing steel or anchorages from coming into
contact with splashes from flame-cutting or welding processes in the vicinity.
Where possible, all bars, wires or strands tensioned in one operation shall be taken
from the same parcel of prestressing steel.
The tendon or cable shall be labelled to show the tendon or cable number, as well as
identify from which parcel the steel has been taken.
Where bars, wires or strands in a tendon are not tensioned simultaneously, tendon
spacers shall be used in accordance with the recommendations for the prestressing
system or, in the absence thereof as directed by the Engineer.
Cables shall be fitted at both ends with pipes with a diameter of at least 10 mm for the
injection of grout or protection agents. The ends of the injection pipes shall be fitted
with a clamp, valve or device capable of withstanding a pressure of at least 15 bars
without loss of grout or protection agent.
Vent pipes with a diameter of at least 25 mm shall be provided in the duct at every
high point, change of sheath cross-section and at such intermediate positions as may
be shown on the drawings or required by the engineer. The vent pipes shall extend to
at least 500 mm above the concrete and shall comply with the requirements for
injection pipes.
Connections to, and joints in sheaths shall be made grout-tight by using special
sheathing couplings and taping. With bonded cables, the length of taping shall not
exceed six sheath diameters.
Where over sleeves are used, equal overlaps shall be provided over each length of
sheathing. Joints in adjacent sheaths shall be spaced at least 300 mm apart.
(iii) Installation
The installation of tendons shall not commence until the requirements of clause
8603(d) have been complied with.
The cable, sheath or extractable core shall be accurately installed to the specified
alignment and securely held in position both vertically and horizontally at intervals
appropriate to its rigidity and so as not to be displaced during concreting, either by the
weight of the concrete or by buoyancy.
The spacing of the cable supports shall furthermore ensure that the tendon can be
installed to a smooth alignment without kinks and within the tolerance specified in
sub-clause T8000(g)(i).
Cable sheaths shall be supported and held in position by means of separate reinforcing
steel supports with a diameter of not less than 16 mm. The transverse bars must be
welded to the vertical bars or must rest on lugs welded to the vertical bars. The
spacing of the vertical supports shall not exceed 1 m.
Extractable cores shall not be coated with release agent unless approved by the
Engineer.
Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, the alignment of the tendon within a
distance of 1.0m from the live anchorage and/or coupler shall be straight, The tendon
axis shall be set perpendicular to the bearing surface of its anchorage and firmly
secured in position so as not to move during concreting.
External anchorages shall be seated on a thin mortar bedding to bear evenly on the
concrete bearing surface, and the tendon axis shall be perpendicular to the bearing
surface of the anchorage.

Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, the minimum concrete cover over the
outside surface of the sheath or cable support shall comply with the requirements of
sub-clause 8303(e), except that, for sheaths, the cover shall not be less than 50 mm.
The spacing of cables will depend on the size of the cable and shall be such that the
concrete can be properly placed and compacted.
Immediately before concreting, the contractor shall inspect the sheaths for grout-
tightness and shall seal all damaged and suspect sections.
External tendons shall be installed to the same standards and accuracy specified herein
for internal tendons.
The tendons shall be temporarily supported at regular intervals along the straight
length between saddles. The supports shall consist of rigidly constructed frames
secured to the concrete face.
(iv) Concrete strength

Full tensioning of all or some of the tendons shall not commence until the
compressive-strength of the concrete is 35 MPa or the strength shown on the
drawings, whichever is greater.
The compressive strength of the concrete shall be determined from cubes
manufactured and tested in accordance with sub-clause 10106(e) that have been cured
under the same conditions as the structural member which is to be prestressed. The
number of concrete cubes required for this purpose shall be as agreed on with the
Engineer.
Where initially all or some of the tendons are to be partially tensioned, tensioning
shall not commence before the concrete has attained the compressive strength
indicated on the drawings.
(v) Tensioning
(1) Preparation
Within 2 hours of the concrete having been placed, the contractor shall demonstrate
that sheaths are free from obstructions, that extractable cores can be removed and,
where the design permits, that all tendons are free to move in the ducts. All water in
the ducts shall then be expelled with compressed air and the cables sealed until
tensioning takes place.
Before tensioning is commenced, the side forms and other restraining elements shall
be released or removed to give the structural member the freedom to deform under the
induced force.
(2) Tensioning sequence
The sequence of tensioning to be followed shall be as shown on the drawings and/or
on drawings prepared by the contractor in terms of sub-clause 8603(d).
Where partial tensioning of tendons is required, the work shall be executed in
accordance with the details on the drawings or as specified.
(3) Assembling the equipment, and safety precautions
The tensioning and measuring equipment shall be assembled for tensioning in exactly
the same way as they are combined for calibration.

The contractor shall take all the necessary safety precautions to prevent accidents
caused by the malfunctioning or failure of any part of the equipment or material and
shall accept full responsibility for injury sustained by persons or damage to property
resulting therefrom.
(4) Friction
The Engineer may require the contractor to perform friction tests on designated
tendons and to revise the relevant theoretical extensions to compensate for the
discrepancy between the values adopted in the design and the test results. Payment
for these tests shall be borne by the contractor.
Where applicable, allowance shall be made in the tensioning force to compensate for
friction loss in the jack and in the anchorage.
(5) Tensioning
Tensioning shall be carried out under the supervision of a technician skilled in the use
of the prestressing system and equipment and the methods of tensioning to be adopted.
Tensioning shall not be commenced before the engineer has been advised of each
tensioning operation and has given his approval for the work to be started.
The technician and operators shall be supplied with a schedule listing the sequence of
tensioning the various tendons and a tensioning record sheet showing the theoretical
gauge readings, jacking forces, extensions, release and pull-in for each tensioning
operation. The record sheet shall furthermore provide room for entering the
corresponding information recorded and observations made during tensioning. A
graph of the tensioning force and/or gauge reading versus theoretical extensions shall,
where required, be appended to the record sheet and the actual extensions measured
for each load increment shall be plotted on the graph.
Copies of the completed record sheets and graphs shall be submitted to the Engineer
within 24 hours of each tensioning operation having been completed.
The contractor shall note that the extensions shall be regarded as an indirect
measurement of the tensioning force and shall serve as a control on the tensioning
force applied.
The protruding ends of all bars, wires and strands shall be clearly marked for the
accurate measurement of extension, release and pull-in.
Before tensioning is commenced on external tendons, a small load shall be applied to
each tendon, commencing with the uppermost tendon. The force shall be sufficient to
take up all slack and prevent entanglement of the tendons.
The jacking force shall be increased to approximately 5 to 10% of the final jacking
force to take up the tendon slack and to determine the zero Position for measuring the
extension and to check the gripping devices and the position and alignment of the
jacks. The load shall then be increased gradually to the full specified tensioning force
while intermediate gauge readings and extensions are recorded at regular intervals.
The final stage of tensioning shall be deemed to have been satisfactorily accomplished
when all the following requirements have been complied with:
The tendons have been tensioned to the required force.
The measured extension on individual tendons is within ± 6% of the theoretical
extensions.

The average variation between the measured and theoretical extensions of all the
tendons in a structural member is less than ± 3%.
The release and/or pull-in is within ± 2 mm of the theoretical values.
Where the above conditions are not met individually and collectively, the contractor
shall immediately advise the Engineer and obtain a ruling as to the procedure to be
followed.
In the event of the tendon friction being too high, the contractor may, subject to
approval by the Engineer, inject an approved lubricant into the sheath after first having
detensioned the tendon.
The cost of the remedial and corrective measures and of the release and retensioning
of tendons, which have been occasioned by failure of the operations to meet the above
requirements shall be for the contractor's account.
After the tensioning has been accepted by the Engineer, the contractor may cut off the
tendons behind the anchorage as described in sub-clause 8603(f).
(vi) Permanent Protection and bonding of tendons

(1) General
After tensioning, all tendons shall receive permanent protection against mechanical
damage and corrosion.
Internal tendons shall be protected and bonded to the structural member by cement
grout or, when permitted by the engineer, by sand-cement grout. Where bond is not
important, protection may be effected by the use of bitumen, petroleum-based
compounds, epoxy resins, plastics and similar products, all complying with the
requirements of sub-clause 8602(i) and subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Tendons located outside the structural section (i. e external tendons) shall be encased
with a dense concrete, dense mortar or material sufficiently stable and hard, all subject
to approval. The encasement shall be of the thickness shown on the drawings.
Where bonding of the tendon to the structural concrete is required, this shall be
achieved by bonding the concrete encasement to the structure with reinforcing steel as
detailed on the drawings.
Protection and bonding of the tendons shall be effected within 7 days of the final
tensioning of the tendons, or as specified on the drawings, but shall not take place
without the prior approval of the engineer having been obtained.
After the permanent protection or bonding has been completed the anchorages shall be
encased in concrete or grout, which shall be bonded to the old concrete with epoxy
resin, designed for this purpose, or shall be completely coated with a corrosion-
resistant material. The protection provided shall in all cases prevent the ingress of
water or aggressive agents.
(2) Preparation of ducts
Before permanent protection and/or bonding of tendons is affected, the following
precautions shall be taken:
The cables shall be checked for blockages by water or compressed air, being injected.
Unlined ducts, which are to be filled with grout, shall be flushed with water to wet the
concrete.

Temporary protection or lubricants, which are incompatible with the permanent

protection or bonding, shall be removed by flushing the duct with water or an inert
solution, or by any suitable approved method.
On completion of the above, any excess fluid shall be expelled from the ducts by
means of compressed air or shall be displaced by the protecting agent or grout, as may
be relevant.
Any blockages, leakages or factors, which in any way may affect the permanent
protection or bonding, shall immediately be reported to the engineer.
(3) Mixing
The mixing of protecting agents shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instruction.
The aggregate, if used, and the cement shall be measured by mass, and the water by
mass or by volume.
The water: cement ratio by mass shall be as low as possible within the range between
0.36 to 0.45, and shall be consistent with the fluidity requirements of sub-clause
8602(h)(ii).
Where an admixture is used, it shall be dissolved in a part of the mixing water before
it is added to the grout.
Mixing shall be commenced by two-thirds of the cement being added to the greater
part of the mixing water, and, if used, an additive predissolved in part of the mixing
water, and finally the remainder of the cement. Mixing shall continue for not longer
than 4 minutes after which the grout shall be continually agitated at slow speed
throughout the injection operation.
Where aggregate is used in the grout mix, the word "cement" in the preceding
paragraph shall be replaced by the term "cement/aggregate component".
(4) Strength of Grout
The compressive strength of 100mm cubes made of the grout shall exceed 17 N/mm2
at 7 days.
Cubes shall be made, cured and tested in accordance with the requirements of BS
1881.
(5) Injection
General
The injection of permanent protecting agents or grout shall not commence
before approval has been granted that the work may start.
Before injection commences all air shall be expelled from the injection
equipment and hoses and all connections checked for air tightness.
Injection shall take place from the anchorage or coupler, whichever is
situated at the lower end of the cable.
Grout Injection shall proceed without any interruption until the cable has
been completely filled and closed off.
Protecting agents
The injection of protecting agents shall be strictly In accordance with the
instructions, and with the equipment specified by the manufacturer.
Grout
Immediately after mixing, and also during injection, the fluidity of the grout
shall be tested at regular intervals in accordance with sub-clause 8602(j).
Injection shall be continuous at a rate of 6 m to 12 m per minute. As soon as
grout with the original consistency flows from the intermediate vent pipes
they shall be successively closed. Injection shall continue until the grout
flowing from the vent at the free end is of the same consistency as that of the
injected grout. At this stage the vent shall be closed and the final pressure or
a pressure of 5 bars, whichever is the greater, shall have been maintained on
the grout column for 5 minutes before the valve at the injection end is closed.
All vents shall be kept closed and supported vertically until the grout has
finally settled. On vertical cables, a riser pips with funnel shall be fitted to
the top anchor to ensure that the separated water migrate upwards and will
not remain in the cable.
If an expanding agent is used in the grout mix, the air vents shall be re-
opened after grouting to release any separated water, and shall then again be
closed.
Unless a retarder is used in the grout mix, the grout not used within 60
minutes of mixing shall be discarded.
During the course of grouting 100 mm cubes shall be made for testing in
accordance with sub-clause 8602(j). Whilst the grout is being poured into the
cube mould, the sides of the mould shall be slightly tapped to permit any
entrapped air to escape.
Precautions shall be taken not to discharge the escaping grout onto railway
lines, public roads or private property.
If a blockage occurs during the course of grouting, the grouting shall be
stopped before the maximum grouting pressure is reached. The duct shall
then be flushed out immediately and the blockage cleared.
Grouting shall not be carried out during very cold weather when the ambient
air temperature drops below 5 0 C. Care shall be taken that the ducts are
completely free from frost or ice before grouting commences after frosty
weather.
8604 LOSS OF PRESTRESS

Any structural member which has lost all or part of its prestress through the failure or
malfunctioning of any part of the prestressing component may be rejected by the
Engineer and shall be removed from the works unless approved remedial measures
have been successfully carried out on the member.
No payment will be made in respect of such remedial work or loss suffered by the
contractor in this regard.
Item 86.01 Prestressing tendons

(a) Longitudinal Tendons ...................................................... meganewton-metre (MN-m)

(b) Transverse Tendons..........................................................meganewton-metre (MN-m)

(c) Vertical Tendons ...............................................................meganewton-metre (MN-m)
The unit of measurement shall be the meganewton-metre which is calculated as the
product of the nominal tensile strength in megapascals of the prestressing steel, the
cross-sectional area of the tendon in square meters and the length of the tendon in
meters between the faces of the anchorages. In the case of fan and loop anchorages the
"length of the tendon" shall include the length of tendon forming the loop or fan.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for preparing and submitting the
drawings, supplying, storing, handling and protecting all materials (excluding
anchorages and couplers), fabricating, supporting and installing the cables;
lubricating, permanently protecting and bonding the tendons, for the using of all the
equipment, as well as for all work and incidentals required for completing the work as
specified.
Item 86.02 Anchorages and couplers

(a) Anchorage at jacking end................................................................meganewton (MN)
(b) Anchorage at dead end ....................................................................meganewton (MN)
(c) Coupler at jacking end ....................................................................meganewton (MN)
(d) Coupler at dead end.........................................................................meganewton (MN)
The unit of measurement shall be the meganewton, which is calculated as the product
of the nominal tensile strength in megapascals of the prestressing steel and the cross-
sectional area of the tendon in square meters, effectively anchored or coupled.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for supplying, storing, handling,
fabricating and protecting the complete anchorage or coupler assembly, anchorage
reinforcing, constructing the recesses for the anchorage or coupler, tensioning,
anchoring and/or coupling, trimming the tendon ends, using all the equipment, as well
as for all work and incidentals required for completing the work as specified.
The coupler shall include the complete assembly consisting of the anchorage built into
the first-stage construction and the part coupled to it.
The tendered rate for loop or fan anchorages shall exclude the cost of the length of
tendon forming the loop or fan.
Item 86.03 Extra over pay item 86.02 for partially tensioning the tendons
The unit of measurement shall be the meganewton (MN), which is calculated as for
pay item 86.02.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the use of all equipment, as well
as for all work and incidentals required for tensioning and anchoring the tendons to
the specified partial force.

DIVISION 8700 BRIDGE BEARINGS…

PARAPETS, RAILINGS, SIDEWALKS, NO-FINES
CONCRETE, WATER PROOFING AND DRAINAGE FOR
STRUCTURES
8701 SCOPE
This Division covers:
• The construction, supply and installation of bearings for structures, the
construction of parapets, railings and sidewalks on structures.
• The supply and installation of all permanent joints which will permit relative
movement between contiguous structural members,
• The manufacture and placing of no-fines concrete used in the Works, and
• The construction and/or installation of drainage works such as weep holes,
drainage pipes and gulleys, no-fines concrete blocks, filter lining and concrete
channeling.
8702 BRIDGE BEARINGS

Bridge bearings shall be either proprietary or purpose made bearings as described in
the Contract.
(a) Material
(i) General
When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit test certificates from an
approved, independent testing authority to show that the respective materials conform
with the specified requirements, or a certificate from the patent holder or design
certifying that the manufactured item complied in all respects with relevant product
specifications.
Unless otherwise specified, all the materials used for manufacturing the bearings shall
comply with the requirements of BS 5400: part 9.2. or equivalent AASHTO or ASTM
materials can be used if approved by the Engineer.
(ii) Roofing Felt

Roofing felt shall be in 3-ply and comply with the requirements of the Engineer.
(iii) Elastomer
The elastomer used in the manufacture of bearings shall be natural rubber or synthetic
rubber.
Natural rubber shall comply with the requirements of BS 1154 for Group Z13 or Z14
natural rubber and/ or AASHTO Elastomeric Bearing, Section 25.

Synthetic rubber shall comply with the requirements of BS 2752, for Compounds C3
or C4 synthetic rubber.
(iv) Stainless steel plate (PTFE)

PTFE used in conjunction with stainless steel plates to form low friction sliding
surfaces shall be unfilled (virgin) PTFE and comply with the requirements of BS
6564: Part 2 for Grade A Type 1 PTFE.
The sliding surface of the PTFE may be either smooth or dimpled.
(v) Stainless steel plate

Stainless steel plate used in conjunction with PTFE to form low friction sliding
surfaces shall comply with the requirements of BS 1449: Part 2 for Steel 316S16. The
texture of the sliding surface shall be equal to or better than 0.20 micron Ra in
accordance with the requirements of BS 1134.
(vi) Stainless steel dowels and bolts

Stainless steel used for the manufacture of dowels, holding down and anchor bolts
shall comply with the requirements of BS 970: Part 1 for Steel 316S16.
(vii) Steel plate

Steel used for plate reinforcement in laminated elastomeric bearings shall comply with
the requirements of BS 4360 for Grade 43A Steel and/ or ASTM A 570, Grade 36 or
ASTM A 611, Grade D.
(viii) Mortar
Mortar bedding for seating of bearings shall be composed of an approved sand and
either cement or epoxy resin, or may consist of an approved proprietary mortar. The
mortar shall comply with the following strength requirements.
(1) Sand-cement mortar
The 7-day compressive strength of 150mm cylinders made of the mortar and cured in
moist atmosphere for the first 24 hours and thereafter in water at 20oC shall not be less
than 1.5 times the average contact stress under the bearing or 15 MPa whichever is the
greater.
(2) Sand-epoxy resin mortar
The cured compressive cylinder strength of the mortar shall not be less than 2.0 times
the average contact stress under the bearing or 20 MPa whichever is the greater.
(3) Proprietary mortar
The strength requirements for proprietary mortars shall be in accordance with either
Sub-clause 8702(a) (viii) (1) or (2) above as may be relevant.
(b) Concrete Hinges

Concrete hinges shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the
Drawings.
The throat shall be formed to have rounded chamfers on all sides and with the upper
and lower surfaces at a slight divergence.

The concrete cover to reinforcing steel in the throat shall not be less than 25 mm.
The concrete used in forming the throat of the hinge shall be as specified on the
Drawings but shall not have a 28-day cylinder crushing strength of less than 40 MPa.
The maximum size of coarse aggregate in the mix shall not be larger than 10 mm.
Construction joints shall not be formed in the throat area. Where a joint is necessary it
shall be formed as a recess below the throat, level with the top reinforcement mat.
The width of the recess shall be slightly greater than the width of the throat.
Care shall be exercised to eliminate the formation of shrinkage cracks with the throat.
During construction adequate bracing and support shall be provided to the satisfaction
of the Engineer to prevent rotation in the throat from the time of casting to completion
of the structure incorporating the hinge. During the coarse of construction the hinge
shall not be subjected to conditions that will include tensile stresses in the throat area.
(c) Roofing Felt

Roofing felt used as bearing strips shall consist of at lest 3 layers, laid on the bearing
surface to the dimensions shown on the Drawings.
Where lubricated linings are specified, the roofing felt shall be saturated with
vegetable oil and thereafter liberally dusted with graphite powder before it is laid on
the bearing surface.
(d) Elastomeric Bearings
(i) Technical data

The following technical data for the elastomeric bearings required on the contract will
be supplied on the Drawings, and shall also be supplied on drawings prepared by the
Contractor for submission to the Engineer.
(1) Design loads and deformations
The critical design and load combination and co-existing rotations and
horizontal displacements for each or each group of identical bearings.
(2) Size and construction of bearing
The size and construction of the bearing pad shall be designated by :
L x B x (n1(t1) + n2 (t2)),
where
L = length of pad in the transverse direction in mm
B = width of pad in the span direction in mm
t = thickness of individual elastomer layers in mm
n = number of elastomer layers of each thickness
The thickness of the steel plate in reinforced elastomeric bearings shall not be
less than 3 mm unless specified otherwise on the Drawings.
The complete bearing shall be encased in a 3 mm thick elastomer layer
consisting of the same elastomer as the rest of the bearing.
(3) Hardness and type of elastomer
The IRHD hardness and type of elastomer, i.e. natural or synthetic rubber,
from which the specified bearings are to be manufactured.

(4) Identification
Each bearing shall be identified by a number.
(ii) Alternative bearings

Where alternative bearings are offered by the Contractor, they shall be designed in
accordance with the requirements of the Bridge Design Manual for the loadings and
deformations shown on the Drawings.
Where a bearing consisting of a different rubber to that, which is specified, is offered,
the bearing shall be redesigned to allow for the variation in hardness and/or type of
rubber.
(iii) Inspection and testing

On completion of manufacture of the bearings, the Contractor shall submit bearing
pads selected by the Engineer, or specially manufacture sample pads authorized by the
Engineer, to an independent testing authority for testing. The tests to be undertaken
shall be as directed by the Engineer and in accordance with these specifications.
A variation of + 20% shall be permitted between the actual and theoretical stiffness for
compression and shear of the elastomer. Where this variation is exceeded, acceptance
of the pads shall be at the sole discretion of the Engineer.
Copies of test results and certificates for the above mentioned testing shall be
submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer timeously to enable the Engineer to assess
the information before the bearings are installed.
The dimensional tolerances on bearing pads shall comply with the requirements of
Division T8000 Construction tolerances for structures of these specifications.
Before the bearings are dispatched to the site of works each bearing, with the
exception of large bearings as provided for in the Special Provisions, shall be
subjected simultaneously to a vertical load, equal to 150% of the maximum design
load, and to a shear distortion equal to 150% of the maximum design value. The
bearings shall be visually inspected for defects by the Engineer or his nominee and
shall at no stage under this test show any cracks visible to the naked eye or other
defects. The cost of this testing shall be included in the rate tendered for the supply
and installation of the bearing pads.
(e) Proprietary Bearings
(i) General
This clause covers custom-built bearings, bearings manufactured under license except
elastomeric bearings. Combined bearings, consisting of an assembly of an
elastomeric bearing in conjunction with a low friction sliding or mechanical
component shall fall under this clause.
The Tenderer may base his tender on any bearing that complied with the specified
requirements, provided that the efficacy of the bearings has been verified by tests and
successful previous use. Evidence of these as well as information on the bearings
durability and suitability for the specified use shall be submitted to the Engineer for
his consideration.
Details of the produce guarantee shall be submitted with the tender.

(ii) Drawings and approval

Typical detail drawings showing clearly the construction of the bearings and
information on the friction characteristics based on actual tests performed on the
relevant materials shall be submitted with the tender.
Prior to manufacture, the Contractor shall submit the following information to the
Engineer for his consideration :
• Manufacturer's Specification containing detailed information on the
design standards, materials, manufacture and technical data.
• Drawings showing the bearing construction and installation details.
• All bearings used in the permanent works shall be subject to the approval
of the Engineer.
(iii) Technical assistance

The following technical data for the proprietary bearings required on the Contract will
be supplied on the Drawings, and shall also be supplied on the drawings prepared by
the Contractor for submission to the Engineer.
(1) Design loads and movement
The maximum and minimum vertical loads and co- existing horizontal loads
are well as the maximum horizontal load and co-existing vertical load.
(2) Mechanical fit
Mechanical fit on unidirectional and fixed bearings expressed as the
maximum permissible slack (play) between the shear transfer members of the
bearing that are required to resist the applied horizontal loads.
(3) Identification
Identification of each bearing by a number, the degree of freedom of
movement (fixed, multidirectional or unidirectional) and the type of bearing
(spherical, elastomer-pot, etc).
(iv) Design
The bearings shall be designed to accept the specified load combinations in
conjunction with the maximum eccentricity and rotation without over stressing any
part in terms of "Working Load" requirements or exceeding the requirements for
Serviceability Limit State.
Unless specified otherwise in the Special Provisions or on the Drawings the following
shall be complied with:
• The maximum average pressure on the projected area of the PTFE shall not
exceed 45 MPa and 30 MPa under maximum load and under dead load
respectively. The maximum peak pressure on the PTFE shall not exceed 60
MPa.
• The maximum average contact stress and maximum edge stress on the concrete or
mortar bedding shall not exceed 20 MPa and 25 MPa respectively.
• The initial peak static coefficient of friction shall not exceed 0.06 and the final
static coefficient of friction shall not exceed 0.04.

• The bearing shall be of overall dimension such that it will fit into the space
allowed for the installation thereof. Major alterations to the contiguous
member will not be considered.
(v) Construction
Unless specified otherwise in the Special Provisions or on the Drawings the following
requirements shall be complied with:
The IRHD hardness of the elastomer disc in the pot type bearings shall 50 + 5 or 55 +
5. The elastomer shall be protected along the edge of the disc by either a metal
sealing ring, or capping ring moulded integrally with the disc along the perimeter.
The thickness of the elastomer disc shall not be less than 0.066 times its diameter.
The PTFE shall be not less than 3 mm thick and be recessed into the supporting base
to a depth of 0.5 times the thickness of the PTFE + 0.2 mm.
The minimum dimension of individual PTFE areas shall not be less than 450 mm and
their spacing shall be such as to ensure equal distribution of stress through contiguous
members.
The thickness of the stainless steel sliding plate shall be not less than 12.5 mm. The
plate shall be either recessed into or bonded to the base and in addition riveted or
bolted to the base. The edges of the plate shall be sealed to prevent the ingress of
moisture between the plate and the base.
The slack (play) between shear transfer members of undirectional and fixed bearings
shall not exceed 2 mm unless specified otherwise.
Only silicone grease of an approved type shall be used as lubricant between the sliding
surfaces.
The bearing shall be provided with tight fitting seals to prevent the ingress of dust or
deleterious matter onto the moving parts. The seals shall be of an approved type and
sufficiently durable to last in excess of 50 years.
The assembled bearing shall be supplied with welded or bolted lugs or straps,
temporarily securing the moving parts firmly in position to ensure that no undesirable
relative movement occurs before or during construction.
The bearing shall be recessed into adaptor plates or be of such construction as to
facilitate removal of the bearing from the installed position without damage to any
part of the bearing or the surrounding material after raising of the relevant structural
member by 15 mm or the amount specified.
Anchor and holding down bolts shall be of the material specified on the Drawings.
Corrosion protection of the exposed steel surfaces, with the exception of the stainless
steel sliding plate, shall consist of the following treatment:
a/ Preparation of the surfaces by abrasive blasting or steel brushing to a finish
equal to Sa3 finish of Swedish Standard SIS 05 59 00.
b/ Metal spraying of the surfaces with zinc to comply with the requirements of BS
2569 for Zn 10.
c/ Coating of the zinc sprayed surfaces within 4 hours with a sealer compatible
with the zinc and subsequent coat of paint.

d/ Application of a coat of high build chlorinated rubber paint of minimum 75

micron dry film thickness and of colour dissimilar to that of the final coat of paint.
e/ Application of a final coat of high build chlorinated rubber paint a minimum 75
micron dry film thickness and a dark grey colour.
Surfaces in contact with concrete shall receive at least the treatment described in Items
a) and b) above.
(vi) Inspection and testing

The Engineer may require tests to be carried out to verify compliance of the bearing
with the Specification and/or its performance under the design loads.
Test certificates of all tests carried out shall be made available to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 7 days notice prior to final assembly of
the bearings to enable the Engineering or his nominee to inspect the bearing at the
factory.
Under no circumstances shall bearings be taken apart and re-assembled on the site
except when it is an unavoidable feature of the installation procedure, in which case
the dismantling, installation and re-assembly shall be under the supervision of
qualified personnel.
Rehabilitation, modification and repair work to bearings shall be carried out only in
the factory or in an approved Engineering works.
(f) Dowels and Guides

Dowels and guides shall be of such material, design and construction as is detailed on
the Drawings.
Where dowels and guides are used in conjunction with bearings they shall not
complicate or prevent the removal of bearings.
(g) Storage and Handling

The bearings shall at all times be stored under cover and clear of the ground, away
from sunlight, heat, oils and chemicals deleterious to the bearings. The bearings shall
not be stacked in a manner or on a surface that will cause distortion of the bearings.
The bearing shall be handled with care to ensure that they are not subjected to impact
loads or any other condition that may be harmful.
(h) Installation
The concrete surface on elements required to receive bearings shall comply with the
requirements of Division 8200 for concrete surface finish. Plastering of the surface
will under no circumstances be permitted.
Before the mortar bedding is constructed the concrete surface shall be chipped back to
expose the aggregate and leave a sound irregular surface. Bonding of the mortar
bedding to the concrete surface shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and the Engineer's instructions.
The bedding shall be of dimensions to permit the spreading of load at an angle of 45o
through the bedding. However, the thickness of the bedding shall not be less than 15

mm and 25 mm for proprietary and elastomeric bearings respectively, nor shall the
maximum thickness exceed 50 mm.
Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, the bearings shall be installed on a
horizontal plane and shall be in full contact with the concrete and bedding surfaces.
To accommodate soffit irregularities and camber in the case of precast members, the
member shall be lowered onto a mortar skim on top of the bearing. The member shall
thereafter be propped until the mortar skim has hardened into a wedge.
The bearings shall be accurately installed to the specified level, alignment and
orientation all within the construction tolerances in accordance with Division T8000
construction tolerances of these specifications and the details shown on the Drawings.
Where the bearing has long sliding plates, these shall be rigidly supported to prevent
distortion under the weight of the wet concrete and construction loads.
Before the bearing is incorporated into the structure it shall be cleaned to remove all
deleterious substances and adhering matter, and thereafter wrapped in polyethylene
sheeting and adequately sealed to prevent the ingress of mortar and sluch onto the
bearing during the course of construction.
After installation, the polyethylene wrapping shall be removed, the bearing thoroughly
cleaned and lugs removed as directed by the Engineer.
On completion of installation of proprietary bearings the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer a certificate from the Manufacturer or Supplier of the bearing certifying
acceptance of the installation. Notwithstanding the issuing of such a certificate, the
Manufacturer or Supplier shall not accept any responsibility for the installation of the
bearings and shall no relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract.
8703 BRIDGE PARAPETS, RAILINGS AND SIDEWALKS
(a) Materials
(i) Concrete
All concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of Division
8200, 8300 and 8400 of these Specifications.
(ii) Structural steel

Structural steel work shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of Division
8800 of these Specifications.
(iii) Structural aluminium

Aluminium castings shall be from LM-6 alloy (BS designation) manufactured to BS
1490.
Aluminium tubes shall be from HE-30 alloy (BS designation) manufactured to BS
1474.
(b) Concrete Parapets

Concrete parapets shall be either solid concrete parapets or open concrete parapets
with concrete railings.

Concrete railings shall be cast in-situ or pre-cast or a combination of the two as shown
on the Drawings. Where possible pre-cast elements shall be placed with the unformed
surface downwards or outwards.
The pipes and fittings to be used for the construction of the ducting shall be rigid PVC
pipes and fittings with flexible rubber joints which comply with AASHTO or ASTM
requirements.
Duct ends shall be provided with suitable conical wooden stoppers to prevent dirt,
concrete, etc, from entering the ducts. Two strands of 2.5 mm diameter galvanized
steel wire shall be threaded through each duct. The strands shall extend 2 m beyond
each end and be wedged firmly into position with the wooden stoppers. Inspection
eyes for the ducts shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the
drawings.
No separate payment will be made for service ducts in parapets and end blocks and
the rates tendered for the parapets and end blocks shall include full compensation for
the provision and installation of service ducts complete with stoppers, draw wires and
inspections eyes.
(c) Metal Railings

Metal bridge railings shall be of steel or other material as shown on the Drawings.
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints in fabricated metal work shall be welded using
appropriate techniques to develop the full strength of the component parts. All
fabricated metal works shall be neatly finished off without sharp edges and with sharp
corners rounded off. Metal work shall be completed with all necessary connections,
fastenings and anchor bolts.
Steel work, which is to be cast or grouted into concrete, shall be unpainted and shall
be cleaned of loose rust, scale, oil or other material, which may impair the bond
between concrete and steel.
All steelwork shall be painted in the shop and on Site in accordance with the provision
of Division 9700 of these specifications and as shown on drawings.
Surfaces which will be inaccessible after erection shall be painted before erection
commences. If called for on the Drawings or in the Bill of Quantities steelwork shall
be galvanized and painted; galvanizing shall be done after fabrication, in accordance
with BS 729.
Aluminium work which is to be cast or grouted into or be in contact with concrete
shall be painted with two coats of approved bituminous aluminium paint or thoroughly
coated with aluminium impregnated compound on the contact surfaces before
installation. Where aluminium work is to be fixed to steelwork, the aluminium and
steel shall be completely isolated from one another with plastic or other approved
washers, gaskets and sleeves. Exposed aluminium work shall be left unpainted.
(d) Bridge Number Plates

Bridge number plates shall be fixed in the positions and according to the method of
fixing shown on the Drawings. The concrete surface on which the plate is to be fixed
shall be suitably prepared prior to the application of any adhesive by roughening and
removing all surface laitance.

(e) Concrete Sidewalks

Prior to construction of the sidewalks, including kerbs and copings the bridge deck
shall be accurately surveyed to establish final lines and levels. The previously cast
bridge deck area shall be prepared as specified in Division 8400 of these
specifications to receive sidewalk concrete.
Forms shall be accurately set to final lines and levels and shall be firmly held in
position during the placing of the concrete. Stops at the ends of sections shall be
accurately placed to ensure that joints between adjacent sections are truly
perpendicular to the surface of the concrete and at right angles to the edge of the road
or to the skew angle of the deck at the expansion joint.
After removal of the forms the exposed surfaces of the kerbs and copings shall be
rubbed in accordance with the requirements of Division 8200 of these specifications.
All edges shall be rounded to a radius of 20 mm unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings.
(f) Concrete Surface Finish Requirements

All formed concrete surfaces shall have a Class F3 surface finish as specified in
Division 8200 and all unformed concrete surfaces shall have a Class U3 surface finish
in accordance with Division 8200.
(g) Construction Tolerances

The alignment levels and dimensions of the various items described in this Division
shall conform to the requirements given in Division T8000 of these specifications.
8704 JOINTS IN STRUCTURES
(a) General
The Contractor shall not relocate or eliminate a construction joint, or make a
construction joint not shown on the Drawings, without prior approval of the Engineer.
This includes emergency construction joints made necessary by unforeseen
interruptions to the concrete pour.
Before fresh concrete is placed at a construction joint, the hardened concrete surface
of the joint shall be roughened and cleaned so that all loose or soft material, free
water, foreign matter and laitance is removed. Care shall be taken not to disturb any
reinforcement or damage any adjoining concrete faces. Just prior to placement, the
hardened concrete surface of the construction joint and the projecting reinforcement
shall be washed clean, and the concrete surface saturated with water without leaving
loose material or free water.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified, the surfaces of adjoining pours
shall be butt joined. In visually important surfaces the joint shall be straight and true,
and free from impermissible blemishes relevant to its surface finish class.
(b) Movement joints

Movement joints, where specified, shall be one of the following types shown in Table
8700-2:

Table 8700-2 Types of movement joints
Joint Description
Contraction joint: An unreinforced joint with a bond-breaking coating separating the
concrete joint surfaces.
Expansion joint: An unreinforced joint with the joint surfaces separated by a compressible
filler.
Control joint: A weakened plane contraction joint created by forming a groove,
extending at least one quarter of the depth of the section, either by means
of a grooving tool, by sawing, or by inserting a premoulded strip.
Isolation joint: A joint without keying, dowelling, or reinforcement, which imposes no
restraint on movement in any plane.
(i) Vertical Expansion Joints

Retaining walls shall be provided with vertical expansion joints as shown on the
Drawings.
The expansion joints shall consist of jointing material of approved quality, and of
thickness shown on the drawings, and a depth sufficient to fill the joint. The jointing
material shall be neatly cut to fit the surface of the concrete.
(ii) Barrier Contraction Joints

Where barriers are extruded or cast in place, narrow transverse vertical grooves,
20mm deep, shall be formed neatly in the surface of the freshly placed concrete to
produce contraction joints for the control of cracking.
The contraction joints, shall be at intervals of not more than 3 meters.
(iii) Barrier Expansion Joints

In barriers, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, expansion joints, 15mm in width
for the full depth of the barrier, shall be constructed at intervals not exceeding 15m
and where the barrier abuts against gully pits
(c) Materials
(i) General
All materials used in the forming, construction and sealing of permanent joints as well
as all proprietary or custom built expansion joint assemblies shall be subject to the
Jointing materials, shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications
for the location and type of joint. They shall be compatible when used together, and
non-staining to concrete in visible locations.
Foamed materials for use in compressible fillers shall be closed-cell or impregnated
types which do not absorb water.
Back-up materials for sealant, including backing rods and the like, shall not adhere to
the sealant, or shall be faced with a non-adhering material.
When required by the Engineer the Contractor shall submit test certificates from an
approved, independent testing authority to show that the respective materials conform

with the specified requirements, or a certificate from the patent holder or designer
certifying that the manufactured item complies in all respects with relevant product
specifications.
(ii) Joint filler

Where joints are to be filled with jointing materials, including sealant, bond breakers,
backing rods, preformed strips, and the like, the joint surfaces shall be dry and clean
before application, and primed if and as recommended by the joint material
manufacturer.
The jointing materials shall be applied so that joints subject to ingress of water are
made watertight where required.
Visible jointing materials shall be finished neatly flush with the adjoining surfaces.
Joint filler shall consist of sheets or strips of the following materials complying with
the requirements of the relevant specifications listed:
• Bitumen impregnated fibreboard and bitumen impregnated
corkboard-U.S. Federal Specification HH-F-341F or AASHTO
Specification M 2213.
The bituminous fibre sheet shall be about 12mm thick sheet specifically
manufactured for concrete joints complying with AASHTO M153-60T
and conforming to samples and specifications submitted by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
• Resin impregnated corkboard - U.S. Federal Specification HH-F-341F.
• Flexible foams of expanded polyethylene, polyurethane or polystyrene -
AASHTO Specification M153.
• Rigid foams of expanded polyethylene, polyurethane or polystyrene - BS
4840 or 3837.
• Other joint filler materials may be used if approved by the Engineer after
submission of full specifications and information by the Contractor.
(iii) Sealants
Thermoplastic hot-poured sealants shall comply with the requirements of U.S. Federal
Specification SS-S- 1401B, BS 2499 or AASHTO Specification M173.The sealants
shall be of the rubberised bituminous type containing a minimum of 20% natural or
synthetic rubber.
Thermoplastic cold-applied sealants shall comply with the requirements of U.S.
Federal Specifications SS-S- 156.The sealant shall be of the rubberised bituminous
type containing a minimum of 20% natural or synthetic rubber.
Thermosetting chemically curing sealant shall comply with the requirements of U.S.
Federal Specification SS-S- 195B, American National Standards Institute
Specification ANSI A 116.1 (Formerly ASA A 116.1 and USASI A 116.1) or BS 4254.
The final IRHS hardness of the sealant shall be 20 + 5.
Other sealants may be used if approved by the Engineer after submission of full
specifications and information by the Contractor.

(iv) Preformed elastomeric compression seals

Preformed elastomeric compression seals shall comply with the requirements of
ASTM D2628.
(v) Water stops

Water stops shall be installed such that they are surrounded by fully compacted
concrete, and located so that:
• Their correct positions in the finished work are ensured;
• The proper placing and compaction of the concrete is not inhibited; and
reinforcement is not displaced from its correct position.
Water stops shall be of natural rubber, or flexible PVC, and of the type specified or
shown on the Drawings.
(vi) Accessory materials

(1) Primers
When a primer is to be used in conjunction with the sealant it shall be of the
prescribed proprietary material.
(2) Adhesives
Adhesives used in conjunction with preformed seals shall be of a proved and
approved type compatible with the material of the seal.
(3) Bond breakers
Polyethylene tape, coated papers, metal foils or similar material may be used
where bond breakers are required.
(4) Backup material
Backup material shall consist of compressible materials of correct width and
shape, to ensure that after installation it is in approximately 50% compression
and the sealant can be formed to the specified depth.
Backup materials shall be compatible with the sealant used. Material containing
bitumen or volitions shall not be used with thermosetting chemically curing
sealants.
(d) Filled and unfilled joints

Wherever polystyrene or similar material susceptible to damage is used for forming
joints, it shall be lined with a hard surface on the side to be concreted. The hard
surface shall be sufficiently resilient to ensure that the joint and surfaces can be
formed free from defects.
(i) Filled Joints

Filled joints shall be accurately formed to the dimensions shown and with the filler
material specified on the Drawings.
The filler shall be secured in position not to displace during concreting, or thereafter if
the filler is to remain permanently in the joint.

Wherever polystryrene or similar material susceptible to damage is used to form

joints, it shall be lined with a hard surface on the side to be concrete. The hard
surface shall be sufficiently resilient to ensure that the joint and surfaces can be
formed free from defects.
(ii) Unfilled joints

Unfilled joints shall be accurately formed to the dimensions given on the drawings,
and all external corners chamfered or rounded for at least 5 mm. The concrete face
against which the fresh concrete is placed shall be treated in good time with an
approved bond breaker.
(e) Epoxy Mortar Nosings

Epoxy mortar nosings shall not be used unless detailed on the Drawings and specified
in the Special Provisions. Where epoxy mortar nosings are permitted, they shall be
constructed in accordance with the requirements specified in the Special Provisions.
(f) Concrete Nosings

Concrete nosings forming the edges of expansion joints shall be constructed as
follows:
After the concrete in the structural member has hardened sufficiently, the protruding
ends of the reinforcing steel shall be bent flat onto the concrete surface of the formed
recess.
Before the asphalt surfacing is laid, the recess shall be filled with well-compacted
crusher run, sand or weak mortar. Care shall be exercised to ensure that the concrete
surfaces and reinforcing steel are not contaminated with bituminous agents.
Thereafter, the asphalt surfacing shall be laid continuously over the joint.
The asphalt surfacing corresponding to the width of the nosing shall be cut with a
diamond saw blade and all material removed from the nosing recess. The concrete
surfaces of the recess shall then be roughened to expose the aggregate and leave a
sound, irregular surface. The reinforcing steel shall thereafter be bent, fixed and
placed as detailed on the Drawings.
The prepared concrete surfaces shall, immediately before the concrete nosing are cast,
be treated with an approved epoxy resin adhesive. Opposite concrete nosing,
separated by a 10 mm thick joint filler strip, shall be cast simultaneously in
accordance with Division 8400 of this standard specification, and compacted by
surface vibrator. The nosing shall be screeded flush with the premix surfacing and
given a Class U2 surface finish.
Curing shall be in accordance with Division 8400 of this standard specification,
except that the curing period shall be 10 days.
After the concrete in the nosing has cured for at least 3 days, the gap between the
nosings shall be enlarged to the requisite dimensions by cutting both sides with
parallel diamond saw blades. The depth of the saw cut shall be such that a ledge is
formed along the lower edge of the cut on which the sealer unit can be supported.
The exposed corners of the nosings shall be ground to have a 10 mm chamfer.
After the joint has been sealed, the wearing surface of the nosings shall be treated with
a bituminous primer to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Traffic shall not be permitted to pass over the joint before the concrete in the nosing
has aged for at least 10 days.
The concrete used in the construction of the nosings shall be Grade 40/20 and shall
have a slump of not less than 50 mm and not exceeding 75 mm.
(g) Plug type expansion joint systems

Plug type expansion joint systems, eg Thormajoint, shall be constructed in accordance
with the details on the drawings and the specifications and instructions of the
licensees.
(h) Sealing Of Joints
(i) General
Sealed joints shall be made watertight over the full length of the joints unless
permitted otherwise by the Engineer.
Unless a water stop is equipped with an effective watertight interlocking system for
the joining of sections, all joints in water stops shall be bonded or fused to have a
tensile strength of at least 50% of that of the unjointed material. At intersections and
abrupt changes of direction, water stops shall be jointed with prefabricated junction
pieces.
Restrictions on joint width and temperature at the time of installation of the sealant or
seal will be shown on the Drawings. In the absence of these and unless specified
otherwise, installation shall only be carried out within the temperature range of 5oC to
30oC.
(ii) Preparation of joints

Sawing of joints shall be undertaken at such time as to avoid edge spalling or
ravelling.
After removal of the temporary filler material or breaking out of the excess concrete,
the inside faces of the joint shall be wirebrushed or grit blasted to remove all laitance
and contaminants; the joint shall thereafter be cleaned out and blown out with
compressed air to remove all traces of dust.
Solvents shall not be used to remove contaminants from concrete and porous
surfaces.
Care shall be exercised to ensure that primers or adhesives are applied only to surfaces
that are absolutely dry.
The primer or adhesive shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
Unless specified otherwise the primer shall be applied within the temperature range of
10oC t 40oC and the sealant shall be applied after the curing period of the primer and
within the period that the primer remains active.
(iii) Sealants
Sealants shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions by
a person skilled in the use of the particular type of sealant.

Trapping of air and formation of voids in the sealant shall be avoided. The sealant
shall be finished to a neat appearance flush with the edges of the concrete or to be
specified depth.
Thermoplastic hot-poured sealants shall not be poured into the joints when the
temperature of the joint is below 10oC. The safe heating temperature shall not exceed
the specified pouring temperature by more than 10oC.
Two-part thermosetting chemically curing sealants shall not be applied after expiry of
the specified pot-life period, which commences once the base and activator of the
sealant have been combined.
(iv) Preformed compression seals

The seal shall be inserted and secured with a lubricant adhesive covering both sides of
the seal over the full area in contact with the inside faces of the joint. The lubricant
adhesive shall be applied immediately ahead of inserting the seal.
The seal shall be installed with the appropriate equipment in a compressed state such
that under the most adverse condition the seal will remain in compression.
The seal shall at all times be between 5 and 10 mm below the level of the pavement.
The seal shall not be stretching which may occur shall not exceed 5%.
Joints in seals shall be bonded or fused and shall be only at positions agreed by the
Engineer.
(v) Water stops

Water stops shall be securely and accurately located in position not to displace or
deform during construction.
(i) Proprietary Expansion Joints
(i) General
The use of any type of expansion joint shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
Tenderers are advised to obtain approval for the type of expansion joint they intend
using, prior to submitting their Tenders.
(ii) Dimensions
Attention is drawn to the overall dimensions of the expansion joints and to the limiting
concrete dimensions of that portion of the structure that is to accommodate the joints.
No alterations to the concrete that will be visible in the final structure or major
re-arrangement of the prestressing anchorages shall be permitted in order to
accommodate joints of excessive size.
All joints to be installed along a skew shall be accurately dimensioned to ensure
compliance with Sub-clause 8703 (f) above.
Unless specified otherwise, proprietary expansion joints shall include the complete
expansion joint assembly, traversing the roadway, kerbs, sidewalks and median, and
shall include the coping and parapet cover plates as well as the drainage system to
drain the expansion joint.

(iii) Design and manufacture

The expansion joint shall be designed to withstand the movements, displacements and
rotations specified on the Drawings in conjunction with loads prescribed in the code
of practice adopted for the design of the structure without overstressing any part in
term of "Working Load" requirements or exceeding the requirement for Serviceability
Limit State. Any strengthening required of the supporting member to resist forces
imparted by the joint to the structure, shall be for the Contractor's account.
The specified movements, displacements and rotations shall be accepted without
impairment of efficacy or riding quality of the joint.
The joint shall be vibration free, resistant to mechanical wear and other forms of
abrasion, and resist corrosion; have good riding characteristics, be skid resistant and
silent; be of watertight construction or have provision for the disposal of water, debris
or grit collecting in the joint; and be of construction to facilitate easy inspection,
maintenance and repair.
Prior to manufacture of the joints, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his
acceptance detail drawings in accordance with the requirements of Clause 1202 of
each expansion joint.
The expansion joints delivered on the site shall be suitably marked to show clearly the
sequence and position of installation.
(j) Installation Of Expansion Joints

No expansion joint or part thereof shall be installed prior to the establishment of final
surfacing levels based on a complete level survey of the bridge deck(s). The survey
shall be carried out before the construction of kerbs, channels or bituminous surfacing.
The expansion joint shall form an even surface with the road surface on either side
and the deviation across and along the expansion joint shall comply with the
requirements of division T8000 of this specification for cross section and for surface
regularity measured by ordinary straight edge.
On completion of installation of proprietary expansion joint(s) the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer a certificate from the Manufacturer or Supplier of the Joint(s),
certifying acceptance of the installation. Notwithstanding the issuing of such a
certificate, the Manufacturer or Supplier shall not accept any responsibility for the
installation of the joint(s) and shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities
under the Contract. Payment for the inspection of the joints by the Manufacturer or
Supplier and the issuing of the certificate will be made by the Contractor.
8705 NO-FINES CONCRETE
(a) Materials
Cement, aggregate and water shall comply with the requirements of Division 8400 of
these specifications.
Each size of aggregate shall be a single size aggregate graded in accordance with BS
882.

(b) Grades on No-Fines Concrete

No-fines concrete shall be classified by the prefix NF and the size of aggregate to be
used Grade NF 19 means no-fines concrete with a 19 mm nominal size aggregate.
The volume of aggregate per 50 kg of cement for each class of concrete shall be as
follows:
Table 8700-1 Grades of No-Fines concrete
Grade Aggregate per 50 kg cement
NF 38 0.33 m3
NF 19 0.30 m3
NF 13 0.27 m3
(c) Batching and Mixing

Cement shall be measured by mass or full bags of 50 kg each and aggregate shall be
measured by volume in approved measuring boxes or barrows.
The aggregate shall be moist or wetted before the cement is added. Where drum
mixers are used, about 20% of the water shall be poured into the drum before the
aggregate and cement are loaded. The mixing time in the drum shall be about 45 to 50
seconds.
The quantity of water added shall be just sufficient to form a smooth grout which will
adhere to and coat completely each and every particle of aggregate, and which is just
wet enough to ensure that at points of contact of aggregate the grout will run together
to form as small fillet to bond the aggregate together. The mix shall contain no more
than 20 liters of water per 50 kg of cement.
Mixing shall be carried out in an approved batch type mechanical mixer but small
quantities may be hand mixed.
(d) Placing
No-fines concrete shall be placed in accordance with the procedure agreed by the
Engineer. It shall be placed in its final position within 30 minutes of mixing.
The concrete shall be worked sufficiently to ensure that it completely fills the space to
the concreted and that adjacent aggregate particles are in contact with one another.
Excessive tamping or ramming shall be avoided and under no circumstances shall the
concrete be vibrated.
(e) Protection
All no-fines concrete shall be protected from the elements, and loss of moisture.
Protection against loss of moisture shall be accomplished by one or more of the
following:
Retaining formwork in place.

Covering exposed surfaces with sacking or other approved material kept continuously
wet.
Covering exposed surfaces with plastic sheeting.
No-fines concrete placed during cold weather shall be adequately protected against
frost for at least 3 days.
8706 DRAINAGE FOR STRUCTURES
(a) Weep holes, drainage pipes and channelling

Weep holes shall not be placed within 40 mm of any reinforcement and shall be
carefully cleaned and kept clean.
Drainage pipes shall be of the material prescribed on the drawings, and the interior
surface shall, on completion, be smooth and clean.
Cast in situ concrete channeling shall be provided next to the kerbing if shown on the
drawings and according to the details provided. Concrete work shall be carried out in
accordance with the provisions of Division 8400 and channeling shall be given a class
U2 surface finish as specified in Division 8200 .The channeling shall be bonded to the
bridge deck concrete in accordance with the provisions of Division 8400 of these
specifications.
(b) No-fines concrete blocks

Blocks shall be of the class of prescribed no-fines concrete and to the required
dimensions and shall be placed in advance of backfilling. No-fines concrete shall
comply with the requirements of Clause 8705 of this Division.
(c) Synthetic-fibre filter fabric

Synthetic-fiber filter fabric shall be of the type and grade shown on the drawings or
specified in the project specifications.
Filter fabric shall be placed as shown on the drawings and shall be protected against
sunlight and mechanical damage during storage and installation.
Synthetic-fiber filter fabric shall comply with the requirements of Clause 3107 of this
specification.
(d) Crushed stone in drainage strips behind walls

The crushed stone used in drainage strips shall comply with the requirements of
Clause 3210 of this specification for backfilling.
The crushed stone may be wrapped in synthetic-fiber geo-textile and placed in
accordance with the details shown on the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
Item 87.01 Proprietary bearings:

(a) Prime cost sum allowed for purchasing and taking delivery of bearings ..................... p

(b) Percentage on prime cost sum for charges and profit .......................... percentage (%)
Payment for purchasing and taking delivery of proprietary bearings, complete with
anchor bolts and/or dowels, shall be in accordance with the provisions of the general
conditions of contract.
Item 87.02 Installing the proprietary bearings

The unit of measurement shall be the number of complete bearings of each type and
class installed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for supplying all the materials not
covered under Pay Item 87.01, constructing the bedding, transporting, handling and
storing, and all labour, equipment and incidentals required for installing the bearings
complete as detailed.
The tendered rate shall be final and binding, irrespective of the type or make of
bearing finally installed.
Item 87.03 Bearings

The unit of measurement shall be the number of complete bearings of each type and
class installed.
including anchor bolts and/or dowels, constructing the bedding, manufacturing the
bearings, transporting, handling and storing, and all labour, equipment and incidentals
required for installing the bearings complete as detailed.
Item 87.04 Concrete hinges:

(a) (Description of hinge measured per meter)................................................... meter (m)
(b) (Description of hinge measured by number)............................................ number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be either the meter of complete hinge of each type
manufactured and installed or the number of complete hinges of each type
manufactured and installed.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for supplying all materials,
including formwork, manufacturing the hinges, transporting, handling and storing,
sealing the hinges, and all labour, equipment and incidentals required for installing the
hinges complete as detailed.
Item 87.05 Bearing strips

The unit of measurement shall be the square meter (m2) of bearing area lined with the
specified material irrespective of the number of layers placed.
transporting, handling and storing, and all labour and incidentals required for
installing the bearing strips complete as detailed.
Item 87.06 Dowels/guides

The unit of measurement shall be the number of dowels/guides of each type installed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for supplying all materials,
including anchor bolts, manufacturing the dowels/guides, transporting, handling and

storing, and all labour, equipment and incidentals required for installing the
dowels/guides complete as detailed.
Item 87.07 Concrete parapets

The unit of measurement for concrete parapets shall be the meter (m) of concrete
parapet complete in accordance with the drawings. Concrete parapets shall include all
work above the top level of the sidewalks or, where not placed on a sidewalk, above
the top of the bridge deck concrete, wing walls or retaining walls and shall also
include any kerbing and coping forming an integral part of the concrete parapet.
The tendered rate for concrete parapets shall include full compensation for all
concrete, formwork, service ducts, drawing wires and accessories. The rates will
exclude only the cost of reinforcing steel as this will be measured and paid for under
another pay item.
Item 87.08 Steel railings

The unit of measurement for steel railings (type described) shall be the meter (m) of
railing complete in accordance with the drawings.
The tendered rate for steel railings shall include full compensation for all steelwork
and corrosion protection, including fastenings, anchor bolts, mortar bedding, etc, as
may be required, and for erecting the steel railings, complete as specified.
Item 87.09 End blocks

The unit of measurement of bridge end blocks shall be the number of end blocks
constructed complete in accordance with the drawings.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all materials, labour, plant, and
other incidentals required for constructing the end blocks complete as specified,
excluding only reinforcing steel.
Item 87.10 Numbers for structures

(a) Number plates........................................................................................... number (No)
(b) Painted numbers ....................................................................................... number (No)
(c) Numbers formed in concrete .................................................................... number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be either the number of bridge number plates provided
and installed, or the number of complete numbers painted on the structures, or the
number of complete numbers formed in concrete.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for providing and installing either the number plates,
or preparing the surface and painting the numbers, or forming the numbers in concrete, and for all
material, labour and equipment required in this connection.
Item 87.11 Proprietary expansion joints

(a) Prime cost sum allowed for purchasing and taking delivery of expansion
joints ....................................................................................................................................... prime co
(b) Percentage on prime cost sum for charges and profit................................ percent (%)
Payment for purchasing and taking delivery of proprietary expansion joints shall be in
accordance with the provisions of the general conditions of contract (see note 2
below).

Item 87.12 Installation of proprietary expansion joints

(a) (Description of joint measured per meter) ................................................... meter (m)
(b) (Description of joint measured by number) ........................................... number (No)
The unit of measurement and payments shall be either the meter of complete joint of
each type installed or the number of complete joints of each type installed.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for supplying all materials not
covered under item Pay Item 87.11, transporting, handling and storing, and all labour,
equipment, shaping the recesses, and incidentals required for installing the expansion
joint complete in accordance with instructions (see notes 1 and 2 below).
The tendered rate shall be final and binding, irrespective of the type or make of joint
finally installed.
Item 87.13 Expansion joints

(a) (Description of joint measured per meter) .................................................. meter (m)
(b) (Description of joint measured by number) ............................................. number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the meter of complete expansion joint of each type
installed or the number of completed joints of each type installed.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for supplying all the materials,
manufacturing the expansion joint, transporting, handling and storing, and all labour,
equipment, shaping the recesses, and incidentals required for installing the expansion
joint complete in accordance with instructions (see notes 1 and 2 below).
Item 87.14 Filled joints:

(a) Filled joints (Description of joint and thickness of joint filler for joints
measured per square meter)............................................................................ square meter (m2)
(b) Filled joints (Description of joint and thickness of joint filler for joints
measured per meter) .................................................................................................................... me
The unit of measurement shall be the square meter of filled joint calculated from the
surface area of the joint
Where the filled joint is 150 mm or less in depth, the unit of measurement shall be the
meter of filled joints measured along the joint centerline. Concrete surfaces formed
prior to the construction of the final surface for completing the filled joint shall be
measured under the relevant Pay items mentioned in Division 8200 of these
specifications, as may be applicable.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for supplying and installing the
joint filler and all materials not - covered under Pay Item 87.16, and for all labour and
incidentals required for completing the filled joint as - prescribed.
Item 87.15 Unfilled joints

(a) Unfilled joints (Description of joint for joints measured per square meter) .................
(b) Unfilled joints (Description of joint for joints measured per linear meter) .. meter (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the square meter of - unfilled joint, calculated in
accordance with the joint area.

Where, however, the depth of the joint is 150 mm or less, the unit of measurement
shall be the meter of unfilled joint measured along the joint centerline. Concrete areas
formed before the final surface is constructed to complete the unfilled joint, shall be
measured under Division 8200 payment items, as may be applicable.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for providing and applying the
bond breaker and all materials - not paid for under Pay Item 87.16, also for the labour
and incidentals required for completing the unfilled joint as - prescribed.
Item 87.16 Sealing joints with:

(a) Sealant (description of joint, sealant and size) ..............................................meter (m)
(b) Water stop (description of joint, water stop and size) .................................. meter (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the meter of sealant, seal or water stop of each type
installed.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for supplying all materials, forming
or cutting the concrete to (the required shape and size, all labour, equipment and
incidentals required for sealing the joint complete in accordance with the
prescriptions, and for all waste materials (see note 2 below).
Item 87.17 Cast in situ no- fines concrete

The unit of measurement (class of concrete indicated) shall be the cubic meter (m3) of
the in situ placed material.
The provisions of Division 8400 shall apply.
Item 87.18 Precast no-fines concrete units

The unit of measurement (class of concrete and description of unit) shall be the
number (No) of complete units of each size and type in position in the works.
The tendered rate for each pre-cast concrete unit shall include full compensation for
providing all the materials, labour, plant and formwork required for manufacturing the
unit complete as shown on the drawings and for transporting and placing the unit in
position.
Item 87.19 Drainage pipes and weep holes

(a) Drainage pipes:
(Type and size indicated)...............................................................................meter (m)
(Type and size indicated).......................................................................... number (No)
(b) Weep holes:
(Type and size indicated)...............................................................................meter (m)
(Type and size indicated).......................................................................... number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be either the meter of pipe/weep hole or the number of
pipes/weep holes of each type and size of pipe/weep hole completed.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for supplying all the materials,
manufacturing and installing the pipes and making weep holes.

Item 87. 20 Drainage gulleys

The unit of measurement shall be the number of drainage gulleys of each type
installed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for providing all the material and
manufacturing and installing the drainage inlets.
Item 87. 21 Synthetic-fiber filter fabric

The unit of measurement shall be the square meter (m2) of filter fabric installed as specified, includ
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for - supplying, cutting and installing the filter fa
Item 87. 22 Concrete channeling

The unit of measurement shall be the meter (m) of completed \ concrete channeling of
each size constructed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for providing all the material, all
labour, equipment and expenses required for completing the work.
Item 87. 23 Crushed stone in drainage strips

The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter (m3) of crushed stone placed in
position as specified, in accordance with the details shown on the drawings or
instructed by the Engineer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing and
placing the crushed stone, and for wrapping it in synthetic-fiber geotextile as
specified.
The geotextile will be measured for payment under Pay Item 87.21.
Item 87. 24 Nose endings at balustrades

The unit of measurement shall be the number of nose endings constructed complete in
accordance with the details shown on the drawings.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all labour, constructional plant
and materials required, for filling the recesses with concrete or nosing material, 20
mm x 20 mm plastijoint seal between the end block and the transition block, steel
cover plate complete with anchor bolts, and all incidentals required for constructing
the nose, endings complete.
Item 87.25 Concrete transition blocks

The unit of measurement shall be the number of each size of concrete transition block
constructed complete in accordance with the details shown on the drawings.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all labour, constructional plant,
materials and all incidentals required for constructing the transition blocks.
Notes:
(1) The cost of forming the open joint(s) shall not be included in the rates tendered for
items Pay Item 87.12 and Pay Item 87.13 as payment for this work shall be made
under Division 8200.
(2) Separate payment shall not be made for supplying and/or installing the seal in
proprietary expansion joints or the seal between concrete or synthetic nosings.

(3) Measurement of and payment for concrete sidewalks (including kerbing and
coping) shall be made in accordance with Divisions 8200, 8400 and 8300.

DIVISION 8800:STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
8801 SCOPE
This section covers the manufacture, transport and erection of structural steelwork for
minor structures, e g overhead road-sign structures. It does not apply to major steel
structures such as steel bridges, which will be covered in the project specifications
where work of this nature is required.
8802 MATERIALS
(a) Structural steel

Structural steel shall comply with the following requirements:
Mild steel : BS 4360, grade 453A
High-yield stress steel : BS 4360, grade 508
The dimensions and properties of rolled steel sections shall comply with the
prescriptions given in the structural steel tables issued by EN or BS.
Steel tubes shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO or ASTM A3 type F
EN10210-1 and EN10214-1.
(b) Bolts, nuts and washers

Ordinary bolts and nuts shall be bolts and nuts used for transferring forces by tensile
stress, compressive stress and shear stress without any friction-grip action being
considered.
Ordinary bolts and nuts shall comply with ASTM A307or EN 24014 and EN24017.
Washers for ordinary bolts and nuts shall comply with the requirements of ASTM
A307 or EN24032 and EN24033.
(c) Friction-grip fasteners:

High-strength friction-grip bolts, nuts and washers shall comply with the requirements
of AASTHO M164M or M253M.
Other approved friction-grip fasteners equal to the above may be used.
(d) Welding consumables

Welding electrodes shall comply with the requirements of B55135.
The quality, handling and storage of all consumables shall be so as to achieve the
desirable properties of the weld metal.
The welding consumables used shall be appropriate to produce weld metal which will
yield all the weld-metal test specimens as specified in BS 709 having both minimum
yield and minimum tensile strengths not less than those of the parent metal.

(e) Test certificates

The contractor shall submit test certificates, as required by the engineer, of the
structural steel and anchor bolts that will be used.
8803 CODES OF PRACTICE

The design, where undertaken by the contractor, of all work shall comply with the
requirements of the Bridge Design Manual.
8804 SHOP DETAILS

Where shop details have not been furnished on the drawings, the contractor shall
prepare his own shop details in accordance with the provisions of the Contract
document. Shop details shall be approved and signed by the engineer prior to the
fabrication of any items.
8805 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY
(a) General
All structural steel both before and after fabrication shall be within the tolerances
specified in Division T800 of these specifications and shall be flat, straight (unless
required to be formed to another shape) and free from twists.
(b) Marking the steel

At all stages of fabrication, all structural steel shall be clearly marked by grade by
means of a suitable marking system.
(c) Cutting
Steel shall be cut by sawing, shearing with shears, cropping, or flame-cutting.
Edges shall be free from any defects or distortions and all burrs, notches and similar
defects shall be removed.
(d) Holes for fasteners

Holes for fasteners shall not be formed by flame cutting. Holes in light members not
thicker than 12 mm or the diameter of the hole, whichever is the smaller, may be
punched.
Holes for fasteners of up to 25 mm in diameter shall not be more than 2 mm larger
than the diameter of the fastener and holes for larger fasteners not more than 3 mm
larger than the diameter of the fastener.
Holes for friction-grip fasteners shall be in accordance with AASHTO or ASTM
requirements.
All burrs shall be removed from holes before assembly.

(e) Joints in compression

The abutting surfaces of joints dependent on contact for the transmission of load shall
be accurately prepared so that the full area intended for bearing will be in contact as
specified in Division T8000 of these specifications.
(f) Hollow sections

Unless protection against corrosion is provided by other means, the interior of any
hollow section shall be sealed to prevent the ingress of moisture.
Where a sealed hollow member is holed for a fastener or pin, precautionary measures
shall be taken to prevent the ingress of water to the interior of the member.
Vent holes for galvanizing shall be sealed after galvanizing has been completed
(g) Alignment of holes

All matching holes for fasteners or pins shall be accurately aligned so that the
fasteners can be inserted freely through the assembled members in a direction at right
angles to the faces in contact. Drifting for aligning the holes shall not distort the metal
or enlarge the holes.
(h) Welding
Welding shall be done in accordance with the requirements of BS 5135.
The welding techniques shall be such as to avoid undue distortion and to minimize
shrinking stresses.
All slag shall be removed.
Where required for certain welding
The manufacturer shall hold a valid welding procedures certificate and the
welding shall be done by a qualified welder.
Or
The welder shall hold a valid certificate of competency for the specified type
of welding.
All structural welds shall be full-strength joints.
(i) Bolting
The jointed parts shall be firmly drawn together.
Where necessary, tapering washers shall be used for each bolt head and nut to transfer
the compressive stress over its full surface.
Where boltholes have greater than normal clearance, washers shall be placed under
the bolt heads and nuts.
The length of each bolt shall be such that, after tightening, at least one full thread
projects through the nut on the outside and at least one full thread (in addition to the
thread run-out) remains clear between the nut and the bolt head.

(j) Welded Stud Shear Connectors

Welded stud shear connections shall conform to AASHTO M 169 and AASHTO
Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges Division II, article 11.3.3, Welded Stud
Shear Connectors.
(k) Friction-grip fastening

The use of friction-grip bolts shall be in accordance with AASHTO or ASTM. Where
use is made of equivalent types of friction-grip fasteners, they shall comply with the
requirements of AASHTO or ASTM for equivalent fasteners and shall be installed in
accordance with the appropriate requirements of AASHTO or ASTM.
(l) Riveting
Wherever possible, riveting shall be done with pneumatic equipment.
Riveted units shall have all parts firmly drawn together and aligned before riveting.
Every rivet shall, when driven, completely fill the hole and shall have a well-formed
head - or, if countersunk, fill the countersink completely.
All loose, eccentric-headed, badly formed, burnt or - otherwise defective rivets shall
be cut out and replaced.
(m) Trimming
All fabricated steel work shall be neatly trimmed so as not to show any sharp edges.
Acute angles shall be rounded off to a radius of at least 1 mm
(n) Corrosion prevention
(i) Painting
Before removal from the place of manufacture the steelwork shall be painted as
specified in Division 9700 of these specifications.
Where the finishing coats are to be applied on the site, the shop painting shall include
the application of an undercoat as specified in Division 9700 of these specifications.
Galvanized steel shall not be painted unless painting is specifically called for in the
specifications.
(ii) Sprayed metal coatings

Where the sprayed metal coating of steel surfaces is called for, it shall be done in
accordance with the requirements of AASHTO or ASTM.
The type of metal used shall be as specified, and, unless otherwise specified; the metal
coating shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO or ASTM
(iii) Galvanizing
Where the galvanizing of structural steelwork is required, the members shall be hot-
dip galvanized.
Structural steel members shall be given an 85-micrometer coating or such other
thickness as may be specified, in accordance with AASHTO or ASTM.

All nuts, bolts, screws and threaded articles shall be hot-dipped galvanized in
accordance with the appropriate requirements of AASHTO or ASTM.
Cut ends and small damaged areas shall be repaired by the application of a zinc-rich
paint or by zinc spraying.
8806 ERECTION
(a) General
Where specified, details of the method of erection shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval.
All structural steel shall be stored, transported, handled and erected so as not to
subject it to undue stress or damage.
Erection over traffic is not permitted, and a temporary deviation for traffic shall be
provided.
Provision for traffic accommodation will be paid for in accordance with the
appropriate items under Division 1500 of these specifications.
(b) Safety during erection

During the erection of a structure, the steelwork shall be bolted, braced or otherwise
secured so as to make adequate provision for all erection loads.
(c) Alignment
Each part of a structure shall be aligned as soon as possible after erection.
Members shall not be permanently connected until sufficiently large members of the
structure have been aligned, plumbed, levelled, and temporarily secured to prevent
their displacement during the erection or alignment of the remainder of the structure.
(d) Corrections
Drift pins, jacking equipment and the like shall not be used for bringing improperly
fabricated members into place.
A moderate degree of cutting and reaming may be done to correct minor misfits if, in
the opinion of the Engineer, this will not be detrimental to the appearance or strength
of the structure.
The burning of holes will not be permitted without written approval.
Repairs to painting and site painting shall be effected in accordance with the
provisions of Division 9700 of these specifications.
(e) Grouting
The grout shall be poured under and around the base plates of columns after the
steelwork has been finally checked for alignment and height and after the approval of
the engineer has been obtained to proceed with the grouting.
The column base plates shall be supported by the top and bottom nuts and by steel
wedges. The area under the steel shall be thoroughly cleaned and shall be dust and

oil-free, and the concrete shall be thoroughly rinsed with water to leave the surface
clean and moist.
The grout shall be an approved non-shrinking, pourable, cementitious grout.
The grout shall be prepared and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and the engineer's directives.
Leak-proof formwork shall be used for the pourable grout, and all corners shall be
chamfered. The surface finish shall be class F2 and class U2 as applicable.
8807 TESTING
(a) Testing by the engineer

The Engineer may nominate a testing authority to inspect the works and to conduct
such tests as he may deem to be necessary to test compliance with the specifications.
Where required, test samples of welds shall be prepared by the contractor, free of
charge.
Payment for these tests shall be made under Pay item 88.01.
(b) Process control

Welds shall be regularly inspected and tested by the contractor in terms of his
obligations in regard to process control, as described in clause 1202 of these
specifications.
The inspection shall include visual inspection of welds to ensure that no undercutting,
uneven lengths, porosity, or evidence of cracking occurs and that full fusion of the
metals has been achieved. In doubtful areas, cores containing weld metal and adjacent
parent material shall, if so required by the engineer, be cut out, polished and examined
and the hole repaired.
At least 30% of the welds shall be examined by ultrasonic or radiographic means. If
more than 5% of the examined welds show unsatisfactory results, additional
examinations covering all welds shall be performed.
Certificates of the examination confirming that the steel plates and welds comply with
the requirements of AASHTO or ASTM shall be submitted to the Engineer.
The cost of testing shall be deemed to be included in the rate tendered for Pay item
88.01.
Item 88.01 Structural steel:

(Structure and steel quality described)...............................................................................ton (t)
(Structure and steel quality described).........................................................................meter (m)
(Structure and steel quality described).................................................................... number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be either the ton or the meter of erected permanent
steel structures or articles, or the number of erected permanent steel structures or
articles.

Where the unit of measurement is the ton, the mass of the steel waste caused by
punching, drilling, sheared edges, milling or planning, or metal cut-outs shall not be
deducted, and the mass of rivets, bolts, nuts, washers, welding fillets or temporary
bracing shall not be added. In computing the mass of steel, the nominal mass per unit
of length or area will be used and tolerances and other permissible deviations will be
ignored.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for preparing shop details where
not provided on the drawings, the supply of all the required materials, fabrication,
process control, loading, transporting to the site, off-loading, and erecting. It shall
also include full compensation for all welding, nuts, bolts, washers, rivets, cutting,
waste, and any temporary bracing necessary for transporting and erecting
The tendered rate shall also include full compensation for supplying and pouring the
specified grout under and around the base plates of steel columns, for procuring and
supplying all the necessary labour, constructional plant, tools and materials, as well as
waste, formwork for the grout, and finishing to obtain the required surface finish for
the grout under and around base plates of steel columns.
Item 88.02 Anchor bolts:

( Description of each assembly, and grade/type of steel, diameter and length indicated)...........
(Description of each assembly, and grade/type of steel, diameter and length indicated)............
The unit of measurement shall be either the kilogram of installed anchor-bolt
assemblies or the number of installed anchor-bolt assemblies.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for the materials, fabrication,
handling, transporting and installing the anchor-bolt assemblies, including corrosion
protection.
Item 88.03 Corrosion protection

(a) Sprayed-on metal:
(Type of metal and thickness or type symbol of coatingindicated)..... ................ton (t)
(Type of metal and thickness or type symbol of coating indicated)....... .......meter (m)
(Type of metal and thickness or type symbol of coating indicated)......... number (No)
(b) Hot-dip galvanizing:
(Thickness or type symbol of zinc coat indicated)........................................ ......ton (t)
(Thickness or type symbol of zinc coat indicated)....................................... meter (m)
(Thickness or type symbol of zinc coat indicated)................................... number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be either a ton or a meter of steel structures or articles
protected against corrosion, or the number of steel structures or articles protected
against corrosion. The quantities are calculated as specified in Pay item 88.01.
The tendered rates shall be extra over the rates for Pay item 88.01 and shall include
full compensation for applying the specified corrosion protection, including surface
preparation, materials, labour, tools, equipment and all incidentals required.
Note:
Payment for painting shall be made under Division 9700 of these specifications.

DIVISION 8900: STONE MASONRY STRUCTURES
8901 SCOPE
This work shall consist of stone masonry structures and the stone masonry portions of
concrete, steel, timber, and composite structures, constructed in conformity with the
lines, grades, dimensions, and design shown on the plans and in accordance with this
and other specification items involved.
8902 STONE MASONRY WALLS

Stone masonry walls may be plain packed stonewalls (un-mortared or Dry stone
walling) with dry joints or otherwise mortared stonewalls with stones bedded in
cement mortar as indicated on the drawings, as specified, or as may be ordered by the
Engineer.
The minimum mass of each stone used shall be 10 kg and its minimum dimension 75
mm.
(i) Plain packed stonewalls

A foundation trench shall be excavated down to rock, or to material with an adequate
bearing capacity at a minimum depth of 300 mm below ground level.
Large selected stones shall be used for the foundation layer. Flat and stratified stones
shall be laid with the largest dimension in the horizontal plane.
Stones shall be packed individually to stagger the joints and to provide a minimum of
voids, and shall be firmly bedded against adjoining stones.
The spaces between the larger stones shall be filled with spalls securely rammed into
place. The larger stones shall not bear on the spalls used for filling the voids. The top
and ends of the wall shall be neatly finished with selected copingstones.
The appearance of the completed wall shall present an even, tight surface.
(ii) Cement-mortared stone walls

The walling shall be constructed as specified in (a) above, with the exception that the
stones shall be wetted and set in a 6:1 sand: cement mortar.
The exposed parts of the stones on the wall faces shall be cleaned of all mortar by
washing or wire brushing. The mortar shall be flush pointed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, who may require a capping and end treatment of the same mortar.
Weep holes shall be provided as prescribed and shall be cleaned of mortar or any other
clogging material that may have entered during construction.
The walling shall be protected from the elements and kept moist for a minimum
period of four days after completion.
8903 CLASSES OF MASONRY

The class of masonry used in each part of the structure shall be that called for on the
plans.

(i) Class A
Class A Masonry shall consist of stones shaped, dressed, and laid broken-coursed in
cement mortar in accordance with Clause 8905 of these specifications.
Class A Masonry shall be more exacting than class B.
Both classes of masonry are intended for use in any part of a structure, Class A
Masonry shall be used primarily for major structures.
(ii) Class B
Class B Masonry shall consist of stones shaped, dressed, and laid broken-coursed in
cement mortar in accordance with Clause 8905 of these specifications.
Class B Masonry shall be less exacting than class A.
Both classes of masonry are intended for use in any part of a structure, Class B being
used primarily for minor structures.
(iii) Dimensioned Masonry

Dimensioned Masonry shall consist of broken-coursed ashlar masonry composed of
stone having two or more dimensions shown on the plans. It is intended for use in any
part of a masonry structure where appearance is an important factor, particularly in
arch rings copings, corner trim, etc,
8904 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STONE MASONRY STRUCTURES
(a) Stone
The stone shall be sound and durable, quarried, and shall be subject to the Engineer's
approval.
The stone shall preferably be native to the vicinity of the work and shall be of a kind
that previous use has proven to be satisfactory for the specified purpose.
The stones shall be properly protected at all times.
In addition to the above requirements, stone for dimensioned masonry shall be free of
reeds, rifts, seams, laminations, and minerals, which, by weathering, would cause
discoloration or deterioration.
(i) Sizes and shapes

Each stone shall be free from depressions and projections that might weaken it or
prevent it from being properly bedded, and shall be of such shape as will meet both
architecturally and structurally the requirements for the class of masonry specified.
When dimensions for stones are shown on the plans, they shall be of the size shown.
When no dimensions are shown on the plans the stones shall be furnished in the sizes
and face areas necessary to produce the general characteristics and appearance as
indicated on the plans.
In general, stones shall have thickness of no less than 12 cm. widths of not less than
l½ times their respective thickness, with minimum width of 30 cm. and lengths of not
less than 1.5 times their respective widths. Where headers are required their lengths
shall be not less than the width of bed of the widest adjacent stretcher plus 30 cm.

At least 50 percent of the total volume of the masonry shall be of stone having a
volume of least 0.03 cubic meters.
(ii) Dressing
The stone shall be dressed to remove any thin or weak portions.
Face stones shall be dressed to provide bed and joint lines with a maximum variation
from true line as follows:
(1) Class B Masonry 2 cm.
(2) Class A Masonry 5 mm.
(3) Dimensioned Masonry True.
(iii) Bed surface

Bed surfaces of face stones shall be normal to the faces of the stones for about 8 cm.
and from this point may depart from normal not to exceed 2.5 cm. in 30 cm. for
dimensioned masonry and 5 cm. in 30 cm. for all other classes.
(iv) Joint surfaces

In all classes of masonry except dimensioned masonry, the joint surfaces of face
stones shall form an angle with the bed surfaces of not less than 45 degrees.
In dimensioned masonry, the joint surfaces shall be normal to the bed surfaces. They
shall also be normal to the exposed faces of the stone for at least 5 cm from which
point they may depart from normal not to exceed 2.5 cm in 30 cm.
The corners at the meeting of the bed and joint lines shall not be rounded in excess of
the following radii:
(1) Class B Masonry.................. 2.5 cm.
(2) Class A Masonry ....... No rounding
(3) Dimensioned Masonry No rounding
(v) Arch ring stone joint surfaces

Arch ring stone joint surfaces shall be radial and at right angles to the front faces of
the stones.
They shall be dressed for a distance of at least 8 cm. from the front faces and so fits,
from which points they may depart from a plane normal to the face not to exceed 2
cm. to 30 cm
The back surface in contact with the concrete of the arch barrel shall be parallel to the
front face and shall be dressed for a distance of 15 cm. from the intrados.
The top shall be cut perpendicular to the front face and shall be dressed for a distance
of at least 8 cm. from the front.
When concrete is to be placed after the masonry has been constructed, adjacent ring
stones shall vary at least 15 cm. in depth.
(vi) Stratification
Stratification in arch ring stones shall be parallel to the radial joints and in other stones
shall be parallel to the beds.

(vii) Finish for exposed faces

Face stones shall be pitched to line along all beds and joints.
The kind of finish for exposed faces shall be as shown on the plans or the Special
Provisions. The following symbols will be used and they shall be understood to
represent the type of surface or dressing specified below:
(1) Fine Pointed ( F.P.)
In which the point depressions shall be approximately 1 cm. apart with
surface variation not to exceed 0.3 cm. from the pitch line.
(2) Medium Pointed (M.P.)
In which the point depressions shall be approximately 1 cm. apart with
surface variations not to exceed 0.80 cm. from the pitch line.
(3) Coarse Pointed ( C. P)
In which the point depression shall be approximately 2.5 to 3 cm. apart with
surface variations not to exceed 1 cm. from the pitch line.
(4) Split or seam face (S.)
In which the surface shall present a smooth appearance, be free from tool
marks, with no depressions below the pitch line and no projection exceeding
2 cm. beyond the pitch line.
(5) Rock faced ( R.F.)
In which the face shall be an irregular projecting surface without indications
of tool marks: with no concave surfaces below the pitch line, and with
projections beyond the pitch line, when measured in centimeters, not
exceeding the figure preceding the symbol as used on the plans or in the
special provisions e.g., "1½ R.F." means projections beyond the pitch line not
exceeding 3.7 cm. Where a "variable rock face is specified, stones of the
same height of projection shall be well distributed.
Unless otherwise specified on the plans, all class B masonry shall be coarse
pointed.
Removal of drill and quarry marks from the faces of stones in cement rubble
masonry will not be required.
(b) Quarry Operations

Quarry operations and delivery of stone to the point of use shall be organized so as to
insure keeping deliveries well ahead of masonry operations.
A sufficiently large stock of stone of the kinds being used in the work shall be kept on
the site at oil times, to permit adequate selection of stone by the masons.
(c) Mortar
Mortar shall consist of six parts by volume of fine aggregate or sand to one part by
volume of cement complying with the requirements of Division 8400 of theses
specifications.

(a) Excavation and backfill

Excavation and backfill shall conform to the requirements of Division 8100 of theses
specifications, modified as follows:
For filled spandrel arches the filling shall be carefully placed in such manner as to
load the ring uniformly and symmetrically.
The filling materials shall be mainly stone cut debris with preferably flat stone
acceptable to the engineer and shall be placed in horizontal layers, carefully tamped,
and brought up simultaneously from both haunches.
Wedge-shaped sections of filling material against spandrels, wings, or abutments will
not be permitted.
Round gravel stone shall be avoided.
(b) Falsework
Arch centering shall be constructed in accordance with construction drawings
submitted by the contractor as required by the Conditions of contact.
Suitable wedges shall be provided for raising or lowering the forms to exact elevation
and for taking up any settlement occurring during loading. Centering shall be lowered
gradually and symmetrically so as to avoid overstresses in the arch.
When directed, centering shall rest upon approved jocks in order to take up and
correct any slight settlement, which may occur after the placing of masonry has
begun.
In general, centering shall be struck and the arch made self-supporting before the
railing or coping is placed. For filled spandrel arches such portions of the spandrel
walls shall be left for construction subsequent to the striking of centers as may be
necessary to avoid jamming of the expansion joints.
When, in the opinion of the engineer, additional falsework and bracing are necessary
to hold the stones in proper position, the contractor shall construct such falsework and
bracing in a manner satisfactory to the engineer, but failure of the engineer to order
their construction shall not release the contractor from his obligation to build a
satisfactory structure.
(c) Selection and Placing

When the masonry is to be placed on a prepared foundation bed, the bed shall be firm
and normal to, or in steps normal to, the face of the wall, and shall have been
approved by the engineer before any stone is placed.
When it is to be placed on foundation masonry, the bearing surface of this masonry
shall be cleaned thoroughly and wetted immediately before the mortar bed is spread.
All Masonry shall be constructed by experienced workmen.
Face stones shall be set in random bond so as to produce the effect shown on the plans
and to correspond with the sample section approved by the engineer.
Care shall be taken to prevent the bunching of small stones or stones of the same size.
When weathered or colored stones or stones of varying texture, are being used care

shall be exercised to distribute the various kinds of stones uniformly throughout the
exposed faces of the work.
Large stones shall be used for the bottom courses and large, selected, stones shall be
used in the corners. In general, the stones shall decrease in size from the bottom to the
top of work.
All stones shall be cleaned thoroughly and wetted immediately before being set, and
the bed which is to receive them shall be clean and moistened before the mortar is
spread. They shall be laid with their longest faces horizontal. In full beds of mortar,
and the joints shall be flushed with mortar.
(1) Class A Masonry
All stones, excluding exposed faces of individual stones (Facing Stones),
shall be laid with their longest axis normal to the face of the wall in which the
stones are set.
The exposed facing stones, excluding bond stones, shall be parallel to the
face of the wall. Bond stones shall be provided at the rate of not less than
one to every square meter of exposed face.
Bond stones shall measure not less than 150mm by 150mm on the exposed
face and not less than 450mm in length or the full thickness of the wall if the
latter is less than 450mm.
(2) Class B Masonry
All stones, including exposed faces of individual stones and bond stones,
shall be laid with their longest axis normal to the face of the wall in which the
stones are set.
Bond stones shall be provided at the rate of not less than one to every square
meter of exposed face.
Bond stones shall measure not less than 150mm by 150mm on the exposed
face and not less than 450mm in length or the full thickness of the wall if the
latter is less than 450mm.
The stones shall be so handled as not to jar or displace the stones already set.
Suitable equipment shall be provided for setting stones larger than those that
can be handled by two men.
The rolling or turning of stones on the walls will not be permitted.
If a stone is loosened after the mortar has taken Initial set, it shall be
removed, the mortar cleaned off, and the stone re-laid with fresh mortar.
Arch ring stone shall be carefully set to exact position and hold in place with
hardwood wedges until the joints are packed with mortar.
(d) Beds and Joints

The thickness of Beds and joints for face stones shall be as follows:

Class of Masonry Beds in mm Joints in mm

Class A 20 to 100 20 to 70
Class B 20 to 120 20 to 100
Dimensioned (see note) 20 t0 50
Note: The thickness of beds in dimensioned masonry may vary from
2 cm. to 2.5 cm. from the bottom to the top of the work, but in each
course the beds shall be of uniform thickness throughout.
Unless shown otherwise on the plans, beds shall not extend in on unbroken line
through more than 5 stones, and joints through more than 2 stones.
Joints in dimensioned masonry shall be vertical. In all other masonry, joints may be at
angles with the vertical from 0 to 45 degrees.
Each face stone shall bond with all contiguous face stones at least 15 cm.
longitudinally and 5 cm. vertically.
At no place shall corners of four stones be adjacent to each other.
Cross beds for vertical walls shall be level and for battered walls may vary from level
to normal to the batter fine of the face of the wall.
All arch ring joints shall be completely filled with mortar.
(e) Headers
When headers are required they shall be distributed uniformly throughout the walls of
structures so as to form at least one-fifth of the faces.
(f) Backing
The backing shall be built mainly of large stones and in a workmanlike manner.
The individual stones composing the backing and hearting, shall be well bonded with
the stones in the face wall and with each other.
All openings and interstices in the backing shall be filled completely with mortar or
with spalls surrounded completely by mortar.
(g) Coping
Copings, if called for, shall be as shown on the plans.
Where copings are not called for, the top of the wall shall be finished with stones wide
enough to cover the top of the wall, from 0.5 to 1.5 m. in length, and of random
heights, with a minimum height of 15 cm., Stones shall be laid in such a manner that
the top course is an integral part of the wall.
The tops of the top courses of stone shall be pitched to line in both vertical and
horizontal planes.
(h) Parapet walls

Selected stones, squared and pitched to line and with heads dressed, shall be used in
ends of parapet walls and in all exposed angles and corners.

Headers shall be well interlocked and as many as possible shall extend entirely
through the wall.
Both the headers and stretchers in the two faces of the wall shall be well interlocked in
the heart and shall comprise practically the whole volume of the wall. All interstices
in the wall shall be completely filled with cement grout or with spalls completely
surrounded with mortar or grout.
(i) Facing for Concrete

Unless otherwise specified, the stone masonry shall be constructed before placing
concrete. When provided for in the special provisions or upon the approval of the
engineer, the concrete may be placed before constructing the stone masonry.
(i) Stone masonry constructed prior to placing concrete

Hooked steel anchors consisting of φ12 bars each bent into an elongated letters S shall
be spaced 60 cm. part both horizontally and vertically unless closer spacing is shown
on the plans or ordered in writing by the engineer.
To improve the bond between the stone masonry and the concrete backing, the back of
the former shall be made as uneven as the stones will permit.
Each anchor shall be rigidly embedded in a horizontal joint of the masonry with one
end 5 cm. from the faces of the stones. The other end shall project approximately 25
cm into the concrete backing.
When the stone facing has been laid and the mortar has attained sufficient strength, all
surfaces against which concrete is to be placed shall be cleaned carefully and all dirt,
loose material, and accumulations of mortar dropping, removed. Picks, scrapers, and
wire brooms shall be used for this purpose if necessary. If compressed air is available
on the work, it shall be used to blow out the dust and dirt. Water shall be dashed
forcibly against the stones and into the joints. Use of a stream from a hose is
preferable for this purpose.
In depositing concrete, the top surface immediately adjacent to the stones shall be held
slightly low and a neat cement grout of the consistency of cream shall be carried on
top of the concrete and against the masonry at all times, so that the entire exposed
areas of all the stones are coated with grout.
All interstices of the masonry shall be filled and the concrete thoroughly spaded and
worked until it is brought into intimate contact with every part of the back of the
masonry.
(ii) Concrete Placed before constructing masonry

Except where otherwise shown on the plans, a thickness of 20 cm. shall be allowed for
facing.
Galvanized metal slots with anchors for the stone work, or other approved type of
metal anchor, shall be set vertically in the concrete face at a horizontal spacing of not
to exceed 60 cm.
The slots shall have a temporary filling of felt or other material to prevent them from
being filled with concrete.
During the setting of the stone facing, the metal anchors shall be fitted tightly in the
slots at an average vertical spacing of 60 cm. The Engineer will mark on the concrete

backing the approximate location of the anchors, and the anchor shall be placed in the
stone joint nearest to the mark. At least 25 percent of the metal anchors shall have a
short right-angle bend to engage a recess to be cut into the stone. The anchors shall
extend to within 8 centimeters of the exposed face of the stonework.
Where the shape of the concrete face is unsuitable for the use of metal slots, ties
consisting of AASHTO Standard Gauge No. 9 galvanized iron wire shall be placed as
directed by the engineer, but there shall be no less than one wire tie for each 0. 15
square meter of exposed stone surface.
In laying the stone, the concrete face shall be kept wet continuously for 2 hours
preceeding the placing of the stone, and all spaces between the stone and concrete
shall be thoroughly filled with mortar.
Immediately after laying, all exposed stone surfaces shall be cleaned and kept clean of
loose mortar and cement stains.
(j) Pointing
The Pointing or finishing of till joints shall be as shown on the plans or as specified in
the Special Provisions.
When raked joints are called for, all mortar in exposed face joints and beds shall be
raked out squarely to the depth noted on the plans. Stone faces in the joints shall be
cleaned free of mortar.
When weather joints are called for, the beds shall be weather struck. The joints shall
be slightly raked to conform to the bed weather joint and in no case shall the mortar be
flush with the faces of the stones.
The mortar in joints on top surfaces shall be crowned slightly at the center of the
masonry to provide drainage.
(k) Weep Holes

All walls and abutments shall be provided with weep holes.
Unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the weep holes shall
be placed at the lowest points where free outlets can be obtained and shall be spaced
not more than 3 meters center to center.
(l) Cleaning Exposed Faces

Immediately after being laid, and while the mortar is fresh, all face stone shall be
thoroughly cleaned of mortar stains and shall be kept clean until the work is
completed.
Before final acceptance and if ordered by the Engineer, the surface of the masonry
shall be cleaned using wire brushes and asetic acid if necessary.
(m) Weather Limitations

No placing of stone shall be done in freezing weather except by written permission
from the Engineer and then only by the use of such precautionary methods as he may
prescribe for doing the work and protecting it at all times, such permission and the use
of the methods prescribed shall not, however, release the Contractor from his
obligation to build a satisfactory structure.

All work damaged by cold weather shall be removed and replaced.

In hot or dry weather the masonry shall be satisfactorily protected from the sun and
shall be cleaned using wire brushes and asetic acid if necessary.
Item 89.01 Stone masonry walls:

(a) Plain packed stone masonry walls (Class of masonry described)...... cubic meter (m3)
(b) Cement-mortared stone masonry walls (Class of masonry described) .........................
The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meters of stone masonry of
the various classes, complete in place and accepted.
When shown as a separate pay item in the bid schedule, separate measurement shall
be made for that portion of any class of masonry contained in a specifically designated
part of the structure.
In computing the volume for payment, the dimensions used shall be those determined
by the payment lines or payment volumes shown on the plans or ordered in writing by
the Engineer.
The computed volumes shall not include any concrete or stone masonry paid for under
any other item. One-half the volume of the mortar joint between different classes of
stone masonry will be included in the measurement for each adjoining class of
masonry. The projections of face stones extending beyond the pitch lines will not be
included. The volumes of stones labeled on the plans as "cap stones" shall be their
actual volumes.
No deductions will be made for weep holes, drain pipe, or other openings of less than
0.2 square meter or for chamfers or other ornamental cuts that amounts to 5 percent or
less of the volume of the stone in which they occur.
The tendered rate for each type of stonewall shall include [full compensation for
furnishing all materials, trimming the areas, placing the stones and cement-mortared
masonry where necessary, and all other work necessary for completing the walls in
accordance with the specifications.
The quantities of concrete, reinforcing steel, Excavation of foundation trenches and
other contract pay item, which constitute the completed and accepted structure shall
be measured for payment in the matter prescribed for.
The quantity, determined as provided above, shall be paid for at the contract price per
unit of measurement, respectively, for each of the particular pay items listed, that is
shown in the bid schedule, which price and payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing and placing all materials including mortar, and for all labor, tools
equipment, and incidental necessary to complete the work prescribed in this and other
divisions.

DIVISION T8000: CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES FOR

STRUCTURES
T8001 SCOPE
This Division covers the requirements with regard to the construction tolerances
applicable to the various structures and structural elements.
T8002 DEFINITIONS
Except were otherwise specified the following aspects of construction to which
tolerances apply shall have the meanings attributed to them below:
(i) Position
The position of a structure or structural element shall be the horizontal position of its
center line(s) and/or center point(s) in relation to the overall setting out of the Works
as shown on the Drawings.
(ii) Alignment
The alignment of a structure or structural element shall be the alignment of its center
line(s) in relation to the overall setting out of the Works as shown on the Drawings.
Deviation from true alignment shall be measured in degrees of an arc.
(iii) Leading And Cross Sectional Dimensions

The leading and cross sectional dimensions of a structure or structural element shall
be the dimensions relating to width, length, height, thickness, etc. which collectively
determine its shape as shown on the Drawings. Dimensional tolerances not relating to
leading or cross sectional elements shall be shown on the Drawings.
(iv) Levels
The level of any structure or structural element shall be the level of the upper or lower
surface as may be relevant with reference to an established datum level on site.
(v) Surface Regularity

Surface regularity is the shape of a surface with reference to a 3m straight edge (or
template in the case of curved surfaces) placed on the surface.
The tolerance on surface regularity is expressed as a distance by which the surface
tested may deviate from a straight edge (or template in the case of curved surfaces)
held against the surface.
T8003 TOLERANCES
The tolerances given below shall be the maximum permissible deviations from the
specified dimensions, levels, alignment, positions, etc. as shown on the Drawings of
the structures or structural elements.

(a) Foundations
(i) Piles:
Item Tolerance
1. Position 0.167 times the diameter of the pipe, or 100mm, whichever
is greater
2. External dimensions
2.1 Prefabricated piles + 25mm/ - 5 mm
2.2 Cast in situ piles + not specified/ - 0 mm
3. Pile head level:
3.1 Average level of
trimmed/cut pile head + 25 mm/ - 25 mm
3.2 Verticality or rake 1.5%
4. Straightness: For the precast piles the permissible maximum deviation
from straight is 5 mm for piles up to 3 m long and 1 mm
more for each additional meter of pile length.
(ii) Caissons:
Item Tolerance
1. Position of top of caisson 150 mm
2. Verticality 1.5%
3.Dimensions:
3.1 Wall thickness + 25 mm/ - 5 mm
3.2 Outer dimension of circular, rectangular or square cross-section + 25 mm/- 25 mm
4. Level: Upper level of trimmed/cut caisson head levels
4.1 Maximum deviation of average level + 25 mm/ - 25 mm
4.2 Maximum deviation any individual level + 50 mm/ - 50 mm
5. Foundation fill :
5.1 Average level top of fill + 25 mm/ - 25 mm

(b) Footings, pile capping slabs, caisson cover slabs, etc.
Item Tolerance
1. Position 15 mm
2.Alignment:
2.1 Alignment of individual elements 5°
2.2 Alignment of elements as they collectively determine
alignment of structure as a whole 1 minute
3. Dimensions:
3.1 Leading dimensions in plan +25mm/ - 25 mm
3.2 Thickness +25mm/ - 15 mm
4. Level: Average level of slabs, footings, etc + 25 mm/ - 25 mm
(c) Columns, walls, pier, abutments, etc
Item Tolerance
1. Position 10 mm
2.Alignment:
2.1 Alignment of walls, piers, abutments and of column
groups 2 minute
3. Dimensions:
3.1 Leading dimensions walls, piers and abutments +25mm/ - 25 mm
3.2 Thickness of walls, piers and abutments and cross + 25mm/ - 3% of the
sectional dimensions of columns: specified dimensions within
the range 5 mm to 25 mm
4. Levels: Average levels of finished or trimmed/cut + 10 mm/ - 10 mm
columns, piers, walls, abutments etc
5.Verticality:
5.1Using ordinary formwork 1 in 400: Maximum 25mm
5.2 Using sliding formwork 1 in 200: Maximum 50mm.
6. Surface regularity:
6.1Using ordinary formwork 3 mm
6.2 Using sliding formwork 6 mm

(d) Bridge And Culvert Superstructure
Item Tolerance
1. Position 10 mm
2.Alignment:
2.1 Alignment Superstructure as a whole 1 minute
3. Dimensions:
3.1 Leading dimension in plan +25mm/ - 25 mm
3.2Thickness of slabs, width and depth of beams + 15mm/ - 3% of the specified dimensions
within the range 5 mm to 15 mm
4. Surface regularity: 3 mm
(all elements other than upper surface of deck)
(e) Precast Beams

The following tolerances shall apply to pre-cast beams in addition to the requirements
stated in Sub-clause T8003(d) above for superstructure.
The width of the gap between contiguous beams shall not exceed twice the specified
nominal gap shown on the Drawings or the nominal gap plus 40 mm, whichever is the
lesser and the overall width between the outer most beams on the bridge deck shall be
within 40 mm of the specified width.
Item Tolerance
1. Straightness or bow: The deviation from the
intended line measured on the overall length of
the beam or part thereof shall not exceed the
following:
1.1 In the horizontal plane 0.5 mm per metre length of the beam
within the tolerance range of 6 mm to 15
mm.
1.2 In the vertical plane
1.2.a I-beams 2 mm per metre length of the beam within
the tolerance range of 6 mm to 20 mm.
1.2.b Other beams 1 mm per metre length of the beam within
2. Camber:
2.1 The soffits of adjacent beams when placed Shall not at any place differ by more than 2
side by side on the bridge deck: mm per metre length of the beam within
2.2 The lengths of precast beams before stressing Shall be: + 0.1% of the total length within
the tolerance range of: + 5 mm to: + 20
mm.
3. Surface regularity: 3 mm

(f) Precast Beams And Panels
(i) Members Other Than Flat Panels:
Item Tolerance
1. Cross-section
1.1 overall dimensions - less than 600 mm; 003 mm
1.2 not less than 600 mm, but less than 150 mm; 006 mm
1.3 not less than 1500 mm + 10 mm, -6 mm
2. Cross-section, dimension of sections such as webs, ribs
and flanges:
2.1 less than 1500 mm; 006 mm
2.2 not less than 1500 mm + 10 mm, -6 mm
3.Length, critical dimensions of abutting members. + 0, -6 mm
4. Length, non-critical -
4.1less than 6 m; 0002 length/1000
4.2 not less than 6 m. 0006 mm
5. Twist. 10 mm/m width per 3 m of length

(ii) All Units:
Item Tolerance
1. Straightness of edges and flatness of surfaces. Length/1000
2. Warp
2.1 up to 5 m diagonal; 6 mm
2.2 over 5 m diagonal. 10 mm
3. Squareness of corners -
3.1 up to 2 m on shorter side; 3 mm
3.2 over 2 m, up to 4 m, 5 mm
3.3 over 4 m. 6 mm
4. Holes or openings and the like, diameter or 3 mm
side dimensions.
5. Location of holes or openings 7 mm
6. Grooves, width and depth. 2 mm
7. Position of individual connecting bolts, bolt With 3 mm of their true positions in
holes, projecting metal or other devices in any the group in which they are cast.
associated grout (e.g. the joint of two precast
units).
8. Longitudinal locations of any such groups Within 6 mm of its true position in the
(mentioned in item (7)) unit in which it is cast, if the tolerance
does not adversely affect the proper
assembly of the whole structure.
(g) Precast Prestressed Concrete Structural Elements

The length, cross sectional dimensions and straightness of all precast prestressed
concrete structural elements shall comply with the requirements of measurements for
determining compliance with these requirements shall be taken at 28 ± 2 days after the
stress has been applied.

Item Tolerance
1. Length
1.1 Up to 3 m ± 6 mm
1.2 3 to 4.5 m ± 9 mm
1.3 4.5 to 6 m ± 12 mm
1.4 Additional for every subsequent 1 m ± 1 mm
2. Cross section (each direction)-
2.1 up to 500mm ± 6 mm
2.2 500 to 750mm ± 9 mm
2.3 Additional for every subsequent 250mm ± 3 mm
3. Straightness or bow (deviation from intended line).
3.1 Up to 3 m 6 mm
3.2 3 to 6 m 9 mm
3.3 6 to 12 m 12 mm
3.4 Additional for every subsequent 1 m 1 mm
(h) Reinforcing Steel

Except for the requirements given hereunder no tolerances are given for the placing
and fixing of reinforcing steel. Steel shall, however, be neatly and accurately fixed in a
manner that is consistent with proper workmanship and the structural integrity of the
member. Specifically the following requirements shall apply:
(i) Tension Steel

The actual position of tension steel shall not deviate from the true position by an
amount that would reduce the effective lever arm by more than 2% of the overall
depth of the member or 10 m, whichever is the greater.
(ii) Concrete Cover

The concrete cover on reinforcing steel shall nowhere be less than the specified cover.
(iii) Spacing between Bars

The spacing between closely spaced parallel bars, especially in beams and columns,
shall, unless otherwise detailed, not be less than the maximum size of aggregate used
in the concrete.
(iv) Bending of Reinforcement

The requirement of BS 4466 regarding dimensional tolerances for the cutting and
bending of reinforcing steel shall apply with the proviso that the other requirements
stated in this clause must be met even if the tolerances in BS 4466 are not exceeded.

(i) Prestressing
Prestressing tendons shall be placed and maintained in position within the following
accuracy's:
Item Tolerance
1. In the direction of the width of the member
1.1 For members of up to 200 mm in depth + 20 mm
1.2 For members exceeding 200 mm in depth + 10
2. In the direction of the depth of the member

2.1 For members of up to 200 mm in depth + 0.025 x depth
2.2 For members exceeding 200 mm in depth + 0.010 x depth within the tolerance range of
+ 5 mm to+ 25 mm
(j) Bridge Bearings
Item Tolerance
1. Position and level: Within 5mm of the position shown on the

drawings and with in 2 mm of the
required level.
2. Dimensional tolerance elastomeric bearings

2.1Overall plan dimensions ± 3mm - 2mm
2.2Thickness of individual elastomeric layers ± 10%
2.3Overall thickness bearing pad ± 2%
2.4 Variation of one major surface out of 1.5mm
parallel with other major surfaces

(k) Fabrication And Assembly Tolerances For Structural Steel
Item Tolerance
1. General
1.1 Fabrication and assembly tolerances + 2 mm.
on all dimensions for structural steel
1.2 Holes for fasteners of up to 25 mm in 2 mm larger than the diameter of the fastener and
diameter holes for larger fasteners not more than 3 mm
larger than the diameter of the fastener.
2. Cross section The tolerances cross sectional dimensions of rolled
sections shall be as specified in BS 4 or BS 4848
as appropriate.
3. Straightness
3.1 For compression members and beams 1/1000 of the length between the points which are
(other than purlins and sheeting rails). laterally restrained
3.2 For other members 1/500 of Overall length but not more than 25 mm
4. Length
4.1 For compression members faced at
both ends for bearing. + 1 mm
4.2 For other members + 0, - 4 mm
5. Bearing surfaces
Where two steel surfaces are required to shall not exceed 1 mm when the members in
be in contact in bearing the maximum contact are aligned.
clearance between the bearing surfaces
6.Accuracy of erection
Steelwork shall not be out of plumb over by more than 5 mm or 1/1000 of the distance
any vertical distance whichever is greater.
(l) Concrete Pavement Slab

The work described in this sub-section shall be constructed to the tolerances given
below.
(i) Level and Grade

The finished surface of completed paving shall be within ± 10mm of design level at
all points. The lot shall be deemed to comply with the requirements specified for
surface levels if at least 90 % of the level measurements are within + 15 mm of the
specified levels.
The level on the finished surface of the base course for road pavements to be overlain
with segmental paving shall be trimmed within + 10mm or - 0mm of design levels.
Hangs of grade both longitudinally and transversely shall be eased over to avoid
protuberance of adjoining units.
The minimum length of ease shall be 3 unit lengths. Subject to easing constraints, the
surface shall not deviate more than 5mm from a 3 metre straight edge.
Sand bedding material shall not be used as a levelling material to compensate for base
finishing outside the above tolerances.

Paving abutting a gutter to which it drains shall be laid to finish 4-6mm above the
edge of the gutter. Other paving edges shall be laid to finish within -0mm to +2mm of
the level of abutting paving or structures.
The difference in level (lipping) between adjacent paving units shall not be more than
2mm.
The finished surface of the base material shall drain freely without ponding.
Isolated spots, where the surface levels deviate by more than 20 mm of the specified
levels shall be repaired to bring the deviation to within the + 15 mm tolerance.
Deviation from the specified longitudinal grade due to deviations from level shall not
exceed the following:
Length of Grade Measured in meter Maximum Variation from

Specified Grade (%)
2 0.34
5 0.27
10 0.21
20 0.13
30 0.08
(ii) Width of Pavement and the Position of Pavement Edges

The average width of each pavement shall be at least equal to the specified width, and
the edge of the pavement shall not deviate by more than 25 mm from the specified
position.
(iii) Joints
Transverse joints shall be installed within the tolerances given in Clause 7112.
Longitudinal joints shall be installed within the tolerances given in Clause 7113.
The tolerance for the groove width of sawn joints shall be +/- 0.5 mm.
(iv) Thickness
The lot will be considered to comply with the requirements for layer thickness if:
• At least 90 % of all the thickness measurements taken before any
thickness repairs are made is equal to or greater than the specified
thickness minus 14 mm; and
• The mean layer thickness of the lot is not less than the specified
thickness minus 0.5 mm
• Isolated spots where the actual thickness is less than the specified
thickness less 18 mm shall be repaired so as to fall within the 14 mm
tolerance.
The thickness of the slab shall be determined by accurate levelling in the same
positions at random selected points before and after construction of the slab, and also
by measuring (an average of 4 measurements per core) on cores drilled from the slab.

(v) Cross Section

When tested with a 3 m straightedge placed at right angles to the road centerline, the
surface shall not deviate from the bottom of the straightedge by more than 6 mm.
(vi) Surface Regularity

When tested with a rolling straightedge, the number of surface irregularities in excess
of 3 mm shall not exceed any of the following:
Average number of surface irregularities per 100 m taken over 300 m - 600 m sections
:5
Number of surface irregularities taken over 100 m sections: 8
The maximum value of any individual irregularity when measured with the rolling
straight-edge or a 3 m straightedge laid parallel to the road centerline shall not exceed
7 mm.
(vii) Dowels
Dowels shall be positioned within the tolerances given in Clause 7115 (b).
Random checks of the dowels shall be ordered by the Engineer by taking cores at the
position of the bar ends.
(viii) Joint Sealers

Dimensional tolerances for preformed self-expanding cork joint sealer in the
unexpanded state shall be ± 1.5mm in width and ± 3.0mm in depth.
(ix) Subbase
The level of the subbase bedding layer shall not deviate by more than 5mm above or
10mm below the specified level.
The surface of the subbase bedding layer shall not deviate by more than 10mm from a
3m straightedge or 10mm in 3m from the true vertical curve on vertical curves.
(x) Kerbs and Inverts

Finished concrete shall be within 10mm of the specified alignment and level, at all
points.
The relative deviation of any two points on the surface from their true position shall
not exceed 5mrn in 3m.
Deviation on vertical curves shall not exceed 5mrn in 3m from the true vertical curve.
These tolerances are subject to the non-accumulation of water at any point.
(xi) Footpaths and Paving

Footpaths and paving shall be within 25mm of the specified alignment and level at all
points.
The finished surface shall be free from abrupt irregularities.
The relative deviation of any two points on the surface from their true position shall
not exceed 3mm or 1 in 270 of the distance between them, whichever is the greater.
These tolerances are subject to the non-accumulation of water at any point.

(xii) Mower Strips and Edging

Finished concrete shall be within 25mm of the specified alignment and level at all
points. The finished surface shall be free from abrupt irregularities.
(m) Miscellaneous
(i) Chamfers
Fillets used to form chamfers shall be made of hardwood, plastic or metal to a
tolerance of 1 mm in cross sectional dimensions and the actual chamfer on the
concrete shall not vary by more than 3 mm from the specified dimensions.
(ii) Kerbs, copings, sidewalks, bridge railings, parapets, Guard rails, etc.
The elements shall be constructed to the specified dimensions within a tolerance of + 5
mm on any dimension.
The alignment shall not deviate from the true alignment by more than 10 mm in any
place nor shall the alignment deviate by more than 5 mm from the true alignment over
any length of 5 m.
(iii) Natural Stone, Precast and In-situ Concrete, and Asphalt Kerbs
Natural stone, precast and in-situ concrete and asphalt kerbs shall be constructed to the
lines and levels shown in the contract to within the tolerances given below.
Construction Tolerances for Kerbs
Type of Kerb Tolerances
Alignment1 Level1 Straightness2
Natural stone ± 25mm. ± 10mm Max.10mm.in 3m
Precast concrete ± 25mm ± 10mm -Ditto-
In-situ concrete ± 25mm ± 10mm - Ditto-
Asphalt ± 50mm ± 5mm Max.20mm.in 3m

1
Relative to design line and level
2
Maximum deviation measured horizontally and vertically relative to a 3m.
Straightedge.
In addition to complying with the requirements of the Table above there shall be no
difference in alignment between the ends of individual elements of natural stone or
precast concrete kerbs of more than 3mm.
(iv) Metal Beam Guardrails

Metal beam guardrails shall be constructed in the positions shown in the contract
within the following tolerances:-
(1) Alignment
The installed position of guardrails shall not depart from the design
alignment by more than ± 30mm nor deviate from the straight or required
radius by more ± 15mm. in any 10m. length.

(2) Height
Except for ramps, the beams shall be erected at the design height above the
edge of the nearest adjacent carriageway, or, if the guardrail is located more
than 1.5m. from the edge of the carriageway, above the level of the surface
vertically beneath the beam, within a tolerance of ± 30mm.

SERIES 9000: ANCILLARY WORKS

TABLE OF CONTENT
TABLES AND FIGURES ............................................................................................................... 6
DIVISION 9100: GABIONS ......................................................................................................... 7

9101 Scope................................................................................................................................ 7
9102 Materials .......................................................................................................................... 7
(a) Rock ........................................................................................................................ 7
(b) Wire......................................................................................................................... 7
(c) Galvanizing ............................................................................................................. 7
(d) Wire Mesh and Clip Fasteners ................................................................................ 8
(e) Geotextile Filter Fabric ........................................................................................... 8
9103 Construction Of Gabion Cages ........................................................................................ 9
(a) General .................................................................................................................... 9
(b) Selvedges .............................................................................................................. 10
(c) Diaphragms and End-panels ................................................................................. 10
(d) Binding and Connecting Wire .............................................................................. 10
(e) Tolerances ............................................................................................................. 10
(f) Unit Weight Requirements and Test..................................................................... 10
9104 Construction Of Gabions ............................................................................................... 11
(a) Preparation of the Foundation and Surface for Bedding ...................................... 11
(b) Assembly............................................................................................................... 11
(c) Rockfilling ............................................................................................................ 11
(d) Gabions using PVC Coated Wire ......................................................................... 11
Item 91.01 Foundation trench excavation and backfilling............................................ 12
Item 91.02 Surface preparation for bedding of gabions................................................ 12
Item 91.03 Gabions ....................................................................................................... 12
Item 91.04 Filter fabric.................................................................................................. 12
DIVISION 9200 : DELINEATORS, MARKERS AND KILOMETRE POSTS ................................... 13

9201 Scope.............................................................................................................................. 13
9202 Materials ........................................................................................................................ 13
(a) Flexible Delineators, Markers, and Kilometers Posts........................................... 13
(b) Concrete Posts....................................................................................................... 15
9203 Manufacturing: Concrete Posts...................................................................................... 15
9204 Spacing Of Posts ............................................................................................................ 15
9205 Erection .......................................................................................................................... 15
(a) Ground Mounted Flexible Units ........................................................................... 15
(b) Guide Rail Mounted Flexible Units ...................................................................... 15
(c) Barrier Curb Mounted Flexible Units ................................................................... 16
(d) Concrete Posts....................................................................................................... 16
Item 92.01 Delineators, markers and kilometer posts ................................................... 16
DIVISION 9300: GUARDRAILS ................................................................................................ 18

9301 Scope .............................................................................................................................. 18
9302 Materials......................................................................................................................... 18
(a) Guardrails .............................................................................................................. 18
(b) Guardrail Posts ...................................................................................................... 18
9303 Erection .......................................................................................................................... 19
9304 Requirements.................................................................................................................. 19
Item 93.01 Guardrails on posts...................................................................................... 20
Item 93.02 End units and miter units............................................................................. 20
DIVISION 9400: ROAD SIGNS .................................................................................................. 21

9401 Scope .............................................................................................................................. 21
9402 Materials......................................................................................................................... 21
(a) Structural Steel ...................................................................................................... 21
(b) Aluminum.............................................................................................................. 21
(c) Bolts, Nuts and Rivets ........................................................................................... 21
(d) Steel Plate .............................................................................................................. 22
(e) Particle Board ........................................................................................................ 22
(f) Concrete ................................................................................................................ 22
(g) Fiberglass............................................................................................................... 22
(h) Retro-Reflective Material...................................................................................... 23
(i) Paint....................................................................................................................... 23
(j) Corrosion Protection Tape..................................................................................... 23
9403 Manufacturing Of Road Sign Faces And Supports ........................................................ 23
(a) Road Sign Faces .................................................................................................... 23
(b) Welding ................................................................................................................. 24
(c) Aluminum Extrusions ........................................................................................... 24
(d) Galvanizing ........................................................................................................... 24
9404 Painting........................................................................................................................... 24
(a) Colors, Symbols and Legend ................................................................................ 24
(b) Preparation of Surfaces and Application of Paint ................................................. 25
(c) Time of Painting .................................................................................................... 25
(d) Painting of concrete............................................................................................... 25
9405 Storage And Handling .................................................................................................... 25
9406 Erection Of Road Signs.................................................................................................. 25
(a) Position.................................................................................................................. 25
(b) Excavation and Backfilling ................................................................................... 26
(c) Erection ................................................................................................................. 26
(d) Field Welding ........................................................................................................ 26
(e) On Site Painting .................................................................................................... 26
(f) Time of Erection.................................................................................................... 26
9407 Protection And Maintenance .......................................................................................... 26
9408 Dismantling, Storing And Re-Erecting Existing Road Signs......................................... 26
Item 94.01 Sign faces with painted background. Symbols, lettering and borders in
Engineering grade retro-reflective material with signboard.................................. 27
Item 94.02 Sign supports ............................................................................................... 27
Item 94.03 Concrete in road sign footings including excavation and backfilling ......... 27
Item 94.04 Dismantling, storing and re-erecting road signs.......................................... 27
Item 94.05 Dismantling and storing road signs............................................................. 28
DIVISION 9500: ROAD TRAFFIC MARKINGS AND ROAD STUDS ........................................... 29

9501 Scope.............................................................................................................................. 29
9502 Materials ........................................................................................................................ 29
(a) Road-Marking Paint.............................................................................................. 29
(b) Retro-reflective road-marking paint ..................................................................... 29
(c) Thermoplastic road-marking material................................................................... 29
(d) Color ..................................................................................................................... 29
9503 Weather Limitations ....................................................................................................... 29
9504 Mechanical Equipment For Painting ............................................................................. 29
9505 Surface Preparation ........................................................................................................ 30
9506 Setting Out Of Road Traffic Markings .......................................................................... 30
9507 Application Of Paint ...................................................................................................... 30
9508 Application Of Retro-Reflective Beads ......................................................................... 31
9509 Road Studs ..................................................................................................................... 31
9510 Tolerance Requirements................................................................................................. 31
(a) Width..................................................................................................................... 31
(b) Position ................................................................................................................. 31
(c) Alignment of Markings......................................................................................... 31
(d) Broken Lines ......................................................................................................... 32
9511 General ........................................................................................................................... 32
9512 Faulty Workmanship Or Materials................................................................................. 32
9513 Protection ....................................................................................................................... 32
Item 95.01 Paint (specify road marking, retro-reflective road marking and/or
Thermoplastic) ...................................................................................................... 32
Item 95.02 Variation in rate of application ................................................................... 33
Item 95.03 Roadstuds .................................................................................................... 33
DIVISION 9600: LANDSCAPING AND GRASSING..................................................................... 34

9601 Scope.............................................................................................................................. 34
9602 Materials ........................................................................................................................ 34
(a) Fertilizer................................................................................................................ 34
(b) Grass Cuttings ....................................................................................................... 34
(c) Grass Seed............................................................................................................. 34
(d) Topsoil................................................................................................................... 34
9603 Landscaping The Areas .................................................................................................. 35
(a) Shaping ................................................................................................................. 35
(b) Trimming .............................................................................................................. 35
9604 Preparation Of Areas For Grassing ................................................................................ 35
9605 Grassing ......................................................................................................................... 35
(a) Planting of Grass Cuttings .................................................................................... 35
(b) Seeding.................................................................................................................. 36
(c) Topsoiling only ..................................................................................................... 36
(d) The grassing of borrow pits, temporary deviations, camp sites, access roads and
stockpile sites ........................................................................................................ 36
9606 Establishment And Maintenance Of The Grass ............................................................. 36
(a) Watering, Weeding, Cutting and Replanting......................................................... 36
(b) Acceptable Cover.................................................................................................. 37
(c) Maintenance Period............................................................................................... 37

9607 General ........................................................................................................................... 37
(a) Time of Planting .................................................................................................... 37
(b) Traffic on Grassed Areas ....................................................................................... 37
(c) Erosion Control ..................................................................................................... 37
(d) Responsibility for Establishing an Acceptable Cover ........................................... 37
Item 96.01 Stockpiling of Topsoil ................................................................................. 38
Item 96.02 Preparation of areas for grassing................................................................. 38
Item 96.03 Grassing....................................................................................................... 38
DIVISION 9700: PAINTING OF STEEL....................................................................................... 40

9701 Scope .............................................................................................................................. 40
9702 General. .......................................................................................................................... 40
(a) Specifications ........................................................................................................ 40
(b) Paint formula ......................................................................................................... 40
9703 Surface Preparation-General Requirements ................................................................... 41
9704 Surface Preparation-Materials And Methods ................................................................. 42
9705 Procedures For Treatment At Areas Of Mechanical Damage Or Other Surface Defects42
9706 Procedures For Treatment Of Local Failure In Protective coatings............................... 43
9707 Workmanship Standards For The Surface Preparation Of Steel By Blast Cleaning,
Abrading, Grinding And Cleaning ................................................................................. 43
9708 Paint And Similar protective coatings............................................................................ 44
9709 Storage Requirements And Keeping Periods For Paints................................................ 44
9710 Application Of Paint....................................................................................................... 44
9711 Procedure Trials ............................................................................................................. 45
Item 97.01 Preparation of steelwork prior to coating .................................................... 46
Item 97.02 Protective system to steelwork .................................................................... 46
DIVISION 9800: FENCING ....................................................................................................... 47

9801 Scope .............................................................................................................................. 47
9802 Materials......................................................................................................................... 47
(a) Posts, strays, standards and droppers .................................................................... 47
(b) Bolts for strays ...................................................................................................... 47
(c) Barbed wire ........................................................................................................... 47
(d) Gates...................................................................................................................... 47
(e) Timber posts .......................................................................................................... 48
(f) Manufacturing tolerances for wire ........................................................................ 48
9803 Types Of Fencing ........................................................................................................... 48
9804 Protection Of Livestock ................................................................................................. 48
9805 Clearing Of Fence Line .................................................................................................. 48
9806 Installing Posts And Standards ....................................................................................... 49
9807 Installing Wire ................................................................................................................ 49
9808 Closing Openings Under Fences .................................................................................... 49
9809 Existing Fences .............................................................................................................. 49
9810 Installing Gates............................................................................................................... 50
9811 General Requirements .................................................................................................... 50
Item 98.01 Fencing ........................................................................................................ 50
Item 98.02 New gate (size and type indicated) ............................................................. 50

Item 98.03 Moving of existing fences and gates........................................................... 50
TABLES AND FIGURES
Table 9102-1 Rock size............................................................................................................. 7

Table 9102-2 Coating of wire ................................................................................................... 8
Table 9102-3 Mesh size ............................................................................................................ 8
Table 9102-4 Physical Requirements for Geotextile ................................................................ 9
Table 9103-1 Standard sizes of boxes and mattresses ............................................................ 10
DIVISION 9100: GABIONS
9101 SCOPE
This Division covers the construction of gabion walls and aprons for the construction of
retaining walls, lining of channels, revetments, and other anti-erosion structures in accordance
with the details shown in the Contract.
9102 MATERIALS
(a) Rock
Stones or rock for filling gabions shall be obtained from sources located by the Contractor and
Rocks used as filling for cages shall be clean, hard, sound, durable and unweathered boulders or
rock fragments.
No rock particles shall exceed the maximum size given below and at least 85% of the rocks shall
have a size equal to or above minimum size given in Table 9102-1 below:
Table 9102-1 Rock size
Depth of cage (mm) Minimum (mm) Maximum (mm)

0.2 75*,95** 125
0.3 100 200
0.5 100 250
1.0 100 300
* Using 60 x 80 mm mesh
**Using 80 x 100 mm mesh
(b) Wire
All wire used in the fabrication of the gabions and in the wire operations during construction
shall be to ASTM A 910, Grade # 1010 or 1015 or to BS 1052, having a tensile strength of not
less than 350 MPa.
Cold drawn steel wire fabric shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 55.
(c) Galvanizing
All wire used in the fabrication of gabions shall be galvanized in accordance with the provisions
of ASTM A 641 with Class 3 coating or aluminized with a coating weight per ASTM A 809 or
BS 729 for Class A heavy galvanized mild steel wire.
The minimum mass of the zinc- coating shall be according to the figures shown in Table 9102-2
below:
Table 9102-2 Coating of wire
Nominal diameter of coated Mass of coating

wire (g/m2 surface area)
(mm)
3.7-4.0 290
3.0-3.6 275
2.2-2.9 260
below 2.2 245
The adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be such that when the wire is wrapped six
turns round a mandrel of four times the diameter of the wire, it shall not flake nor crack to such
an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers.
(d) Wire Mesh and Clip Fasteners

Wire mesh shall be hexagonal-woven mesh wherein the joints are formed by twisting each pair
of wires through three half turns.
The tightness of the twisted joints shall be such that a force of not less than 1.7 kN is required
when pulling on one wire in order to separate it from the other wire provided each wire is
prevented from turning and the applied forces and the wire are all kept in the same plane.
The diameter of the wire and the size of mesh used shall be as shown in Table 9102-3 below:
Table 9102-3 Mesh size
Depth of gabion (m) Mesh size (mm) Wire diameter (mm)

0.5 and over 80x100 2.5
100x120 2.7
0.2 -0.3 80x100 2.2
60x80 2.0
The shorter dimensions of the mesh shall be taken from center to center of the twisted joints, and
the larger dimensions shall be between the inside ends of twisted joints
OR; Wire used in the body of the mesh shall not be thinner than 11 gage for galvanized baskets
and 12 gage for PVC coated baskets. Selvage wire shall not be less than 10 gage, and lacing and
tie wire shall not be thinner than 13 gage.
Clip fasteners shall be galvanized and/or PVC coated as required and may be of any type that
provides positive lock when installed. They shall be stronger than the mesh to which they are
attached.
Galvanizing on the steel clips shall be in accordance with ASTM A 641 with a Class 3 coating,
and aluminizing shall be in accordance with ASTM A 809.
(e) Geotextile Filter Fabric

Where indicated on the drawings or ordered by the Engineer, one layer of approved geotextile
material shall be placed on the prepared surface prior to the placing of gabions.
The material shall be placed as directed in vertical strips with a minimum overlap of 300 mm,
and shall be properly fastened to prevent any movement or slipping during the placing of
gabions.
The geotextile shall meet the requirements given in Table 9102-4 below:
Table 9102-4 Physical Requirements for Geotextile
Property Test Method Units Specifications(1)

ASTM
Grab Strength D 4632 N 1400/900
Sewn Seam Strength D 4632 N 1260/810
Tear Strength D 4533 N 500/350
Puncture Strength D 4833 N 500/3500
Burst Strength D 3786 kPa 3500/1700
Permittivity D 4491 s-1 0.02
Apparent Size Opening D 4791 mm 0.60(2)
Ultraviolet Stability D 4355 % 50%(3)
(1) The first values apply to geotextiles that break at <50 percent elongation (ASTM
D 4632). The second values apply to geotextiles that break at >/=50 percent elongation
(ASTM D 4632).
(2) Maximum average rolls value.
(3) After 500 hours of exposure
9103 CONSTRUCTION OF GABION CAGES
(a) General
Gabions shall consist of woven steel mesh boxes or mattresses filled with stones.
Gabion panels shall be either proprietary manufacture or woven on site as described in the
Contract.
Gabion cages shall be fabricated of wire mesh of the size and type and selvedge as specified
below. The cages shall be sub- divided into cells by wire mesh diaphragms and will be of two
types:
Boxes, which are generally used for the construction of gabion walls. Boxes are sub-divided into
cells by diaphragms spaced at 1.0 m intervals.
Mattresses, in which the maximum width shall be 2.0 m, the maximum depth shall be 0.5 m.
Mattresses shall be sub-divided by diaphragms into cells having a width of 500 mm or 1.0 m as
specified.
Standard sizes of boxes and mattresses are given in Table 9103-1 below:
Table 9103-1 Standard sizes of boxes and mattresses
Dimensions Boxes Mattresses:

Lengths: 1,2,3,4 and 6 meters 6m
Widths: 1m 2m
Depths: 0.3 m, 0.5 m, and 1.0 m 0.2 m, 0.3 m, and 0.5 m
Diaphragm spacing: 1.0 meter 500 mm or 1.0 m as directed
Other gabions may be supplied, provided the Engineer's approval is obtained beforehand.
(b) Selvedges
The cut edges of all mesh used in the construction of gabions, except the bottom edge of
diaphragms and end panels, shall be selvedged with wire of at least twice the diameter of the
mesh wire diameter.
Where the selvedge is not woven integrally with the mesh but has to be fastened to the cut ends
of the mesh, it must be attached by binding the cut ends of the mesh about it so that a force of
not less than 8.5 kN applied in the same plane as the mesh, at a point on the selvedge of a mesh
sample 1 m long, is required to separate it from the mesh.
(c) Diaphragms and End-panels

The diaphragms and end-panels shall be selvedged on the top and vertical sides only.
The end-panels shall be attached by twisting the cut ends of the mesh wires at the bottom of the
panel about the selvedge on the base of gabions. Similarly, the diaphragms shall be attached by
twisting the cut ends of the mesh to the twisted joints of the mesh of the base of the gabion. In
each case the force required to separate the panels from the base should not be less than that
required to break the mesh over the same length.
(d) Binding and Connecting Wire

Sufficient binding and connecting wire must be supplied with the gabion cages to perform all the
wiring operations to be carried out in the construction of the gabion work specified in Clause
9104 below.
The diameter of wire shall be 2.0 mm.
(e) Tolerances
A tolerance on the specified diameters of all wire of 2% shall be permitted.
The length of the cages is subject to a tolerance of 3% and the width of cages is subject to a
tolerance of 3% up to a maximum of 25 mm.
(f) Unit Weight Requirements and Test

The unit weight of the filled gabion basket shall be at least 1600 kg/ cu. m (100 pounds per cubic
foot). Should the unit weight be less than 1600 kg/ cu. m, the gabion will be rejected.
The Contractor shall conduct unit weight tests to prove the density of completed gabions by
weighing a selected gabion basket filled with stones.
One unit weight test shall be conducted for each 500 cu. m of gabion placed.
9104 CONSTRUCTION OF GABIONS
(a) Preparation of the Foundation and Surface for Bedding

The bed, on which the gabion cages are to be laid prior to filling, has to be leveled to a depth as
shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer so as to present an even surface.
If necessary, cavities between rock protrusions shall be filled with material similar to that
specified in Sub-clause 9102(a).
Where required, a foundation trench along the toe of the revetment or wall shall be excavated to
the dimensions shown on the drawings or indicated by the Engineer.
(b) Assembly
The methods of erection, stretching, aligning, wiring and filling the gabions shall generally be in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as approved by the Engineer but, nevertheless,
sufficient connecting wire braces shall be provided and tensioned between the vertical sides of
each of the outer visible cells to prevent the deformation of boxes as they are being filled with
stone.
It is essential that the corners of gabion cages be securely wired together to provide a uniform
surface and ensure that the structure does not appear as a series of posts or panels. Consecutive
courses of boxes should preferably be 'bonded' as in brickwork to avoid the coincidence of
vertical joints.
(c) Rockfilling
(i) Boxes in Retaining Walls

Particular care shall be exercised in filling visible faces of gabion boxes where only selected
stone of adequate size shall be used and prepacked to obtain a fair faced finish.
The filling of boxes shall be done in stages in order to prevent deformation and bulging. Boxes
shall be filled to just below the level of the wire braces after which the braces shall be twisted to
provide tension.
Care must be taken to ensure that consecutive layers of cages being filled are filled evenly to a
level surface ready to receive the next course.
(ii) Mattresses used in Revetments and Aprons

The filling of the 0.3 m and 0.5 m gabions forming aprons and revetments has to be carried out
by spreading random stones on the first layer and using selected stones for the top layer so as to
present a dry stone-pitched surface.
(d) Gabions using PVC Coated Wire

When gabions using PVC coated wire is specified, the wire used for the gabion mesh, and for
wiring the gabions during construction shall be galvanized wire as specified in Clause 9102(b)
onto which is extruded a polyvinylchloride (PVC) coating.
The average thickness of the PVC coating shall be as specified, either 0.30 mm for use in mildly
corrosive conditions or 0.55 mm for use in marine and other severely corrosive or abrasive
conditions.
The minimum thickness of the coatings shall be 0.25 mm and 0.4 mm respectively, and the
coatings shall be capable of resisting the deleterious effects of natural weather and salt-water
exposure.
The PVC coated gabions shall be of a proven brand and the brand shall be subject to the
Engineer's approval.
Item 91.01 Foundation trench excavation and backfilling

(a) In solid rock (material requiring blasting) ......................................... cubic meter (m3)
(b) In all other classes of material............................................................ cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of each class of excavation made in
accordance with the authorized dimensions.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for excavating in each class of material
including for unavoidable over break, for trimming trenches and compacting trench inverts, for
backfilling and consolidating backfill, and for disposal of surplus excavated material.
Item 91.02 Surface preparation for bedding of gabions ....................... square meter (m2)
The unit of measurement for the leveling and preparation of areas to receive gabions shall be the
square meter to the neat dimensions of wall foundations, revetments, or aprons.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the excavation, filling cavities with rock;
for leveling the ground surface ready to receive gabion cages in retaining walls, aprons, and
revetments.
Item 91.03 Gabions

(a) Gabion boxes (Type, size of box and mesh indicated)....................... cubic meter (m3)
(b) Gabion mattresses (Type, depth of mattresses, mesh size an diaphragm spacing
indicated) .......................................................................................................... cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of the rock-filled cages and the quantity shall
be calculated from the dimensions of the gabions indicated on the drawings or prescribed by the
Engineer, irrespective of any deformation or bulging of the completed gabions.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for supplying all the materials, including rock
fill, wire-mesh cages, galvanizing, PVC-coating, tying and connecting wires, loading,
transporting and off-loading, the assembling and filling of the cages, and any other work
necessary for constructing the gabions.
Item 91.04 Filter fabric ........................................................................... square meter (m2)

(type and grade indicated)
The unit of measurement shall be the square meter of area covered with filter fabric placed in
position.
DIVISION 9200 : DELINEATORS, MARKERS AND KILOMETRE POSTS
9201 SCOPE
This Division covers the supply and erection of delineators, markers and kilometer posts in
positions and in accordance with the dimensions as shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
9202 MATERIALS
(a) Flexible Delineators, Markers, and Kilometers Posts

Flexible units shall be made of a fiberglass reinforced, thermosetting, high polymer resin, an
extruded polycarbonite resin, or other materials, which are resistant to ultraviolet and infrared
radiation, and which meet the following minimum physical and performance requirements:
(i) Dimensions
1) Ground Mounted
Ground mounted flexible units shall have a minimum width of 75 millimeters and a minimum
thickness of 3 millimeters. The length of each unit shall be variable such that the top of the
reflective area is positioned 1200 millimeters above the near roadway edge.
2) Guide Rail Mounted
Beam guide rail mounted flexible units shall have a minimum width of 75 millimeters and a
minimum thickness of 2.5 millimeters. Each unit shall have a variable height such that the top
of the reflective area is 800 ± 50 millimeters (1000 ± 50 millimeters for deceleration and
acceleration lanes) above the near roadway edge.
The base of each unit shall be designed to mount over the I-beam spacer, or to the top of a wood,
polymer, or other type of spacer, of the beam guide rail.
3) Barrier Curb Mounted
Concrete barrier curb mounted flexible units shall be the same as for beam guide rail mounted
units except that the panel shall be 90 by 90 millimeters with a minimum thickness of 2.5
millimeters. The base shall form a “T” shape with the panel.
(ii) Composition
Flexible units shall contain a minimum of 40 percent consumer recycled material in its
construction.
For ground mounted flexible units, the portion of the unit above ground shall be one component,
or shall be bonded together if it consists of two or more components. The shape of the ground
mounted unit shall be conducive to protection of the applied retroreflective sheeting from
abrasion.
The base and panel for beam guide rail or concrete barrier curb flexible units shall be designed
to withstand repeated impacts, after which, the panel returns to its functioning position (90
degrees from the plane of the roadway surface).
(iii) Color
Flexible units shall be white or opaque in color.
(iv) Impact Resistance

Flexible units shall be self-erecting to within 10 degrees of original upright position within 15
minutes of impact on five separate occasions by a vehicle traveling at 90 kilometers per hour.
Tests shall be conducted at zero degrees, 22 degrees, and 45 degrees, variance of the long cross-
sectional axis of the unit to the perpendicular of vehicle direction. The same unit(s) shall be
used for all angle impact tests, total impacts per unit equaling 15. The re-erected unit shall retain
the original cross-section, show no evidence of shedding or splintering, and shall retain 80
percent of its original retroeflective sheeting.
(v) Heat Resistance

A unit shall be conditioned in an oven for two hours at 60 ± 2oC. After removal from the oven,
the unit shall be bent backwards at 90 degrees from the upright, simulating a field hit. The unit
shall, without cracking, recover to its original position within ten seconds for each of three
bends. Testing shall be complete within two minutes. Color shall remain unchanged.
(vi) Cold Resistance

The same units(s) tested for heat resistance shall be tested for cold resistance. The unit shall be
conditioned for 24 hours at – 18oC, then subjected to the same testing as for heat resistance. The
unit shall conform to the same recovery and color retention standards as for heat resistance.
(vii) Weather Resistance

A unit shall be exposed to 1 000 hours of weathering in accordance with ASTM G 26 with no
significant discoloration.
(viii) Installation
Ground mounted flexible units shall be capable of being driven by hand into the ground by only
one person to proper depth without damage to the unit. The unit shall remain in the position in
which it is installed. All special fittings, attachments, or special tools shall be compatible with
that type of flexible unit. The unit’s manufacturer shall provide installation instructions and
make available all special tools required for installation.
(ix) Depth indicator Mark

A depth indicator mark shall be located on the front (reflective) face of the drivable ground
mounted flexible units at a height of 450 millimeters from the bottom end of the unit with a
weather resistant marking material so as to not wash off or weather away prior to unit
installation.
(x) Mowability
Ground mounted flexible units shall be capable of being mowed over in both directions a total of
20 times (ten each direction) by a standard flail mower equipped with a front-mounted deflector
and adjusted to a minimum mowing height of 75 millimeters, without damage. Mowable,
drivable, flexible units must fold parallel and flat to the ground so as to not deflect upward and
into the flail mower mechanism passing above and over the unit causing any damage thereto.
(xi) Sampling Rate

Five samples per lot size of approximately 10 000 to 20 000 units will be chosen at random by
the Engineer for laboratory testing.
(b) Concrete Posts
(i) Concrete
Concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of Division 8400.
(ii) Paint
Paint for posts shall be selected from the Ministry’s list of approved road sign paints. Paint for
the top of the post shall be selected from the Ministry’s list of approved retro- reflective road
sign paints.
9203 MANUFACTURING: CONCRETE POSTS

Posts shall be manufactured to the dimensions shown on the drawings, or as directed by the
Engineer. A mixture of four parts concrete sand to one part Portland cement shall be used.
Forms shall be smooth and have accurate dimensions. The mixture shall be placed in the forms
and vibrated on a vibrating table or by means of other approved methods. The posts shall be
reinforced as shown on the drawings and shall have an F3 surface finish.
The posts shall be true to shape, smooth, and without honeycombing or other blemishes.
The recess near the top of the post shall be painted with the reflecting paint specified, while the
remainder of the top half of the post shall be painted with white road marking paint.
9204 SPACING OF POSTS

The spacing of units shall be as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
9205 ERECTION
(a) Ground Mounted Flexible Units

Flexible units shall be driven vertically into the ground to a minimum depth of 450 millimeters.
Units shall be installed so that the plane face of the center of the reflective area is at an angle of
zero degrees with a perpendicular to the direction of traffic.
Retroreflective sheeting, Type IV-A shall be pre-applied to the front (surface facing traffic) of
the unit by the manufacturer. The retroreflective sheeting shall cover a minimum area of 75 by
300 millimeters, beginning a maximum of 50 millimeters from the top of the post. The color
shall be white when the delineator is located on the right side to the direction to traffic and shall
be yellow when the delineator is located on the left side to the direction of traffic.
(b) Guide Rail Mounted Flexible Units

Flexible units shall be mounted on the spacer of beam guide rail using either a “U” channel base
on the I-beam spacer or a flat base attached to a wood, polymer, or other solid top spacer. The
base shall be attached to the spacer using an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the
base and panel. The first unit shall be placed on the beam guide rail end treatment, positioned so
that the reflector area is facing the direction of traffic, then subsequently every 25 meters (13
sections of guide rail) for tangent mainline roadway, and every 13.5 meters (seven sections of
guide rail) for curved mainline roadways with radii less than 580 meters. If a parabolic flare in
the beam guide rail exists, the second unit shall be placed at the end of the flared section with
subsequent units spaced as stated above. If the distance between the end of the beam guide rail
is greater than 6 meters on curved mainline roadways, or 12 meters on tangent mainline
roadways, a unit shall be installed on the last post or end treatment.
Retroreflective sheeting, Type IV-A shall be applied to the upper portion of the flexible unit
panel. The retroreflective sheeting shall cover a minimum area of 115 by 115 millimeters (115
by 230 millimeters for deceleration and acceleration lanes). The color shall be white when the
delineator is located on the right side to the direction of traffic and shall be yellow when the
delineator is located on the left side to the direction of traffic.
(c) Barrier Curb Mounted Flexible Units

The first flexible unit shall be placed at the beginning of the concrete barrier curb section,
positioned so that the reflector area is facing the direction of traffic, then subsequently every 24
meters. If the distance between the end of the concrete barrier curb and the adjacent unit is
greater than 12 meters, a unit shall be installed on both sides of barrier curb openings.
Concrete barrier curb mounted flexible units shall be attached to the side of the barrier curb, 75
millimeters from the top of the barrier, using a method recommended by the manufacturer of the
unit.
Retroreflective sheeting, Type IV-A shall be applied to the upper portion of the flexible unit
panel facing traffic and perpendicular to the top of the concrete barrier curb. The retroreflective
sheeting shall cover an area of 90 by 90 millimeters. The color shall be white when the
delineator is located on the right side to the direction to traffic and shall be yellow when the
delineator is located on the left side to the direction of traffic.
(d) Concrete Posts

Posts shall be erected after completion of the bituminous surfacing.
Holes shall be excavated in the shoulder and posts placed vertical and square to the road
centerline.
Backfilling shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm thick right from the bottom of
the hole. Surplus excavated material shall be disposed of to spoil.
The posts shall be painted immediately after placing.
Item 92.01 Delineators, markers and kilometer posts

(a) Delineators (material)............................................................................. number (No.)
(b) Markers (material).................................................................................. number (No.)
(c) Kilometer posts (material)....................................................................... number (No.)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of units supplied and erected according to the
Specifications.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the supply of all materials and labor for
making, transporting, setting out, excavation and backfilling of all holes and the disposal of
surplus excavated material placing, painting, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete the Works described in this Division.
DIVISION 9300: GUARDRAILS
9301 SCOPE
This Division covers the supply, installation and maintenance of metal plate beam guardrails at
locations and in conformity with the details, dimensions and design shown on the drawings or as
9302 MATERIALS
(a) Guardrails
Dimensions of guardrails and terminal sections shall be as shown on the drawings.
Guardrails shall be supplied together with all bolts, nuts, washers and fixing materials required
other than bolts for fixing to posts.
The W-beam rail element, backup plates, and terminal sections shall consist of 12 gage steel
formed into a beam not less than 12 inches ( 300 mm) wide and 3 inches (75 mm) deep. The 6
inch channel rail and splice plate shall be in conformance with AASHTO M 183.
Beam rail elements and terminal sections shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M
180, Class A, Type 2. The minimum average weight of Zinc coating shall be 2 ounce per sq.
foot. Bolts, nuts, washers, plates, rods and other hardware shall be galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A 153.
OR
Guardrails shall comply with the requirements of BS 149. When galvanized guardrails are
called for on the drawings or in the Bill of Quantities, a hot-dip galvanized zinc coating that
complies with the requirements of BS 763 for coatings on Type A1 articles shall be applied.
All bolts, nuts and washers shall have a hot-dip galvanized zinc coating that complies with the
requirements of BS 763 for coatings on Type C1 articles. Galvanized guardrails shall not be
nested when stacked for storage.
(b) Guardrail Posts

Normally only concrete posts shall be used for supporting the guardrails, but under certain
circumstances, timber or box beam posts may be used. Concrete posts shall be of the type and
size shown on the drawings or described in the project specifications.
Box beam posts shall conform to AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA A Guide to Standardized Highway
Barrier Hardware, 1995 Edition.
Timber posts shall be supplied in lengths as shown on the drawings and comply with the
requirements of AASHTO M168 or BS 457.
Posts shall have a top diameter of at least 150 mm. Posts with a top diameter up to 230 mm will
be acceptable, provided that posts of widely varying diameter are not used together in the same
length of guardrail.
Posts shall be drilled and shaped as shown on the drawings and provided with the necessary
bolts, nuts, washers and spacer posts for fixing.
Timber posts and spacer blocks shall be preserved in accordance with any method specified in
AWPA C14 or BS 4072. No cutting, drilling or shaping will be permitted subsequent to
preserving. Where cutting of posts is, however, unavoidable, the Engineer may permit that the
required length be cut off the bottom of a post provided the exposed area is subsequently treated.
Timber posts shall not exhibit excessive cracking at the ends particularly cracks aligned at an
angle of more than 45 degrees to the guardrail. Posts, which, in the opinion of the Engineer,
exhibit a degree of cracking that, would seriously impair their life or strength shall not be used.
9303 ERECTION
The holes for the posts shall be of sufficient size to permit proper setting of the posts and to
allow sufficient room for backfilling and tamping. At least 1 m of the posts shall be embedded
in the ground.
The holes for the posts shall be spaced to suit the standard length of guardrail supplied. Where
shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer, posts shall be set at half spacing. The hole
for the concrete block at the end of a length of guardrail shall be neatly excavated and the top
120 mm shall be shuttered.
The posts, spacer blocks (if applicable) and guardrails shall be completely erected, set true to
line and level, so that the rail is at the required height above the level of the completed road
shoulder and the lap shall be in the direction of the traffic movement. The guardrail shall be
suitably braced to prevent any movement, and all bolts tightened prior to any backfilling of
holes.
After the Engineer has signified his approval of the guardrails so erected, the holes shall be
backfilled with a 12:1 soil:cement mixture. The material may be either mixed by hand or
mechanically and the correct quantity of water added to ensure that the mixture is placed at or
near to optimum moisture content. The mixture shall then be placed and thoroughly rammed in
layers not exceeding 100 mm compacted thickness. The approach ends, where the guardrail has
to be bent down and anchored, shall be constructed as shown on the drawings.
When the backfilling is complete and the bracing removed, the posts must be rigid, vertical and
the guardrail true to line and level and firmly fastened to the posts. Excess excavated material
shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
All guardrails shall be erected in such a way that there are no projecting ends that might interfere
with or endanger traffic. The edges and the center of the rail element shall contact the spacer
block, or the post where no spacer blocks are used. Guardrail elements shall lap in the direction
of the traffic and, if specified, guardrails shall be provided with terminal sections, which shall be
lapped on the traffic face. All splices of rail elements shall be at a post, and plate ends shall
make contact through the entire area of the splice.
Guardrails installed with non-buried, blunt ends shall employ reflective tape on the blunt end.
Such preformed reflective tape shall be furnished in 100mm wide rolls conforming to ASTM D
4592, type 1.
9304 REQUIREMENTS
The completed guardrail shall be neat, and there shall be no visible deviations from line and
grade. The posts shall be straight and vertical. The rail beam shall not be warped but shall be in
a vertical plane parallel to the road centerline except at flared sections. The galvanized surface
on the rail shall be smooth and continuous, free from abrasions and scratches. Any damage to
the surface shall be made good at the Contractor's expense.
Guardrails not complying with the specified requirements shall be replaced or otherwise made
good.
Item 93.01 Guardrails on [material] posts Galvanized ...................................... meter (m)

The unit of measurement shall be the meter of guardrail as erected excluding end units, miter
units.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for furnishing all materials and labor and for
erecting the guardrails complete with posts, spacer blocks, bolts, nuts, washers, reinforcing
plates and for excavating and backfilling post holes and removing surplus excavated material.
Item 93.02 End units and miter units

(a) End units ................................................................................................. number (No.)
(b) Terminal return unit.................................................................................. number(No.)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of units of each type erected.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for all labor, plant and materials required to
install the units as shown on the drawings.
DIVISION 9400: ROAD SIGNS
9401 SCOPE
This Division covers the supply and erection of permanent road traffic signs alongside and over
the carriageway, ramps and crossroads at interchanges and at the locations indicated on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The signs shall be of the standard regulatory, warning
and information signs as detailed on the drawings and shall comply with prevailing Regulations
except where otherwise indicated on the drawings.
9402 MATERIALS
(a) Structural Steel

Structural steel shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M270 grade 250 or BS 4360 for
the type of steel specified or shown on the drawings. All structural steel, including posts, shall
be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A123 or BS 729.
Steel posts shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A499 or BS 4848 Part 2.
(b) Aluminum
Sheet Aluminum signs shall be constructed of material conforming to ASTM B 209M alloy
6061-T6 or alloy 5052-H38
Aluminum plate shall 2.0 mm in thickness.
Aluminum posts shall be of the sizes detailed on the drawings and shall conform to the
provisions of ASTM B221M or BS 1474 (HE.9).
(c) Bolts, Nuts and Rivets

Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be of the same material for each attachment, and meet the
following requirements:.
Bolts ..........................ASTM B 209 2024-T4 Aluminum
........................................................ ASTM A 307 Steel
......................................... ASTM F 593 Stainless Steel
Washers .....................ASTM B 209 2024-T4 Aluminum

..................................................AASHTO M 183 Steel
.........................................ASTM A 240 Stainless Steel
Nuts ........................... ASTM B 211 2017-T4 Aluminum

........................................................ ASTM A 307 Steel
......................................... ASTM F 594 Stainless Steel
Locknuts ....................ASTM B 211 2017-T4 Aluminum

.........................................................ASTM A 307 Steel
..........................................ASTM F 594 Stainless Steel
Rivets........................ ASTM B 209 6061-T6 Aluminum
Post Clips................. ASTM B 179 356 T-T6 Aluminum
Angle and Z-Bar....... ASTM B 209 6061-T6 Aluminum
Strap & Mounting Bracket .........ASTM A 412, type 201
All steel parts shall be galvanized per ASTM A 123. Steel bolts and related hardware shall be
galvanized per ASTM 153.
Blind rivets used for fixing sign faces to square tubing framework shall be manufactured from or
coated with a material that will not cause corrosion through electrolytic action. Blind rivets used
for joining aluminum extrusions shall be hardened aluminum blind rivets.
(d) Steel Plate

Steel plate shall be 2.00 mm thick and comply with the requirements of ASTM A525 or BS
4360.
Unless otherwise or shown on the drawings, steel plate shall be galvanized in accordance with
the requirements of ASTM A525 or BS 729 (Heavy grade).
(e) Particle Board

Particle board shall be an exterior grade timber particle board 12.7 mm thick, unless otherwise
specified or indicated on the drawings, and consisting of a phenolated, resin bound timber
particle core faced with a phenolated resin impregnated paper overlay, heat bonded under high
pressure to form a homogeneous structure.
The particleboard shall comply with the relevant physical requirements for Type B-B NIST
specification PS-1 or Type M board as specified in BS 5669.
(f) Concrete
Concrete shall be manufactured and placed as specified in Division 8400. Normally Class 20/20
concrete shall be used for the erection of road signs, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or
(g) Fiberglass
Fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester laminate panel shall be acrylic modified and UV
stabilized for outdoor weather-ability.
Make fiberglass reinforced panels conform to the following mechanical and physical properties:
Mechanical Property Averaged Minimum ASTM

Requirement Test
Avg. Tensile Strength 69 MPa min. D638M
Avg. Tensile Modulus 8.3 GPa min. D638M
Avg. Flexural Strength 140 MPa min. D790M
Avg. Flexural Modulus 8.3 GPa min. D790M
Avg. Compression Str. 220 MPa min. D695M
Avg. Compression Mod. 9.7 GPa min. D695M
Punch Shear 90 MPa min. D732
Thickness 3.4 +/-0.1mm
Size, dimension < 3.7m +/-3mm D3841
Squareness in 3.7 m length +/-3mm D3841
Surfaces, top and bottom Smooth
Color, visually uniform gray, MunselR range N.7.5/ - N.8.5/
Coefficient of lineal thermal expansion 0.01µm/mm/°C max. D696
Impact resistance, -54 to100°C 0.54 kg from 18.3 m D3841
Flame resistance 25 mm max. D635
Weather resistance, 3000 +/-100 h grade II min. D3841
(h) Retro-Reflective Material

Retro-reflective material shall be supplied in engineering grade which material shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM D 4956 or BS 873 Part 6. It shall be selected from the Ministry’s list
of approved retro-reflective materials.
The material shall be supplied with a pressure sensitive or heat applied adhesive backing
protected by a removable liner.
(i) Paint
Paints for road signs shall be selected from the Ministry’s list of approved road sign paints.
Project acceptance will be based on the appearance of an approved brand name on the container
label. All paints and solvents shall conform to Federal air pollution regulations, including those
for the control (emission) of volatile organic compounds (VOC) as established by the designated
environmental protection agency.
The paint shall be delivered to the Site in sealed containers bearing the name of the manufacturer
and the type of paint.
The viscosity of the paint shall be such that it can be applied without thinning.
(j) Corrosion Protection Tape

Corrosion protection tape used between aluminum and steel shall be "Scotchrap 50" or an equal
approved material.
9403 MANUFACTURING OF ROAD SIGN FACES AND SUPPORTS
(a) Road Sign Faces

Road sign faces shall be manufactured in strict accordance with the details of the prevailing
Traffic (Signs) Regulations or as shown on the drawings. They shall be manufactured from
either steel plate, aluminum plate or fiberglass according to what is specified. Wherever
possible, road sign faces shall be manufactured as one unit. Road signs that are too large to be
transported as one unit can, with the approval of the Engineer, be manufactured in sections. The
completed sections shall be assembled in the shop prior to delivery to ensure that all sections fit
together properly and that the legends are properly spaced and aligned. Joints in sign faces shall
only be provided at locations and to details approved by the Engineer. The signs shall be faced
with Engineering Grade retroreflective material.
Direct contact between aluminum plate and steel supporting framework shall be avoided by the
application of corrosion protection tape to the sign face over the contact areas.
(b) Welding
All welding of steelwork shall be carried out in accordance with the standards laid down in
AASHTO/AWS D1.5 Bridge Welding Code or BS 5135. Welding shall be done before painting.
(c) Aluminum Extrusions

Aluminum extrusions for sign faces shall be joined together by blind rivets or bolts. They shall
preferably not be joined longitudinally but, if this cannot be prevented without excessive waste,
they shall be joined neatly and joints staggered. No sections shorter than 500 mm shall be used.
Where aluminum extrusions are to be faced with retro- reflective background material, it shall be
pre-applied to individual sections before assembly with the material taken around the face edges
of each extension for at least 10 mm. Retro- reflective material shall be heated to facilitate
binding around edges without damaging the material. Where possible, letters across the joint
between two extrusions should be avoided.
(d) Galvanizing
Where the galvanizing of structural steel signboard frames and signboard supporting structures
is specified, it shall be done as far as is practicable after welding. Where, however, this is not
practicable, the steel sections shall be galvanized before assembly and then welded. All welds
shall be thoroughly cleaned, loose material removed and dressed after which the welds shall be
coated with two coats of an approved zinc-rich paint.
Unless otherwise specified in the Bill of Quantities, galvanized steel posts will not require
painting.
Where details for the construction of sign faces, the framework of the sign faces and the
attachment thereof to the supporting framework are not shown on the drawings, the Contractor
shall design these himself and submit the details to the Engineer for approval before
manufacture.
9404 PAINTING
(a) Colors, Symbols and Legend

Paint colors, symbols, legends and borders used on road signs shall comply with the regulations
of prevailing Traffic (Signs) Regulations.
The colors and shades shall conform to the colors and shades specified in the Ministry’s
approved list of road sign paints.
(b) Preparation of Surfaces and Application of Paint

Immediately before painting, prepare the surface according to the following:
o Clean the surface
o Remove dirt, dust, and other contaminants from the surface using methods recommended
by the paint manufacturer
o Thoroughly dry the surface
o Determine that the surface temperature is between 10 and 40°C.
o Determine that the surface temperature is 3°C or more above the dew point according to
ASTM E337
o Determine that the humidity is 85 percent or less, unless specified otherwise on the
manufacturer’s product data sheet
Unless otherwise specified, aluminum and galvanized steel road signs will not require painting.
(c) Time of Painting

Painted shall not be carried out more than six months prior to erection.
(d) Painting of concrete
(i) Surface preparation

The surface of the concrete to be painted shall be cleaned of all dust, loose particles, laitance,
scum, and other deleterious materials, washed and allowed to dry.
(ii) Sealing and priming

The surface shall be sealed with an approved clear sealer and primed with undercoat diluted to
50 %.
(iii) Undercoat and finishing

An undercoat shall be applied after priming, followed by two finishing coats of road marking
paint. If shown on the drawings, the finishing coats shall consist of a plastic textured coating of
a manufacture approved by the Engineer, applied by means of a sponge roller.
9405 STORAGE AND HANDLING

All road signs or portions of road signs shall be so handled and stored in a weather-proof
storeroom to prevent any permanent deformation or damage to painted surfaces.
All unpainted surfaces and steelwork shall be protected against corrosion.
9406 ERECTION OF ROAD SIGNS
(a) Position
Road signs shall be erected in the positions shown on the drawings or indicated by the Engineer.
(b) Excavation and Backfilling

Excavations for the erection of road signs shall be made according to the dimensions shown on
the drawings. Where the excavations are to be backfilled with soil, a 1:12 cement:soil mixture
shall be made and backfilled at optimum moisture content in 100 mm thick layers and
compacted to a minimum of 90% of modified AASHTO density.
Where posts or structures are to be fixed in concrete, or where concrete footings are to be cast,
the concrete, formwork and reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of Division 8400.
The holes shall be completely filled with concrete up to the level shown on the drawings or
indicated by the Engineer. The upper surface of the concrete shall be neatly finished with
sufficient fall to ensure proper drainage.
(c) Erection
Road signs shall be erected as shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer. During
erection, the structural steelwork shall be firmly bolted and protected in order that no buckling or
damage is caused during erection, or by the equipment used for erection. Posts to which road
signs are to be fixed shall be vertical, and the undersides of road signs shall be horizontal after
completion of erection.
(d) Field Welding

All welding done during erection shall comply with the requirements for welding during
manufacture.
(e) On Site Painting

All painting done after erection shall comply with the requirements for painting during
manufacture. The Contractor at his own cost shall make all places where the paintwork has been
damaged during erection good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(f) Time of Erection

Road traffic signs shall be erected immediately prior to the opening of the road to public traffic
unless otherwise decided by the Engineer.
9407 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE

The Contractor shall protect the completed road signs against all damage until the Employer
finally accepts it, and he shall maintain the road signs until the Maintenance Certificate is issued.
Damage or defects caused by faulty workmanship or negligence shall be made good by the
Contractor at his own cost to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
9408 DISMANTLING, STORING AND RE-ERECTING EXISTING ROAD SIGNS

Where ordered by the engineer, the contractor shall dismantle existing road signs, store them,
and re-erect them at new positions indicated. This work shall be done with as little damage as
possible to the signs.
Where required by the engineer, the signs shall be repainted or repaired and new materials shall
be used for part or all of the supporting structure.
Item 94.01 Sign faces with painted background. Symbols, lettering and borders in
Engineering grade retro-reflective material with signboard constructed from:
(Specify material and thickness)
(a) Area not exceeding 2 sq m................................................................square meter (m2)
(b) Area exceeding 2 sq m but not 10 sq m .......................................... square meter (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square meter of completed sign face surface area.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the provision of the completed sign board
face, frame and fixing brackets, including painting, galvanizing if specified, reflective lettering,
symbols, legend and border, and for all other materials and workmanship, brackets, bolts, nuts,
etc., for the completion of the signboard faces as specified.
Item 94.02 Sign supports:

(a) Concrete, Class A............................................................................................ each (ea)
(b) Steel ................................................................................................................ each (ea)
The unit of measurement for supporting structures shall be each support. Bolts and other
accessories shall not be measured.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the erection of the road signs and the
manufacture and erection of the supporting structures, including all bolts, screws, and
accessories, together with painting required.
Item 94.03 Concrete in road sign footings including excavation and backfilling
(class indicated) ................................................................................................cubic meter (m3)
Measurement and payment shall be made as specified in Division 8400.
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of concrete placed measured in place
according to the neat dimensions of the footing as shown on the drawings or directed by the
Engineer.
The tendered rate shall be in full compensation for concreting, excavating, backfilling and
compacting the backfill material, for the disposal of all surplus excavated material.
Item 94.04 Dismantling, storing and re-erecting road signs with a surface area of:
(a) Up to 2m2 ..................................................................................................number (No)
(b) Exceeding 2m2 but not 10m2 ....................................................................number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of signs dismantled, stored and re-erected in each
size group.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for dismantling and storing the road signs and
supporting structures, transporting the material to a new location, re-erecting the road signs, and
restoring the location where they were dismantled.
The tendered rates shall also include full compensation for demolishing the concrete footings of
existing signs to at least 200 mm below the adjacent ground level, disposing of the resulting
debris at approved dumping sites provided by the contractor, and cutting concrete or steel
support structures at not less than 200 mm below the adjacent ground level.
Payment for excavations, and the new material and concrete required for re-erecting the road
signs shall be made under the appropriate item, and any repairs and painting which may be
necessary, shall be paid for as “extra work”. No separate payment shall be made for new bolts
and nuts required for such re-erection, the cost of which shall be included in the rates tendered
above.
Item 94.05 Dismantling and storing road signs with a surface area of:
(a) Up to 2m2 ................................................................................................. number (No)
(b) Exceeding 2m2 ......................................................................................... number (No)
The unit of measurements shall be the number in each size group dismantled and stored.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for carefully dismantling and disassembling
the road signs, loading, transporting, off-loading and carefully stacking all the materials as
required by the engineer. It shall also include compensation for restoring the site where the road
signs have been dismantled.
The tendered rates shall also include full compensation for demolishing the concrete footings of
existing signs to at least 200 mm below the adjacent ground level, disposing of the resulting
debris at approved dumping sites provided by the contractor, and cutting concrete or steel
support structures at not less than 200 mm below the adjacent ground level.
Note:
Concrete, formwork and reinforcing steel for road sign footings shall be measured and paid for
in accordance with the provisions of sections 8200, 8300 and 8400, but such payment items shall
appear under this section in the schedule of quantities.
DIVISION 9500: ROAD TRAFFIC MARKINGS AND ROAD STUDS
9501 SCOPE
This Division covers the permanent marking of the road surface with white or yellow painted
lines or symbols as indicated on the drawings or where required by the Engineer. It also covers
the supply and fixing of retro-reflective road studs.
9502 MATERIALS
(a) Road-Marking Paint

Paint for applying road traffic markings shall be selected from the Ministry’s approved list of
white and yellow road-marking and retro-reflective road marking paints. Project acceptance will
be based on the appearance of an approved brand name on the container label. All paints and
solvents shall conform to Federal air pollution regulations, including those for the control
(emission) of volatile organic compounds (VOC) as established by the designated environmental
protection agency.
The paint shall be delivered to the Site in sealed containers bearing the name of the manufacturer
and the type of paint.
The viscosity of the paint shall be such that it can be applied without thinning.
(b) Retro-reflective road-marking paint

Retro-reflective road-marking paint shall comply with the requirements of subclause 9502 (a)
(c) Thermoplastic road-marking material

Where specified in the project specifications, thermoplastic road-marking material shall comply
with the requirements of AASHTO M249.
(d) Color
The color to be used shall be bright white or yellow.
Beads
Retro-reflective glass beads shall comply with AASHTO M247 Type T.
9503 WEATHER LIMITATIONS

Road marking paint shall not be applied to damp surfaces or when the relative humidity exceeds
80%, or at temperatures lower than 10`C, or when, in the opinion of the Engineer, wind strength
is such that it may adversely affect the painting operations.
9504 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FOR PAINTING

Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer the equipment shall consist of apparatus to clean the
surfaces, a mechanical road painting machine and all additional hand-operating equipment
necessary to complete the work. The mechanical road marking machine shall be capable of
painting at least two lines simultaneously and shall apply the paint to a uniform film thickness at
the rates of application specified hereinafter. The machine shall be so designed that it will be
capable of painting the traffic markings to a uniform width with sides within the tolerances
specified hereinafter, without the paint running or splashing. The machine shall further be
capable of painting lines of different widths by adjustment to the spray jets on the machine or by
means of additional equipment attached to the machine.
9505 SURFACE PREPARATION

Traffic markings shall be applied to bituminous surfaces after sufficient time has elapsed to
ensure that damage will not be caused to the painted surface by volatile substances evaporating
from the bituminous surfacing. In no case shall traffic markings be applied until at least two
weeks after the completion of the bituminous surfacing or any longer period, required by the
Engineer, has expired. Before the paint is applied, the surface shall be clean and dry and
completely free from any soil, grease, oil, acid or any other material which will be detrimental to
the bond between the paint and the surface. The portions of the surface where the paint is to be
applied shall be properly cleaned by means of watering, brooming or compressed air if required.
9506 SETTING OUT OF ROAD TRAFFIC MARKINGS

The lines, symbols, figures or marks shall be set out by means of paint spots of the same color as
the proposed final lines and marks. These spot marks shall be at such intervals as will ensure that
the traffic markings can be accurately applied, and in no case shall they be more than 1.5 m from
each other. Normally spots of approximately 10 mm in diameter should be sufficient.
The dimensions and positions of traffic markings shall be as shown on the drawings or as
specified in the prevailing Traffic Regulations.
After spotting, the positions of the proposed road markings such as dotted lines and starting and
finishing points of barrier lines are to be indicated on the road. The Engineer prior to the
commencement of any painting operations must approve their premarkings.
The positions and outlines of special markings are to be produced on the finished road in chalk
and are to be approved by the Engineer before they are painted. The use of approved templates
will be permissible on the condition that the Engineer approves the positioning of the marking
before painting is commenced.
9507 APPLICATION OF PAINT

Paint shall be applied as figures, signs, letters, symbols, broken or unbroken lines or other marks
as shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer.
Where the paint is applied by means of a machine, it shall be applied in one layer. Before the
road marking machine is used on the permanent works, the satisfactory working of the machine
shall be demonstrated on a suitable site, which is not part of the permanent works. Further
testing shall follow adjustment to the machine. Only when the machine has been correctly
adjusted, and the use thereof approved by the Engineer after testing, may the machine be used on
the permanent work. The operator shall be experienced in the use of the machine.
After the machine itself has been satisfactorily adjusted, the rate of application shall be checked
and adjusted if necessary before application on a large scale is commenced.
Where two or three lines are required next to each other, the lines shall be applied
simultaneously by the same machine. The paint shall be stirred before application in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions. Paint shall be applied without the addition of thinners.
Where painting is done by hand, it shall be applied in two layers, and the second layer shall not
be applied before the first layer has dried out sufficiently. As most road marking paint reacts
with the bitumen surface of the road, the paint is to be applied with only one stroke of the brush
or roller at any one point on the road.
Ordinary road marking paint shall be applied at a nominal rate of 0.42 liter/sq. m, or as directed
by the Engineer.
9508 APPLICATION OF RETRO-REFLECTIVE BEADS

Where retro-reflective paint is required, the retro-reflective glass beads shall be applied by
means of a suitable machine immediately after the application of the paint in one continuous
operation. The rate of application of the beads shall be 0.8 kg/liter paint or such other rate as
may be indicated by the Engineer. Machines, which apply the beads by means of gravity only,
shall not be used. The beads shall be sprayed onto the paint layer.
Upon approval by the Engineer, paint rollers or brushes may be used for marking letters,
symbols, stop bars, short temporary detours or other such areas as directed by the Engineer.
When rollers and brushes are allowed, glass beads shall be applied to the wet paint film at the
specified rate and in a manner suitable to the Engineer.
9509 ROAD STUDS

Road studs shall be of the types indicated on the drawings and shall be fixed in the positions
indicated and approved by the Engineer.
Before fixing, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned as specified in Clause 9505.
The studs shall be fixed to the road surface by means of an approved epoxy resin in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions after the road lines have been completed. Sufficient
adhesive shall be used to give complete coverage of the contact area and to provide a slight
excess. The road studs shall be pressed on the prepared area and all excess adhesives pressed
out. The excess adhesive shall then immediately be removed with a suitable solvent. The studs
shall be protected against impact until the adhesive has hardened.
9510 TOLERANCE REQUIREMENTS

Road traffic markings shall be constructed to an accuracy within the tolerances given below:
(a) Width
The width of the lines and other markings shall not deviate from the specified width by more
than 5%.
(b) Position
The position of letters, figures, arrows, and other markings shall not deviate from the true
position specified by more than 20 mm.
(c) Alignment of Markings

The alignment of any edge or a longitudinal line shall not deviate from the true alignment by
more than 10 mm in 15 m.
(d) Broken Lines

The length of segments of broken longitudinal lines shall not deviate from the specified length
by more than 150 mm.
9511 GENERAL
The broken lines, the length of segments and the gap between segments shall be as indicated on
the drawings. If these lengths are altered by the Engineer, the ratio of the lengths of the painted
section to the length of the gap between painted sections shall remain the same. Lines shall not
be painted more than 3 months prior to opening of the road to public traffic.
Lines on curves, whether broken or unbroken, shall not consist of chords but shall follow the
correct radius.
9512 FAULTY WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIALS

If any material not complying with the requirements is delivered on the Site or used in the
Works, or if any sub-standard work is carried out, such material or work shall be removed,
replaced or repaired as required by the Engineer at the Contractor's own cost. Rejected traffic
markings and paint which has been splashed or dripped on the surfacing, kerbs, structures or
other such surfaces, shall be removed by the Contractor at his own cost, in such a way that the
markings or spilt paint will not show up again later.
9513 PROTECTION
After the application of paint, the traffic markings shall be protected against damage by traffic or
other causes. The Contractor is responsible for the erection, placing, and removal of all warning
boards, flags, cones, barricades, and other protective measures, which may be necessary.
Item 95.01 Paint (specify road marking, retro-reflective road marking and/or
Thermoplastic)
(a) White lines (broken or unbroken) (width of line indicated) ................. kilometre (km)
(b) Yellow lines (broken or unbroken) (width of line indicated)................ kilometre (km)
(c) White lettering and symbols ............................................................ square meter (m2)
The unit of measurement for painting of lines is a kilometer of each specified width of line and
the quantity paid for shall be the actual length of line painted in accordance with the instructions
of the Engineer, including the length of gaps in broken lines.
The unit of measurements for lettering, symbols or traffic island markings is a square meter and
the quantity to be paid for is the actual surface area per square meter measured to the nearest
0.01m2 of lettering, symbols or traffic markings painted in accordance with the drawings or as
The tendered rate per kilometer or per square meter, as the case may be, for the painting of
traffic markings shall include full compensation for the procuring and furnishing of all material
and equipment necessary, including the retro-reflective beads in the case of retro-reflective paint,
and for painting, protection and maintenance as specified, including the setting out of lettering,
symbols and traffic island markings and lines, and control of traffic.
When more than five (5) percent but less than ten (10) percent of the striping varies in position
more than specified in ç510 (c) and (d) above, a pay factor of 0.85 will be applied. Striping
tolerance that fails the above and is allowed to remain in place will be accepted at a reduced
contract unit price based on a pay factor of 0.75.
When paint and reflective beads are not applied at the minimum rates specified, the unit price
will be reduced by the sum of the percentages the paint and beads are deficient. Paint and beads
will not be accepted if they are applied at less than 70% of the contract requirements.
Item 95.02 Variation in rate of application:

(a) White paint......................................................................................................... liter (l)
(b) Yellow paint ....................................................................................................... liter (l)
(c) Glass beads ............................................................................................ kilogram (kg)
The unit of measurement for variation in rate of application of paint and glass beads shall be a
liter and kilogram respectively.
Payments for variations shall be made as specified in the Conditions of Contract.
Item 95.03 Roadstuds (type stated) ................................................................. number (No)

The unit of measurement for roadstuds shall be the actual number of approved roadstuds placed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring and furnishing all the necessary
material, labour and equipment, and for fixing and maintenance as specified. Distinction shall
be made between various types of roadstuds.
DIVISION 9600: LANDSCAPING AND GRASSING
9601 SCOPE
This Division covers the establishment of vegetation on cut and fill slopes and in areas where the
natural vegetation has been cleared or covered.
9602 MATERIALS
(a) Fertilizer
The type of fertilizer to be used shall be one or more of the following as may be specified by the
Engineer:
(i) Urea
(ii) Super phosphate
(iii) Muriate of potash
(b) Grass Cuttings

Grass cuttings shall be fresh cuttings of an approved type of grass with sufficient root material
where required to ensure good growth.
(c) Grass Seed

Only good quality fresh seed shall be used and the types of seed shall be as specified in the
project specification.
(d) Topsoil
Topsoil shall consist of fertile loamy soil, selected from areas showing a good coverage of
natural vegetation preferably grasses. It shall be free from deleterious matter such as large roots,
stones, and refuse, stiff or heavy clays and noxious seeds, which would adversely affect its
suitability for planting grass.
Topsoil shall be obtained wherever suitable material occurs, either in the road reserve from areas
where cuts and fills are to be constructed or from borrow areas to be cleared, as described in
Clause 4202. The Engineer shall indicate to the Contractor his requirements regarding the
quantity of topsoil required and the areas from which it shall be selected and removed. Unless
otherwise specified, topsoil shall be taken from not more than 400 mm from the surface. If the
Contractor fails to conserve topsoil as instructed, he shall obtain suitable substitute material from
other sources at no extra cost to the Employer.
Where so specified, the Contractor shall procure and furnish topsoil from his own sources
outside the Site, such sources to be approved by the Engineer.
Topsoil shall be stockpiled in separate loose heaps as tipped from the trucks and shall not be
stockpiled higher than 3 m. Care shall be exercised to prevent the compaction in any way of
topsoil, especially by trucks travelling over such material.
9603 LANDSCAPING THE AREAS
(a) Shaping
Areas within the road reserve but outside the road prism which require shaping by means of bulk
earthworks such as contoured areas at intersections and rest areas which require earthworks shall
be excavated, filled and compacted when required, and shaped to the correct contours to within a
tolerance of plus or minus 150 mm. Such work shall be regarded as being earthworks and
measurement and payment therefor shall be made under Section 4000 except that quantities may
be measured by means of a grid system of levels taken at 10m intervals before and after shaping
or else it may be determined by leveled cross-sections.
(b) Trimming
Trimming shall consist of trimming the existing or previously shaped ground to an even surface
with the final levels generally following the original surface. It is a requirement that the drainage
remains effective. Trimming shall be done where instructed by the engineer to areas inside the
road reserve but outside the road prism, ie normally outside the tops of cuts or the toes of fills,
but trimming of rock outcrops will not be required.
Trimmed surfaces shall be left slightly rough to facilitate a better binding with topsoil or the
natural establishing of vegetation.
When subsequent grassing is required or when it is ordered by the engineer, areas previously
shaped shall be trimmed as described above to within a tolerance of plus or minus 100 mm with
all undulations following a smooth curve. The above tolerance shall apply only to areas where
the final contours are given on the drawings.
During trimming, all stones in excess of 50 mm in size and all excess material shall be removed.
9604 PREPARATION OF AREAS FOR GRASSING

The areas to be grassed shall be cleared of all loose stone larger than 100 mm. Where directed
by the Engineer topsoil shall be placed and shall be reduced to a fine tilth free of loose stones
larger than 100 mm.
Fertilizer shall be distributed at a rate not less than 75 gm/sq. m, prior to grassing.
9605 GRASSING
Provision is made for the following methods:
(a) Planting of Grass Cuttings

The areas to be planted shall, unless wet, be thoroughly watered before planting to ensure that
soil will be uniformly wet over a depth of at least 150 mm when planting takes place.
Rooted grass cuttings or reed cuttings shall be evenly planted by hand at a spacing between each
cutting of not more than 250 mm in either direction measured on the face of the slope to be
grassed. Only fresh cuttings shall be used and no grass cuttings that have been allowed to dry
out shall be used. Immediately after planting, the grass cuttings shall be given a copious
watering.
(b) Seeding
Seeding can only be carried out after seed has been harvested between the months of June and
August and allowed to lie dormant for a period of at least six months. The Contractor shall make
his own arrangements for the collection of seed. The seed shall be spread on prepared ground as
defined in Subclause 9604 (a) in sufficient quantity to establish an acceptable grass cover as
defined in Subclause 9606 (b).
(c) Topsoiling only

Where, in the opinion of the engineer, the planting of grass or seeding can be dispensed with on
account of favourable climatic and other conditions, the contractor may attempt to establish
grass by topsoiling only. Topsoil shall be selected for the presence of natural grass and seeds
and shall be removed and placed whenever possible at a time that would favor the establishing
of grass. These areas shall be treated with an anti-erosion compound, if so instructed by the
engineer. Fertilizing shall be done as specified in clause 9604;
After the topsoil has been placed, it shall be lightly rolled and well watered, and afterwards
watered and mown whenever instructed by the engineer.
The contractor will not be held responsible for establishing an acceptable grass cover as defined
in subclause 9606(b) when this procedure is followed, but will be responsible for the
consequences of any omission to water or mow or weed the grass as instructed by the engineer.
No payment for grassing shall be made other than for placing topsoil, providing and applying
fertilizers and for watering, mowing and weeding the grass, which will be paid for at the
tendered rates. For any replanting of grass on bare patches, repairs caused by erosion, and
similar work, the contractor will be paid for as a variation in terms of clause 40 of the general
conditions of contract.
(d) The grassing of borrow pits, temporary deviations, camp sites, access roads and
stockpile sites
Prior to any grassing that may be required on such areas, the finishing-off of borrow pits as
described under clause 4304, obliterating the temporary deviations and access roads, and the
clearing of camp sites as described in the Conditions of Contract, shall have been carried out as
specified in the relevant sections.
9606 ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE OF THE GRASS
(a) Watering, Weeding, Cutting and Replanting

All planted areas shall be adequately watered at frequent and regular intervals in order to ensure
proper germination of seeds and growth of grass until the grass has established an acceptable
cover and, thereafter, until the beginning of the Maintenance Period of the grass. The amount
and frequency of watering shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. Watering shall commence
and continue as soon as the seeds have germinated and growth begins.
Weeds shall be controlled by means of pulling, cutting or any other approved means. Any bare
patches where the grass has not taken or where it has been damaged or dried up, shall be
recultivated and planted at the Contractor's own expense.
All grassed areas shall have acceptable cover as defined below at both the beginning and the end
of the Maintenance Period indicated in Subclause 9606 (c).
(b) Acceptable Cover

An acceptable grass cover shall mean that not less than 75% of the area planted or seeded shall
be covered with grass and that there shall be no bare patches of more than 500 mm in maximum
dimension.
(c) Maintenance Period

The Maintenance Period of grass shall commence when an acceptable cover, as defined in (b)
above, has been established and shall be one year. This means that the Maintenance Period for
grass can commence earlier or later than the Maintenance Period for other portions of the
Contract.
If the Maintenance Period for grass expires before the end of the Maintenance Period for the
other roadworks, the Contractor shall further mow the grass on such areas as instructed by the
Engineer up to the end of the Period of Maintenance for the main roadworks.
9607 GENERAL
(a) Time of Planting

The planting of grass shall be carried out as far as practicable during periods most likely to
produce beneficial results. The Contractor shall make every effort to program his operations in
such a manner that this is done as far as possible.
(b) Traffic on Grassed Areas

The Contractor shall not plant grass until all operations, that may require road building
equipment to be taken over grassed areas, have been completed. No road building equipment,
trucks or water carts shall be allowed on areas that have been grassed and only equipment
required for the preparation of areas, application of fertilizer and spreading of topsoil will be
allowed to operate on areas to be grassed.
(c) Erosion Control

During construction, the Contractor shall protect all areas susceptible to erosion by installing all
necessary temporary and permanent drainage works as soon as possible, and by taking such
other measures as may be necessary to prevent the concentration of surface water and scouring
of slopes, banks and other areas.
Any runnels or erosion channels developing during the Period of Construction or during the
Period of Maintenance shall be backfilled and consolidated and the areas restored to their proper
condition. The Contractor shall not allow erosion to develop on a large scale before effecting
repairs and all erosion damage shall be repaired as soon as possible and, in any case, not later
than three months before the termination of the Period of Maintenance. All topsoil or other
material accumulated in side drains shall be removed at the same time. Topsoil washed away
shall be replaced.
(d) Responsibility for Establishing an Acceptable Cover

The Contractor shall be solely responsible for establishing an acceptable grass cover and for the
cost of replanting where acceptable cover is not obtained.
Where, however, in the opinion of the Contractor, it is doubtful from the outset if it will be
possible to establish an acceptable cover, he may inform the Engineer of his reasons, therefore,
and the Engineer shall, if he agrees, either allow the Contractor to adopt another method of
grassing or agree to accept whatever cover can be obtained, provided that all reasonable efforts
are made to establish a good cover using the method proposed.

The engineer shall be entitled to pay for shaping and trimming as described above on the basis of
hourly plant rates. Any labor or other plant required shall be paid for as a variation as specified
in clause 40 of the general conditions of contract.
Item 96.01 Stockpiling of Topsoil ......................................................... cubic meter (cu m)

The unit of measurement for stockpiling of topsoil shall be the cubic meter of topsoil stockpiled
on instructions from the Engineer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the excavation, loading, transporting, and
stockpiling in a condition suitable for later use.
Item 96.02 Preparation of areas for grassing:

(a) Topsoiling........................................................................................cubic meter (cu m)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of topsoil applied at the specified thickness or
as directed by the Engineer, measured in situ after the topsoil has been placed. The quantity shall
be calculated from the net area of the surface topsoil multiplied by the average thickness of the
topsoil. Any topsoil placed in excess of the average thickness specified or ordered will not be
measured.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for excavating from stockpile or original
ground, transport, offloading, placing and spreading it to the required thickness, leveling it off to
a smooth surface, for removing any stones as specified, and for roughening the surface to be top
soiled.
(b) Provide and apply chemical fertilizers (type) .......................................................... ton (t)
The unit of measurement of fertilizer shall be the ton of each type of fertilizer ordered and
applied.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for furnishing the fertilizer, transporting it to
the point of use, spreading and mixing it into the soil or topsoil.
Item 96.03 Grassing:

(a) Planting of grass cuttings ........................................................................... hectare (ha)
The unit of measurement for planting of grass cuttings shall be the hectare.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for furnishing and planting the cuttings, for
watering, weeding, replanting if necessary, and all other incidentals that may be required to
establish an acceptable cover and maintain the grass, except mowing.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, plant, and other
incidentals. Topsoiling will be paid for separately under Item 96.02.
(b) Seeding....................................................................................................... hectare (ha)
The unit of measurement for seeding shall be the hectare.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring and furnishing the seeds,
applying the seed, watering, weeding, reseeding bare patches, and for any other work, which
may be necessary to establish acceptable cover and maintain the grass.
Half of the payments under this Item shall become due when the grassing or seeding has been
carried out, and the remainder will become due when satisfactory cover has been established.
DIVISION 9700: PAINTING OF STEEL
9701 SCOPE
This Division covers the preparation of steelwork to receive protective coatings and the
application of those coatings. This applies not only to new steelwork but also to the repair of
damaged coatings and those, which are breaking down.
9702 GENERAL.
(a) Specifications
Raw materials for the paints shall conform to the requirements of the specifications listed below:
Alkyd resin solution, Federal TT -R-266, Type 1 or Type II.
Aluminum paste, ASTM D 962, Type 2, Class B
Anti-skinning agent shall be tested in accordance with Federal TestStd.No.141a.Method3021
Barium sulphate pigment. ASTM D 602
Basic lead silico-chromate, ASTM D1648
Chrome Oxide green. ASTM D 263
Chrome yellow pigment and paste, ASTM 0 211, Type III
Liquid drier, ASTM D 600
Mineral spirits, ASTM D 235
Raw Linseed oil, ASTM D 234
Red iron oxide, ASTM D3721, D3722 & D3724
Red lead pigment and paste, ASTM D 83, 97 percent grade.
Turpentine, ASTM D13
Zinc oxide and paste, ASTM D 79
(b) Paint formula

All paints shall be made from materials meeting the requirements specified in (d) above.
The formulas are stated in terms of dry pigment.
(i) Formula A-3-71 -Red Lead Sealing Paste

Red Lead (dry pigment) 88.5 %
Raw Linseed ail 8.5 %
Nonleafing Aluminum Paste 9%
Weight per US gallon 36.0 pounds
Drying Time 24 hours
(ii) Formula A-4-90 -Phenolic Red Lead Primer

The primer shall meet the requirements of Federal Specification TT -P-86, Type IV
(iii) Formula A-5-61 -Vinyl Pretreatment

The primer shall meet the requirements of Federal Specification MIL-P-15328B or MIL-P-
15328C, Primer Pretreatment Formula 117B for Metals. The wash primer coat shall be spray
applied at a coverage rate of 250 to 300 square feet per US gallon to yield a dry film of 0.5 to 0.9
mils thickness.
(iv) Formula A-6-86 Zinc Oust Zinc Oxide Primer

The primer shall meet the requirements of Federal Specification TT-P-641
(v) Formula A-9-73 Galvanizing Repair Paint. High Zinc Dust Content
The primer shall meet the requirements of Federal Specification MIL-P-21035
(vi) Formula A-1 0-83 Vinyl Read Lead Primer

The primer shall meet the requirements of Federal Specification MIL-P-23281
(vii) Formula B-4-90 Phenolic First Field Coat for Steel

The phenolic first field coat shall meet the requirements of Federal Specification TT -P-86, Type
IV
(viii) Formula B-7-70 First Field Coal for Steel (Basic Lead Sillico Chromate)
The paint shall meet the requirements of Federal Specification TT -P-615, Type Il. Other than
color, the characteristics of the B- 7-70 shall be the same as listed for A-7-70.
9703 SURFACE PREPARATION-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) Before blast cleaning or abrading steel surfaces or before overcoating painted surfaces,
contamination by oil or grease shall be removed by wet cleaning the affected areas as described
in Clause 9704.
(b) Clean water, which does not leave harmful residues on the surface, shall be used for
cleaning and rinsing.
(c) Cleaning agents approved by the Engineer shall be used.
(d) Surface preparation shall be continued until the standard described in the Contract has
been achieved.
(e) Weld spatter shall be removed from accessible areas, which are to be painted. Firmly
adhering weld spatter in the heat affected zone shall be removed before blast cleaning.
(f) After dry surface preparation of surfaces and before any wet cleaning ail dust and debris
shall be removed tram accessible areas by sweeping and vacuum cleaning.
(g) Immediately before application of each coat of paint, the contractor shall ensure that the
surfaces:
(i) meet the standard of preparation described in the Contract.
(ii) are free from harmful residues, including dust, grit and paint degradation
products.
(iii) are free from detrimental contamination.

(iv) are free from moisture detrimental to the coating to be applied.
(h) Coats of paint shall be free from embedded metallic or other foreign particles including
metallic dust. Deposits of adherent matter shall be cleaned off immediately they occur. Coatings
damaged in the process shall be restored.
9704 SURFACE PREPARATION-MATERIALS AND METHODS

Abrading on site
(a) Any encrusted foreign matter or paint, which may be difficult to remove by abrading
alone, shall with the Engineer's approval be dislodged by scraping, aided by hand or power wire-
brushing. The work shall be completed before abrading the areas so affected.
(b) Abrading shall be carried out using abrasive paper or other material or a flexible
abrasive disc mounted on a power- driven flexible pad. Abrading tools may be used to remove
weld spatter. Wet abrading may be employed for the preparation of finishes over sound
undercoats.
(c) A burnished appearance caused by polishing in of paint, rust or dirt will not be
acceptable.
(d) Areas of previously corroded steel which have been prepared by abrading down to
bright steel and blast cleaned where appropriate, shall be protected by the primer before any
cleaning down or preparation of adjacent surfaces.
(e) Wet Cleaning on Site
Wet cleaning shall be carried out by scrubbing with a stiff-bristled brush using water and a
cleaning agent. Immediately after cleaning, the surfaces shall be thoroughly rinsed.
(f) Dry Cleaning on Site
Surfaces shall be cleaned by scrubbing with a dry stiff-bristled brush.
(g) Dry Blast Cleaning on Site
The Contractor shall ensure that the grade of non metallic abrasives is adequate for the purpose
intended. Non-metallic abrasives shall not be recycled.
9705 PROCEDURES FOR TREATMENT AT AREAS OF MECHANICAL DAMAGE OR OTHER

SURFACE DEFECTS
(a) Score marks and indentations in the surface of a steel substrate shall be treated by
abrading or grinding to bright steel to produce a surface without sharp edges or abrupt change in
contour. Damage to unprepared surfaces shall be treated before blast cleaning. Other surface
defects in the steel substrate, including fissures caused by the removal of 'hackles' or inclusions
shall be similarly treated subject to the approval of the Engineer.
(b) In the case of damage to paint coatings only, surface preparation shall be by abrading or
other method agreed with the Engineer. The paint coatings shall then be restored.
(c) In all cases where paint coats only are to be restored, the edges of paint coatings
adjacent to the affected area shall be beveled back into sound paint. This work shall be carried
out before any final blast cleaning.
(d) On site, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, overcoating shall be started
immediately after surface preparation of the affected area and continued as soon as each coat is
dry enough for overcoating.
9706 PROCEDURES FOR TREATMENT OF LOCAL FAILURE IN PROTECTIVE COATINGS

(a) On site failed paint coatings shall be restored except that abrading down to sound paint
or bright steel and blast cleaning to clean steel, 2nd quality are permissible methods of surface
preparation when restoring paint systems over a steel substrate.
(b) In all cases of local failure, the extent of the failure shall be agreed with the Engineer.
Restoration of protective coatings shall not be started until the standard of surface preparation,
including the cleanliness of the surface has been passed as satisfactory by the Engineer.
9707 WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS FOR THE SURFACE PREPARATION OF STEEL BY BLAST

CLEANING, ABRADING, GRINDING AND CLEANING
(a) Blast cleaned surfaces shall be virtually free from sharp spikes of parent metal defined
as 'rogue peaks' formed by the impact of abrasive particles and which project above the blast
cleaning profile. Any 'rogue peaks' which in the opinion of the Engineer would be detrimental to
the protective system shall be removed.
(b) 'Hackles' and inclusions caused by the rolling process, visible after blast cleaning,
which in the opinion of the Engineer would be detrimental to the protective system, shall be
removed. Affected surfaces shall be prepared by grinding or abrading to bright steel in
accordance with clause 9704. Sharp edges shall be rounded.
(c) Steel surfaces to be prepared by any of the methods described in the Contract shall be
such that after surface preparation the surfaces shall be free from detrimental contamination.
(d) Surface preparation by blast cleaning shall be to one or more of the following standards
of visual cleanliness:
(i) 'Clean steel' 1st Quality
Appearance:
There shall be a blast cleaning pattern overall. The surface profile shall be free from
mill scale, rust and foreign matter when viewed through a X10 illuminated magnifying
glass of a type approved by the Engineer.
(ii) 'Clean steel' 2nd Quality
Appearance:
There shall be a blast cleaning pattern overall. The surface profile shall be free from
mill scale, rust and foreign matter when viewed by normal vision.
(iii) 'Bare steel' (blast cleaned or abraded)
Appearance
The surface shall be tree trom ail rust scale, loose rugI and 100SE mill scale.
(e) After surface preparation by blast cleaning to 1st or 2nd quality the surface profile shall
be virtually free from embedded abrasive particles when viewed through a X10 magnifying glass
of a type approved by the Engineer. Surfaces assessed as unsatisfactory shall be blast cleaned
again with fresh abrasive.
(f) 'Harmful Residues' or 'detrimental contamination':
Surfaces shall be deemed to be free from harmful residues' or 'detrimental contamination' after
surface preparation when in the opinion of the Engineer, any remaining matter will not reduce
the required durability of the specified protective system.
(g) 'Bright steel':
Surfaces free from defects or prepared to this standard by grinding or abrading shall have an
overall bright appearance.
9708 PAINT AND SIMILAR PROTECTIVE COATINGS

(a) All paints shall be supplied in sealed containers of no more than 5 litters capacity and
these shall be used in the order of delivery. Each container shall be clearly marked on the side to
show the name of the manufacturer, registered description of the material (including purpose,
e.g. whether primer, undercoat or finish), color, batch number and date of manufacture.
(b) The contractor shall ensure that the properties of the paints he has selected are suitable
for the conditions on site including temperature and humidity, and that he is able to apply the
paints satisfactorily to all parts of the structure in these conditions.
(c) Unless otherwise described in the Contract, all paints forming any one protective
system shall be obtained from the same manufacturer.
9709 STORAGE REQUIREMENTS AND KEEPING PERIODS FOR PAINTS

(a) On delivery to the site, paint shall be unloaded directly into a secure paint store.
Ventilation shall be provided as necessary to maintain the temperature of the paint store between
5 and 27 degrees centigrade. If at any time or place paint in tins or painters kettles is allowed to
reach temperatures outside these limits, the paint shall be discarded and not used in the Works.
(b) Paint which has not been used within 12 months of the date of manufacture or the shelf
life recommended by the manufacturer shall be discarded and not used in the Works.
9710 APPLICATION OF PAINT

(a) Paint shall be supplied from the Contractor's paint store to the painters ready for
application, the only adjustment of formulation being as permitted by the Engineer. Any addition
of solvent shall be made in the store in the presence of the Engineer, and shall not exceed 5% by
volume of the paint.
(b) Paint shall be applied only to surfaces, which have been prepared and cleaned as
described in this series.
(c) A coat of paint in a system shall be applied by brush or approved spray system.
(d) Paint shall not be applied under the following conditions:
(i) when the relative humidity rises above 90%.
(ii) during rain, mist or in a dust laden atmosphere.
(iii) when the amount of moisture likely to be deposited on the surface by
condensation or rain before or after painting may have a harmful effect on the paint.
(iv) when wind borne dust may have a harmful effect on the paint.
(e) The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with details of the overall wet film thickness
for each coat he proposes to apply. He shall also provide information as to the total amount of
paint he expects to use for each coat of paint. The calculation of the amount of paint to be used
shall be based on the volume solids plus an allowance for waste.
(f) The following requirements on paint film thickness shall apply:
(i) Wet film thickness gauges shall be used where practicable to check that the wet
film thickness is not less than:
min dry film thickness(mdft) × 100
volume solids %
(ii) During the application of a paint system the Contractor shall ensure that the
progressive total thickness of the applied coats will allow the specified minimum total
dft of the system to be attained without exceeding overall, the proposed wet film
thickness referred to in sub-clause (e) of this clause by more than 20%.
(iii) The local dry film thickness for any primer shall not exceed the specified mdft by
more than 30% and for other paints by more than 75%.
(g) Each coat of paint of a specified system at whatever thickness applied shall be virtually
free from surface defects, particularly crating, pin-holing, blistering, rivaling, sagging, bittiness,
dry spray and cissing. The finished system shall have an even and uniform appearance.
(g) All successive coats in a system including the stripe coats shall be in contrasting colors
to aid identification.
(h) Stripe Coats.
Unless otherwise described in the Contract two stripe coats shall be applied to all welds and to
all external corners. The first stripe coat shall be applied over the primer or sealer, the second
stripe coat, in second or third undercoat paint, shall be applied before the last undercoat of the
complete system.
(i) Exposure Times for Prepared Steel Surfaces and overcoating Times for Paints.
Clean steel prepared by blast cleaning or bright steel prepared by abrading or by grinding shall
be primed within 4 hours.
(j) Prepared steel surfaces which have been restored shall be overcoated with the primer or
first undercoat as appropriate before the surfaces have been affected by moisture and in any case
within 4 hours.
(k) Steel surfaces, which have been primed or sealed on site shall have the following coat
applied within 7 days, the next coat shall be applied within a further 14 days, or such lesser time
recommended by the paint manufacturer.
9711 PROCEDURE TRIALS

(a) Unless otherwise described in the Contract, the Contractor shall carry out site procedure
trials with the labor and equipment to be used for the work. The trial area shall be at least 1
square meter. The contractor shall demonstrate his ability to carry out blast cleaning and to apply
the paints he has selected.
(b) Painting of the main steelwork shall not be started until procedure trials have been
completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(c) Any adjustment to the paint formulation shown to be required by the trials, other than
an adjustment to the solvent, shall be agreed with the Engineer.
Item 97.01 Preparation of steelwork prior to coating

(a) Preparation of bare metal surfaces ......................................................................... (m2)
(b) Preparation of existing metal surfaces ................................................................... (m2)
The measurement shall be the net surface area to be treated. The items for preparation shall
include for the provision and preparation of specimen panels demonstrating the preparation of
steelwork, and cleaning and preparing surfaces to be painted including the provision of
materials, plant, and power and hand tools.
Item 97.02 Protective system to steelwork

(a) Protective system to bare metal surfaces ............................................................... (m2)
(b) Protective system to existing steelwork ................................................................. (m2)
The measurement shall be the net surface area to be treated.
The tendered rate shall include for making good any damage or defect in the surface to be
treated and in the finished surface. complying with any special requirements in respect of
ambient conditions for the application of protective treatment and for intervals between
successive operations and applications, preparing materials for application in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations, painting of steelwork under cover and everything
necessary to facilitate the painting of steelwork on Site, and obtaining the correct dry film
thickness of paint and providing an Elcometer to prove this to the Engineer's satisfaction.
DIVISION 9800: FENCING
9801 SCOPE
This work consists of constructing fences and gates. It also covers the moving of existing fences
where necessary and the erection of new fences along the boundaries of the road reserve where
so indicated on the drawings or directed by the Engineer.
It shall also include the erection and later removal of temporary fences to prevent animals
straying onto temporary bypasses or onto the road itself. Except when the Engineer allows
otherwise, new fences as well as temporary fences shall be erected before construction of a
particular portion of the road commences or before temporary bypasses are open to traffic.
This Division also covers the dismantling of existing fences and the stacking of the fencing
material.
9802 MATERIALS
(a) Posts, strays, standards and droppers

Posts, strays and standards shall be of the type and size indicated on the drawings. Wooden
posts shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M168 or BS 1722. Timber posts shall be
treated at the Engineer's option with either creosote or copper chrome arsenate, the latter
preservative not to be used in the case of hardwoods.
(b) Bolts for strays

Bolts shall be galvanized steel bolts of the required length and diameter, which shall not be less
than 12 mm. All the necessary bolts, together with nuts and washers, shall be supplied with each
post.
(c) Barbed wire

Barbed wire shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M 280 or BS 1722 and shall be
mild steel grade double strand uni-directional twist wire, each strand 2.50 mm diameter, for use
at any height above ground. The wire shall be galvanized.
Barbs shall be manufactured from 2.0 mm (12 1/2 gage) galvanized wire and shall be spaced at
no more than 150 mm.
(d) Gates
Gates shall be manufactured to the dimensions shown in the drawings or specified in the Bill of
Quantities.
Gates shall be complete in every respect including hinges, washers, bolts and locking chain
attached to the gate.
(e) Timber posts

Timber posts for holding down mats where the fence crosses streams, shall comply with the
requirements AASHTO M280 or BS 1722 and shall be creosote impregnated.
(f) Manufacturing tolerances for wire

The actual diameter of wire supplied shall nowhere be less than the specified diameters by more
than the following tolerances:
Specified diameter Tolerance

1.0 - 1.8 mm 0.05 mm
2.0 - 2.8 mm 0.08 mm
3.15 - 4.0 mm 0.10 mm
9803 TYPES OF FENCING

The fencing shall be erected in accordance with the dimensions shown on the drawings.
Where existing fences have to be dismantled and re-erected, they should be re-erected either to
the same design as originally constructed with such modifications as the Engineer may require
or they shall be erected to one of the standards specified above, all as ordered by the Engineer.
9804 PROTECTION OF LIVESTOCK

From the time of the occupancy of the site until the date of the final maintenance certificate the
Contractor shall take all measures necessary for the protection and control of livestock, etc., on
the sections of the properties affected by his operations. He shall provide gates in existing fences
cut by him for the purpose of access and shall ensure that all gates are kept closed during such
time as they are not actually in use by his traffic.
Where alternative arrangements cannot be made the Engineer may direct the contractor to erect
temporary fencing where necessary to protect livestock exposed to straying through his opera-
tions. Such fencing shall be of adequate standard and shall be erected ahead of construction
operations. The fencing shall be maintained in good order during construction operations and on
completion of the work it shall be removed from Site and all surfaces restored. The Engineer
may order that any permanent fencing which is required be erected ahead of construction
operations, where this is practicable, in lieu of the erection of temporary fencing.
Payment for the protection of livestock excluding the erection of temporary fences shall be
included in the amount tendered for the Contractors Establishment on Site as specified in
Division 1300.
9805 CLEARING OF FENCE LINE

The fence line shall be cleared over a width of at least 1 m on each side of the center line of the
fence and surface irregularities shall be graded so that the fence will follow the general contour
of the ground. Clearing shall include the removal of all scrub, stumps, isolated loose boulders or
stones and other obstructions, which will interfere with proper construction of the fence. The
bottom of the fence shall be located a uniform distance above the ground line in accordance with
the requirements shown on the drawings. All material removed shall be burnt or disposed of in
disused borrow pits.
Any area outside the road reserve, where clearing is not permitted by the owner or is not
practicable, shall not be cleared if so directed by the Engineer.
9806 INSTALLING POSTS AND STANDARDS

Straining posts shall be erected at all ends, corners, and bends in the line of fences and at all
junctions with other fences. Straining posts shall not be spaced further apart than shown on the
drawings. The length of posts above ground shall be such that the correct clearance between the
lowest wire and the ground can be obtained.
Posts shall be accurately set in holes and where shown on the drawings provided with concrete
bases to the dimensions shown on the drawings.
Corner, gate, end, and straining posts shall be braced by means of strays or anchors as shown on
the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Gateposts shall not be used as straining posts but at
each gatepost a straining post shall be placed as shown on the drawings and stayed.
Standards shall be firmly anchored into the ground at the spacing shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. The spacing of standards between any two straining posts shall be
uniform and not greater than shown on the drawings. In rock or hard material standards shall be
either driven or set in holes drilled into the rock. The size of drilled holes shall be such that a
tight fit is obtained. Care shall be exercised when driving standards to prevent buckling or
damaging them.
All posts and standards shall be accurately aligned and set plumb. After posts and standards have
been firmly set in accordance with the foregoing requirements, the fence wire shall be attached
thereto at the spacing shown on the drawings.
9807 INSTALLING WIRE

All fencing wire shall be wired to the sides of standards or posts to prevent the wires from being
displaced or becoming loose. The wire shall be carefully stretched and hung without sag, and
with true alignment, care being exercised not to stretch the wire so tightly that it will break, or
that end corner, straining or gate posts will be pulled up.
Each strand of fencing wire shall be securely fastened in the correct position to each standard
with soft galvanized binding wire. The binding wire for each horizontal fence wire shall pass
through a hole or notch in the standard to prevent slipping of the fence wire in a vertical
direction, while the ends of the wire shall be wound at least four times around the fencing wire
to prevent it moving in a vertical direction.
At end, corner, straining and gate posts the fencing wire shall be securely wrapped twice around
the posts and secured against slipping by tying the end tightly around the wire by means of at
least six snug tight twists.
9808 CLOSING OPENINGS UNDER FENCES

At ditches, streams, drainage channels or other hollows where it is not possible to erect the fence
so that it follows the general contour of the ground, the Contractor shall close the opening under
the fence by means of horizontal barbed wires at distances of 150 mm from each other, stretched
between additional posts or straining posts as shown on the drawings or directed by the
Engineer.
9809 EXISTING FENCES

Where a new fence joins an existing fence whether in line or at an angle, the new fence shall be
erected with a new straining post positioned at the terminal of the existing fence.
Existing fences that are required to be taken down or moved to a new location shall be
dismantled. Material not required for re- erection or declared unsuitable for re-use shall be neatly
stacked at approved locations in accordance with the Engineer's instructions. Fencing wire or
netting shall be stacked clear of the ground.
In the case of fences that require moving the Contractor shall re-use all material, declared
suitable for this purpose by the Engineer, plus such new materials as may be required to re- erect
the fence to the standard specified for new fences. The Engineer shall not be responsible for any
delays or costs arising from breakage of reused wire during straining.
9810 INSTALLING GATES

Gates shall be installed at the positions indicated by the Engineer. The gates shall be hung on
gate fittings in accordance with the requirements shown on the drawings. Gates shall be so
erected as to swing in a horizontal plane at right angles to the gateposts, clear of the ground in all
positions. At pedestrian and security fences the double swing gates shall not leave a gap of more
than 25 mm between them when closed and other gates shall not be further than 25 mm from the
gate post when closed.

Fencing, either new or repositioned, shall be placed alongside the new road reserve in areas
where any existing fence will be removed or disturbed by the Works.
The completed fence shall be plumb, taut, true to line and ground contour, with all posts,
standards, and strays firmly set. The height of the lower fencing wire above the ground at posts
and standard shall not vary from that shown on the drawings by more than 25 mm. Other fencing
wires shall not vary by more than 10 mm from their prescribed relative vertical positions.
Where temporary fences are erected they shall be firm and of sufficient height with a sufficient
number of wires to prevent the passage of stock.
The Contractor shall, on completion of each section of fence, remove all cut-offs and other loose
wire or netting so as not to create a hazard to grazing animals or a nuisance to the owners of the
ground.
Item 98.01 Fencing .........................................................................................kilometer (km)

The unit of measurement for the kilometer of fence line completed, measured along each fence
line.
The tendered rate shall be in full compensation for the clearing of the fence line as specified,
procuring, furnishing, placing and fixing all materials including posts standards and barbed wire.
Item 98.02 New gate (size and type indicated)................................................ number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of new gates erected.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the procuring and furnishing of all
materials, including gates, gate posts, hinges, bolts, concrete and straining wire, and the erection
of the gates as specified and as shown on the drawings. It shall not include for any fencing wire
erected on the gate.
Item 98.03 Moving of existing fences and gates:

(a) Fences ................................................................................................... kilometre (km)
(b) Moving of gates. ..................................................................................... .number (No)
The unit of measurement for moving existing fences shall be the kilometer of fence and the
quantity shall be taken as the length of fence which is permanently erected using material arising
from fences which have been dismantled elsewhere. The unit of measurement for moving of
gates is the number of gates moved.
The tendered rate for each kilometer of existing fence moved, or for each existing gate moved
shall include full compensation for dismantling old fence, coiling and stacking of material not
suitable for reuse, moving of all material, including posts and wire and the re-erection of the
fence or gate in the new position and the provision of binding, tying and straining wire.
The tendered rate for each gate moved shall include full compensation for taking down the gate
and re-erecting it where required including all new bolts, nuts and other accessories required but
excluding new gate posts.

S.S Standard Technical Specification PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

S.S Standard Technical Specification PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Series 1000 GENERAL

Series 2000 SITE CLEARANCE

Series 3000 DRAINAGE

Series 4000 EARTHWORKS

SUBBASE, ROAD BASE AND GRAVEL WEARING

BITUMINOUS SURFACINGS AND ROAD BASES

Series 7000 RIGID PAVEMENTS

Series 8000 STRUCTURES

Series 9000 ANCILLARY WORKS

TESTING MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

Ministry of Roads and Transport

This specification reflects current international practice appropriately modified to take

1. Geometric Design Manual

Page ii Ministry of Roads and Transport

Revisions and corrections

Ministry of Roads and Transport

Series 1000 GENERAL

Page iv Ministry of Roads and Transport

SERIES 1000: GENERAL

LIST OF TABLES AND FIGURES ..................................................................................................5

DIVISION 1100 : TERMS AND DEFINITIONS ..............................................................................6

DIVISION 1200: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROVISIONS ...............................................20

DIVISION 1300: CONTRACTOR'S ESTABLISHMENT ON SITE .................................................31

Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS) Page 1000-1

(c) Electricity Supply.................................................................................................. 31

DIVISION 1400: ACCOMMODATION, SERVICES, AND ATTENDANCE FOR THE ENGINEER'S

DIVISION 1500: TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT .............................................................................. 63

Page1000-2 Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS)

(e) Public services .......................................................................................................64

DIVISION 1600: ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND MITIGATION MEASURES ..................74

1605 Prevention of Water Pollution........................................................................................ 77

DIVISION 1700: OVERHAUL ................................................................................................... 82

Page1000-4 Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS)

LIST OF TABLES AND FIGURES

Figure 1 Terms and Definitions for Road Cross Section Elements.........................................18

Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS) Page 1000-5

DIVISION 1100: TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

1102 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

Page1000-6 Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS)

Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS) Page 1000-7

Page1000-8 Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS)

Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS) Page 1000-9

Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS) Page 1000-11

Page1000-12 Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS)

Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS) Page 1000-13

Page1000-14 Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS)

Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS) Page 1000-15

Page1000-16 Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS)

Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS) Page 1000-17

Figure 1 Terms and Definitions for Road Cross Section Elements

Roadbed (Existing Sub-grade (Bottom

Figure 2 Terms and Definitions for Flexible Pavement Structure

Page1000-18 Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS)

Figure 3 Terms and Definitions for Rigid Pavement Structure

Sub-grade Separation layer

Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS) Page 1000-19

DIVISION 1200: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROVISIONS

1202 WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY CONTROL

1203 APPROVAL OF COMPLETED WORKS

1204 SETTING OUT OF WORK AND PROTECTION OF SURVEY MONUMENTS

Page1000-20 Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS)

Ministry of Roads and Transport (GOSS) Page 1000-21